Ansys Structural Analysis Guide

ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide
ANSYS Release 9.0
002114 November 2004
ANSYS, Inc. is a UL registered ISO 9001: 2000 Company.

ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide
ANSYS Release 9.0
ANSYS, Inc. Southpointe 275 Technology Drive Canonsburg, PA 15317

ansysinfo@ansys.com http://www.ansys.com (T) 724-746-3304 (F) 724-514-9494
Copyright and Trademark Information
Copyright © 2004 SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use, distribution
or duplication is prohibited. ANSYS, DesignSpace, CFX, DesignModeler,
DesignXplorer, ANSYS Workbench environment, AI*Environment, CADOE and any and all
ANSYS, Inc. product names referenced on any media, manual or the like, are
registered trademarks or trademarks of subsidiaries of ANSYS, Inc. located in the
United States or other countries. ICEM CFD is a trademark licensed by ANSYS, Inc.
All other trademarks and registered trademarks are property of their respective
owners. ANSYS, Inc. is a UL registered ISO 9001: 2000 Company. ANSYS Inc. products
may contain U.S. Patent No. 6,055,541. Microsoft, Windows, Windows 2000 and
Windows XP are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Inventor and
Mechanical Desktop are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc. SolidWorks is a
registered trademark of SolidWorks Corporation. Pro/ENGINEER is a registered
trademark of Parametric Technology Corporation. Unigraphics, Solid Edge and
Parasolid are registered trademarks of Electronic Data Systems Corporation (EDS).
ACIS and ACIS Geometric Modeler are registered trademarks of Spatial Technology,
Inc. FLEXlm License Manager is a trademark of Macrovision Corporation. This ANSYS,
Inc. software product and program documentation is ANSYS Confidential Information
and are furnished by ANSYS, Inc. under an ANSYS software license agreement that
contains provisions concerning non-disclosure, copying, length and nature of use,
warranties, disclaimers and remedies, and other provisions. The Program and
Documentation may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of that
license agreement. See the ANSYS, Inc. online documentation or the ANSYS, Inc.
documentation CD for the complete Legal Notice. If this is a copy of a document
published by and reproduced with the permission of ANSYS, Inc., it might not
reflect the organization or physical appearance of the original. ANSYS, Inc. is
not liable for any errors or omissions introduced by the copying process. Such
errors are the responsibility of the party providing the copy.
Table of Contents
1. Overview of Structural Analyses
..................................................................................
....................... 1–1 1.1. Definition of Structural Analysis
..................................................................................
.................. 1–1 1.2. Types of Structural Analysis
..................................................................................
......................... 1–1 1.3. Elements Used in Structural Analyses
..................................................................................
.......... 1–2 1.4. Material Model Interface
..................................................................................
............................. 1–2 1.5. Types of Solution Methods
..................................................................................
.......................... 1–2 2. Structural Static Analysis
..................................................................................
.................................. 2–1 2.1. Definition of Static Analysis
..................................................................................
......................... 2–1 2.2. Linear vs. Nonlinear Static Analyses
..................................................................................
............. 2–1 2.3. Performing a Static Analysis
..................................................................................
........................ 2–1 2.3.1. Build the Model
..................................................................................
................................. 2–1 2.3.1.1. Points to Remember
..................................................................................
.................. 2–1 2.3.2. Set Solution Controls
..................................................................................
.......................... 2–2 2.3.2.1. Access the Solution Controls Dialog Box
...................................................................... 2–2
2.3.2.2. Using the Basic Tab
..................................................................................
................... 2–2 2.3.2.3. The Transient Tab
..................................................................................
...................... 2–3 2.3.2.4. Using the Sol'n Options Tab
..................................................................................
....... 2–4 2.3.2.5. Using the Nonlinear Tab
..................................................................................
............ 2–4 2.3.2.6. Using the Advanced NL Tab
..................................................................................
....... 2–5 2.3.3. Set Additional Solution Options
..................................................................................
......... 2–5 2.3.3.1. Stress Stiffening Effects
..................................................................................
.............. 2–5 2.3.3.2. Newton-Raphson Option
..................................................................................
........... 2–6 2.3.3.3. Prestress Effects Calculation
..................................................................................
....... 2–6 2.3.3.4. Mass Matrix Formulation
..................................................................................
........... 2–6 2.3.3.5. Reference Temperature
..................................................................................
............. 2–7 2.3.3.6. Mode Number
..................................................................................
........................... 2–7 2.3.3.7. Creep Criteria
..................................................................................
............................ 2–7 2.3.3.8. Printed Output
..................................................................................
.......................... 2–7 2.3.3.9. Extrapolation of Results
..................................................................................
............. 2–7 2.3.4. Apply the Loads
..................................................................................
................................. 2–7 2.3.4.1. Load Types
..................................................................................
................................ 2–7 2.3.4.1.1. Displacements (UX, UY, UZ, ROTX,
ROTY, ROTZ) ................................................... 2–7 2.3.4.1.2.
Forces (FX, FY, FZ) and Moments (MX, MY, MZ)
.................................................... 2–7 2.3.4.1.3. Pressures
(PRES)
..................................................................................
................ 2–8 2.3.4.1.4. Temperatures (TEMP)
..................................................................................
........ 2–8 2.3.4.1.5. Fluences (FLUE)
..................................................................................
................ 2–8 2.3.4.1.6. Gravity, Spinning, Etc.
..................................................................................
....... 2–8 2.3.4.2. Apply Loads to the Model
..................................................................................
.......... 2–8 2.3.4.2.1. Applying Loads Using TABLE Type Array Parameters
........................................... 2–8 2.3.4.3. Calculating Inertia
Relief
..................................................................................
............ 2–9 2.3.4.3.1. Inertia Relief Output
..................................................................................
.......... 2–9 2.3.4.3.2. Partial Inertia Relief Calculations
.......................................................................... 2–9
2.3.4.3.3. Using a Macro to Perform Inertia Relief Calculations
........................................... 2–10 2.3.5. Solve the Analysis
..................................................................................
............................ 2–10 2.3.6. Review the Results
..................................................................................
........................... 2–10 2.3.6.1. Postprocessors
..................................................................................
........................ 2–11 2.3.6.2. Points to Remember
..................................................................................
................ 2–11 2.3.6.3. Reviewing Results Data
..................................................................................
............ 2–11 2.3.6.4. Typical Postprocessing Operations
............................................................................. 2–11
2.4. A Sample Static Analysis (GUI Method)
..................................................................................
...... 2–13
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS Release 9.0 . 002114 . © SAS IP, Inc.
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide 2.4.1. Problem Description
..................................................................................
........................ 2–13 2.4.2. Problem Specifications
..................................................................................
..................... 2–13 2.4.3. Problem Sketch
..................................................................................
................................ 2–14 2.4.3.1. Set the Analysis Title
..................................................................................
................ 2–14 2.4.3.2. Set the System of Units
..................................................................................
............ 2–14 2.4.3.3. Define Parameters
..................................................................................
................... 2–14 2.4.3.4. Define the Element Types
..................................................................................
........ 2–15 2.4.3.5. Define Material Properties
..................................................................................
....... 2–15 2.4.3.6. Create Hexagonal Area as Cross-Section
..................................................................... 2–15
2.4.3.7. Create Keypoints Along a Path
..................................................................................
. 2–16 2.4.3.8. Create Lines Along a Path
..................................................................................
........ 2–16 2.4.3.9. Create Line from Shank to Handle
.............................................................................. 2–
17 2.4.3.10. Cut Hex Section
..................................................................................
..................... 2–17 2.4.3.11. Set Meshing Density
..................................................................................
.............. 2–17 2.4.3.12. Set Element Type for Area Mesh
............................................................................... 2–
17 2.4.3.13. Generate Area Mesh
..................................................................................
.............. 2–18 2.4.3.14. Drag the 2-D Mesh to Produce 3-D Elements
............................................................ 2–18 2.4.3.15. Select
BOTAREA Component and Delete 2-D Elements
............................................. 2–18 2.4.3.16. Apply Displacement
Boundary Condition at End of Wrench ...................................... 2–19
2.4.3.17. Display Boundary Conditions
..................................................................................
. 2–19 2.4.3.18. Apply Pressure on Handle
..................................................................................
...... 2–19 2.4.3.19. Write the First Load Step
..................................................................................
........ 2–21 2.4.3.20. Define Downward Pressure
..................................................................................
.... 2–21 2.4.3.21. Write Second Load Step
..................................................................................
......... 2–22 2.4.3.22. Solve from Load Step Files
..................................................................................
..... 2–22 2.4.3.23. Read First Load Step and Review Results
.................................................................. 2–22 2.4.3.24.
Read the Next Load Step and Review Results
............................................................ 2–23 2.4.3.25. Zoom
in on Cross-Section
..................................................................................
...... 2–23 2.4.3.26. Exit ANSYS
..................................................................................
............................. 2–23 2.5. A Sample Static Analysis (Command or Batch
Method) ................................................................ 2–24 2.6.
Where to Find Other Examples
..................................................................................
.................. 2–26 3. Modal Analysis
..................................................................................
.................................................. 3–1 3.1. Definition of Modal
Analysis
..................................................................................
........................ 3–1 3.2. Uses for Modal Analysis
..................................................................................
............................... 3–1 3.3. Overview of Steps in a Modal Analysis
..................................................................................
......... 3–1 3.4. Build the Model
..................................................................................
.......................................... 3–1 3.5. Apply Loads and Obtain the
Solution
..................................................................................
.......... 3–2 3.5.1. Enter the Solution Processor
..................................................................................
............... 3–2 3.5.2. Define Analysis Type and Options
..................................................................................
....... 3–2 3.5.2.1. Option: New Analysis [ANTYPE]
..................................................................................
.. 3–2 3.5.2.2. Option: Analysis Type: Modal [ANTYPE]
........................................................................ 3–3
3.5.2.3. Option: Mode-Extraction Method [MODOPT]
............................................................... 3–3 3.5.2.4.
Option: Number of Modes to Extract [MODOPT]
........................................................... 3–4 3.5.2.5. Option:
Number of Modes to Expand [MXPAND]
.......................................................... 3–4 3.5.2.6. Option:
Mass Matrix Formulation [LUMPM]
.................................................................. 3–4 3.5.2.7.
Option: Prestress Effects Calculation [PSTRES]
.............................................................. 3–4 3.5.2.8.
Additional Modal Analysis Options
.............................................................................. 3–4
3.5.3. Define Master Degrees of Freedom
..................................................................................
..... 3–5 3.5.4. Apply Loads
..................................................................................
....................................... 3–5 3.5.4.1. Applying Loads Using Commands
............................................................................... 3–
5 3.5.4.2. Applying Loads Using the GUI
..................................................................................
... 3–6 3.5.4.3. Listing Loads
..................................................................................
............................. 3–6
vi
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide 3.5.5. Specify Load Step Options
..................................................................................
.................. 3–6 3.5.6. Participation Factor Table Output
..................................................................................
....... 3–7 3.5.7. Solve
..................................................................................
................................................. 3–7 3.5.7.1. Output
..................................................................................
...................................... 3–7 3.5.7.1.1. Output From Subspace Mode-
Extraction Method ................................................ 3–7 3.5.8. Exit
the Solution Processor
..................................................................................
................. 3–8 3.6. Expand the Modes
..................................................................................
...................................... 3–8 3.6.1. Points to Remember
..................................................................................
.......................... 3–8 3.6.2. Expanding the Modes
..................................................................................
........................ 3–8 3.7. Review the Results
..................................................................................
.................................... 3–10 3.7.1. Points to Remember
..................................................................................
......................... 3–10 3.7.2. Reviewing Results Data
..................................................................................
.................... 3–10 3.7.3. Option: Listing All Frequencies
..................................................................................
......... 3–10 3.7.4. Option: Display Deformed Shape
..................................................................................
...... 3–11 3.7.5. Option: List Master DOF
..................................................................................
.................... 3–11 3.7.6. Option: Line Element Results
..................................................................................
............ 3–11 3.7.7. Option: Contour Displays
..................................................................................
................. 3–11 3.7.8. Option: Tabular Listings
..................................................................................
.................... 3–12 3.7.9. Other Capabilities
..................................................................................
............................ 3–12 3.8. A Sample Modal Analysis (GUI Method)
..................................................................................
..... 3–12 3.8.1. Problem Description
..................................................................................
..................................................................................
..................... 3–12 3.8.3. Problem Sketch
..................................................................................
................................ 3–13 3.9. A Sample Modal Analysis (Command or
Batch Method) ............................................................... 3–13
3.10. Where to Find Other Examples
..................................................................................
................ 3–14 3.11. Prestressed Modal Analysis
..................................................................................
..................... 3–15 3.12. Prestressed Modal Analysis of a Large-Deflection
Solution ......................................................... 3–15 3.13.
Comparing Mode-Extraction Methods
..................................................................................
..... 3–16 3.13.1. Block Lanczos Method
..................................................................................
.................... 3–17 3.13.2. Subspace Method
..................................................................................
.......................... 3–18 3.13.3. PowerDynamics Method
..................................................................................
................ 3–18 3.13.4. Reduced Method
..................................................................................
............................ 3–18 3.13.5. Unsymmetric Method
..................................................................................
..................... 3–18 3.13.6. Damped Method
..................................................................................
............................ 3–18 3.13.6.1. Damped Method-Real and Imaginary Parts
of the Eigenvalue ................................... 3–19 3.13.6.2. Damped
Method-Real and Imaginary Parts of the Eigenvector
.................................. 3–19 3.13.7. QR Damped Method
..................................................................................
...................... 3–19 3.14. Matrix Reduction
..................................................................................
.................................... 3–19 3.14.1. Theoretical Basis of Matrix
Reduction
................................................................................
3–20 3.14.1.1. Guidelines for Selecting Master DOF
........................................................................ 3–20
3.14.1.2. A Note About Program-Selected Masters
.................................................................. 3–22 4.
Harmonic Response Analysis
..................................................................................
............................ 4–1 4.1. Definition of Harmonic Response Analysis
..................................................................................
... 4–1 4.2. Uses for Harmonic Response Analysis
..................................................................................
.......... 4–1 4.3. Commands Used in a Harmonic Response Analysis
........................................................................ 4–2 4.4.
The Three Solution Methods
..................................................................................
....................... 4–2 4.4.1. The Full Method
..................................................................................
................................. 4–2 4.4.2. The Reduced Method
..................................................................................
......................... 4–2 4.4.3. The Mode Superposition Method
..................................................................................
....... 4–3 4.4.4. Restrictions Common to All Three Methods
.......................................................................... 4–3
4.5. How to Do Harmonic Response Analysis
..................................................................................
...... 4–3 4.5.1. Full Harmonic Response Analysis
..................................................................................
........ 4–3
vii
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide 4.5.2. Build the Model
..................................................................................
..................................................................................
.................. 4–4 4.5.3. Apply Loads and Obtain the Solution
..................................................................................
. 4–4 4.5.3.1. Enter the ANSYS Solution Processor
............................................................................. 4–4
4.5.3.2. Define the Analysis Type and Options
.......................................................................... 4–4
4.5.3.3. Apply Loads on the Model
..................................................................................
......... 4–5 4.5.3.3.1. Applying Loads Using Commands
....................................................................... 4–8
4.5.3.3.2. Applying Loads and Listing Loads Using the GUI
................................................. 4–8 4.5.3.4. Specify Load Step
Options
..................................................................................
......... 4–9 4.5.3.4.1. General Options
..................................................................................
................ 4–9 4.5.3.4.2. Dynamics Options
..................................................................................
........... 4–10 4.5.3.4.3. Output Controls
..................................................................................
.............. 4–10 4.5.3.5. Save a Backup Copy of the Database to a Named File
................................................. 4–10 4.5.3.6. Start Solution
Calculations
..................................................................................
....... 4–10 4.5.3.7. Repeat for Additional Load Steps
............................................................................... 4–
11 4.5.3.8. Leave SOLUTION
..................................................................................
..................... 4–11 4.5.4. Review the Results
..................................................................................
........................... 4–11 4.5.4.1. Postprocessors
..................................................................................
........................ 4–11 4.5.4.2. Points to Remember
..................................................................................
................ 4–11 4.5.4.3. Using POST26
..................................................................................
.......................... 4–11 4.5.4.4. Using POST1
..................................................................................
............................ 4–12 4.6. Sample Harmonic Response Analysis (GUI
Method) ..................................................................... 4–13
4.6.1. Problem Description
..................................................................................
..................................................................................
..................... 4–13 4.6.3. Problem Diagram
..................................................................................
............................. 4–14 4.6.3.1. Set the Analysis Title
..................................................................................
................ 4–14 4.6.3.2. Define the Element Types
..................................................................................
........ 4–14 4.6.3.3. Define the Real Constants
..................................................................................
........ 4–15 4.6.3.4. Create the Nodes
..................................................................................
..................... 4–15 4.6.3.5. Create the Spring Elements
..................................................................................
...... 4–15 4.6.3.6. Create the Mass Elements
..................................................................................
........ 4–16 4.6.3.7. Specify the Analysis Type, MDOF, and Load Step
Specifications .................................. 4–16 4.6.3.8. Define Loads and
Boundary Conditions
...................................................................... 4–16
4.6.3.9. Solve the Model
..................................................................................
...................... 4–17 4.6.3.10. Review the Results
..................................................................................
................. 4–17 4.6.3.11. Exit ANSYS
..................................................................................
............................. 4–18 4.7. Sample Harmonic Response Analysis (Command
or Batch Method) ............................................. 4–18 4.8. Where to
Find Other Examples
..................................................................................
.................. 4–19 4.9. Reduced Harmonic Response Analysis
..................................................................................
....... 4–19 4.9.1. Apply Loads and Obtain the Reduced Solution
................................................................... 4–20 4.9.2.
Review the Results of the Reduced Solution
........................................................................ 4–21
4.9.3. Expand the Solution (Expansion Pass)
.................................................................................
4–21 4.9.3.1. Points to Remember
..................................................................................
................ 4–21 4.9.3.2. Expanding the Modes
..................................................................................
.............. 4–21 4.9.4. Review the Results of the Expanded Solution
...................................................................... 4–23 4.9.5.
Sample Input
..................................................................................
................................... 4–23 4.10. Mode Superposition Harmonic
Response Analysis
..................................................................... 4–24 4.10.1.
Obtain the Modal Solution
..................................................................................
.............. 4–25 4.10.2. Obtain the Mode Superposition Harmonic Solution
.......................................................... 4–25 4.10.3. Expand the
Mode Superposition Solution
......................................................................... 4–27
4.10.4. Review the Results
..................................................................................
......................... 4–27 4.10.5. Sample Input
..................................................................................
................................. 4–27
viii
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide 4.11. Other Analysis Details
..................................................................................
............................. 4–28 4.11.1. Prestressed Harmonic Response Analysis
.......................................................................... 4–28
4.11.1.1. Prestressed Full Harmonic Response Analysis
........................................................... 4–28 4.11.1.2.
Prestressed Reduced Harmonic Response Analysis
................................................... 4–28 4.11.1.3. Prestressed
Mode Superposition Harmonic Response Analysis ................................. 4–
29 5. Transient Dynamic Analysis
..................................................................................
.............................. 5–1 5.1. Definition of Transient Dynamic Analysis
..................................................................................
..... 5–1 5.2. Preparing for a Transient Dynamic Analysis
..................................................................................
. 5–1 5.3. Three Solution Methods
..................................................................................
.............................. 5–2 5.3.1. Full Method
..................................................................................
....................................... 5–2 5.3.2. Mode Superposition Method
..................................................................................
.............. 5–2 5.3.3. Reduced Method
..................................................................................
............................... 5–3 5.4. Performing a Full Transient Dynamic
Analysis
................................................................................
5–3 5.4.1. Build the Model
..................................................................................
..................................................................................
.................. 5–4 5.4.2. Establish Initial Conditions
..................................................................................
................. 5–4 5.4.3. Set Solution Controls
..................................................................................
.......................... 5–6 5.4.3.1. Access the Solution Controls Dialog Box
...................................................................... 5–6
..................................................................................
................... 5–7 5.4.3.3. Using the Transient Tab
..................................................................................
............. 5–7 5.4.3.4. Using the Remaining Solution Controls Tabs
................................................................ 5–8 5.4.4. Set
Additional Solution Options
..................................................................................
......... 5–8 5.4.4.1. Prestress Effects
..................................................................................
......................... 5–9 5.4.4.2. Damping Option
..................................................................................
....................... 5–9 5.4.4.3. Mass Matrix Formulation
..................................................................................
........... 5–9 5.4.5. Apply the Loads
..................................................................................
................................. 5–9 5.4.6. Save the Load Configuration for the
Current Load Step ....................................................... 5–10
5.4.7. Repeat Steps 3-6 for Each Load Step
..................................................................................
. 5–10 5.4.8. Save a Backup Copy of the Database
..................................................................................
5–10 5.4.9. Start the Transient Solution
..................................................................................
.............. 5–10 5.4.10. Exit the Solution Processor
..................................................................................
............. 5–11 5.4.11. Review the Results
..................................................................................
......................... 5–11 5.4.11.1. Postprocessors
..................................................................................
...................... 5–11 5.4.11.2. Points to Remember
..................................................................................
.............. 5–11 5.4.11.3. Using POST26
..................................................................................
........................ 5–11 5.4.11.4. Other Capabilities
..................................................................................
.................. 5–12 5.4.11.5. Using POST1
..................................................................................
.......................... 5–12 5.4.12. Sample Input for a Full Transient Dynamic
Analysis ........................................................... 5–12 5.5.
Performing a Mode Superposition Transient Dynamic Analysis
.................................................... 5–13 5.5.1. Build the Model
..................................................................................
................................ 5–13 5.5.2. Obtain the Modal Solution
..................................................................................
............... 5–13 5.5.3. Obtain the Mode Superposition Transient Solution
............................................................. 5–14 5.5.3.1. Points
to Remember
..................................................................................
................ 5–14 5.5.3.2. Obtaining the Solution
..................................................................................
............ 5–14 5.5.4. Expand the Mode Superposition Solution
........................................................................... 5–18
..................................................................................
........................... 5–18 5.5.6. Sample Input for a Mode Superposition
Transient Dynamic Analysis ................................... 5–18 5.6.
Performing a Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis
...................................................................... 5–19 5.6.1.
Obtain the Reduced Solution
..................................................................................
............ 5–19 5.6.1.1. Define the Analysis Type and Options
........................................................................ 5–20
5.6.1.2. Define Master Degrees of Freedom
............................................................................ 5–20
5.6.1.3. Define Gap Conditions
..................................................................................
............. 5–20
ix
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide 5.6.1.3.1. Gap Conditions
..................................................................................
............... 5–20 5.6.1.4. Apply Initial Conditions to the Model
......................................................................... 5–21
5.6.1.4.1. Dynamics Options
..................................................................................
........... 5–22 5.6.1.4.2. General Options
..................................................................................
.............. 5–22 5.6.1.4.3. Output Control Options
..................................................................................
.. 5–23 5.6.1.5. Write the First Load Step to a Load Step File
............................................................... 5–23 5.6.1.6.
Specify Loads and Load Step Options
......................................................................... 5–23
5.6.1.7. Obtaining the Solution
..................................................................................
............ 5–23 5.6.2. Review the Results of the Reduced Solution
........................................................................ 5–23
.................................................................................
5–24 5.6.3.1. Points to Remember
..................................................................................
................ 5–24 5.6.3.2. Expanding the Solution
..................................................................................
........... 5–24 5.6.4. Review the Results of the Expanded Solution
...................................................................... 5–25 5.7.
Sample Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis (GUI Method)
......................................................... 5–26 5.7.1. Problem
Description
..................................................................................
..................................................................................
..................... 5–26 5.7.3. Problem Sketch
..................................................................................
................................ 5–27 5.7.3.1. Specify the Title
..................................................................................
....................... 5–27 5.7.3.2. Define Element Types
..................................................................................
.............. 5–27 5.7.3.3. Define Real Constants
..................................................................................
.............. 5–27 5.7.3.4. Define Material Properties
..................................................................................
....... 5–28 5.7.3.5. Define Nodes
..................................................................................
.......................... 5–28 5.7.3.6. Define Elements
..................................................................................
...................... 5–28 5.7.3.7. Define Analysis Type and Analysis Options
................................................................. 5–29 5.7.3.8.
Define Master Degrees of Freedom
............................................................................ 5–29
5.7.3.9. Set Load Step Options
..................................................................................
............. 5–29 5.7.3.10. Apply Loads for the First Load Step
.......................................................................... 5–29
5.7.3.11. Specify Output
..................................................................................
...................... 5–29 5.7.3.12. Solve the First Load Step
..................................................................................
........ 5–30 5.7.3.13. Apply Loads for the Next Load Step
.......................................................................... 5–30
5.7.4. Solve the Next Load Step
..................................................................................
.................. 5–30 5.7.4.1. Set the Next Time Step and Solve
............................................................................... 5–
30 5.7.4.2. Run the Expansion Pass and Solve
.............................................................................. 5–
30 5.7.4.3. Review the Results in POST26
..................................................................................
.. 5–31 5.7.4.4. Review the Results in POST1
..................................................................................
.... 5–31 5.7.4.5. Exit ANSYS
..................................................................................
............................... 5–31 5.8. Sample Reduced Transient Dynamic
Analysis (Command or Batch Method) ................................. 5–31 5.9.
Performing a Prestressed Transient Dynamic Analysis
.................................................................. 5–32 5.9.1.
Prestressed Full Transient Dynamic Analysis
........................................................................ 5–32
5.9.2. Prestressed Mode Superposition Transient Dynamic Analysis
.............................................. 5–33 5.9.3. Prestressed Reduced
Transient Dynamic Analysis
................................................................ 5–33 5.10. Other
Analysis Details
..................................................................................
............................. 5–33 5.10.1. Guidelines for Integration Time Step
.................................................................................
5–33 5.10.2. Automatic Time Stepping
..................................................................................
............... 5–35 5.10.3. Damping
..................................................................................
........................................ 5–36 5.11. Where to Find Other Examples
..................................................................................
................ 5–40 6. Spectrum Analysis
..................................................................................
............................................. 6–1 6.1. Definition of Spectrum
Analysis
..................................................................................
.................. 6–1 6.2. What is a Spectrum?
..................................................................................
................................... 6–1 6.2.1. Response Spectrum
..................................................................................
........................... 6–1 6.2.1.1. Single-Point Response Spectrum (SPRS)
....................................................................... 6–1
6.2.1.2. Multi-Point Response Spectrum (MPRS)
....................................................................... 6–1
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide 6.2.2. Dynamic Design Analysis Method (DDAM)
............................................................................ 6–2
6.2.3. Power Spectral Density
..................................................................................
...................... 6–2 6.2.4. Deterministic vs. Probabilistic Analyses
.................................................................................
6–2 6.3. Steps in a Single-Point Response Spectrum (SPRS) Analysis
............................................................ 6–2 6.3.1. Build the
Model
..................................................................................
..................................................................................
.................. 6–3 6.3.2. Obtain the Modal Solution
..................................................................................
................. 6–3 6.3.3. Obtain the Spectrum Solution
..................................................................................
............ 6–3 6.3.4. Expand the Modes
..................................................................................
............................. 6–6 6.3.5. Combine the Modes
..................................................................................
........................... 6–6 6.3.6. Review the Results
..................................................................................
............................. 6–8 6.4. Sample Spectrum Analysis (GUI Method)
..................................................................................
... 6–10 6.4.1. Problem Description
..................................................................................
..................................................................................
..................... 6–10 6.4.3. Problem Sketch
..................................................................................
................................ 6–11 6.4.4. Procedure
..................................................................................
........................................ 6–11 6.4.4.1. Set the Analysis Title
..................................................................................
................ 6–11 6.4.4.2. Define the Element Type
..................................................................................
.......... 6–11 6.4.4.3. Define the Real Constants
..................................................................................
........ 6–11 6.4.4.4. Define Material Properties
..................................................................................
....... 6–12 6.4.4.5. Define Keypoints and Line
..................................................................................
....... 6–12 6.4.4.6. Set Global Element Density and Mesh Line
................................................................. 6–12 6.4.4.7.
Set Boundary Conditions
..................................................................................
......... 6–13 6.4.4.8. Specify Analysis Type and Options
............................................................................. 6–13
6.4.4.9. Solve the Modal Analysis
..................................................................................
......... 6–13 6.4.4.10. Set Up the Spectrum Analysis
..................................................................................
6–13 6.4.4.11. Define Spectrum Value vs. Frequency Table
............................................................. 6–14 6.4.4.12. Solve
Spectrum Analysis
..................................................................................
........ 6–14 6.4.4.13. Set up the Expansion Pass
..................................................................................
...... 6–14 6.4.4.14. Expand the Modes
..................................................................................
................. 6–14 6.4.4.15. Start Expansion Pass Calculation
.............................................................................. 6–
15 6.4.4.16. Set Up Mode Combination for Spectrum Analysis
..................................................... 6–15 6.4.4.17. Select Mode
Combination Method
........................................................................... 6–15
6.4.4.18. Combine the Modes
..................................................................................
.............. 6–15 6.4.4.19. Postprocessing: Print Out Nodal, Element, and
Reaction Solutions ............................ 6–15 6.4.4.20. Exit ANSYS
..................................................................................
............................. 6–16 6.5. Sample Spectrum Analysis (Command or Batch
Method) ............................................................. 6–16 6.6.
..................................................................................
.................. 6–17 6.7. How to Do a Random Vibration (PSD) Analysis
............................................................................. 6–18
6.7.1. Expand the Modes
..................................................................................
........................... 6–18 6.7.2. Obtain the Spectrum Solution
..................................................................................
.......... 6–18 6.7.3. Combine the Modes
..................................................................................
......................... 6–21 6.7.4. Review the Results
..................................................................................
........................... 6–22 6.7.4.1. Reviewing the Results in POST1
.................................................................................
6–22 6.7.4.1.1. Read the Desired Set of Results into the Database
.............................................. 6–22 6.7.4.1.2. Display the Results
..................................................................................
.......... 6–23 6.7.4.2. Calculating Response PSDs in POST26
........................................................................ 6–23
6.7.4.3. Calculating Covariance in POST26
.............................................................................. 6–
23 6.7.5. Sample Input
..................................................................................
................................... 6–24 6.8. How to Do DDAM Spectrum Analysis
..................................................................................
........ 6–25 6.9. How to Do Multi-Point Response Spectrum (MPRS) Analysis
........................................................ 6–25 7. Buckling Analysis
..................................................................................
.............................................. 7–1
xi
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide 7.1. Definition of Buckling Analysis
..................................................................................
.................... 7–1 7.2. Types of Buckling Analyses
..................................................................................
......................... 7–1 7.2.1. Nonlinear Buckling Analysis
..................................................................................
................ 7–1 7.2.2. Eigenvalue Buckling Analysis
..................................................................................
.............. 7–1 7.3. Commands Used in a Buckling Analysis
..................................................................................
....... 7–2 7.4. Procedure for Nonlinear Buckling Analysis
..................................................................................
... 7–2 7.4.1. Applying Load Increments
..................................................................................
................. 7–2 7.4.2. Automatic Time Stepping
..................................................................................
................... 7–2 7.4.3. Important
..................................................................................
.......................................... 7–2 7.4.4. Points to Remember
..................................................................................
.......................... 7–3 7.5. Procedure for Eigenvalue Buckling Analysis
..................................................................................
. 7–3 7.5.1. Build the Model
..................................................................................
..................................................................................
.................. 7–4 7.5.2. Obtain the Static Solution
..................................................................................
.................. 7–4 7.5.3. Obtain the Eigenvalue Buckling Solution
.............................................................................. 7–5
7.5.4. Expand the Solution
..................................................................................
........................... 7–6 7.5.4.1. Points to Remember
..................................................................................
.................. 7–6 7.5.4.2. Expanding the Solution
..................................................................................
............. 7–6 7.5.5. Review the Results
..................................................................................
............................. 7–7 7.6. Sample Buckling Analysis (GUI Method)
..................................................................................
...... 7–8 7.6.1. Problem Description
..................................................................................
.......................... 7–8 7.6.2. Problem Specifications
..................................................................................
....................... 7–8 7.6.3. Problem Sketch
..................................................................................
.................................. 7–9 7.6.3.1. Set the Analysis Title
..................................................................................
.................. 7–9 7.6.3.2. Define the Element Type
..................................................................................
........... 7–9 7.6.3.3. Define the Real Constants and Material Properties
...................................................... 7–10 7.6.3.4. Define Nodes
and Elements
..................................................................................
..... 7–10 7.6.3.5. Define the Boundary Conditions
................................................................................
7–11 7.6.3.6. Solve the Static Analysis
..................................................................................
........... 7–11 7.6.3.7. Solve the Buckling Analysis
..................................................................................
...... 7–11 7.6.3.8. Review the Results
..................................................................................
................... 7–12 7.6.3.9. Exit ANSYS
..................................................................................
............................... 7–12 7.7. Sample Buckling Analysis (Command or
Batch Method) ............................................................... 7–12
..................................................................................
.................. 7–12 8. Nonlinear Structural Analysis
..................................................................................
........................... 8–1 8.1. What is Structural Nonlinearity?
..................................................................................
.................. 8–1 8.1.1. Causes of Nonlinear Behavior
..................................................................................
............. 8–1 8.1.1.1. Changing Status (Including Contact)
............................................................................ 8–2
8.1.1.2. Geometric Nonlinearities
..................................................................................
........... 8–2 8.1.1.3. Material Nonlinearities
..................................................................................
............... 8–2 8.1.2. Basic Information About Nonlinear Analyses
......................................................................... 8–2
8.1.2.1. Conservative versus Nonconservative Behavior; Path Dependency
............................... 8–5 8.1.2.2. Substeps
..................................................................................
................................... 8–5 8.1.2.3. Load Direction in a Large-
Deflection Analysis
............................................................... 8–6 8.1.2.4.
Nonlinear Transient Analyses
..................................................................................
..... 8–6 8.2. Using Geometric Nonlinearities
..................................................................................
................... 8–6 8.2.1. Stress-Strain
..................................................................................
....................................... 8–7 8.2.1.1. Large Deflections with Small
Strain
.............................................................................. 8–7
8.2.2. Stress Stiffening
..................................................................................
................................. 8–7 8.2.3. Spin Softening
..................................................................................
................................... 8–8 8.3. Modeling Material Nonlinearities
..................................................................................
................ 8–8 8.3.1. Nonlinear Materials
..................................................................................
............................ 8–8
xii
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide 8.3.1.1. Plasticity
..................................................................................
................................... 8–9 8.3.1.1.1. Plastic Material Options
..................................................................................
... 8–10 8.3.1.2. Multilinear Elasticity
..................................................................................
................. 8–16 8.3.1.3. User Defined Material
..................................................................................
.............. 8–16 8.3.1.4. Hyperelasticity
..................................................................................
........................ 8–17 8.3.1.4.1. Mooney-Rivlin Hyperelastic Option
(TB,HYPER) .................................................. 8–18 8.3.1.4.2.
Ogden Hyperelastic Option
............................................................................... 8–
18 8.3.1.4.3. Neo-Hookean Hyperelastic Option
.................................................................... 8–19
8.3.1.4.4. Polynomial Form Hyperelastic Option
............................................................... 8–19 8.3.1.4.5.
Arruda-Boyce Hyperelastic Option
..................................................................... 8–19
8.3.1.4.6. Gent Hyperelastic Option
..................................................................................
8–20 8.3.1.4.7. Yeoh Hyperelastic Option
.................................................................................
8–20 8.3.1.4.8. Blatz-Ko Foam Hyperelastic Option
................................................................... 8–20
8.3.1.4.9. Ogden Compressible Foam Hyperelastic Option
................................................ 8–20 8.3.1.4.10. User-Defined
Hyperelastic Option
................................................................... 8–21
8.3.1.4.11. Mooney-Rivlin Hyperelastic Option (TB,MOONEY)
............................................ 8–21 8.3.1.5. Creep
..................................................................................
...................................... 8–29 8.3.1.5.1. Implicit Creep Procedure
..................................................................................
. 8–30 8.3.1.5.2. Explicit Creep Procedure
..................................................................................
. 8–31 8.3.1.6. Shape Memory Alloy
..................................................................................
................ 8–31 8.3.1.7. Viscoplasticity
..................................................................................
......................... 8–33 8.3.1.8. Viscoelasticity
..................................................................................
.......................... 8–33 8.3.1.9. Swelling
..................................................................................
.................................. 8–34 8.3.2. Material Model Combinations
..................................................................................
........... 8–35 8.3.2.1. BISO and CHAB Example
..................................................................................
.......... 8–35 8.3.2.2. MISO and CHAB Example
..................................................................................
......... 8–35 8.3.2.3. NLISO and CHAB Example
..................................................................................
........ 8–35 8.3.2.4. BISO and RATE Example
..................................................................................
........... 8–36 8.3.2.5. MISO and RATE Example
..................................................................................
.......... 8–36 8.3.2.6. NLISO and RATE Example
..................................................................................
......... 8–37 8.3.2.7. BISO and CREEP Example
..................................................................................
......... 8–37 8.3.2.8. MISO and CREEP Example
..................................................................................
........ 8–37 8.3.2.9. NLISO and CREEP Example
..................................................................................
....... 8–38 8.3.2.10. BKIN and CREEP Example
..................................................................................
....... 8–38 8.3.2.11. HILL and BISO Example
..................................................................................
.......... 8–38 8.3.2.12. HILL and MISO Example
..................................................................................
......... 8–39 8.3.2.13. HILL and NLISO Example
..................................................................................
........ 8–39 8.3.2.14. HILL and BKIN Example
..................................................................................
.......... 8–39 8.3.2.15. HILL and MKIN Example
..................................................................................
......... 8–40 8.3.2.16. HILL and KINH Example
..................................................................................
.......... 8–40 8.3.2.17. HILL and CHAB Example
..................................................................................
........ 8–41 8.3.2.18. HILL and BISO and CHAB Example
............................................................................ 8–41
8.3.2.19. HILL and MISO and CHAB Example
........................................................................... 8–41
8.3.2.20. HILL and NLISO and CHAB Example
.......................................................................... 8–42
8.3.2.21. HILL and RATE and BISO Example
............................................................................. 8–43
8.3.2.22. HILL and RATE and MISO Example
............................................................................ 8–44
8.3.2.23. HILL and RATE and NLISO Example
........................................................................... 8–44
8.3.2.24. HILL and CREEP Example
..................................................................................
........ 8–45 8.3.2.25. HILL and CREEP and BISO Example
........................................................................... 8–46
8.3.2.26. HILL and CREEP and MISO Example
.......................................................................... 8–47
8.3.2.27. HILL and CREEP and NLISO Example
......................................................................... 8–47
8.3.2.28. HILL and CREEP and BKIN Example
........................................................................... 8–47
xiii
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide 8.3.2.29. Hyperelasticity and Viscoelasticity
(Implicit) Example ................................................ 8–48 8.4.
Running a Nonlinear Analysis in ANSYS
..................................................................................
..... 8–48 8.5. Performing a Nonlinear Static Analysis
..................................................................................
...... 8–49 8.5.1. Build the Model
..................................................................................
................................ 8–49 8.5.2. Set Solution Controls
..................................................................................
........................ 8–49 8.5.2.1. Using the Basic Tab: Special Considerations
............................................................... 8–50 8.5.2.2.
Advanced Analysis Options You Can Set on the Solution Controls Dialog Box
............. 8–50 8.5.2.2.1. Equation Solver
..................................................................................
.............. 8–50 8.5.2.3. Advanced Load Step Options You Can Set on the
Solution Controls Dialog Box .......... 8–51 8.5.2.3.1. Automatic Time Stepping
.................................................................................
8–51 8.5.2.3.2. Convergence Criteria
..................................................................................
...... 8–51 8.5.2.3.3. Maximum Number of Equilibrium Iterations
...................................................... 8–53 8.5.2.3.4. Predictor-
Corrector Option
............................................................................... 8–
53 8.5.2.3.5. Line Search Option
..................................................................................
......... 8–53 8.5.2.3.6. Cutback Criteria
..................................................................................
.............. 8–53 8.5.3. Set Additional Solution Options
..................................................................................
........ 8–53 8.5.3.1. Advanced Analysis Options You Cannot Set on the Solution
Controls Dialog Box ........ 8–54 8.5.3.1.1. Stress Stiffness
..................................................................................
................ 8–54 8.5.3.1.2. Newton-Raphson Option
..................................................................................
8–54 8.5.3.2. Advanced Load Step Options You Cannot Set on the Solution Controls
Dialog Box ..... 8–55 8.5.3.2.1. Creep Criteria
..................................................................................
.................. 8–55 8.5.3.2.2. Time Step Open Control
..................................................................................
.. 8–55 8.5.3.2.3. Solution Monitoring
..................................................................................
........ 8–56 8.5.3.2.4. Birth and Death
..................................................................................
.............. 8–56 8.5.3.2.5. Output Control
..................................................................................
............... 8–56 8.5.4. Apply the Loads
..................................................................................
............................... 8–57 8.5.5. Solve the Analysis
..................................................................................
............................ 8–57 8.5.6. Review the Results
..................................................................................
........................... 8–57 8.5.6.1. Points to Remember
..................................................................................
................ 8–57 8.5.6.2. Reviewing Results in POST1
..................................................................................
..... 8–57 8.5.6.3. Reviewing Results in POST26
..................................................................................
... 8–59 8.5.7. Terminating a Running Job; Restarting
............................................................................... 8–
60 8.6. Performing a Nonlinear Transient Analysis
..................................................................................
. 8–60 8.6.1. Build the Model
..................................................................................
................................ 8–60 8.6.2. Apply Loads and Obtain the Solution
..................................................................................
8–60 8.6.3. Review the Results
..................................................................................
........................... 8–62 8.7. Sample Input for a Nonlinear Transient
Analysis
.......................................................................... 8–62
8.8. Restarts
..................................................................................
.................................................... 8–63 8.9. Using Nonlinear
(Changing-Status) Elements
............................................................................... 8–
63 8.9.1. Element Birth and Death
..................................................................................
.................. 8–63 8.10. Tips and Guidelines for Nonlinear Analysis
.................................................................................
8–64 8.10.1. Starting Out with Nonlinear Analysis
.................................................................................
8–64 8.10.1.1. Be Aware of How the Program and Your Structure Behave
........................................ 8–64 8.10.1.2. Keep It Simple
..................................................................................
....................... 8–64 8.10.1.3. Use an Adequate Mesh Density
................................................................................
8–64 8.10.1.4. Apply the Load Gradually
..................................................................................
....... 8–65 8.10.2. Overcoming Convergence Problems
.................................................................................
8–65 8.10.2.1. Performing Nonlinear Diagnostics
............................................................................ 8–65
8.10.2.2. Tracking Convergence Graphically
........................................................................... 8–67
8.10.2.3. Using Automatic Time Stepping
............................................................................... 8–
67 8.10.2.4. Using Line Search
..................................................................................
.................. 8–68 8.10.2.5. Using the Arc-Length Method
..................................................................................
8–68
xiv
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide 8.10.2.6. Artificially Inhibit Divergence in Your
Model's Response ........................................... 8–70 8.10.2.7. Turn
Off Extra Element Shapes
.................................................................................
8–70 8.10.2.8. Using Birth and Death Wisely
..................................................................................
. 8–70 8.10.2.9. Read Your Output
..................................................................................
.................. 8–70 8.10.2.10. Graph the Load and Response History
.................................................................... 8–72 8.11.
Sample Nonlinear Analysis (GUI Method)
..................................................................................
. 8–72 8.11.1. Problem Description
..................................................................................
...................... 8–72 8.11.2. Problem Specifications
..................................................................................
................... 8–73 8.11.3. Problem Sketch
..................................................................................
.............................. 8–73 8.11.3.1. Set the Analysis Title and Jobname
.......................................................................... 8–73
8.11.3.2. Define the Element Types
..................................................................................
...... 8–74 8.11.3.3. Define Material Properties
..................................................................................
...... 8–74 8.11.3.4. Specify the Kinematic Hardening material model (KINH)
........................................... 8–74 8.11.3.5. Label Graph Axes and
Plot Data Tables
..................................................................... 8–74
8.11.3.6. Create Rectangle
..................................................................................
................... 8–75 8.11.3.7. Set Element Size
..................................................................................
.................... 8–75 8.11.3.8. Mesh the Rectangle
..................................................................................
............... 8–75 8.11.3.9. Assign Analysis and Load Step Options
.................................................................... 8–75
8.11.3.10. Monitor the Displacement
..................................................................................
... 8–76 8.11.3.11. Apply Constraints
..................................................................................
................ 8–76 8.11.3.12. Solve the First Load Step
..................................................................................
...... 8–77 8.11.3.13. Solve the Next Six Load Steps
.................................................................................
8–77 8.11.3.14. Review the Monitor File
..................................................................................
....... 8–78 8.11.3.15. Use the General Postprocessor to Plot Results.
........................................................ 8–78 8.11.3.16. Define
Variables for Time-History Postprocessing
................................................... 8–78 8.11.3.17. Plot Time-
History Results
..................................................................................
..... 8–79 8.11.3.18. Exit ANSYS
..................................................................................
........................... 8–79 8.12. Sample Nonlinear Analysis (Command or Batch
Method) ........................................................... 8–79 8.13.
..................................................................................
................ 8–82 9. Material Curve Fitting
..................................................................................
....................................... 9–1 9.1. Applicable Material Behavior
Types
..................................................................................
............. 9–1 9.2. Hyperelastic Material Curve Fitting
..................................................................................
.............. 9–1 9.2.1. Using Curve Fitting to Determine Your Hyperelastic
Material Behavior ................................. 9–1 9.2.1.1. Prepare
Experimental Data
..................................................................................
........ 9–2 9.2.1.2. Input the Data into ANSYS
..................................................................................
......... 9–3 9.2.1.2.1. Batch
..................................................................................
................................ 9–3 9.2.1.2.2. GUI
..................................................................................
................................... 9–3 9.2.1.3. Select a Material Model Option
..................................................................................
.. 9–3 9.2.1.3.1. Batch
..................................................................................
................................ 9–4 9.2.1.3.2. GUI
..................................................................................
................................... 9–4 9.2.1.4. Initialize the Coefficients
..................................................................................
............ 9–4 9.2.1.4.1. Batch
..................................................................................
................................ 9–5 9.2.1.4.2. GUI
..................................................................................
................................... 9–5 9.2.1.5. Specify Control Parameters and
Solve ..........................................................................
9–6 9.2.1.5.1. Batch
..................................................................................
................................ 9–6 9.2.1.5.2. GUI
..................................................................................
................................... 9–6 9.2.1.6. Plot Your Experimental Data and
Analyze ..................................................................... 9–6
9.2.1.6.1. Batch
..................................................................................
................................ 9–6 9.2.1.6.2. GUI
..................................................................................
................................... 9–7 9.2.1.6.3. Review/Verify
..................................................................................
................... 9–7 9.2.1.7. Write Data to TB Command
..................................................................................
....... 9–7 9.2.1.7.1. Batch
..................................................................................
................................ 9–7
xv
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide 9.2.1.7.2. GUI
..................................................................................
................................... 9–8 9.3. Creep Material Curve Fitting
..................................................................................
....................... 9–8 9.3.1. Using Curve Fitting to Determine Your Creep
Material Behavior ........................................... 9–8 9.3.1.1. Prepare
Experimental Data
..................................................................................
........ 9–8 9.3.1.2. Input the Data into ANSYS
..................................................................................
....... 9–10 9.3.1.2.1. Batch
..................................................................................
.............................. 9–10 9.3.1.2.2. GUI
..................................................................................
................................. 9–10 9.3.1.3. Select a Material Model Option
..................................................................................
9–10 9.3.1.3.1. Batch
..................................................................................
.............................. 9–10 9.3.1.3.2. GUI
..................................................................................
................................. 9–11 9.3.1.4. Initialize the Coefficients
..................................................................................
.......... 9–11 9.3.1.4.1. Batch
..................................................................................
.............................. 9–12 9.3.1.4.2. GUI
..................................................................................
................................. 9–12 9.3.1.5. Specify Control Parameters and
Solve ........................................................................ 9–
12 9.3.1.5.1. Batch
..................................................................................
.............................. 9–13 9.3.1.5.2. GUI
..................................................................................
................................. 9–13 9.3.1.6. Plot the Experimental Data and
Analyze ..................................................................... 9–13
9.3.1.6.1. Batch
..................................................................................
.............................. 9–13 9.3.1.6.2. GUI
..................................................................................
................................. 9–14 9.3.1.6.3. Analyze Your Curves for Proper
Fit ..................................................................... 9–14
9.3.1.7. Write Data to TB Command
..................................................................................
..... 9–14 9.3.1.7.1. Batch
..................................................................................
.............................. 9–14 9.3.1.7.2. GUI
..................................................................................
................................. 9–14 9.3.2. Tips For Curve Fitting Creep Models
..................................................................................
. 9–14 9.4. Viscoelastic Material Curve Fitting
..................................................................................
............. 9–15 9.4.1. Using Curve Fitting to Determine the Coefficients of
Viscoelastic Material Model ................. 9–16 9.4.1.1. Prepare Experimental
Data
..................................................................................
...... 9–16 9.4.1.2. Input the Data into ANSYS
..................................................................................
....... 9–17 9.4.1.2.1. Batch
..................................................................................
.............................. 9–17 9.4.1.2.2. GUI
..................................................................................
................................. 9–18 9.4.1.3. Select a Material Model Option
..................................................................................
9–18 9.4.1.3.1. Batch
..................................................................................
.............................. 9–18 9.4.1.3.2. GUI
..................................................................................
................................. 9–18 9.4.1.4. Initialize the Coefficients
..................................................................................
.......... 9–19 9.4.1.4.1. Batch
..................................................................................
.............................. 9–19 9.4.1.4.2. GUI
..................................................................................
................................. 9–20 9.4.1.5. Specify Control Parameters and
Solve ........................................................................ 9–
20 9.4.1.5.1. Temperature Dependent Solves Using the Shift Function
.................................. 9–21 9.4.1.5.2. Temperature Dependent Solves
Without the Shift Function ............................... 9–21 9.4.1.5.3. Batch
..................................................................................
.............................. 9–22 9.4.1.5.4. GUI
..................................................................................
................................. 9–23 9.4.1.6. Plot the Experimental Data and
Analyze ..................................................................... 9–23
9.4.1.6.1. Batch
..................................................................................
.............................. 9–23 9.4.1.6.2. GUI
..................................................................................
................................. 9–23 9.4.1.6.3. Analyze Your Curves for Proper
Fit ..................................................................... 9–23
..................................................................................
..... 9–23 9.4.1.7.1. Batch
..................................................................................
.............................. 9–23 9.4.1.7.2. GUI
..................................................................................
................................. 9–24 10. Gasket Joints Simulation
..................................................................................
............................... 10–1 10.1. Overview of Gasket Joints
..................................................................................
....................... 10–1 10.2. Performing a Gasket Joint Analysis
..................................................................................
.......... 10–1 10.3. Finite Element Formulation
..................................................................................
..................... 10–2
xvi
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide 10.3.1. Element Topologies
..................................................................................
....................... 10–2 10.3.2. Thickness Direction
..................................................................................
........................ 10–2 10.4. ANSYS Family of Interface Elements
..................................................................................
........ 10–3 10.4.1. Element Selection
..................................................................................
.......................... 10–3 10.4.2. Applications
..................................................................................
................................... 10–3 10.5. Material Definition
..................................................................................
.................................. 10–4 10.5.1. Material Characteristics
..................................................................................
.................. 10–4 10.5.2. Input Format
..................................................................................
.................................. 10–5 10.5.2.1. Define General Parameters
..................................................................................
.... 10–6 10.5.2.2. Define Compression Load Closure Curve
.................................................................. 10–6 10.5.2.3.
Define Linear Unloading Data
..................................................................................
10–6 10.5.2.4. Define Nonlinear Unloading Data
............................................................................. 10–7
10.5.3. Temperature Dependencies
..................................................................................
........... 10–8 10.5.4. Plotting Gasket Data
..................................................................................
..................... 10–11 10.6. Meshing Interface Elements
..................................................................................
.................. 10–12 10.7. Solution Procedure and Result Output
..................................................................................
... 10–16 10.7.1. Typical Gasket Solution Output Listing
............................................................................ 10–17
10.8. Reviewing the Results
..................................................................................
........................... 10–19 10.8.1. Points to Remember
..................................................................................
..................... 10–19 10.8.2. Reviewing Results in POST1
..................................................................................
.......... 10–19 10.8.3. Reviewing Results in POST26
..................................................................................
........ 10–20 10.9. Sample Gasket Element Verification Analysis (Command or Batch
Method) .............................. 10–20 11. Fracture Mechanics
..................................................................................
........................................ 11–1 11.1. Definition of Fracture
Mechanics
..................................................................................
............. 11–1 11.2. Solving Fracture Mechanics Problems
..................................................................................
..... 11–1 11.2.1. Modeling the Crack Region
..................................................................................
............. 11–1 11.2.1.1. 2-D Fracture Models
..................................................................................
.............. 11–3 11.2.1.2. 3-D Fracture Models
..................................................................................
.............. 11–4 11.2.2. Calculating Fracture Parameters
..................................................................................
..... 11–5 11.2.2.1. Stress Intensity Factors
..................................................................................
.......... 11–5 11.2.2.2. J-Integral
..................................................................................
............................... 11–6 11.2.2.3. Energy Release Rate
..................................................................................
............... 11–8 12. Composites
..................................................................................
.................................................... 12–1 12.1. Definition of
Composites
..................................................................................
......................... 12–1 12.2. Modeling Composites
..................................................................................
............................. 12–1 12.2.1. Choosing the Proper Element Type
..................................................................................
. 12–1 12.2.2. Defining the Layered Configuration
..................................................................................
12–2 12.2.2.1. Specifying Individual Layer Properties
...................................................................... 12–3
12.2.2.2. Defining the Constitutive Matrices
........................................................................... 12–4
12.2.2.3. Sandwich and Multiple-Layered Structures
............................................................... 12–4 12.2.2.4.
Node Offset
..................................................................................
........................... 12–5 12.2.3. Specifying Failure Criteria
..................................................................................
............... 12–5 12.2.4. Additional Modeling and Postprocessing Guidelines
......................................................... 12–6 13. Fatigue
..................................................................................
........................................................... 13–1 13.1. Definition
of Fatigue
..................................................................................
............................... 13–1 13.1.1. What the ANSYS Program Does
..................................................................................
...... 13–1 13.1.2. Basic Terminology
..................................................................................
.......................... 13–1 13.2. Doing a Fatigue Evaluation
..................................................................................
..................... 13–2 13.2.1. Enter POST1 and Resume Your Database
.......................................................................... 13–2
13.2.2. Establish the Size, Fatigue Material Properties, and Locations
............................................ 13–2 13.2.3. Store Stresses and
Assign Event Repetitions and Scale Factors
........................................... 13–4 13.2.3.1. Storing Stresses
..................................................................................
..................... 13–4
xvii
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide 13.2.3.1.1. Manually Stored Stresses
.................................................................................
13–4 13.2.3.1.2. Nodal Stresses from Jobname.RST
................................................................... 13–5
13.2.3.1.3. Stresses at a Cross-Section
...............................................................................
13–5 13.2.3.2. Listing, Plotting, or Deleting Stored Stresses
............................................................. 13–6 13.2.3.3.
Assigning Event Repetitions and Scale Factors
......................................................... 13–6 13.2.3.4.
Guidelines for Obtaining Accurate Usage Factors
..................................................... 13–7 13.2.4. Activate the
Fatigue Calculations
..................................................................................
.... 13–9 13.2.5. Review the Results
..................................................................................
......................... 13–9 13.2.6. Other Approaches to Range Counting
.............................................................................. 13–
9 13.2.7. Sample Input
..................................................................................
................................. 13–9 14. p-Method Structural Static Analysis
..................................................................................
.............. 14–1 14.1. Definition of p-Method Analysis
..................................................................................
.............. 14–1 14.2. Benefits of Using the p-Method
..................................................................................
............... 14–1 14.3. Using the p-Method
..................................................................................
................................ 14–1 14.3.1. Select the p-Method Procedure
..................................................................................
...... 14–1 14.3.2. Build the Model
..................................................................................
.............................. 14–2 14.3.2.1. Define the Element Types
..................................................................................
...... 14–2 14.3.2.1.1. Specifying a p-Level Range
.............................................................................. 14–
2 14.3.2.2. Specify Material Properties and/or Real Constants
.................................................... 14–3 14.3.2.2.1. Material
Properties
..................................................................................
........ 14–3 14.3.2.2.2. Real Constants
..................................................................................
.............. 14–3 14.3.2.3. Define the Model Geometry
..................................................................................
... 14–4 14.3.2.4. Mesh the Model into Solid or Shell Elements
............................................................ 14–4 14.3.2.4.1.
Using Program Defaults
..................................................................................
14–4 14.3.2.4.2. Specifying Mesh Controls
................................................................................
14–4 14.3.2.4.3. Guidelines for Creating a Good Mesh
............................................................... 14–5 14.3.3.
Additional Information for Building Your Model
................................................................ 14–5 14.3.3.1.
Viewing your element model
..................................................................................
. 14–5 14.3.3.2. Coupling
..................................................................................
............................... 14–6 14.3.3.2.1. Coupling of Corner Nodes
...............................................................................
14–6 14.3.3.2.2. Midside Node Coupling
..................................................................................
. 14–7 14.3.4. Apply Loads and Obtain the Solution
................................................................................
14–7 14.3.5. Helpful Hints for Common Problems
...............................................................................
14–12 14.3.6. Review the Results
..................................................................................
........................ 14–12 14.3.6.1. The p-Element Subgrid
..................................................................................
........ 14–13 14.3.7. Querying Subgrid Results
..................................................................................
............. 14–13 14.3.8. Printing and Plotting Node and Element Results
............................................................. 14–14 14.3.8.1.
Specialized p-Method Displays and Listings
............................................................ 14–14 14.4. Sample p-
Method Analysis (GUI Method)
.................................................................................
14–14 14.4.1. Problem Description
..................................................................................
..................... 14–15 14.4.2. Problem Specifications
..................................................................................
................. 14–15 14.4.3. Problem Diagram
..................................................................................
......................... 14–15 14.4.3.1. Set the Analysis Title
..................................................................................
............ 14–15 14.4.3.2. Select p-Method
..................................................................................
.................. 14–15 14.4.3.3. Define the Element Type and Options
.................................................................... 14–15
14.4.3.4. Define the Real Constants
..................................................................................
.... 14–16 14.4.3.5. Define Material Properties
..................................................................................
.... 14–16 14.4.3.6. Create Plate with Hole
..................................................................................
.......... 14–16 14.4.3.7. Mesh the Areas
..................................................................................
.................... 14–16 14.4.3.8. Define Symmetry Boundary Conditions
.................................................................. 14–17 14.4.3.9.
Define Pressure Load along Right Edge.
.................................................................. 14–17
14.4.3.10. Define Convergence Criteria
................................................................................
14–17
xviii
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide 14.4.3.11. Solve the Problem
..................................................................................
.............. 14–17 14.4.3.12. Review the Results and Exit ANSYS
....................................................................... 14–18
14.5. Sample p-Method Analysis (Command or Batch Method)
......................................................... 14–18 15. Beam Analysis
and Cross Sections
..................................................................................
................ 15–1 15.1. An Overview of Beams
..................................................................................
............................ 15–1 15.2. What Are Cross Sections?
..................................................................................
........................ 15–1 15.3. How to Create Cross Sections
..................................................................................
.................. 15–2 15.3.1. Defining a Section and Associating a Section ID
Number ................................................... 15–3 15.3.2. Defining
Cross Section Geometry and Setting the Section Attribute Pointer
...................... 15–3 15.3.2.1. Determining the Number of Cells to Define
.............................................................. 15–3 15.3.3.
Meshing a Line Model with BEAM44, BEAM188, or BEAM189 Elements
.............................. 15–4 15.4. Creating Cross Sections
..................................................................................
........................... 15–5 15.4.1. Using the Beam Tool to Create Common
Cross Sections .................................................... 15–5 15.4.2.
Creating Custom Cross Sections with a User-defined Mesh
................................................ 15–6 15.4.3. Creating Custom
Cross Sections with Mesh Refinement and Multiple Materials .................. 15–7
15.4.4. Defining Composite Cross Sections
..................................................................................
. 15–8 15.4.5. Defining a Tapered Beam
..................................................................................
............... 15–8 15.5. Using Nonlinear General Beam Sections
..................................................................................
.. 15–9 15.5.1. Defining a Nonlinear General Beam Section
.................................................................... 15–10
15.5.1.1. Strain Dependencies
..................................................................................
............ 15–11 15.5.2. Considerations for Employing Nonlinear General Beam
Sections ..................................... 15–11 15.6. Managing Cross Section
and User Mesh Libraries
..................................................................... 15–12 15.7.
Sample Lateral Torsional Buckling Analysis (GUI Method)
......................................................... 15–12 15.7.1. Problem
Description
..................................................................................
..................... 15–13 15.7.2. Problem Specifications
..................................................................................
................. 15–13 15.7.3. Problem Sketch
..................................................................................
............................ 15–14 15.7.4. Eigenvalue Buckling and Nonlinear
Collapse ................................................................... 15–14
15.7.5. Set the Analysis Title and Define Model Geometry
........................................................... 15–15 15.7.6. Define
Element Type and Cross Section Information
....................................................... 15–15 15.7.7. Define the
Material Properties and Orientation Node
...................................................... 15–15 15.7.8. Mesh the Line
and Verify Beam Orientation
..................................................................... 15–16
15.7.9. Define the Boundary Conditions
..................................................................................
... 15–16 15.7.10. Solve the Eigenvalue Buckling Analysis
......................................................................... 15–17
15.7.11. Solve the Nonlinear Buckling Analysis
........................................................................... 15–18
15.7.12. Plot and Review the Results
..................................................................................
........ 15–18 15.8. Sample Problem with Cantilever Beams, Command Method
.................................................... 15–19 15.9. Where to Find
Other Examples
..................................................................................
.............. 15–20 16. Shell Analysis and Cross Sections
..................................................................................
.................. 16–1 16.1. An Overview of Shells
..................................................................................
.............................. 16–1 16.2. What Are Cross Sections?
..................................................................................
........................ 16–1 16.3. How to Create Cross Sections
..................................................................................
.................. 16–1 16.3.1. Defining a Section and Associating a Section ID
Number ................................................... 16–2 16.3.2. Defining
Layer Data
..................................................................................
........................ 16–2 16.3.3. Overriding Program Calculated Section
Properties ............................................................ 16–3
16.3.4. Specifying a Shell Thickness Variation (Tapered Shells)
...................................................... 16–3 16.3.5. Setting the
Section Attribute Pointer
................................................................................
16–3 16.3.6. Associating an Area with a Section
..................................................................................
.. 16–3 16.3.7. Using the Shell Tool to Create Sections
............................................................................. 16–3
16.3.8. Managing Cross Section Libraries
..................................................................................
... 16–5 16.4. Using Preintegrated General Shell Sections
...............................................................................
16–5 16.4.1. Defining a Preintegrated Shell Section
.............................................................................. 16–
6 16.4.2. Considerations for Employing Preintegrated Shell Sections
............................................... 16–6
xix
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide Index
..................................................................................
............................................................... Index–1
List of Figures
2.1. Diagram of Allen Wrench
..................................................................................
................................ 2–14 3.1. Diagram of a Model Airplane Wing
..................................................................................
.................. 3–13 3.2. Choose Master DOF
..................................................................................
........................................ 3–20 3.3. Choosing Master DOFs
..................................................................................
.................................... 3–21 3.4. Choosing Masters in an Axisymmetric
Shell Model
............................................................................. 3–21
4.1. Harmonic Response Systems
..................................................................................
............................. 4–1 4.2. Relationship Between Real/Imaginary
Components and Amplitude/Phase Angle ................................. 4–6 4.3. An
Unbalanced Rotating Antenna
..................................................................................
..................... 4–7 4.4. Two-Mass-Spring-System
..................................................................................
................................ 4–14 5.1. Examples of Load-Versus-Time Curves
..................................................................................
............... 5–4 5.2. Examples of Gap Conditions
..................................................................................
............................ 5–21 5.3. Model of a Steel Beam Supporting a
Concentrated Mass
.................................................................... 5–27 5.4.
Effect of Integration Time Step on Period Elongation
......................................................................... 5–34
5.5. Transient Input vs. Transient Response
..................................................................................
............ 5–35 5.6. Rayleigh Damping
..................................................................................
.......................................... 5–38 6.1. Single-Point and Multi-Point
Response Spectra
..................................................................................
. 6–2 6.2. Simply Supported Beam with Vertical Motion of Both Supports
......................................................... 6–11 7.1. Buckling
Curves
..................................................................................
................................................ 7–1 7.2. Adjusting Variable Loads
to Find an Eigenvalue of 1.0
.......................................................................... 7–4
7.3. Bar with Hinged Ends
..................................................................................
........................................ 7–9 8.1. Common Examples of Nonlinear
Structural Behavior
........................................................................... 8–1
8.2. A Fishing Rod Demonstrates Geometric Nonlinearity
........................................................................... 8–2
8.3. Newton-Raphson Approach
..................................................................................
.............................. 8–3 8.4. Traditional Newton-Raphson Method vs. Arc-
Length Method .............................................................. 8–4
8.5. Load Steps, Substeps, and Time
..................................................................................
........................ 8–4 8.6. Nonconservative (Path-Dependent) Behavior
..................................................................................
.... 8–5 8.7. Load Directions Before and After Deflection
..................................................................................
...... 8–6 8.8. Stress-Stiffened Beams
..................................................................................
...................................... 8–8 8.9. Elastoplastic Stress-Strain Curve
..................................................................................
........................ 8–9 8.10. Kinematic Hardening
..................................................................................
.................................... 8–10 8.11. Bauschinger Effect
..................................................................................
........................................ 8–11 8.12. NLISO Stress-Strain Curve
..................................................................................
.............................. 8–14 8.13. Cast Iron Plasticity
..................................................................................
......................................... 8–16 8.14. Hyperelastic Structure
..................................................................................
................................... 8–17 8.15. Typical Hyperelastic Stress-Strain
Curves
..................................................................................
....... 8–23 8.16. Data Locations in Stress and Strain Input Arrays
............................................................................... 8–
25 8.17. Typical Evaluated Hyperelastic Stress-Strain Curve
........................................................................... 8–27
8.18. Stress Relaxation and Creep
..................................................................................
.......................... 8–29 8.19. Time Hardening Creep Analysis
..................................................................................
..................... 8–30 8.20. Shape Memory Alloy Phases
..................................................................................
.......................... 8–32 8.21. Viscoplastic Behavior in a Rolling Operation
..................................................................................
.. 8–33 8.22. Viscoelastic Behavior (Maxwell Model)
..................................................................................
........... 8–34 8.23. Linear Interpolation of Nonlinear Results Can Introduce
Some Error ................................................. 8–58 8.24.
Convergence Norms Displayed By the Graphical Solution Tracking (GST) Feature
............................. 8–67 8.25. Typical Nonlinear Output Listing
..................................................................................
................... 8–71 8.26. Cyclic Point Load History
..................................................................................
............................... 8–73 10.1. Element Topology of a 3-D 8-Node
Interface Element
...................................................................... 10–2 xx
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide 10.2. Pressure vs. Closure Behavior of a Gasket
Material
............................................................................ 10–5
10.3. Gasket Material Input: Linear Unloading Curves
...............................................................................
10–7 10.4. Gasket Material Input: Nonlinear Unloading Curves
......................................................................... 10–8
10.5. Gasket Compression and Unloading Curves at Two Temperatures
.................................................. 10–11 10.6. Gasket Finite
Element Model Geometry
..................................................................................
....... 10–14 10.7. Whole Model Mesh with Brick Element
..................................................................................
........ 10–14 10.8. Interface Layer Mesh
..................................................................................
................................... 10–15 10.9. Whole Model Tetrahedral Mesh
..................................................................................
................... 10–15 10.10. Interface Layer Mesh with Degenerated Wedge
Elements ............................................................ 10–16 11.1.
Crack Tip and Crack Front
..................................................................................
.............................. 11–2 11.2. Examples of Singular Elements
..................................................................................
...................... 11–3 11.3. A Fracture Specimen and 2-D FE Model
..................................................................................
......... 11–4 11.4. Taking Advantage of Symmetry
..................................................................................
.................... 11–4 11.5. Crack Coordinate Systems
..................................................................................
............................. 11–5 11.6. Typical Path Definitions
..................................................................................
................................. 11–6 11.7. J-Integral Contour Path Surrounding a
Crack-Tip
............................................................................. 11–7
11.8. Examples of Paths for J-integral Calculation
..................................................................................
... 11–7 12.1. Layered Model Showing Dropped Layer
..................................................................................
........ 12–3 12.2. Sandwich Construction
..................................................................................
................................. 12–4 12.3. Layered Shell With Nodes at Midplane
..................................................................................
........... 12–5 12.4. Layered Shell With Nodes at Bottom Surface
..................................................................................
. 12–5 12.5. Example of an Element Display
..................................................................................
...................... 12–7 12.6. Sample LAYPLOT Display for [45/-45/ - 45/45]
Sequence .................................................................. 12–8
13.1. Cylinder Wall with Stress Concentration Factors (SCFs)
.................................................................... 13–4 13.2.
Three Loadings in One Event
..................................................................................
......................... 13–5 13.3. Surface Nodes are Identified by PPATH Prior
to Executing FSSECT .................................................... 13–6
14.1. Fan Model Showing p-Element vs. h-Element Meshes
...................................................................... 14–5 14.2.
Coupled Nodes on One Element
..................................................................................
.................... 14–6 14.3. Nodes Coupled Between Adjacent Elements
..................................................................................
. 14–6 14.4. Both Corner Nodes are Coupled
..................................................................................
.................... 14–7 14.5. All Coupled Nodes are Midside Nodes
..................................................................................
........... 14–7 14.6. Constraints on Rotated Nodes
..................................................................................
....................... 14–9 14.7. p-Element Subgrids for Quadrilateral Elements
.............................................................................. 14–
13 14.8. Steel Plate With a Hole
..................................................................................
................................ 14–15 15.1. Plot of a Z Cross Section
..................................................................................
................................ 15–2 15.2. Types of Solid Section Cell Mesh
..................................................................................
.................... 15–4 15.3. BeamTool with Subtypes Drop Down List Displayed
........................................................................ 15–6
15.4. Lateral-Torsional Buckling of a Cantilever I-Beam
........................................................................... 15–13
15.5. Diagram of a Beam With Deformation Indicated
............................................................................ 15–14
16.1. Plot of a Shell Section
..................................................................................
.................................... 16–2 16.2. Shell Tool With Layup Page
Displayed
..................................................................................
........... 16–4 16.3. Shell Tool With Section Controls Page Displayed
.............................................................................. 16–
4 16.4. Shell Tool With Summary Page Displayed
..................................................................................
...... 16–5
List of Tables
1.1. Structural Element Types
..................................................................................
.................................. 1–2 2.1. Basic Tab Options
..................................................................................
............................................. 2–3 2.2. Sol'n Options Tab Options
..................................................................................
................................. 2–4 2.3. Nonlinear Tab Options
..................................................................................
...................................... 2–4 2.4. Advanced NL Tab Options
..................................................................................
................................. 2–5
xxi
ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide 2.5. Loads Applicable in a Static Analysis
..................................................................................
................. 2–8 3.1. Analysis Types and Options
..................................................................................
............................... 3–2 3.2. Loads Applicable in a Modal Analysis
..................................................................................
................ 3–5 3.3. Load Commands for a Modal Analysis
..................................................................................
............... 3–5 3.4. Load Step Options
..................................................................................
............................................ 3–6 3.5. Expansion Pass Options
..................................................................................
.................................... 3–9 3.6. Symmetric System Eigensolver Choices
..................................................................................
........... 3–17 4.1. Analysis Types and Options
..................................................................................
............................... 4–4 4.2. Applicable Loads in a Harmonic Response
Analysis
.............................................................................. 4–7
4.3. Load Commands for a Harmonic Response Analysis
............................................................................ 4–8
4.4. Load Step Options
..................................................................................
............................................ 4–9 4.5. Expansion Pass Options
..................................................................................
.................................. 4–22 5.1. Transient Tab Options
..................................................................................
....................................... 5–8 5.2. Options for the First Load Step-
Mode Superposition Analysis
............................................................. 5–15 5.3. Options
for the First Load Step-Reduced Analysis
.............................................................................. 5–
22 5.4. Expansion Pass Options
..................................................................................
.................................. 5–24 5.5. Damping for Different Analysis Types
..................................................................................
.............. 5–36 5.6. Damping Matrix Formulation with Different Damping
Coefficients .................................................... 5–39 6.1.
Analysis Types and Options
..................................................................................
............................... 6–4 6.2. Load Step Options
..................................................................................
............................................ 6–4 6.3. Solution Items Available in
a PSD Analysis
..................................................................................
....... 6–21 6.4. Organization of Results Data from a PSD Analysis
.............................................................................. 6–
22 8.1. Suggested Mooney-Rivlin Constants
..................................................................................
............... 8–23 8.2. Data Locations in Stress and Strain Input Arrays
.................................................................................
8–24 9.1. Experimental Details for Case 1 and 2 Models and Blatz-Ko
.................................................................. 9–2 9.2.
Experimental Details for Case 3 Models
..................................................................................
............. 9–2 9.3. Hyperelastic Curve Fitting Model Types
..................................................................................
............. 9–4 9.4. Creep Data Types and Abbreviations
..................................................................................
................. 9–9 9.5. Creep Model and Data/Type Attribute
..................................................................................
............... 9–9 9.6. Creep Models and Abbreviations
..................................................................................
..................... 9–11 9.7. Viscoelastic Data Types and Abbreviations
..................................................................................
...... 9–16 15.1. ANSYS Cross Section Commands
..................................................................................
................... 15–2 15.2. ANSYS Commands for Specifying Nonlinear General
Beam Section Data ........................................ 15–10 16.1. ANSYS Cross
Section Commands
..................................................................................
................... 16–1 16.2. ANSYS Commands for Specifying Preintegrated Shell
Section Data .................................................. 16–6
xxii
Chapter 1: Overview of Structural Analyses
1.1. Definition of Structural Analysis
Structural analysis is probably the most common application of the finite element
method. The term structural (or structure) implies not only civil engineering
structures such as bridges and buildings, but also naval, aeronautical, and
mechanical structures such as ship hulls, aircraft bodies, and machine housings,
as well as mechanical components such as pistons, machine parts, and tools.
1.2. Types of Structural Analysis

The seven types of structural analyses available in the ANSYS family of products
are explained below. The primary unknowns (nodal degrees of freedom) calculated in
a structural analysis are displacements. Other quantities, such as strains,
stresses, and reaction forces, are then derived from the nodal displacements.
Structural analyses are available in the ANSYS Multiphysics, ANSYS Mechanical,
ANSYS Structural, and ANSYS Professional programs only. You can perform the
following types of structural analyses. Each of these analysis types are discussed
in detail in this manual. Static Analysis--Used to determine displacements,
stresses, etc. under static loading conditions. Both linear and nonlinear static
analyses. Nonlinearities can include plasticity, stress stiffening, large
deflection, large strain, hyperelasticity, contact surfaces, and creep. Modal
Analysis--Used to calculate the natural frequencies and mode shapes of a
structure. Different mode extraction methods are available. Harmonic Analysis--
Used to determine the response of a structure to harmonically time-varying loads.
Transient Dynamic Analysis--Used to determine the response of a structure to
arbitrarily time-varying loads. All nonlinearities mentioned under Static Analysis
above are allowed. Spectrum Analysis--An extension of the modal analysis, used to
calculate stresses and strains due to a response spectrum or a PSD input (random
vibrations). Buckling Analysis--Used to calculate the buckling loads and determine
the buckling mode shape. Both linear (eigenvalue) buckling and nonlinear buckling
analyses are possible. Explicit Dynamic Analysis--This type of structural analysis
is only available in the ANSYS LS-DYNA program. ANSYS LS-DYNA provides an
interface to the LS-DYNA explicit finite element program. Explicit dynamic
analysis is used to calculate fast solutions for large deformation dynamics and
complex contact problems. Explicit dynamic analysis is described in the ANSYS LS-
DYNA User's Guide. In addition to the above analysis types, several special-
purpose features are available: • • • • • Fracture mechanics Composites Fatigue p-
Method Beam Analyses
Chapter 1: Overview of Structural Analyses
1.3. Elements Used in Structural Analyses

Most ANSYS element types are structural elements, ranging from simple spars and
beams to more complex layered shells and large strain solids. Most types of
structural analyses can use any of these elements. Note — Explicit dynamics
analysis can use only the explicit dynamic elements (LINK160, BEAM161, PLANE162,
SHELL163, SOLID164, COMBI165, MASS166, LINK167, and SOLID168).
Table 1.1 Structural Element Types

Category Spars Beams Pipes 2-D Solids 3-D Solids Shells Solid-Shell Interface
Contact Coupled-Field Specialty Explicit Dynamics LINK1, LINK8, LINK10, LINK180
BEAM3, BEAM4, BEAM23, BEAM24, BEAM44, BEAM54, BEAM188, BEAM189 PIPE16, PIPE17,
PIPE18, PIPE20, PIPE59, PIPE60 PLANE2, PLANE25, PLANE42, HYPER56, HYPER74,
PLANE82, PLANE83, HYPER84, VISCO88, VISCO106, VISCO108, PLANE145, PLANE146,
PLANE182, PLANE183 SOLID45, SOLID46, HYPER58, SOLID64, SOLID65, HYPER86, VISCO89,
SOLID92, SOLID95, VISCO107, SOLID147, SOLID148, HYPER158, SOLID185, SOLID186,
SOLID187, SOLID191 SHELL28, SHELL41, SHELL43, SHELL51, SHELL61, SHELL63, SHELL91,
SHELL93, SHELL99, SHELL150, SHELL181 SOLSH190 INTER192, INTER193, INTER194,
INTER195 CONTAC12, CONTAC52, TARGE169, TARGE170, CONTA171, CONTA172, CONTA173,
CONTA174, CONTA175 SOLID5, PLANE13, FLUID29, FLUID30, FLUID38, SOLID62, FLUID79,
FLUID80, FLUID81, SOLID98, FLUID129, INFIN110, INFIN111, FLUID116, FLUID130
COMBIN7, LINK11, COMBIN14, MASS21, MATRIX27, COMBIN37, COMBIN39, COMBIN40,
MATRIX50, SURF153, SURF154 LINK160, BEAM161, PLANE162, SHELL163, SOLID164,
COMBI165, MASS166, LINK167, SOLID168 Element Name(s)
1.4. Material Model Interface

For analyses described in this guide, if you are using the GUI, you must specify
the material you will be simulating using an intuitive material model interface.
This interface uses a hierarchical tree structure of material categories, which is
intended to assist you in choosing the appropriate model for your analysis. See
Section 1.2.4.4: Material Model Interface in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for
details on the material model interface.
1.5. Types of Solution Methods

Two solution methods are available for solving structural problems in the ANSYS
family of products: the hmethod and the p-method. The h-method can be used for any
type of analysis, but the p-method can be used only for linear structural static
analyses. Depending on the problem to be solved, the h-method usually requires a
finer mesh than the p-method. The p-method provides an excellent way to solve a
problem to a desired level of accuracy while using a coarse mesh. In general, the
discussions in this manual focus on the procedures required for the h-method of
solution. Chapter 14, “p-Method Structural Static Analysis” discusses procedures
specific to the p-method.
1–2
Chapter 2: Structural Static Analysis
2.1. Definition of Static Analysis
A static analysis calculates the effects of steady loading conditions on a
structure, while ignoring inertia and damping effects, such as those caused by
time-varying loads. A static analysis can, however, include steady inertia loads
(such as gravity and rotational velocity), and time-varying loads that can be
approximated as static equivalent loads (such as the static equivalent wind and
seismic loads commonly defined in many building codes). Static analysis is used to
determine the displacements, stresses, strains, and forces in structures or
components caused by loads that do not induce significant inertia and damping
effects. Steady loading and response conditions are assumed; that is, the loads
and the structure's response are assumed to vary slowly with respect to time. The
kinds of loading that can be applied in a static analysis include: • • • • •
Externally applied forces and pressures Steady-state inertial forces (such as
gravity or rotational velocity) Imposed (nonzero) displacements Temperatures (for
thermal strain) Fluences (for nuclear swelling)
More information about the loads that you can apply in a static analysis appears
in Section 2.3.4: Apply the Loads.
2.2. Linear vs. Nonlinear Static Analyses

A static analysis can be either linear or nonlinear. All types of nonlinearities
are allowed - large deformations, plasticity, creep, stress stiffening, contact
(gap) elements, hyperelastic elements, and so on. This chapter focuses on linear
static analyses, with brief references to nonlinearities. Details of how to handle
nonlinearities are described in Chapter 8, “Nonlinear Structural Analysis”.
2.3. Performing a Static Analysis

The procedure for a static analysis consists of these tasks: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Section 2.3.1: Build the Model Section 2.3.2: Set Solution Controls Section 2.3.3:
Set Additional Solution Options Section 2.3.4: Apply the Loads Section 2.3.5:
Solve the Analysis Section 2.3.6: Review the Results
2.3.1. Build the Model

See Section 1.2: Building a Model in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide. For further
details, see the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide.
2.3.1.1. Points to Remember

Keep the following points in mind when doing a static analysis:
Chapter 2: Structural Static Analysis • • You can use both linear and nonlinear
structural elements. Material properties can be linear or nonlinear, isotropic or
orthotropic, and constant or temperature-dependent. – – – You must define
stiffness in some form (for example, Young's modulus (EX), hyperelastic
coefficients, and so on). For inertia loads (such as gravity), you must define the
data required for mass calculations, such as density (DENS). For thermal loads
(temperatures), you must define the coefficient of thermal expansion (ALPX).
Note the following information about mesh density: • • Regions where stresses or
strains vary rapidly (usually areas of interest) require a relatively finer mesh
than regions where stresses or strains are nearly constant (within an element).
While considering the influence of nonlinearities, remember that the mesh should
be able to capture the effects of the nonlinearities. For example, plasticity
requires a reasonable integration point density (and therefore a fine element
mesh) in areas with high plastic deformation gradients.
2.3.2. Set Solution Controls

Setting solution controls involves defining the analysis type and common analysis
options for an analysis, as well as specifying load step options for it. When you
are doing a structural static analysis, you can take advantage of a streamlined
solution interface (called the Solution Controls dialog box) for setting these
options. The Solution Controls dialog box provides default settings that will work
well for many structural static analyses, which means that you may need to set
only a few, if any, of the options. Because the streamlined solution interface is
the recommended tool for setting solution controls in a structural static
analysis, it is the method that is presented in this chapter. If you prefer not to
use the Solution Controls dialog box (Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Sol'n
Controls), you can set solution controls for your analysis using the standard set
of ANSYS solution commands and the standard corresponding menu paths (Main Menu>
Solution> Unabridged Menu> option). For a general overview of the Solution
Controls dialog box, see Section 3.5: Using Special Solution Controls for Certain
Types of Structural Analyses in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.
2.3.2.1. Access the Solution Controls Dialog Box

To access the Solution Controls dialog box, choose menu path Main Menu> Solution>
Analysis Type> Sol'n Controls. The following sections provide brief descriptions
of the options that appear on each tab of the dialog box. For details about how to
set these options, select the tab that you are interested in (from within the
ANSYS program), and then click the Help button. Chapter 8, “Nonlinear Structural
Analysis” also contains details about the nonlinear options introduced in this
chapter.

The Basic tab is active when you access the dialog box. The controls that appear
on the Basic tab provide the minimum amount of data that ANSYS needs for the
analysis. Once you are satisfied with the settings on the Basic tab, you do not
need to progress through the remaining tabs unless you want to adjust the default
settings for the more advanced controls. As soon as you click OK on any tab of the
dialog box, the settings are applied to the ANSYS database and the dialog box
closes.
2–2
Section 2.3: Performing a Static Analysis You can use the Basic tab to set the
options listed in Table 2.1: “Basic Tab Options”. For specific information about
using the Solution Controls dialog box to set these options, access the dialog
box, select the Basic tab, and click the Help button.
Table 2.1 Basic Tab Options

Option Specify analysis type [ANTYPE, NLGEOM] For more information on this option,
see: • • • Section 1.2.6.1: Defining the Analysis Type and Analysis Options in the
ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide Chapter 8, “Nonlinear Structural Analysis” in the ANSYS
Structural Analysis Guide Section 3.10: Restarting an Analysis in the ANSYS Basic
Analysis Guide Section 2.4: The Role of Time in Tracking in the ANSYS Basic
Analysis Guide Section 2.7.1: General Options in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide
Control time settings, including: time at end of load step [TIME], automatic time
stepping [AUTOTS], and number of substeps to be taken in a load step [NSUBST or
DELTIM] Specify solution data to write to database [OUTRES]
• •
Section 2.7.4: Output Controls in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide
Special considerations for setting these options in a static analysis include: •

When setting ANTYPE and NLGEOM, choose Small Displacement Static if you are
performing a new analysis and you want to ignore large deformation effects such as
large deflection, large rotation, and large strain. Choose Large Displacement
Static if you expect large deflections (as in the case of a long, slender bar
under bending) or large strains (as in a metal-forming problem). Choose Restart
Current Analysis if you want to restart a failed nonlinear analysis, or you have
previously completed a static analysis, and you want to specify additional loads.
When setting TIME, remember that this load step option specifies time at the end
of the load step. The default value is 1.0 for the first load step. For subsequent
load steps, the default is 1.0 plus the time specified for the previous load step.
Although time has no physical meaning in a static analysis (except in the case of
creep, viscoplasticity, or other rate-dependent material behavior), it is used as
a convenient way of referring to load steps and substeps (see Chapter 2, “Loading”
in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide). When setting OUTRES, keep this caution in
mind: Caution: By default, only 1000 results sets can be written to the results
file (Jobname.RST). If this number is exceeded (based on your OUTRES
specification), the program will terminate with an error. Use the command
/CONFIG,NRES to increase the limit (see Chapter 19, “Memory Management and
Configuration” in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide).
2.3.2.3. The Transient Tab

The Transient tab contains transient analysis controls; it is available only if
you choose a transient analysis and remains grayed out when you choose a static
analysis. For these reasons, it is not described here.
2–3
2.3.2.4. Using the Sol'n Options Tab

You can use the Sol'n Options tab to set the options listed in Table 2.2: “Sol'n
Options Tab Options”. For specific information about using the Solution Controls
dialog box to set these options, access the dialog box, select the Sol'n Options
tab, and click the Help button.
Table 2.2 Sol'n Options Tab Options

Option Specify equation solver [EQSLV] For more information about this option, see
the following section(s) in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide: • Section 3.2:
Selecting a Solver through Section 3.3.9: The Automatic Iterative (Fast) Solver
Option Section 3.10.2: Multiframe Restart
Specify parameters for multiframe restart [RESCONTROL]
Special considerations for setting these options in a static analysis include: •

When setting EQSLV, specify one of these solvers: – – – – – – – Program chosen
solver (ANSYS selects a solver for you, based on the physics of the problem)
Sparse direct solver (default for linear and nonlinear, static and full transient
analyses) Preconditioned Conjugate Gradient (PCG) solver (recommended for large
models/high wavefronts, bulky structures) Algebraic Multigrid (AMG) solver
(applicable in the same situations as the PCG solver, but provides parallel
processing; for faster turnaround times when used in a multiprocessor environment)
Distributed Domain Solver (DDS) provides parallel processing on multiple systems
across a network Iterative solver (auto-select; for linear static/full transient
structural or steady-state thermal analyses only; recommended) Frontal direct
solver
Note — The AMG and DDS solvers are part of Parallel Performance for ANSYS, which
is a separately-licensed product. See Chapter 14, “Improving ANSYS Performance and
Parallel Performance for ANSYS” in the ANSYS Advanced Analysis Techniques Guide
for more information about these solvers.
2.3.2.5. Using the Nonlinear Tab

You can use the Nonlinear tab to set the options listed in Table 2.3: “Nonlinear
Tab Options”. For specific information about using the Solution Controls dialog
box to set these options, access the dialog box, select the Nonlinear tab, and
click the Help button.
Table 2.3 Nonlinear Tab Options

Option Activate line search [LNSRCH] For more information about this option, see
the following section(s) in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide: • • Section
8.5.2.3.5: Line Search Option Section 8.10.2.4: Using Line Search
2–4
Section 2.3: Performing a Static Analysis
Option Activate a predictor on the DOF solution [PRED] Specify the maximum number
of iterations allowed per substep [NEQIT] Specify whether you want to include
creep calculation [RATE] Set convergence criteria [CNVTOL] Control bisections
[CUTCONTROL] For more information about this option, see the following section(s)
in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide: • • • • • • Section 8.5.2.3.4: Predictor-
Corrector Option Section 8.5.2.3.3: Maximum Number of Equilibrium Iterations
Section 8.3.1.5: Creep Section 8.5.3.2.1: Creep Criteria Section 8.5.2.3.2:
Convergence Criteria Section 8.5.2.3.6: Cutback Criteria
2.3.2.6. Using the Advanced NL Tab

You can use the Advanced NL tab to set the options listed in Table 2.4: “Advanced
NL Tab Options”. For specific information about using the Solution Controls dialog
box to set these options, access the dialog box, select the Advanced NL tab, and
Table 2.4 Advanced NL Tab Options

Option Specify analysis termination criteria [NCNV] Control activation and
termination of the arc-length method [ARCLEN, ARCTRM] For more information about
this option, see the following section(s) in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide:
• • • Section 8.5.2.3.3: Maximum Number of Equilibrium Iterations Section
8.10.2.5: Using the Arc-Length Method Chapter 2, “Loading” in the ANSYS Basic
Analysis Guide
2.3.3. Set Additional Solution Options

This section discusses additional options that you can set for the solution. These
options do not appear on the Solution Controls dialog box because they are used
very infrequently, and their default settings rarely need to be changed. ANSYS
menu paths are provided in this section to help you access these options for those
cases in which you choose to override the ANSYS-assigned defaults. Many of the
options that appear in this section are nonlinear options, and are described
further in Chapter 8, “Nonlinear Structural Analysis”.
2.3.3.1. Stress Stiffening Effects

Some elements, including those in the 18x family of elements, include stress
stiffening effects regardless of the SSTIF command setting. To determine whether
an element includes stress stiffening, refer to the appropriate element
description in the ANSYS Elements Reference. By default, stress stiffening effects
are ON when NLGEOM is ON. Specific situations in which you can turn OFF stress
stiffening effects include: • Stress stiffening is relevant only in nonlinear
analyses. If you are performing a linear analysis [NLGEOM,OFF], you can turn
stress stiffening OFF.
2–5
Chapter 2: Structural Static Analysis • Prior to the analysis, you know that the
structure is not likely to fail because of buckling (bifurcation, snap through).
Including stress stiffness terms, in general, accelerates nonlinear convergence

characteristics. Keeping in mind the points listed above, you may choose to turn
stress stiffening OFF for specific problems in which convergence difficulties are
seen; for example, local failures. Command(s): SSTIF GUI: Main Menu> Solution>
Unabridged Menu> Analysis Options
2.3.3.2. Newton-Raphson Option

Use this analysis option only in a nonlinear analysis. This option specifies how
often the tangent matrix is updated during solution. You can specify one of these
values: • • • • • Program-chosen (default) Full Modified Initial stiffness Full
with unsymmetric matrix Command(s): NROPT GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged
Menu> Analysis Options
2.3.3.3. Prestress Effects Calculation

Use this analysis option to perform a prestressed analysis on the same model, such
as a prestressed modal analysis. The default is OFF. Note — The stress stiffening
effects and the prestress effect calculation both control the generation of the
stress stiffness matrix, and therefore should not be used together in an analysis.
If both are specified, the last option specified will override the previous
setting. Command(s): PSTRES GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis
Options
2.3.3.4. Mass Matrix Formulation

Use this analysis option if you plan to apply inertial loads on the structure
(such as gravity and spinning loads). You can specify one of these values: • •
Default (depends on element type) Lumped mass approximation Note — For a static
analysis, the mass matrix formulation you use does not significantly affect the
solution accuracy (assuming that the mesh is fine enough). However, if you want to
do a prestressed dynamic analysis on the same model, the choice of mass matrix
formulation may be important; see the appropriate dynamic analysis section for
recommendations. Command(s): LUMPM GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu>
Analysis Options
2–6
Section 2.3: Performing a Static Analysis
2.3.3.5. Reference Temperature

This load step option is used for thermal strain calculations. Reference
temperature can be made material-dependent with the MP,REFT command. Command(s):
TREF GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Other> Reference Temp
2.3.3.6. Mode Number

This load step option is used for axisymmetric harmonic elements. Command(s): MODE
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Other> For Harmonic Ele
2.3.3.7. Creep Criteria

This nonlinear load step option specifies the creep criterion for automatic time
stepping. Command(s): CRPLIM GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Load Step
Opts> Nonlinear> Creep Criterion
2.3.3.8. Printed Output

Use this load step option to include any results data on the output file
(Jobname.OUT). Command(s): OUTPR GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Load
Step Opts> Output Ctrls> Solu Printout Caution: Proper use of multiple OUTPR
commands can sometimes be a little tricky. See Section 2.7.4: Output Controls in
the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for more information on how to use this command.
2.3.3.9. Extrapolation of Results

Use this load step option to review element integration point results by copying
them to the nodes instead of extrapolating them (default when no material
nonlinearities are present). Command(s): ERESX GUI: Main Menu> Solution>
Unabridged Menu> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> Integration Pt
2.3.4. Apply the Loads

After you set the desired solution options, you are ready to apply loads to the
model.
2.3.4.1. Load Types

All of the following load types are applicable in a static analysis.
2.3.4.1.1. Displacements (UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ)

These are DOF constraints usually specified at model boundaries to define rigid
support points. They can also indicate symmetry boundary conditions and points of
known motion. The directions implied by the labels are in the nodal coordinate
system.
2.3.4.1.2. Forces (FX, FY, FZ) and Moments (MX, MY, MZ)
These are concentrated loads usually specified on the model exterior. The
directions implied by the labels are in the nodal coordinate system.
2–7
2.3.4.1.3. Pressures (PRES)

These are surface loads, also usually applied on the model exterior. Positive
values of pressure act towards the element face (resulting in a compressive
effect).
2.3.4.1.4. Temperatures (TEMP)

These are applied to study the effects of thermal expansion or contraction (that
is, thermal stresses). The coefficient of thermal expansion must be defined if
thermal strains are to be calculated. You can read in temperatures from a thermal
analysis [LDREAD], or you can specify temperatures directly, using the BF family
of commands.
2.3.4.1.5. Fluences (FLUE)

These are applied to study the effects of swelling (material enlargement due to
neutron bombardment or other causes) or creep. They are used only if you input a
swelling or creep equation.
2.3.4.1.6. Gravity, Spinning, Etc.

These are inertia loads that affect the entire structure. Density (or mass in some
form) must be defined if inertia effects are to be included.
2.3.4.2. Apply Loads to the Model

Except for inertia loads, which are independent of the model, you can define loads
either on the solid model (keypoints, lines, and areas) or on the finite element
model (nodes and elements). You can also apply boundary conditions via TABLE type
array parameters (see Section 2.3.4.2.1: Applying Loads Using TABLE Type Array
Parameters) or as function boundary conditions (see Section 2.6.15: Applying Loads
Using Function Boundary Conditions). Table 2.5: “Loads Applicable in a Static
Analysis” summarizes the loads applicable to a static analysis. In an analysis,
loads can be applied, removed, operated on, or listed.
Table 2.5 Loads Applicable in a Static Analysis

Load Type Displacement (UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ) Force, Moment (FX, FY, FZ,
MX, MY, MZ) Pressure (PRES) Temperature (TEMP), Fluence (FLUE) Gravity, Spinning,
and so on Category Constraints Forces Surface Loads For details on commands and
menu paths for defining these loads, see... Section 2.6.3: DOF Constraints in the
ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide Section 2.6.6: Forces (Concentrated Loads) in the ANSYS
Basic Analysis Guide Section 2.6.7: Surface Loads in the ANSYS Basic Analysis
Guide
Body Loads Section 2.6.8: Body Loads in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide Inertia
Loads Section 2.6.9: Inertia Loads in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide
2.3.4.2.1. Applying Loads Using TABLE Type Array Parameters

You can also apply loads using TABLE type array parameters. For details on using
tabular boundary conditions, see Section 2.6.14: Applying Loads Using TABLE Type
Array Parameters in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide. In a structural analysis,
valid primary variables are TIME, TEMP, and location (X, Y, Z). 2–8
Section 2.3: Performing a Static Analysis When defining the table, TIME must be in
ascending order in the table index (as in any table array). You can define a table
array parameter via command or interactively. For more information on defining
table array parameters, see the ANSYS APDL Programmer's Guide.
2.3.4.3. Calculating Inertia Relief

You can use a static analysis to perform inertia relief calculations, which
calculate the accelerations that will counterbalance the applied loads. You can
think of inertia relief as an equivalent free-body analysis. Issue this command
before SOLVE as part of the inertia load commands. Your model should meet the
following requirements: • • The model should not contain axisymmetric elements,
substructures, or nonlinearities. Models with a mixture of 2-D and 3-D element
types are not recommended. The effects of offsets and tapering are ignored for
beam elements (BEAM23, BEAM24, BEAM44, and BEAM54) as well as for layered elements
(SHELL91, SHELL99, SOLID46, and SOLID191). The effects of unsymmetrical layups for
layered elements are also ignored. (Breaking up each tapered element into several
elements will give a more accurate solution.) Data required for mass calculations
(such as density) must be specified. Specify only the minimum number of
displacement constraints - those required to prevent rigid-body motion. Three
constraints (or fewer, depending on the element type) are necessary for 2-D models
and six (or fewer) are necessary for 3-D models. Additional constraints, such as
those required to impose symmetry conditions, are permitted, but check for zero
reaction forces at all the constraints to make sure that the model is not
overconstrained for inertia relief. The loads for which inertia relief
calculations are desired should be applied. Command(s): IRLF,1 GUI: Main Menu>
Solution> Load Step Opts> Other> Inertia Relief
• •
2.3.4.3.1. Inertia Relief Output

Use the IRLIST command to print the output from inertia relief calculations. This
output consists of the translational and rotational accelerations required to
balance the applied loads and can be used by other programs to perform kinematics
studies. The summary listing of mass and moments of inertia (produced during
solution) is accurate, not approximate. The reaction forces at the constraints
will be zero because the calculated inertia forces balance the applied forces.
Inertia relief output is stored in the database rather than in the results file
(Jobname.RST). When you issue IRLIST, ANSYS pulls the information from the
database, which contains the inertia relief output from the most recent solution
[SOLVE or PSOLVE]. Command(s): IRLIST GUI: No GUI equivalent.
2.3.4.3.2. Partial Inertia Relief Calculations

You can also do a partial inertia relief calculation. Use the partial solution
method [PSOLVE], as shown in the command input below:
/PREP7 ... ... MP,DENS,... ... ...
! Generate model, define density
2–9
FINISH /SOLU D,... F,... SF,... OUTPR,ALL,ALL IRLF,1 PSOLVE,ELFORM PSOLVE,ELPREP
IRLIST FINISH
! Specify only minimum no. of constraints ! Other loads ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Activates

printout of all items Can also be set to -1 for precise mass and load summary
only, no inertia relief Calculates element matrices Modifies element matrices and
calculates inertia relief terms Lists the mass summary and total load summary
tables
See the ANSYS Commands Reference for discussions of the OUTPR, IRLF, IRLIST, and
PSOLVE commands.
2.3.4.3.3. Using a Macro to Perform Inertia Relief Calculations

If you need to do inertia relief calculations frequently, you can write a macro
containing the above commands. Macros are described in the ANSYS APDL Programmer's
Guide.
2.3.5. Solve the Analysis

You are now ready to solve the analysis. 1. Save a backup copy of the database to
a named file. You can then retrieve your model by reentering the ANSYS program and
issuing RESUME. Command(s): SAVE GUI: Utility Menu> File> Save as Start solution
calculations. Command(s): SOLVE GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS If you
want the analysis to include additional loading conditions (that is, multiple load
steps), you will need to repeat the process of applying loads, specifying load
step options, saving, and solving for each load step. (Other methods for handling
multiple load steps are described in Chapter 2, “Loading” in the ANSYS Basic
Analysis Guide.) Leave SOLUTION. Command(s): FINISH GUI: Close the Solution menu.
2.
3.
4.

Results from a static analysis are written to the structural results file,
Jobname.RST. They consist of the following data: • Primary data: – • Nodal
displacements (UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ)
Derived data: – – – Nodal and element stresses Nodal and element strains Element
forces
2–10
Section 2.3: Performing a Static Analysis – – Nodal reaction forces and so on
2.3.6.1. Postprocessors
You can review these results using POST1, the general postprocessor, and POST26,
the time-history processor. • • POST1 is used to review results over the entire
model at specific substeps (time-points). Some typical POST1 operations are
explained below. POST26 is used in nonlinear static analyses to track specific
result items over the applied load history. See Chapter 8, “Nonlinear Structural
Analysis” for the use of POST26 in a nonlinear static analysis. For a complete
description of all postprocessing functions, see Chapter 4, “An Overview of
Postprocessing” in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.

• • To review results in POST1 or POST26, the database must contain the same model
for which the solution was calculated. The results file (Jobname.RST) must be
available.
2.3.6.3. Reviewing Results Data

1. Read in the database from the database file. Command(s): RESUME GUI: Utility
Menu> File> Resume from Read in the desired set of results. Identify the data set
by load step and substep numbers or by time. (If you specify a time value for
which no results are available, the ANSYS program will perform linear
interpolation on all the data to calculate the results at that time.) Command(s):
SET GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> By Load Step Perform the
necessary POST1 operations. Typical static analysis POST1 operations are explained
below.
2.
3.
2.3.6.4. Typical Postprocessing Operations

Option: Display Deformed Shape Use the PLDISP command to display a deformed shape
(Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Deformed Shape). The KUND field on
PLDISP gives you the option of overlaying the undeformed shape on the display.
Option: List Reaction Forces and Moments The PRRSOL command lists reaction forces
and moments at the constrained nodes (Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results>
Reaction Solu). To display reaction forces, issue /PBC,RFOR,,1 and then request a
node or element display [NPLOT or EPLOT]. (Use RMOM instead of RFOR for reaction
moments.) Option: List Nodal Forces and Moments
2–11
Chapter 2: Structural Static Analysis Use the PRESOL,F (or M) command to list
nodal forces and moments (Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Element
Solution). You can list the sum of all nodal forces and moments for a selected set
of nodes. Select a set of nodes and use this feature to find out the total force
acting on those nodes: Command(s): FSUM GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Nodal
Calcs> Total Force Sum You can also check the total force and total moment at each
selected node. For a body in equilibrium, the total load is zero at all nodes
except where an applied load or reaction load exists: Command(s): NFORCE GUI: Main
Menu> General Postproc> Nodal Calcs> Sum @ Each Node The FORCE command (Main Menu>
General Postproc> Options for Outp) dictates which component of the forces is
being reviewed: • • • • Total (default) Static component Damping component Inertia
component
For a body in equilibrium, the total load (using all FORCE components) is zero at
all nodes except where an applied load or reaction load exists. Option: Line
Element Results For line elements, such as beams, spars, and pipes, use ETABLE to
gain access to derived data (stresses, strains, and so on) (Main Menu> General
Postproc> Element Table> Define Table). Results data are identified by a
combination of a label and a sequence number or component name on the ETABLE
command. See the ETABLE discussion in The General Postprocessor (POST1) in the
ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for details. Option: Error Estimation For linear static
analyses using solid or shell elements, use the PRERR command to list the
estimated solution error due to mesh discretization (Main Menu> General Postproc>
List Results> Percent Error). This command calculates and lists the percent error
in structural energy norm (SEPC), which represents the error relative to a
particular mesh discretization. Option: Structural Energy Error Estimation Use
PLESOL,SERR to contour the element-by-element structural energy error (SERR) (Main
Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Element Solu). Regions of high
SERR on the contour display are good candidates for mesh refinement. (You can
activate automatic mesh refinement by means of the ADAPT command - see the ANSYS
Modeling and Meshing Guide for more information.) See Section 5.3.6: Estimating
Solution Error in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for more details about error
estimation. Option: Contour Displays Use PLNSOL and PLESOL to contour almost any
result item, such as stresses (SX, SY, SZ...), strains (EPELX, EPELY, EPELZ...),
and displacements (UX, UY, UZ...) (Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results>
Contour Plot> Nodal Solu or Element Solu). The KUND field on PLNSOL and PLESOL
gives you the option of overlaying the undeformed shape on the display. 2–12
Section 2.4: A Sample Static Analysis (GUI Method) Use PLETAB and PLLS to contour
element table data and line element data (Main Menu> General Postproc> Element
Table> Plot Element Table and Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour
Plot> Line Elem Res). Caution: Derived data, such as stresses and strains, are
averaged at the nodes by the PLNSOL command. This averaging results in "smeared"
values at nodes where elements of different materials, different shell
thicknesses, or other discontinuities meet. To avoid the smearing effect, use
selecting (described in Chapter 7, “Selecting and Components” in the ANSYS Basic
Analysis Guide) to select elements of the same material, same shell thickness, and
so on before issuing PLNSOL. Alternatively, use PowerGraphics with the AVRES
command (Main Menu> General Postproc> Options for Outp) to not average results
across different materials and/or different shell thicknesses. Option: Vector
Displays Use PLVECT to view vector displays (Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot
Results> Vector Plot> Predefined) and PRVECT to view vector listings (Main Menu>
General Postproc> List Results> Vector Data). Vector displays (not to be confused
with vector mode) are an effective way of viewing vector quantities, such as
displacement (DISP), rotation (ROT), and principal stresses (S1, S2, S3). Option:
Tabular Listings Use these commands to produce tabular listings: Command(s):
PRNSOL (nodal results), PRESOL (element-by-element results) PRRSOL (reaction
data), and so on GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> solution option
Use the NSORT and ESORT commands to sort the data before listing them (Main Menu>
General Postproc> List Results> Sorted Listing> Sort Nodes or Sort Elems). Other
Postprocessing Capabilities Many other postprocessing functions - mapping results
onto a path, load case combinations, and so on - are available in POST1. See
Chapter 4, “An Overview of Postprocessing” in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for
details.
2.4. A Sample Static Analysis (GUI Method)

In this sample analysis, you will run a static analysis of an Allen wrench.

An Allen wrench (10 mm across the flats) is torqued by means of a 100 N force at
its end. Later, a 20 N downward force is applied at the same end, at the same time
retaining the original 100 N torquing force. The objective is to determine the
stress intensity in the wrench under these two loading conditions.
2.4.2. Problem Specifications

The following dimensions are used for this problem: Width across flats = 10 mm
Configuration = hexagonal Length of shank = 7.5 cm
2–13
Chapter 2: Structural Static Analysis Length of handle = 20 cm Bend radius = 1 cm
Modulus of elasticity = 2.07 x 1011 Pa Applied torquing force = 100 N Applied
downward force = 20 N
2.4.3. Problem Sketch

Figure 2.1 Diagram of Allen Wrench
2.4.3.1. Set the Analysis Title

1. 2. Choose menu path Utility Menu> File> Change Title. Type the text "Static
Analysis of an Allen Wrench" and click on OK.
2.4.3.2. Set the System of Units

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click once in the Input Window to make it active for text entry.
Type the command /UNITS,SI and press ENTER. Notice that the command is stored in
the history buffer, which can be accessed by clicking on the down arrow at the
right of the input window. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Parameters> Angular
Units. The Angular Units for Parametric Functions dialog box appears. In the drop
down menu for Units for angular parametric functions, select "Degrees DEG." Click
on OK.
2.4.3.3. Define Parameters

1. 2. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Parameters> Scalar Parameters. The Scalar
Parameters dialog box appears. Type the following parameters and their values in
the Selection field. Click on Accept after you define each parameter. For example,
first type “exx = 2.07e11” in the Selection field and then click on Accept.
Continue entering the remaining parameters and values in the same way.
Parameter EXX Value 2.07E11 Description Young's modulus is 2.07E11 Pa
2–14
¨ ¥ ¦£ ##©§ ## ¥¦£ #¤# ¥¥ ¢#¡ #
¥£ ¡ ¦¤¢ #¡ #¢¡ # #¡ #¢
Section 2.4: A Sample Static Analysis (GUI Method)
Parameter W_HEX W_FLAT L_SHANK L_HANDLE BENDRAD L_ELEM NO_D_HEX TOL .01 W_HEX*
TAN(30) .075 .2 .01 .0075 2 25E-6 Value Description Width of hex across flats =
.01 m Width of flat = .0058 m Length of shank (short end) .075 m Length of handle
(long end) .2 m Bend radius .01 m Element length .0075 m Number of divisions along
hex flat = 2 Tolerance for selecting node = 25E-6 m
Note — You can type the labels in upper- or lowercase; ANSYS always displays the
labels in uppercase. 3. 4. Click on Close. Click on SAVE_DB on the ANSYS Toolbar.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Element Type>
Add/Edit/Delete. Click on Add. The Library of Element Types dialog box appears. In
the scroll box on the left, click once on "Structural Solid." In the scroll box on
the right, click once on "Brick 8node 45." Click on Apply to define it as element
type 1. Scroll up the list on the right to "Quad 4node 42." Click once to select
it. Click on OK to define Quad 4node42 as element type 2. The Library of Element
Types dialog box closes. Click on Close in the Element Types dialog box.
2.4.3.5. Define Material Properties

1. 2. 3. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Material
Models. The Define Material Model Behavior dialog box appears. In the Material
Models Available window, double-click on the following options: Structural,
Linear, Elastic, Isotropic. A dialog box appears. Type the text EXX in the EX
field (for Young's modulus), and .3 for PRXY. Click on OK. This sets Young's
modulus to the parameter specified above. Material Model Number 1 appears in the
Material Models Defined window on the left. 4. Choose menu path Material> Exit to
remove the Define Material Model Behavior dialog box.
2.4.3.6. Create Hexagonal Area as Cross-Section

1. 2. 3. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Areas>
Polygon> By Side Length. The Polygon by Side Length dialog box appears. Enter 6
for number of sides. Enter W_FLAT for length of each side.
2–15
Chapter 2: Structural Static Analysis 4. Click on OK. A hexagon appears in the
ANSYS Graphics window.
2.4.3.7. Create Keypoints Along a Path

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create>
Keypoints> In Active CS. The Create Keypoints in Active Coordinate System dialog
box appears. Enter 7 for keypoint number. Type a 0 in each of the X, Y, Z location
fields. Click on Apply. Enter 8 for keypoint number. Enter 0,0,-L_SHANK for the X,
Y, Z location, and click on Apply. Enter 9 for keypoint number. Enter 0,L_HANDLE,-
L_SHANK for the X, Y, Z location, and click on OK.
2.4.3.8. Create Lines Along a Path

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Window
Controls> Window Options. The Window Options dialog box appears. In the Location
of triad drop down menu, select "At top left." Click on OK. Choose menu path
Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Pan/Zoom/Rotate. The Pan-Zoom-Rotate dialog box appears.
Click on "Iso" to generate an isometric view and click on Close. Choose menu path
Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> View Settings> Angle of Rotation. The Angle of Rotation
dialog box appears. Enter 90 for angle in degrees. In the Axis of rotation drop
down menu, select "Global Cartes X." Click on OK.
10. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Numbering. The Plot Numbering
Controls dialog box appears. 11. Click the Keypoint numbers radio button to turn
keypoint numbering on. 12. Click the Line numbers radio button to turn line
numbering on. 13. Click on OK. 14. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor>
Modeling> Create> Lines> Lines> Straight Line. The Create Straight Line picking
menu appears. 15. Click once on keypoints 4 and 1 to create a line between
keypoints 1 and 4. (If you have trouble reading the keypoint numbers in the ANSYS
Graphics window, use the controls on the Pan-Zoom-Rotate dialog box (Utility Menu>
PlotCtrls> Pan/Zoom/Rotate) to zoom in.) 16. Click once on keypoints 7 and 8 to
create a line between keypoints 7 and 8. 17. Click once on keypoints 8 and 9 to
create a line between keypoints 8 and 9. 18. Click on OK.
2–16
Section 2.4: A Sample Static Analysis (GUI Method)
2.4.3.9. Create Line from Shank to Handle

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Lines>
Line Fillet. The Line Fillet picking menu appears. Click once on lines 8 and 9.
Click on OK in the picking menu. The Line Fillet dialog box appears. Enter BENDRAD
for Fillet radius and click on OK. Click on SAVE_DB on the ANSYS Toolbar.
2.4.3.10. Cut Hex Section

In this step, you cut the hex section into two quadrilaterals. This step is
required to satisfy mapped meshing. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Choose menu path
Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Numbering. The Plot Numbering Controls dialog box
appears. Click the Keypoint numbers radio button to Off. Click on OK. Choose menu
path Utility Menu> Plot> Areas. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor>
Modeling> Operate> Booleans> Divide> With Options> Area by Line. The Divide Area
by Line picking menu appears. Click once on the shaded area, and click on OK.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> Plot> Lines. Click once on line 7. (If you have
trouble reading the line numbers in the ANSYS Graphics window, use the controls on
the Pan-Zoom-Rotate dialog box (Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Pan/Zoom/Rotate) to zoom
in.) Click on OK. The Divide Area by Line with Options dialog box appears. In the
Subtracted lines will be drop down menu, select Kept. Click OK.
9.
10. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Comp/Assembly> Create Component. The
Create Component dialog box appears. 11. Enter BOTAREA for component name. 12. In
the Component is made of drop down menu, select "Areas." 13. Click on OK.
2.4.3.11. Set Meshing Density

1. 2. 3. 4. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Size Cntrls> Lines>
Picked Lines. The Element Size on Picked Lines picking menu appears. Enter 1,2,6
in the picker, then press ENTER. Click on OK in the picking menu. The Element
Sizes on Picked Lines dialog box appears. Enter NO_D_HEX for number of element
divisions and click on OK.
2.4.3.12. Set Element Type for Area Mesh

In this step, set the element type to PLANE42, all quadrilaterals for the area
mesh.
2–17
Chapter 2: Structural Static Analysis 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Choose menu path Main
Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Elements> Elem Attributes. The Element
Attributes dialog box appears. In the Element type number drop down menu, select
“2 PLANE42” and click on OK. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing>
Mesher Opts. The Mesher Options dialog box appears. In the Mesher Type field,
click on the Mapped radio button and then click on OK. The Set Element Shape
dialog box appears. Click on OK to accept the default of Quad for 2-D shape key.
Click on SAVE_DB on the ANSYS Toolbar.
2.4.3.13. Generate Area Mesh

In this step, generate the area mesh you will later drag. 1. 2. 3. Choose menu
path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh> Areas> Mapped> 3 or 4 sided. The Mesh
Areas picking box appears. Click on Pick All. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Plot>
Elements.
2.4.3.14. Drag the 2-D Mesh to Produce 3-D Elements

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling>
Create> Elements> Elem Attributes. The Element Attributes dialog box appears. In
the Element type number drop down menu, select “1 SOLID45” and click on OK. Choose
menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Size Cntrls> Global> Size. The Global
Element Sizes dialog box appears. Enter L_ELEM for element edge length and click
on OK. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Numbering. Click the Line numbers
radio button to on if it is not already selected. Click on OK. Choose menu path
Utility Menu> Plot> Lines. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling>
Operate> Extrude> Areas> Along Lines. The Sweep Areas along Lines picking box
appears.
10. Click on Pick All. A second picking box appears. 11. Click once on lines 8,
10, and 9 (in that order). 12. Click on OK. The 3-D model appears in the ANSYS
Graphics window. 13. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Plot> Elements. 14. Click on
SAVE_DB on the ANSYS Toolbar.
2.4.3.15. Select BOTAREA Component and Delete 2-D Elements

1. 2. 2–18 Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Comp/Assembly> Select
Comp/Assembly. The Select Component or Assembly dialog appears. Click on OK to
accept the default of select BOTAREA component.
Section 2.4: A Sample Static Analysis (GUI Method) 3. 4. 5. 6. Choose menu path
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Clear> Areas. The Clear Areas picking menu
appears. Click on Pick All. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Everything.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> Plot> Elements.
2.4.3.16. Apply Displacement Boundary Condition at End of Wrench

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Comp/Assembly>
Select Comp/Assembly. The Select Component or Assembly dialog appears. Click on OK
to accept the default of select BOTAREA component. Choose menu path Utility Menu>
Select> Entities. The Select Entities dialog box appears. In the top drop down
menu, select "Lines." In the second drop down menu, select "Exterior." Click on
Apply. In the top drop down menu, select "Nodes." In the second drop down menu,
select "Attached to." Click on the "Lines, all" radio button to select it.
10. Click on OK. 11. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply>
Structural> Displacement> On Nodes. The Apply U,ROT on Nodes picking menu appears.
12. Click on Pick All. The Apply U,ROT on Nodes dialog box appears. 13. In the
scroll list for DOFs to be constrained, click on "ALL DOF." 14. Click on OK. 15.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Entities. 16. In the top drop down menu,
select "Lines." 17. Click on the "Sele All" button, then click on Cancel.
2.4.3.17. Display Boundary Conditions

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Symbols. The Symbols
dialog box appears. Click on the "All Applied BCs" radio button for Boundary
condition symbol. In the Surface Load Symbols drop down menu, select "Pressures."
In the “Show pres and convect as” drop down menu, select "Arrows." Click on OK.
2.4.3.18. Apply Pressure on Handle

In this step, apply pressure on the handle to represent 100 N finger force. 1. 2.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Entities. The Select Entities dialog
appears. In the top drop down menu, select "Areas."
2–19
Chapter 2: Structural Static Analysis 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. In the second drop down
menu, select "By Location." Click on the "Y coordinates" radio button to select
it. Enter BENDRAD,L_HANDLE for Min, Max, and click on Apply. Click on "X
coordinates" to select it. Click on Reselect. Enter W_FLAT/2,W_FLAT for Min, Max,
and click on Apply. In the top drop down menu, select "Nodes."
10. In the second drop down menu, select "Attached to." 11. Click on the "Areas,
all" radio button to select it. 12. Click on the "From Full" radio button to
select it. 13. Click on Apply. 14. In the second drop down menu, select "By
Location." 15. Click on the "Y coordinates" radio button to select it. 16. Click
on the "Reselect" radio button. 17. Enter L_HANDLE+TOL,L_HANDLE-(3.0*L_ELEM)-TOL
for Min, Max. 18. Click on OK. 19. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Parameters> Get
Scalar Data. The Get Scalar Data dialog box appears. 20. In the scroll box on the
left, scroll to "Model Data" and select it. 21. In the scroll box on the right,
scroll to "For selected set" and select it. 22. Click on OK. The Get Data for
Selected Entity Set dialog box appears. 23. Enter "minyval" for the name of the
parameter to be defined. 24. In the scroll box on the left, click once on "Current
node set" to select it. 25. In the scroll box on the right, click once on "Min Y
coordinate" to select it. 26. Click on Apply. 27. Click on OK again to select the
default settings. The Get Data for Selected Entity Set dialog box appears. 28.
Enter "maxyval" for the name of the parameter to be defined. 29. In the scroll box
on the left, click once on "Current node set" to select it. 30. In the scroll box
on the right, click once on "Max Y coordinate" to select it. 31. Click on OK. 32.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> Parameters> Scalar Parameters. The Scalar
Parameters dialog box appears. 33. Type the text PTORQ=100/(W_HEX*(MAXYVAL-
MINYVAL)) in the Selection text box and click on Accept. 34. Click on Close. 35.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Pressure>
On Nodes. The Apply PRES on Nodes picking menu appears. 36. Click on Pick All. The
Apply PRES on Nodes dialog box appears. 37. Enter PTORQ for Load PRES value and
click on OK. 38. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Everything. 2–20
Section 2.4: A Sample Static Analysis (GUI Method) 39. Choose menu path Utility
Menu> Plot> Nodes. 40. Click on SAVE_DB on the ANSYS Toolbar.
2.4.3.19. Write the First Load Step

1. 2. 3. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Write LS File. The
Write Load Step File dialog appears. Enter 1 for load step file number n. Click on
OK.
2.4.3.20. Define Downward Pressure

In this step, you define the downward pressure on top of the handle, representing
20N (4.5 lb) of force. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Choose menu path Utility Menu>
Parameters> Scalar Parameters. The Scalar Parameters dialog box appears. Type the
text PDOWN=20/(W_FLAT*(MAXYVAL-MINYVAL)) in the Selection text box and click on
Accept. Click on Close. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Entities. The
Select Entities dialog appears. In the top drop down menu, select "Areas." In the
second drop down menu, select "By Location." Click on the "Z coordinates" radio
button to select it. Click on the "From Full" radio button to select it. Enter -
(L_SHANK+(W_HEX/2)) for Min, Max.
10. Click on Apply. 11. In the top drop down menu, select "Nodes." 12. In the
second drop down menu, select "Attached to." 13. Click on the Areas, all radio
button to select it, and click on Apply. 14. In the second drop down menu, select
"By Location." 15. Click on the "Y coordinates" radio button to select it. 16.
Click on the "Reselect" radio button. 17. Enter L_HANDLE+TOL,L_HANDLE-
(3.0*L_ELEM)-TOL for Min, Max. 18. Click on OK. 19. Choose menu path Main Menu>
Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Pressure> On Nodes. The Apply PRES on
Nodes picking menu appears. 20. Click on Pick All. The Apply PRES on Nodes dialog
box appears. 21. Enter PDOWN for Load PRES value and click on OK. 22. Choose menu
path Utility Menu> Select> Everything. 23. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Plot>
Nodes.
2–21
2.4.3.21. Write Second Load Step

1. 2. 3. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Write LS File. The
Write Load Step File dialog box appears. Enter 2 for Load step file number n, and
click on OK. Click on SAVE_DB on the ANSYS Toolbar.
2.4.3.22. Solve from Load Step Files

1. 2. 3. 4. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Solve> From LS Files. The Solve
Load Step Files dialog box appears. Enter 1 for Starting LS file number. Enter 2
for Ending LS file number, and click on OK. Click on the Close button after the
Solution is done! window appears.
2.4.3.23. Read First Load Step and Review Results

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Read
Results> First Set. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results>
Reaction Solu. The List Reaction Solution dialog box appears. Click on OK to
accept the default of All Items. Review the information in the status window, and
click on Close. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Symbols. The Symbols
dialog box appears. Click on the "None" radio button for Boundary condition
symbol, and click on OK. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Style> Edge
Options. The Edge Options dialog box appears. In the Element outlines for non-
contour/contour plots drop down menu, select "Edge Only/All." Click on OK.
10. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Deformed Shape.
The Plot Deformed Shape dialog box appears. 11. Click on the "Def + undeformed"
radio button and click on OK. 12. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Save
Plot Ctrls. The Save Plot Controls dialog box appears. 13. Type "pldisp.gsa" in
the Selection box, and click on OK. 14. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls>
View Settings> Angle of Rotation. The Angle of Rotation dialog box appears. 15.
Enter 120 for Angle in degrees. 16. In the Relative/absolute drop down menu,
select "Relative angle." 17. In the Axis of rotation drop down menu, select
"Global Cartes Y." 18. Click on OK. 19. Choose menu path Main Menu> General
Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Nodal Solu. The Contour Nodal Solution Data
dialog box appears. 20. In the scroll box on the left, click on "Stress." In the
scroll box on the right, click on "Intensity SINT." 21. Click on OK. 2–22
Section 2.4: A Sample Static Analysis (GUI Method) 22. Choose menu path Utility
Menu> PlotCtrls> Save Plot Ctrls. The Save Plot Controls dialog box appears. 23.
Type "plnsol.gsa" in the Selection box, and click on OK.
2.4.3.24. Read the Next Load Step and Review Results

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Read
Results> Next Set. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results>
Reaction Solu. The List Reaction Solution dialog box appears. Click on OK to
accept the default of All Items. Review the information in the status window, and
click on Close. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Restore Plot Ctrls. Type
"pldisp.gsa" in the Selection box, and click on OK. Choose menu path Main Menu>
General Postproc> Plot Results> Deformed Shape. The Plot Deformed Shape dialog box
appears. Click on the "Def + undeformed" radio button if it is not already
selected and click on OK. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Restore Plot
Ctrls.
10. Type "plnsol.gsa" in the Selection box, and click on OK. 11. Choose menu path
Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Nodal Solu. The Contour
Nodal Solution Data dialog box appears. 12. In the scroll box on the left, click
on "Stress." In the scroll box on the right, scroll to "Intensity SINT" and select
it. 13. Click on OK.
2.4.3.25. Zoom in on Cross-Section

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Choose menu path Utility Menu> WorkPlane> Offset WP by
Increments. The Offset WP tool box appears. Enter 0,0,-0.067 for X, Y, Z Offsets
and click on OK. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Style> Hidden Line
Options. The Hidden-Line Options dialog box appears. In the drop down menu for
Type of Plot, select "Capped hidden." In the drop down menu for Cutting plane is,
select "Working plane." Click on OK. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls>
Pan-Zoom-Rotate. The Pan-Zoom-Rotate tool box appears. Click on "WP." Drag the
Rate slider bar to 10.
10. On the Pan-Zoom-Rotate dialog box, click on the large round dot several times
to zoom in on the cross section.
2.4.3.26. Exit ANSYS

1. 2. Choose QUIT from the ANSYS Toolbar. Choose Quit - No Save!
2–23
Chapter 2: Structural Static Analysis 3. Click on OK.
2.5. A Sample Static Analysis (Command or Batch Method)

You can perform the example static analysis of an Allen wrench using the ANSYS
commands shown below instead of GUI choices. Items prefaced with an exclamation
point (!) are comments.
/FILNAME,pm02! Jobname to use for all subsequent files /TITLE,Static analysis of
an Allen wrench /UNITS,SI ! Reminder that the SI system of units is used /SHOW !
Specify graphics driver for interactive run; for batch ! run plots are written to
pm02.grph ! Define parameters for future use EXX=2.07E11 ! Young's modulus
(2.07E11 Pa = 30E6 psi) W_HEX=.01 ! Width of hex across flats (.01m=.39in)
*AFUN,DEG ! Units for angular parametric functions W_FLAT=W_HEX*TAN(30) ! Width of
flat L_SHANK=.075 ! Length of shank (short end) (.075m=3.0in) L_HANDLE=.2 ! Length
of handle (long end) (.2m=7.9 in) BENDRAD=.01 ! Bend radius of Allen wrench
(.01m=.39 in) L_ELEM=.0075 ! Element length (.0075 m = .30 in) NO_D_HEX=2 ! Number
of divisions on hex flat TOL=25E-6 ! Tolerance for selecting nodes (25e-6 m = .001
in) /PREP7 ET,1,SOLID45 ! Eight-node brick element ET,2,PLANE42 ! Four-node
quadrilateral (for area mesh) MP,EX,1,EXX ! Young's modulus for material 1
MP,PRXY,1,0.3 ! Poisson's ratio for material 1 RPOLY,6,W_FLAT ! Hexagonal area K,7
! Keypoint at (0,0,0) K,8,,,-L_SHANK ! Keypoint at shank-handle intersection
K,9,,L_HANDLE,-L_SHANK ! Keypoint at end of handle L,4,1 ! Line through middle of
hex shape L,7,8 ! Line along middle of shank L,8,9 ! Line along handle
LFILLT,8,9,BENDRAD ! Line along bend radius between shank and handle
/VIEW,,1,1,1 ! Isometric view in window 1 /ANGLE,,90,XM ! Rotates model 90 degrees
about X /PNUM,LINE,1 ! Line numbers turned on LPLOT /PNUM,LINE,0 ! Line numbers
off L,1,4 ! Hex section is cut into two quadrilaterals ASBL,1,7,,,KEEP ! to
satisfy mapped meshing requirements for bricks CM,BOTAREA,AREA ! Component name
BOTAREA for the two areas ! Generate area mesh for later drag
LESIZE,1,,,NO_D_HEX ! Number of divisions along line 1 LESIZE,2,,,NO_D_HEX
LESIZE,6,,,NO_D_HEX TYPE,2 ! PLANE42 elements to be meshed first MSHAPE,0,2D !
Mapped quad mesh MSHKEY,1 SAVE ! Save database before meshing AMESH,ALL
/TITLE,Meshed hex wrench end to be used in vdrag EPLOT ! Now drag the 2-D mesh to
produce 3-D elements TYPE,1 ! ESIZE,L_ELEM ! VDRAG,2,3,,,,,8,10,9 ! /TYPE,,HIDP !
/TITLE,Meshed hex wrench EPLOT CMSEL,,BOTAREA ! Type pointer set to SOLID45
Element size Drag operation to create 3-D mesh Precise hidden line display
Select BOTAREA component and
2–24
Section 2.5: A Sample Static Analysis (Command or Batch Method)
ACLEAR,ALL ASEL,ALL FINISH ! delete the 2-D elements
! Apply loads and obtain the solution /SOLU ANTYPE,STATIC ! Static analysis
(default) /TITLE,Allen wrench -- Load step 1 ! First fix all nodes around bottom
of shank CMSEL,,BOTAREA ! Bottom areas of shank LSEL,,EXT ! Exterior lines of
those areas NSLL,,1 ! Nodes on those lines D,ALL,ALL ! Displacement constraints
LSEL,ALL /PBC,U,,1 ! Displacement symbols turned on /TITLE,Boundary conditions on
end of wrench NPLOT !Now apply pressure on handle to represent 100-N (22.5-lb)
finger force ASEL,,LOC,Y,BENDRAD,L_HANDLE ! Areas on handle
ASEL,R,LOC,X,W_FLAT/2,W_FLAT ! Two areas on one side of handle... NSLA,,1 ! ...and
all corresponding nodes NSEL,R,LOC,Y,L_HANDLE+TOL,L_HANDLE-(3.0*L_ELEM)-TOL !
Reselects nodes at ! back end of handle (3 element lengths)
*GET,MINYVAL,NODE,,MNLOC,Y ! Get minimum Y value of selected nodes
*GET,MAXYVAL,NODE,,MXLOC,Y ! Get maximum Y value of selected nodes
PTORQ=100/(W_HEX*(MAXYVAL-MINYVAL)) ! Pressure equivalent to 100 N
SF,ALL,PRES,PTORQ ! PTORQ pressure on all selected nodes ALLSEL ! Restores full
set of all entities /PSF,PRES,,2 ! Pressure symbols turned on /TITLE,Boundary
conditions on wrench for load step 1 NPLOT LSWRITE ! Writes first load step
/TITLE, Allen wrench -- load step 2 ! Downward pressure on top of handle,
representing 20-N (4.5 -lb) force PDOWN=20/(W_FLAT*(MAXYVAL-MINYVAL))
ASEL,,LOC,Z,-(L_SHANK+(W_HEX/2)) ! Area on top flat of handle... NSLA,,1 ! ...and
all corresponding nodes NSEL,R,LOC,Y,L_HANDLE+TOL,L_HANDLE-(3.0*L_ELEM)-TOL !
Reselects nodes at ! back end of handle (3 element lengths) SF,ALL,PRES,PDOWN !
PDOWN pressure at all selected nodes ALLSEL /TITLE,Boundary conditions on wrench
for load step 2 NPLOT LSWRITE ! Writes second load step SAVE ! Save database
before solution LSSOLVE,1,2 ! Initiates solution for load step files 1 and 2
FINISH !Review the results /POST1 SET,1 ! Reads load step 1 results PRRSOL !
Reaction solution listing /PBC,DEFA ! No BC symbols /PSF,DEFA ! No surface load
symbols /EDGE,,1 ! Edges only, no interior element outlines /TITLE,Deformed allen
wrench caused by torque PLDISP,2 ! Deformed shape overlaid with undeformed edge
plot /GSAVE,pldisp,gsav ! Saves graphics specifications on pldisp.gsav
/PLOPTS,INFO,ON ! Turns on entire legend column /PLOPTS,LEG1,OFF ! Turns off
legend header /ANGLE,,120,YM,1 ! Additional rotation about model Y (to see high
stress areas) /TITLE,Stress intensity contours caused by torque PLNSOL,S,INT !
Stress intensity contours
2–25
/GSAVE,plnsol,gsav ! Saves graphics specifications to plnsol.gsav SET,2 ! Reads
load step 2 results PRRSOL ! Reaction solution listing /GRESUME,pldisp,gsav !
Resumes graphics specifications from pldisp.gsav /TITLE,Deformed allen wrench
caused by torque and force PLDISP,2 /GRESUME,plnsol,gsav ! Resumes graphics
specifications from plnsol.gsav /TITLE,Stress intensity contours caused by torque
and force PLNSOL,S,INT WPOF,,,-0.067 ! Offset the working plane for cross-section
view /TYPE,1,5 ! Capped hidden display /CPLANE,1 ! Cutting plane defined to use
the WP /VIEW, 1 ,WP ! View will be normal to the WP /DIST,1,.01 ! Zoom in on the
cross section /TITLE,Cross section of the allen wrench under torque and force
loading PLNSOL,S,INT FINISH /EXIT,ALL

Several ANSYS publications, particularly the ANSYS Verification Manual and the
ANSYS Tutorials, describe additional structural static analyses. The ANSYS
Verification Manual consists of test case analyses demonstrating the analysis
capabilities of the ANSYS family of products. While these test cases demonstrate
solutions to realistic analysis problems, the ANSYS Verification Manual does not
present them as step-by-step examples with lengthy data input instructions and
printouts. However, most ANSYS users who have at least limited finite element
experience should be able to fill in the missing details by reviewing each test
case's finite element model and input data with accompanying comments. The ANSYS
Verification Manual includes the following structural static analysis test cases:
VM1 - Statically Indeterminate Reaction Force Analysis VM2 - Beam Stresses and
Deflections VM4 - Deflection of a Hinged Support VM11 - Residual Stress Problem
VM12 - Combined Bending and Torsion VM13 - Cylindrical Shell Under Pressure VM16 -
Bending of a Solid Beam VM18 - Out-of-plane Bending of a Curved Bar VM20 -
Cylindrical Membrane Under Pressure VM25 - Stresses in a Long Cylinder VM29 -
Friction on a Support Block VM31 - Cable Supporting Hanging Loads VM36 - Limit
Moment Analysis VM39 - Bending of a Circular Plate with a Center Hole VM41 - Small
Deflection of a Rigid Beam VM44 - Bending of an Axisymmetric Thin Pipe Under
Gravity Loading VM53 - Vibration of a String Under Tension VM59 - Lateral
Vibration of an Axially Loaded Bar VM63 - Static Hertz Contact Problem VM78 -
Transverse Shear Stresses in a Cantilever Beam VM82 - Simply Supported Laminated
Plate Under Pressure VM127 - Buckling of a Bar with Hinged Ends VM135 - Bending of
a Beam on an Elastic Foundation VM141 - Diametric Compression of a Disk VM148 -
Bending of a Parabolic Beam VM183 - Harmonic Response of a Spring-Mass System 2–26
Section 2.6: Where to Find Other Examples VM199 - Viscoplastic Analysis of a Body
Undergoing Shear Deformation VM201 - Rubber Cylinder Pressed Between Two Plates
VM206 - Stranded Coil with Voltage Excitation VM211 - Rubber Cylinder Pressed
Between Two Plates VM216 - Lateral Buckling of a Right-Angle Frame
2–27
2–28
Chapter 3: Modal Analysis
3.1. Definition of Modal Analysis
You use modal analysis to determine the vibration characteristics (natural
frequencies and mode shapes) of a structure or a machine component while it is
being designed. It also can be a starting point for another, more detailed,
dynamic analysis, such as a transient dynamic analysis, a harmonic response
analysis, or a spectrum analysis.
3.2. Uses for Modal Analysis

You use modal analysis to determine the natural frequencies and mode shapes of a
structure. The natural frequencies and mode shapes are important parameters in the
design of a structure for dynamic loading conditions. They are also required if
you want to do a spectrum analysis or a mode superposition harmonic or transient
analysis. You can do modal analysis on a prestressed structure, such as a spinning
turbine blade. Another useful feature is modal cyclic symmetry, which allows you
to review the mode shapes of a cyclically symmetric structure by modeling just a
sector of it. Modal analysis in the ANSYS family of products is a linear analysis.
Any nonlinearities, such as plasticity and contact (gap) elements, are ignored
even if they are defined. You can choose from several mode-extraction methods:
Block Lanczos (default), subspace, PowerDynamics, reduced, unsymmetric, damped,
and QR damped. The damped and QR damped methods allow you to include damping in
the structure. The QR Damped method also allows for unsymmetrical damping and
stiffness matrices. Details about mode-extraction methods are covered later in
this section.
3.3. Overview of Steps in a Modal Analysis

The procedure for a modal analysis consists of four main steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. Build
the model. Apply loads and obtain the solution. Expand the modes. Review the
results.
3.4. Build the Model

details, see the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide. When building your model,
remember these points: • Only linear behavior is valid in a modal analysis. If you
specify nonlinear elements, they are treated as linear. For example, if you
include contact elements, their stiffnesses are calculated based on their initial
status and never change. Material properties can be linear, isotropic or
orthotropic, and constant or temperature-dependent. You must define both Young's
modulus (EX) (or stiffness in some form) and density (DENS) (or mass in some form)
for a modal analysis. Nonlinear properties are ignored. If applying element
damping, you must
Chapter 3: Modal Analysis define the required real constants for the specific
element type (COMBIN7, COMBIN14, COMBIN37, and so on).
3.5. Apply Loads and Obtain the Solution

In this step you define the analysis type and options, apply loads, specify load
step options, and begin the finite element solution for the natural frequencies.
3.5.1. Enter the Solution Processor

1. Enter the ANSYS solution processor. Command(s): /SOLU GUI: Main Menu> Solution
3.5.2. Define Analysis Type and Options

After you have entered the solution processor, you define the analysis type and
analysis options. ANSYS offers the options listed in Table 3.1: “Analysis Types
and Options” for a modal analysis. Each of the options is explained in detail
below.
Table 3.1 Analysis Types and Options

Option New Analysis Analysis Type: Modal (see Note below) mode-extraction Method
Number of Modes to Extract Mass Matrix Formulation Prestress Effects Calculation
Command ANTYPE ANTYPE MODOPT MODOPT LUMPM PSTRES GUI Path Main Menu> Solution>
Analysis Type> New Analysis Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis>
Modal Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options Main Menu> Solution>
Analysis Type> Analysis Options Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis
Options Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options Main Menu> Solution>
Analysis Type> Analysis Options
No. of Modes to Expand (see Note below) MXPAND
Note — When you specify a modal analysis, a Solution menu that is appropriate for
modal analyses appears. The Solution menu will be either “abridged” or
“unabridged,” depending on the actions you took prior to this step in your ANSYS
session. The abridged menu contains only those solution options that are valid
and/or recommended for modal analyses. If you are on the abridged Solution menu
and you want to access other solution options (that is, solution options that are
valid for you to use, but their use may not be encouraged for this type of
analysis), select the Unabridged Menu option. For details, see Section 3.5.1:
Using Abridged Solution Menus in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide. Note — In the
single point response spectrum (SPOPT,SPRS) and Dynamic Design analysis method
(SPOPT,DDAM), the modal expansion can be performed after the spectrum analysis,
based on the significance factor SIGNIF on the MXPAND command. If you want to
perform modal expansion after the spectrum analysis, choose NO for mode expansion
(MXPAND) on the dialog box for the modal analysis options (MODOPT).
3.5.2.1. Option: New Analysis [ANTYPE]

Choose New Analysis.
3–2
Section 3.5: Apply Loads and Obtain the Solution Note — Restarts are not valid in
a modal analysis. If you need to apply different sets of boundary conditions, do a
new analysis each time (or use the "partial solution" procedure described in
Chapter 3, “Solution” in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide).
3.5.2.2. Option: Analysis Type: Modal [ANTYPE]

Use this option to specify a modal analysis.
3.5.2.3. Option: Mode-Extraction Method [MODOPT]

Choose one of the extraction methods listed below. (For more detailed information,
see Section 3.13: Comparing Mode-Extraction Methods.) • Block Lanczos method
(default) The Block Lanczos method is used for large symmetric eigenvalue
problems. You can use this method for the same types of problems for which you use
the subspace method, but you achieve a faster convergence rate. The Block Lanczos
method uses the sparse matrix solver, overriding any solver specified via the
EQSLV command. • Subspace method The subspace method is used for large symmetric
eigenvalue problems. Several solution controls are available to control the
subspace iteration process. When doing a modal analysis with a large number of
constraint equations, use the subspace method with the frontal solver instead of
the JCG solver, or use the Block Lanczos mode-extraction method. • PowerDynamics
method The PowerDynamics method is used for very large models (100,000+ DOFs), and
is especially useful to obtain a solution for the first several modes to learn how
the model will behave. You can then choose the most appropriate extraction method
(subspace or Block Lanczos) for running the final solution. This method
automatically uses the lumped mass approximation (LUMPM,ON) To use the
PowerDynamics method when running in batch or command mode, you first issue
MODOPT,SUBSPACE, followed by EQSLV,PCG. • Reduced (Householder) method The reduced
method is faster than the subspace method because it uses reduced (condensed)
system matrices to calculate the solution. However, it is less accurate because
the reduced mass matrix is approximate. (See Section 3.13: Comparing Mode-
Extraction Methods.) • Unsymmetric method The unsymmetric method is used for
problems with unsymmetric matrices, such as fluid-structure interaction problems.
• Damped method The damped method is used for problems where damping cannot be
ignored, such as bearing problems. • QR Damped method The QR damped method is
faster and achieves better calculation efficiency than the damped method. It uses
the reduced modal damped matrix to calculate complex damped frequencies in modal
coordinates.
3–3
Chapter 3: Modal Analysis For most applications, you will use the Block Lanczos,
subspace, reduced, or PowerDynamics method. The unsymmetric, damped, and QR damped
methods are meant for special applications. When you specify a mode-extraction
method, ANSYS automatically chooses the appropriate equation solver. Note — The
damped, unsymmetric, and QR damped methods are not available in the ANSYS
Professional program.
3.5.2.4. Option: Number of Modes to Extract [MODOPT]

This option is required for all mode-extraction methods except the reduced method.
For the unsymmetric and damped methods, requesting a larger number of modes than
necessary reduces the possibility of missed modes, but results in more solution
time.
3.5.2.5. Option: Number of Modes to Expand [MXPAND]

This option is required for the reduced, unsymmetric, and damped methods only.
However, if you want element results, you need to turn on the "Calculate elem
results" option, regardless of the mode-extraction method. In the single point
response spectrum (SPOPT,SPRS) and Dynamic Design analysis method (SPOPT,DDAM),
the modal expansion can be performed after the spectrum analysis, based on the
significance factor SIGNIF on the MXPAND command. If you want to perform modal
expansion after the spectrum analysis, choose NO for mode expansion (MXPAND) on
the dialog box for the modal analysis options (MODOPT). If you want the mode
shapes normalized to unity for the Block Lanczos or subspace methods, you will
need to expand the modes as well.
3.5.2.6. Option: Mass Matrix Formulation [LUMPM]

Use this option to specify the default formulation (which is element-dependent) or
lumped mass approximation. We recommend the default formulation for most
applications. However, for some problems involving "skinny" structures such as
slender beams or very thin shells, the lumped mass approximation often yields
better results. Also, the lumped mass approximation can result in a shorter run
time and lower memory requirements.
3.5.2.7. Option: Prestress Effects Calculation [PSTRES]

Use this option to calculate the modes of a prestressed structure. By default, no
prestress effects are included; that is, the structure is assumed to be stress-
free. To include prestress effects, element files from a previous static (or
transient) analysis must be available; see Section 3.11: Prestressed Modal
Analysis. If prestress effects are turned on, the lumped mass setting [LUMPM] in
this and subsequent solutions must be the same as it was in the prestress static
analysis. Note — You can use only axisymmetric loads for prestressing harmonic
elements such as PLANE25 and SHELL61.
3.5.2.8. Additional Modal Analysis Options

After you complete the fields on the Modal Analysis Options dialog box, click OK.
A dialog box specific to the selected extraction method appears. You see some
combination of the following fields: FREQB, FREQE, PRMODE, Nrmkey, RIGID, SUBOPT.
Refer to the MODOPT and RIGID command descriptions for the meaning of these
fields.
3–4
Section 3.5: Apply Loads and Obtain the Solution
3.5.3. Define Master Degrees of Freedom

In a modal analysis, you also need to define master degrees of freedom. These are
required only for the reduced mode-extraction method. Master degrees of freedom
(MDOF) are significant degrees of freedom that characterize the dynamic behavior
of the structure. You should choose at least twice as many MDOF as the number of
modes of interest. We recommend that you define as many MDOF as you can based on
your knowledge of the dynamic characteristics of the structure [M,MGEN], and also
let the program choose a few additional masters based on stiffness-to-mass ratios
[TOTAL]. You can list the defined MDOF [MLIST], and delete extraneous MDOF
[MDELE]. For more details about master degrees of freedom, see Section 3.14:
Matrix Reduction. Command(s): M GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Master DOFs> User
Selected> Define
3.5.4. Apply Loads

After defining master degrees of freedom, apply loads on the model. The only
"loads" valid in a typical modal analysis are zero-value displacement constraints.
(If you input a nonzero displacement constraint, the program assigns a zero-value
constraint to that DOF instead.) Other loads can be specified, but are ignored
(see Note below). For directions in which no constraints are specified, the
program calculates rigid-body (zero-frequency) as well as higher (nonzero
frequency) free body modes. Table 3.2: “Loads Applicable in a Modal Analysis”
shows the commands to apply displacement constraints. Notice that you can apply
them either on the solid model (keypoints, lines, and areas) or on the finite
element model (nodes and elements). For a general discussion of solid-model loads
versus finite-element loads, see Chapter 2, “Loading” in the ANSYS Basic Analysis
Guide. Note — Other loads - forces, pressures, temperatures, accelerations, and so
on - can be specified in a modal analysis, but they are ignored for the mode-
extraction. However, the program will calculate a load vector and write it to the
mode shape file (Jobname.MODE) so that it can be used in a subsequent
modesuperposition harmonic or transient analysis.
Table 3.2 Loads Applicable in a Modal Analysis

Load Type Category Cmd Family GUI Path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply>
Structural> Displacement Displacement (UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, Constraints D ROTY, ROTZ)
In an analysis, loads can be applied, removed, operated on, or listed.
3.5.4.1. Applying Loads Using Commands

Table 3.3: “Load Commands for a Modal Analysis” lists all the commands you can use
to apply loads in a modal analysis.
Table 3.3 Load Commands for a Modal Analysis

Load Type Displacement Solid Model or FE Solid Model Solid Model Solid Model
Finite Elem Entity Keypoints Lines Areas Nodes Apply DK DL DA D Delete DKDELE
DLDELE DADELE DDELE List DKLIST DLLIST DALIST DLIST Operate DTRAN DTRAN DTRAN
DSCALE Apply Settings DSYM, DCUM
3–5
3.5.4.2. Applying Loads Using the GUI

All loading operations (except List; see Section 3.5.4.3: Listing Loads) are
accessed through a series of cascading menus. From the Solution menu, you select
the operation (apply, delete, and so on), then the load type (displacement, force,
and so on), and then the object to which you are applying the load (keypoint,
line, node, and so on). For example, to apply a displacement load to a line,
follow this GUI path: GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural>
Displacement> On lines
3.5.4.3. Listing Loads

To list existing loads, follow this GUI path: GUI: Utility Menu> List>Loads> load
type
3.5.5. Specify Load Step Options

The only load step options available for a modal analysis are damping options.
Table 3.4 Load Step Options

Option Damping (Dynamics) Options Alpha (mass) Damping Beta (stiffness) Damping
Material-Dependent Damping Ratio Constant Material Damping Coefficient ALPHAD
BETAD MP,DAMP MP,DMPR Command
Element Damping (applied via element real constant) R
Damping is valid only for the damped and QR damped mode-extraction methods.
Damping is ignored for the other mode-extraction methods; see the Note below. If
you include damping and specify the damped mode-extraction method, the calculated
eigenvalues and eigenvectors are complex. If you include damping and specify the
QR damped mode-extraction method, the eigenvalues are complex. However, the real
eigenvectors are used for the mode superposition analysis. See Section 3.13:
Comparing Mode-Extraction Methods for details. Also see the section Section
5.10.3: Damping in Chapter 5, “Transient Dynamic Analysis” for more information on
damping. Only the QR damped method supports the constant material damping
coefficient application in a downstream mode superposition harmonic analysis. The
QR damped eigen analysis itself, however, does not include the effect of the
constant material damping coefficient. The corresponding modal damping matrix is
formulated during modal harmonic analysis. Note — Damping can be specified in a
non-damped modal analysis if a single-point response spectrum analysis is to
follow the modal analysis. Although the damping does not affect the eigenvalue
solution, it is used to calculate an effective damping ratio for each mode, which
is then used to calculate the response to the spectrum. Spectrum analyses are
discussed in Chapter 6, “Spectrum Analysis”.
3–6
Section 3.5: Apply Loads and Obtain the Solution
3.5.6. Participation Factor Table Output

The participation factor table lists participation factors, mode coefficients, and
mass distribution percentages for each mode extracted. The participation factors
and mode coefficients are calculated based on an assumed unit displacement
spectrum in each of the global Cartesian directions and rotation about each of
these axes. The reduced mass distribution is also listed. Rotational participation
factors will be calculated when a real eigensolver mode-extraction method (such as
Block Lanczos, subspace, or QRDAMP) is used. Note — You can retrieve a
participation factor or mode coefficient by issuing a *GET command. The factor or
coefficient is valid for the excitation (assumed unit displacement spectrum)
directed along the last of the applicable coordinates (rotation about the Z axis
for a 3-D analysis). To retrieve a participation factor or mode coefficient for
another direction, perform a spectrum analysis with the excitation set (SED) to
the desired direction, then issue another *GET command.
3.5.7. Solve
Before you solve, you should save (SAVE) a back-up copy of the database to a named
file. You can then retrieve your model by reentering the ANSYS program and issuing
RESUME. Now start the solution calculations. Command(s): SOLVE GUI: Main Menu>
Solution> Solve> Current LS
3.5.7.1. Output
The output from the solution consists mainly of the natural frequencies, which are
printed as part of the printed output (Jobname.OUT) and also written to the mode
shape file (Jobname.MODE). The printed output may include reduced mode shapes and
the participation factor table, depending on your analysis options and output
controls. No mode shapes are written to the database or to the results file, so
you cannot postprocess the results yet. To do this, you need to expand the modes
(explained next).
3.5.7.1.1. Output From Subspace Mode-Extraction Method

If you use the subspace mode-extraction method, you might see the following
warning in the solution printout: "STURM number = n should be m," where n and m
are integer numbers. This indicates that a mode has been missed, or that the
mthand nth mode gave the same frequencies and only m modes were requested. There
are two methods that you can use to investigate the missed mode: use more
iteration vectors, or change the shift point used in the eigenvalue extraction.
Both methods are briefly described below. (See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference
for more information.) To use more iteration vectors, you can issue the
SUBOPT,,NPAD command. If you prefer to use the GUI to adjust the number of
iteration vectors, follow these steps: 1. 2. 3. Choose menu path Main Menu>
Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options. The Modal Analysis dialog box appears.
Choose “Subspace” as the mode-extraction method and specify the number of modes to
extract; then click OK. The Subspace Modal Analysis dialog box appears. Change the
value of the NPAD field and click OK.
To change the shift point that was used in the eigenvalue extraction, you can
issue the MODOPT,,,FREQB command. If you prefer to use the GUI to change the shift
point, follow these steps:
3–7
Chapter 3: Modal Analysis 1. 2. 3. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis
Type> Analysis Options. The Modal Analysis dialog box appears. Choose “Subspace”
as the mode-extraction method and specify the number of modes to extract; then
click OK. The Subspace Modal Analysis dialog box appears. Change the value of the
FREQB field and click OK.
If you use the damped mode-extraction method, the eigenvalues and eigenvectors are
complex. The imaginary part of the eigenvalue represents the natural frequency,
and the real part is a measure of the stability of the system. If you use the QR
damped mode-extraction method, the eigenvalues are complex. However, the real
eigenvectors are used for the mode superposition analysis.
3.5.8. Exit the Solution Processor

You must now exit the solution processor. Command(s): FINISH GUI: Main Menu>
Finish
3.6. Expand the Modes

In its strictest sense, the term "expansion" means expanding the reduced solution
to the full DOF set. The "reduced solution" is usually in terms of master DOF. In
a modal analysis, however, we use the term "expansion" to mean writing mode shapes
to the results file. That is, "expanding the modes" applies not just to reduced
mode shapes from the reduced mode-extraction method, but to full mode shapes from
the other mode-extraction methods as well. Thus, if you want to review mode shapes
in the postprocessor, you must expand them (that is, write them to the results
file). Expanded modes are also required for subsequent spectrum analyses. In the
single point response spectrum (SPOPT,SPRS) and Dynamic Design analysis method
(SPOPT,DDAM), the modal expansion can be performed after the spectrum analysis,
based on the significance factor SIGNIF on the MXPAND command. If you want to
perform modal expansion after the spectrum analysis, choose NO for mode expansion
(MXPAND) on the dialog box for the modal analysis options (MODOPT). No expansion
is necessary for subsequent mode superposition analyses.
3.6.1. Points to Remember

• • The mode shape file (Jobname.MODE), Jobname.EMAT, Jobname.ESAV, and
Jobname.TRI (if reduced method) must be available. The database must contain the
same model for which the modal solution was calculated.
3.6.2. Expanding the Modes

1. Reenter the ANSYS solution processor. Command(s): /SOLU GUI: Main Menu>
Solution Note — You must explicitly leave SOLUTION (using the FINISH command) and
reenter (/SOLU) before performing the expansion pass. 2. Activate the expansion
pass and its options. ANSYS offers these options for the expansion pass:
3–8
Section 3.6: Expand the Modes
Table 3.5 Expansion Pass Options

Option Expansion Pass On/Off Command EXPASS GUI Path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis
Type> ExpansionPass Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> ExpansionPass> Single
Expand> Expand Modes Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> ExpansionPass> Single
Expand> Expand Modes Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> ExpansionPass> Single
Expand> Expand Modes
No. of Modes to Expand MXPAND Freq. Range for Expansion MXPAND Stress Calc. On/Off
MXPAND
Each of these options is explained in detail below. Expansion Pass On/Off [EXPASS]
Choose ON. Number of Modes to Expand [MXPAND, NMODE] Specify the number. Remember
that only expanded modes can be reviewed in the postprocessor. Default is no modes
expanded. Frequency Range for Expansion [MXPAND,, FREQB, FREQE] This is another
way to control the number of modes expanded. If you specify a frequency range,
only modes within that range are expanded. Stress Calculations On/Off [MXPAND,,,,
Elcalc] Choose ON only if you plan to do a subsequent spectrum analysis and are
interested in stresses or forces to do the spectrum. "Stresses" from a modal
analysis do not represent actual stresses in the structure, but give you an idea
of the relative stress distributions for each mode. Default is no stresses
calculated. 3. Specify load step options. The only options valid in a modal
expansion pass are output controls: • Printed output Use this option to include
any results data (expanded mode shapes, stresses, and forces) on the printed
output file (Jobname.OUT). Command(s): OUTPR GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step
Opts> Output Ctrls> Solu Printout • Database and results file output Use this
option to control the data on the results file (Jobname.RST). The FREQ field on
OUTRES can be only ALL or NONE; that is, the data are written for all modes or no
modes. For example, you cannot write information for every other mode. Command(s):
OUTRES GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> DB/Results File 4.
Start expansion pass calculations. The output consists of expanded mode shapes
and, if requested, relative stress distributions for each mode. Command(s): SOLVE
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS
3–9
Chapter 3: Modal Analysis 5. Repeat steps 2, 3, and 4 for additional modes to be
expanded (in different frequency ranges, for example). Each expansion pass is
stored as a separate load step on the results file. Caution: Spectrum analyses
expect all expanded modes to be in one load step. In the single point response
spectrum (SPOPT,SPRS) and Dynamic Design analysis method (SPOPT,DDAM), the modal
expansion can be performed after the spectrum analysis, based on the significance
factor SIGNIF on the MXPAND command. If you want to perform modal expansion after
the spectrum analysis, choose NO for mode expansion (MXPAND) on the dialog box for
the modal analysis options (MODOPT). 6. Leave SOLUTION. You can now review results
in the postprocessor. Command(s): FINISH GUI: Close the Solution menu.
Note — The expansion pass has been presented here as a separate step. However, if
you include the MXPAND command in the modal solution step, the program not only
extracts the eigenvalues and eigenvectors, but also expands the specified mode
shapes.
3.7. Review the Results

Results from a modal analysis (that is, the modal expansion pass) are written to
the structural results file, Jobname.RST. Results consist of: • • • Natural
frequencies Expanded mode shapes Relative stress and force distributions (if
requested).
You can review these results in POST1 [/POST1], the general postprocessor. Some
typical postprocessing operations for a modal analysis are described below. For a
complete description of all postprocessing functions, see Chapter 4, “An Overview
of Postprocessing” in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.

• • If you want to review results in POST1, the database must contain the same
model for which the solution was calculated. The results file (Jobname.RST) must
be available.
3.7.2. Reviewing Results Data

1. Read in results data from the appropriate substep. Each mode is stored on the
results file as a separate substep. If you expand six modes, for instance, your
results file will have one load step consisting of six substeps. Command(s):
SET,SBSTEP GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> substep Perform any
desired POST1 operations. Typical modal analysis POST1 operations are explained
below:
2.
3.7.3. Option: Listing All Frequencies

You may want to list the frequencies of all modes expanded. A sample output from
this command is shown below.
3–10
Section 3.7: Review the Results
***** SET 1 2 3 4 INDEX OF DATA SETS ON RESULTS FILE ***** TIME/FREQ LOAD STEP
SUBSTEP CUMULATIVE 22.973 1 1 1 40.476 1 2 2 78.082 1 3 3 188.34 1 4 4
Command(s): SET,LIST GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results
3.7.4. Option: Display Deformed Shape

Command(s): PLDISP GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Deformed Shape
Use the KUND field on PLDISP to overlay the nondeformed shape on the display.
3.7.5. Option: List Master DOF

Command(s): MLIST,ALL GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Master DOFs> User Selected> List
All Note — To display the master DOFs graphically, plot the nodes (Utility Menu>
Plot> Nodes or command NLIST).
3.7.6. Option: Line Element Results

Command(s): ETABLE GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Element Table> Define Table
For line elements, such as beams, spars, and pipes, use the ETABLE command to
access derived data (stresses, strains, and so on). Results data are identified by
a combination of a label and a sequence number or component name on the ETABLE
command. See the ETABLE discussion in The General Postprocessor (POST1) in the
ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for details.
3.7.7. Option: Contour Displays

Command(s): PLNSOL or PLESOL GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results>
Contour Plot> Nodal Solu or Element Solu Use these options to contour almost any
result item, such as stresses (SX, SY, SZ...), strains (EPELX, EPELY, EPELZ...),
and displacements (UX, UY, UZ...). The KUND field on PLNSOL and PLESOL gives you
the option of overlaying the nondeformed shape on the display. You can also
contour element table data and line element data: Command(s): PLETAB, PLLS GUI:
Main Menu> General Postproc> Element Table> Plot Element Table Main Menu> General
Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Line Elem Res Caution: Derived data, such as
stresses and strains, are averaged at the nodes by the PLNSOL command. This
averaging results in "smeared" values at nodes where elements of different
materials, different shell thicknesses, or other discontinuities meet. To avoid
the smearing effect, use selecting (described in Chapter 7, “Selecting and
Components” in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide) to select elements of the same
material, same shell thickness, and so on before issuing PLNSOL.
3–11
3.7.8. Option: Tabular Listings

Command(s): PRNSOL (nodal results) PRESOL (element-by-element results) PRRSOL
(reaction data), and so on NSORT, ESORT GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> List
Results> solution option Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Sorted
Listing> Sort Nodes Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Sorted Listing>
Sort Elems Use the NSORT and ESORT commands to sort the data before listing them.
3.7.9. Other Capabilities

Many other postprocessing functions - mapping results onto a path, load case
combinations, and so on - are available in POST1. See The General Postprocessor
(POST1) in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for details. See the ANSYS Commands
Reference for a discussion of the ANTYPE, MODOPT, M, TOTAL, EXPASS, MXPAND, SET,
and PLDISP commands.
3.8. A Sample Modal Analysis (GUI Method)

In this example, you perform a modal analysis on the wing of a model plane to
demonstrate the wing's modal degrees of freedom.

This is a modal analysis of a wing of a model plane. The wing is of uniform
configuration along its length, and its cross-sectional area is defined to be a
straight line and a spline, as shown. It is held fixed to the body on one end and
hangs freely at the other. The objective of the problem is to demonstrate the
wing's modal degrees of freedom.

The dimensions of the wing are shown in the problem sketch. The wing is made of
low density polyethylene with the following values: Young's modulus = 38x103 psi
Poisson's ratio = .3 Density = 8.3e-5 lb-sec2/in4
3–12
Section 3.9: A Sample Modal Analysis (Command or Batch Method)

Figure 3.1 Diagram of a Model Airplane Wing
The detailed step-by-step procedure for this example, Modal Analysis of a Model
Airplane Wing, is included in the Modal Tutorial.
3.9. A Sample Modal Analysis (Command or Batch Method)

You can perform the example modal analysis of a model airplane wing using the
ANSYS commands shown below instead of GUI choices. Items prefaced with an
exclamation point (!) are comments. You may receive warning messages when you run
this problem. The version of the problem that appears in the Modal Tutorial
contains an explanation of the warnings.
/FILNAM,MODAL /TITLE,Modal Analysis of a Model Airplane Wing /PREP7 ET,1,PLANE42 !
Define PLANE42 as element type ET,2,SOLID45 ! Define SOLID45 as element type
MP,EX,1,38000 MP,DENS,1,8.3E-5 MP,NUXY,1,.3 K,1 ! Define keypoint 1 at 0,0,0 K,2,2
! Define keypoint 2 at 2,0,0 K,3,2.3,.2 ! Define keypoint 3 at 2.3,.2,0
K,4,1.9,.45 ! Define keypoint 4 at 1.9,.45,0 K,5,1,.25 ! Define keypoint 5 at
1,.25,0 LSTR,1,2 ! Create a straight line between LSTR,5,1 ! Create a straight
line between BSPLIN,2,3,4,5,,,-1,,,-1,-.25 ! Create a B-spline AL,1,3,2 ESIZE,.25
AMESH,1 ESIZE,,10 TYPE,2 VEXT,ALL,,,,,10 /VIEW,,1,1,1 /ANG,1 /REP EPLOT FINISH
/SOLU ANTYPE,MODAL MODOPT,SUBSP,5
1 2
keypoints 1 and 2 keypoints 5 and 1
! Choose modal analysis type ! Choose the subspace mode-extraction method,
3–13
! extracting 5 modes ! Unselect element type 1
ESEL,U,TYPE,,1 NSEL,S,LOC,Z,0 D,ALL,ALL NSEL,ALL MXPAND,5 SOLVE FINISH /POST1

SET,LIST,2 SET,FIRST PLDISP,0 ANMODE,10,.5E-1 SET,NEXT PLDISP,0 ANMODE,10,.5E-1
SET,NEXT PLDISP,0 ANMODE,10,.5E-1 SET,NEXT PLDISP,0 ANMODE,10,.5E-1 SET,NEXT
PLDISP,0 ANMODE,10,.5E-1 FINISH /EXIT

Several ANSYS publications, particularly the ANSYS Verification Manual, describe
additional modal analyses. The ANSYS Verification Manual consists of test case
analyses demonstrating the analysis capabilities of the ANSYS family of products.
While these test cases demonstrate solutions to realistic analysis problems, the
ANSYS Verification Manual does not present them as step-by-step examples with
lengthy data input instructions and printouts. However, most ANSYS users who have
at least limited finite element experience should be able to fill in the missing
details by reviewing each test case's finite element model and input data with
accompanying comments. The ANSYS Verification Manual includes variety of modal
analysis test cases: VM45 - Natural Frequency of a Spring-mass System VM47 -
Torsional Frequency of a Suspended Disk VM48 - Natural Frequency of a Motor-
generator VM50 - Fundamental Frequency of a Simply Supported Beam VM52 -
Automobile Suspension System Vibrations VM53 - Vibration of a String Under Tension
VM54 - Vibration of a Rotating Cantilever Blade VM55 - Vibration of a Stretched
Circular Membrane VM57 - Torsional Frequencies of a Drill Pipe VM59 - Lateral
Vibration of an Axially-loaded Bar VM60 - Natural Frequency of a Cross-ply
Laminated Spherical Shell VM61 - Longitudinal Vibration of a Free-free Rod VM62 -
Vibration of a Wedge VM66 - Vibration of a Flat Plate VM67 - Radial Vibrations of
a Circular Ring from an Axisymmetric Model VM68 - PSD Response of a Two DOF
Spring-mass System VM69 - Seismic Response VM70 - Seismic Response of a Beam
Structure VM76 - Harmonic Response of a Guitar String
3–14
Section 3.12: Prestressed Modal Analysis of a Large-Deflection Solution VM89 -
Natural Frequencies of a Two-mass-spring System VM151 - Nonaxisymmetric Vibration
of a Circular Plate VM152 - Nonaxisymmetric Vibration of a Stretched Circular
Membrane (Harmonic Els) VM153 - Nonaxisymmetric Vibration of a Stretched Circular
Membrane (Modal) VM154 - Vibration of a Fluid Coupling VM175 - Natural Frequency
of a Piezoelectric Transducer VM181 - Natural Frequency of a Flat Circular Plate
with a Clamped Edge VM182 - Transient Response of a Spring-mass System VM183 -
Harmonic Response of a Spring-mass System VM202 - Transverse Vibrations of a Shear
Beam VM203 - Dynamic Load Effect on Simply-supported Thick Square Plate VM212 -
Modal Analysis of a Rectangular Cavity
3.11. Prestressed Modal Analysis

Use a prestressed modal analysis to calculate the frequencies and mode shapes of a
prestressed structure, such as a spinning turbine blade. The procedure to do a
prestressed modal analysis is essentially the same as a regular modal analysis,
except that you first need to prestress the structure by doing a static analysis:
1. Build the model and obtain a static solution with prestress effects turned on
[PSTRES,ON]. The same lumped mass setting [LUMPM] used here must also be used in
the later prestress modal analysis. Chapter 2, “Structural Static Analysis”
describes the procedure to obtain a static solution. Reenter SOLUTION and obtain
the modal solution, also with prestress effects turned on (reissue PSTRES,ON).
Files Jobname.EMAT (if ANSYS creates it) and Jobname.ESAV from the static analysis
must be available. If the model is spinning, include spin-softening effects (via
the OMEGA command's KSPIN option) if necessary. Expand the modes and review them
in the postprocessor.
2.
3.
Step 1 above can also be a transient analysis. In such a case, save the EMAT and
ESAV files at the desired time point. If the deformed shape from the static
solution differs significantly from its nondeformed shape, you can perform a
prestressed modal analysis of a large-deflection solution instead.
3.12. Prestressed Modal Analysis of a Large-Deflection Solution

You can also perform a prestressed modal analysis following a large deflection
(NLGEOM,ON) static analysis in order to calculate the frequencies and mode shapes
of a highly deformed structure. Use the prestressed modal analysis procedure, but
use the PSOLVE command (rather than the SOLVE command) to obtain the modal
solution, as shown in the sample input listing below. Along with the PSOLVE
command, you must issue the UPCOORD command to update the coordinates necessary
for obtaining the correct stresses. This procedure uses the element matrices and
element load vectors (for example, from pressures, temperature or acceleration
loads) from a previous static analysis. These loads will be passed through to a
subsequent mode superposition analysis if specified (LVSCALE command). Prestress
must be applied (PSTRES,ON) during the static portion of the analysis. However, in
cases where stressstiffening helps convergence:
3–15
Chapter 3: Modal Analysis • • Stress-stiffening (SSTIF,ON) must be applied
instead. (This requirement applies to elements outside of the 18x family of
elements only.) The EMATWRITE,YES command is also necessary to write the element
matrices to File.EMAT.
Issuing either a PSTRES,OFF or SSTIF,OFF command prevents all previously specified

prestressing from being applied. If the model is spinning, include spin-softening
effects (via the OMEGA command's KSPIN option) in the modal solution if necessary.
! Initial, large deflection static analysis ! /PREP7 ... FINISH /SOLU
ANTYPE,STATIC ! Static analysis NLGEOM,ON ! Large deflection analysis PSTRES,ON !
Flag to calculate the prestress matrix ... SOLVE FINISH ! ! Prestressed modal
analysis ! /SOLU ANTYPE,MODAL ! Modal analysis UPCOORD,1.0,ON ! Display mode
shapes relative to deformed geometry ! in the postprocessor. PSTRES,ON ! Prestress
effects ON MODOPT,... ! Select eigensolver MXPAND,... ! Specify the number of
modes to expand, if desired. PSOLVE,EIGxxxx ! Calculate the eigenvalues and
eigenvectors. ! Use EIGLANB or EIGFULL to match MODOPT command. FINISH /SOLU !
Additional solution step for expansion. EXPASS,ON PSOLVE,EIGEXP ! Expand the
eigenvector solution. (Required if you ! want to review mode shapes in the
postprocessor.) FINISH
Note — You may also use one of the other eigensolvers (PSOLVE,EIGSYM,
PSOLVE,EIGUNSY, PSOLVE,EIGDAMP or PSOLVE,EIGREDUC). In such a case, a
PSOLVE,TRIANG command must precede the PSOLVE,EIGxxx command.
3.13. Comparing Mode-Extraction Methods

The basic equation solved in a typical undamped modal analysis is the classical
eigenvalue problem:
[K ]{φ i} = ω2 [M]{φ i} i
where: [K] = stiffness matrix {Φi} = mode shape vector (eigenvector) of mode i ω2
Ωi = natural circular frequency of mode i ( i is the eigenvalue) [M] = mass matrix
Many numerical methods are available to solve the above equation. ANSYS offers
these methods:
3–16
Section 3.13: Comparing Mode-Extraction Methods • • • • • • • Block Lanczos method
(default) Subspace method PowerDynamics method Reduced (Householder) method
Unsymmetric method Damped method (The damped method solves a different equation;
see the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for more information.) QR damped method (The
QR damped method solves a different equation; see the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference
for more information.) Note — The damped, unsymmetric, and QR damped methods are
not available in the ANSYS Professional program. The first four methods (Block
Lanczos, subspace, PowerDynamics, and reduced) are the most commonly used. Table
3.6: “Symmetric System Eigensolver Choices” compares these four mode-extraction
methods. Following the table is a brief description of each mode-extraction
method.
Table 3.6 Symmetric System Eigensolver Choices

Eigensolver Block Lanczos Application Default. To find many modes (about 40+) of
large models. Recommended when the model consists of poorly shaped solid and shell
elements. This solver performs well when the model consists of shells or a
combination of shells and solids. Works faster but requires about 50% more memory
than subspace. To find few modes (up to about 40) of large models. Recommended
when the model consists of well-shaped solid and shell elements. Works well if
memory availability is limited. Memory Required Medium Disk Required Low
Subspace
Low
High
Power Dynamics To find few modes (up to about 20) of large models. Recommended for
fast computation of eigenvalues of over 100K DOF models. On coarse mesh models,
the frequencies are approximate. Missed modes are possible when repeated
frequencies are present. Reduced To find all modes of small to medium models (less
than 10K DOF). Can be used to find few modes (up to about 40) of large models with
proper selection of master DOF, but accuracy of frequencies depends on the master
DOF selected.
High
Low
Low
Low
3.13.1. Block Lanczos Method

The Block Lanczos eigenvalue solver is the default. It uses the Lanczos algorithm
where the Lanczos recursion is performed with a block of vectors. This method is
as accurate as the subspace method, but faster. The Block Lanczos method uses the
sparse matrix solver, overriding any solver specified via the EQSLV command. The
Block Lanczos method is especially powerful when searching for eigenfrequencies in
a given part of the eigenvalue spectrum of a given system. The convergence rate of
the eigenfrequencies will be about the same when extracting modes in the midrange
and higher end of the spectrum as when extracting the lowest modes. Therefore,
when you use a shift frequency (FREQB) to extract n modes beyond the starting
value of FREQB, the algorithm extracts the n modes beyond FREQB at about the same
speed as it extracts the lowest n modes.
3–17
3.13.2. Subspace Method

The subspace method uses the subspace iteration technique, which internally uses
the generalized Jacobi iteration algorithm. It is highly accurate because it uses
the full [K] and [M] matrices. For the same reason, however, the subspace method
is slower than the reduced method. This method is typically used in cases where
high accuracy is required or where selecting master DOF is not practical. When
doing a modal analysis with a large number of constraint equations, use the
subspace method with the frontal solver instead of the JCG solver, or use the
Block Lanczos mode-extraction method. Using the JCG solver when your analysis has
many constraint equations could result in an internal element stiffness assembly
that requires large amounts of memory.
3.13.3. PowerDynamics Method

The PowerDynamics method internally uses the subspace iterations, but uses the PCG
iterative solver. This method may be significantly faster than either the subspace
or the Block Lanczos methods, but may not converge if the model contains poorly-
shaped elements, or if the matrix is ill-conditioned. This method is especially
useful in very large models (100,000+ DOFs) to obtain a solution for the first few
modes. Do not use this method if you will be running a subsequent spectrum
analysis. The PowerDynamics method does not perform a Sturm sequence check (that
is, it does not check for missing modes), which might affect problems with
multiple repeated frequencies. This method always uses lumped mass approximation.
Note — If you use PowerDynamics to solve a model that includes rigid body modes,
be sure to issue the RIGID command or choose one of its GUI equivalents (Main
Menu> Solution> Analysis Options or Main Menu> Preprocessor> Loads> Analysis
Options).
3.13.4. Reduced Method

The reduced method uses the HBI algorithm (Householder-Bisection-Inverse
iteration) to calculate the eigenvalues and eigenvectors. It is relatively fast
because it works with a small subset of degrees of freedom called master DOF.
Using master DOF leads to an exact [K] matrix but an approximate [M] matrix
(usually with some loss in mass). The accuracy of the results, therefore, depends
on how well [M] is approximated, which in turn depends on the number and location
of masters. Section 3.14: Matrix Reduction presents guidelines to select master
DOFs.
3.13.5. Unsymmetric Method

The unsymmetric method, which also uses the full [K] and [M] matrices, is meant
for problems where the stiffness and mass matrices are unsymmetric (for example,
acoustic fluid-structure interaction problems). It uses the Lanczos algorithm
which calculates complex eigenvalues and eigenvectors if the system is non-
conservative (for example, a shaft mounted on bearings). The real part of the
eigenvalue represents the natural frequency and the imaginary part is a measure of
the stability of the system - a negative value means the system is stable, whereas
a positive value means the system is unstable. Sturm sequence checking is not
available for this method. Therefore, missed modes are a possibility at the higher
end of the frequencies extracted.
3.13.6. Damped Method

The damped method is meant for problems where damping cannot be ignored, such as
rotor dynamics applications. It uses full matrices ([K], [M], and the damping
matrix [C]). It uses the Lanczos algorithm and calculates complex eigenvalues and
eigenvectors (as described below). Sturm sequence checking is not available for
this method. Therefore, missed modes are a possibility at the higher end of the
frequencies extracted.
3–18
Section 3.14: Matrix Reduction
3.13.6.1. Damped Method-Real and Imaginary Parts of the Eigenvalue

The imaginary part of the eigenvalue, Ω, represents the steady-state circular
frequency of the system. The real part of the eigenvalue, σ, represents the
stability of the system. If σ is less than zero, then the displacement amplitude
will decay exponentially, in accordance with EXP(σ). If σ is greater than zero,
then the amplitude will increase exponentially. (Or, in other words, negative σ
gives an exponentially decreasing, or stable, response; and positive σ gives an
exponentially increasing, or unstable, response.) If there is no damping, the real
component of the eigenvalue will be zero. Note — The eigenvalue results reported
by ANSYS are actually divided by 2* π. This gives the frequency in Hz
(cycles/second). In other words: Imaginary part of eigenvalue, as reported = Ω/(2*
π) Real part of eigenvalue, as reported = σ/(2* π)
3.13.6.2. Damped Method-Real and Imaginary Parts of the Eigenvector

In a damped system, the response at different nodes can be out of phase. At any
given node, the amplitude will be the vector sum of the real and imaginary
components of the eigenvector.
3.13.7. QR Damped Method

The QR damped method combines the advantages of the Block Lanczos method with the
complex Hessenberg method. The key concept is to approximately represent the first
few complex damped eigenvalues by modal transformation using a small number of
eigenvectors of the undamped system. After the undamped mode shapes are evaluated
by using the real eigensolution (Block Lanczos method), the equations of motion
are transformed to these modal coordinates. Using the QR algorithm, a smaller
eigenvalue problem is then solved in the modal subspace. This approach gives good
results for lightly damped systems and can also be applicable to any arbitrary
damping type (proportional or non-proportional symmetric damping or nonsymmetrical
gyroscopic damping matrix). This approach also supports nonsymmetrical stiffness
if present in the model. The QR Damp eigensolver is applicable for models with an
unsymmetrical global stiffness matrix where only a few elements contribute
nonsymmetrical element stiffness matrices. Example: Brake friction problem wherein
the local part of a model with friction contacts is producing nonsymmetrical
stiffness matrix in contact elements. Because the accuracy of this method is
dependent on the number of modes used in the calculations, a sufficient number of
fundamental modes are recommended, especially for highly damped systems to provide
good results. This method is not recommended for critically damped or overdamped
systems. This method outputs both the real and imaginary eigenvalues
(frequencies), but outputs only the real eigenvectors (mode shapes). When
requested however, complex mode shapes of damped systems are computed.
3.14. Matrix Reduction

Matrix reduction is a way to reduce the size of the matrices of a model and
perform a quicker and cheaper analysis. It is mainly used in dynamic analyses such
as modal, harmonic, and transient analyses. Matrix reduction is also used in
substructure analyses to generate a superelement. Matrix reduction allows you to
build a detailed model, as you would for a static stress analysis, and use only a
"dynamic" portion of it for a dynamic analysis. You choose the "dynamic" portion
by identifying key degrees of freedom, called master degrees of freedom, that
characterize the dynamic behavior of the model. The ANSYS program then calculates
reduced matrices and the reduced DOF solution in terms of the master DOF. You can
3–19
Chapter 3: Modal Analysis then expand the solution to the full DOF set by
performing an expansion pass. The main advantage of this procedure is the savings
in CPU time to obtain the reduced solution, especially for dynamic analyses of
large problems.
3.14.1. Theoretical Basis of Matrix Reduction

The ANSYS program uses the Guyan Reduction procedure to calculate the reduced
matrices. The key assumption in this procedure is that for the lower frequencies,
inertia forces on the slave DOF (those DOF being reduced out) are negligible
compared to elastic forces transmitted by the master DOF. Therefore, the total
mass of the structure is apportioned among only the master DOF. The net result is
that the reduced stiffness matrix is exact, whereas the reduced mass and damping
matrices are approximate. For details about how the reduced matrices are
calculated, refer to the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference.
3.14.1.1. Guidelines for Selecting Master DOF

Choosing master DOF is an important step in a reduced analysis. The accuracy of
the reduced mass matrix (and hence the accuracy of the solution) depends on the
number and location of masters. For a given problem, you can choose many different
sets of master DOF and will probably obtain acceptable results in all cases. You
can choose masters using M and MGEN commands, or you can have the program choose
masters during solution using the TOTAL command. We recommend that you do both:
choose a few masters yourself, and also have the ANSYS program choose masters.
This way, the program can pick up any modes that you may have missed. The
following list summarizes the guidelines for selecting master DOF: • • The total
number of master DOF should be at least twice the number of modes of interest.
Choose master DOF in directions in which you expect the structure or component to
vibrate. For a flat plate, for example, you should choose at least a few masters
in the out-of-plane direction (see Figure 3.2: “Choose Master DOF” (a)). In cases
where motion in one direction induces a significant motion in another direction,
choose master DOF in both directions (see Figure 3.2: “Choose Master DOF” (b)).
Figure 3.2 Choose Master DOF
(a) Possible out-of-plane masters for a flat plate(b) Motion in X induces motion
in Y • Choose masters at locations having relatively large mass or rotary inertia
and relatively low stiffness (see Figure 3.3: “Choosing Master DOFs”). Examples of
such locations are overhangs and "loosely" connected structures. Conversely, do
not choose masters at locations with relatively small mass, or at locations with
high stiffness (such as DOF close to constraints).
3–20
Section 3.14: Matrix Reduction
Figure 3.3 Choosing Master DOFs
Choose masters at locations with (a) large rotary inertia, (b) large mass • • • •
If your primary interest is in bending modes, you can neglect rotational and
"stretching" DOF. If the degree of freedom to be chosen belongs to a coupled set,
choose only the first (primary) DOF of the coupled set. Choose master DOF at
locations where forces or nonzero displacements are to be applied. For
axisymmetric shell models (SHELL51 or SHELL61), choose as masters the global UX
degree of freedom at all nodes on those sections of the model that are parallel to
or nearly parallel to the center line, so oscillatory motions between master DOF
can be avoided (see Figure 3.4: “Choosing Masters in an Axisymmetric Shell
Model”). This recommendation can be relaxed if the motion is primarily parallel to
the centerline. For axisymmetric harmonic elements with MODE = 2 or greater,
choose as masters both UX and UZ degrees of freedom.
Figure 3.4 Choosing Masters in an Axisymmetric Shell Model
The best way to check the validity of the master DOF set is to rerun the analysis
with twice (or half) the number of masters and to compare the results. Another way
is to review the reduced mass distribution printed during a modal solution. The
reduced mass should be, at least in the dominant direction of motion, within 10-15
percent of the total mass of the structure.
3–21
3.14.1.2. A Note About Program-Selected Masters

If you let the ANSYS program select masters [TOTAL], the distribution of masters
selected will depend on the order in which elements are processed during the
solution. For example, different master DOF sets may be selected depending on
whether the elements are processed from left to right or from right to left.
However, this difference usually yields insignificant differences in the results.
For meshes with uniform element sizes and properties (for example, a flat plate),
the distribution of masters will, in general, not be uniform. In such cases, you
should specify some master DOF of your own [M, MGEN]. The same recommendation
applies to structures with an irregular mass distribution, where the program-
selected master DOF may be concentrated in the higher-mass regions.
3–22
Chapter 4: Harmonic Response Analysis
4.1. Definition of Harmonic Response Analysis
Any sustained cyclic load will produce a sustained cyclic response (a harmonic
response) in a structural system. Harmonic response analysis gives you the ability
to predict the sustained dynamic behavior of your structures, thus enabling you to
verify whether or not your designs will successfully overcome resonance, fatigue,
and other harmful effects of forced vibrations.
4.2. Uses for Harmonic Response Analysis

Harmonic response analysis is a technique used to determine the steady-state
response of a linear structure to loads that vary sinusoidally (harmonically) with
time. The idea is to calculate the structure's response at several frequencies and
obtain a graph of some response quantity (usually displacements) versus frequency.
"Peak" responses are then identified on the graph and stresses reviewed at those
peak frequencies. This analysis technique calculates only the steady-state, forced
vibrations of a structure. The transient vibrations, which occur at the beginning
of the excitation, are not accounted for in a harmonic response analysis (see
Figure 4.1: “Harmonic Response Systems”).
Figure 4.1 Harmonic Response Systems
Typical harmonic response system. Fo and Ω are known. uo and Φ are unknown (a).
Transient and steady-state dynamic response of a structural system (b). Harmonic
response analysis is a linear analysis. Some nonlinearities, such as plasticity
will be ignored, even if they are defined. You can, however, have unsymmetric
system matrices such as those encountered in a fluidstructure interaction problem
(see Chapter 15, “Acoustics” in the ANSYS Coupled-Field Analysis Guide). Harmonic
analysis can also be performed on a prestressed structure, such as a violin string
(assuming the harmonic stresses are much smaller than the pretension stress). See
Section 4.11.1.1: Prestressed Full Harmonic Response Analysis for more information
on prestressed harmonic analyses.
6 2 # ¡¨ ¦¤ U @ # # 0 ©#!0 7©9¥£ ¡¥5¥1§¤!X#S4 ###!0 323§¤W9©§H2 D ©@¥¥9¨ V 2 # B #

#¨ ¦¨ " ¦ # #¡ ## 7¨
6 2 ¡¨ ¦¤ ¡ U #¤ ©##!0 7©9¥£ ¥5#¥§T#S4 ###!0 33§¤P#!# 3##!§RQ # 2 B 2 # ¨ # ¡ 2 ¦¤

6£ 3T4 Y` abc
ad` 6 IP¨ 4E¥HG' CFEC 20# D #2 B2 ¤ #¦ ###!0 33#9A!¥# £ # ¡¥#!##!¦ &¥#1#9!08$ 0 #¤

# @ ¤
6 4 20# $ % 7¨ 531)'(#&$ #"¤!# # ¥©¥¦##### #©¦§¥£ ¢ ¡ # # # ¡¨ ¤ ¡

ω
' 8$ 6 (¦94
4.3. Commands Used in a Harmonic Response Analysis

You use the same set of commands to build a model and perform a harmonic response
analysis that you use to do any other type of finite element analysis. Likewise,
you choose similar options from the graphical user interface (GUI) to build and
solve models no matter what type of analysis you are doing. Section 4.6: Sample
Harmonic Response Analysis (GUI Method) and Section 4.7: Sample Harmonic Response
Analysis (Command or Batch Method) show a sample harmonic response analysis done
via the GUI and via commands, respectively. For detailed, alphabetized
descriptions of the ANSYS commands, see the ANSYS Commands Reference.
4.4. The Three Solution Methods

Three harmonic response analysis methods are available: full, reduced, and mode
superposition. (A fourth, relatively expensive method is to do a transient dynamic
analysis with the harmonic loads specified as time-history loading functions; see
Chapter 5, “Transient Dynamic Analysis” for details.) The ANSYS Professional
program allows only the mode superposition method. Before we study the details of
how to implement each of these methods, let's explore the advantages and
disadvantages of each method.
4.4.1. The Full Method

The full method is the easiest of the three methods. It uses the full system
matrices to calculate the harmonic response (no matrix reduction). The matrices
may be symmetric or unsymmetric. The advantages of the full method are: • • • • •
• It is easy to use, because you don't have to worry about choosing master degrees
of freedom or mode shapes. It uses full matrices, so no mass matrix approximation
is involved. It allows unsymmetric matrices, which are typical of such
applications as acoustics and bearing problems. It calculates all displacements
and stresses in a single pass. It accepts all types of loads: nodal forces,
imposed (nonzero) displacements, and element loads (pressures and temperatures).
It allows effective use of solid-model loads.
A disadvantage is that this method usually is more expensive than either of the
other methods when you use the frontal solver. However, when you use the JCG
solver or the ICCG solver, the full method can be very efficient.
4.4.2. The Reduced Method

The reduced method enables you to condense the problem size by using master
degrees of freedom and reduced matrices. After the displacements at the master DOF
have been calculated, the solution can be expanded to the original full DOF set.
(See Section 3.14: Matrix Reduction, for a more detailed discussion of the
reduction procedure.) The advantages of this method are: • • It is faster and less
expensive compared to the full method when you are using the frontal solver.
Prestressing effects can be included.
The disadvantages of the reduced method are:
4–2
Section 4.5: How to Do Harmonic Response Analysis • The initial solution
calculates only the displacements at the master DOF. A second step, known as the
expansion pass, is required for a complete displacement, stress, and force
solution. (However, the expansion pass might be optional for some applications.)
Element loads (pressures, temperatures, etc.) cannot be applied. All loads must be
applied at user-defined master degrees of freedom. (This limits the use of solid-
model loads.)
• •
4.4.3. The Mode Superposition Method

The mode superposition method sums factored mode shapes (eigenvectors) from a
modal analysis to calculate the structure's response. Its advantages are: • • • •
• It is faster and less expensive than either the reduced or the full method for
many problems. Element loads applied in the preceding modal analysis can be
applied in the harmonic response analysis via the LVSCALE command, unless the
modal analysis was done using PowerDynamics. It allows solutions to be clustered
about the structure's natural frequencies. This results in a smoother, more
accurate tracing of the response curve. Prestressing effects can be included. It
accepts modal damping (damping ratio as a function of frequency).
Disadvantages of the mode superposition method are: • • Imposed (nonzero)

displacements cannot be applied. When you are using PowerDynamics for the modal
analysis, initial conditions cannot have previouslyapplied loads.
4.4.4. Restrictions Common to All Three Methods

All three methods are subject to certain common restrictions: • • • • All loads
must be sinusoidally time-varying. All loads must have the same frequency. No
nonlinearities are permitted. Transient effects are not calculated.
You can overcome any of these restrictions by performing a transient dynamic

analysis, with harmonic loads expressed as time-history loading functions. Chapter
5, “Transient Dynamic Analysis” describes the procedure for a transient dynamic
analysis.
4.5. How to Do Harmonic Response Analysis

We will first describe how to do a harmonic response analysis using the full
method, and then list the steps that are different for the reduced and mode
superposition methods.
4.5.1. Full Harmonic Response Analysis

The procedure for a full harmonic response analysis consists of three main steps:
1. Build the model.
4–3
Chapter 4: Harmonic Response Analysis 2. 3. Apply loads and obtain the solution.
Review the results.


• Both Young's modulus (EX) (or stiffness in some form) and density (DENS) (or
mass in some form) must be defined. Material properties may be linear, isotropic
or orthotropic, and constant or temperature-dependent. Nonlinear material
properties, if any, are ignored. Only linear behavior is valid in a harmonic
response analysis. Nonlinear elements, if any, will be treated as linear elements.
If you include contact elements, for example, their stiffnesses are calculated
based on their initial status and are never changed. For a full harmonic response
analysis, you can define frequency-dependent elastic material properties by using
TB,ELASTIC and TBFIELD; use TB,SDAMP and TBFIELD to define your structural damping
coefficients.
4.5.3. Apply Loads and Obtain the Solution

In this step, you define the analysis type and options, apply loads, specify load
step options, and initiate the finite element solution. Details of how to do these
tasks are explained below. Note — Peak harmonic response occurs at forcing
frequencies that match the natural frequencies of your structure. Before obtaining
the harmonic solution, you should first determine the natural frequencies of your
structure by obtaining a modal solution (as explained in Chapter 3, “Modal
Analysis”).
4.5.3.1. Enter the ANSYS Solution Processor

Command(s): /SOLU GUI: Main Menu> Solution

ANSYS offers these options for a harmonic response analysis:

Option New Analysis Command ANTYPE GUI Path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type>
New Analysis Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis> Harmonic Main Menu>
Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type>
Analysis Options Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options Main Menu>
Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options
Analysis Type: Harmonic Response ANTYPE Solution Method Solution Listing Format
Mass Matrix Formulation Equation Solver HROPT HROUT LUMPM EQSLV
Each of these options is explained in detail below.
4–4
Section 4.5: How to Do Harmonic Response Analysis • Option: New Analysis (ANTYPE)
Choose New Analysis. Restarts are not valid in a harmonic response analysis; if
you need to apply additional harmonic loads, do a new analysis each time. •
Option: Analysis Type: Harmonic Response (ANTYPE) Choose Harmonic Response as the
analysis type. • Option: Solution Method (HROPT) Choose one of the following
solution methods: – Full method – Reduced method – Mode superposition method •
Option: Solution Listing Format (HROUT) This option determines how the harmonic
displacement solution is listed in the printed output (Jobname.OUT). You can
choose between real and imaginary parts (default), and amplitudes and phase
angles. • Option: Mass Matrix Formulation (LUMPM) Use this option to specify the
default formulation (which is element dependent) or lumped mass approximation. We
recommend the default formulation for most applications. However, for some
problems involving "skinny" structures such as slender beams or very thin shells,
the lumped mass approximation often yields better results. Also, the lumped mass
approximation can result in a shorter run time and lower memory requirements.
After you complete the fields on the Harmonic Analysis Options dialog box, click
on OK to reach a second Harmonic Analysis dialog box, where you choose an equation
solver. • Option: Equation Solver (EQSLV) You can choose the frontal solver
(default), the sparse direct solver (SPARSE), the Jacobi Conjugate Gradient (JCG)
solver, or the Incomplete Cholesky Conjugate Gradient (ICCG) solver. The frontal
direct solver or sparse direct solver is recommended for most structural models.
When using a direct solver to solve a relatively large problem, choose the sparse
solver over the frontal solver.
4.5.3.3. Apply Loads on the Model

A harmonic analysis, by definition, assumes that any applied load varies
harmonically (sinusoidally) with time. To completely specify a harmonic load,
three pieces of information are usually required: the amplitude, the phase angle,
and the forcing frequency range (see Figure 4.2: “Relationship Between
Real/Imaginary Components and Amplitude/Phase Angle”).
4–5
Figure 4.2 Relationship Between Real/Imaginary Components and Amplitude/Phase

Angle
The amplitude is the maximum value of the load, which you specify using the
commands shown in Table 4.2: “ Applicable Loads in a Harmonic Response Analysis”.
The phase angle is a measure of the time by which the load lags (or leads) a frame
of reference. On the complex plane (see Figure 4.2: “Relationship Between
Real/Imaginary Components and Amplitude/Phase Angle”), it is the angle measured
from the real axis. The phase angle is required only if you have multiple loads
that are out of phase with each other. For example, the unbalanced rotating
antenna shown in Figure 4.3: “An Unbalanced Rotating Antenna” will produce out-of-
phase vertical loads at its four support points. The phase angle cannot be
specified directly; instead, you specify the real and imaginary components of the
out-of-phase loads using the VALUE and VALUE2 fields of the appropriate
displacement and force commands. Pressures and other surface and body loads can
only be specified with a phase angle of 0 (no imaginary component) with the
following exceptions: nonzero imaginary components of pressures can be applied
using the SURF153 and SURF154 elements in a full harmonic response analysis, or
using a mode superposition harmonic response analysis if the mode-extraction
method is Block Lanczos (see the SF and SFE commands). Figure 4.2: “Relationship
Between Real/Imaginary Components and Amplitude/Phase Angle” shows how to
calculate the real and imaginary components. The forcing frequency range is the
frequency range of the harmonic load (in cycles/time). It is specified later as a
load step option with the HARFRQ command.
4–6
3S 7 $A43 2! 0@9( 6#
P # # a #¨© ¦§ ©¨ ## # ## ©¨ `Y £¢ X #WbXc¦§ &U#T¡ ¡ ¤ # V © # 3 ¨ ¥ ¥
7 2&$#"#1hI$ge # 7H#f 76 0 # 8$453 2! 1)( 27 "# RQ
P # IHdC¡ ©¨ ## ! ¤ # P HIGDE CB¦§ ¨ F ¤ ¡ ##©
#¨ #© ¦§ P ¤
' &$# "# # ## %#! #

Section 4.5: How to Do Harmonic Response Analysis
Figure 4.3 An Unbalanced Rotating Antenna

7 86 5 #4 ## 3 ##
An unbalanced rotating antenna will produce out-of-phase vertical loads at its

four support points. Note — A harmonic analysis cannot calculate the response to
multiple forcing functions acting simultaneously with different frequencies (for
example, two machines with different rotating speeds running at the same time).
However, POST1 can superimpose multiple load cases to obtain the total response.
Table 4.2: “ Applicable Loads in a Harmonic Response Analysis” summarizes the
loads applicable to a to a harmonic response analysis. Except for inertia loads,
you can define loads either on the solid model (keypoints, lines, and areas) or on
the finite element model (nodes and elements). For a general discussion of solid-
model loads versus finite element loads, see Chapter 2, “Loading” in the ANSYS
Basic Analysis Guide.
Table 4.2 Applicable Loads in a Harmonic Response Analysis

Load Type Displacement (UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ) Force, Moment (FX, FY, FZ,
MX, MY, MZ) Pressure (PRES) Category Constraints Forces Surface Loads Cmd Family D
F SF BF GUI Path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural>
Displacement Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Force/Moment
Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Pressure Main Menu>
Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Temperature
Temperature (TEMP), Flu- Body Loads ence (FLUE)
& 2 % $" ¤##1)¤# #¤#©§¦#¢ 0( ## ##¨ ¡ ¥ £¡
& ' % $" ¤#!### ###©§¦¤¢ ### ##¨ ¡ ¥ £¡
##@!9 !9 @9 3 @H9G!4 #¡ $9¨6 C I I# FC
W V 8U # 5 !4 @#!# IG¤9 # # 5S!P¤¡R@#P¤¡ $ C T¨C Q F# £ Q64 £
@¤6#9 8!4 46 #6 ( # # C!@#¤@####6 !@¢!# #AAB 5 # A# % 6!4 T X E 0 9¨ #@6!9 !9 @9 3

@H9G!4 C#¡ CI I# F # %
4–7
Load Type Gravity, Spinning, etc. Category Inertia Loads Cmd Family GUI Path Main
Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Other
In an analysis, loads can be applied, removed, operated on, or listed.
4.5.3.3.1. Applying Loads Using Commands

Table 4.3: “Load Commands for a Harmonic Response Analysis” lists all the commands
you can use to apply loads in a harmonic response analysis.
Table 4.3 Load Commands for a Harmonic Response Analysis

Load Type Displacement Solid Model or FE Entity Apply DK DL DA D FK F SFL SFA SF
SFE Delete DKDELE DLDELE DADELE DDELE FKDELE FDELE SFLDELE SFADELE SFDELE SFEDELE
List DKLIST DLLIST DALIST DLIST FKLIST FLIST SFLLIST SFALIST SFLIST SFELIST
Operate DTRAN DTRAN DTRAN DSCALE FTRAN FSCALE SFTRAN SFTRAN SFSCALE SFSCALE FCUM
SFGRAD SFGRAD SFGRAD, SFCUM SFGRAD, SFBEAM, SFFUN, SFCUM BFCUM , BFUNIF , TBUNIF
BFCUM Apply Settings DSYM, DCUM -
Solid Model Keypoints Solid Model Lines Solid Model Areas Finite Elem Nodes Nodes
Force Pressure
Solid Model Keypoints Finite Elem Solid Model Lines Solid Model Areas Finite Elem
Finite Elem Nodes Elements
Temperature, Fluence
Solid Model Keypoints Solid Model Lines Solid Model Areas Solid Model Volumes
Finite Elem Nodes
BFK BFL BFA BFV BF
BFKDELE BFLDELE BFADELE BFVDELE BFDELE
BFKLIST BFLLIST BFALIST BFVLIST BFLIST
BFTRAN BFTRAN BFTRAN BFTRAN BFSCALE
Finite Elem Inertia -
Elements -
BFE ACEL, OMEGA, DOMEGA, CGLOC, CGOMGA, DCGOMG
BFEDELE -
BFELIST -
BFSCALE -
4.5.3.3.2. Applying Loads and Listing Loads Using the GUI

These steps for a harmonic analysis are the same as those for most other analyses.
See Section 3.5.4.2: Applying Loads Using the GUI and Section 3.5.4.3: Listing
Loads for more information.
4–8
4.5.3.4. Specify Load Step Options

The following options are available for a harmonic response analysis:

Option General Options Number of Harmonic Solutions NSUBST Stepped or Ramped Loads
Dynamics Options Forcing Frequency Range Damping HARFRQ Main Menu> Solution> Load
Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Freq and Substeps KBC Main Menu> Solution> Load Step
Opts> Time/Frequenc> Freq and Substeps Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts>
Time/Frequenc> Time - Time Step or Freq and Substeps Command GUI Path
ALPHAD, BETAD, DM- Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/FrePRAT quenc>
Damping MP,DAMP, MP,DMPR Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Other> Change Mat
Props> Material Models> Structural> Damping Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts>
Output Ctrls> Solu Printout Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> DB/
Results File Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> Integration Pt
Output Control Options Printed Output OUTPR
Database and Results File Output OUTRES Extrapolation of Results ERESX
4.5.3.4.1. General Options

General options include the following: • Number of Harmonic Solutions (NSUBST) You
can request any number of harmonic solutions to be calculated. The solutions (or
substeps) will be evenly spaced within the specified frequency range (HARFRQ). For
example, if you specify 10 solutions in the range 30 to 40 Hz, the program will
calculate the response at 31, 32, 33, ..., 39, and 40 Hz. No response is
calculated at the lower end of the frequency range. • Stepped or Ramped Loads
(KBC) The loads may be stepped or ramped. By default, they are ramped, that is,
the load amplitude is gradually increased with each substep. By stepping the loads
(KBC,1), the same load amplitude will be maintained for all substeps in the
frequency range. Note — Surface and body loads do not ramp from their previous
load step values, except for those applied to PLANE2, SOLID45, SOLID92, and
SOLID95 element types. The remaining element types always ramp from zero or from
the value specified via BFUNIF.
4–9

Dynamics options include the following: • Forcing Frequency Range (HARFRQ) The
forcing frequency range must be defined (in cycles/time) for a harmonic analysis.
Within this range, you then specify the number of solutions to be calculated. •
Damping Damping in some form should be specified; otherwise, the response will be
infinity at the resonant frequencies. ALPHAD and BETAD result in a frequency-
dependent damping ratio, whereas DMPRAT specifies a constant damping ratio to be
used at all frequencies. Damping can also be specified for individual materials
using MP,DAMP and MP,DMPR. See Section 5.10.3: Damping for further details. Note —
If no damping is specified in a direct harmonic analysis (full or reduced), the
program uses zero damping by default. • • • • • Alpha (Mass) Damping (ALPHAD) Beta
(Stiffness) Damping (BETAD) Constant Damping Ratio (DMPRAT) Material Dependent
Damping Multiplier (MP,DAMP) Constant Material Damping Coefficient (MP,DMPR)
4.5.3.4.3. Output Controls

Output control options include the following: • Printed Output (OUTPR) Use this
option to include any results data on the output file (Jobname.OUT). • Database
and Results File Output (OUTRES) This option controls the data on the results file
(Jobname.RST). • Extrapolation of Results (ERESX) Use this option to review
element integration point results by copying them to the nodes instead of
extrapolating them (default).
4.5.3.5. Save a Backup Copy of the Database to a Named File

You can then retrieve your model by reentering the ANSYS program and issuing
RESUME. Command(s): SAVE GUI: Utility Menu> File> Save as
4.5.3.6. Start Solution Calculations

Command(s): SOLVE GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS
4–10
4.5.3.7. Repeat for Additional Load Steps

Repeat the process for any additional loads and frequency ranges (that is, for
additional load steps). If you plan to do time-history postprocessing (POST26),
the frequency ranges should not overlap from one load step to the next. Another
method for multiple load steps, which allows you to store the load steps on files
and then solve them at once using a macro, is described in the ANSYS Basic
Analysis Guide.
4.5.3.8. Leave SOLUTION

Command(s): FINISH GUI: Close the Solution menu.

The results data for a harmonic analysis are the same as the data for a basic
structural analysis with the following additions: If you defined damping in the
structure, the response will be out-of-phase with the loads. All results are then
complex in nature and are stored in terms of real and imaginary parts. Complex
results will also be produced if out-of-phase loads were applied. See Section
2.3.6: Review the Results in Chapter 2, “Structural Static Analysis”.
You can review these results using either POST26 or POST1. The normal procedure is
to first use POST26 to identify critical forcing frequencies - frequencies at
which the highest displacements (or stresses) occur at points of interest in the
model - and to then use POST1 to postprocess the entire model at these critical
forcing frequencies. • • POST1 is used to review results over the entire model at
specific frequencies. POST26 allows you to review results at specific points in
the model over the entire frequency range.
Some typical postprocessing operations for a harmonic response analysis are

explained below. For a complete description of all postprocessing functions, see
Chapter 4, “An Overview of Postprocessing” in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.

The points to remember for a harmonic analysis are the same as those for most
structural analyses. See Section 2.3.6.2: Points to Remember in Chapter 2,
“Structural Static Analysis”.
4.5.4.3. Using POST26

POST26 works with tables of result item versus frequency, known as variables. Each
variable is assigned a reference number, with variable number 1 reserved for
frequency. 1. Define the variables using these options: Command(s): NSOL, ESOL,
RFORCE GUI: Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Define Variables Note — The NSOL command
is for primary data (nodal displacements), the ESOL command for derived data
(element solution data, such as stresses), and the RFORCE command for reaction
force data. To specify the total force, static component of the total force,
damping component, or the inertia component, use the FORCE command.
4–11
Chapter 4: Harmonic Response Analysis 2. Graph the variables (versus frequency or
any other variable). Then use PLCPLX to work with just the amplitude, phase angle,
real part, or imaginary part. Command(s): PLVAR, PLCPLX GUI: Main Menu> TimeHist
Postpro> Graph Variables Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Settings> Graph Get a
listing of the variable. To list just the extreme values, use the EXTREM command.
Then use the PRCPLX command to work with amplitude and phase angle or real and
imaginary part. Command(s): PRVAR, EXTREM, PRCPLX GUI: Main Menu> TimeHist
Postpro> List Variables> List Extremes Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> List Extremes
Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Settings> List
3.
Many other functions, such as performing math operations among variables (in
complex arithmetic), moving variables into array parameters, moving array
parameters into variables, etc., are available in POST26; see Chapter 6, “The
Time-History Postprocessor (POST26)” in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for
details. By reviewing the time-history results at strategic points throughout the
model, you can identify the critical frequencies for further POST1 postprocessing.

1. Read in results for the desired harmonic solution. You can use the SET command
for this purpose, but it will read in either the real component or the imaginary
component, not both at the same time. The true magnitude of the results is given
by an SRSS (square-root-of-sum-of-squares) combination of the real and imaginary
components (see Figure 4.2: “Relationship Between Real/Imaginary Components and
Amplitude/Phase Angle”) and can be done for specific points in the model in
POST26. Display the deformed shape of the structure, contours of stresses,
strains, etc., or vector plots of vector items (PLVECT). To obtain tabular
listings of data, use PRNSOL, PRESOL, PRRSOL, etc. • Option: Display Deformed
Shape Command(s): PLDISP GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Deformed
Shape Option: Contour Displays Command(s): PLNSOL or PLESOL GUI: Main Menu>
General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Nodal Solu or Element Solu Use these
options to contour almost any result item, such as stresses (SX, SY, SZ...),
strains (EPELX, EPELY, EPELZ...), and displacements (UX, UY, UZ...). The KUND
field on PLNSOL and PLESOL gives you the option of overlaying the undeformed shape
on the display. • Option: Vector Plots Command(s): PLVECT GUI: Main Menu> General
Postproc> Plot Results> Vector Plot> Predefined Use PLNSOL or PLESOL to contour
almost any result item, such as stresses (SX, SY, SZ...), strains (EPELX, EPELY,
EPELZ...), and displacements (UX, UY, UZ...). • Option: Tabular Listings
(reaction data) etc. NSORT, ESORT
2.
4–12
Section 4.6: Sample Harmonic Response Analysis (GUI Method) GUI: Main Menu>
General Postproc> List Results> Nodal Solution Main Menu> General Postproc> List
Results> Element Solution Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Reaction
Solution Use the NSORT and ESORT commands to sort the data before listing them.
Many other functions, such as mapping results on to a path, transforming results
to different coordinate systems, load case combinations, etc., are available in
POST1; see Chapter 3, “Solution” in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for details.
See the ANSYS Commands Reference for a discussion of the ANTYPE, HROPT, HROUT,
HARFRQ, DMPRAT, NSUBST, KBC, NSOL, ESOL, RFORCE, PLCPLX, PLVAR, PRCPLX, PRVAR,
PLDISP, PRRSOL, and PLNSOL commands.
4.6. Sample Harmonic Response Analysis (GUI Method)

In this sample problem, you will determine the harmonic response of a two-mass-
spring system.

Determine the response amplitude (Xi) and phase angle (Φi) for each mass (mi) of
the system shown below when excited by a harmonic force (F1sin Ωt) acting on mass
m1.

Material properties for this problem are: m1 = m2 = 0.5 lb-sec2/in k1 = k2 = kc =
200 lb/in Loading for this problem is: F1 = 200 lb The spring lengths are
arbitrarily selected and are used only to define the spring direction. Two master
degrees of freedom are selected at the masses in the spring direction. A frequency
range from zero to 7.5 Hz with a solution at 7.5/30 = 0.25 Hz intervals is chosen
to give an adequate response curve. POST26 is used to get an amplitude versus
frequency display.
4–13
4.6.3. Problem Diagram

Figure 4.4 Two-Mass-Spring-System

1. 2. Choose menu path Utility Menu> File> Change Title. Type the text "Harmonic
Response of Two-Mass-Spring System" and click on OK.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 4–14 Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Element Type>
Add/Edit/Delete. Click on Add. The Library of Element Types dialog box appears.
Scroll down the list on the left to "Combination" and select it. Click once on
"Spring-damper 14" in the list on the right. Click on Apply. Scroll up the list on
the left to "Structural Mass" and select it. Click once on "3D mass 21" in the
list on the right.
Section 4.6: Sample Harmonic Response Analysis (GUI Method) 8. 9. Click on OK. The
Library of Element Types dialog box closes. Click on Close in the Element Types
dialog box.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Real Constants.
Click on Add. The Element Type for Real Constants dialog box appears. Click once
on Type 1 to highlight it. Click on OK. The Real Constants for COMBIN14 dialog box
appears. Enter 200 for the spring constant (K) and 0.1 for the damping coefficient
(CV1). Click on OK. Repeat steps 2-4 for Type 2, MASS21. Enter .5 for mass in X
direction and click on OK. Click on Close to close the Real Constants dialog box.
4.6.3.4. Create the Nodes

Create> Nodes> In Active CS. Enter 1 for node number. Enter 0, 0, 0 for the X, Y,
and Z coordinates, respectively. Click on Apply. Enter 4 for node number. Enter 1,
0, 0 for the X, Y, and Z coordinates, respectively. Click on OK. Choose menu path
Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Numbering. The Plot Numbering Controls dialog box
appears. Click once on "Node numbers" to turn node numbers on.
10. Click on OK. 11. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create>
Nodes> Fill between Nds. A picking menu appears. 12. In the ANSYS Graphics window,
click once on nodes 1 and 4 (on the left and right sides of the screen). A small
box appears around each node. 13. Click on OK on the picking menu. The Create
Nodes Between 2 Nodes dialog box appears. 14. Click on OK to accept the default of
2 nodes to fill. Nodes 2 and 3 appear in the graphics window.
4.6.3.5. Create the Spring Elements

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create>
Elements> Auto Numbered> Thru Nodes. A picking menu appears. In the graphics
window, click once on nodes 1 and 2. Click on Apply. A line appears between the
selected nodes. Click once on nodes 2 and 3. Click on Apply. A line appears
between the selected nodes.
4–15
Chapter 4: Harmonic Response Analysis 6. 7. Click once on nodes 3 and 4. Click on
OK. A line appears between the selected nodes.
4.6.3.6. Create the Mass Elements

Elements> Elem Attributes. Enter 2 for element type number. Enter 2 for real
constant set number and click on OK. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor>
Modeling> Create> Elements> Auto Numbered> Thru Nodes. A picking menu appears. In
the graphics window, click once on node 2. Click on Apply. Click once on node 3
and click on OK.
4.6.3.7. Specify the Analysis Type, MDOF, and Load Step Specifications
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type>
New Analysis. Click once on "Harmonic" and click on OK. Choose menu path Main
Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options. Click once on "Full" to select
the solution method. Click once on "Amplitud + phase" to select the DOF printout
format and click on OK. Click OK in the Full Harmonic Analysis dialog box. Choose
menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> Solu Printout. Click
on "Last substep" to set the print frequency and click on OK. Choose menu path
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Freq and Substeps.
10. Enter 0 and 7.5 for the harmonic frequency range. 11. Enter 30 for the number
of substeps. 12. Click once on "Stepped" to specify stepped boundary conditions.
13. Click on OK.
4.6.3.8. Define Loads and Boundary Conditions

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 4–16 Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads>
Apply> Structural> Displacement> On Nodes. A picking menu appears. Click on Pick
All. The Apply U, ROT on Nodes dialog box appears. In the scroll box for DOFs to
be constrained, click once on "UY" to highlight it (make sure no other selections
are highlighted). Click on OK. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads>
Apply> Structural> Displacement> On Nodes. A picking menu appears. In the graphics
window, click once on nodes 1 and 4. Click on OK. The Apply U, ROT on Nodes dialog
box appears.
Section 4.6: Sample Harmonic Response Analysis (GUI Method) 8. 9. In the scroll
box for DOFs to be constrained, click once on "UX" to highlight it and click once
on "UY" to deselect it. Click on OK.
10. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Force/
Moment> On Nodes. A picking menu appears. 11. In the graphics window, click once
on node 2. 12. Click on OK. The Apply F/M on Nodes dialog box appears. 13. In the
scroll box for direction of force/moment, click once on "FX." 14. Enter 200 for
the real part of force/moment and click on OK.
4.6.3.9. Solve the Model

1. 2. 3. 4. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS. Review the
information in the status window and click on Close. Click on OK on the Solve
Current Load Step dialog box to begin the solution. When the solution is finished,
a dialog box stating "Solution is done!" appears. Click on Close.
4.6.3.10. Review the Results

For this sample, you will review the time-history results of nodes 2 and 3. 1. 2.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Define
Variables. The Defined Time-History Variables dialog box appears. Click on Add.
The Add Time-History Variable dialog box appears. Click on OK to accept the
default of Nodal DOF result. The Define Nodal Data dialog box appears. Enter 2 for
reference number of variable. Enter 2 for node number. Enter 2UX for the user-
specified label. In the scroll box on the right, click once on "Translation UX" to
highlight it. Click on OK. Click on Add in the Defined Time-History Variables
dialog box. The Add Time-History Variable dialog box appears.
10. Click on OK to accept the default of Nodal DOF result. The Define Nodal Data
dialog box appears. 11. Enter 3 for reference number of variable. 12. Enter 3 for
node number. 13. Enter 3UX for the user-specified label. 14. In the scroll box on
the right, click once on "Translation UX" to highlight it. 15. Click on OK. 16.
Click on Close. 17. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Style> Graphs. The
Graph Controls dialog box appears. 18. In the scroll box for type of grid, scroll
to "X and Y lines" to select it.
4–17
Chapter 4: Harmonic Response Analysis 19. Click on OK. 20. Choose menu path Main
Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Graph Variables. The Graph Time-History Variables dialog
box appears. Your graph should look like this:
21. Enter 2 for 1st variable to graph. 22. Enter 3 for 2nd variable to graph. 23.
Click on OK. A graph appears in the graphic window.

You are now finished with this sample problem. 1. 2. In the ANSYS Toolbar, click
on Quit. Choose the save option you want and click on OK.
4.7. Sample Harmonic Response Analysis (Command or Batch Method)

You can perform the example harmonic response analysis of a two-mass-spring system
by using the following ANSYS commands instead of the GUI.
/PREP7 /TITLE, Harmonic response of a two-mass-spring system ET,1,COMBIN14,,,2
ET,2,MASS21,,,4 R,1,200 ! Spring constant = 200 R,2,.5 ! Mass = 0.5 N,1
4–18
Section 4.9: Reduced Harmonic Response Analysis
N,4,1 FILL E,1,2 E,2,3 E,3,4 TYPE,2 REAL,2 E,2 E,3 FINISH /SOLU ANTYPE,HARMIC
HROPT,FULL HROUT,OFF OUTPR,BASIC,1 NSUBST,30 HARFRQ,,7.5 KBC,1 D,1,UY,,,4
D,1,UX,,,4,3 F,2,FX,200 SOLVE FINISH /POST26 NSOL,2,2,U,X,2UX NSOL,3,3,U,X,3UX
/GRID,1 /AXLAB,Y,DISP PLVAR,2,3 FINISH
! Spring element ! Spring element
! Mass element ! Mass element
! Harmonic response analysis ! Full harmonic response ! Print results as

amplitudes and phase angles ! ! ! ! ! 30 Intervals within freq. range Frequency
range from 0 to 7.5 HZ Step boundary condition Constrain all 44 DOF Constrain
nodes 1 and 4 in UX
! Store UX Displacements ! Turn grid on ! Y-axis label disp ! Display variables 2

and 3

additional harmonic analyses. The ANSYS Verification Manual consists of test case
analyses demonstrating the analysis capabilities of the ANSYS family of products.
accompanying comments. The ANSYS Verification Manual includes a variety of
harmonic analysis test cases: VM19 - Random Vibration Analysis of a Deep Simply-
Supported Beam VM76 - Harmonic Response of a Guitar String VM86 - Harmonic
Response of a Dynamic System VM87 - Equivalent Structural Damping VM88 - Response
of an Eccentric Weight Exciter VM90 - Harmonic Response of a Two-Mass-Spring
System VM176 - Frequency Response of Electrical Input Admittance for a
Piezoelectric Transducer VM177 - Natural Frequency of a Submerged Ring VM183 -
Harmonic Response of a Spring-Mass System VM203 - Dynamic Load Effect on Simply-
Supported Thick Square Plate
4.9. Reduced Harmonic Response Analysis

The reduced method, as its name implies, uses reduced matrices to calculate the
harmonic solution. The procedure for a reduced harmonic analysis consists of five
main steps: 1. Build the model.
4–19
Chapter 4: Harmonic Response Analysis 2. 3. 4. 5. Apply the loads and obtain the
reduced solution. Review the results of the reduced solution. Expand the solution
(expansion pass). Review the results of the expanded solution.
Of these, the first step is the same as for the full method. Details of the other
steps are explained below.
4.9.1. Apply Loads and Obtain the Reduced Solution

By reduced solution, we mean the degree of freedom solution calculated at the
master DOF. The tasks required to obtain the reduced solution are as follows: 1.
Enter the ANSYS solution processor. Command(s): /SOLU GUI: Main Menu> Solution
Define the analysis type and options. Options for the reduced solution are the
same as described for the full method except for the following differences: • •
Choose the reduced solution method. You can include prestress effects (PSTRES).
This requires element files from a previous static (or transient) analysis that
also included prestress effects. See Section 4.11.1: Prestressed Harmonic Response
Analysis for details.
2.
3.
Define master degrees of freedom. Master DOF are essential or dynamic degrees of
freedom that characterize the dynamic behavior of the structure. For a reduced
harmonic response dynamic analysis, master DOF are also required at locations
where you want to apply forces or nonzero displacements. See Section 3.14: Matrix
Reduction for guidelines to choose master DOF. Apply loads on the model. Harmonic
loading is the same as described for the full method, except for the following
restrictions: • • Only displacements and forces are valid. Element loads such as
pressures, temperatures, and accelerations are not allowed. Forces and nonzero
displacements must be applied only at master DOF.
4.
5.
Specify load step options. These are the same as described for the full method
except that the OUTRES and ERESX commands are not available, and the constant
material damping coefficient (MP,DMPR) is not applicable for the reduced method.
The OUTPR command controls the printout of the nodal solution at the master DOF
(OUTPR,NSOL,ALL (or NONE)). Save a copy of the database. Command(s): SAVE GUI:
Utility Menu> File> Save as Start solution calculations. Command(s): SOLVE GUI:
Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS Repeat steps 4 through 7 for any additional
loads and frequency ranges (that is, for additional load steps). If you plan to do
time-history postprocessing (POST26), the frequency ranges should not overlap from
one load step to the next. Another method for multiple load steps, which allows
you to store the load steps on files and then solve them at once using a macro, is
described in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.
6.
7.
8.
4–20
Section 4.9: Reduced Harmonic Response Analysis 9. Leave SOLUTION. Command(s):
FINISH GUI: Close the Solution menu.
4.9.2. Review the Results of the Reduced Solution

Results from the reduced harmonic solution are written to the reduced harmonic
displacement file, Jobname.RFRQ. They consist of displacements at the master DOF,
which vary harmonically at each forcing frequency for which the solution was
calculated. As with the full method, these displacements will be complex in nature
if damping was defined or if out-of-phase loads were applied. You can review the
master DOF displacements as a function of frequency using POST26. (POST1 cannot be
used, because the complete solution at all DOF is not available.) The procedure to
use POST26 is the same as described for the full method, except for the following
differences: • Before defining the POST26 variables, use the FILE command to
specify that data are to be read from Jobname.RFRQ. For example, if HARMONIC is
the jobname, the FILE command would be: FILE,HARMONIC,RFRQ. (By default, POST26
looks for a results file, which is not written by a reduced harmonic solution.)
Only nodal degree of freedom data (at master DOF) are available for processing, so
you can use only the NSOL command to define variables.

The expansion pass starts with the reduced solution and calculates the complete
displacement, stress, and force solution at all degrees of freedom. These
calculations are done only at frequencies and phase angles that you specify.
Therefore, before you begin the expansion pass, you should review the results of
the reduced solution (using POST26) and identify the critical frequencies and
phase angles. An expansion pass is not always required. For instance, if you are
interested mainly in displacements at specific points on the structure, then the
reduced solution could satisfy your requirements. However, if you want to
determine displacements at non-master DOF, or if you are interested in the stress
solution, then you must perform an expansion pass.

• • The .RFRQ, .TRI, .EMAT, and .ESAV files from the reduced solution must be
available. The database must contain the same model for which the reduced solution
was calculated.
4.9.3.2. Expanding the Modes

1. Reenter the ANSYS solution processor. Command(s): /SOLU GUI: Main Menu>
Solution Note — You must explicitly leave SOLUTION (using the FINISH command) and
reenter (/SOLU) before performing the expansion pass. 2. Activate the expansion
pass and its options. ANSYS offers these options for the expansion pass:
4–21

Option Expansion Pass On/Off No. of Solutions to Expand Freq. Range for Expansion
Phase Angle for Expansion Stress Calculations On/Off Nodal Solution Listing Format
Command EXPASS NUMEXP NUMEXP HREXP NUMEXP, EXPSOL HROUT GUI Path Main Menu>
Solution> Analysis Type> ExpansionPass Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts>
ExpansionPass> Single Expand> Range of Solu's Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts>
ExpansionPass> Singe Expand> Range of Solu's Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts>
ExpansionPass> Singe Expand> Range of Solu's Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts>
ExpansionPass> Singe Expand> Range of Solu's Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type>
Analysis Options
Each of these options is explained in detail below. • Option: Expansion Pass

On/Off (EXPASS) Choose ON. • Option: Number of Solutions to Expand (NUMEXP,NUM)
Specify the number. This number of evenly spaced solutions will be expanded over a
frequency range (specified next). For example, NUMEXP,4,1000,2000 specifies four
solutions in the frequency range 1000 to 2000 (that is, expanded solutions at
1250, 1500, 1750, and 2000). • Option: Frequency Range for Expansion (NUMEXP,
BEGRNG, ENDRNG) Specify the frequency range. See the example above. If you do not
need to expand multiple solutions, you can use EXPSOL to identify a single
solution for expansion (either by its load step and substep numbers or by its
frequency value). • Option: Phase Angle for Expansion (HREXP) If multiple
solutions are to be expanded over a frequency range (NUMEXP), we suggest that you
request both the real and imaginary parts to be expanded (HREXP,ALL). This way,
you can easily combine the two parts in POST26 to review the peak values of
displacements, stresses, and other results. If, on the other hand, a single
solution is to be expanded (EXPSOL), you can specify the phase angle at which peak
displacements occurred using HREXP,angle. • Option: Stress Calculations On/Off
(NUMEXP or EXPSOL) You can turn off stress and force calculations if you are not
interested in them. Default is to calculate stresses and forces. • Option: Nodal
Solution Listing Format (HROUT) Determines how the harmonic displacement solution
is listed in the printed output (Jobname.OUT). You can choose between real and
imaginary parts (default), and amplitudes and phase angles. 3. Specify load step
options. The only options valid for a harmonic expansion pass are output controls:
• 4–22 Printed Output
Section 4.9: Reduced Harmonic Response Analysis Use this option to include any
results data on the printed output file (Jobname.OUT). Command(s): OUTPR GUI: Main
Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> Solu Printout • Database and Results
File Output Use this option to control the data on the results file (Jobname.RST).
Command(s): OUTRES GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls>
DB/Results File • Extrapolation of Results Use this option to review element
integration point results by copying them to the nodes instead of extrapolating
them (default). Note — The FREQ field on OUTPR and OUTRES can be only ALL or NONE.
Command(s): ERESX GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls>
Integration Pt 4. Start expansion pass calculations. Command(s): SOLVE GUI: Main
Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS Repeat steps 2, 3, and 4 for additional
solutions to be expanded. Each expansion pass is stored as a separate load step on
the results file. Caution: Subsequent spectrum analyses expect all expanded modes
to be in one load step. 6. Leave SOLUTION. You can now review results in the
postprocessor. Command(s): FINISH GUI: Close the Solution menu.
5.
4.9.4. Review the Results of the Expanded Solution

This step is the same as the corresponding step in a basic structural analysis
with the following additions: You can review the results using POST1. (If you
expanded solutions at several frequencies, you can also use POST26 to obtain
graphs of stress versus frequency, strain versus frequency, etc.) The procedure to
use POST1 (or POST26) is the same as described for the full method, except for one
difference: if you requested expansion at a specific phase angle (HREXP,angle),
there is only one solution available for each frequency. Use the SET command to
read in the results. See Section 2.3.6: Review the Results in Chapter 2,
4.9.5. Sample Input

A sample input listing for a reduced harmonic response analysis is shown below:
! Build the Model /FILNAM,... /TITLE,... /PREP7 -----! Generate model --FINISH !
Jobname ! Title ! Enter PREP7
4–23
! Apply Loads and Obtain the Reduced Solution /SOLU ! Enter SOLUTION ANTYPE,HARMIC
! Harmonic analysis HROPT,REDU ! Reduced method HROUT,... ! Harmonic analysis
output options M,... ! Master DOF TOTAL,... D,... ! Constraints F,... ! Loads
(real and imaginary components) HARFRQ,... ! Forcing frequency range DMPRAT,... !
Damping ratio NSUBST,... ! Number of harmonic solutions KBC,... ! Ramped or
stepped loads SAVE SOLVE ! Initiate multiple load step solution FINISH ! Review
the Results of the Reduced Solution /POST26 FILE,,RFRQ ! Postprocessing file is
Jobname.RFRQ NSOL,... ! Store nodal result as a variable PLCPLX,... ! Define how
to plot complex variables PLVAR,... ! Plot variables PRCPLX,... ! Define how to
list complex variables PRVAR,... ! List variables FINISH ! Expand the Solution
/SOLU EXPASS,ON EXPSOL,... HREXP,... OUTRES,... SOLVE FINISH
! ! ! !
Reenter SOLUTION Expansion pass Expand a single solution Phase angle for expanded
solution
! Review the Results of the Expanded Solution /POST1 SET,... ! Read results for
desired frequency PLDISP,... ! Deformed shape PRRSOL,... ! List reactions
PLNSOL,... ! Contour plot of nodal results -----! Other postprocessing as desired
--FINISH
See the ANSYS Commands Reference for a discussion of the ANTYPE, HROPT, HROUT, M,
TOTAL, HARFRQ, DMPRAT, NSUBST, KBC, FILE, NSOL, PLCPLX, PLVAR, PRCPLX, PRVAR,
EXPASS, EXPSOL, HREXP, PLDISP, PRRSOL, and PLNSOL commands.
4.10. Mode Superposition Harmonic Response Analysis

The mode superposition method sums factored mode shapes (obtained from a modal
analysis) to calculate the harmonic response. It is the only method allowed in the
ANSYS Professional program. The procedure to use the method consists of five main
steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Build the model. Obtain the modal solution. Obtain the mode
superposition harmonic solution. Expand the mode superposition solution. Review
the results.
Of these, the first step is the same as described for the full method. The
remaining steps are described below. 4–24
Section 4.10: Mode Superposition Harmonic Response Analysis
4.10.1. Obtain the Modal Solution

Chapter 3, “Modal Analysis” describes how to obtain a modal solution. Following
are some additional hints: • • • The mode-extraction method should be Block
Lanczos (default), subspace, reduced, PowerDynamics, or QR damped. (The other
methods, unsymmetric and damped, do not apply to mode superposition.) Be sure to
extract all modes that may contribute to the harmonic response. If PowerDynamics
was used for the modal solution, no nonzero loads or displacements are allowed
(that is, only u = 0 is valid as the initial condition). PowerDynamics does not
create a load vector; therefore, the LVSCALE command is not valid unless the scale
factor is set to zero. For the reduced mode-extraction method, include those
master degrees of freedom at which harmonic loads will be applied. If you use the
QR damped mode-extraction method, you must specify any damping (ALPHAD, BETAD,
MP,DAMP, or element damping including gyroscopic) that you want to include during
preprocessing or in the modal analysis. (ANSYS ignores damping specified during
the mode superposition harmonic analysis.) You can set a constant damping ratio
(DMPRAT), define constant material damping coefficients (MP,DMPR), or define the
damping ratio as a function of mode (MDAMP) in a modal superposition harmonic
analysis. If you need to apply harmonically varying element loads (pressures,
temperatures, accelerations, and so on), specify them in the modal analysis. ANSYS
ignores the loads for the modal solution, but calculates a load vector and writes
it to the mode shape file (Jobname.MODE). You can then use the load vector for the
harmonic solution. Only forces, accelerations applied via the ACEL command, and
the load vector created in the modal analysis are valid. Use the LVSCALE command
to apply both the real and imaginary (if they exist) components of the load vector
from the modal solution. The modes need not be expanded for the mode superposition
solution. (If you want to review mode shapes, however, you must expand the mode
shapes.) Do not change the model data (for example, nodal rotations) between the
modal and harmonic analyses.
• •
• •
4.10.2. Obtain the Mode Superposition Harmonic Solution

In this step, the program uses mode shapes extracted by the modal solution to
calculate the harmonic response. The mode shape file (Jobname.MODE) must be
available, and the database must contain the same model for which the modal
solution was obtained. If the modal solution was performed using the subspace or
Block Lanczos method using the default mass formulation (not the lumped mass
approximation), the full file (Jobname.FULL) must also be available. The following
tasks are involved: 1. Enter SOLUTION. Command(s): /SOLU GUI: Main Menu> Solution
Define the analysis type and analysis options. These are the same as described for
the full method, except for the following differences: • • Choose the mode
superposition method of solution (HROPT). Specify the modes you want to use for
the solution (HROPT). This determines the accuracy of the harmonic solution.
Generally, the number of modes specified should cover about 50 percent more than
the frequency range of the harmonic loads. Optionally, cluster the solutions about
the structure's natural frequencies (HROUT) for a smoother and more accurate
tracing of the response curve.
2.
•
4–25
Chapter 4: Harmonic Response Analysis • Optionally, at each frequency, print a
summary table that lists the contributions of each mode to the response (HROUT).
Note, OUTPR,NSOL must be specified to print mode contributions at each frequency.
3.
Apply loads on the model. Harmonic loading is the same as described for the full
method, except for the following restrictions: • Only forces, accelerations, and
the load vector created in the modal analysis are valid. Use the LVSCALE command
to apply the load vector from the modal solution. Note that ALL loads from the
modal analysis are scaled, including forces and accelerations. To avoid load
duplication, delete any loads that were applied in the modal analysis. If mode
shapes from a reduced modal solution are being used, forces may be applied only at
master DOF.
4.
Specify load step options. These are the same as described for the reduced method
except that you can also specify modal damping (MDAMP). In addition, if the QR
damped method is specified, constant material damping coefficients (MP,DMPR) can
be defined. The NSUBST command specifies the number of solutions on each side of a
natural frequency if the clustering option (HROUT) is chosen. The default is to
calculate four solutions, but you can specify any number of solutions from 2
through 20. (Any value over this range defaults to 10 and any value below this
range defaults to 4.)
5.
If you used either the Block Lanczos (default) or the subspace option for the
modal analysis (MODOPT,LANB or SUBSP), you may use a nodal component with the
OUTRES,NSOL command to limit the displacement data written to the reduced
displacement file Jobname.RFRQ. The expansion pass will only produce valid results
for those nodes and for those elements in which all of the nodes of the elements
have been written to the .RFRQ file. To use this option, first suppress all
writing by invoking OUTRES,NSOL,NONE, then specify the item(s) of interest by
invoking OUTRES,NSOL,ALL,component. Repeat the OUTRES command for any additional
nodal components that you want to write to the .RFRQ file. Save a copy of the
database. Command(s): SAVE GUI: Utility Menu> File> Save as Start solution
calculations. Command(s): SOLVE GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS Repeat
steps 3 to 7 for any additional loads and frequency ranges (that is, for
additional load steps). If you plan to do time-history postprocessing (POST26),
the frequency ranges should not overlap from one load step to the next. Leave
SOLUTION. Command(s): FINISH GUI: Close the Solution menu.
6.
7.
8.
9.
The mode superposition harmonic solution is written to the reduced displacement

file, Jobname.RFRQ, regardless of whether the subspace, Block Lanczos, reduced,
PowerDynamics, or QR damped method was used for the modal solution. You will
therefore need to expand the solution if you are interested in stress results.
4–26
Section 4.10: Mode Superposition Harmonic Response Analysis
4.10.3. Expand the Mode Superposition Solution

The procedure for the expansion pass is the same as described for the reduced
method. Jobname.TRI from the modal analysis is needed only if the reduced
eigenvalue extraction method was used. The output from the expansion pass includes
the structural results file, Jobname.RST, containing expanded results. See Section
4.9.3: Expand the Solution (Expansion Pass).

Results consist of harmonically varying displacements, stresses, and reaction
forces at each forcing frequency for which the solution was calculated. You can
review these results using POST26 or POST1, as explained for the reduced method.
4.10.5. Sample Input

A sample input listing for a mode superposition harmonic response analysis is
shown below:
! Build the Model /FILNAM,... /TITLE,... /PREP7 ------FINISH ! Jobname ! Title !
Enter PREP7 ! Generate model
! Obtain the Modal Solution /SOLU ! Enter SOLUTION ANTYPE,MODAL ! Modal analysis
MODOPT,REDU ! Reduced method M,... ! Masters TOTAL,.. D,... ! Constraints SF,... !
Element loads SAVE SOLVE ! Initiate modal solution FINISH ! Obtain the Mode
Superposition Harmonic Solution /SOLU ! Enter SOLUTION ANTYPE,HARMIC
HROPT,MSUP,... HROUT,... LVSCALE,... F,... HARFRQ,... DMPRAT,... MDAMP,...
NSUBST,... KBC,... SAVE SOLVE FINISH ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Harmonic analysis Mode
superposition method; number of modes to use Harmonic analysis output options;
cluster option Scale factor for loads from modal analysis Nodal loads Forcing
frequency range Damping ratio Modal damping ratios Number of harmonic solutions
Ramped or stepped loads
! Initiate solution
! Review the Results of the Mode Superposition Solution /POST26 FILE,,RFRQ !

Postprocessing file is Jobname.RFRQ NSOL,... ! Store nodal result as a variable
PLCPLX,... ! Define how to plot complex variables PLVAR,... ! Plot variables
FINISH ! Expand the Solution (for Stress Results) /SOLU! Re-enter SOLUTION
EXPASS,ON ! Expansion pass
4–27
EXPSOL,... HREXP,... SOLVE FINISH ! Expand a single solution ! Phase angle for
expanded solution
! Review the Results of the Expanded Solution /POST1 SET,... ! Read results for
desired frequency PLDISP,... ! Deformed shape PLNSOL,... ! Contour plot of nodal
results --FINISH
See the ANSYS Commands Reference for a discussion of the ANTYPE, MODOPT, M, TOTAL,
HROPT, HROUT, LVSCALE, F, HARFRQ, DMPRAT, MDAMP, NSUBST, KBC, FILE, NSOL, PLCPLX,
PLVAR, EXPASS, EXPSOL, HREXP, SET, and PLNSOL commands.
4.11. Other Analysis Details

4.11.1. Prestressed Harmonic Response Analysis
A prestressed harmonic response analysis calculates the dynamic response of a
prestressed structure, such as a violin string. It is assumed that the
harmonically varying stresses (which are superimposed on the prestress) are much
smaller than the prestress itself.
4.11.1.1. Prestressed Full Harmonic Response Analysis

The procedure to do a prestressed full harmonic analysis is essentially the same
as that for any other full harmonic analysis except that you first need to
prestress the structure by doing a static analysis: 1. 2. Build the model and
obtain a static solution with prestress effects turned on (PSTRES,ON). The
procedure to obtain the static solution is explained in Chapter 2, “Structural
Static Analysis”. Reenter SOLUTION and obtain the full harmonic solution, also
with prestress effects turned on (reissue PSTRES,ON). Files Jobname.EMAT and
Jobname.ESAV from the static analysis must be available. If thermal body forces
were present during the static prestress analysis, these thermal body forces must
not be deleted during the full harmonic analysis or else the thermal prestress
will vanish. Hence, any temperature loads used to define the thermal prestress
must also be used in the full harmonic response analysis as sinusoidally time-
varying temperature loads. You should be aware of this limitation and exercise
some judgement about whether or not to include temperature loads in their static
prestress analysis.
4.11.1.2. Prestressed Reduced Harmonic Response Analysis

The procedure to do a prestressed reduced harmonic analysis is essentially the
same as that for any other reduced harmonic analysis except that you first need to
prestress the structure by doing a static analysis: 1. 2. Build the model and
obtain a static solution with prestress effects turned on (PSTRES,ON). The
procedure to obtain the static solution is explained in Chapter 2, “Structural
Static Analysis”. Reenter SOLUTION and obtain the reduced harmonic solution, also
with prestress effects turned on (reissue PSTRES,ON). Files Jobname.EMAT and
Jobname.ESAV from the static analysis must be available.
4–28
Section 4.11: Other Analysis Details
4.11.1.3. Prestressed Mode Superposition Harmonic Response Analysis

To include prestress effects in a mode superposition analysis, you must first
perform a prestressed modal analysis. See Chapter 3, “Modal Analysis” for details.
Once prestressed modal analysis results are available, proceed as for any other
mode superposition analysis.
4–29
4–30
Chapter 5: Transient Dynamic Analysis
5.1. Definition of Transient Dynamic Analysis
Transient dynamic analysis (sometimes called time-history analysis) is a technique
used to determine the dynamic response of a structure under the action of any
general time-dependent loads. You can use this type of analysis to determine the
time-varying displacements, strains, stresses, and forces in a structure as it
responds to any combination of static, transient, and harmonic loads. The time
scale of the loading is such that the inertia or damping effects are considered to
be important. If the inertia and damping effects are not important, you might be
able to use a static analysis instead (see Chapter 2, “Structural Static
Analysis”). The basic equation of motion solved by a transient dynamic analysis is
(M){ u } + (C){ u } + (K){u} = {F(t)} where: (M) = mass matrix (C) = damping
matrix (K) = stiffness matrix { u } = nodal acceleration vector { u } = nodal
velocity vector {u} = nodal displacement vector {F(t)} = load vector At any given
time, t, these equations can be thought of as a set of "static" equilibrium
equations that also take into account inertia forces ((M){ u }) and damping forces
((C){ u }). The ANSYS program uses the Newmark time integration method or an
improved method called HHT to solve these equations at discrete time points. The
time increment between successive time points is called the integration time step.
5.2. Preparing for a Transient Dynamic Analysis

A transient dynamic analysis is more involved than a static analysis because it
generally requires more computer resources and more of your resources, in terms of
the “engineering” time involved. You can save a significant amount of these
resources by doing some preliminary work to understand the physics of the problem.
For example, you can: 1. Analyze a simpler model first. A model of beams, masses,
and springs can provide good insight into the problem at minimal cost. This
simpler model may be all you need to determine the dynamic response of the
structure. If you are including nonlinearities, try to understand how they affect
the structure's response by doing a static analysis first. In some cases,
nonlinearities need not be included in the dynamic analysis. Understand the
dynamics of the problem. By doing a modal analysis, which calculates the natural
frequencies and mode shapes, you can learn how the structure responds when those
modes are excited. The natural frequencies are also useful for calculating the
correct integration time step. For a nonlinear problem, consider substructuring
the linear portions of the model to reduce analysis costs. Substructuring is
described in the ANSYS Advanced Analysis Techniques Guide.
2. 3.
4.
5.3. Three Solution Methods

Three methods are available to do a transient dynamic analysis: full, mode
superposition, and reduced. The ANSYS Professional program allows only the mode
superposition method. Before we study the details of how to implement each of
these methods, we will examine the advantages and disadvantages of each.
5.3.1. Full Method

The full method uses the full system matrices to calculate the transient response
(no matrix reduction). It is the most general of the three methods because it
allows all types of nonlinearities to be included (plasticity, large deflections,
large strain, and so on). Note — If you do not want to include any nonlinearities,
you should consider using one of the other methods because the full method is also
the most expensive method of the three. The advantages of the full method are: • •
• • • It is easy to use, because you do not have to worry about choosing master
degrees of freedom or mode shapes. It allows all types of nonlinearities. It uses
full matrices, so no mass matrix approximation is involved. All displacements and
stresses are calculated in a single pass. It accepts all types of loads: nodal
forces, imposed (nonzero) displacements (although not recommended), and element
loads (pressures and temperatures) and allows tabular boundary condition
specification via TABLE type array parameters. It allows effective use of solid-
model loads.
The main disadvantage of the full method is that it is more expensive than either
of the other methods. For procedural information about using the full method, see
Section 5.4: Performing a Full Transient Dynamic Analysis.
5.3.2. Mode Superposition Method

The mode superposition method sums factored mode shapes (eigenvectors) from a
modal analysis to calculate the structure's response. This is the only method
available in the ANSYS Professional program. Its advantages are: • • • It is
faster and less expensive than the reduced or the full method for many problems.
Element loads applied in the preceding modal analysis can be applied in the
transient dynamic analysis via the LVSCALE command, unless the modal analysis was
done using PowerDynamics. It accepts modal damping (damping ratio as a function of
mode number).
The disadvantages of the mode superposition method are: • • • The time step must
remain constant throughout the transient, so automatic time stepping is not
allowed. The only nonlinearity allowed is simple node-to-node contact (gap
condition). It does not accept imposed (nonzero) displacements.
5–2
Section 5.4: Performing a Full Transient Dynamic Analysis For procedural
information about using the mode superposition method, see Section 5.5: Performing
a Mode Superposition Transient Dynamic Analysis.
5.3.3. Reduced Method

The reduced method condenses the problem size by using master degrees of freedom
and reduced matrices. After the displacements at the master DOF have been
calculated, ANSYS expands the solution to the original full DOF set. (See Section
3.14: Matrix Reduction for a more detailed discussion of the reduction procedure.)
The advantage of the reduced method is: • It is faster and less expensive than the
full method.
The disadvantages of the reduced method are: • The initial solution calculates
only the displacements at the master DOF. A second step, known as the expansion
pass, is required for a complete displacement, stress, and force solution.
(However, the expansion pass might not be needed for some applications.) Element
loads (pressures, temperatures, and so on) cannot be applied. Accelerations,
however, are allowed. All loads must be applied at user-defined master degrees of
freedom. (This limits the use of solid-model loads.) The time step must remain
constant throughout the transient, so automatic time stepping is not allowed. The
only nonlinearity allowed is simple node-to-node contact (gap condition).
• • • •
For procedural information about using the reduced method, see Section 5.6:
Performing a Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis.
5.4. Performing a Full Transient Dynamic Analysis

Note - Before reading this section, you are encouraged to become familiar with the
concepts presented in Chapter 2, “Structural Static Analysis”. We will first
describe how to do a transient dynamic analysis using the full method. We will
then list the steps that are different for the mode superposition and reduced
methods. The procedure for a full transient dynamic analysis (available in the
ANSYS Multiphysics, ANSYS Mechanical, and ANSYS Structural products) consists of
these steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Section 5.4.1: Build the Model Section
5.4.2: Establish Initial Conditions Section 5.4.3: Set Solution Controls Section
5.4.4: Set Additional Solution Options Section 5.4.5: Apply the Loads Section
5.4.6: Save the Load Configuration for the Current Load Step Section 5.4.7: Repeat
Steps 3-6 for Each Load Step Section 5.4.8: Save a Backup Copy of the Database
Section 5.4.9: Start the Transient Solution
10. Section 5.4.10: Exit the Solution Processor 11. Section 5.4.11: Review the
Results
5–3


Keep the following points in mind when building a model for a full transient
dynamic analysis: • • You can use both linear and nonlinear elements. Both Young's
modulus (EX) (or stiffness in some form) and density (DENS) (or mass in some form)
must be defined. Material properties may be linear or nonlinear, isotropic or
orthotropic, and constant or temperature-dependent.
Some comments on mesh density: • • • The mesh should be fine enough to resolve the
highest mode shape of interest. Regions where stresses or strains are of interest
require a relatively finer mesh than regions where only displacements are of
interest. If you want to include nonlinearities, the mesh should be able to
capture the effects of the nonlinearities. For example, plasticity requires a
reasonable integration point density (and therefore a fine element mesh) in areas
with high plastic deformation gradients. If you are interested in wave propagation
effects (for example, a bar dropped exactly on its end), the mesh should be fine
enough to resolve the wave. A general guideline is to have at least 20 elements
per wavelength along the direction of the wave.
5.4.2. Establish Initial Conditions

Before you can perform a full transient dynamic analysis on a model, you need to
understand how to establish initial conditions and use load steps. A transient
analysis, by definition, involves loads that are functions of time. To specify
such loads, you need to divide the load-versus-time curve into suitable load
steps. Each "corner" on the load-time curve may be one load step, as shown in
Figure 5.1: “Examples of Load-Versus-Time Curves”.
Figure 5.1 Examples of Load-Versus-Time Curves
5–4
Section 5.4: Performing a Full Transient Dynamic Analysis The first load step you
apply is usually to establish initial conditions. You then specify the loads and
load step options for the second and subsequent transient load steps. For each
load step, you need to specify both load values and time values, along with other
load step options such as whether to step or ramp the loads, use automatic time
stepping, and so on. You then write each load step to a file and solve all load
steps together. Establishing initial conditions is described below; the remaining
tasks are described later in this chapter. The first step in applying transient
loads is to establish initial conditions (that is, the condition at Time = 0). A
transient dynamic analysis requires two sets of initial conditions (because the
equations being solved are of
u u second order): initial displacement (uo) and initial velocity ( o ). If no

special action is taken, both uo and o are
assumed to be zero. Initial accelerations ( o ) are always assumed to be zero, but
you can specify nonzero initial accelerations by applying appropriate acceleration
loads over a small time interval. The following paragraphs describe how to apply
different combinations of initial conditions. Zero initial displacement and zero
initial velocity - These are the default conditions, that is, if uo = o = 0, you
do not need to specify anything. You may apply the loads corresponding to the
first corner of the load-versus-time curve in the first load step. Nonzero initial
displacement and/or nonzero initial velocity - You can set these initial
conditions with the IC command. Command(s): IC GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Define
Loads> Apply> Initial Condit'n> Define Caution: Be careful not to define
inconsistent initial conditions. For instance, if you define an initial velocity
at a single DOF, the initial velocity at every other DOF will be 0.0, potentially
leading to conflicting initial conditions. In most cases, you will want to define
initial conditions at every unconstrained DOF in your model. If these conditions
are not the same at every DOF, it is usually much easier to define initial
conditions explicitly, as documented below (rather than by using the IC command).
See the ANSYS Commands Reference for a discussion of the TIMINT and IC commands.
Zero initial displacement and nonzero initial velocity - The nonzero velocity is
established by applying small displacements over a small time interval on the part
of the structure where velocity is to be specified. For example if
uo = 0.25, you can apply a displacement of 0.001 over a time interval of 0.004, as
shown below.
... TIMINT,OFF D,ALL,UY,.001 TIME,.004 LSWRITE DDEL,ALL,UY TIMINT,ON ... ! ! ! ! !
! Time integration effects off Small UY displ. (assuming Y-direction velocity)
Initial velocity = 0.001/0.004 = 0.25 Write load data to load step file
(Jobname.S01) Remove imposed displacements Time integration effects on
Nonzero initial displacement and nonzero initial velocity - This is similar to the
above case, except that the imposed displacements are actual values instead of
"small" values. For example, if uo = 1.0 and a displacement of 1.0 over a time
interval of 0.4:
... TIMINT,OFF D,ALL,UY,1.0 TIME,.4 LSWRITE DDELE,ALL,UY ! ! ! ! ! Time
integration effects off Initial displacement = 1.0 Initial velocity = 1.0/0.4 =
2.5 Write load data to load step file (Jobname.S01) Remove imposed displacements
uo = 2.5, you would apply
5–5
TIMINT,ON ... ! Time integration effects on
Nonzero initial displacement and zero initial velocity - This requires the use of
two substeps (NSUBST,2) with a step change in imposed displacements (KBC,1).
Without the step change (or with just one substep), the imposed displacements
would vary directly with time, leading to a nonzero initial velocity. The example
below shows how
u to apply uo = 1.0 and o = 0.0:

... TIMINT,OFF ! Time integration effects off for static solution D,ALL,UY,1.0 !
Initial displacement = 1.0 TIME,.001 ! Small time interval NSUBST,2 ! Two substeps
KBC,1 ! Stepped loads LSWRITE ! Write load data to load step file (Jobname.S01) !
Transient solution TIMINT,ON ! Time-integration effects on for transient solution
TIME,... ! Realistic time interval DDELE,ALL,UY ! Remove displacement constraints
KBC,0 ! Ramped loads (if appropriate) ! Continue with normal transient solution
procedures ...
Nonzero initial acceleration - This can be approximated by specifying the required

acceleration (ACEL) over a small interval of time. For example, the commands to
apply an initial acceleration of 9.81 would look like this:
... ACEL,,9.81 ! Initial Y-direction acceleration TIME,.001 ! Small time interval
NSUBST,2 ! Two substeps KBC,1 ! Stepped loads ! The structure must be
unconstrained in the initial load step, or ! else the initial acceleration
specification will have no effect. DDELE, ... ! Remove displacement constraints
(if appropriate) LSWRITE ! Write load data to load step file (Jobname.S01) !
Transient solution TIME, ... ! Realistic time interval NSUBST, ... ! Use
appropriate time step KBC,0 ! Ramped loads (if appropriate) D, ... ! Constrain
structure as desired ! Continue with normal transient solution procedures
LSWRITE ! Write load data to load step file (Jobname.S02) ...
See the ANSYS Commands Reference for discussions of the ACEL, TIME, NSUBST, KBC,
LSWRITE, DDELE, and KBC commands.

This step for a transient dynamic analysis is the same as for a basic structural
analysis (see Section 2.3.2: Set Solution Controls in Chapter 2, “Structural
Static Analysis”) with the following additions: If you need to establish initial
conditions for the full transient dynamic analysis (as described in Section 5.4.2:
Establish Initial Conditions), you must do so for the first load step of the
analysis. You can then cycle through the Solution Controls dialog box additional
times to set individual load step options for the second and subsequent load steps
(as described in Section 5.4.7: Repeat Steps 3-6 for Each Load Step).
5.4.3.1. Access the Solution Controls Dialog Box

To access the Solution Controls dialog box, choose menu path Main Menu> Solution>
Analysis Type> Sol'n Control. The following sections provide brief descriptions of
the options that appear on each tab of the dialog 5–6
Section 5.4: Performing a Full Transient Dynamic Analysis box. For details about
how to set these options, select the tab that you are interested in (from within
the ANSYS program), and then click the Help button. Chapter 8, “Nonlinear
Structural Analysis” also contains details about the nonlinear options introduced
in this chapter.

The Basic tab is active when you access the dialog box. The controls that appear
on the Basic tab provide the minimum amount of data that ANSYS needs for the
analysis. Once you are satisfied with the settings on the Basic tab, you do not
need to progress through the remaining tabs unless you want to adjust the default
settings for the more advanced controls. As soon as you click OK on any tab of the
dialog box, the settings are applied to the ANSYS database and the dialog box
closes. You can use the Basic tab to set the options listed in Table 2.1: “Basic
box to set these options, access the dialog box, select the Basic tab, and click
the Help button. Special considerations for setting these options in a full
transient analysis include: • When setting ANTYPE and NLGEOM, choose Small
Displacement Transient if you are performing a new analysis and you want to ignore
large deformation effects such as large deflection, large rotation, and large
strain. Choose Large Displacement Transient if you expect large deflections (as in
the case of a long, slender bar under bending) or large strains (as in a metal-
forming problem). Choose Restart Current Analysis if you want to restart a failed
nonlinear analysis, or you have previously completed a static prestress or a full
transient dynamic analysis, and you want to extend the time-history. When setting
AUTOTS, remember that this load step option (which is also known as time-step
optimization in a transient analysis) increases or decreases the integration time
step based on the response of the structure. For most problems, we recommend that
you turn on automatic time stepping, with upper and lower limits for the
integration time step. These limits, specified using DELTIM or NSUBST, help to
limit the range of variation of the time step; see Section 5.10.2: Automatic Time
Stepping for more information. The default is ON. NSUBST and DELTIM are load step
options that specify the integration time step for a transient analysis. The
integration time step is the time increment used in the time integration of the
equations of motion. You can specify the time increment directly or indirectly
(that is, in terms of the number of substeps). The time step size determines the
accuracy of the solution: the smaller its value, the higher the accuracy. You
should consider several factors in order to calculate a "good" integration time
step; see Section 5.10.1: Guidelines for Integration Time Step for details. When
setting OUTRES, keep this caution in mind: Caution: By default, only the last
substep (time-point) is written to the results file (Jobname.RST) in a full
transient dynamic analysis. To write all substeps, set the Frequency so that it
writes all of the substeps. Also, by default, only 1000 results sets can be
written to the results file. If this number is exceeded (based on your OUTRES
specification), the program will terminate with an error. Use the command
/CONFIG,NRES to increase the limit (see Chapter 19, “Memory Management and
Configuration” in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide).
5.4.3.3. Using the Transient Tab

You can use the Transient tab to set the options listed in Table 5.1: “Transient
box to set these options, access the dialog box, select the Transient tab, and
5–7
Table 5.1 Transient Tab Options

Option Specify whether time integration effects are on or off (TIMINT) Specify
whether to ramp the load change over the load step or to step-apply the load
change (KBC) For more information about this option, see: • Section 8.6:
Performing a Nonlinear Transient Analysis in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide
Section 2.5: Stepped Versus Ramped Loads in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide Section
2.7.1.5: Stepping or Ramping Loads in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide Section
5.10.3: Damping in the ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide Section 17.2: Transient
Analysis in the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference
• •
Specify mass and stiffness damping (ALPHAD, BETAD) Choose the time integration
method, Newmark or HHT (TRNOPT) Define integration parameters (TINTP)
Special considerations for setting these options in a full transient analysis

include: • TIMINT is a dynamic load step option that specifies whether time
integration effects are on or off. Time integration effects must be turned on for
inertia and damping effects to be included in the analysis (otherwise a static
solution is performed), so the default is to include time integration effects.
This option is useful when beginning a transient analysis from an initial static
solution; that is, the first load steps are solved with the time integration
effects off. ALPHAD (alpha, or mass, damping) and BETAD (beta, or stiffness,
damping) are dynamic load step options for specifying damping options. Damping in
some form is present in most structures and should be included in your analysis.
See Section 5.4.4.2: Damping Option for other damping options. TRNOPT (TINTOPT)
specifies the time integration method to be used. The default is Newmark method.
TINTP is a dynamic load step option that specifies transient integration
parameters. Transient integration parameters control the nature of the Newmark and
HHT time integration techniques.
• •
5.4.3.4. Using the Remaining Solution Controls Tabs

The options on the remaining tabs in the Solution Controls dialog box for a full
transient analysis are the same as the ones you can set for a static structural
analysis. See the following sections of Chapter 2, “Structural Static Analysis”
for a list of these options: • • • Section 2.3.2.4: Using the Sol'n Options Tab
Section 2.3.2.5: Using the Nonlinear Tab Section 2.3.2.6: Using the Advanced NL
Tab. Exception: You cannot use arc-length options in a full transient analysis.

The additional solution options that you can set for a full transient analysis are
mostly the same as the ones you can set for a static structural analysis. For a
general description of what additional solution options are, along with
descriptions of those options that are the same, see the following sections of
Chapter 2, “Structural Static Analysis”: 5–8
Section 5.4: Performing a Full Transient Dynamic Analysis • • • • • • Section
2.3.3: Set Additional Solution Options Section 2.3.3.1: Stress Stiffening Effects
Section 2.3.3.2: Newton-Raphson Option Section 2.3.3.7: Creep Criteria Section
2.3.3.8: Printed Output Section 2.3.3.9: Extrapolation of Results
Additional solution options for a full transient analysis that differ from those
for a static analysis, or have different descriptions are presented in the
following sections.
5.4.4.1. Prestress Effects

You may include prestress effects in your analysis. This requires element files
from a previous static (or transient) analysis; see Section 5.9: Performing a
Prestressed Transient Dynamic Analysis for details. Command(s): PSTRES GUI: Main
Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis Type> Analysis Options
5.4.4.2. Damping Option

Use this load step option to include damping. Damping in some form is present in
most structures and should be included in your analysis. In addition to setting
ALPHAD and BETAD on the Solution Controls dialog box (as described in Section
5.4.3.3: Using the Transient Tab), you can specify the following additional forms
of damping for a full transient dynamic analysis: • • Material-dependent beta
damping (MP,DAMP) Element damping (COMBIN7, and so on)
To use the MP form of damping: Command(s): MP,DAMP GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load
Step Opts> Other> Change Mat Props> Material Models> Structural> Damping Note that
constant material damping coefficient (MP,DMPR) is not applicable in transient
analysis. See Section 5.10.3: Damping for further details.
5.4.4.3. Mass Matrix Formulation

Use this analysis option to specify a lumped mass matrix formulation. We recommend
the default formulation for most applications. However, for some problems
involving "skinny" structures, such as slender beams or very thin shells, the
lumped mass approximation might provide better results. Also, the lumped mass
approximation can result in a shorter run time and lower memory requirements. To
use this option: Command(s): LUMPM GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu>
Analysis Type> Analysis Options

You are now ready to apply loads for the analysis. Table 2.5: “Loads Applicable in
a Static Analysis” summarizes the loads applicable to a transient dynamic
analysis. Except for inertia loads, you can define loads either on the solid model
(keypoints, lines, and areas) or on the finite element model (nodes and elements).
Section 2.3.4:
5–9
Chapter 5: Transient Dynamic Analysis Apply the Loads describes the types of loads
that are applicable. In an analysis, loads can be applied, removed, operated on,
or deleted. For a general discussion of solid-model loads versus finite-element
loads, see Chapter 2, “Loading” in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide. You can also
apply time-dependent boundary conditions by defining a one-dimensional table
(TABLE type array parameter). See Section 2.3.4.2.1: Applying Loads Using TABLE
Type Array Parameters.
5.4.6. Save the Load Configuration for the Current Load Step
As described in Section 5.4.2: Establish Initial Conditions, you need to apply
loads and save the load configuration to a load step file for each corner of the
load-versus-time curve. You may also want to have an additional load step that
extends past the last time point on the curve to capture the response of the
structure after the transient loading. Command(s): LSWRITE GUI: Main Menu>
Solution> Load Step Opts> Write LS File
5.4.7. Repeat Steps 3-6 for Each Load Step

For each load step that you want to define for a full transient dynamic analysis,
you need to repeat steps 3-6. That is, for each load step, reset any desired
solution controls and options, apply loads, and write the load configuration to a
file. For each load step, you can reset any of these load step options: TIMINT,
TINTP, ALPHAD, BETAD, MP,DAMP, TIME, KBC, NSUBST, DELTIM, AUTOTS, NEQIT, CNVTOL,
PRED, LNSRCH, CRPLIM, NCNV, CUTCONTROL, OUTPR, OUTRES, ERESX, and RESCONTROL. An
example load step file is shown below:
TIME, ... Loads ... KBC, ... LSWRITE TIME, ... Loads ... KBC, ... LSWRITE TIME,
... Loads ... KBC, ... LSWRITE Etc. ! Time at the end of 1st transient load step !
Load values at above time ! Stepped or ramped loads ! Write load data to load step
file ! Time at the end of 2nd transient load step ! Load values at above time !
Stepped or ramped loads ! Write load data to load step file ! Time at the end of
3rd transient load step ! Load values at above time ! Stepped or ramped loads !
Write load data to load step file
5.4.8. Save a Backup Copy of the Database

Save a copy of the database to a named file. You can then retrieve your model by
reentering the ANSYS program and issuing RESUME. Command(s): SAVE GUI: Utility
Menu> File> Save as
5.4.9. Start the Transient Solution

Use one of these methods to start the transient solution: Command(s): LSSOLVE GUI:
Main Menu> Solution> Solve> From LS Files For additional ways to create and solve
multiple load steps (the array parameter method and the multiple SOLVE method),
see Section 3.8: Solving Multiple Load Steps in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide. 5–
10
Section 5.4: Performing a Full Transient Dynamic Analysis
5.4.10. Exit the Solution Processor

Use one of these methods to exit the solution processor: Command(s): FINISH GUI:
Close the Solution menu.

You review results for a full transient analysis in the same way that you review
results for most structural analyses. See Section 2.3.6: Review the Results in
Chapter 2, “Structural Static Analysis”.
You can review these results using either POST26, which is the time-history
postprocessor, or POST1, which is the general postprocessor. • • POST26 is used to
review results at specific points in the model as functions of time. POST1 is used
to review results over the entire model at specific time points.
Some typical postprocessing operations for a transient dynamic analysis are

explained below. For a complete description of all postprocessing functions, see
Section 4.1: What Is Postprocessing? in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.

The points to remember for a full transient analysis are the same as those for
most structural analyses. See Section 2.3.6.2: Points to Remember in Chapter 2,

POST26 works with tables of result item versus time, known as variables. Each
variable is assigned a reference number, with variable number 1 reserved for time.
1. Define the variables. Command(s): NSOL (primary data, that is, nodal
displacements) ESOL (derived data, that is, element solution data, such as
stresses) RFORCE (reaction force data) FORCE (total force, or static, damping, or
inertia component of total force) SOLU (time step size, number of equilibrium
iterations, response frequency, and so on) GUI: Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro>
Define Variables Note — In the mode superposition or reduced methods, only static
force is available with the FORCE command. 2. Graph or list the variables. By
reviewing the time-history results at strategic points throughout the model, you
can identify the critical time points for further POST1 postprocessing.
Command(s): PLVAR (graph variables) PRVAR, EXTREM (list variables) GUI: Main Menu>
TimeHist Postpro> Graph Variables Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> List Variables Main
Menu> TimeHist Postpro> List Extremes
5–11
5.4.11.4. Other Capabilities

Many other postprocessing functions, such as performing math operations among
variables, moving variables into array parameters, and moving array parameters
into variables, are available in POST26. See Chapter 6, “The Time-History
Postprocessor (POST26)” in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for details.

1. Read in model data from the database file. Command(s): RESUME GUI: Utility
Menu> File> Resume from Read in the desired set of results. Use the SET command to
identify the data set by load step and substep numbers or by time. Command(s): SET
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> By Time/Freq Perform the necessary
POST1 operations. The typical POST1 operations that you perform for a transient
dynamic analysis are the same as those that you perform for a static analysis. See
Section 2.3.6.4: Typical Postprocessing Operations for a list of these operations.
Note — If you specify a time for which no results are available, the results that
are stored will be a linear interpolation between the two nearest time points.
2.
3.
5.4.12. Sample Input for a Full Transient Dynamic Analysis

A sample input listing for a full transient analysis is shown below:
! Apply Loads and Obtain the Solution /SOLU ! Enter SOLUTION ANTYPE,TRANS !
Transient analysis TRNOPT,FULL ! Full method D,... ! Constraints F,... ! Loads
SF,... ALPHAD,... ! Mass damping BETAD,... ! Stiffness damping KBC,... ! Ramped or
stepped loads TIME,... ! Time at end of load step AUTOTS,ON ! Auto time stepping
DELTIM,... ! Time step size OUTRES,... ! Results file data options LSWRITE ! Write
first load step -----! Loads, time, etc. for 2nd load step --LSWRITE ! Write 2nd
load step SAVE LSSOLVE,1,2 ! Initiate multiple load step solution FINISH ! !
Review the Results /POST26 SOLU,... ! Store solution summary data
5–12
Section 5.5: Performing a Mode Superposition Transient Dynamic Analysis
NSOL,... ESOL,,,, RFORCE,... PLVAR,... PRVAR,... FINISH ! ! ! ! ! Store nodal
result as a variable Store element result as a variable Store reaction as a
variable Plot variables List variables
/POST1 SET,... ! PLDISP,... ! PRRSOL,... ! PLNSOL,... ! PRERR ! -----! Other

postprocessing as --FINISH
Read desired set of results into database Deformed shape Reaction loads Contour
plot of nodal results Global percent error (a measure of mesh adequacy) desired
See the ANSYS Commands Reference for discussions of the ANTYPE, TRNOPT, ALPHAD,
BETAD, KBC, TIME, AUTOTS, DELTIM, OUTRES, LSWRITE, LSSOLVE, SOLU, NSOL, ESOL,
RFORCE, PLVAR, PRVAR, PLDISP, PRRSOL, PLNSOL, and PRERR commands.
5.5. Performing a Mode Superposition Transient Dynamic Analysis

The mode superposition method sums factored mode shapes (obtained from a modal
analysis) to calculate the dynamic response. This method is available in the ANSYS
Multiphysics, ANSYS Mechanical, ANSYS Structural, and ANSYS Professional products.
The procedure to use the method consists of five main steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Build
the model. Obtain the modal solution. Obtain the mode superposition transient
solution. Expand the mode superposition solution. Review the results.

Building the model for a mode superposition transient dynamic analysis is the same
as that described for the full method. See Section 5.4.1: Build the Model for more
information.

Chapter 3, “Modal Analysis” describes how to obtain a modal solution. Following
are some additional hints: • The mode-extraction method should be Block Lanczos
(default), reduced, subspace, PowerDynamics, or QR damped. (The other methods,
unsymmetric and damped, do not apply to mode superposition.) PowerDynamics does
not create a load vector. Be sure to extract all modes that may contribute to the
dynamic response. If PowerDynamics was used for the modal solution, no nonzero
loads or displacements are allowed (that is, only u = 0 is valid as the initial
condition). PowerDynamics does not create a load vector; therefore, the LVSCALE
command is not valid unless the scale factor is set to zero. For the reduced mode-
extraction method, include those master degrees of freedom at those nodes at which
forces and gap conditions are to be defined. If you use the QR damped mode-
extraction method, you must specify any damping (ALPHAD, BETAD, MP,DAMP, or
element damping including gyroscopic) that you want to include during
preprocessing or
• •
• •
5–13
Chapter 5: Transient Dynamic Analysis in the modal analysis. (ANSYS ignores
damping specified during the mode superposition harmonic analysis.) You can set a
constant damping ratio (DMPRAT) or define the damping ratio as a function of mode
(MDAMP) in a modal superposition harmonic analysis. Note that constant material
damping coefficient (MP,DMPR) is not applicable in transient analysis. • • Specify
displacement constraints, if any. These constraints will be ignored if they are
specified in the mode superposition transient solution instead of in the modal
solution. If you need to apply element loads (pressures, temperatures,
accelerations, and so on) in the transient dynamic analysis, you must specify them
in the modal analysis. The loads are ignored for the modal solution, but a load
vector will be calculated and written to the mode shape file (Jobname.MODE). You
can then use this load vector for the transient solution. The modes need not be
expanded for the mode superposition solution. (If you want to review mode shapes
from a reduced modal solution, however, you must expand the mode shapes.) The
model data (for example, nodal rotations) should not be changed between the modal
and transient analyses.
• •
5.5.3. Obtain the Mode Superposition Transient Solution

In this step, the program uses mode shapes extracted by the modal solution to
calculate the transient response.

• • The mode shape file (Jobname.MODE) must be available. The database must
contain the same model for which the modal solution was obtained.

The procedure to obtain the mode superposition transient solution is described
below: 1. Enter SOLUTION. Command(s): /SOLU GUI: Main Menu> Solution Define the
analysis type and analysis options. These are the same as the analysis options
that are described for the full method (in Section 5.4.3: Set Solution Controls
and Section 5.4.4: Set Additional Solution Options), except for the following
differences: • You cannot use the Solution Controls dialog box to define analysis
type and analysis options for a mode superposition transient analysis. Instead,
you must set them using the standard set of ANSYS solution commands (which are
listed in Section 5.4.3: Set Solution Controls and Section 5.4.4: Set Additional
Solution Options) and the standard corresponding menu paths. Restarts are not
available (ANTYPE). Choose the mode superposition method of solution (TRNOPT).
When you specify a mode superposition transient analysis, a Solution menu that is
appropriate for that specific type of analysis appears. The Solution menu will be
either “abridged” or “unabridged,” depending on the actions you took prior to this
step in your ANSYS session. The abridged menu contains only those solution options
that are valid and/or recommended for mode superposition transient analyses. If
you are on the abridged Solution menu and you want to access other solution
options (that is, solution options that are valid for you to use, but their use
may not be encouraged for this type of analysis), select the Unabridged Menu
option from the Solution menu. For details, see Section 3.5.1: Using Abridged
Solution Menus in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.
2.
• • •
5–14
Section 5.5: Performing a Mode Superposition Transient Dynamic Analysis • Specify
the number of modes you want to use for the solution (TRNOPT). This determines the
accuracy of the transient solution. At a minimum, you should use all modes that
you think will contribute to the dynamic response. If you expect higher
frequencies to be excited, for example, the number of modes specified should
include the higher modes. The default is to use all modes calculated in the modal
solution. If you do not want to use rigid body (0 frequency) modes, use MINMODE on
the TRNOPT command to skip over them. Nonlinear options (NLGEOM, SSTIF, NROPT) are
not available.
• • 3.
Define gap conditions, if any. They can only be defined between two master degree
of freedom (DOF) nodes or between master DOF nodes and ground. When a non-reduced
mode-extraction method is used, a master DOF implies an unconstrained, active DOF.
If you used the QR damped mode-extraction method, gap conditions are not
supported. More details about gap conditions are presented in Section 5.6.1.3.1:
Gap Conditions. Command(s): GP GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Dynamic Gap Cond> Define
Apply loads to the model. The following loading restrictions apply in a mode
superposition transient dynamic analysis: • Only forces, accelerations applied via
the ACEL command, and a load vector created in the modal analysis are valid.
Imposed nonzero displacements are ignored. Use the LVSCALE command (Main Menu>
Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Load Vector> For Mode Super) to apply the load
vector from the modal solution. If mode shapes from a reduced modal solution are
being used, forces may be applied only at master DOF.
4.
Multiple load steps are usually required to specify the load history in a
transient analysis. The first load step is used to establish initial conditions,
and second and subsequent load steps are used for the transient loading, as
explained next. 5. Establish initial conditions. In modal superposition transient
analyses, a first solution is done at TIME = 0. This establishes the initial
condition and time step size for the entire transient analysis. Generally, the
only load applicable for the first load step is initializing nodal forces. For
this pseudo-static analysis, the mode superposition method may yield poor results
at TIME = 0 if nonzero loads are applied. The following load step options are
available for the first load step:
Table 5.2 Options for the First Load Step-Mode Superposition Analysis
Option Dynamics Options Transient Integration Para- TINTP meters Load Vector
Damping LVSCALE Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Time
Integration Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Load Vector> For Mode Super
Command GUI Path
ALPHAD, BETAD, Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> DMPRAT, MP,
Damping MDAMP Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Other> Change Mat Props>
Material Models> Structural> Damping
General Options
5–15
Option Integration Time Step Output Control Options Printed Output OUTPR Main
Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> Solu Printout Command DELTIM GUI
Path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> TimeTime Step
Dynamics options include the following: – Transient Integration Parameters (TINTP)

Transient integration parameters control the nature of the Newmark time
integration technique. The default is to use the constant average acceleration
scheme; see your ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for further details. – Load Vector
(LVSCALE) The load vector option allows you to apply a load vector created by the
modal solution as one of the loads. You can use such a load vector to apply
element loads (pressures, temperatures, and so on) on the model. – Damping Damping
in some form is present in most structures and should be included in your
analysis. You can specify five forms of damping in a mode superposition transient
dynamic analysis: ¡ Alpha (mass) damping (ALPHAD) ¡ Beta (stiffness) damping
(BETAD) ¡ Constant damping ratio (DMPRAT) ¡ Material-dependent beta damping
(MP,DAMP) ¡ Modal damping (MDAMP) Remember that, as described earlier in Section
5.5.2: Obtain the Modal Solution, any damping that you specify in the mode
superposition transient analysis is ignored if you used the QR damped mode-
extraction method. Constant material damping coefficient (MP,DMPR) is not
applicable in transient analysis. See Section 5.10.3: Damping for further details.
The only valid general option for the first load step is integration time step
(DELTIM), which is assumed to be constant throughout the transient. By default,
the integration time step is assumed to be 1/(20f), where f is the highest
frequency chosen for the solution. The DELTIM command is valid only in the first
load step and is ignored in subsequent load steps. Note — If you do issue the TIME
command in the first load step, it will be ignored. The first solution is always a
static solution at TIME = 0.
The output control option for the first load step is printed output (OUTPR). Use
this option to control printout of the displacement solution at the master DOF.
6.
Write the first load step to a load step file (Jobname.S01) by issuing the LSWRITE
command. Command(s): LSWRITE
5–16
Section 5.5: Performing a Mode Superposition Transient Dynamic Analysis GUI: Main
Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Write LS File 7. Specify loads and load step
options for the transient loading portion, writing each load step to a load step
file (LSWRITE). • General options include the following: – Time Option (TIME) This
option specifies time at the end of the load step. – Load Vector (LVSCALE) The
load vector option allows you to apply a load vector created by the modal solution
as one of the loads. – Stepped or Ramped Loads (KBC) This option indicates whether
to ramp the load change over the load step (KBC) or to step-apply the load change
(KBC,1). The default is ramped. • Output control options include the following: –
Printed Output (OUTPR) Use this option to control printed output. – Database and
Results File Output (OUTRES) This option controls the data on the reduced
displacement file. The only valid label on these commands is NSOL (nodal
solution). The default for OUTRES is to write the solution for every fourth time-
point to the reduced displacement file (unless there are gap conditions defined,
in which case the default is to write every solution). 8. If you used either the
Block Lanczos (default) or subspace option for the modal analysis (MODOPT,LANB or
MODOPT,SUBSP), you may use a nodal component with the OUTRES,NSOL command to limit
the displacement data written to the reduced displacement file Jobname.RDSP. The
expansion pass will only produce valid results for those nodes and for those
elements in which all of the nodes of the elements have been written to the .RDSP
file. To use this option, first suppress all writing by invoking OUTRES,NSOL,NONE,
then specify the item(s) of interest by invoking OUTRES,NSOL,FREQ,COMP. Repeat the
OUTRES command for any additional nodal components that you want to write to the
.RDSP file. Only one output frequency is allowed - ANSYS uses the last frequency
specified by OUTRES. Save a backup copy of the database to a named file.
Command(s): SAVE GUI: Utility Menu> File> Save as
9.
10. Start the transient solution. Command(s): LSSOLVE GUI: Main Menu> Solution>
Solve> From LS Files 11. Leave SOLUTION. Command(s): FINISH GUI: Close the
Solution menu.
5–17
Chapter 5: Transient Dynamic Analysis The mode superposition transient solution is
written to the reduced displacement file, Jobname.RDSP, regardless of whether the
subspace, Block Lanczos, reduced, PowerDynamics, or QR damped method was used for
the modal solution. You will therefore need to expand the solution if you are
interested in stress results.
5.5.4. Expand the Mode Superposition Solution

The procedure for the expansion pass is the same as described for the reduced
method (see Section 5.6.3: Expand the Solution (Expansion Pass)). Jobname.TRI is
needed only if the reduced method was used for the modal solution. The output from
the expansion pass includes the structural results file, Jobname.RST, containing
expanded results.

Results consist of displacements, stresses, and reaction forces at each time-point
for which the solution was expanded. You can review these results using POST26 or
POST1, as explained for the full method (see Section 5.4.11: Review the Results).
Note — In the mode superposition or reduced methods, only static force is
available with the FORCE command.
5.5.6. Sample Input for a Mode Superposition Transient Dynamic Analysis

A sample input listing for a mode superposition transient analysis is shown below:
! Obtain the Modal Solution /SOLU ! Enter SOLUTION ANTYPE,MODAL ! Modal analysis
MODOPT,REDU ! Reduced method M,... ! Master DOF TOTAL,... D,... ! Constraints
SF,... ! Element loads ACEL,... SAVE SOLVE FINISH ! Obtain the Mode Superposition
Transient Solution /SOLU ! Reenter SOLUTION ANTYPE,TRANS ! Transient analysis
TRNOPT,MSUP,... ! Mode superposition method LVSCALE,... ! Scale factor for element
loads F,... ! Nodal Loads MDAMP,... ! Modal damping ratios DELTIM,... !
Integration time step sizes LSWRITE ! Write first load step (Remember: the first
load step --! is solved statically at time=0.) -----! Loads, etc. for 2nd load
step TIME,... ! Time at end of second load step KBC,... ! Ramped or stepped loads
OUTRES,... ! Results-file data controls --LSWRITE ! Write 2nd load step (first
transient load step) SAVE
5–18
Section 5.6: Performing a Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis
LSSOLVE FINISH ! Initiate multiple load step solution
! Review results of the mode superposition solution /POST26 ! Enter POST26

FILE,,RDSP ! Results file is Jobname.RDSP SOLU,... ! Store solution summary data
NSOL,... ! Store nodal result as a variable PLVAR,... ! Plot variables PRVAR,... !
List variables FINISH ! Expand the Solution /SOLU ! Reenter SOLUTION EXPASS,ON !
Expansion pass NUMEXP,... ! No. of solutions to expand; time range OUTRES,... !
Results-file data controls SOLVE FINISH ! Review the Results of the Expanded
Solution /POST1 SET,... ! Read desired set of results into database PLDISP,... !
Deformed shape PRRSOL,... ! Reaction loads PLNSOL,... ! Contour plot of nodal
results PRERR ! Global percent error (a measure of mesh adequacy) -----! Other
postprocessing as desired --FINISH
See the ANSYS Commands Reference for discussions of the ANTYPE, MODOPT, M, TOTAL,
ACEL, TRNOPT, LVSCALE, MDAMP, DELTIM, TIME, KBC, OUTRES, LSSOLVE, FILE, SOLU,
NSOL, PLVAR, PRVAR, EXPASS, NUMEXP, OUTRES, PLDISP, PRRSOL, PLNSOL, and PRERR
commands.
5.6. Performing a Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis

The reduced method, as its name implies, uses reduced matrices to calculate the
dynamic response. It is available in the ANSYS Multiphysics, ANSYS Mechanical, and
ANSYS Structural products. You should consider using this method if you do not
want to include nonlinearities (other than simple node-to-node contact) in the
analysis. The procedure for a reduced transient dynamic analysis consists of these
main steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Build the model. Obtain the reduced solution. Review
the results of the reduced solution. Expand the solution (expansion pass). Review
the results of the expanded solution.
Of these, the first step is the same as for the full method, except that no
nonlinearities are allowed (other than simple node-to-node contact, which is
specified in the form of a gap condition instead of an element type). Details of
the other steps are explained below.
5.6.1. Obtain the Reduced Solution

By reduced solution, we mean the degree of freedom solution calculated at the
master DOF. The tasks required to obtain the reduced solution are explained in the
following sections. For the following tasks, you need to first enter the SOLUTION
processor. Command(s): /SOLU
5–19
Chapter 5: Transient Dynamic Analysis GUI: Main Menu> Solution

These are the same as the analysis options that are described for the full method
(in Section 5.4.3: Set Solution Controls and Section 5.4.4: Set Additional
Solution Options) except for the following differences: • You cannot use the
Solution Controls dialog box to define analysis type and analysis options for a
reduced transient dynamic analysis. Instead, you must set them using the standard
set of ANSYS solution commands (which are listed in Section 5.4.3: Set Solution
Controls and Section 5.4.4: Set Additional Solution Options) and the standard
corresponding menu paths. Restarts are not available (ANTYPE). Choose the reduced
method of solution (TRNOPT). When you specify a reduced transient analysis, a
Solution menu that is appropriate for that specific type of analysis appears. The
Solution menu will be either “abridged” or “unabridged,” depending on the actions
you took prior to this step in your ANSYS session. The abridged menu contains only
those solution options that are valid and/or recommended for reduced transient
analyses. If you are on the abridged Solution menu and you want to access other
solution options (that is, solution options that are valid for you to use, but
their use may not be encouraged for this type of analysis), select the Unabridged
Menu option from the Solution menu. For details, see Section 3.5.1: Using Abridged
Solution Menus in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide. Nonlinear options (NLGEOM,
SSTIF, NROPT) are not available.
• • •

Master DOF are essential degrees of freedom that characterize the dynamic behavior
of the structure. For a reduced transient dynamic analysis, master DOF are also
required at locations where you want to define gap conditions, forces, or nonzero
displacements. You can list the defined master DOF or delete master DOF as well.
See Section 3.14: Matrix Reduction for guidelines to choose master DOF.
Command(s): M, MGEN, TOTAL, MLIST, MDELE GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Master DOFs>
User Selected> Define Main Menu> Solution> Master DOFs> User Selected> Copy Main
Menu> Solution> Master DOFs> Program Selected Main Menu> Solution> Master DOFs>
User Selected> List All Main Menu> Solution> Master DOFs> User Selected> Delete
5.6.1.3. Define Gap Conditions

Define any gap conditions. Command(s): GP GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Dynamic Gap
Cond> Define You can also list the defined gaps and delete gaps. Command(s):
GPLIST, GPDELE GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Dynamic Gap Cond> List All Main Menu>
Solution> Dynamic Gap Cond> Delete
5.6.1.3.1. Gap Conditions

Gap conditions can only be defined between two master degree of freedom (DOF)
nodes or between master DOF nodes and ground, as shown in the following figure. 5–
20
Figure 5.2 Examples of Gap Conditions
Gap conditions are similar to gap elements and are specified between surfaces that
are expected to contact (impact) each other during the transient. The ANSYS
program accounts for the gap force, which develops when the gap closes, by using
an equivalent nodal load vector. Some guidelines to define gap conditions are
presented below: • • Use enough gap conditions to obtain a smooth contact stress
distribution between the contacting surfaces. Define a reasonable gap stiffness.
If the stiffness is too low, the contacting surfaces may overlap too much. If the
stiffness is too high, a very small time step will be required during impact. A
general recommendation is to specify a gap stiffness that is one or two orders of
magnitude higher than the adjacent element stiffness. You can estimate the
adjacent element stiffness using AE/L, where A is the contributing area around the
gap condition, E is the elastic modulus of the softer material at the interface,
and L is the depth of the first layer of elements at the interface. The nonlinear
gap damping provided through the DAMP field of the GP command runs faster than a
full transient analysis using a gap element COMBIN40. Only TRNOPT = MSUP allows
the nonlinear gap damping action. Damping conditions are ignored for the reduced
transient analysis method.
5.6.1.4. Apply Initial Conditions to the Model

The following loading restrictions apply in a reduced transient dynamic analysis:
• • Only displacements, forces, and translational accelerations (such as gravity)
are valid. Acceleration loading is not allowed if the model contains any master
DOF at any nodes with rotated nodal coordinate systems. Forces and nonzero
displacements must be applied only at master DOF.
As mentioned for the full method, multiple load steps are usually required to
specify the load history in a transient analysis. The first load step is used to
establish initial conditions, and second and subsequent load steps are used for
the transient loading, as explained next. • Establish initial conditions. The only
initial condition that may be explicitly established is the initial displacement
(uo); that is, initial velocity and acceleration must be zero ( o = 0, o = 0).
Displacements cannot be deleted in subsequent load steps, therefore they cannot be
used to specify an initial velocity. In a reduced transient analysis, a static
solution is always performed as the first solution, using the loads given, to
determine uo.
5–21
Chapter 5: Transient Dynamic Analysis • Specify load step options for the first
load step. Valid options appear in Table 5.3: “Options for the First Load Step-
Reduced Analysis”.
Table 5.3 Options for the First Load Step-Reduced Analysis

Option Dynamics Options Transient Integration Paramet- TINTP ers Damping ALPHAD,
BETAD, MP,DAMP Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Time
Integration Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Damping Main Menu>
Solution> Load Step Opts> Other> Change Mat Props> Material Models> Structural>
Damping Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Time- Time Step Main
Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> Solu Printout Command GUI Path
General Options Integration Time Step Output Control Options Printed Output OUTPR
DELTIM

Dynamic options include the following: • Transient Integration Parameters (TINTP)
Transient integration parameters control the nature of the Newmark time
integration technique. The default is to use the constant average acceleration
scheme; see the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for further details. • Damping
Damping in some form is present in most structures and should be included in your
analysis. You can specify four forms of damping in a reduced transient dynamic
analysis: – – – – Alpha (mass) damping (ALPHAD) Beta (stiffness) damping (BETAD)
Material-dependent beta damping (MP,DAMP) Element damping (COMBIN7, and so on)
See Section 5.10.3: Damping for further details.
5.6.1.4.2. General Options

The only valid general option is Integration Time Step (DELTIM). The integration
time step is assumed to be constant throughout the transient. Note — If you do
issue the TIME command for the first load step, it will be ignored. The first
solution is always a static solution at TIME = 0.
5–22
5.6.1.4.3. Output Control Options

Use the Printed Output (OUTPR) option to output the displacement solution at the
master DOF.
5.6.1.5. Write the First Load Step to a Load Step File

Write the first load step to a load step file (Jobname.S01). Command(s): LSWRITE
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Write LS File
5.6.1.6. Specify Loads and Load Step Options

Specify loads and load step options for the transient loading portion, writing
each load step to a load step file (LSWRITE). The following load step options are
valid for the transient load steps: • General Options – – • Time (specifies the
time at the end of the load step) (TIME) Stepped (KBC,1) or ramped loads (KBC)
Output Controls – Printed output (OUTPR) – Reduced displacement file (OUTRES) The
only valid label on these commands is NSOL (nodal solution). The default for
OUTRES is to write the solution for every fourth time-point to the reduced
displacement file (unless there are gap conditions defined, in which case the
default is to write every solution).

Solving a reduced transient dynamic analysis involves the same steps as those
involved in solving a full transient analysis. See the following sections for a
description of those steps: • • • Section 5.4.8: Save a Backup Copy of the
Database Section 5.4.9: Start the Transient Solution Section 5.4.10: Exit the
Solution Processor
5.6.2. Review the Results of the Reduced Solution

Results from the reduced transient dynamic solution are written to the reduced
displacement file, Jobname.RDSP. They consist of time-varying displacements at the
master DOF. You can review the master DOF displacements as a function of time
using POST26. (POST1 cannot be used, because the complete solution at all DOF is
not available.) The procedure to use POST26 is the same as described for the full
method, except for the following differences: • Before defining the POST26
variables, use the FILE command (Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Settings> File) to
specify that data are to be read from Jobname.RDSP. For example, if the jobname is
TRANS, the
5–23
Chapter 5: Transient Dynamic Analysis FILE command would be: FILE,TRANS,RDSP. (By
default, POST26 looks for a results file, which is not written by a reduced
transient solution.) • Only nodal degree of freedom data (at master DOF) are
available for processing, so you can use only the NSOL command to define
variables.

The expansion pass starts with the reduced solution and calculates the complete
displacement, stress, and force solution at all degrees of freedom. These
calculations are done only at time points that you specify. Before you begin the
expansion pass, therefore, you should review the results of the reduced solution
(using POST26) and identify the critical time points. Note — An expansion pass is
not always required. For instance, if you are interested mainly in displacements
at specific points on the structure, then the reduced solution could satisfy your
requirements. However, if you want to determine displacements at non-master DOF,
or if you are interested in the stress or force solution, then you must perform an
expansion pass.

• • The .RDSP, .EMAT, .ESAV, .DB, and .TRI files from the reduced solution must be
available. The database must contain the same model for which the reduced solution
was calculated.
The procedure for the expansion pass is explained below.
5.6.3.2. Expanding the Solution

1. Reenter SOLUTION. Command(s): /SOLU GUI: Main Menu> Solution Note — You must
explicitly leave SOLUTION (using the FINISH command) and reenter (/SOLU) before
performing the expansion pass. 2. Activate the expansion pass and its options.

Option Expansion Pass On/Off No. of Solutions to be Expanded Single Solution to
Expand Command EXPASS NUMEXP EXPSOL GUI Path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type>
ExpansionPass Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> ExpansionPass> Range of Solu's
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> ExpansionPass> Single Expand> By Time/Freq
Option: Expansion Pass On/Off (EXPASS) Choose ON.
Option: Number of Solutions to be Expanded (NUMEXP)
5–24
Section 5.6: Performing a Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis Specify the number.
This number of evenly spaced solutions will be expanded over the specified time
range. The solutions nearest these times will be expanded. Also specify whether to
calculate stresses and forces (default is to calculate both). • Option: Single
Solution to Expand (EXPSOL) Use this option to identify a single solution for
expansion if you do not need to expand multiple solutions in a range. You can
specify it either by load step and substep number or by time. Also specify whether
to calculate stresses and forces (default is to calculate both). 3. Specify load
step options. The only options valid for a transient dynamic expansion pass are
output controls: • Output Controls – Printed Output (OUTPR) Use this option to
include any results data on the output file (Jobname.OUT). – Database and Results
File Output (OUTRES) This option controls the data on the results file
(Jobname.RST). – Extrapolation of Results (ERESX) Use this option to review
element integration point results by copying them to the nodes instead of
extrapolating them (default). Note — The FREQ field on OUTPR and OUTRES can only
be ALL or NONE. ERESX allows you to review element integration point results by
copying them to the nodes instead of extrapolating them (default).
4.
Start expansion pass calculations. Command(s): SOLVE GUI: Main Menu> Solution>
Solve> Current LS Repeat steps 2, 3, and 4 for additional solutions to be
expanded. Each expansion pass is stored as a separate load step on the results
file. Leave SOLUTION. Command(s): FINISH GUI: Close the Solution window.
5. 6.
5.6.4. Review the Results of the Expanded Solution

You review results for an expansion pass in the same way that you review results
for most structural analyses. See Section 2.3.6: Review the Results in Chapter 2,
“Structural Static Analysis”. You can review these results using POST1. (If you
expanded solutions at several time points, you can also use POST26 to obtain
graphs of stress versus time, strain versus time, and so on.) The procedure to use
POST1 (or POST26) is the same as described for the full method.
5–25
5.7. Sample Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis (GUI Method)

In this example, you will perform a transient dynamic analysis using the reduced
method to determine the transient response to a constant force with a finite rise
in time. In this problem, a steel beam supporting a concentrated mass is subjected
to a dynamic load.

A steel beam of length and geometric properties shown in Problem Specifications is
supporting a concentrated mass, m. The beam is subjected to a dynamic load F(t)
with a rise time tr and a maximum value F1. If the weight of the beam is
considered to be negligible, determine the time of maximum displacement response
tmax and the response ymax. Also determine the maximum bending stress σbend in the
beam. The beam is not used in this solution and its area is arbitrarily input as
unity. The final time of 0.1 sec allows the mass to reach its largest deflection.
One master degree of freedom is selected at the mass in the lateral direction. A
static solution is done at the first load step. Symmetry could have been used in
this model. The time of maximum response (0.092 sec) is selected for the expansion
pass calculation.

The following material properties are used for this problem: E = 30 x 103 ksi m =
0.0259067 kips-sec2/in The following geometric properties are used for this
problem: l = 800.6 in4 h = 18 in = 20 ft = 240 in. Loading for this problem is: F1
= 20 kips tr = 0.075 sec
5–26
Section 5.7: Sample Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis (GUI Method)

Figure 5.3 Model of a Steel Beam Supporting a Concentrated Mass
5.7.3.1. Specify the Title

1. 2. 3. Choose menu path Utility Menu> File> Change Title. Enter the text
"Transient response to a constant force with a finite rise time." Click on OK.
5.7.3.2. Define Element Types

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Element Type>
Add/Edit/Delete. The Element Types dialog box appears. Click on Add. The Library
of Element Types dialog box appears. In the left scroll box, click on "Structural
Beam." In the right scroll box, click on "2D elastic 3," and click on Apply. In
the left scroll box, click on "Structural Mass." In the right scroll box, click on
"3D mass 21," and click on OK. In the Element Types dialog box, click once on
"Type 2," and click on Options. In the scroll box for Rotary inertia options,
scroll to "2D w/o rot iner" and select it. Click on OK and click on Close in the
Element Types dialog box.
5.7.3.3. Define Real Constants

1. 2. 3. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Real Constants>
Add/Edit/Delete. The Real Constants dialog box appears. Click on Add. The Element
Type for Real Constants dialog box appears. Click on Type1 BEAM3 then Click on OK.
The Real Constants for BEAM3 dialog box appears.
5–27
Chapter 5: Transient Dynamic Analysis 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Enter 1 for Area, 800.6
for IZZ, and 18 for Height. Click on OK. In the Real Constants dialog box, click
on Add. Click on Type 2 MASS21 and click on OK. The Real Constant Set Number 2,
for MASS21 dialog box appears. Enter .0259067 in the 2-D mass field and click on
OK. Click on Close in the Real Constants dialog box.

1. 2. 3. 4. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Material
Models Available window, double-click on the following options: Structural,
Linear, Elastic, Isotropic. A dialog box appears. Enter 30e3 for EX (Young's
modulus), enter 0.3 for PRXY, and click on OK. Material Model Number 1 appears in
the Material Models Defined window on the left. Choose menu path Material> Exit to
5.7.3.5. Define Nodes

Nodes> In Active CS. The Create Nodes in Active Coordinate System dialog box
appears. Enter 1 for node number and click on Apply to define node 1 at 0,0,0.
Enter 3 for node number. Enter 240,0,0 for X, Y, Z coordinates and click on OK.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Nodes> Fill between
Nds. The Fill between Nds picking menu appears. Click once on nodes 1 and 3 in the
ANSYS Graphics window, and click on OK in the picking menu. The Create Nodes
Between 2 Nodes dialog box appears. Click on OK to accept the default settings.
5.7.3.6. Define Elements

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling>
Create> Elements> Auto Numbered> Thru Nodes. The Elements from Nodes picking menu
appears. Click once on nodes 1 and 2, and click on Apply. Click once on nodes 2
and 3, and click on OK. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling>
Create> Elements> Elem Attributes. The Element Attributes dialog box appears. In
the Element type number drop down menu, select “2 MASS21.” In the Real constant
set number drop down menu, select 2 and click OK. Choose menu path Main Menu>
Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Elements> Auto Numbered> Thru Nodes. The Elements
from Nodes picking menu appears. Click once on node 2 and click OK.
5–28
Section 5.7: Sample Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis (GUI Method) 9. Click on
SAVE_DB on the ANSYS Toolbar.
5.7.3.7. Define Analysis Type and Analysis Options

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> New
Analysis. Click on "Transient" to select it, and click on OK. The Transient
Analysis dialog box appears. Click on "Reduced" and click on OK. Choose menu path
Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options. The Reduced Transient
Analysis dialog box appears. In the drop down menu for Damping effects, select
"Ignore." Click on OK.

1. 2. 3. 4. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Master DOFs> User Selected>
Define. The Define Master DOFs picking menu appears. Click on node 2 and click on
OK. The Define Master DOFs dialog box appears. In the drop down menu for 1st
degree of freedom, select "UY." Click on OK.
5.7.3.9. Set Load Step Options

1. 2. Choose the menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc>
Time-Time Step. The Time and Time Step Options dialog box appears. Enter .004 for
Time step size and click on OK.
5.7.3.10. Apply Loads for the First Load Step

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads>
Apply> Structural> Displacement> On Nodes. The Apply U,ROT on Nodes picking menu
appears. Click on node 1 and click on Apply. The Apply U,ROT on Nodes dialog box
appears. Click on "UY" to select it and click on Apply. The Apply U,ROT on Nodes
picking menu appears. Click on node 3, and click on OK. The Apply U,ROT on Nodes
dialog box appears. Click on "UX" to select it. "UY" should remain selected. Click
on OK. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural>
Force/Moment> On Nodes. The Apply F/M on Nodes picking menu appears. Click on node
2 and click on OK. The Apply F/M on Nodes dialog box appears. In the drop down
menu for Direction of force/mom, select "FY." Leave the value as blank (zero) for
the initial static solution. Click on OK, and click on SAVE_DB on the ANSYS
Toolbar.
5.7.3.11. Specify Output

1. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> DB/Results
File. The Controls for Database and Results File Writing dialog box appears.
5–29
Chapter 5: Transient Dynamic Analysis 2. Click on the "Every substep" radio button
and click on OK.
5.7.3.12. Solve the First Load Step

information in the status window, and click on Close. Click on OK on the Solve
Current Load Step dialog box to begin the solution. Click on Close when the
Solution is done! window appears.
5.7.3.13. Apply Loads for the Next Load Step

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts>
Time/Frequenc>Time-Time Step. The Time and Time Step Options dialog box appears.
Enter .075 for Time at end of load step and click on OK. Choose menu path Main
Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Force/Moment> On Nodes. The Apply
F/M on Nodes picking menu appears. Click on node 2 and click on OK. The Apply F/M
on Nodes dialog box appears. Enter 20 for Force/moment value and click on OK.
5.7.4. Solve the Next Load Step

information in the status window, and click on Close. Click on OK on the Solve
Solution is done! window appears
5.7.4.1. Set the Next Time Step and Solve

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts>
Time/Frequenc> Time-Time Step. The Time and Time Step Options dialog box appears.
Enter .1 for Time at end of load step and click on OK. Choose menu path Main Menu>
Solution> Solve> Current LS. Review the information in the status window, and
click on Close. Click on OK on the Solve Current Load Step dialog box to begin the
solution. Click on Close when the Solution is done! window appears. Choose menu
path Main Menu> Finish.
5.7.4.2. Run the Expansion Pass and Solve

1. 2. 3. 4. 5–30 Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type>
ExpansionPass. Set the Expansion pass radio button to On and click on OK. Choose
menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> ExpansionPass> Single Expand> By
Time/Freq. The Expand Single Solution by Time/Frequency dialog box appears. Enter
0.092 for Time-point/Frequency and click on OK. Choose menu path Main Menu
>Solution> Solve> Current LS.
Section 5.8: Sample Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis (Command or Batch Method)
5. 6. 7. Review the information in the status window, and click on Close. Click on
OK on the Solve Current Load Step dialog box to begin the solution. Click on Close
when the Solution is done! window appears.
5.7.4.3. Review the Results in POST26

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Settings>
File. The File Settings dialog box appears. Click browse and select "file.rdsp"
and click on open then OK. Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Define
Variables. The Defined Time-History Variables dialog box appears. Click on Add.
The Add Time-History Variable dialog box appears. Click on OK to accept the
default of Nodal DOF result. The Define Nodal Data picking menu appears. Pick node
2 and click OK. Accept the default of 2 for the reference number of the variable.
Make sure that 2 is entered for node number. Enter NSOL for user-specified label.
In the right scroll box, click on "Translation UY" to select it.
10. Click on OK, then click on Close in the Defined Time-History Variables dialog
box. 11. Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Graph Variables. 12. Enter
2 for 1st variable to graph and click on OK. The graph appears in the ANSYS
Graphics window. 13. Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> List Variables.
14. Enter 2 for 1st variable to list and click on OK. 15. Review the information
in the status window and click on Close.
5.7.4.4. Review the Results in POST1

1. 2. 3. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> First Set.
Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Deformed Shape. The
Plot Deformed Shape dialog box appears. Click on "Def + undeformed" and click on
OK.
5.7.4.5. Exit ANSYS

1. 2. Choose QUIT from the ANSYS Toolbar. Click on the save option you want, and
click on OK.
5.8. Sample Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis (Command or Batch Method)

You can perform the example transient dynamic analysis of a bracket using the
ANSYS commands shown below instead of GUI choices. Items prefaced with an
exclamation point (!) are comments.
/PREP7 /TITLE, Transient Response to a Constant Force with a Finite Rise Time
ET,1,BEAM3 ! 2-D beam
5–31
ET,2,MASS21,,,4 R,1,1,800.6,18 R,2,.0259067 MP,EX,1,30e3 N,1 N,3,240 FILL E,1,2!
Beam elements EGEN,2,1,1 TYPE,2 REAL,2 E,2 M,2,UY FINISH /SOLU ANTYPE,TRANS
TRNOPT,REDUC,,NODAMP DELTIM,.004 D,1,UY D,3,UX,,,,,UY OUTPR,BASIC,1 OUTRES,ALL,1
F,2,FY,0 SOLVE TIME,.075 F,2,FY,20 SOLVE TIME,.1 SOLVE FINISH ! 2-D mass ! Beam
area = 1, I = 800.6, h = 18 ! Mass
! Type 2 element with real constant 2 ! Master DOF in Y direction at middle of

beam
! Transient dynamic analysis ! Reduced transient analysis, ignore damping !

Integration time step size
! Force = 0 at Time = 0 ! Time at end of load step ! Force is ramped to 20 !

Constant force until time = 0.1
/SOLU ! The following is the expansion pass using BEAM3 and MASS21 elements
EXPASS,ON ! Expansion pass on EXPSOL,,,0.092 ! Time of maximum response SOLVE
FINISH /POST26 NUMVAR,0 FILE,file,rdsp NSOL,2,2,U,Y,NSOL PLVAR,2 PRVAR,2 FINISH
/POST1 SET,FIRST PLDISP,1 FINISH
! Define the variables ! Graph the variables ! List the variables
! Read in results ! Display deformed and undeformed shape
5.9. Performing a Prestressed Transient Dynamic Analysis

A prestressed transient dynamic analysis calculates the dynamic response of a
prestressed structure, such as a heat-treated part with residual thermal stresses.
Prestressed-analysis procedures vary, depending on the type of transient dynamic
analysis being performed.
5.9.1. Prestressed Full Transient Dynamic Analysis

You can include prestressing effects in a full transient dynamic analysis by
applying the prestressing loads in a preliminary static load step. (Do not remove
these loads in subsequent load steps.) The procedure consists of two steps: 1.
Build your model, enter SOLUTION, and define a transient analysis type
(ANTYPE,TRANS).
5–32
Section 5.10: Other Analysis Details • • • • • Apply all prestressing loads. Turn
time integration effects off (TIMINT,OFF). Turn stress stiffening effects on
(SSTIF,ON). Set time equal to some small dummy value (TIME). Write your first load
step to Jobname.S01 (LSWRITE).
If prestressing effects develop because of nonlinear behavior (as in the case of

residual thermal stresses in a casting), several load steps might be required to
complete the static prestressing phase of your analysis. In the case of geometric
nonlinearities (large deformation effects), you can capture the prestressing
effect by issuing NLGEOM,ON. 2. For all subsequent load steps, turn time
integration effects on (TIMINT,ON), and proceed using the full transient dynamic
analysis procedures described previously. Once all load steps are written to files
(LSWRITE), you can initiate the multiple load step solution (LSSOLVE).
Note — The static prestress solution must be done as a separate solution if

initial conditions are to be defined with the IC command. (Main Menu> Solution>
Define Loads> Apply> Initial Condit'n> Define) The IC command is valid only in the
first load step.
5.9.2. Prestressed Mode Superposition Transient Dynamic Analysis

In order to include prestress effects in a mode superposition analysis, you must
first do a prestressed modal analysis. See Chapter 3, “Modal Analysis” for
details. Once prestressed modal analysis results are available, proceed as for any
other mode superposition analysis.
5.9.3. Prestressed Reduced Transient Dynamic Analysis

The procedure to do a prestressed reduced transient dynamic analysis requires that
you first prestress the structure in a separate static analysis, as explained
below. It is assumed that the transient (time-varying) stresses (which are
superimposed on the prestress) are much smaller than the prestress itself. If they
are not, you should use the full transient dynamic analysis. 1. 2. Build the model
and obtain a static solution with prestress effects turned on (PSTRES,ON). The
procedure to obtain a static solution is explained in Chapter 2, “Structural
Static Analysis”. Reenter SOLUTION (/SOLU) and obtain the reduced transient
solution, also with prestress effects turned on (PSTRES,ON). Files Jobname.DB,
Jobname.EMAT, and Jobname.ESAV from the static analysis must be available.
5.10. Other Analysis Details

The following sections provide additional details about defining integration time
step, automatic time stepping, and damping.
5.10.1. Guidelines for Integration Time Step

As mentioned earlier, the accuracy of the transient dynamic solution depends on
the integration time step: the smaller the time step, the higher the accuracy. A
time step that is too large will introduce error that affects the response of the
higher modes (and hence the overall response). A time step that is too small will
waste computer resources. To calculate an optimum time step, you should consider
the following guidelines:
5–33
Chapter 5: Transient Dynamic Analysis 1. Resolve the response frequency. The time
step should be small enough to resolve the motion (response) of the structure.
Since the dynamic response of a structure can be thought of as a combination of
modes, the time step should be able to resolve the highest mode that contributes
to the response. For the Newmark time integration scheme, it has been found that
using approximately twenty points per cycle of the highest frequency of interest
results in a reasonably accurate solution. That is, if f is the frequency (in
cycles/time), the integration time step (ITS) is given by ITS = 1/20f Smaller ITS
values may be required if acceleration results are needed. The following figure
shows the effect of ITS on the period elongation of a single-DOF spring-mass
system. Notice that 20 or more points per cycle result in a period elongation of
less than 1 percent.
Figure 5.4 Effect of Integration Time Step on Period Elongation
For the HHT time integration method, the same guidelines for time step should be
applied. Note that if the same time step and time integration parameters are used,
the HHT method will be more accurate compared to the Newmark method. 2. Resolve
the applied load-versus-time curve(s). The time step should be small enough to
“follow” the loading function. The response tends to lag the applied loads,
especially for stepped loads, as shown in Figure 5.5: “Transient Input vs.
Transient Response”. Stepped loads require a small ITS at the time of the step
change so that the step change can be closely followed. ITS values as small as
1/180f may be needed to follow stepped loads.
5–34
Figure 5.5 Transient Input vs. Transient Response
3.
Resolve the contact frequency. In problems involving contact (impact), the time
step should be small enough to capture the momentum transfer between the two
contacting surfaces. Otherwise, an apparent energy loss will occur and the impact
will not be perfectly elastic. The integration time step can be determined from
the contact frequency (fc) as:
ITS =1/Nfc
fc =(1/ 2π) k /m
where k is the gap stiffness, m is the effective mass acting at the gap, and N is
the number of points per cycle. To minimize the energy loss, at least thirty
points per cycle of (N = 30) are needed. Larger values of N may be required if
acceleration results are needed. For the reduced and mode superposition methods, N
must be at least 7 to ensure stability. You can use fewer than thirty points per
cycle during impact if the contact period and contact mass are much less than the
overall transient time and system mass, because the effect of any energy loss on
the total response would be small. 4. Resolve the wave propagation. If you are
interested in wave propagation effects, the time step should be small enough to
capture the wave as it travels through the elements. See Section 5.4.1: Build the
Model for a discussion of element size. Resolve the nonlinearities. For most
nonlinear problems, a time step that satisfies the preceding guidelines is
sufficient to resolve the nonlinearities. There are a few exceptions, however: if
the structure tends to stiffen under the loading (for example, large deflection
problems that change from bending to membrane load-carrying behavior), the higher
frequency modes that are excited will have to be resolved.
5.
After calculating the time step using the appropriate guidelines, use the minimum
value for your analysis. By using automatic time stepping, you can let the ANSYS
program decide when to increase or decrease the time step during the solution.
Automatic time stepping is discussed next. Caution: Avoid using exceedingly small
time steps, especially when establishing initial conditions. Exceedingly small
numbers can cause numerical difficulties. Based on a problem time scale of unity,
for example, time steps smaller than 10-10 could cause numerical difficulties.
5.10.2. Automatic Time Stepping

Automatic time stepping, also known as time step optimization, attempts to adjust
the integration time step during solution based on the response frequency and on
the effects of nonlinearities. The main benefit of this feature is that the total
number of substeps can be reduced, resulting in computer resource savings. Also,
the
5–35
Chapter 5: Transient Dynamic Analysis number of times that you might have to rerun
the analysis (adjusting the time step size, nonlinearities, and so on) is greatly
reduced. If nonlinearities are present, automatic time stepping gives the added
advantage of incrementing the loads appropriately and retreating to the previous
converged solution (bisection) if convergence is not obtained. You can activate
automatic time stepping with the AUTOTS command. (For more information on
automatic time stepping in the context of nonlinearities, see Chapter 8,
“Nonlinear Structural Analysis”.) Although it seems like a good idea to activate
automatic time stepping for all analyses, there are some cases where it may not be
beneficial (and may even be harmful): • • • Problems that have only localized
dynamic behavior (for example, turbine blade and hub assemblies), where the low-
frequency energy content of part of the system may dominate the high-frequency
areas Problems that are constantly excited (for example, seismic loading), where
the time step tends to change continually as different frequencies are excited
Kinematics (rigid-body motion) problems, where the rigid-body contribution to the
response frequency term may dominate
5.10.3. Damping
Damping is present in most systems and should be specified in a dynamic analysis.
The following forms of damping are available in the ANSYS program: • • • • • •
Alpha and Beta Damping (Rayleigh Damping) Material-Dependent Damping Constant
Material Damping Coefficient Constant Damping Ratio Modal Damping Element Damping
Only the constant damping ratio and modal damping are available in the ANSYS
Professional program. You can specify more than one form of damping in a model.
The program will formulate the damping matrix (C) as the sum of all the specified
forms of damping. The constant material damping coefficient is only applicable in
full and modal harmonic analyses. Table 5.5: “Damping for Different Analysis
Types” shows the types of damping available for different structural analyses.
Table 5.5 Damping for Different Analysis Types

Alpha, Beta Damping ALAnalysis Type PHAD, BETAD Static Modal Undamped Damped
Harmonic Full Reduced Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes No No(5) Yes No(5)
Yes No(5) No No No No Yes No No(7) N/A Material- Dependent Constant Damping
Damping Ratio MP,DAMP DMPRAT N/A N/A Modal Damping MDAMP N/A Element Constant
MaDamping(3) terial Damping COMBIN7, and Coefficient so on MP,DMPR N/A N/A
5–36
Material- Dependent Constant Damping Damping Ratio MP,DAMP DMPRAT Yes(4,6) Yes Yes
Yes(4,6) Yes Yes No N/A Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes N/A No Element Constant
MaDamping(3) terial Damping COMBIN7, and Coefficient so on MP,DMPR Yes(6) Yes Yes
Yes(6) No No No N/A Yes Yes(7) No No No No No No N/A No
Alpha, Beta Damping ALAnalysis Type PHAD, BETAD Mode Sup Transient Full Reduced
Mode Sup Spectrum SPRS, MPRS(2) DDAM(2) PSD(2) Buckling Substructure Yes(1) Yes(1)
Yes N/A Yes Yes Yes Yes(6) Yes(6)
Modal Damping MDAMP Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes N/A No
N/A Not applicable 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. β damping only, no α damping Damping is used

only for mode combination and not for computation of mode coefficients Includes
superelement damping matrix If converted to modal damping by expansion of modes If
specified, an effective damping ratio is calculated for subsequent spectrum
analyses If you use the QR damped mode-extraction method (MODOPT,QRDAMP), and you
specify any kind of damping during preprocessing or in the modal analysis, ANSYS
ignores damping specified during the mode superposition analysis Only the QR
damped method supports the constant material damping coefficient application in a
downstream mode superposition harmonic analysis
7.
Alpha damping and Beta damping are used to define Rayleigh damping constants α and
β. The damping matrix (C) is calculated by using these constants to multiply the
mass matrix (M) and stiffness matrix (K): (C) = α(M) + β(K) The ALPHAD and BETAD
commands are used to specify α and β, respectively, as decimal numbers. The values
of α and β are not generally known directly, but are calculated from modal damping
ratios, ξi. ξi is the ratio of actual damping to critical damping for a particular
mode of vibration, i. If ωi is the natural circular frequency of mode i, α and β
satisfy the relation ξi = α/2ωi + βωi/2 In many practical structural problems,
alpha damping (or mass damping) may be ignored (α = 0). In such cases, you can
evaluate β from known values of ξi and ωi, as β = 2 ξi/ωi Only one value of β can
be input in a load step, so choose the most dominant frequency active in that load
step to calculate β.
5–37
Chapter 5: Transient Dynamic Analysis To specify both α and β for a given damping
ratio ξ, it is commonly assumed that the sum of the α and β terms is nearly
constant over a range of frequencies (see Figure 5.6: “Rayleigh Damping”).
Therefore, given ξ and a frequency range ωi to ωj, two simultaneous equations can
be solved for α and β.
Figure 5.6 Rayleigh Damping
Alpha damping can lead to undesirable results if an artificially large mass has
been introduced into the model. One common example is when an artificially large
mass is added to the base of a structure to facilitate acceleration spectrum
input. (You can use the large mass to convert an acceleration spectrum to a force
spectrum.) The alpha damping coefficient, which is multiplied by the mass matrix,
will produce artificially large damping forces in such a system, leading to
inaccuracies in the spectrum input, as well as in the system response. Beta
damping and material damping can lead to undesirable results in a nonlinear
analysis. These damping coefficients are multiplied by the stiffness matrix, which
is constantly changing in a nonlinear analysis. The resulting change in damping
can sometimes be opposite to the actual change in damping that can occur in
physical structures. For example, whereas physical systems that experience
softening due to plastic response will usually experience a corresponding increase
in damping, an ANSYS model that has beta damping will experience a decrease in
damping as plastic softening response develops. Material-dependent damping allows
you to specify beta damping (β) as a material property (MP,DAMP). Note, however,
that MP,DAMP in a spectrum analysis (ANTYPE,SPECTR) specifies a material-dependent
damping ratio ξ, not β. Also note that for multi-material elements such as
SOLID46, SOLID65, SHELL91, and SHELL99, β can only be specified for the element as
a whole, not for each material in the element. In these cases, β is determined
from the material pointer for the element (set with the MAT command), rather than
the material pointed to by any real constant MAT for the element. MP,DAMP is not
assumed to be temperature-dependent, and is always evaluated at T = 0.0. The
constant material damping coefficient is available only for full and modal
harmonic analyses. The constant damping ratio is the simplest way of specifying
damping in the structure. It represents the ratio of actual damping to critical
damping, and is specified as a decimal number with the DMPRAT command. DMPRAT is
available only for spectrum, harmonic response, and mode superposition transient
dynamic analyses. Modal damping gives you the ability to specify different damping
ratios for different modes of vibration. It is specified with the MDAMP command
and is available only for the spectrum and mode superposition method of solution
(transient dynamic and harmonic response analyses). Element damping involves using
element types having viscous damping characteristics, such as COMBIN7, COMBIN14,
COMBIN37, COMBIN40, and so on.
5–38
Section 5.10: Other Analysis Details If you are running a mode superposition
analysis and used the QR damping solution method for the modal solution, alpha
(ALPHAD), beta (BETAD), material-dependent, and element damping must be defined in
the QR damping modal solution for the damping to be available in a subsequent mode
superposition analysis. For more information about damping, see the ANSYS, Inc.
Theory Reference. The explicit mathematical expressions that form the damping
matrix in different analysis options are shown in Table 5.6: “Damping Matrix
Formulation with Different Damping Coefficients”. These expressions define how
each of the damping options in Table 5.5: “Damping for Different Analysis Types”
is handled in a dynamic analysis.
Table 5.6 Damping Matrix Formulation with Different Damping Coefficients

Analysis Type Full Harmonic & Modal Analysis Transient AnalysLANB(1) is Modal
Analysis QRDA(1) ALPHAD α BETAD β α[M] β[K] No α[M] No Mode Superposition Harmonic
Analysis(1) ΦTα[M]Φ = α Mode Superposi- Spectrum Analystion Transient is(1) (modal
Analysis(1) damping ratio) ΦTα[M]Φ = α No
Φ Tβ[K ]Φ = βω2 i
Φ Tβ[K ]Φ = βω2 i
βωi 2
No
β[K]
β MP,DAMP j
Nm
j =1
m ∑ β j [K j ]
No
No
No
Nm
j =1 Nm
ms ∑ βj Ej s ∑ Ej j =1
See Equation 17–109 in the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference

Nm m ∑ β j [K j ] Nm Φ T ∑ βm [K j ]Φ j j =1 Nm Φ T ∑ βm [K j ]Φ j j =1
No
j =1
DMPRAT ξ
Harmonic
No
2ξωi
2ξωi
ξ No
2ξ [K ] Ω
MDAMP
ξm i
No
No
2ξmωi i
No
2ξmωi i
No
ξm i
No No
Element Damping
Ne
k =1
∑ [Ck ]
No
Ne
k =1
∑ [Ck ]
No
Φ T ∑ [Ck ]Φ
k =1
Ne
Φ T ∑ [Ck ]Φ
k =1
Ne
MP,DMPR
βξ j
Harmonic
Nm j =1
No
No
No
2βξ [K j ] j Ω
2βξ [K j ] j Φ∑ Φ Ω j =1
N Tm
5–39
Chapter 5: Transient Dynamic Analysis Note — 1. For modal, mode superposition, and
spectrum analyses the boxes are split where applicable with the top indicating the
Lanczos method and the bottom indicating the QR damped method.

additional transient dynamic analyses. The ANSYS Verification Manual consists of
test case analyses demonstrating the analysis capabilities of the ANSYS program.
accompanying comments. The ANSYS Verification Manual includes a variety of
transient dynamic analysis test cases: VM9 - Large Lateral Deflection of Unequal
Stiffness Springs VM40 - Large Deflection and Rotation of a Beam Pinned at One End
VM65 - Transient Response of a Ball Impacting a Flexible Surface VM71 - Transient
Response of a Spring, Mass, Damping System VM72 - Logarithmic Decrement VM73 -
Free Vibration with Coulomb Damping VM74 - Transient Response to an Impulsive
Excitation VM75 - Transient Response to a Step Excitation VM77 - Transient
Response to a Constant Force with a Finite Rise Time VM79 - Transient Response of
a Bilinear Spring Assembly VM80 - Plastic Response to a Suddenly Applied Constant
Force VM81 - Transient Response of a Drop Container VM84 - Displacement
Propagation along a Bar with Free Ends VM85 - Transient Displacements in a
Suddenly Stopped Moving Bar VM91 - Large Rotation of a Swinging Pendulum VM156 -
Natural Frequency of Nonlinear Spring-Mass System VM158 - Motion of a Bobbing Buoy
VM179 - Dynamic Double Rotation of a Jointed Beam VM182 - Transient Response of a
Spring-Mass System
5–40
Chapter 6: Spectrum Analysis
6.1. Definition of Spectrum Analysis
A spectrum analysis is one in which the results of a modal analysis are used with
a known spectrum to calculate displacements and stresses in the model. It is
mainly used in place of a time-history analysis to determine the response of
structures to random or time-dependent loading conditions such as earthquakes,
wind loads, ocean wave loads, jet engine thrust, rocket motor vibrations, and so
on.
6.2. What is a Spectrum?

The spectrum is a graph of spectral value versus frequency that captures the
intensity and frequency content of time-history loads. Three types of spectra are
available for a spectrum analysis: • Response Spectrum – – • • Single-point
Response Spectrum (SPRS) Multi-point Response Spectrum (MPRS)
Dynamic Design Analysis Method (DDAM) Power Spectral Density (PSD)
The only method available in the ANSYS Professional program is the single-point
response spectrum.
6.2.1. Response Spectrum

A response spectrum represents the response of single-DOF systems to a time-
history loading function. It is a graph of response versus frequency, where the
response might be displacement, velocity, acceleration, or force. Two types of
response spectrum analysis are possible: single-point response spectrum and multi-
point response spectrum.
6.2.1.1. Single-Point Response Spectrum (SPRS)

In a single-point response spectrum (SPRS) analysis, you specify one response
spectrum curve (or a family of curves) at a set of points in the model, such as at
all supports, as shown in Figure 6.1: “Single-Point and Multi-Point Response
Spectra” (a).
6.2.1.2. Multi-Point Response Spectrum (MPRS)

In a multi-point response spectrum (MPRS) analysis, you specify different spectrum
curves at different sets of points, as shown in Figure 6.1: “Single-Point and
Multi-Point Response Spectra” (b).
Figure 6.1 Single-Point and Multi-Point Response Spectra
6.2.2. Dynamic Design Analysis Method (DDAM)

The Dynamic Design Analysis Method (DDAM) is a technique used to evaluate the
shock resistance of shipboard equipment. The technique is essentially a response
spectrum analysis in which the spectrum is obtained from a series of empirical
equations and shock design tables provided in the U.S. Naval Research Laboratory
Report NRL-1396.
6.2.3. Power Spectral Density

Power spectral density (PSD) is a statistical measure defined as the limiting
mean-square value of a random variable. It is used in random vibration analyses in
which the instantaneous magnitudes of the response can be specified only by
probability distribution functions that show the probability of the magnitude
taking a particular value. A PSD is a statistical measure of the response of a
structure to random dynamic loading conditions. It is a graph of the PSD value
versus frequency, where the PSD may be a displacement PSD, velocity PSD,
acceleration PSD, or force PSD. Mathematically, the area under a PSD-versus-
frequency curve is equal to the variance (square of the standard deviation of the
response). Similar to response spectrum analysis, a random vibration analysis may
be single-point or multi-point. In a singlepoint random vibration analysis, you
specify one PSD spectrum at a set of points in the model. In a multi-point random
vibration analysis, you specify different PSD spectra at different points in the
model.
6.2.4. Deterministic vs. Probabilistic Analyses

Response spectrum and DDAM analyses are deterministic analyses because both the
input to the analyses and output from the analyses are actual maximum values.
Random vibration analysis, on the other hand, is probabilistic in nature, because
both input and output quantities represent only the probability that they take on
certain values.
6.3. Steps in a Single-Point Response Spectrum (SPRS) Analysis

The procedure for a single-point response spectrum analysis consists of six main
steps: 1. Build the model.
6–2
Section 6.3: Steps in a Single-Point Response Spectrum (SPRS) Analysis 2. 3. 4. 5.
6. Obtain the modal solution. Obtain the spectrum solution. Expand the modes.
Combine the modes. Review the results.
The modal solution is required because the structure's mode shapes and frequencies
must be available to calculate the spectrum solution. Also, by performing the
spectrum solution ahead of mode expansion, you can expand only the significant
modes that contribute to the final solution.


• Only linear behavior is valid in a spectrum analysis. Nonlinear elements, if
any, are treated as linear. If you include contact elements, for example, their
stiffnesses are calculated based on their initial status and are never changed.
Both Young's modulus (EX) (or stiffness in some form) and density (DENS) (or mass
in some form) must be defined. Material properties can be linear, isotropic or
orthotropic, and constant or temperature-dependent. Nonlinear properties, if any,
are ignored.

The modal solution - natural frequencies and mode shapes - is needed to calculate
the spectrum solution. The procedure to obtain the modal solution is described in
Chapter 3, “Modal Analysis”, but you should keep in mind the following additional
points: • Use the Block Lanczos (default), subspace, or reduced method to extract
the modes. The other methods - unsymmetric, damped, QR damped, and PowerDynamics -
are not valid for subsequent spectrum analysis. The number of modes extracted
should be enough to characterize the structure's response in the frequency range
of interest. If you are using GUI method, choose NO for mode expansion on the
dialog box for the modal analysis options [MODOPT], so that modes are not expanded
at this time, but can be expanded selectively in a separate solution pass. (See
the use of the SIGNIF field on the MXPAND command.) Otherwise, choose YES to
expand all the modes at this phase. If material-dependent damping is to be
included in the spectrum analysis, it must be specified in the modal analysis. Be
sure to constrain those DOF where you want to apply a base excitation spectrum. At
the end of the solution, leave the SOLUTION processor.
• •
• • •
6.3.3. Obtain the Spectrum Solution

The procedure to obtain the spectrum solution is explained below. The mode file
and the full file (jobname.MODE, jobname.FULL) from the modal analysis must be
available, and the database must contain the model data.
6–3
Chapter 6: Spectrum Analysis 1. Enter SOLUTION. Command(s): /SOLU GUI: Main Menu>
Solution Define the analysis type and analysis options. ANSYS offers the following
analysis options for a spectrum analysis. Not all modal analysis options and not
all eigenvalue extraction techniques work with all spectrum analysis options.
2.

Option New Analysis Spectrum Type: SPRS Command ANTYPE SPOPT GUI Path Main Menu>
Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> New
Analysis> Spectrum Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options Main Menu>
Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options
Analysis Type: Spectrum ANTYPE No. of Modes to Use for SPOPT Solution
Option: New Analysis [ANTYPE] Choose New Analysis.
Option: Analysis Type: Spectrum [ANTYPE] Choose analysis type spectrum.
Option: Spectrum Type: Single-point Response Spectrum [SPOPT] Choose Single-point

Response Spectrum (SPRS).
Option: Number of Modes to Use for Solution [SPOPT] Choose enough modes to cover
the frequency range spanned by the spectrum and to characterize the structure's
response. The accuracy of the solution depends on the number of modes used: the
larger the number, the higher the accuracy. Make sure to choose YES on the SPOPT
command if you want to calculate element stresses.
3.
Specify load step options. The following options are available for single-point
response spectrum analysis:

Option Spectrum Options Type of Response Spec- SVTYP trum Excitation Direction
Spectral-value- vs-frequency Curve SED FREQ, SV Main Menu> Solution> Load Step
Opts> Spectrum> Single Point> Settings Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts>
Spectrum> Single Point> Settings Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum>
Single Point> Freq Table or Spectr Values Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts>
Time/Frequenc> Damping Command GUI Path
Damping (Dynamics Options) Beta (Stiffness) Damp- BETAD ing
6–4
Section 6.3: Steps in a Single-Point Response Spectrum (SPRS) Analysis
Option Command GUI Path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc>
Damping Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Damping
Constant Damping Ra- DMPRAT tio Modal Damping MDAMP
Spectrum Options These data include the following: – Type of Response Spectrum
[SVTYP] The spectrum type can be displacement, velocity, acceleration, force, or
PSD. All except the force spectrum represent seismic spectra; that is, they are
assumed to be specified at the base. The force spectrum is specified at non-base
nodes with the F or FK command, and the direction is implied by labels FX, FY, FZ.
The PSD spectrum [SVTYP,4] is internally converted to a displacement response
spectrum and is limited to flat, narrowband spectra; a more robust random
vibration analysis procedure is described in Section 6.7: How to Do a Random
Vibration (PSD) Analysis. – – Excitation Direction [SED] Spectral-Value-Versus-
Frequency Curve [FREQ, SV] SV and FREQ commands are used to define the spectral
curve. You can define a family of spectral curves, each curve for a different
damping ratio. Use the STAT command to list current spectrum curve values. Another
command, ROCK, allows you to specify a rocking spectrum.
Damping (Dynamics Options) If you specify more than one form of damping, the ANSYS
program calculates an effective damping ratio at each frequency. The spectral
value at this effective damping ratio is then calculated by loglog interpolation
of the spectral curves. If no damping is specified, the spectral curve with the
lowest damping is used. For further details about the different forms of damping,
see Section 5.10.3: Damping in Chapter 5, “Transient Dynamic Analysis”. The
following forms of damping are available: – Beta (stiffness) Damping [BETAD] This
option results in a frequency-dependent damping ratio. – Constant Damping Ratio
[DMPRAT] This option specifies a constant damping ratio to be used at all
frequencies. – Modal Damping [MDAMP] Note — Material-dependent damping ratio
[MP,DAMP] is also available but only if specified in the modal analysis. MP,DAMP
also specifies a material-dependent constant damping ratio (and not material-
dependent beta damping, as used in other analyses).
4.
Start solution calculations. Command(s): SOLVE GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Solve>
Current LS
6–5
Chapter 6: Spectrum Analysis The output from the solution includes the
participation factor table. The participation factor table, which is part of the
printed output, lists the participation factors, mode coefficients (based on
lowest damping ratio), and the mass distribution for each mode. To obtain the
maximum response of each mode (modal response), multiply the mode shape by the
mode coefficient. You do this by retrieving the mode coefficient with the *GET
command and using it as a scale factor in the SET command. 5. 6. Repeat steps 3
and 4 for additional response spectra, if any. Note that solutions are not written
to the file.rst at this time. Leave the SOLUTION processor. Command(s): FINISH
GUI: Close the Solution menu.

1. Click on the expansion pass option button on the Expansion Pass dialog box to
signify YES for an expansion pass. Command(s): MXPAND GUI: Main Menu> Solution>
Analysis Type> New Analysis> Modal Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Expansion
Pass Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Expansion Pass> Expand Modes You must
expand modes regardless of whether you used the Block Lanczos, subspace, or
reduced extraction method. Details of how to expand the modes are explained in
Chapter 3, “Modal Analysis” under "Expand the Modes" as a separate solution pass,
but you should keep in mind the following points: • Only significant modes can be
selectively expanded. (See the use of the SIGNIF field on the MXPAND command.) If
you are using the GUI method and want to selectively expand modes, choose NO for
mode expansion on the dialog box for the modal analysis options [MODOPT] in the
modal analysis phase. You then perform mode expansion as a separate solution pass
after performing the spectrum solution. Only expanded modes are used for the mode
combination operation in the subsequent mode combination pass. If you are
interested in stresses caused by the spectrum, be sure to request stress
calculations here. By default, no stresses are calculated in the expansion pass,
which means no stresses are available for the spectrum analysis. If you want to
expand all the modes, you can include the mode expansion steps in the modal
solution pass by issuing the MXPAND command. If you are using the GUI method and
want to expand all the modes, choose YES for mode expansion on the dialog box for
the modal analysis options [MODOPT] in the modal solution step. But if you want to
expand only the significant modes, you must perform mode expansion as a separate
solution pass after performing the spectrum solution.
2.
• •
Note that modal analysis solutions are written to the results file (Jobname.RST)
only if the mode expansion is performed.
6.3.5. Combine the Modes

Combine the modes in a separate solution phase. The procedure is as follows: 1.
Enter SOLUTION. Command(s): /SOLU GUI: Main Menu> Solution
6–6
Section 6.3: Steps in a Single-Point Response Spectrum (SPRS) Analysis 2. Define
analysis type. Command(s): ANTYPE GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> New
Analysis • Option: New Analysis [ANTYPE] Choose New Analysis. • Option: Analysis
Type: Spectrum [ANTYPE] Choose analysis type spectrum. 3. Choose one of the mode
combination methods. ANSYS offers five different mode combination methods for the
single-point response spectrum analysis: • • • • • Square Root of Sum of Squares
(SRSS) Complete Quadratic Combination (CQC) Double Sum (DSUM) Grouping (GRP) Naval
Research Laboratory Sum (NRLSUM)
The NRLSUM method is typically used in the context of the Dynamic Design and
Analysis Method (DDAM) spectrum analysis. The following commands are used to
invoke different methods of mode combinations: Command(s): SRSS, CQC, DSUM, GRP,
NRLSUM GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis> Spectrum Main Menu>
Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Opts> Single-pt resp Main Menu> Load Step Opts>
Spectrum> Spectrum-Single Point-Mode Combine These commands allow computation of
three different types of responses: • Displacement (label = DISP)
Displacement response refers to displacements, stresses, forces, etc. • Velocity

(label = VELO)
Velocity response refers to velocities, "stress velocities," "force velocities,"

etc. • Acceleration (label = ACEL)
Acceleration response refers to accelerations, "stress accelerations," "force

accelerations," etc. The DSUM method also allows the input of time duration for
earthquake or shock spectrum. Note — You must specify damping if you use the
Complete Quadratic Combination method of mode combination (CQC). In addition, if
you use material-dependent damping [MP,DAMP,...], you must request that element
results be calculated in the modal expansion. (Elcalc = YES on the MXPAND
command.) 4. Start solution.
6–7
Chapter 6: Spectrum Analysis Command(s): SOLVE GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Solve>
Current LS The mode combination phase writes a file of POST1 commands
(Jobname.MCOM). Read in this file in POST1 to do the mode combinations, using the
results file (Jobname.RST) from the modal expansion pass. The file Jobname.MCOM
contains POST1 commands that combine the maximum modal responses by using the
specified mode combination method to calculate the overall response of the
structure. The mode combination method determines how the structure's modal
responses are to be combined: • • • If you selected displacement as the response
type (label = DISP), displacements and stresses are combined for each mode on the
mode combination command. If you selected velocity as the response type (label =
VELO), velocities and stress velocities are combined for each mode on the mode
combination command. If you selected acceleration as the response type (label =
ACEL), accelerations and stress accelerations are combined for each mode on the
mode combination command.
5.
Leave the SOLUTION processor. Command(s): FINISH GUI: Close the Solution menu.
Note — If you want to compute velocity or acceleration in addition to
displacement, repeat the mode combination step after postprocessing the
displacement solution by using the VELO or ACEL label on the mode combination
commands (SRSS, CQC, GRP, DSUM, NRLSUM). Remember that the existing Jobname.MCOM
file is overwritten by the additional mode combination step(s).

Results from a single-point response spectrum analysis are written to the mode
combination file, Jobname.MCOM, in the form of POST1 commands. These commands
calculate the overall response of the structure by combining the maximum modal
responses in some fashion (specified by one of the mode combination methods). The
overall response consists of the overall displacements (or velocities or
accelerations) and, if placed on the results file during the expansion pass, the
overall stresses (or stress velocities or stress accelerations), strains (or
strain velocities or strain accelerations), and reaction forces (or reaction force
velocities or reaction force accelerations). You can use POST1, the general
postprocessor, to review the results. Note — If you want a direct combination of
the derived stresses (S1, S2, S3, SEQV, SI) from the results file, issue the
SUMTYPE,PRIN command before reading in the Jobname.MCOM file. With the PRIN
option, component stresses are not available. Note that the command default
(SUMTYPE,COMP) is to directly operate only on the unaveraged element component
stresses and compute the derived quantities from these. Refer to Section 5.5.3:
Creating and Combining Load Cases in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide. Also, see the
ANSYS Commands Reference for a description of the SUMTYPE command. 1. Read the
commands on Jobname.MCOM. Command(s): /INPUT GUI: Utility Menu> File> Read Input
From
6–8
Section 6.3: Steps in a Single-Point Response Spectrum (SPRS) Analysis For
example, issue /INPUT with the following arguments:
/INPUT,FILE,MCOM!Assumes the default jobname FILE
2.
Display results. • Option: Display Deformed Shape Command(s): PLDISP GUI: Main
Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Deformed Shape Option: Contour Displays
Contour Plot> Nodal Solu or Element Solu Use PLNSOL or PLESOL to contour almost
any result item, such as stresses (SX, SY, SZ ...), strains (EPELX, EPELY, EPELZ
...), and displacements (UX, UY, UZ ...). If you previously issued the SUMTYPE
command, the results of the PLNSOL or PLESOL command are affected by the
particular SUMTYPE command option (SUMTYPE,COMP or SUMTYPE,PRIN) that you
selected. Use the PLETAB command to contour element table data and PLLS to contour
line element data. Caution: Derived data, such as stresses and strains, are
averaged at the nodes by the PLNSOL command. This averaging results in "smeared"
values at nodes where elements of different materials, different shell
thicknesses, or other discontinuities meet. To avoid the smearing effect, use
selecting (described in Chapter 7, “Selecting and Components” in the ANSYS Basic
Analysis Guide) to select elements of the same material, same shell thickness,
etc. before issuing PLNSOL. You can view correct membrane results for shells
(SHELL, MID) by using KEYOPT(8) = 2 (for SHELL93, SHELL181, SHELL208, and
SHELL209) or KEYOPT(11) = 2 (SHELL63). These KEYOPTS write the mid-surface node
results directly to the results file, and allow the membrane results to be
directly operated on during squaring operations. The default method of averaging
the TOP and BOT squared values to obtain a MID value can possibly yield incorrect
MID values. • Option: Vector Displays Command(s): PLVECT GUI: Main Menu> General
Postproc> Plot Results> Vector Plot> Predefined Option: Tabular Listings
(reaction data) GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Nodal Solution
Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Element Solution Main Menu> General
Postproc> List Results> Reaction Solution Other Capabilities Many other
postprocessing functions, such as mapping results onto a path, transforming
results to different coordinate systems, and load case combinations, are available
in POST1. See The General Postprocessor (POST1) in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide
for details.
If you are using batch mode, note the following:
6–9
Chapter 6: Spectrum Analysis • • The modal solution and spectrum solution passes
can be combined into a single modal analysis [ANTYPE,MODAL] solution pass, with
spectrum loads [SV, SVTYP, SED, FREQ]. The mode expansion and mode combination
solution passes can be combined into a single modal analysis [ANTYPE,MODAL and
EXPASS,ON] solution pass with a mode combination command.
6.4. Sample Spectrum Analysis (GUI Method)

In this sample problem, you determine the seismic response of a beam structure.

A simply supported beam of length , mass per unit length m, and section properties
shown in Problem Specifications, is subjected to a vertical motion of both
supports. The motion is defined in terms of a seismic displacement response
spectrum. Determine the nodal displacements, reactions forces, and the element
solutions.

The following material properties are used for this problem: E = 30 x 106 psi m =
0.2 lb-sec2/in2 The following geometric properties are used for this problem: I =
(1000/3) in4 A = 273.9726 in2 = 240 in h = 14 in
6–10
Section 6.4: Sample Spectrum Analysis (GUI Method)

Figure 6.2 Simply Supported Beam with Vertical Motion of Both Supports
6.4.4. Procedure
1. 2. Choose menu path Utility Menu> File> Change Title. Type the text "Seismic
Response of a Beam Structure" and click on OK.
6.4.4.2. Define the Element Type

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Element Type>
Add/Edit/Delete. The Element Types dialog box appears. Click on Add. The Library
of Element Types dialog box appears. Scroll down the list on the left to
"Structural Beam" and select it. Click on "2D elastic 3" in the list on the right.
Click on OK. The Library of Element Types dialog box closes. Click on Close in the
Element Types dialog box.

1. 2. 3. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Real Constants. The Real
Constants dialog box appears. Click on Add. The Element Type for Real Constants
dialog box appears. Click on OK. The Real Constants for BEAM3 dialog box appears.
6–11
Chapter 6: Spectrum Analysis 4. 5. 6. 7. Enter 273.9726 for cross-sectional area.
Enter (1000/3) for area moment of inertia. Enter 14 for total beam height and
click on OK. Click on Close to close the Real Constants dialog box.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props>
Material Models. The Define Material Model Behavior dialog box appears. In the
Material Models Available window, double-click on the following options:
Structural, Linear, Elastic, Isotropic. A dialog box appears. Enter 30e6 for EX
(Young's modulus), and click on OK. Material Model Number 1 appears in the
Material Models Defined window on the left. Double-click on Density. A dialog box
appears. Enter 73E-5 for DENS (density), and click on OK. Choose menu path
Material> Exit to remove the Define Material Model Behavior dialog box.
6.4.4.5. Define Keypoints and Line

Create> Keypoints> In Active CS. The Create Keypoints in Active Coordinate System
dialog box appears. Enter 1 for keypoint number. Click on Apply to accept the
default X, Y, Z coordinates of 0,0,0. Enter 2 for keypoint number. Enter 240,0,0
for X, Y, and Z coordinates, respectively. Click on OK. Choose menu path Utility
Menu> PlotCtrls> Numbering. The Plot Numbering Controls dialog box appears. Click
on "keypoint numbers" to turn keypoint numbering on. Click on OK.
10. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Lines> Lines>
Straight Line. A picking menu appears. 11. Click on keypoint 1, and then on
keypoint 2. A straight line appears between the two keypoints. 12. Click on OK.
The picking menu closes.
6.4.4.6. Set Global Element Density and Mesh Line

1. 2. 3. 4. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Size Cntrls>
Global> Size. The Global Element Sizes dialog box appears. Enter 8 for the number
of element divisions and click on OK. The Global Element Sizes dialog box closes.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh> Lines. A picking menu
appears. Click on Pick All. The picking menu closes.
6–12
6.4.4.7. Set Boundary Conditions

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply>
Structural> Displacement> On Nodes. A picking menu appears. In the graphics
window, click once on the node at the left end of the beam. Click on OK. The Apply
U,ROT on Nodes dialog box appears. In the scroll box of DOFs to be constrained,
click once on "UY" to highlight it. Click on OK. Repeat steps 1-3 and select the
node at the right end of the beam. In the scroll box of DOFs to be constrained,
click once on "UX." Both "UX" and "UY" should be highlighted. Click on OK. The
Apply U,ROT on Nodes dialog box closes.
6.4.4.8. Specify Analysis Type and Options

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type>
New Analysis. The New Analysis dialog box appears. Click on "Modal" to select it
and click on OK. The New Analysis dialog box closes. Choose menu path Main Menu>
Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options. The Modal Analysis dialog box appears.
Click on "Reduced" as the mode extraction method [MODOPT]. Enter 1 for the number
of modes to expand. Click on the Calculate elem. results dialog button [MXPAND] to
specify YES. Click on OK. The Modal Analysis dialog box closes, and the Reduced
Modal Analysis dialog box appears. Enter 3 for the No. of modes to print and click
on OK. The Reduced Modal Analysis dialog box closes. Choose menu path Main Menu>
Solution> Master DOFs> User Selected> Define. The picking menu appears.
10. Choose Pick All. The Define Master DOFs dialog box appears. 11. Select UY for
the 1st degree of freedom and click on OK. The Define Master DOFs dialog box
closes.
6.4.4.9. Solve the Modal Analysis

1. 2. 3. 4. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS. The Solve
Current Load Step dialog box appears, along with a status window. Carefully review
the information in the status window, and then click on Close. Click on OK on the
Solve Current Load Step dialog box to start the solution. When the solution is
finished, a dialog box stating "Solution is done!" appears. Click on Close.
6.4.4.10. Set Up the Spectrum Analysis

1. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis. The New
Analysis dialog box appears, along with a warning message that states: "Changing
the analysis type is only valid within the first load step. Pressing OK will cause
you to exit and reenter SOLUTION. This will reset load step count to 1." Click on
CLOSE to close the warning message box. Click on "Spectrum" to select it, and
click on OK. The New Analysis dialog box closes.
2.
6–13
Chapter 6: Spectrum Analysis 3. 4. 5. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load
Step Opts> Spectrum> Single Point> Settings. The Settings for Single-point
Response Spectrum dialog box appears. Select "Seismic displac" in the scroll box
as the type of response spectrum. Enter 0,1,0 for excitation direction into the
excitation direction input windows and click on OK.
6.4.4.11. Define Spectrum Value vs. Frequency Table

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum>
Single Point> Freq Table. The Frequency Table dialog box appears. Enter 0.1 for
FREQ1, enter 10 for FREQ2, and click on OK. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution>
Load Step Opts> Spectrum> Single Point> Spectr Values. The Spectrum Values -
Damping Ratio dialog box appears. Click on OK to accept the default of no damping.
The Spectrum Values dialog box appears. Enter 0.44 and 0.44 for FREQ1 and FREQ2,
respectively. Click on OK. The Spectrum Values dialog box closes.
6.4.4.12. Solve Spectrum Analysis

6.4.4.13. Set up the Expansion Pass

CLOSE to close the warning message box. Click on "Modal" to select it, and click
on OK. The New Analysis dialog box closes. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution>
Analysis Type> Expansion Pass. The Expansion Pass dialog box appears. Click on the
expansion pass dialog button to turn it ON and click on OK. The Expansion Pass
dialog box closes.
2. 3. 4.
6.4.4.14. Expand the Modes

1. 2. 3. 4. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> ExpansionPass>
Expand Modes. The Expand Modes dialog box appears. Enter 10 for the number of
modes to expand and enter 0.005 for the significant threshold. Click on the
calculate element results dialog button to specify YES for element results
calculation. Click on OK. The Expand Modes dialog box closes.
6–14
6.4.4.15. Start Expansion Pass Calculation

6.4.4.16. Set Up Mode Combination for Spectrum Analysis

CLOSE to close the warning message box. Click on "Spectrum" to select it, and
click on OK. The New Analysis dialog box closes. Choose menu path Main Menu>
Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options. The Spectrum Analysis dialog box
appears. Accept the default spectrum type single-point response. Click on OK. The
Spectrum Analysis dialog box closes.
2. 3. 4.
6.4.4.17. Select Mode Combination Method

1. 2. 3. 4. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> Single
Point> Mode Combine. The Mode Combination Methods dialog box appears. Select SRSS
as the mode combination method. Enter 0.15 for the significant threshold. Select
displacement for the type of output. Click OK. The Mode Combination Methods dialog
box closes.
6.4.4.18. Combine the Modes

6.4.4.19. Postprocessing: Print Out Nodal, Element, and Reaction Solutions

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Results
Summary. The SET Command listing window appears. Review the information in the
listing window, and click on Close. The SET Command listing window closes. Choose
menu path Utility Menu> File> Read Input From. The Read File dialog box appears.
From the left side of the Read File dialog box, select the directory containing
your results from the scroll box. From the right side of the Read File dialog box,
select the jobname.mcom file from the scroll box.
6–15
Chapter 6: Spectrum Analysis 6. 7. 8. 9. Click on OK. The Read File dialog box
closes. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Nodal
Solution. The List Nodal Solution dialog box appears. Click on OK to accept the
default settings of "DOF solution" in the scroll box on the left and "All DOFs
DOF" in the scroll box on the right. The List Nodal Solution dialog box closes.
The PRNSOL Command listing window appears. Review the results and click on Close
to close the PRNSOL Command listing window.
10. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Element Solution.
The List Element Solution dialog box appears. 11. Scroll down the list on the left
to select "Line Elem results" and select "Structural ELEM" on the scroll box on
the right. Click on OK. The List Element Solution dialog box closes. 12. The
PRESOL Command listing window appears. Review the results and click on Close to
close the PRESOL Command listing window. 13. Choose menu path Main Menu> General
Postproc> List Results> Reaction Solu. The List Reaction Solution dialog box
appears. 14. Scroll down the list to "All struc forc F" to select it and click on
OK. The List Reaction Solution dialog box closes. 15. The PRRSOL Command listing
window appears. Review the results in the listing window and click on Close to
close the PRRSOL Command listing window.

1. 2. In the ANSYS Toolbar, click on Quit. Choose the save option you want and
click on OK.
You are now finished with this sample problem.
6.5. Sample Spectrum Analysis (Command or Batch Method)

You can perform the example spectrum analysis using the ANSYS commands shown below
instead of GUI choices. Items prefaced by an exclamation point (!) are comments.
/PREP7 /TITLE Seismic Response of a Beam Structure ET,1,BEAM3
R,1,273.9726,(1000/3),14 ! A = 273.9726, I = (1000/3), H = 14 MP,EX,1,30E6
MP,DENS,1,73E-5 K,1 K,2,240 L,1,2 ESIZE,,8 LMESH,1 NSEL,S,LOC,X,0 D,ALL,UY
NSEL,S,LOC,X,240 D,ALL,UX,,,,,UY NSEL,ALL FINISH /SOLU ANTYPE,MODAL
! Mode-frequency analysis
6–16
Section 6.6: Where to Find Other Examples
MODOPT,REDUC,,,,3 MXPAND,1,,,YES M,ALL,UY OUTPR,BASIC,1 SOLVE FINISH /SOLU
ANTYPE,SPECTR SPOPT,SPRS SED,,1 SVTYPE,3 FREQ,.1,10 SV,,.44,.44 SOLVE FINISH /SOLU
ANTYPE,MODAL EXPASS,ON MXPAND,10,,,YES,0.005 SOLVE FINISH /SOLU ANTYPE,SPECTR
SRSS,0.15,DISP SOLVE FINISH /POST1 SET,LIST /INP,,mcom PRNSOL,DOF PRESOL,ELEM
PRRSOL,F FINISH ! Householder, print first 3 reduced mode shapes ! Expand first
mode shape, calculate element stresses
! ! ! ! ! !
Spectrum analysis Single point spectrum Global Y-axis as spectrum direction

Seismic displacement spectrum Frequency points for SV vs. freq. table Spectrum
values associated with frequency points
! Mode-frequency analysis ! Expand 10 mode shapes, calculate element stresses !

set signif=0.005
! Square Root of Sum of Squares Mode combination ! with signif=0.15 and

displacement solution requested
! Print nodal solution ! Print element solution in element format ! Print reaction
solution

additional spectrum analyses. The ANSYS Verification Manual consists of test case
analyses demonstrating the analysis capabilities of the ANSYS program. While these
test cases demonstrate solutions to realistic analysis problems, the ANSYS
Verification Manual does not present them as step-by-step examples with lengthy
data input instructions and printouts. However, most ANSYS users who have at least
limited finite element experience should be able to fill in the missing details by
reviewing each test case's finite element model and input data with accompanying
comments. The ANSYS Verification Manual includes a variety of spectrum analysis
test cases: VM19 - Random Vibration Analysis of a Deep Simply-Supported Beam VM68
- PSD Response of a Two DOF Spring-Mass System VM69 - Seismic Response VM70 -
Seismic Response of a Beam Structure VM203 - Dynamic Load Effect on Simply-
Supported Thick Square Plate See the ANSYS Commands Reference for a discussion of
the ANTYPE, MODOPT, D, EXPASS, MXPAND, SPOPT, SVTYP, SED, FREQ, SV, SRSS, CQC,
DSUM, GRP, NRLSUM, and DMPRAT commands.
6–17
6.7. How to Do a Random Vibration (PSD) Analysis

The procedure for a PSD analysis consists of six main steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Build the model. Obtain the modal solution. Expand the modes. Obtain the spectrum
solution. Combine the modes. Review the results.
Of these, the first two steps are the same as described for a single-point
response spectrum analysis. The procedure for the remaining four steps is
explained below. Random vibration analysis is not available in the ANSYS
Professional program. In the GUI method, the dialog box for the modal analysis
options [MODOPT] contains an option for mode expansion [MXPAND]. Choose YES for
mode expansion. You then follow the instructions in Section 6.7.1: Expand the
Modes. The procedures for obtaining the modal solution and expanding the nodes are
combined into a single step.

You must expand modes regardless of whether you used the subspace, Block Lanczos,
or reduced extraction method. Details about expanding the modes are explained in
Section 3.6: Expand the Modes, but keep in mind the following additional points: •
• Only expanded modes are used for the mode combination step. If you are
interested in stresses caused by the spectrum, be sure to request stress
calculations here. By default, no stresses are calculated in the expansion pass,
which means no stresses are available at the end of the spectrum solution. The
mode expansion can be performed as a separate step, or can be included in the
modal analysis phase. At the end of the expansion pass, leave SOLUTION with the
FINISH command. If you want to exit ANSYS after running the modal analysis, you
must save the database at this point.
• •
As explained in Chapter 3, “Modal Analysis”, you can combine the modal solution
and mode expansion steps by including the MXPAND command in the modal analysis
step (GUI and batch modes).
6.7.2. Obtain the Spectrum Solution

To obtain the PSD spectrum solution, the database must contain the model data as
well as the modal solution data. If you leave ANSYS after running the modal
analysis, you must save the database. In addition, the following files from the
modal solution must be available: Jobname.MODE, .ESAV, .EMAT, .FULL (only for
subspace and Block Lanczos methods), .RST. 1. Enter SOLUTION. Command(s): /SOLU
GUI: Main Menu> Solution Define the analysis type and analysis options:
2.
6–18
Section 6.7: How to Do a Random Vibration (PSD) Analysis • • For spectrum type
[SPOPT], choose Power Spectral Density (PSD). Specify stress calculations ON
[SPOPT] if you are interested in stress results. Stresses caused by the spectrum
are calculated only if they were also requested during the modal expansion pass.
3.
Specify load step options. The following options are available for a random
vibration analysis: • Spectrum Data – Type of PSD Command(s): PSDUNIT GUI: Main
Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> PSD> Settings The PSD type can be
displacement, velocity, force, pressure, or acceleration. Whether it is a base
excitation or a nodal excitation is specified in Steps 4 and 5. If a pressure PSD
is to be applied, the pressures should be applied in the modal analysis itself. –
PSD-versus-frequency table Define a piecewise-linear (in log-log scale) PSD versus
frequency table. Since a curve-fitting polynomial is used for the closed-form
integration of the curve, you should graph the input, which is overlaid with the
fitted curve, to ensure a good fit. If the fit is not good, you should add one or
more intermediate points to the table until you obtain a good fit. Command(s):
PSDFRQ, PSDVAL, PSDGRAPH GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> PSD>
PSD vs Freq Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> PSD> Graph PSD Tables
PSDFRQ and PSDVAL are used to define the PSD-versus-frequency table. Step 6
describes how to apply additional PSD excitations (if any). You can issue STAT to
list PSD tables and issue PSDGRAPH to graph them. • Damping (Dynamics Options) The
following forms of damping are available: ALPHAD, BETAD, and MDAMP result in a
frequencydependent damping ratio, whereas DMPRAT specifies a constant damping
ratio to be used at all frequencies. If you specify more than one form of damping,
ANSYS calculates an effective damping ratio at each frequency. Note — If no
damping is specified in a PSD analysis, a default DMPRAT of 1 percent is used. –
Alpha (Mass) Damping Command(s): ALPHAD GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts>
Time/Frequenc> Damping Beta (Stiffness) Damping Command(s): BETAD GUI: Main Menu>
Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Damping Constant Damping Ratio
Command(s): DMPRAT GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc>
Damping Frequency-Dependent Damping Ratio Command(s): MDAMP GUI: Main Menu>
Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Damping
6–19
The remaining steps are specific to a random vibration analysis: 4. Apply the PSD
excitation at the desired nodes. Use a value of 1.0 to indicate points where the
PSD excitation applies. A value of 0.0 (or blank) can be used to remove a
specification. The excitation direction is implied by the UX, UY, UZ labels on the
D command (for base excitation), and by FX, FY, FZ on the F command (for nodal
excitation). For nodal excitation, values other than 1.0 can be used to scale the
participation factors. For pressure PSD, bring in the load vector from the modal
analysis (LVSCALE). You can use the scale factor. Note — You can apply base
excitations only at nodes that were constrained in the modal analysis. Command(s):
D (or DK, DL, or DA) for base excitation F (or FK) for nodal excitation LVSCALE
for pressure PSD GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural>
Spectrum> Base PSD Excit> On Nodes 5. Begin participation factor calculations for
the above PSD excitation. Use the TBLNO field to indicate which PSD table to use,
and Excit to specify whether the calculations are for a base or nodal excitation.
Command(s): PFACT GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> PSD>
Calculate PF 6. If you need to apply multiple PSD excitations on the same model,
repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 for each additional PSD table. Then define, as necessary,
the degree of correlation between the excitations, using any of the following
commands: Command(s): COVAL for cospectral values, QDVAL for quadspectral values,
PSDSPL for a spatial relationship, PSDWAV for a wave propagation relationship,
PSDGRAPH to graph the data overlaid with the fitted curve GUI: Main Menu>
Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> PSD> Correlation Main Menu> Solution> Load
Step Opts> Spectrum> PSD> Graph Tables When you use the PSDSPL or PSDWAV command,
you must use SPATIAL or WAVE, respectively, for
Parcor on the PFACT command. PSDSPL and PSDWAV relationships might be quite CPU
intensive for
multi-point base excitations. Nodal excitation and base excitation input must be
consistent when using PSDWAV and PSDSPL (for example, FY cannot be applied to one
node and FZ be applied to another). The PSDSPL and PSDWAV commands are not
available for a pressure PSD analysis. 7. Specify the output controls. The only
valid output control command for this analysis is PSDRES, which specifies the
amount and form of output written to the results file. Up to three sets of
solution quantities can be calculated: displacement solution, velocity solution,
or acceleration solution. Each of these can be relative to the base or absolute.
Command(s): PSDRES GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> PSD> Calc
Controls Table 6.3: “Solution Items Available in a PSD Analysis” shows a summary
of the possible solution sets. To limit the amount of data written to the results
file, use OUTRES at the mode expansion step. Using OUTPR,NSOL,ALL provides a
summary table of the significant modal covariance terms.
6–20
Section 6.7: How to Do a Random Vibration (PSD) Analysis
Table 6.3 Solution Items Available in a PSD Analysis

Solution Items Form Displacement Solution (label DISP on Displacements, stresses,
strains, forces Relative, absolute, or neither PSDRES) Velocity Solution (label
VELO on PSDRES) Acceleration Solution (label ACEL on PSDRES) Velocities, stress
velocities, force velo- Relative, absolute, or neither cities, etc. Accelerations,
stress accl's, force accl's, Relative, absolute, or neither etc.
8.
Start solution calculations. Command(s): SOLVE GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Solve>
Current LS Leave the SOLUTION processor. Command(s): FINISH GUI: Close the
Solution menu.
9.
6.7.3. Combine the Modes

The modes can be combined in a separate solution phase. The procedure is as
follows: 1. Enter Solution. Command(s): /SOLU GUI: Main Menu> Solution Define
analysis type. • Option: New Analysis [ANTYPE] Choose New Analysis. • Option:
Analysis Type: Spectrum [ANTYPE] Choose analysis type spectrum. 3. Only the PSD
mode combination method is valid in a random vibration analysis. This method
triggers calculation of the one-sigma displacements, stresses, etc., in the
structure. If you do not issue the PSDCOM command, the program does not calculate
the one-sigma response of the structure. Command(s): PSDCOM GUI: Main Menu>
Solution> Load Step Opts> Spectrum> PSD> Mode Combin The SIGNIF and COMODE fields
on the PSD mode combination method [PSDCOM] offer options to reduce the number of
modes to be combined (see the description of PSDCOM command). If you want to
exercise these options, it is prudent to print the modal covariance matrices in
Section 6.7.2: Obtain the Spectrum Solution to first investigate the relative
contributions of the modes toward the final solution. 4. Start the solution.
Command(s): SOLVE GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS Leave the SOLUTION
processor. Command(s): FINISH GUI: Close the Solution menu.
2.
5.
6–21

Results from a random vibration analysis are written to the structural results
file, Jobname.RST. They consist of the following quantities: 1. 2. 3. Expanded
mode shapes from the modal analysis Static solution for base excitation
[PFACT,,BASE] The following output, if mode combinations are requested [PSDCOM]
and based on the PSDRES setting: • • • 1 σ displacement solution (displacements,
stresses, strains, and forces) 1 σ velocity solution (velocities, stress
velocities, strain velocities, and force velocities) 1 σ acceleration solution
(accelerations, stress accelerations, strain accelerations, and force
accelerations)
You can review these results in POST1, the general postprocessor, and then
calculate response PSDs in POST26, the time-history postprocessor.
6.7.4.1. Reviewing the Results in POST1

To review results in POST1, you first need to understand how the results data are
organized on the results file. Table 6.4: “Organization of Results Data from a PSD
Analysis” shows the organization. Note — Load step 2 is left blank if you specify
only nodal PSD excitation. Also, if you suppress the displacement, velocity, or
acceleration solution using the PSDRES command, the corresponding load step is
left blank. Also, the superelement displacement file (.DSUB) is not written for
load steps 3, 4, or 5 in a PSD analysis.
Table 6.4 Organization of Results Data from a PSD Analysis

Load Step 1 Substep 1 2 3 Etc. 2 (Base excit. only) 1 2 Etc. 3 4 5 1 1 1 Contents
Expanded modal solution for 1st mode Expanded modal solution for 2nd mode Expanded
modal solution for 3rd mode Etc. Unit static solution for PSD table 1 Unit static
solution for PSD table 2 Etc. 1 sigma displacement solution 1 sigma velocity
solution (if requested) 1 sigma acceleration solution (if requested)
6.7.4.1.1. Read the Desired Set of Results into the Database

For example, to read in the 1 σ displacement solution, issue the command:
SET,3,1
Command(s): SET GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> First Set 6–22
Section 6.7: How to Do a Random Vibration (PSD) Analysis
6.7.4.1.2. Display the Results

Use the same options available for the SPRS analysis. Note — Nodal stress
averaging performed by the PLNSOL command may not be appropriate in a random
vibration analysis because the "stresses" are not actual stresses but stress
statistics.
6.7.4.2. Calculating Response PSDs in POST26

You can calculate and display response PSDs for any results quantity available on
the results file (displacements, velocities, and/or accelerations) if the
Jobname.RST and Jobname.PSD files are available. The procedure to calculate the
response PSD is as follows: 1. Enter POST26, the time-history postprocessor.
Command(s): /POST26 GUI: Main Menu> TimeHist PostPro Store the frequency vector.
NPTS is the number of frequency points to be added on either side of natural
frequencies in order to "smooth" the frequency vector (defaults to 5). The
frequency vector is stored as variable 1. Command(s): STORE,PSD,NPTS GUI: Main
Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Store Data Define the variables in which the result items
of interest (displacements, stresses, reaction forces, etc.) are to be stored.
Command(s): NSOL, ESOL, and/or RFORCE GUI: Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Define
Variables Calculate the response PSD and store it in the desired variable. The
PLVAR command can then be used to plot the response PSD. Command(s): RPSD GUI:
Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Calc Resp PSD
2.
3.
4.
6.7.4.3. Calculating Covariance in POST26

You can compute the covariance between two quantities available on the results
file (displacements, velocities, and/or accelerations), if the Jobname.RST and
Jobname.PSD files are available. The procedure to calculate the covariance between
two quantities is as follows: 1. Enter POST26, the time-history postprocessor.
Command(s): /POST26 GUI: Main Menu> TimeHist PostPro Define the variables in which
the result items of interest (displacements, stresses, reaction forces, etc.) are
to be stored. Command(s): NSOL, ESOL, and/or RFORCE GUI: Main Menu> TimeHist
Postpro> Define Variables Calculate the contributions of each response component
(relative or absolute response) and store them in the desired variable. The PLVAR
command can then be used to plot the modal contributions (relative response)
followed by the contributions of pseudo-static and mixed part responses to the
total covariance. Command(s): CVAR GUI: Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Calc
Covariance
2.
3.
6–23
Chapter 6: Spectrum Analysis 4. Obtain the covariance. Command(s):
*GET,NameVARI,n,EXTREM,CVAR GUI: Utility Menu> Parameters> Get Scalar Data
6.7.5. Sample Input

A sample input listing for a random vibration (PSD) analysis is shown below:
! Build the Model /FILNAM, /TITLE, /PREP7 ... ... ... FINISH ! ! Obtain the Modal
Solution /SOLU ANTYPE,MODAL MODOPT,REDU M, ... TOTAL, ... D, ... SAVE SOLVE FINISH
! Expand the Modes /SOLU EXPASS,ON MXPAND, ... SOLVE FINISH ! ! Obtain the
Spectrum Solution /SOLU! Reenter SOLUTION ANTYPE,SPECTR SPOPT,PSD, ... PSDUNIT,
... PSDFRQ, ... ! Jobname ! Title ! Enter PREP7 ! Generate model
! ! ! !
Enter SOLUTION Modal analysis Reduced method Master DOF
! Constraints ! Initiates solution
! Reenter SOLUTION ! Expansion pass ! Number of modes to expand
PSDVAL, ... DMPRAT, ... D,0 PFACT, ... PSDRES, ... SAVE SOLVE FINISH ! ! Combine
modes using PSD method /SOLU ! Re-enter SOLUTION ANTYPE,SPECTR ! Spectrum analysis
PSDCOM,SIGNIF,COMODE ! PSD mode combinations with significance factor and ! option
for selecting a subset of modes for ! combination SOLVE FINISH ! ! Review the
Results /POST1 ! Enter POST1 SET, ... ! Read results from appropriate load step,
substep ...! Postprocess as desired ...! (PLDISP; PLNSOL; NSORT; PRNSOL; etc.) ...
FINISH ! ! Calculate Response PSD /POST26 ! Enter POST26
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Spectrum analysis Power Spectral Density; No. of modes; Stress calcs. on/off Type
of spectrum Frequency pts. (for spectrum values vs. frequency tables) Spectrum
values Damping ratio Base excitation Calculate participation factors Output
controls
6–24
Section 6.9: How to Do Multi-Point Response Spectrum (MPRS) Analysis
STORE,PSD NSOL,2,... RPSD,3,2,,... PLVAR,3 ... ! Calculate Covariance RESET NSOL,2
NSOL,3 CVAR,4,2,3,1,1 ! ! ! ! Store frequency vector (variable 1) Define variable
2 (nodal data) Calculate response PSD (variable 3) Plot the response PSD
! ! ! ! ! *GET,CVAR23U,VARI,4,EXREME,CVAR ! FINISH
Reset all POST26 specifications to initial defaults. Define variable 2 (nodal

data). Define variable 3 (nodal data). Calculate covariance between displacement
at nodes 2 and 3. Obtain covariance.
See the ANSYS Commands Reference for a discussion of the ANTYPE, MODOPT, M, TOTAL,
D, EXPASS, MXPAND, SPOPT, PSDUNIT, PSDFRQ, PSDVAL, DMPRAT, PFACT, PSDCOM, SUMTYPE,
and PSDRES commands.
6.8. How to Do DDAM Spectrum Analysis

The procedure for a DDAM spectrum analysis is the same as that for a single-point
response spectrum (SPRS) analysis (including file requirements), with the
following exceptions: • • • Use the British system of units [inches (not feet),
pounds, etc.] for all input data - model geometry, material properties, element
real constants, etc. Choose DDAM instead of SPRS as the spectrum type [SPOPT
command]. Use the ADDAM and VDDAM commands instead of SVTYP, SV, and FREQ to
specify the spectrum values and types. Specify the global direction of excitation
using the SED command. Based on the coefficients specified in the ADDAM and VDDAM
commands, the program computes the mode coefficients according to the empirical
equations given in the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference. The most applicable mode
combination method is the NRL sum method [NRLSUM]. Mode combinations are done in
the same manner as for a single-point response spectrum. Mode combinations require
damping. No damping needs to be specified for solution because it is implied by
the ADDAM and VDDAM commands. If damping is specified, it is used for mode
combinations but ignored for solution. Note — As in the Single-point Response
Spectrum analysis, DDAM spectrum analysis requires six steps to systematically
perform the analysis. If you are using batch mode, note the following: • • The
modal solution and DDAM spectrum solution passes can be combined into a single
modal analysis [ANTYPE,MODAL] solution pass with DDAM spectrum loads [ADDAM,
VDDAM, SED]. The mode expansion and mode combination solution passes can be
combined into a single modal analysis [ANTYPE,MODAL and EXPASS,ON] solution pass
with a mode combination command.
DDAM spectrum analysis is not available in the ANSYS Professional program.
6.9. How to Do Multi-Point Response Spectrum (MPRS) Analysis

The procedure for a multi-point response spectrum analysis is the same as that for
random vibration (PSD) analysis (including file requirements), with the following
exceptions: • • Choose MPRS instead of PSD as the type of spectrum [SPOPT
command]. The "PSD-versus-frequency" tables now represent spectral values versus
frequency.
6–25
Chapter 6: Spectrum Analysis • • • • You cannot specify any degree of correlation
between the spectra (i.e., they are assumed to be uncorrelated). Only relative
results (relative to the base excitation) not absolute values, are calculated. All
mode combination methods are available except PSDCOM. Results from a multi-point
response spectrum analysis are written to the mode combination file, Jobname.MCOM,
in the form of POST1 commands. The commands calculate the overall response of the
structure by combining the maximum modal responses in some fashion (specified by
the mode combination command in SOLUTION). The overall response consists of the
overall displacements and, if placed on the results file during the modal
expansion pass, the overall stresses, strains, and reaction forces. If Label =
VELO or ACEL on the mode combination command (SRSS, CQC, GRP, DSUM, or NRLSUM)
during SOLUTION, the corresponding velocity or acceleration responses are written
to the mode combination file.
Multi-point response spectrum analysis is not available in the ANSYS Professional

program.
6–26
Chapter 7: Buckling Analysis
7.1. Definition of Buckling Analysis
Buckling analysis is a technique used to determine buckling loads - critical loads
at which a structure becomes unstable - and buckled mode shapes - the
characteristic shape associated with a structure's buckled response.
7.2. Types of Buckling Analyses

Two techniques are available in the ANSYS Multiphysics, ANSYS Mechanical, ANSYS
Structural, and ANSYS Professional programs for predicting the buckling load and
buckling mode shape of a structure: nonlinear buckling analysis, and eigenvalue
(or linear) buckling analysis. Since these two methods frequently yield quite
different results, let's examine the differences between them before discussing
the details of their implementation.
7.2.1. Nonlinear Buckling Analysis

Nonlinear buckling analysis is usually the more accurate approach and is therefore
recommended for design or evaluation of actual structures. This technique employs
a nonlinear static analysis with gradually increasing loads to seek the load level
at which your structure becomes unstable, as depicted in Figure 7.1: “Buckling
Curves” (a). Using the nonlinear technique, your model can include features such
as initial imperfections, plastic behavior, gaps, and large-deflection response.
In addition, using deflection-controlled loading, you can even track the post-
buckled performance of your structure (which can be useful in cases where the
structure buckles into a stable configuration, such as "snap-through" buckling of
a shallow dome).
7.2.2. Eigenvalue Buckling Analysis

Eigenvalue buckling analysis predicts the theoretical buckling strength (the
bifurcation point) of an ideal linear elastic structure. (See Figure 7.1:
“Buckling Curves” (b).) This method corresponds to the textbook approach to
elastic buckling analysis: for instance, an eigenvalue buckling analysis of a
column will match the classical Euler solution. However, imperfections and
nonlinearities prevent most real-world structures from achieving their theoretical
elastic buckling strength. Thus, eigenvalue buckling analysis often yields
unconservative results, and should generally not be used in actual day-to-day
engineering analyses.
Figure 7.1 Buckling Curves
(a) Nonlinear load-deflection curve, (b) Linear (Eigenvalue) buckling curve

7.3. Commands Used in a Buckling Analysis

You use the same set of commands to build a model and perform a buckling analysis
that you use to do any other type of finite element analysis. Likewise, you choose
similar options from the graphical user interface (GUI) to build and solve models
no matter what type of analysis you are doing. Section 7.6: Sample Buckling
Analysis (GUI Method) and Section 7.7: Sample Buckling Analysis (Command or Batch
Method) show you how to perform an example eigenvalue buckling analysis via the
GUI or via commands, respectively. For detailed, alphabetized descriptions of the
ANSYS commands, see the ANSYS Commands Reference.
7.4. Procedure for Nonlinear Buckling Analysis

A nonlinear buckling analysis is a static analysis with large deflections turned
on [NLGEOM,ON], extended to a point where the structure reaches its limit load or
maximum load. Other nonlinearities such as plasticity may be included in the
analysis. The procedure for a static analysis is described in Chapter 2,
“Structural Static Analysis”, and nonlinearities are described in Chapter 8,
“Nonlinear Structural Analysis”.
7.4.1. Applying Load Increments

The basic approach in a nonlinear buckling analysis is to constantly increment the
applied loads until the solution begins to diverge. Be sure to use a sufficiently
fine load increment as your loads approach the expected critical buckling load. If
the load increment is too coarse, the buckling load predicted may not be accurate.
Turn on bisection and automatic time stepping [AUTOTS,ON] to help avoid this
problem.
7.4.2. Automatic Time Stepping

With automatic time stepping on, the program automatically seeks out the buckling
load. If automatic time stepping is ON in a static analysis having ramped loading
and the solution does not converge at a given load, the program bisects the load
step increment and attempts a new solution at a smaller load. In a buckling
analysis, each such convergence failure is typically accompanied by a "negative
pivot" message indicating that the attempted load equals or exceeds the buckling
load. You can usually ignore these messages if the program successfully obtains a
converged solution at the next, reduced load. If stress stiffness is active
[SSTIF,ON], you should run without adaptive descent active [NROPT,FULL,,OFF] to
ensure that a lower bound to the buckling load is attained. The program normally
converges to the limiting load as the process of bisection and resolution
continues to the point at which the minimum time step increment (specified by
DELTIM or NSUBST) is achieved. The minimum time step will directly affect the
precision of your results.
7.4.3. Important
Remember that an unconverged solution does not necessarily mean that the structure
has reached its maximum load. It could also be caused by numerical instability,
which might be corrected by refining your modeling technique. Track the load-
deflection history of your structure's response to decide whether an unconverged
load step represents actual structural buckling, or whether it reflects some other
problem. Perform a preliminary analysis using the arc-length method [ARCLEN] to
predict an approximate value of buckling load. Compare this approximate value to
the more precise value calculated using bisection to help determine if the
structure has indeed reached its maximum load. You can also use the arc-length
method itself to obtain a precise buckling load, but this method requires you to
adjust the arc-length radius by trial-and-error in a series of manually directed
reanalyses.
7–2
Section 7.5: Procedure for Eigenvalue Buckling Analysis

• If the loading on the structure is perfectly in-plane (that is, membrane or
axial stresses only), the out-ofplane deflections necessary to initiate buckling
will not develop, and the analysis will fail to predict buckling behavior. To
overcome this problem, apply a small out-of-plane perturbation, such as a modest
temporary force or specified displacement, to begin the buckling response. (A
preliminary eigenvalue buckling analysis of your structure may be useful as a
predictor of the buckling mode shape, allowing you to choose appropriate locations
for applying perturbations to stimulate the desired buckling response.) The
imperfection (perturbation) induced should match the location and size of that in
the real structure. The failure load is very sensitive to these parameters. In a
large-deflection analysis, forces (and displacements) will maintain their original
orientation, but surface loads will "follow" the changing geometry of the
structure as it deflects. Therefore, be sure to apply the proper type of loads.
You should carry your stability analysis through to the point of identifying the
critical load in order to calculate the structure's factor of safety with respect
to nonlinear buckling. (Merely establishing the fact that a structure is stable at
a given load level is generally insufficient for most design practice; you will
usually be required to provide a specified safety factor, which can only be
determined by establishing the actual limit load.) You can extend your analysis
into the post-buckled range by activating the arc-length method [ARCLEN]. Use this
feature to trace the load-deflection curve through regions of "snap-through" and
"snap-back" response. For those elements that support the consistent tangent
stiffness matrix (BEAM4, SHELL63, and SHELL143), activate the consistent tangent
stiffness matrix (KEYOPT(2) = 1 and NLGEOM,ON) to enhance the convergence behavior
of your nonlinear buckling analyses and improve the accuracy of your results. This
element KEYOPT must be defined before the first load step of the solution and
cannot be changed once the solution has started. Many other elements (such as
BEAM188, BEAM189, and SHELL181) will provide consistent tangent stiffness matrix
with NLGEOM,ON.
7.5. Procedure for Eigenvalue Buckling Analysis

Again, remember that eigenvalue buckling analysis generally yields unconservative
results, and should usually not be used for design of actual structures. If you
decide that eigenvalue buckling analysis is appropriate for your application,
follow this procedure: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Build the model. Obtain the static solution.
Obtain the eigenvalue buckling solution. Expand the solution. Review the results.

7–3

• Only linear behavior is valid. Nonlinear elements, if any, are treated as
linear. If you include contact elements, for example, their stiffnesses are
calculated based on their status after the static prestress run and are never
changed. Young's modulus (EX) (or stiffness in some form) must be defined.
Material properties may be linear, isotropic or orthotropic, and constant or
temperature-dependent. Nonlinear properties, if any, are ignored.
7.5.2. Obtain the Static Solution

The procedure to obtain a static solution is the same as described in Chapter 2,
“Structural Static Analysis”, with the following exceptions: • • Prestress effects
[PSTRES] must be activated. Eigenvalue buckling analysis requires the stress
stiffness matrix to be calculated. Unit loads are usually sufficient (that is,
actual load values need not be specified). The eigenvalues calculated by the
buckling analysis represent buckling load factors. Therefore, if a unit load is
specified, the load factors represent the buckling loads. All loads are scaled.
(Also, the maximum permissible eigenvalue is 1,000,000 - you must use larger
applied loads if your eigenvalue exceeds this limit.) Note that eigenvalues
represent scaling factors for all loads. If certain loads are constant (for
example, self-weight gravity loads) while other loads are variable (for example,
externally applied loads), you need to ensure that the stress stiffness matrix
from the constant loads is not factored by the eigenvalue solution. One strategy
that you can use to achieve this end is to iterate on the eigensolution, adjusting
the variable loads until the eigenvalue becomes 1.0 (or nearly 1.0, within some
convergence tolerance). Design optimization could be useful in driving this
iterative procedure to a final answer. Consider, for example, a pole having a
self-weight W0, which supports an externally-applied load, A. To determine the
limiting value of A in an eigenvalue buckling solution, you could solve
repetitively, using different values of A, until by iteration you find an
eigenvalue acceptably close to 1.0.
Figure 7.2 Adjusting Variable Loads to Find an Eigenvalue of 1.0
You can apply a nonzero constraint in the prestressing pass as the static load.
The eigenvalues found in the buckling solution will be the load factors applied to
these nonzero constraint values. However, the mode shapes will have a zero value
at these degrees of freedom (and not the nonzero value specified). At the end of
the solution, leave SOLUTION [FINISH].
7–4
Section 7.5: Procedure for Eigenvalue Buckling Analysis
7.5.3. Obtain the Eigenvalue Buckling Solution

This step requires files Jobname.EMAT and Jobname.ESAV from the static analysis.
Also, the database must contain the model data (issue RESUME if necessary). Follow
the steps below to obtain the eigenvalue buckling solution. 1. Enter the ANSYS
solution processor. Command(s): /SOLU GUI: Main Menu> Solution Specify the
analysis type. Command(s): ANTYPE,BUCKLE GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type>
New Analysis Note — Restarts are not valid in an eigenvalue buckling analysis.
Note — When you specify an eigenvalue buckling analysis, a Solution menu that is
appropriate for buckling analyses appears. The Solution menu will be either
"abridged" or "unabridged", depending on the actions you took prior to this step
in your ANSYS session. The abridged menu contains only those solution options that
are valid and/or recommended for buckling analyses. If you are on the abridged
Solution menu and you want to access other solution options (that is, solution
options that are valid for you to use, but their use may not be encouraged for
this type of analysis), select the Unabridged Menu option from the Solution menu.
For details, see Section 3.5.1: Using Abridged Solution Menus in the ANSYS Basic
Analysis Guide. 3. Specify analysis options. Command(s): BUCOPT, Method, NMODE,
SHIFT GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options Regardless of
whether you use the command or GUI method, you can specify values for these
options: • For Method, specify the eigenvalue extraction method. You can choose
subspace iteration or Block Lanczos. The Block Lanczos and subspace iteration
methods use the full system matrices. See Section 3.5.2.3: Option: Mode-Extraction
Method [MODOPT] in this manual for more information about these solution methods.
For NMODE, specify the number of eigenvalues to be extracted. This argument
defaults to one, which is usually sufficient for eigenvalue buckling. For SHIFT,
specify the point (load factor) about which eigenvalues are calculated. The shift
point is helpful when numerical problems are encountered (due to negative
eigenvalues, for example). Defaults to 0.0.
2.
• •
4.
Specify load step options. The only load step options valid for eigenvalue
buckling are output controls and expansion pass options. Command(s):
OUTPR,NSOL,ALL GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> Solu
Printout You can make the expansion pass a part of the eigenvalue buckling
solution or perform it as a separate step. In this document, we treat the
expansion pass as a separate step. See Section 7.5.4: Expand the Solution for
details.
5.
Save a backup copy of the database to a named file. Command(s): SAVE

7–5
Chapter 7: Buckling Analysis GUI: Utility Menu> File> Save As 6. Start solution
calculations. Command(s): SOLVE GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS The
output from the solution mainly consists of the eigenvalues, which are printed as
part of the printed output (Jobname.OUT). The eigenvalues represent the buckling
load factors; if unit loads were applied in the static analysis, they are the
buckling loads. No buckling mode shapes are written to the database or the results
file, so you cannot postprocess the results yet. To do this, you need to expand
the solution (explained next). Sometimes you may see both positive and negative
eigenvalues calculated. Negative eigenvalues indicate that buckling occurs when
the loads are applied in an opposite sense. 7. Exit the SOLUTION processor.
Command(s): FINISH GUI: Close the Solution menu.
7.5.4. Expand the Solution

If you want to review the buckled mode shape(s), you must expand the solution
regardless of which eigenvalue extraction method is used. In the case of the
subspace iteration method, which uses full system matrices, you may think of
"expansion" to simply mean writing buckled mode shapes to the results file.

• • The mode shape file (Jobname.MODE) from the eigenvalue buckling solution must
be available. The database must contain the same model for which the solution was
calculated.
7.5.4.2. Expanding the Solution

The procedure to expand the mode shapes is explained below. 1. Reenter SOLUTION.
Command(s): /SOLU GUI: Main Menu> Solution Note — You must explicitly leave
SOLUTION (using the FINISH command) and reenter (/SOLU) before performing the
expansion pass. 2. Specify that this is an expansion pass. Command(s): EXPASS,ON
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> ExpansionPass Specify expansion pass
options. Command(s): MXPAND, NMODE, , , Elcalc GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step
Opts> ExpansionPass> Expand Modes Regardless of whether you use the command or GUI
method, the following options are required for the expansion pass: • For NMODE,
specify the number of modes to expand. This argument defaults to the total number
of modes that were extracted.
3.
7–6
Section 7.5: Procedure for Eigenvalue Buckling Analysis • For Elcalc, indicate
whether you want ANSYS to calculate stresses. "Stresses" in an eigenvalue analysis
do not represent actual stresses, but give you an idea of the relative stress or
force distribution for each mode. By default, no stresses are calculated.
4.
Specify load step options. The only options valid in a buckling expansion pass are
the following output controls: • Printed Output Use this option to include any
results data on the output file (Jobname.OUT). Command(s): OUTPR GUI: Main Menu>
Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrl> Solu Printout • Database and Results File
Output This option controls the data on the results file (Jobname.RST).
Command(s): OUTRES GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrl>
DB/Results File Note — The FREQ field on OUTPR and OUTRES can only be ALL or NONE,
that is, the data can be requested for all modes or no modes - you cannot write
information for every other mode, for instance.
5.
Start expansion pass calculations. The output consists of expanded mode shapes
and, if requested, relative stress distributions for each mode. Command(s): SOLVE
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS
6.
Leave the SOLUTION processor. You can now review results in the postprocessor.
Command(s): FINISH GUI: Close the Solution menu. Note — The expansion pass has
been presented here as a separate step. You can make it part of the eigenvalue
buckling solution by including the MXPAND command (Main Menu> Solution> Load Step
Opts> ExpansionPass> Expand Modes) as one of the analysis options.

Results from a buckling expansion pass are written to the structural results file,
Jobname.RST. They consist of buckling load factors, buckling mode shapes, and
relative stress distributions. You can review them in POST1, the general
postprocessor. Note — To review results in POST1, the database must contain the
same model for which the buckling solution was calculated (issue RESUME if
necessary). Also, the results file (Jobname.RST) from the expansion pass must be
available. 1. List all buckling load factors. Command(s): SET,LIST GUI: Main Menu>
General Postproc> Results Summary
7–7
Chapter 7: Buckling Analysis 2. Read in data for the desired mode to display
buckling mode shapes. (Each mode is stored on the results file as a separate
substep.) Command(s): SET,SBSTEP GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results>
load step Display the mode shape. Command(s): PLDISP GUI: Main Menu> General
Postproc> Plot Results> Deformed Shape Contour the relative stress distributions.
Contour Plot> Nodal Solution Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour
Plot> Element Solution
3.
4.
See the ANSYS Commands Reference for a discussion of the ANTYPE, PSTRES, D, F, SF,
BUCOPT, EXPASS, MXPAND, OUTRES, SET, PLDISP, and PLNSOL commands.
7.6. Sample Buckling Analysis (GUI Method)

In this sample problem, you will analyze the buckling of a bar with hinged ends.

Determine the critical buckling load of an axially loaded long slender bar of
length with hinged ends. The bar has a cross-sectional height h, and area A. Only
the upper half of the bar is modeled because of symmetry. The boundary conditions
become free-fixed for the half-symmetry model. The moment of inertia of the bar is
calculated as I = Ah2/12 = 0.0052083 in4.

The following material properties are used for this problem: E = 30 x 106 psi The
following geometric properties are used for this problem: = 200 in A = 0.25 in2 h
= 0.5 in Loading for this problem is: F = 1 lb.
7–8
Section 7.6: Sample Buckling Analysis (GUI Method)

Figure 7.3 Bar with Hinged Ends

After you enter the ANSYS program, follow these steps to set the title. 1. 2.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> File> Change Title. Enter the text "Buckling of a
Bar with Hinged Ends" and click on OK.
7.6.3.2. Define the Element Type

In this step, you define BEAM3 as the element type. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Choose menu
path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Element Type> Add/Edit/Delete. The Element Types
dialog box appears. Click on Add. The Library of Element Types dialog box appears.
In the scroll box on the left, click on "Structural Beam" to select it. In the
scroll box on the right, click on "2D elastic 3" to select it. Click on OK, and
then click on Close in the Element Types dialog box.
7–9
7.6.3.3. Define the Real Constants and Material Properties

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Real
Constants> Add/Edit/Delete. The Real Constants dialog box appears. Click on Add.
The Element Type for Real Constants dialog box appears. Click on OK. The Real
Constants for BEAM3 dialog box appears. Enter .25 for area, 52083e-7 for IZZ, and
.5 for height. Click on OK. Click on Close in the Real Constants dialog box.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Material Models. The
Define Material Model Behavior dialog box appears. In the Material Models
Available window, double-click on the following options: Structural, Linear,
Elastic, Isotropic. A dialog box appears. Enter 30e6 for EX (Young's modulus), and
click on OK. Material Model Number 1 appears in the Material Models Defined window
on the left.
10. Choose menu path Material> Exit to remove the Define Material Model Behavior
dialog box.
7.6.3.4. Define Nodes and Elements

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create>
Nodes> In Active CS. The Create Nodes in Active Coordinate System dialog box
appears. Enter 1 for node number. Click on Apply. Node location defaults to 0,0,0.
Enter 11 for node number. Enter 0,100,0 for the X, Y, Z coordinates. Click on OK.
The two nodes appear in the ANSYS Graphics window. Note — The triad, by default,
hides the node number for node 1. To turn the triad off, choose menu path Utility
Menu> PlotCtrls> Window Controls> Window Options and select the "Not Shown" option
for Location of triad. Then click OK to close the dialog box. 7. 8. 9. Choose menu
path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Nodes> Fill between Nds. The Fill
between Nds picking menu appears. Click on node 1, then 11, and click on OK. The
Create Nodes Between 2 Nodes dialog box appears. Click on OK to accept the
settings (fill between nodes 1 and 11, and number of nodes to fill 9).
10. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Elements> Auto
Numbered> Thru Nodes. The Elements from Nodes picking menu appears. 11. Click on
nodes 1 and 2, then click on OK. 12. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor>
Modeling> Copy> Elements> Auto Numbered. The Copy Elems Auto-Num picking menu
appears. 13. Click on Pick All. The Copy Elements (Automatically-Numbered) dialog
box appears. 14. Enter 10 for total number of copies and enter 1 for node number
increment. 15. Click on OK. The remaining elements appear in the ANSYS Graphics
window. 7–10
Section 7.6: Sample Buckling Analysis (GUI Method)
7.6.3.5. Define the Boundary Conditions

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu>
Analysis Type> New Analysis. The New Analysis dialog box appears. Click OK to
accept the default of "Static." Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis
Type> Analysis Options. The Static or SteadyState Analysis dialog box appears. In
the scroll box for stress stiffness or prestress, scroll to "Prestress ON" to
select it. Click on OK. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply>
Structural> Displacement> On Nodes. The Apply U,ROT on Nodes picking menu appears.
Click on node 1 in the ANSYS Graphics window, then click on OK in the picking
menu. The Apply U,ROT on Nodes dialog box appears. Click on "All DOF" to select
it, and click on OK. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply>
Structural> Force/Moment> On Nodes. The Apply F/M on Nodes picking menu appears.
10. Click on node 11, then click OK. The Apply F/M on Nodes dialog box appears.
11. In the scroll box for Direction of force/mom, scroll to "FY" to select it. 12.
Enter -1 for the force/moment value, and click on OK. The force symbol appears in
the ANSYS Graphics window.
7.6.3.6. Solve the Static Analysis

1. 2. 3. 4. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS. Carefully
review the information in the status window, and click on Close. Click on OK in
the Solve Current Load Step dialog box to begin the solution. Click on Close in
the Information window when the solution is finished.
7.6.3.7. Solve the Buckling Analysis

1. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis. Note — Click
on Close in the Warning window if the following warning appears: Changing the
analysis type is only valid within the first load step. Pressing OK will cause you
to exit and reenter SOLUTION. This will reset the load step count to 1. 2. 3. 4.
5. 6. 7. 8. In the New Analysis dialog box, click the "Eigen Buckling" option on,
then click on OK. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis
Options. The Eigenvalue Buckling Options dialog box appears. Click on the "Block
Lanczos" option, and enter 1 for number of modes to extract. Click on OK. Choose
menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> ExpansionPass> Expand Modes. Enter
1 for number of modes to expand, and click on OK. Choose menu path Main Menu>
Solution> Solve> Current LS.
7–11
Chapter 7: Buckling Analysis 9. Carefully review the information in the status
window, and click on Close.
10. Click on OK in the Solve Current Load Step dialog box to begin the solution.
11. Click on Close in the Information window when the solution is finished.
7.6.3.8. Review the Results

1. 2. 3. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> First Set.
Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Deformed Shape. The
Plot Deformed Shape dialog box appears. Click the "Def + undeformed" option on.
Click on OK. The deformed and undeformed shapes appear in the ANSYS graphics
window.
7.6.3.9. Exit ANSYS

1. 2. In the ANSYS Toolbar, click on Quit. Choose the save option you want and
click on OK.
7.7. Sample Buckling Analysis (Command or Batch Method)

You can perform the example buckling analysis of a bar with hinged ends using the
ANSYS commands shown below instead of GUI choices. Items prefaced by an
/PREP7 /TITLE, BUCKLING OF A BAR WITH HINGED SOLVES ET,1,BEAM3 ! Beam element
R,1,.25,52083E-7,.5 ! Area,IZZ, height MP,EX,1,30E6 ! Define material properties
N,1 N,11,,100 FILL E,1,2 EGEN,10,1,1 FINISH /SOLU ANTYPE,STATIC PSTRES,ON D,1,ALL
F,11,FY,-1 SOLVE FINISH /SOLU ANTYPE,BUCKLE BUCOPT,LANB,1 MXPAND,1 SOLVE FINISH
/POST1 SET,FIRST PLDISP,1 FINISH
! ! ! !
Static analysis Calculate prestress effects Fix symmetry ends Unit load at free
end
! Buckling analysis ! Use Block Lanczos solution method, extract 1 mode ! Expand 1
mode shape

additional buckling analyses. The ANSYS Verification Manual consists of test case
Verification 7–12
Section 7.8: Where to Find Other Examples Manual does not present them as step-by-
step examples with lengthy data input instructions and printouts. However, most
ANSYS users who have at least limited finite element experience should be able to
fill in the missing details by reviewing each test case's finite element model and
input data with accompanying comments. The ANSYS Verification Manual contains a
variety of buckling analysis test cases: VM17 - Snap-Through Buckling of a Hinged
Shell VM127 - Buckling of a Bar with Hinged Ends (Line Elements) VM128 - Buckling
of a Bar with Hinged Ends (Area Elements)
7–13
7–14
Chapter 8: Nonlinear Structural Analysis
8.1. What is Structural Nonlinearity?
You encounter structural nonlinearities on a routine basis. For instance, whenever
you staple two pieces of paper together, the metal staples are permanently bent
into a different shape. (See Figure 8.1: “Common Examples of Nonlinear Structural
Behavior” (a).) If you heavily load a wooden shelf, it will sag more and more as
time passes. (See Figure (b).) As weight is added to a car or truck, the contact
surfaces between its pneumatic tires and the underlying pavement change in
response to the added load. (See Figure (c).) If you were to plot the load-
deflection curve for each of these examples, you would discover that they all
exhibit the fundamental characteristic of nonlinear structural behavior - a
changing structural stiffness.
Figure 8.1 Common Examples of Nonlinear Structural Behavior
8.1.1. Causes of Nonlinear Behavior

Nonlinear structural behavior arises from a number of causes, which can be grouped
into these principal categories: • • • Changing status Geometric nonlinearities
Material nonlinearities
8.1.1.1. Changing Status (Including Contact)

Many common structural features exhibit nonlinear behavior that is status-
dependent. For example, a tensiononly cable is either slack or taut; a roller
support is either in contact or not in contact. Status changes might be directly
related to load (as in the case of the cable), or they might be determined by some
external cause. Situations in which contact occurs are common to many different
nonlinear applications. Contact forms a distinctive and important subset to the
category of changing-status nonlinearities. See the ANSYS Contact Technology Guide
for detailed information on performing contact analyses using ANSYS.
8.1.1.2. Geometric Nonlinearities

If a structure experiences large deformations, its changing geometric
configuration can cause the structure to respond nonlinearly. An example would be
the fishing rod shown in Figure 8.2: “A Fishing Rod Demonstrates Geometric
Nonlinearity”. Geometric nonlinearity is characterized by "large" displacements
and/or rotations.
Figure 8.2 A Fishing Rod Demonstrates Geometric Nonlinearity
8.1.1.3. Material Nonlinearities

Nonlinear stress-strain relationships are a common cause of nonlinear structural
behavior. Many factors can influence a material's stress-strain properties,
including load history (as in elastoplastic response), environmental conditions
(such as temperature), and the amount of time that a load is applied (as in creep
response).
8.1.2. Basic Information About Nonlinear Analyses

ANSYS employs the "Newton-Raphson" approach to solve nonlinear problems. In this
approach, the load is subdivided into a series of load increments. The load
increments can be applied over several load steps. Figure 8.3: “Newton-Raphson
Approach” illustrates the use of Newton-Raphson equilibrium iterations in a single
DOF nonlinear analysis.
8–2
Section 8.1: What is Structural Nonlinearity?
Figure 8.3 Newton-Raphson Approach
Before each solution, the Newton-Raphson method evaluates the out-of-balance load
vector, which is the difference between the restoring forces (the loads
corresponding to the element stresses) and the applied loads. The program then
performs a linear solution, using the out-of-balance loads, and checks for
convergence. If convergence criteria are not satisfied, the out-of-balance load
vector is reevaluated, the stiffness matrix is updated, and a new solution is
obtained. This iterative procedure continues until the problem converges. A number
of convergence-enhancement and recovery features, such as line search, automatic
load stepping, and bisection, can be activated to help the problem to converge. If
convergence cannot be achieved, then the program attempts to solve with a smaller
load increment. In some nonlinear static analyses, if you use the Newton-Raphson
method alone, the tangent stiffness matrix may become singular (or non-unique),
causing severe convergence difficulties. Such occurrences include nonlinear
buckling analyses in which the structure either collapses completely or "snaps
through" to another stable configuration. For such situations, you can activate an
alternative iteration scheme, the arc-length method, to help avoid bifurcation
points and track unloading. The arc-length method causes the Newton-Raphson
equilibrium iterations to converge along an arc, thereby often preventing
divergence, even when the slope of the load vs. deflection curve becomes zero or
negative. This iteration method is represented schematically in Figure 8.4:
“Traditional Newton-Raphson Method vs. ArcLength Method”.
8–3
Figure 8.4 Traditional Newton-Raphson Method vs. Arc-Length Method
To summarize, a nonlinear analysis is organized into three levels of operation: •

The "top" level consists of the load steps that you define explicitly over a
"time" span (see the discussion of "time" in Chapter 2, “Loading” in the ANSYS
Basic Analysis Guide). Loads are assumed to vary linearly within load steps (for
static analyses). Within each load step, you can direct the program to perform
several solutions (substeps or time steps) to apply the load gradually. At each
substep, the program will perform a number of equilibrium iterations to obtain a
converged solution.
• •
Figure 8.5: “Load Steps, Substeps, and Time” illustrates a typical load history
for a nonlinear analysis. Also see the discussion of load steps, substeps, and
equilibrium iterations in Chapter 2, “Loading” in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.
Figure 8.5 Load Steps, Substeps, and Time
8–4
Section 8.1: What is Structural Nonlinearity? The ANSYS program gives you a number
of choices when you designate convergence criteria: you can base convergence
checking on forces, moments, displacements, or rotations, or on any combination of
these items. Additionally, each item can have a different convergence tolerance
value. For multiple-degree-of-freedom problems, you also have a choice of
convergence norms. You should almost always employ a force-based (and, when
applicable, moment-based) convergence tolerance. Displacement-based (and, when
applicable, rotation-based) convergence checking can be added, if desired, but
should usually not be used alone.
8.1.2.1. Conservative versus Nonconservative Behavior; Path Dependency

If all energy put into a system by external loads is recovered when the loads are
removed, the system is said to be conservative. If energy is dissipated by the
system (such as by plastic deformation or sliding friction), the system is said to
be nonconservative. An example of a nonconservative system is shown in Figure 8.6:
“Nonconservative (Path-Dependent) Behavior”. An analysis of a conservative system
is path independent: loads can usually be applied in any order and in any number
of increments without affecting the end results. Conversely, an analysis of a
nonconservative system is path dependent: the actual load-response history of the
system must be followed closely to obtain accurate results. An analysis can also
be path dependent if more than one solution could be valid for a given load level
(as in a snap-through analysis). Path dependent problems usually require that
loads be applied slowly (that is, using many substeps) to the final load value.
Figure 8.6 Nonconservative (Path-Dependent) Behavior
8.1.2.2. Substeps
When using multiple substeps, you need to achieve a balance between accuracy and
economy: more substeps (that is, small time step sizes) usually result in better
accuracy, but at a cost of increased run times. ANSYS provides automatic time
stepping that is designed for this purpose. Automatic time stepping adjusts the
time step size as needed, gaining a better balance between accuracy and economy.
Automatic time stepping activates the ANSYS program's bisection feature. Bisection
provides a means of automatically recovering from a convergence failure. This
feature will cut a time step size in half whenever equilibrium iterations fail to
converge and automatically restart from the last converged
8–5
Chapter 8: Nonlinear Structural Analysis substep. If the halved time step again
fails to converge, bisection will again cut the time step size and restart,
continuing the process until convergence is achieved or until the minimum time
step size (specified by you) is reached.
8.1.2.3. Load Direction in a Large-Deflection Analysis

Consider what happens to loads when your structure experiences large deflections.
In many instances, the loads applied to your system maintain constant direction no
matter how the structure deflects. In other cases, forces will change direction,
"following" the elements as they undergo large rotations. The ANSYS program can
model both situations, depending on the type of load applied. Accelerations and
concentrated forces maintain their original orientation, regardless of the element
orientation. Pressure loads always act normal to the deflected element surface,
and can be used to model "following" forces. Figure 8.7: “Load Directions Before
and After Deflection” illustrates constant-direction and following forces. Note —
Nodal coordinate system orientations are not updated in a large deflection
analysis. Calculated displacements are therefore output in the original
directions.
Figure 8.7 Load Directions Before and After Deflection
8.1.2.4. Nonlinear Transient Analyses

The procedure for analyzing nonlinear transient behavior is similar to that used
for nonlinear static behavior: you apply the load in incremental steps, and the
program performs equilibrium iterations at each step. The main difference between
the static and transient procedures is that time-integration effects can be
activated in the transient analysis. Thus, "time" always represents actual
chronology in a transient analysis. The automatic time stepping and bisection
feature is also applicable for transient analyses.
8.2. Using Geometric Nonlinearities

Small deflection and small strain analyses assume that displacements are small
enough that the resulting stiffness changes are insignificant.
8–6
Section 8.2: Using Geometric Nonlinearities In contrast, large strain analyses
account for the stiffness changes that result from changes in an element's shape
and orientation. By issuing NLGEOM,ON (GUI path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis
Type> Sol'n Control ( : Basic Tab) or Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu>
Analysis Type> Analysis Options), you activate large strain effects in those
element types that support this feature. The large strain feature is available in
most of the solid elements (including all of the large strain and hyperelastic
elements), as well as in most of the shell and beam elements. Large strain effects
are not available in the ANSYS Professional program. However, large deflection
effects (NLGEOM command) are supported for shell and beam elements in ANSYS
Professional, if indicated as such in the ANSYS Elements Reference. The large
strain procedure places no theoretical limit on the total rotation or strain
experienced by an element. (Certain ANSYS element types will be subject to
practical limitations on total strain - see below.) However, the procedure
requires that strain increments must be restricted to maintain accuracy. Thus, the
total load should be broken into smaller steps.
8.2.1. Stress-Strain
In large strain solutions, all stress-strain input and results will be in terms of
true stress and true (or logarithmic) strain. (In one dimension, true strain would
be expressed as ε = ln ( / 0). For small-strain regions of response, true strain
and engineering strain are essentially identical.) To convert strain from small
(engineering) strain to logarithmic strain, use εln = ln (1 + εeng). To convert
from engineering stress to true stress, use σtrue = σeng (1 + εeng). (This stress
conversion is valid only for incompressible plasticity stress-strain data.)
8.2.1.1. Large Deflections with Small Strain

This feature is available in all beam and most shell elements, as well as in a
number of the nonlinear elements. Issue NLGEOM,ON (Main Menu> Solution> Analysis
Type> Sol'n Control ( : Basic Tab) or Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu>
Analysis Type> Analysis Options) to activate large deflection effects for those
elements that are designed for small strain analysis types that support this
feature.
8.2.2. Stress Stiffening

The out-of-plane stiffness of a structure can be significantly affected by the
state of in-plane stress in that structure. This coupling between in-plane stress
and transverse stiffness, known as stress stiffening, is most pronounced in thin,
highly stressed structures, such as cables or membranes. A drumhead, which gains
lateral stiffness as it is tightened, would be a common example of a stress-
stiffened structure. Even though stress stiffening theory assumes that an
element's rotations and strains are small, in some structural systems (such as in
Figure 8.8: “Stress-Stiffened Beams” (a)), the stiffening stress is only
obtainable by performing a large deflection analysis. In other systems (such as in
Figure 8.8: “Stress-Stiffened Beams” (b)), the stiffening stress is obtainable
using small deflection, or linear, theory.
8–7
Figure 8.8 Stress-Stiffened Beams
To use stress stiffening in the second category of systems, you must issue
PSTRES,ON (GUI path Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis Type> Analysis
Options) in your first load step. Large strain and large deflection procedures
include initial stress effects as a subset of their theory. For most elements,
initial stiffness effects are automatically included when large deformation
effects are activated [NLGEOM,ON] (GUI path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type>
Sol'n Control ( : Basic Tab) or Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis
Type> Analysis Options).
8.2.3. Spin Softening

Spin softening adjusts (softens) the stiffness matrix of a rotating body for
dynamic mass effects. The adjustment approximates the effects of geometry changes
due to large deflection circumferential motion in a small deflection analysis. It
is usually used in conjunction with prestressing [PSTRES] (GUI path Main Menu>
Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis Type> Analysis Options), which is caused by
centrifugal force in the rotating body. It should not be used with the other
deformation nonlinearities, large deflection, or large strain. Spin softening is
activated by the KSPIN field on the OMEGA and CMOMEGA commands (GUI path Main
Menu> Preprocessor> Loads> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Inertiav Angular
Velocity).
8.3. Modeling Material Nonlinearities

A number of material-related factors can cause your structure's stiffness to
change during the course of an analysis. Nonlinear stress-strain relationships of
plastic, multilinear elastic, and hyperelastic materials will cause a structure's
stiffness to change at different load levels (and, typically, at different
temperatures). Creep, viscoplasticity, and viscoelasticity will give rise to
nonlinearities that can be time-, rate-, temperature-, and stress-related.
Swelling will induce strains that can be a function of temperature, time, neutron
flux level (or some analogous quantity), and stress. Any of these kinds of
material properties can be incorporated into an ANSYS analysis if you use
appropriate element types. Nonlinear constitutive models (TB command, except for
TB,FAIL) are not applicable for the ANSYS Professional program.
8.3.1. Nonlinear Materials

If a material displays nonlinear or rate-dependent stress-strain behavior, then
you must use the TB family of commands [TB, TBTEMP, TBDATA, TBPT, TBCOPY, TBLIST,
TBPLOT, TBDELE] (GUI path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Material
Models> Structural> Nonlinear) to define the nonlinear material property 8–8
Section 8.3: Modeling Material Nonlinearities relationships in terms of a data
table. The exact form of these commands varies depending on the type of nonlinear
material behavior being defined. The different material behavior options are
described briefly below. See Data Tables - Implicit Analysis in the ANSYS Elements
Reference for specific details for each material behavior type.
8.3.1.1. Plasticity
Most common engineering materials exhibit a linear stress-strain relationship up
to a stress level known as the proportional limit. Beyond this limit, the stress-
strain relationship will become nonlinear, but will not necessarily become
inelastic. Plastic behavior, characterized by nonrecoverable strain, begins when
stresses exceed the material's yield point. Because there is usually little
difference between the yield point and the proportional limit, the ANSYS program
assumes that these two points are coincident in plasticity analyses (see Figure
8.9: “Elastoplastic Stress-Strain Curve”). Plasticity is a nonconservative, path-
dependent phenomenon. In other words, the sequence in which loads are applied and
in which plastic responses occur affects the final solution results. If you
anticipate plastic response in your analysis, you should apply loads as a series
of small incremental load steps or time steps, so that your model will follow the
load-response path as closely as possible. The maximum plastic strain is printed
with the substep summary information in your output (Jobname.OUT).
Figure 8.9 Elastoplastic Stress-Strain Curve
The automatic time stepping feature [AUTOTS] (GUI path Main Menu> Solution>
Analysis Type> Sol'n Control ( : Basic Tab) or Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged
Menu> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc>Time and Substps) will respond to plasticity
after the fact, by reducing the load step size after a load step in which a large
number of equilibrium iterations was performed or in which a plastic strain
increment greater than 15% was encountered. If too large a step was taken, the
program will bisect and resolve using a smaller step size. Other kinds of
nonlinear behavior might also occur along with plasticity. In particular, large
deflection and large strain geometric nonlinearities will often be associated with
plastic material response. If you expect large deformations in your structure, you
must activate these effects in your analysis with the NLGEOM command (GUI path
Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Sol'n Control ( : Basic Tab) or Main Menu>
Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis Type> Analysis Options). For large strain
analyses, material stress-strain properties must be input in terms of true stress
and logarithmic strain.
8–9
8.3.1.1.1. Plastic Material Options

Several options are available for describing plasticity behavior. You may
incorporate other options into the program by using User Programmable Features
(see the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features). The Bilinear Kinematic
Hardening (BKIN) option assumes the total stress range is equal to twice the yield
stress, so that the Bauschinger effect is included (see Figure 8.11: “Bauschinger
Effect”). This option is recommended for general small-strain use for materials
that obey von Mises yield criteria (which includes most metals). It is not
recommended for large-strain applications. You can combine the BKIN option with
creep and Hill anisotropy options to simulate more complex material behaviors. See
Material Model Combinations in the ANSYS Elements Reference for the combination
possibilities. Also, see Section 8.3.2: Material Model Combinations in this
chapter for sample input listings of material combinations. Stress-strain-
temperature data are demonstrated in the following example. Figure 8.10:
“Kinematic Hardening”(a) illustrates a typical display [TBPLOT] of bilinear
kinematic hardening properties.
MPTEMP,1,0,500 MP,EX,1,12E6,-8E3 TB,BKIN,1,2 TBTEMP,0.0 TBDATA,1,44E3,1.2E6
TBTEMP,500 TBDATA,1,29.33E3,0.8E6 TBLIST,BKIN,1 /XRANGE,0,0.01 TBPLOT,BKIN,1 ! ! !
! ! ! ! ! ! ! Define temperatures for Young's modulus C0 and C1 terms for Young's
modulus Activate a data table Temperature = 0.0 Yield = 44,000; Tangent modulus =
1.2E6 Temperature = 500 Yield = 29,330; Tangent modulus = 0.8E6 List the data
table X-axis of TBPLOT to extend from varepsilon=0 to 0.01 Display the data table
See the MPTEMP, MP, TB, TBTEMP, TBDATA, TBLIST, /XRANGE, and TBPLOT command
descriptions for more information.
Figure 8.10 Kinematic Hardening
(a) Bilinear kinematic hardening, (b) Multilinear kinematic hardening
8–10
Section 8.3: Modeling Material Nonlinearities
Figure 8.11 Bauschinger Effect
The Multilinear Kinematic Hardening (KINH and MKIN) options use the Besseling
model, also called the sublayer or overlay model, so that the Bauschinger effect
is included. KINH is preferred for use over MKIN because it uses Rice's model
where the total plastic strains remain constant by scaling the sublayers. KINH
allows you to define more stress-strain curves (40 vs. 5), and more points per
curve (20 vs. 5). Also, when KINH is used with LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182,
PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190, BEAM188, BEAM189, SHELL208, and
SHELL209, you can use TBOPT = 4 (or PLASTIC) to define the stress vs. plastic
strain curve. For either option, if you define more than one stress-strain curve
for temperature dependent properties, then each curve should contain the same
number of points. The assumption is that the corresponding points on the different
stressstrain curves represent the temperature dependent yield behavior of a
particular sublayer. These options are not recommended for large-strain analyses.
You can combine either of these options with the Hill anisotropy option to
simulate more complex material behaviors. See Material Model Combinations in the
ANSYS Elements Reference for the combination possibilities. Also, see Section
8.3.2: Material Model Combinations in this chapter for sample input listings of
material combinations. Figure 8.10: “Kinematic Hardening”(b) illustrates typical
stressstrain curves for the MKIN option. A typical stress-strain temperature data
input using KINH is demonstrated by this example.
TB,KINH,1,2,3 TBTEMP,20.0 TBPT,,0.001,1.0 TBPT,,0.1012,1.2 TBPT,,0.2013,1.3
TBTEMP,40.0 TBPT,,0.008,0.9 TBPT,,0.09088,1.0 TBPT,,0.12926,1.05 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Activate a data table Temperature = 20.0 Strain = 0.001, Stress = 1.0 Strain =
0.1012, Stress = 1.2 Strain = 0.2013, Stress = 1.3 Temperature = 40.0 Strain =
0.008, Stress = 0.9 Strain = 0.09088, Stress = 1.0 Strain = 0.12926, Stress = 1.05
In this example, the third point in the two stress-strain curves defines the
temperature-dependent yield behavior of the third sublayer. A typical stress-
plastic strain temperature data input using KINH is demonstrated by this example.
TB,KINH,1,2,3,PLASTIC TBTEMP,20.0 TBPT,,0.000,1.0 TBPT,,0.1012,1.2
TBPT,,0.2013,1.3 TBTEMP,40.0 TBPT,,0.008,0.9 TBPT,,0.09088,1.0
TBPT,,0.12926,1.05 ! Activate a data table ! Temperature = 20.0 ! Plastic Strain =
0.0000, ! Plastic Strain = 0.1000, ! Plastic Strain = 0.2000, ! Temperature = 40.0
! Plastic Strain = 0.0000, ! Plastic Strain = 0.0900, ! Plastic Strain = 0.1290,
Stress = 1.0 Stress = 1.2 Stress = 1.3 Stress = 0.9 Stress = 1.0 Stress = 1.05
In this example, the stress - strain behavior is the same as the previous sample,
except now the strain value is the plastic strain. The plastic strain can be
converted from total strain as follows:
8–11
Chapter 8: Nonlinear Structural Analysis Plastic Stain = (total strain -
stress)/Young's Modulus. A typical stress-strain temperature data input using MKIN
is demonstrated by this example.
MPTEMP,1,0,500 ! Define temperature-dependent EX, MP,EX,1,12E6,-8E3 ! as in BKIN
example TB,MKIN,1,2 ! Activate a data table TBTEMP,,STRAIN ! Next TBDATA values
are strains TBDATA,1,3.67E-3,5E-3,7E-3,10E-3,15E-3 ! Strains for all temps
TBTEMP,0.0 ! Temperature = 0.0 TBDATA,1,44E3,50E3,55E3,60E3,65E3 ! Stresses at
temperature = 0.0 TBTEMP,500 ! Temperature = 500
TBDATA,1,29.33E3,37E3,40.3E3,43.7E3,47E3 ! Stresses at temperature = 500
/XRANGE,0,0.02 TBPLOT,MKIN,1
Please see the MPTEMP, MP, TB, TBPT, TBTEMP, TBDATA, /XRANGE, and TBPLOT command
descriptions for more information. The Nonlinear Kinematic Hardening (CHABOCHE)
option uses the Chaboche model, which is a multi-component nonlinear kinematic
hardening model that allows you to superpose several kinematic models. See the
ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for details. Like the BKIN and MKIN options, you can
use the CHABOCHE option to simulate monotonic hardening and the Bauschinger
effect. This option also allows you to simulate the ratcheting and shakedown
effect of materials. By combining the CHABOCHE option with isotropic hardening
model options BISO, MISO, and NLISO, you have the further capability of simulating
cyclic hardening or softening. You can also combine this option with the Hill
anisotropy option to simulate more complex material behaviors. See Material Model
Combinations in the ANSYS Elements Reference for the combination possibilities.
Also, see Section 8.3.2: Material Model Combinations in this chapter for sample
input listings of material combinations. The model has 1 + 2 x n constants, where
n is the number of kinematic models, and is defined by NPTS in the TB command. See
the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for details. You define the material constants
using the TBTEMP and TBDATA commands. This model is suitable for large strain
analysis. The following example is a typical data table with no temperature
dependency and one kinematic model:
TB,CHABOCHE,1 TBDATA,1,C1,C2,C3 ! Activate CHABOCHE data table ! Values for
constants C1, C2, and C3
The following example illustrates a data table of temperature dependent constants

with two kinematic models at two temperature points:
TB,CHABOCHE,1,2,2 TBTEMP,100 TBDATA,1,C11,C12,C13,C14,C15 TBTEMP,200
TBDATA,1,C21,C22,C23,C24,C25 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Activate CHABOCHE data table Define
first temperature Values for constants C11, C12, C13, C14, and C15 at first
temperature Define second temperature Values for constants C21, C22, C23, C24, and
C25 at second temperature
Please see the TB, TBTEMP, and TBDATA command descriptions for more information.
The Bilinear Isotropic Hardening (BISO) option uses the von Mises yield criteria
coupled with an isotropic work hardening assumption. This option is often
preferred for large strain analyses. You can combine BISO with Chaboche, creep,
viscoplastic, and Hill anisotropy options to simulate more complex material
behaviors. See Material Model Combinations in the ANSYS Elements Reference for the
combination possibilities. Also, see Section 8.3.2: Material Model Combinations in
this chapter for sample input listings of material combinations. The Multilinear
Isotropic Hardening (MISO) option is like the bilinear isotropic hardening option,
except that a multilinear curve is used instead of a bilinear curve. This option
is not recommended for cyclic or highly nonproportional load histories in small-
strain analyses. It is, however, recommended for large strain analyses. The MISO
option can contain up to 20 different temperature curves, with up to 100 different
stress-strain points allowed 8–12
Section 8.3: Modeling Material Nonlinearities per curve. Strain points can differ
from curve to curve. You can combine this option with nonlinear kinematic
hardening (CHABOCHE) for simulating cyclic hardening or softening. You can also
combine the MISO option with creep, viscoplastic, and Hill anisotropy options to
simulate more complex material behaviors. See Material Model Combinations in the
ANSYS Elements Reference for the combination possibilities. Also, see Section
8.3.2: Material Model Combinations in this chapter for sample input listings of
material combinations. The stress-straintemperature curves from the MKIN example
would be input for a multilinear isotropic hardening material as follows:
/prep7 MPTEMP,1,0,500 ! Define temperature-dependent EX,
MPDATA,EX,1,,14.665E6,12.423e6 MPDATA,PRXY,1,,0.3 TB,MISO,1,2,5 TBTEMP,0.0
TBPT,DEFI,2E-3,29.33E3 TBPT,DEFI,5E-3,50E3 TBPT,DEFI,7E-3,55E3 TBPT,DEFI,10E-
3,60E3 TBPT,DEFI,15E-3,65E3 TBTEMP,500 TBPT,DEFI,2.2E-3,27.33E3 TBPT,DEFI,5E-
3,37E3 TBPT,DEFI,7E-3,40.3E3 TBPT,DEFI,10E-3,43.7E3 TBPT,DEFI,15E-3,47E3
/XRANGE,0,0.02 TBPLOT,MISO,1 ! Activate a data table ! Temperature = 0.0 ! Strain,
stress at temperature = 0
! Temperature = 500 ! Strain, stress at temperature = 500
See the MPTEMP, MP, TB, TBTEMP, TBPT, /XRANGE, and TBPLOT command descriptions for
more information. The Nonlinear Isotropic Hardening (NLISO) option is based on the
Voce hardening law (see the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for details). The NLISO
option is a variation of BISO where an exponential saturation hardening term is
appended to the linear term (see Figure 8.12: “NLISO Stress-Strain Curve”).
8–13
Figure 8.12 NLISO Stress-Strain Curve
The advantage of this model is that the material behavior is defined as a

specified function which has four material constants that you define through the
TBDATA command. You can obtain the material constants by fitting material tension
stress-strain curves. Unlike MISO, there is no need to be concerned about how to
appropriately define the pairs of the material stress-strain points. However, this
model is only applicable to the tensile curve like the one shown in Figure 8.12:
“NLISO Stress-Strain Curve”. This option is suitable for large strain analyses.
You can combine NLISO with Chaboche, creep, viscoplastic, and Hill anisotropy
options to simulate more complex material behaviors. See Material Model
Combinations in the ANSYS Elements Reference for the combination possibilities.
Also, see Section 8.3.2: Material Model Combinations in this chapter for sample
input listings of material combinations. The following example illustrates a data
table of temperature dependent constants at two temperature points:
TB,NLISO,1 TBTEMP,100 TBDATA,1,C11,C12,C13,C14 TBTEMP,200 TBDATA,1,C21,C22,C23,C24
! ! ! ! ! ! ! Activate NLISO data table Define first temperature Values for
constants C11, C12, C13, C14 at first temperature Define second temperature Values
for constants C21, C22, C23, C24 at second temperature
Please see the TB, TBTEMP, and TBDATA command descriptions for more information.
The Anisotropic (ANISO) option allows for different bilinear stress-strain
behavior in the material x, y, and z directions as well as different behavior in
tension, compression, and shear. This option is applicable to metals that have
undergone some previous deformation (such as rolling). It is not recommended for
cyclic or highly nonproportional load histories since work hardening is assumed.
The yield stresses and slopes are not totally independent (see the ANSYS, Inc.
Theory Reference for details).
8–14
Section 8.3: Modeling Material Nonlinearities To define anisotropic material
plasticity, use MP commands (Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Other> Change
Mat Props) to define the elastic moduli (EX, EY, EZ, NUXY, NUYZ, and NUXZ). Then,
issue the TB command [TB,ANISO] followed by TBDATA commands to define the yield
points and tangent moduli. (See Nonlinear StressStrain Materials in the ANSYS
Elements Reference for more information.) The Hill Anisotropy (HILL) option, when
combined with other material options simulates plasticity, viscoplasticity, and
creep - all using the Hill potential. See Material Model Combinations in the ANSYS
Elements Reference for the combination possibilities. Also, see Section 8.3.2:
Material Model Combinations in this chapter for sample input listings of material
combinations. The Hill potential may only be used with the following elements:
PLANE42, SOLID45, PLANE82, SOLID92, SOLID95, LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182,
SHELL209. The Drucker-Prager (DP) option is applicable to granular (frictional)
material such as soils, rock, and concrete, and uses the outer cone approximation
to the Mohr-Coulomb law.
MP,EX,1,5000 MP,NUXY,1,0.27 TB,DP,1 TBDATA,1,2.9,32,0
! Cohesion = 2.9 (use consistent units), ! Angle of internal friction = 32

degrees, ! Dilatancy angle = 0 degrees
See the MP, TB, and TBDATA command descriptions for more information. The Cast
Iron (CAST, UNIAXIAL) option assumes a modified von Mises yield surface, which
consists of the von Mises cylinder in compression and a Rankine cube in tension.
It has different yield strengths, flows, and hardenings in tension and
compression. Elastic behavior is isotropic, and is the same in tension and
compression. The TB,CAST command is used to input the plastic Poisson's ration in
tension, which can be temperature dependent. Use the TB,UNIAXIAL command to enter
the yield and hardening in tension and compression. Note — Cast Iron is intended
for monotonic loading only and cannot be used with any other material model.
TB,CAST,1,,,ISOTROPIC TBDATA,1,0.04 TB,UNIAXIAL,1,1,5,TENSION TBTEMP,10
TBPT,,0.550E-03,0.813E+04 TBPT,,0.100E-02,0.131E+05 TBPT,,0.250E-02,0.241E+05
TBPT,,0.350E-02,0.288E+05 TBPT,,0.450E-02,0.322E+05 TB,UNIAXIAL,1,1,5,COMPRESSION
TBTEMP,10 TBPT,,0.203E-02,0.300E+05 TBPT,,0.500E-02,0.500E+05 TBPT,,0.800E-
02,0.581E+05 TBPT,,0.110E-01,0.656E+05 TBPT,,0.140E-01,0.700E+05
Figure 8.13: “Cast Iron Plasticity” illustrates the idealized response of gray
cast iron in tension and compression.
8–15
Figure 8.13 Cast Iron Plasticity

Compression
σc
σt
Tension ε
See the TB and TBPT command descriptions for more information.
8.3.1.2. Multilinear Elasticity

The Multilinear Elastic (MELAS) material behavior option describes a conservative
(path-independent) response in which unloading follows the same stress-strain path
as loading. Thus, relatively large load steps might be appropriate for models that
incorporate this type of material nonlinearity. Input format is similar to that
required for the multilinear isotropic hardening option, except that the TB
command now uses the label MELAS.
8.3.1.3. User Defined Material

The User Defined (USER) material option describes input parameters for defining a
material model based on either of two subroutines, which are ANSYS user-
programmable features (see the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features). The
choice of which subroutine to use is based on which element you are using. The
USER option works with the USERMAT subroutine in defining any material model
(except incompressible materials), when you use any of the following elements:
LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190,
BEAM188, BEAM189, SHELL208, and SHELL209. The USER option works with the USERPL
subroutine in defining plasticity or viscoplasticity material models, when you use
any of the following elements: LINK1, PLANE2, LINK8, PIPE20, BEAM23, BEAM24,
PLANE42, SHELL43, SOLID45, SHELL51, PIPE60, SOLID62, SOLID65, PLANE82, SHELL91,
SOLID92, SHELL93, SOLID95. To access the user material option, issue the TB,USER
command to define the material number, the number of temperatures, and the number
of data points. Then define the temperatures and material constants using the
TBTEMP and TBDATA commands. The following example illustrates defining a material
with two temperatures and four data points:
TB,USER,1,2,4 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Define material 1 as user material with 2
temperatures and 4 data points at each temperature point. First temperature. 4
material constants for first temperature. Second temperature.
TBTEMP,1.0 TBDATA,1,19e5,0.3,1e3,100, TBTEMP,2.0
8–16
TBDATA,1,21e5,0.3,2e3,100, ! 4 material constants for ! second temperature.
If you use state variables in the USERMAT subroutine, you must first define the
number of state variables using the TB,STATE command. You then use the TBDATA
command to initialize the value of the state variables, as shown in the following
example:
TB,STATE,1,,4, TBDATA,1,C1,C2,C3,C4, ! Define material 1, which ! has 4 state
variables. ! Initialize the 4 state variables.
You cannot use TB,STATE in the USERPL subroutine. See the TB, and TBDATA command
8.3.1.4. Hyperelasticity
A material is said to be hyperelastic if there exists an elastic potential
function (or strain energy density function), which is a scalar function of one of
the strain or deformation tensors, whose derivative with respect to a strain
component determines the corresponding stress component. Hyperelasticity can be
used to analyze rubber-like materials (elastomers) that undergo large strains and
displacements with small volume changes (nearly incompressible materials). Large
strain theory is required [NLGEOM,ON]. A representative hyperelastic structure (a
balloon seal) is shown in Figure 8.14: “Hyperelastic Structure”.
Figure 8.14 Hyperelastic Structure
There are two types of elements suitable for simulating hyperelastic materials:
the hyperelastic elements (HYPER56, HYPER58, HYPER74, HYPER158), and all of the
18x family of elements except the link and beam elements (SHELL181, PLANE182,
PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190, SHELL208, and SHELL209). For
further details on the use of hyperelastic elements, and on mixed formulation of
the 18x solid elements, see Mixed u-P Formulation Elements in the ANSYS Elements
Reference. The material response in ANSYS hyperelastic models is always assumed to
be isotropic and isothermal. Because of this assumption, the strain energy
potentials are expressed in terms of strain invariants. Unless indicated
otherwise, the hyperelastic materials are also assumed to be nearly or purely
incompressible. Material thermal expansion is also assumed to be isotropic. ANSYS
supports several options of strain energy potentials for the simulation of
incompressible or nearly incompressible hyperelastic materials. All options are
applicable to elements SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185,
8–17
Chapter 8: Nonlinear Structural Analysis SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190, SHELL208,
and SHELL209. Access these options through the TBOPT argument of TB,HYPER. One of
the options, the Mooney-Rivlin option, is also applicable to elements HYPER56,
HYPER58, HYPER74, HYPER158, and explicit dynamics elements PLANE162, SHELL163,
SOLID164, and SOLID168. To access the MooneyRivlin option for these elements, use
TB,MOONEY. ANSYS provides tools to help you determine the coefficients for all of
the hyperelastic options defined by TB,HYPER. The TBFT command allows you to
compare your experimental data with existing material data curves and visually
“fit” your curve for use in the TB command. All of the TBFT command capability is
available via either batch or interactive (GUI) mode. See Material Curve Fitting
(also in this manual) for more information. Each of the hyperelastic options is
presented in the following sections.
8.3.1.4.1. Mooney-Rivlin Hyperelastic Option (TB,HYPER)

Note that this section applies to using the Mooney-Rivlin option with elements
SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190, SHELL208,
and SHELL209. If you want to use the Mooney-Rivlin option with elements HYPER56,
HYPER58, HYPER74, HYPER158, PLANE162, SHELL163, SOLID164, or SOLID168, see Section
8.3.1.4.11: Mooney-Rivlin Hyperelastic Option (TB,MOONEY). The Mooney-Rivlin
option (TB,HYPER,,,,MOONEY), which is the default, allows you to define 2, 3, 5,
or 9 parameters through the NPTS argument of the TB command. For example, to
define a 5 parameter model you would issue TB,HYPER,1,,5,MOONEY. The 2 parameter
Mooney-Rivlin option has an applicable strain of about 100% in tension and 30% in
compression. Compared to the other options, higher orders of the Mooney-Rivlin
option may provide better approximation to a solution at higher strain. The
following example input listing shows a typical use of the Mooney-Rivlin option
with 3 parameters:
TB,HYPER,1,,3,MOONEY TBDATA,1,0.163498 TBDATA,2,0.125076 TBDATA,3,0.014719
TBDATA,4,6.93063E-5 !Activate 3 parameter Mooney-Rivlin data table !Define c10 !
Define c01 !Define c11 !Define incompressibility parameter !(as 2/K, K is the bulk
modulus)
Refer to Mooney-Rivlin Hyperelastic Material (TB,HYPER) in the ANSYS Elements

Reference for a description of the material constants required for this option.
8.3.1.4.2. Ogden Hyperelastic Option

The Ogden option (TB,HYPER,,,,OGDEN) allows you to define an unlimited number of
parameters through the NPTS argument of the TB command. For example, to define a 3
parameter model, use TB,HYPER,1,,3,OGDEN. Compared to the other options, the Ogden
option usually provides the best approximation to a solution at larger strain
levels. The applicable strain level can be up to 700%. A higher parameter value
can provide a better fit to the exact solution. It may however cause numerical
difficulties in fitting the material constants, and it requires enough data to
cover the whole range of deformation for which you may be interested. For these
reasons, a high parameter value is not recommended. The following example input
listing shows a typical use of the Ogden option with 2 parameters:
TB,HYPER,1,,2,OGDEN TBDATA,1,0.326996 !Activate 2 parameter Ogden data table !
Define µ1
8–18
TBDATA,2,2 TBDATA,3,-0.250152 TBDATA,4,-2 TBDATA,5,6.93063E-5 !Define 1 !Define µ2
!Define 2 !Define incompressibility parameter !(as 2/K, K is the bulk modulus) !
(Second incompressibility parameter d2 is zero)
Refer to Ogden Hyperelastic Material Constants in the ANSYS Elements Reference for
a description of the material constants required for this option.
8.3.1.4.3. Neo-Hookean Hyperelastic Option

The Neo-Hookean option (TB,HYPER,,,,NEO) represents the simplest form of strain
energy potential, and has an applicable strain range of 20-30%. An example input
listing showing a typical use of the Neo-Hookean option is presented below.
TB,HYPER,1,,,NEO TBDATA,1,0.577148 TBDATA,2,7.0e-5 !Activate Neo-Hookean data
table !Define mu shear modulus !Define incompressibility parameter !(as 2/K, K is
the bulk modulus)
Refer to Neo-Hookean Hyperelastic Material in the ANSYS Elements Reference for a

description of the material constants required for this option.
8.3.1.4.4. Polynomial Form Hyperelastic Option

The polynomial form option (TB,HYPER,,,,POLY) allows you to define an unlimited
number of parameters through the NPTS argument of the TB command. For example, to
define a 3 parameter model you would issue TB,HYPER,1,,3,POLY. Similar to the
higher order Mooney-Rivlin options, the polynomial form option may provide a
better approximation to a solution at higher strain. For NPTS = 1 and constant c01
= 0, the polynomial form option is equivalent to the Neo-Hookean option (see
Section 8.3.1.4.3: Neo-Hookean Hyperelastic Option for a sample input listing).
Also, for NPTS = 1, it is equivalent to the 2 parameter Mooney-Rivlin option. For
NPTS = 2, it is equivalent to the 5 parameter Mooney-Rivlin option, and for NPTS =
3, it is equivalent to the 9 parameter Mooney-Rivlin option (see Section
8.3.1.4.1: Mooney-Rivlin Hyperelastic Option (TB,HYPER) for a sample input
listing). Refer to Polynomial Form Hyperelastic Material Constants in the ANSYS
Elements Reference for a description of the material constants required for this
option.
8.3.1.4.5. Arruda-Boyce Hyperelastic Option

The Arruda-Boyce option (TB,HYPER,,,,BOYCE) has an applicable strain level of up
to 300%. An example input listing showing a typical use of the Arruda-Boyce option
is presented below.
TB,HYPER,1,,,BOYCE TBDATA,1,200.0 TBDATA,2,5.0 TBDATA,3,0.001 !Activate Arruda-
Boyce data table !Define initial shear modulus !Define limiting network stretch !
Define incompressibility parameter !(as 2/K, K is the bulk modulus)
Refer to Arruda-Boyce Hyperelastic Material Constants in the ANSYS Elements

8–19
8.3.1.4.6. Gent Hyperelastic Option

The Gent option (TB,HYPER,,,,GENT) has an applicable strain level of up to 300%.
An example input listing showing a typical use of the Gent option is presented
below.
TB,HYPER,1,,,GENT TBDATA,1,3.0 TBDATA,2,42.0 TBDATA,3,0.001 !Activate Gent data
table !Define initial shear modulus !Define limiting I1 - 3 !Define
incompressibility parameter !(as 2/K, K is the bulk modulus)
Refer to Gent Hyperelastic Material Constants in the ANSYS Elements Reference for
8.3.1.4.7. Yeoh Hyperelastic Option

The Yeoh option (TB,HYPER,,,,YEOH) is a reduced polynomial form of the
hyperelasticity option TB,HYPER,,,,POLY. An example of a 2 term Yeoh model is
TB,HYPER,1,,2,YEOH. Similar to the polynomial form option, the higher order terms
may provide a better approximation to a solution at higher strain. For NPTS = 1,
the Yeoh form option is equivalent to the Neo-Hookean option (see Section
8.3.1.4.3: Neo-Hookean Hyperelastic Option for a sample input listing). The
following example input listing shows a typical use of the Yeoh option with 2
terms and 1 incompressibility term:
TB,HYPER,1,,2,YEOH TBDATA,1,0.163498 TBDATA,2,0.125076 TBDATA,3,6.93063E-5 !
Activate 2 term Yeoh data table !Define C1 !Define C2 !Define first
incompressibility parameter
Refer to Yeoh Hyperelastic Material Constants in the ANSYS Elements Reference for
8.3.1.4.8. Blatz-Ko Foam Hyperelastic Option

The Blatz-Ko option (TB,HYPER,,,,BLATZ) is the simplest option for simulating the
compressible foam type of elastomer. This option is analogous to the Neo-Hookean
option of incompressible hyperelastic materials. An example input listing showing
a typical use of the Blatz-Ko option is presented below.
TB,HYPER,1,,,BLATZ TBDATA,1,5.0 !Activate Blatz-Ko data table !Define initial
shear modulus
Refer to Blatz-Ko Foam Hyperelastic Material Constants in the ANSYS Elements

8.3.1.4.9. Ogden Compressible Foam Hyperelastic Option

The Ogden compressible foam option (TB,HYPER,,,,FOAM) simulates highly
compressible foam material. An example of a 3 parameter model is
TB,HYPER,1,,3,FOAM. Compared to the Blatz-Ko option, the Ogden foam option usually
provides the best approximation to a solution at larger strain levels. The higher
the number of parameters, the better the fit to the experimental data. It may
however cause numerical difficulties in fitting the material constants, and it
requires sufficient data to cover the whole range of deformation for which you may
be interested. For these reasons, a high parameter value is not recommended. 8–20
Section 8.3: Modeling Material Nonlinearities The following example input listing
shows a typical use of the Ogden foam option with 2 parameters:
TB,HYPER,1,,2,FOAM TBDATA,1,1.85 TBDATA,2,4.5 TBDATA,3,-9.20 TBDATA,4,-4.5
TBDATA,5,0.92 TBDATA,6,0.92 !Activate 2 parameter Ogden foam data table !Define µ1
!Define 1 !Define µ2 !Define 2 !Define first compressibility parameter !Define
second compressibility parameter
Refer to Ogden Compressible Foam Hyperelastic Material Constants in the ANSYS

Elements Reference for a description of the material constants required for this
option.
8.3.1.4.10. User-Defined Hyperelastic Option

The User option (TB,HYPER,,,,USER) allows you to use the subroutine USERHYPER to
define the derivatives of the strain energy potential with respect to the strain
invariants. Refer to the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features for a detailed
description on writing a user hyperelasticity subroutine.
8.3.1.4.11. Mooney-Rivlin Hyperelastic Option (TB,MOONEY)

Note that this section applies to using the Mooney-Rivlin option with elements
HYPER56, HYPER58, HYPER74, HYPER158, PLANE162, SHELL163, SOLID164, or SOLID168. If
you want to use the Mooney-Rivlin option with elements SHELL181, PLANE182,
PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190, SHELL208, and SHELL209, see
Section 8.3.1.4.1: Mooney-Rivlin Hyperelastic Option (TB,HYPER). ANSYS element
types HYPER56, HYPER58, HYPER74, and HYPER158 use up to a nine-term Mooney-Rivlin
elastic potential function. If you already know the values for two-term, three-
term, five-term, or nine-term MooneyRivlin constants, you can enter them directly
with the TB family of commands. (See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for
information on the Mooney-Rivlin function.) For these element types, you can also
specify the material function as a User Programmable Feature (see the Guide to
ANSYS User Programmable Features). An example input listing showing a typical use
of the Mooney-Rivlin for these elements is presented below :
MP,NUXY,1,0.49999 ! NUXY should be almost equal to, but less than 0.5
TB,MOONEY,1,1 TBDATA,1,0.163498 TBDATA,2,0.125076 TBDATA,3,-0.0047583
TBDATA,4,0.014719 TBDATA,6,0.0003882 ! (Constants 5, 7, 8, and 9 default to 0.0 in
this example)
Refer to Mooney-Rivlin Hyperelastic Material Constants (TB,MOONEY) in the ANSYS

Elements Reference for a description of the constants required as input for this
option. The Mooney-Rivlin constants for any given hyperelastic material are not
generally available in the open literature. Consequently, you can use the *MOONEY
command to automatically determine a set of Mooney-Rivlin constants from a set of
known experimental test data. Sometimes the manufacturer of the material will be
able to supply some or all of the needed test data, but you might find that you
need to obtain more data from a testing laboratory. Hyperelastic material behavior
is much more complicated than typical metallic material behavior. Hyperelastic
stress-strain relationships usually differ significantly for tension, compression,
and shear modes of deformation. Therefore, using *MOONEY to generate a generally
applicable hyperelastic material model will require test data
8–21
Chapter 8: Nonlinear Structural Analysis that encompasses all possible modes of
deformation: tension, compression, and shear. See the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference
for a discussion of hyperelastic test methods and equivalent deformation modes. If
an incomplete set of data is provided (for instance, if only uniaxial tension data
are available), the program can still determine usable hyperelastic material
properties. However, in such cases the deformations experienced in the model
should be limited to be of the same nature as those experienced in the tests. In
other words, the test data should represent all modes of deformation and ranges of
response (strain) that will be experienced in the model. This advice is simply
common sense - if you do not know how the material behaves in a certain mode of
deformation or range of strain, you cannot accurately predict the behavior of a
part that experiences such deformations or strains. For example, if all you have
is uniaxial tension data, do not model a part that experiences significant shear
deformations. If your test data extend only from 0% to 100% strain, do not model a
part that experiences 150% strain. If, after reviewing your analysis, you discover
that the available test data do not adequately characterize the model's response,
get more test data! You can use the *MOONEY command to automatically determine a
set of Mooney-Rivlin constants from experimental test data. ANSYS determines the
constants and stores them in the database, and in an array parameter.
Additionally, it writes an ASCII file (Jobname.TB) that records the Mooney-Rivlin
constants in the form of a series of TB and TBDATA commands. Once such a file
exists, you can use it in future analyses to define that same material's Mooney-
Rivlin constants - you do not need to use the *MOONEY command every time to
regenerate these constants. Determining and Applying Mooney-Rivlin Constants The
procedure for determining and applying Mooney-Rivlin constants consists of five
main steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Dimension all arrays that will be used for data input,
Mooney-Rivlin constant storage, and calculated stress-strain evaluation. Fill the
input-data arrays with engineering stress and strain test data. Determine the
Mooney-Rivlin constants automatically. Evaluate the quality of the automatically
determined Mooney-Rivlin constants. Apply the Mooney-Rivlin constants in your
analysis.
Step 1: Dimension the Arrays Command(s): *DIM GUI: Utility Menu> Parameters> Array
Parameters> Define/Edit You must dimension arrays before using the *MOONEY
command. In most cases, you will need to dimension at least six different arrays.
(You can give these arrays any valid parameter names, but for convenience, we will
use specific array names, such as STRAIN, STRESS, and so on, in our discussion.
You can substitute any other valid parameter names that you like.) The arrays are
STRAIN, STRESS, CONST, CALC, SORTSN, and SORTSS. STRAIN Array: An array of
engineering strain data from mechanical material tests, arranged in three columns:
• • • Column 1: uniaxial tension and/or compression data Column 2: equibiaxial
tension and/or compression data Column 3: shear data (planar tension and/or
compression)
This array has the dimensions N x 3, where N equals the maximum number of data
points in any one of the three columns. For example, if you have 20 data points
from uniaxial tension/compression tests and 10 data points from shear tests, N =
20. This array must always be N x 3, even if fewer than three types of test data
are available. 8–22
Section 8.3: Modeling Material Nonlinearities Although it might be preferable to
input the data points in order of ascending strain values, it is not necessary to
do so. STRESS Array: An array of engineering stress data from mechanical material
tests input stress-data array, also of dimension N x 3. You must input stress data
points in the same order as the corresponding strain-data input. CONST Array: A
Mooney-Rivlin constant array of dimension M x 1, where M equals the desired number
of Mooney-Rivlin constants. (M must be either 2, 5, or 9; any other value will
produce an error message when *MOONEY is invoked.) You actually tell the program
in this dimensioning operation how many Mooney-Rivlin constants you want. The
*MOONEY command later reads the dimensions of this array to determine how many
Mooney-Rivlin constants to generate, and then writes the values of those constants
to this array. How many Mooney-Rivlin constants should you use? As a rule of
thumb, you should have at least twice as many data points (N, as defined above) as
the desired number of Mooney-Rivlin constants. Using more terms will usually
improve the statistical quality of your curve fit (that is, it will probably be
more tightly fitted through the data points), but the overall shape of the curve
might be worse than that obtained with fewer terms. As a practical matter, you
should probably try two-term, five-term, and nine-term functions in sequence, and
examine the resulting stress-strain curves to decide which function gives you the
best combination of tight fit and satisfactory curve shape.
Table 8.1 Suggested Mooney-Rivlin Constants

Number of Points in the Stress-strain Curve No inflection points (that is, single
curvature) One inflection point (that is, double curvature) Two inflection points
Suggested Mooney-Rivlin Function Two-term Five-term Nine-term
Figure 8.15 Typical Hyperelastic Stress-Strain Curves
CALC Array: An output stress-data array of dimension N x 3 (where N is as

described above), in which sorted calculated stress values are stored. These
stress values will be sorted into the same order as their corresponding sorted
strain values (which will be sorted into ascending order). SORTSN Array: An array
of dimension N x 3 in which sorted input strain data are stored. SORTSS Array: An
array of dimension N x 3 in which sorted input stress data are stored. For
example, if your test data contained up to 20 data points for any one test type,
and if you wanted to generate a five-term set of Mooney-Rivlin constants, you
might issue the following commands to dimension the necessary arrays (remember
that you can substitute any valid parameter names for the ones shown here):
*DIM,STRAIN,,20,3 *DIM,STRESS,,20,3 *DIM,CONST,,5,1 *DIM,CALC,,20,3 ! ! ! ! Dim.
Dim. Dim. Dim. array array array array (STRAIN) for 20 input strain-data points
(STRESS) for input stress data (20 pts.) (CONST) for 5-term M-R constants (CALC)
for sorted calculated stresses
8–23
*DIM,SORTSN,,20,3 *DIM,SORTSS,,20,3 ! Dim. array (SORTSN) for sorted input strain
data ! Dim. array (SORTSS) for sorted input stress data
See the *DIM command description for more information. Step 2: Fill the Input-Data
Arrays Once you have dimensioned your arrays, you can then fill the STRAIN and
STRESS arrays with test data using the *SET command (GUI path Utility Menu>
Parameters> Scalar Parameters). (Again, remember that you can give these arrays
any valid parameter names; particular array names are used here only for the
convenience of this discussion.) Note — The *MOONEY command interprets all input
stress and strain data as engineering stress and engineering strain. These arrays
are of dimension N x 3, with each column of the arrays containing data from one
type of test, in this order: • • • First column: Uniaxial tension and/or uniaxial
compression Second column: Equibiaxial tension and/or equibiaxial compression
Third column: Shear (planar tension or compression)
Note that these do not have a 1:1 relationship with the modes of deformation and
their equivalencies. The first mode of deformation, uniaxial tension, has
equibiaxial compression as its equivalency, but the first column of the array
contains data from uniaxial tension and/or uniaxial compression. Likewise, the
second mode of deformation, equibiaxial tension, has uniaxial compression as its
equivalency, but the second column of the array contains data from equibiaxial
tension and/or equibiaxial compression.
Table 8.2 Data Locations in Stress and Strain Input Arrays

Mode of Deformation Uniaxial tension Equibiaxial tension Shear Equivalent Test
Types Uniaxial tension Equibiaxial compression Equibiaxial tension Uniaxial
compression Planar tension Planar compression Array Location for Test Data Column
one Column two Column two Column one Column three Column three
If fewer than three types of tests are used, you must leave the missing columns
blank. Schematically, data input might be represented as shown in Figure 8.16:
“Data Locations in Stress and Strain Input Arrays”.
8–24
Figure 8.16 Data Locations in Stress and Strain Input Arrays
Consider a case in which data from uniaxial tension and shear tests are available.
The commands to store the strain and stress data in the input-data arrays could
look something like this (of course, the arrays can have any valid array names,
and the number of data points represented by N1 and N2 in this example can be any
integral numbers):
! Uniaxial Tension Data *SET,STRAIN(1,1), ... ! *SET,STRAIN(11,1),... !
*SET,STRESS(1,1), ... ! *SET,STRESS(11,1),... ! ! Shear Data *SET,STRAIN(1,3), ...
! *SET,STRESS(1,3), ... ! First 10 strain data points Strain data points 11
through N1 (if N1<21) First 10 stress data points Stress data points 11 through N1
Strain data points 1 through N2 (if N2<11) Stress data points 1 through N2
See the *SET command description for more information. Step 3: Determine the
Mooney-Rivlin Constants To generate Mooney-Rivlin constants automatically, first
use the TB command, with Lab = MOONEY and TBOPT = 1. Next, issue the *MOONEY
command, inserting the appropriate names of arrays that you have already
dimensioned (particular names have been used in this example for convenience of
discussion only; you can use any valid parameter names):
TB,MOONEY,MAT,NTEMP,,1
*MOONEY,STRAIN(1,1),STRESS(1,1),,CONST(1),CALC(1),SORTSN(1), SORTSS(1),Fname,Ext
The program automatically determines the Mooney-Rivlin constants, stores them in

the database and in the CONST array (which can have any valid parameter name), and
writes a series of TB and TBDATA commands in the ASCII file Fname.Ext (default
file name = Jobname.TB). Uniaxial equations will be used for the data in column 1,
equibiaxial equations for the data in column 2, and planar (pure shear) equations
for the data in column 3. Note — All the laboratory test data entered in the
STRAIN and STRESS arrays will be used to determine the Mooney-Rivlin hyperelastic
material constants. Step 4: Evaluate the Quality of the Mooney-Rivlin Constants
8–25
Chapter 8: Nonlinear Structural Analysis In your printout (file Jobname.OUT),
examine the "ROOT-MEAN-SQUARE ERROR (PERCENTAGE)" and the "COEFFICIENT OF
DETERMINATION." These two values give you a statistical measure of how well your
calculated stress-strain curve fits the experimental data points. The root-mean-
square error, which is expressed as a percentage (that is, a value of 2.5 means
2.5 %), should be "close" to zero. The coefficient of determination will be less
than 1.0, but should be "close" to 1.0 (that is, typically 0.99 or better). In
addition, you should use the *EVAL and *VPLOT commands (GUI paths Main Menu>
Preprocessor> Material Props> Mooney-Rivlin> Evaluate Const and Utility Menu>
Plot> Array Parameters) to graph the input and calculated stress-strain curves, in
order to obtain a visual check on how well the calculated curve matches the
experimental data. In comparing these curves, you should compare calculated values
against test data that represent the same mode of deformation. That is, you should
compare the shape of the calculated uniaxial tension curve (EVPARM = 1 in the
*EVAL command) against uniaxial tension data only (column 1 of the sorted STRAIN
and STRESS arrays). Similarly, you should compare the calculated uniaxial
compression curve against the uniaxial compression data only, and the calculated
shear curve against the shear data only. When you graph your calculated stress-
strain curves, you can extend the displayed curve into regions that were not
defined by the experimental data. Graphing your curves over such an extended range
can help you qualitatively understand your model's behavior if its response ever
happens to exceed the range of experimental strain. However, realize that if you
extend a displayed curve into a region that represents a different mode of
deformation, then that portion of the display will be meaningless. For instance,
you should graph a uniaxial tension curve only in regions of positive strain, and
a uniaxial compression curve only in regions of compressive strain. Remember that
good practice usually requires that the test data should represent all modes of
deformation and ranges of response (strain) experienced by your model. The *MOONEY
command automatically writes the Mooney-Rivlin constants to the CONST array.
Because *EVAL reads these same constants from this CONST array, you can readily do
a *EVAL following a *MOONEY operation in the same ANSYS session. If you already
have the Mooney-Rivlin constants (and thus will not be doing a *MOONEY
calculation), you must first dimension [*DIM]and fill the CONST array with the
Mooney-Rivlin constants before you can evaluate the curves [*EVAL]. You can fill
this array fairly easily, given that the CONST array is either 1 x 2, 1 x 5, or 1
x 9 at most. You could also add the *DIM and array-filling commands to your
archived Jobname.TB file to make this operation more convenient. To check your
curve's shape, you must dimension [*DIM] two more table array vectors (identified
as XVAL and ECALC in the *EVAL command description; any valid parameter names may
be used). Each of these table array vectors should have dimension P, where P is
the number of points you want to use to plot your curve. (Typically, you will want
to make P fairly large in order to generate a very smooth curve.) Next, specify
the mode of deformation, define an extended range of strain, and fill the arrays
with engineering strain and calculated engineering stress data, using the *EVAL
command. Finally, graph [*VPLOT] the calculated stress-strain curve. The following
example demonstrates how to graph a calculated curve for the uniaxial compression
deformation mode:
! Dimension strain and stress arrays for the calculated curve: ! (Any valid
parameter names can be used) *DIM,XVAL,TABLE,1000 *DIM,ECALC,TABLE,1000 ! Specify
the mode of deformation (EVPARM), define the strain range ! (XMIN,XMAX), and use
the M-R constants (CONST) to fill the strain (XVAL) ! and stress (ECALC) arrays
with calculated data: *EVAL,1,2,CONST(1),XMIN,XMAX,XVAL(1),ECALC(1) ! Label the
graph axes: /AXLAB,X,Engineering Strain /AXLAB,Y,Engineering Stress ! Plot the
calculated uniaxial compression curve: *VPLOT,XVAL(1),ECALC(1)
See the *DIM, *EVAL, /AXLAB, and *VPLOT command descriptions for more information.
8–26
Figure 8.17 Typical Evaluated Hyperelastic Stress-Strain Curve
Step 5: Using the Mooney-Rivlin Constants If the curve-fit statistics and the
overall curve shape are satisfactory, then you can proceed to use the generated
Mooney-Rivlin material properties in your analysis. (The *MOONEY command will have
stored these constants in the database.) In future analyses using the same
material model, you can simply read in [/INPUT] the file Jobname.TB to load the
constants into your new database. However, do not forget to define a value for
Poisson's ratio [MP,NUXY,...]. Always remember to examine your analysis results
carefully to determine whether or not your model's modes of deformation and values
of maximum strain were properly represented by the original test data. Analyses
involving hyperelastic elements are sometimes very sensitive to material property
specification and load application. Some values of Mooney-Rivlin constants result
in very stable stiffness matrices whereas others do not. Therefore, choose
constants with caution and experiment with slightly different values. ANSYS
provides internal stability checks for hyperelastic materials based on the Mooney-
Rivlin constants that you enter. These checks occur at two levels: • The first
stability check occurs before the analysis. The check is for six typical stress
paths (uniaxial tension and compression, equibiaxial tension and compression, and
planar tension and compression), and covers a stretch ratio ranging from 0.1 to
10. If the material is not stable over the range, a message appears that states
the critical values of the nominal strains where the material first becomes
unstable, and lists the Mooney-Rivlin constants that you entered. If the material
is stable over the range, you will not see any message or indication. The sample
warning message below lists the nominal strains where Material 1 loses stability,
then lists the constants that were entered for this example:
8–27
*** WARNING *** CP= 1.110 TIME= 16:59:52 Material 1 can become unstable under
certain loading. The strain (nominal) limits where the material becomes unstable
are: UNIAXIAL TENSION UNIAXIAL COMPRESSION EQUIBIAXIAL TENSION EQUIBIAXIAL
COMPRESSION PLANAR TENSION PLANAR COMPRESSION 0.645E+00 -0.565E+00 0.516E+00
-0.220E+00 0.585E+00 -0.369E+00
Mooney-Rivlin constants of the hyperelastic material are: 0.170E+02, 0.000E+00,

0.000E+00, 0.000E+00, 0.000E+00, 0.000E+00, 0.150E+03 0.000E+00 0.000E+00
For the hyperelastic elements with mixed u-P formulation (HYPER56, HYPER58,
HYPER74, and HYPER158), you can also have ANSYS perform a stability check during
an analysis by setting KEYOPT(8) = 1. For each equilibrium iteration, the program
checks every Gauss point in the problem for stability violations. If the problem
fails the stability check, you will see a message in the solution history section
of the ANSYS Output window reporting the total number of Gauss points that were
unstable for that iteration. You will not see any messages if the problem passes
the check. The sample message below shows that, during an analysis, ANSYS detected
3 Gauss points that exceeded the material stability limit:
DISP CONVERGENCE VALUE = 22.81 CRITERION= 0.5000 EQUIL ITER 1 COMPLETED. NEW
TRIANG MATRIX. MAX DOF INC= 10.00 FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.5018E+07 CRITERION=
0.1917E+05 >>> 3 Gauss points have exceeded the material stability limit
For elements that contain at least one unstable Gauss point, the instability
indicator is set to 1 and stored in the result file as an item in the SMISC
record. You can plot the region of instability in POST1 by plotting this SMISC
record identified as STFLAG for the element. The SMISC number for STFLAG differs
for some of the elements. See the appropriate table for the SMISC item that
corresponds to instability indicator STFLAG, for the particular element of
interest: HYPER56 Item and Sequence Numbers for ETABLE and ESOL Commands, HYPER58
Item and Sequence Numbers for ETABLE and ESOL Commands, HYPER74 Item and Sequence
Numbers for ETABLE and ESOL Commands, HYPER158 Item and Sequence Numbers for
ETABLE and ESOL Commands. You should be aware that even though a material failing
a stability check is often an indication of convergence difficulty, it does not
necessarily mean that your solution is invalid once the material enters the
unstable region. The material stability check is simply a tool to help you
diagnose the problem when the solution fails to converge. For nearly
incompressible materials with Poisson's ratio greater than 0.49, we recommend that
you use the hyperelastic elements with mixed u-P formulation (HYPER56, HYPER58,
HYPER74, and HYPER158). Note — The element types HYPER84 and HYPER86 are intended
primarily for modeling compressible, foam-like elastomers, using a Blatz-Ko
function to describe the material properties. Select the Blatz-Ko option by
setting KEYOPT(2) = 1 for these elements, then use MP commands to enter
appropriate values for EX and NUXY to define the initial material shear modulus.
An incompressible hyperelastic material option is also available for HYPER84 and
HYPER86, but it is limited to two-term Mooney-Rivlin only. In general, it is
recommended that you use HYPER56, HYPER58, HYPER74, or HYPER158 (not HYPER84 or
HYPER86) for all incompressible hyperelastic materials. Problems using
hyperelastic elements can be sensitive to the rate of load application. In most
instances, load application should be slow so as not to over-distort elements in
the converging sequence. Each problem may be unique and require special
consideration. Bifurcation of the solution, indicating that two or more different
geometric configurations have the same minimum potential energy, may occur at
various times during the
8–28
Section 8.3: Modeling Material Nonlinearities loading history. Automatic time
stepping with bisection [AUTOTS,ON] is often effective in overcoming these
difficulties.
8.3.1.5. Creep
Creep is a rate dependent material nonlinearity in which the material continues to
deform under a constant load. Conversely, if a displacement is imposed, the
reaction force (and stresses) will diminish over time (stress relaxation; see
Figure 8.18: “Stress Relaxation and Creep”(a)). The three stages of creep are
shown in Figure 8.18: “Stress Relaxation and Creep”(b). The ANSYS program has the
capability of modeling the first two stages (primary and secondary). The tertiary
stage is usually not analyzed since it implies impending failure.
Figure 8.18 Stress Relaxation and Creep
Creep is important in high temperature stress analyses, such as for nuclear

reactors. For example, suppose you apply a preload to some part in a nuclear
reactor to keep adjacent parts from moving. Over a period of time at high
temperature, the preload would decrease (stress relaxation) and potentially let
the adjacent parts move. Creep can also be significant for some materials such as
prestressed concrete. Typically, the creep deformation is permanent. ANSYS
analyzes creep using two time integration methods. Both are applicable to static
or transient analyses.The implicit creep method is robust, fast, accurate, and
recommended for general use. It can handle temperature dependent creep constants,
as well as simultaneous coupling with isotropic hardening plasticity models. The
explicit creep method is useful for cases where very small time steps are
required. Creep constants cannot be dependent on temperature. Coupling with other
plastic models is available by superposition only. Note — The terms “implicit” and
“explicit” as applied to creep, have no relationship to “explicit dynamics,” or
any elements referred to as “explicit elements.” The implicit creep method
supports the following elements: PLANE42, SOLID45, PLANE82, SOLID92, SOLID95,
LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190,
BEAM188, BEAM189, SHELL208, and SHELL209. The explicit creep method supports the
following elements: LINK1, PLANE2, LINK8, PIPE20, BEAM23, BEAM24, PLANE42,
SHELL43, SOLID45, SHELL51, PIPE60, SOLID62, SOLID65, PLANE82, SOLID92, and
SOLID95. The creep strain rate may be a function of stress, strain, temperature,
and neutron flux level. Libraries of creep strain rate equations are built into
the ANSYS program for primary, secondary, and irradiation induced creep. (See
Creep Equations in the ANSYS Elements Reference for discussions of, and input
procedures for, these various creep equations.) Some equations require specific
units. In particular, for the explicit creep option, temperatures used in the
creep equations should be based on an absolute scale.
8–29
8.3.1.5.1. Implicit Creep Procedure

The basic procedure for using the implicit creep method involves issuing the TB
command with Lab = CREEP, and choosing a creep equation by specifying a value for
TBOPT. The following example input shows the use of the implicit creep method.
TBOPT = 2 specifies that the primary creep equation for model 2 will be used.
Temperature dependency is specified using the TBTEMP command, and the four
constants associated with this equation are specified as arguments with the TBDATA
command.
TB,CREEP,1,1,4,2 TBTEMP,100 TBDATA,1,C1,C2,C3,C4
You can input other creep expressions using the user programmable feature and
setting TBOPT = 100. You can define the number of state variables using the TB
command with Lab = STATE. The following example shows how five state variables are
defined.
TB,STATE,1,,5
You can simultaneously model creep [TB,CREEP] and isotropic, bilinear kinematic,
and Hill anisotropy options to simulate more complex material behaviors. See
chapter for sample input listings of material combinations. To perform an implicit
creep analysis, you must also issue the solution RATE command, with Option = ON
(or 1). The following example shows a procedure for a time hardening creep
analysis (See Figure 8.19: “Time Hardening Creep Analysis”).
Figure 8.19 Time Hardening Creep Analysis
The user applied mechanical loading in the first load step, and turned the RATE
command OFF to bypass the creep strain effect. Since the time period in this load
step will affect the total time thereafter, the time period for this load step
should be small. For this example, the user specified a value of 1.0E-8 seconds.
The second load step is a creep analysis. The RATE command must be turned ON. Here
the mechanical loading was kept constant, and the material creeps as time
increases.
/SOLU RATE,OFF TIME,1.0E-8 !First load step, apply mechanical loading !Creep
analysis turned off !Time period set to a very small value
8–30
... SOLV RATE,ON TIME,100 ... SOLV
!Solve this load step !Second load step, no further mechanical load !Creep
analysis turned on !Time period set to desired value !Solve this load step
The RATE command works only when modeling implicit creep with either von Mises or
Hill potentials. When modeling implicit creep with von Mises potential, you can
use the RATE command with the following elements: LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182,
SHELL209. When modeling anisotropic creep (TB,CREEP with TB,HILL), you can use the
RATE command with the following elements: PLANE42, SOLID45, PLANE82, SOLID92,
SOLID95, LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187,
SOLSH190, BEAM188, BEAM189, SHELL208, and SHELL209. For most materials, the creep
strain rate changes significantly at an early stage. Because of this, a general
recommendation is to use a small initial incremental time step, then specify a
large maximum incremental time step by using solution command DELTIM or NSUBST.
For implicit creep, you may need to examine the effect of the time increment on
the results carefully because ANSYS does not enforce any creep ratio control by
default. You can always enforce a creep limit ratio using the creep ratio control
option in commands CRPLIM or CUTCONTROL,CRPLIMIT. A recommended value for a creep
limit ratio ranges from 1 to 10. The ratio may vary with materials so your
decision on the best value to use should be based on your own experimentation to
gain the required performance and accuracy. For larger analyses, a suggestion is
to first perform a time increment convergence analysis on a simple small size
test. ANSYS provides tools to help you determine the coefficients for all of the
implicit creep options defined in TB,CREEP. The TBFT command allows you to compare
your experimental data with existing material data curves and visually “fit” your
curve for use in the TB command. All of the TBFT command capability is available
via either batch or interactive (GUI) mode. See Material Curve Fitting (also in
this manual) for more information.
8.3.1.5.2. Explicit Creep Procedure

The basic procedure for using the explicit creep method involves issuing the TB
command with Lab = CREEP and choosing a creep equation by adding the appropriate
constant as an argument with the TBDATA command. TBOPT is either left blank or =
0. The following example input uses the explicit creep method. Note that all
constants are included as arguments with the TBDATA command, and that there is no
temperature dependency.
TB,CREEP,1 TBDATA,1,C1,C2,C3,C4, ,C6
For the explicit creep method, you can incorporate other creep expressions into
the program by using User Programmable Features (see the Guide to ANSYS User
Programmable Features). For highly nonlinear creep strain vs. time curves, a small
time step must be used with the explicit creep method. Creep strains are not
computed if the time step is less than 1.0e-6. A creep time step optimization
procedure is available [AUTOTS and CRPLIM] for automatically adjusting the time
step as appropriate.
8.3.1.6. Shape Memory Alloy

The Shape Memory Alloy (SMA) material behavior option describes the super-elastic
behavior of nitinol alloy. Nitinol is a flexible metal alloy that can undergo very
large deformations in loading-unloading cycles without permanent deformation. As
illustrated in Figure 8.20: “Shape Memory Alloy Phases”, the material behavior has
8–31
Chapter 8: Nonlinear Structural Analysis three distinct phases: an austenite phase
(linear elastic), a martensite phase (also linear elastic), and the transition
phase between these two.
Figure 8.20 Shape Memory Alloy Phases

σ
σ σ σ σ
Use the MP command to input the linear elastic behavior of the austenite phase,
and the TB,SMA command to input the behavior of the transition and martensite
phases. Use the TBDATA command to enter the specifics (data sets) of the alloy
material. You can enter up to six sets of data. SMAs can be specified for the
following elements: PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, and
SOLSH190. A typical ANSYS input listing (fragment) will look similar to this:
MP,EX,1,60.0E3 MP,NUXY,1.0.3 TB,SMA,1,2 TBTEMP,10
TBDATA,1,520.0,600.0,300.0,200.0,0.07,0.12 TBDATA,7,5.0E4 TBTEMP,20
TBDATA,1,420.0,540.0,300.0,200.0,0.10,0.15 TBDATA,7,4.0E3 ! Define austenite
elastic properties ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Define material 1 as SMA, with two
temperatures Define first starting temp Define SMA parameters
See TB, and TBDATA for more information.
8–32
¡ ¤¢ ¢ £¡ ¢ £¡
ε ε
Define second starting temp Define SMA parameters
¡ ¤¢ ¥ ¥
8.3.1.7. Viscoplasticity
Viscoplasticity is a time-dependent plasticity phenomenon, where the development
of the plastic strains are dependent on the rate of loading. The primary
applications are high-temperature metal forming processes such as rolling and deep
drawing, which involve large plastic strains and displacements with small elastic
strains (see Figure 8.21: “Viscoplastic Behavior in a Rolling Operation”). The
plastic strains are typically very large (for example, 50% or greater), requiring
large strain theory [NLGEOM,ON]. Viscoplasticity is modeled with element types
VISCO106, VISCO107, and VISCO108, using Anand's model for material properties as
described in Nonlinear Stress-Strain Materials in the ANSYS Elements Reference.
Figure 8.21 Viscoplastic Behavior in a Rolling Operation
Viscoplasticity is defined by unifying plasticity and creep via a set of flow and
evolutionary equations. A constraint equation is used to preserve volume in the
plastic region. The Rate-Dependent Plasticity (Viscoplasticity) or TB,RATE option
allows you to introduce the strain rate effect in material models to simulate the
time-dependent response of materials. Two material options are available, the
Perzyna model and the Peirce model (see the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for
details). In contrast to other rate-dependent material options in ANSYS such as
Creep or Anand's model, the Perzyna and Peirce models also include a yield
surface. The plasticity and thus the strain rate hardening effect are active only
after plastic yielding. You must use the models in combination with the BISO,
MISO, or NLISO material options to simulate viscoplasticity. Further, you can
simulate anisotropic viscoplasticity by also combining the HILL option. See
chapter for sample input listings of material combinations. For isotropic
hardening, the intent is for simulating the strain rate hardening of materials
rather than softening. This option is also suitable for large strain analysis, and
is applicable to the following elements: PLANE42, SOLID45, PLANE82, SOLID92,
SOLID95, LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187,
SOLSH190, BEAM188, BEAM189, SHELL208, and SHELL209. Some typical applications of
these material options are metal forming and micro-electromechanical systems
(MEMS).
8.3.1.8. Viscoelasticity
Viscoelasticity is similar to creep, but part of the deformation is removed when
the loading is taken off. A common viscoelastic material is glass. Some plastics
are also considered to be viscoelastic. One type of viscoelastic response is
illustrated in Figure 8.22: “Viscoelastic Behavior (Maxwell Model)”.
8–33
Figure 8.22 Viscoelastic Behavior (Maxwell Model)
Viscoelasticity is modeled with element types VISCO88 and VISCO89 for small
deformation viscoelasticity and LINK180, SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185,
SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190, BEAM188, BEAM189, SHELL208, and SHELL209 for small
and large deformation viscoelasticity. You must input material properties using
the TB family of commands. For SHELL181, PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186,
SOLID187, SOLSH190, SHELL208, and SHELL209, the underlying elasticity is specified
by either the MP command (hypoelasticity) or by the TB,HYPER command
(hyperelasticity). For LINK180, BEAM188, and BEAM189, the underlying elasticity is
specified using the MP command (hypoelasticity) only. The elasticity constants
correspond to those of the fast load limit. Use the TB,PRONY and TB,SHIFT commands
to input the relaxation property (see the TB command description for more
information).
!Small Strain Viscoelasticity mp,ex,1,20.0E5 !elastic properties mp,nuxy,1,0.3
tb,prony,1,,2,shear !define viscosity parameters (shear) tbdata,1,0.5,2.0,0.25,4.0
tb,prony,1,,2,bulk !define viscosity parameters (bulk) tbdata,1,0.5,2.0,0.25,4.0 !
Large Strain Viscoelasticity tb,hyper,1,,,moon !elastic properties
tbdata,1,38.462E4,,1.2E-6 tb,prony,1,,1,shear !define viscosity parameters
tbdata,1,0.5,2.0 tb,prony,1,,1,bulk !define viscosity parameters tbdata,1,0.5,2.0
See Viscoelastic Material Constants in the ANSYS Elements Reference and the ANSYS,
Inc. Theory Reference for details about how to input viscoelastic material
properties using the TB family of commands. ANSYS provides tools to help you
determine the coefficients for all of the viscoelastic options defined by
TB,PRONY. The TBFT command allows you to compare your experimental data with
existing material data curves and visually “fit” your curve for use in the TB
command. All of the TBFT command capability is available via either batch or
interactive (GUI) mode. See Material Curve Fitting (also in this manual) for more
information.
8.3.1.9. Swelling
Certain materials respond to neutron flux by enlarging volumetrically, or
swelling. In order to include swelling effects, you must write your own swelling
subroutine, USERSW. (See the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features for a
discussion of User-Programmable Features.) Swelling Equations in the ANSYS
Elements Reference discusses how to use the TB family of commands to input
constants for the swelling equations. Swelling can also be related to other
phenomena, such as moisture content. The ANSYS commands for nuclear swelling can
be used analogously to define swelling due to other causes.
8–34
8.3.2. Material Model Combinations

You can combine several material model options discussed in this chapter to
simulate complex material behaviors. Material Model Combinations in the ANSYS
Elements Reference presents the model options you can combine along with the
associated TB command labels and links to sample input listings. These sample
input listings are presented below in sections identified by the TB command
labels.
8.3.2.1. BISO and CHAB Example

This input listing illustrates an example of combining bilinear isotropic
hardening plasticity with Chaboche nonlinear kinematic hardening plasticity.
MP,EX,1,185.0E3 MP,NUXY,1,0.3 TB,CHAB,1 TBDATA,1,180,100,3 TB,BISO,1
TBDATA,1,180,200 ! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
! CHABOCHE TABLE
! BISO TABLE
For information on the BISO option, see Bilinear Isotropic Hardening in the ANSYS
Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this
chapter. For information on the CHAB option, see Nonlinear Kinematic Hardening in
the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in
this chapter.
8.3.2.2. MISO and CHAB Example

This input listing illustrates an example of combining multilinear isotropic
MP,EX,1,185E3 MP,NUXY,1,0.3 TB,CHAB,1 TBDATA,1,180,100,3 TB,MISO,1 TBPT,,9.7E-
4,180 TBPT,,1.0,380 ! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
! CHABOCHE TABLE ! THIS EXAMPLE ISOTHERMAL ! MISO TABLE
For information on the MISO option, see Multilinear Isotropic Hardening in the
ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this
this chapter.
8.3.2.3. NLISO and CHAB Example

This input listing illustrates an example of combining nonlinear isotropic
MP,EX,1,20.0E5 MP,NUXY,1,0.3 ! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,CHAB,1,3,5 ! CHABOCHE TABLE TBTEMP,20,1 ! THIS EXAMPLE TEMPERATURE DEPENDENT

TBDATA,1,500,20000,100,40000,200,10000 TBDATA,7,1000,200,100,100,0 TBTEMP,40,2
8–35
TBDATA,1,880,204000,200,43800,500,10200 TBDATA,7,1000,2600,2000,500,0 TBTEMP,60,3
TBDATA,1,1080,244000,400,45800,700,12200 TBDATA,7,1400,3000,2800,900,0
TB,NLISO,1,2 TBTEMP,40,1 TBDATA,1,880,0.0,80.0,3 TBTEMP,60,2
TBDATA,1,1080,0.0,120.0,7 ! NLISO TABLE
For information on the NLISO option, see Nonlinear Isotropic Hardening in the
this chapter.
8.3.2.4. BISO and RATE Example

hardening plasticity with the TB,RATE command to model viscoplasticity.
MP,EX,1,20.0E5 MP,NUXY,1,0.3 TB,BISO,1 TBDATA,1,9000,10000 TB,RATE,1,,,PERZYNA
TBDATA,1,0.5,1 ! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
! BISO TABLE
! RATE TABLE
chapter. For information on the RATE option, see Rate-Dependent Viscoplastic
Materials in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.7: Viscoplasticity in
this chapter.
8.3.2.5. MISO and RATE Example

MP,EX,1,20.0E5 MP,NUXY,1,0.3 TB,MISO,1 TBPT,,0.015,30000 TBPT,,0.020,32000
TBPT,,0.025,33800 TBPT,,0.030,35000 TBPT,,0.040,36500 TBPT,,0.050,38000
TBPT,,0.060,39000 TB,RATE,1,,,PERZYNA TBDATA,1,0.5,1 ! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
! MISO TABLE
! RATE TABLE
this chapter. 8–36
8.3.2.6. NLISO and RATE Example

MP,EX,1,20.0E5 MP,NUXY,1,0.3 TB,NLISO,1 TBDATA,1,30000,100000,5200,172
TB,RATE,1,,,PERZYNA TBDATA,1,0.5,1 ! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
! NLISO TABLE
! RATE TABLE
this chapter.
8.3.2.7. BISO and CREEP Example

hardening plasticity with implicit creep.
MP,EX,1,20.0E5 MP,NUXY,1,0.3 TB,BISO,1 TBDATA,1,9000,10000 ! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
! BISO TABLE
TB,CREEP,1,,,2 ! CREEP TABLE TBDATA,1,1.5625E-14,5.0,-0.5,0.0
chapter. For information on the CREEP option, see Implicit Creep Equations in the
ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.5.1: Implicit Creep Procedure in this
chapter.
8.3.2.8. MISO and CREEP Example

TBPT,,0.060,39000 ! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
! MISO TABLE
chapter.
8–37
Chapter 8: Nonlinear Structural Analysis For information on the CREEP option, see
Implicit Creep Equations in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.5.1:
Implicit Creep Procedure in this chapter.
8.3.2.9. NLISO and CREEP Example

MP,EX,1,20.0E5 MP,NUXY,1,0.3 TB,NLISO,1 TBDATA,1,30000,100000,5200,172 ! ELASTIC
CONSTANTS
! NLISO TABLE
chapter.
8.3.2.10. BKIN and CREEP Example

This input listing illustrates an example of combining bilinear kinematic
MP,EX,1,1e7 MP,NUXY,1,0.32 TB,BKIN,1, TBDATA,1,42000,1000 TB,CREEP,1,,,6
TBDATA,1,7.4e-21,3.5,0,0,0,0 ! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
! BKIN TABLE
! CREEP TABLE
For information on the BKIN option, see Bilinear Kinematic Hardening in the ANSYS
chapter.
8.3.2.11. HILL and BISO Example

This input listing illustrates an example of modeling anisotropic plasticity with
bilinear isotropic hardening.
MP,EX,1,20.0E5 MP,NUXY,1,0.3 ! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
TB,HILL,1,2 ! HILL TABLE TBTEMP,100 TBDATA,1,1,1.0402,1.24897,1.07895,1,1

TBTEMP,200 TBDATA,1,0.9,0.94,1.124,0.97,0.9,0.9 TB,BISO,1,2 TBTEMP,100
TBDATA,1,461.0,374.586 TBTEMP,200 TBDATA,1,400.0,325.0 ! BISO TABLE
For information on the HILL option, see Hill's Anisotropy in the ANSYS Elements
Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
8–38
Section 8.3: Modeling Material Nonlinearities For information on the BISO option,
see Bilinear Isotropic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section
8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
8.3.2.12. HILL and MISO Example

multilinear isotropic hardening.
! MISO TABLE
TB,HILL,1 ! HILL TABLE TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.9,0.80
Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter. For
information on the MISO option, see Multilinear Isotropic Hardening in the ANSYS
chapter.
8.3.2.13. HILL and NLISO Example

nonlinear isotropic hardening.
CONSTANTS
! NLISO TABLE
information on the NLISO option, see Nonlinear Isotropic Hardening in the ANSYS
chapter.
8.3.2.14. HILL and BKIN Example

bilinear kinematic hardening.
MP,EX,1,20.0E5 MP,NUXY,1,0.3 TB,BKIN,1 TBDATA,1,9000,10000 ! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
! BKIN TABLE
Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options in this chapter.
8–39
Chapter 8: Nonlinear Structural Analysis For information on the BKIN option, see
Bilinear Kinematic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section
8.3.2.15. HILL and MKIN Example

multilinear kinematic hardening.
MPTEMP,1,20,400,650,800,950 ! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
MPDATA,EX,1,1,30.00E6,27.36E6,25.20E6,23.11E6,20.76E6
MPDATA,EY,1,1,30.00E6,27.36E6,25.20E6,23.11E6,20.76E6
MPDATA,EZ,1,1,30.00E6,27.36E6,25.20E6,23.11E6,20.76E6
MPDATA,PRXY,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377
MPDATA,PRYZ,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377
MPDATA,PRXZ,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377
MPDATA,GXY,1,1,1.190E4,1.160E4,1.110E4,1.080E4,1.060E4
MPDATA,GYZ,1,1,1.190E4,1.160E4,1.110E4,1.080E4,1.060E4
MPDATA,GXZ,1,1,1.190E4,1.160E4,1.110E4,1.080E4,1.060E4
TB,MKIN,1,5,5 ! MKIN TABLE TBTEMP,,strain TBDATA,1,0.0015,0.006,0.04,0.08,0.1

TBTEMP,20 TBDATA,1,45000,60000,90000,115000,120000 TBTEMP,400
TBDATA,1,41040,54720,82080,104880,109440 TBTEMP,650
TBDATA,1,37800,50400,75600,96600,100800 TBTEMP,800
TBDATA,1,34665,46220,69330,88588,92440 TBTEMP,950
TBDATA,1,31140,41520,62280,79580,83040
TB,HILL,1,5 ! HILL TABLE TBTEMP,20.0 TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93

TBTEMP,400.0 TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93 TBTEMP,650.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93 TBTEMP,800.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00 TBTEMP,950.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00
information on the MKIN option, see Multilinear Kinematic Hardening in the ANSYS
chapter.
8.3.2.16. HILL and KINH Example

multilinear kinematic hardening.
MP,EX,1,20E6 MP,NUXY,1,0.3 TB,KINH,1,,3 TBPT,,5E-5,1E3 TBPT,,0.01,2E3
TBPT,,0.60,6E4 ! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
! KINH TABLE
8–40
TB,HILL,1 TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.90,0.95 ! HILL TABLE
information on the KINH option, see Multilinear Kinematic Hardening in the ANSYS
chapter.
8.3.2.17. HILL and CHAB Example

Chaboche nonlinear kinematic hardening.
MP,EX,1,185E3 MP,NUXY,1,0.3 TB,CHAB,1 TBDATA,1,180,400,3,0 ! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
! CHABOCHE TABLE
information on the CHAB option, see Nonlinear Kinematic Hardening in the ANSYS
chapter.
8.3.2.18. HILL and BISO and CHAB Example

bilinear isotropic hardening and Chaboche nonlinear kinematic hardening.
MP,EX,1,185E3 MP,NUXY,1,0.3 TB,CHAB,1 TBDATA,1,180,100,3 TB,BISO,1
TBDATA,1,180,200 TB,HILL,1 TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.9,0.80 ! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
! CHABOCHE TABLE
! BISO TABLE
! HILL TABLE
information on the BISO option, see Bilinear Isotropic Hardening in the ANSYS
this chapter.
8.3.2.19. HILL and MISO and CHAB Example

multilinear isotropic hardening and Chaboche nonlinear kinematic hardening.
8–41
MP,EX,1,185E3 MP,NUXY,1,0.3 TB,CHAB,1 TBDATA,1,185,100,3 TB,MISO,1 TBPT,,0.001,185
TBPT,,1.0,380 TB,HILL,1 TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.9,0.80 ! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
! CHABOCHE TABLE
! MISO TABLE
! HILL TABLE
information on the MISO option, see Multilinear Isotropic Hardening in the ANSYS
this chapter.
8.3.2.20. HILL and NLISO and CHAB Example

This input listing illustrates an example of combining anisotropic plasticity with
nonlinear isotropic hardening and Chaboche nonlinear kinematic hardening.
MPTEMP,1,20,200,400,550,600,650 ! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
MPTEMP,,700,750,800,850,900,950 !
MPDATA,EX,1,1,1.250E4,1.210E4,1.140E4,1.090E4,1.070E4,1.050E4
MPDATA,EX,1,,1.020E4,0.995E4,0.963E4,0.932E4,0.890E4,0.865E4 !
MPDATA,EY,1,1,1.250E4,1.210E4,1.140E4,1.090E4,1.070E4,1.050E4
MPDATA,EY,1,,1.020E4,0.995E4,0.963E4,0.932E4,0.890E4,0.865E4 !
MPDATA,EZ,1,1,1.250E4,1.210E4,1.140E4,1.090E4,1.070E4,1.050E4
MPDATA,EZ,1,,1.020E4,0.995E4,0.963E4,0.932E4,0.890E4,0.865E4 !
MPDATA,PRXY,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377,0.380
MPDATA,PRXY,1,,0.382,0.384,0.386,0.389,0.391,0.393 !
MPDATA,PRYZ,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377,0.380
MPDATA,PRYZ,1,,0.382,0.384,0.386,0.389,0.391,0.393 !
MPDATA,PRXZ,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377,0.380
MPDATA,PRXZ,1,,0.382,0.384,0.386,0.389,0.391,0.393 !
MPDATA,GXY,1,1,1.190E4,1.160E4,1.110E4,1.080E4,1.060E4,1.040E4
MPDATA,GXY,1,,1.020E4,1.000E4,0.973E4,0.946E4,0.908E4,0.887E4 !
MPDATA,GYZ,1,1,1.190E4,1.160E4,1.110E4,1.080E4,1.060E4,1.040E4
MPDATA,GYZ,1,,1.020E4,1.000E4,0.973E4,0.946E4,0.908E4,0.887E4 !
MPDATA,GXZ,1,1,1.190E4,1.160E4,1.110E4,1.080E4,1.060E4,1.040E4
MPDATA,GXZ,1,,1.020E4,1.000E4,0.973E4,0.946E4,0.908E4,0.887E4
TB,NLISO,1 TBDATA,1,180,0.0,100.0,5 ! TB,CHAB,1 TBDATA,1,180,100,3
! NLISO TABLE
! CHABOCHE TABLE
8–42
TB,HILL,1,5 TBTEMP,750.0 TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93 TBTEMP,800.0

TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93 TBTEMP,850.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93 TBTEMP,900.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00 TBTEMP,950.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00
! HILL TABLE
information on the NLISO option, see Nonlinear Isotropic Hardening in the ANSYS
this chapter.
8.3.2.21. HILL and RATE and BISO Example

This input listing illustrates an example of modeling anisotropic viscoplasticity
with bilinear isotropic hardening plasticity.
MPTEMP,1,20,400,650,800,950 ! ELASTIC CONSTANTS !
MPDATA,EX,1,1,30.00E6,27.36E6,25.20E6,23.11E6,20.76E6 !
MPDATA,EY,1,1,30.00E6,27.36E6,25.20E6,23.11E6,20.76E6 !
MPDATA,EZ,1,1,30.00E6,27.36E6,25.20E6,23.11E6,20.76E6 !
MPDATA,PRXY,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377 !
MPDATA,PRYZ,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377 !
MPDATA,PRXZ,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377 !
MPDATA,GXY,1,1,1.190E4,1.160E4,1.110E4,1.080E4,1.060E4 !
MPDATA,GYZ,1,1,1.190E4,1.160E4,1.110E4,1.080E4,1.060E4 !
MPDATA,GXZ,1,1,1.190E4,1.160E4,1.110E4,1.080E4,1.060E4
TB,BISO,1, TBDATA,1,45000,760000
! BISO TABLE
TB,RATE,1,2,,PERZYNA TBTEMP,20 TBDATA,1,0.1,0.3 TBTEMP,950 TBDATA,1,0.3,0.5
! RATE TABLE
TB,HILL,1,5 ! HILL TABLE TBTEMP,750.0 TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93

TBTEMP,800.0 TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93 TBTEMP,850.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93 TBTEMP,900.0
8–43
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00 TBTEMP,950.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00
information on the RATE option, see Rate-Dependent Viscoplastic Materials in the
ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.7: Viscoplasticity in this chapter.
chapter.
8.3.2.22. HILL and RATE and MISO Example

with multilinear isotropic hardening plasticity.
! MISO TABLE
TB,HILL,1 ! HILL TABLE TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.9,0.80 TB,RATE,1,,,PERZYNA

TBDATA,1,0.5,1 ! RATE TABLE
information on the RATE option, see Rate-Dependent Viscoplastic Materials in the
ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.7: Viscoplasticity in this chapter.
For information on the MISO option, see Bilinear Isotropic Hardening in the ANSYS
chapter.
8.3.2.23. HILL and RATE and NLISO Example

with nonlinear isotropic hardening plasticity.
CONSTANTS
! NLISO TABLE
TB,HILL,1 ! HILL TABLE TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.9,0.80 TB,RATE,1,,,PERZYNA

TBDATA,1,0.5,1 ! RATE TABLE
8–44
Section 8.3: Modeling Material Nonlinearities For information on the HILL option,
see Hill's Anisotropy in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1:
Plastic Material Options in this chapter. For information on the RATE option, see
Rate-Dependent Viscoplastic Materials in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section
8.3.1.7: Viscoplasticity in this chapter. For information on the NLISO option, see
Nonlinear Isotropic Hardening in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section
8.3.2.24. HILL and CREEP Example

This input listing illustrates an example of modeling anisotropic implicit creep.
MPTEMP,,700,750,800,850,900,950 !
MPDATA,EX,1,1,1.250E4,1.210E4,1.140E4,1.090E4,1.070E4,1.050E4
MPDATA,EX,1,,1.020E4,0.995E4,0.963E4,0.932E4,0.890E4,0.865E4 !
MPDATA,EY,1,1,1.250E4,1.210E4,1.140E4,1.090E4,1.070E4,1.050E4
MPDATA,EY,1,,1.020E4,0.995E4,0.963E4,0.932E4,0.890E4,0.865E4 !
MPDATA,EZ,1,1,1.250E4,1.210E4,1.140E4,1.090E4,1.070E4,1.050E4
MPDATA,EZ,1,,1.020E4,0.995E4,0.963E4,0.932E4,0.890E4,0.865E4 !
MPDATA,PRXY,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377,0.380
MPDATA,PRXY,1,,0.382,0.384,0.386,0.389,0.391,0.393 !
MPDATA,PRYZ,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377,0.380
MPDATA,PRYZ,1,,0.382,0.384,0.386,0.389,0.391,0.393 !
MPDATA,PRXZ,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377,0.380
MPDATA,PRXZ,1,,0.382,0.384,0.386,0.389,0.391,0.393 !
TB,CREEP,1,,,2 TBDATA,1,5.911E-34,6.25,-0.25
! CREEP TABLE

TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93 TBTEMP,850.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93 TBTEMP,900.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00 TBTEMP,950.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00
! HILL TABLE
information on the CREEP option, see Implicit Creep Equations in the ANSYS
Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.5.1: Implicit Creep Procedure in this
chapter.
8–45
8.3.2.25. HILL and CREEP and BISO Example

This input listing illustrates an example of modeling anisotropic implicit creep
with bilinear isotropic hardening plasticity.
MPTEMP,,700,750,800,850,900,950 !
MPDATA,EX,1,1,1.250E4,1.210E4,1.140E4,1.090E4,1.070E4,1.050E4
MPDATA,EX,1,,1.020E4,0.995E4,0.963E4,0.932E4,0.890E4,0.865E4 !
MPDATA,EY,1,1,1.250E4,1.210E4,1.140E4,1.090E4,1.070E4,1.050E4
MPDATA,EY,1,,1.020E4,0.995E4,0.963E4,0.932E4,0.890E4,0.865E4 !
MPDATA,EZ,1,1,1.250E4,1.210E4,1.140E4,1.090E4,1.070E4,1.050E4
MPDATA,EZ,1,,1.020E4,0.995E4,0.963E4,0.932E4,0.890E4,0.865E4 !
MPDATA,PRXY,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377,0.380
MPDATA,PRXY,1,,0.382,0.384,0.386,0.389,0.391,0.393 !
MPDATA,PRYZ,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377,0.380
MPDATA,PRYZ,1,,0.382,0.384,0.386,0.389,0.391,0.393 !
MPDATA,PRXZ,1,1,0.351,0.359,0.368,0.375,0.377,0.380
MPDATA,PRXZ,1,,0.382,0.384,0.386,0.389,0.391,0.393 !
TB,BISO,1 TBDATA,1,180,200
! BISO TABLE
TB,CREEP,1,,,2 TBDATA,1,5.911E-34,6.25,-0.25
! CREEP TABLE

TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93 TBTEMP,850.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,0.93,0.93,0.93 TBTEMP,900.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00 TBTEMP,950.0
TBDATA,1,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.00,1.00,1.00
! HILL TABLE
chapter. For information on the BISO option, see Bilinear Isotropic Hardening in
this chapter.
8–46
8.3.2.26. HILL and CREEP and MISO Example

with multilinear isotropic hardening plasticity.
! MISO TABLE
TB,HILL,1 ! HILL TABLE TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.9,0.80 TB,CREEP,1,,,2 ! CREEP

TABLE TBDATA,1,1.5625E-14,5.0,-0.5,0.0
chapter. For information on the MISO option, see Multilinear Isotropic Hardening
in the ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.1.1: Plastic Material Options
in this chapter.
8.3.2.27. HILL and CREEP and NLISO Example

with nonlinear isotropic hardening plasticity.
CONSTANTS
! NLISO TABLE
TB,HILL,1 ! HILL TABLE TBDATA,1,1.0,1.1,0.9,0.85,0.9,0.80 TB,CREEP,1,,,2 ! CREEP

TABLE TBDATA,1,1.5625E-14,5.0,-0.5,0.0
chapter. For information on the NLISO option, see Nonlinear Isotropic Hardening in
this chapter.
8.3.2.28. HILL and CREEP and BKIN Example

with bilinear kinematic hardening plasticity.
8–47
MP,EX,1,1e7 MP,NUXY,1,0.32 TB,BKIN,1 TBDATA,1,42000,1000 TB,CREEP,1,,,6
TBDATA,1,7.4e-21,3.5,0,0,0,0 ! ELASTIC CONSTANTS
! BKIN TABLE
! CREEP TABLES
chapter. For information on the BKIN option, see Bilinear Kinematic Hardening in
this chapter.
8.3.2.29. Hyperelasticity and Viscoelasticity (Implicit) Example

This input listing illustrates the combination of implicit hyperelasticity and
viscoelasticity.
c10=293 c01=177 TB,HYPER,1,,,MOON TBDATA,1,c10,c01 a1=0.1 a2=0.2 a3=0.3 t1=10
t2=100 t3=1000 tb,prony,1,,3,shear tbdata,1,a1,t1,a2,t2,a3,t3
!!!! type 1 is Mooney-Rivlin
! define Prony constants
For information on hyperelasticity, see Hyperelastic Material Constants in the

ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.4: Hyperelasticity in this chapter.
For information on the viscoelasticity, see Viscoelastic Material Constants in the
ANSYS Elements Reference, and Section 8.3.1.8: Viscoelasticity in this chapter.
8.4. Running a Nonlinear Analysis in ANSYS

ANSYS employs an automatic solution control method that, based on the physics of
your problem, sets various nonlinear analysis controls to the appropriate values.
If you are not satisfied with the results obtained with these values, you can
manually override the settings. The following commands are set to optimal
defaults:
AUTOTS DELTIM NSUBST CNVTOL LNSRCH ARCLEN PRED NROPT TINTP CUTCONTROL OPNCONTROL
CDWRITE MONITOR NEQIT SSTIF KBC EQSLV LSWRITE
These commands and the settings they control are discussed in later sections. You
can also refer to the individual command descriptions in the ANSYS Commands
Reference. 8–48
Section 8.5: Performing a Nonlinear Static Analysis If you do choose to override
the ANSYS-specified settings, or if you wish to use an input list from a previous
release of ANSYS, issue SOLCONTROL,OFF in the /SOLU phase. See the SOLCONTROL
command description for more details. ANSYS' automatic solution control is active
for the following analyses: • • Single-field nonlinear or transient structural and
solid mechanics analysis where the solution DOFs are combinations of UX, UY, UZ,
ROTX, ROTY, and ROTZ. Single-field nonlinear or transient thermal analysis where
the solution DOF is TEMP. Note — The Solution Controls dialog box, which is
described later in this chapter, cannot be used to set solution controls for a
thermal analysis. Instead, you must use the standard set of ANSYS solution
commands and the standard corresponding menu paths.
8.5. Performing a Nonlinear Static Analysis

The procedure for performing a nonlinear static analysis consists of these tasks:
• • • • • • Section 8.5.1: Build the Model Section 8.5.2: Set Solution Controls
Section 8.5.3: Set Additional Solution Options Section 8.5.4: Apply the Loads
Section 8.5.5: Solve the Analysis Section 8.5.6: Review the Results

This step is essentially the same for both linear and nonlinear analyses, although
a nonlinear analysis might include special elements or nonlinear material
properties. See Section 8.9: Using Nonlinear (Changing-Status) Elements, and
Section 8.3: Modeling Material Nonlinearities, for more details. If your analysis
includes large-strain effects, your stress-strain data must be expressed in terms
of true stress and true (or logarithmic) strain. For more information on building
models in ANSYS, see the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide. After you have created
a model in ANSYS, you set solution controls (analysis type, analysis options, load
step options, and so on), apply loads, and solve. A nonlinear solution will differ
from a linear solution in that it often requires multiple load increments, and
always requires equilibrium iterations. The general procedure for performing these
tasks follows. See Section 8.11: Sample Nonlinear Analysis (GUI Method) for a
sample problem that walks you through a specific nonlinear analysis.

Setting solution controls for a nonlinear analysis involves the same options and
method of access (the Solution Controls dialog box) as those used for a linear
structural static analysis. For a nonlinear analysis, the default settings in the
Solution Controls dialog box are essentially the same settings employed by the
automatic solution control method described in Section 8.4: Running a Nonlinear
Analysis in ANSYS. See the following sections in Chapter 2, “Structural Static
Analysis”, with exceptions noted: • • • Section 2.3.2: Set Solution Controls
Section 2.3.2.1: Access the Solution Controls Dialog Box Section 2.3.2.2: Using
the Basic Tab
8–49
Chapter 8: Nonlinear Structural Analysis • • • • Section 2.3.2.3: The Transient
Tab Section 2.3.2.4: Using the Sol'n Options Tab Section 2.3.2.5: Using the
Nonlinear Tab Section 2.3.2.6: Using the Advanced NL Tab
8.5.2.1. Using the Basic Tab: Special Considerations

Special considerations for setting these options in a nonlinear structural static
analysis include: • When setting ANTYPE and NLGEOM, choose Large Displacement
Static if you are performing a new analysis. (But, keep in mind that not all
nonlinear analyses will produce large deformations. See Section 8.2: Using
Geometric Nonlinearities for further discussion of large deformations.) Choose
Restart Current Analysis if you want to restart a failed nonlinear analysis. You
cannot change this setting after the first load step (that is, after you issue
your first SOLVE command). You will usually choose to do a new analysis, rather
than a restart. Restarts are discussed in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide. When
working with time settings, remember that these options can be changed at any load
step. See Chapter 2, “Loading” in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for more
information on these options. Advanced time/frequency options, in addition to
those available on the Solution Controls dialog box, are discussed in Section
8.5.2.3: Advanced Load Step Options You Can Set on the Solution Controls Dialog
Box. A nonlinear analysis requires multiple substeps (or time steps; the two terms
are equivalent) within each load step so that ANSYS can apply the specified loads
gradually and obtain an accurate solution. The NSUBST and DELTIM commands both
achieve the same effect (establishing a load step's starting, minimum, and maximum
step size), but by reciprocal means. NSUBST defines the number of substeps to be
taken within a load step, whereas DELTIM defines the time step size explicitly. If
automatic time stepping is off [AUTOTS], then the starting substep size is used
throughout the load step. • OUTRES controls the data on the results file
(Jobname.RST). By default, only the last substep is written to the results file in
a nonlinear analysis. Only 1000 results sets (substeps) can be written to the
results file, but you can use the command /CONFIG,NRES to increase the limit (see
the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide).
8.5.2.2. Advanced Analysis Options You Can Set on the Solution Controls Dialog Box
The following sections provide more detail about some of the advanced analysis
options that you can set on the Solution Controls dialog box.
8.5.2.2.1. Equation Solver

ANSYS' automatic solution control activates the sparse direct solver
(EQSLV,SPARSE) for most cases. The sparse direct solver is the default, except for
the generation pass of a substructure analysis (which uses the frontal direct
solver). Other choices include the frontal direct and PCG solvers. For
applications using solid elements (for example, SOLID92 or SOLID45), the PCG
solver may be faster, especially when doing 3-D modeling. If you are using the PCG
solver, you may be able to considerably reduce your memory usage with the MSAVE
command. The MSAVE command triggers an element-by-element approach for the parts
of the model that use SOLID45, SOLID92, SOLID95, SOLID185, SOLID186, and/or
SOLID187 elements with linear material properties. To use this command, you must
be doing a static analysis or a modal analysis with the PowerDynamics method. When
using SOLID186 and/or SOLID187, only small strain (NLGEOM,OFF) analyses are
allowed. Other parts of the model that do not meet the above criteria will be
solved using global assembly for the stiffness matrix. 8–50
Section 8.5: Performing a Nonlinear Static Analysis MSAVE,ON can result in a
memory savings of up to 70% for the part of the model that meets the criteria,
although the solution time may increase depending on the manufacturer of your
computer and the speed of your processor, as well as the chosen element options
(for example, 2 x 2 x 2 integration for SOLID95). The sparse direct solver, in
sharp contrast to the iterative solvers included in ANSYS, is a robust solver.
Although the PCG solver can solve indefinite matrix equations, when the PCG solver
encounters an ill-conditioned matrix, the solver will iterate to the specified
number of iterations and stop if it fails to converge. When this happens, it
triggers bisection. After completing the bisection, the solver continues the
solution if the resulting matrix is wellconditioned. Eventually, the entire
nonlinear load step can be solved. Use the following guidelines for selecting
either the sparse or the PCG solver for nonlinear structural analysis: • • • If it
is a beam/shell or beam/shell and solid structure, choose the sparse direct
solver. If it is a 3-D solid structure and the number of DOF is relatively large
(that is, 200,000 or more DOF), choose the PCG solver. If the problem is ill-
conditioned (triggered by poor element shapes), or has a big difference in
material properties in different regions of the model, or has insufficient
displacement boundary constraints, choose the sparse direct solver.
8.5.2.3. Advanced Load Step Options You Can Set on the Solution Controls Dialog
Box
The following sections provide more detail about some of the advanced load step
options that you can set on the Solution Controls dialog box.
8.5.2.3.1. Automatic Time Stepping

ANSYS' automatic solution control turns automatic time stepping on [AUTOTS,ON]. An
internal auto-time step scheme ensures that the time step variation is neither too
aggressive (resulting in many bisection/cutbacks) nor too conservative (time step
size is too small). At the end of a time step, the size of the next time step is
predicted based on four factors: • • • • Number of equilibrium iterations used in
the last time step (more iterations cause the time step size to be reduced)
Predictions for nonlinear element status change (time step sizes are decreased
when a status change is imminent) Size of the plastic strain increment Size of the
creep strain increment
8.5.2.3.2. Convergence Criteria

The program will continue to do equilibrium iterations until the convergence
criteria [CNVTOL] are satisfied (or until the maximum number of equilibrium
equations is reached [NEQIT]). You can define custom criteria if the default
settings are not suitable. ANSYS' automatic solution control uses L2-norm of force
(and moment) tolerance (TOLER) equal to 0.5%, a setting that is appropriate for
most cases. In most cases, an L2-norm check on displacement with TOLER equal to 5%
is also used in addition to the force norm check. The check that the displacements
are loosely set serves as a doublecheck on convergence.
8–51
Chapter 8: Nonlinear Structural Analysis By default, the program will check for
force (and, when rotational degrees of freedom are active, moment) convergence by
comparing the square root sum of the squares (SRSS) of the force imbalances
against the product of VALUE*TOLER. The default value of VALUE is the SRSS of the
applied loads (or, for applied displacements, of the Newton-Raphson restoring
forces), or MINREF (which defaults to 0.01), whichever is greater. The default
value of TOLER is 0.005. If SOLCONTROL,OFF, TOLER defaults to 0.001 and MINREF
defaults to 1.0 for force convergence. You should almost always use force
convergence checking. You can also add displacement (and, when applicable,
rotation) convergence checking. For displacements, the program bases convergence
checking on the change in deflections (∆u) between the current (i) and the
previous (i-1) iterations: ∆u=ui-ui-1. Note — If you explicitly define any custom
convergence criteria [CNVTOL], the entire default criteria will be overwritten.
Thus, if you define displacement convergence checking, you will have to redefine
force convergence checking. (Use multiple CNVTOL commands to define multiple
convergence criteria.) Using tighter convergence criteria will improve the
accuracy of your results, but at the cost of more equilibrium iterations. If you
want to tighten (or loosen, which is not recommended) your criteria, you should
change TOLER by one or two orders of magnitude. In general, you should continue to
use the default value of VALUE; that is, change the convergence criteria by
adjusting TOLER, not VALUE. You should make certain that the default value of
MINREF = 0.001 makes sense in the context of your analysis. If your analysis uses
certain sets of units or has very low load levels, you might want to specify a
smaller value for MINREF. Also, we do not recommend putting two or more disjointed
structures into one model for a nonlinear analysis because the convergence check
tries to relate these disjointed structures, often producing some unwanted
residual force. Checking Convergence in a Single and Multi-DOF System To check
convergence in a single degree of freedom (DOF) system, you compute the force (and
moment) imbalance for the one DOF, and compare this value against the established
convergence criteria (VALUE*TOLER). (You can also perform a similar check for
displacement (and rotation) convergence for your single DOF.) However, in a multi-
DOF system, you might want to use a different method of comparison. The ANSYS
program provides three different vector norms to use for convergence checking: • •
• The infinite norm repeats the single-DOF check at each DOF in your model. The L1
norm compares the convergence criterion against the sum of the absolute values of
force (and moment) imbalance for all DOFs. The L2 norm performs the convergence
check using the square root sum of the squares of the force (and moment)
imbalances for all DOFs. (Of course, additional L1 or L2 checking can be performed
for a displacement convergence check.)
Example For the following example, the substep will be considered to be converged
if the out-of-balance force (checked at each DOF separately) is less than or equal
to 5000*0.0005 (that is, 2.5), and if the change in displacements (checked as the
square root sum of the squares) is less than or equal to 10*0.001 (that is, 0.01).
CNVTOL,F,5000,0.0005,0 CNVTOL,U,10,0.001,2
8–52
Section 8.5: Performing a Nonlinear Static Analysis
8.5.2.3.3. Maximum Number of Equilibrium Iterations

ANSYS' automatic solution control sets the value of NEQIT to between 15 and 26
iterations, depending upon the physics of the problem. The idea is to employ a
small time step with fewer quadratically converging iterations. This option limits
the maximum number of equilibrium iterations to be performed at each substep
(default = 25 if solution control is off). If the convergence criteria have not
been satisfied within this number of equilibrium iterations, and if auto time
stepping is on [AUTOTS], the analysis will attempt to bisect. If bisection is not
possible, then the analysis will either terminate or move on to the next load
step, according to the instructions you issue in the NCNV command.
8.5.2.3.4. Predictor-Corrector Option

ANSYS' automatic solution control will set PRED,ON if there are no beam or shell
elements present. If the time step size is reduced greatly in the current substep,
PRED is turned off. For transient analysis, the predictor is also turned off. You
can activate a predictor on the DOF solution for the first equilibrium iteration
of each substep. This feature accelerates convergence and is particularly useful
if nonlinear response is relatively smooth. It is not so helpful in analyses that
incorporate large rotations or viscoelasticity. Using the predictor for large
rotations can cause divergence and thus is not recommended for problems with large
rotations.
8.5.2.3.5. Line Search Option

ANSYS' automatic solution control will toggle line search on and off as needed.
For most contact problems, LNSRCH is toggled on. For most non-contact problems,
LNSRCH is toggled off. This convergence-enhancement tool multiplies the calculated
displacement increment by a program-calculated scale factor (having a value
between 0 and 1), whenever a stiffening response is detected. Because the line
search algorithm is intended to be an alternative to the adaptive descent option
[NROPT], adaptive descent is not automatically activated if the line search option
is on. We do not recommend activating both line search and adaptive descent
simultaneously. When an imposed displacement exists, a run cannot converge until
at least one of the iterations has a line search value of 1. ANSYS scales the
entire ∆U vector, including the imposed displacement value; otherwise, a "small"
displacement would occur everywhere except at the imposed DOF. Until one of the
iterations has a line search value of 1, ANSYS does not impose the full value of
the displacement.
8.5.2.3.6. Cutback Criteria

For finer control over bisections and cutback in time step size, use [CUTCONTROL,
Lab, VALUE, Option]. By default, for Lab = PLSLIMIT (maximum plastic strain
increment limit), VALUE is set to 15%. This field is set to such a large value for
avoiding unnecessary bisections caused by high plastic strain due to a local
singularity which is not normally of interest to the user. For explicit creep
(Option = 0), Lab = CRPLIM (creep increment limit) and VALUE is set to 10%. This
is a reasonable limit for creep analysis. For implicit creep (Option = 1), there
is no maximum creep criteria by default. You can however, specify any creep ratio
control. The number of points per cycle for second order dynamic equations (Lab =
NPOINT) is set to VALUE = 13 by default to gain efficiency at little cost to
accuracy.

This section discusses additional options that you can set for the solution. These
options do not appear on the Solution Controls dialog box because they are used
infrequently, and their default settings rarely need to be
8–53
Chapter 8: Nonlinear Structural Analysis changed. ANSYS menu paths are provided in
this section to help you access these options for those cases in which you choose
to override the ANSYS-assigned defaults.
8.5.3.1. Advanced Analysis Options You Cannot Set on the Solution Controls Dialog
Box
The following sections describe some advanced analysis options that you can set
for your analysis. As noted above in Section 8.5.3: Set Additional Solution
Options, you cannot use the Solution Controls dialog box to set the options
described below. Instead, you must set them using the standard set of ANSYS
solution commands and the standard corresponding menu paths.
8.5.3.1.1. Stress Stiffness

To account for buckling, bifurcation behavior, ANSYS includes stress stiffness in
all geometrically nonlinear analyses. If you are confident of ignoring such
effects, you can turn stress stiffening off (SSTIF,OFF). This command has no
effect when used with several ANSYS elements; see the ANSYS Elements Reference for
the description of the specific elements you are using. Command(s): SSTIF GUI:
Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis Type> Analysis Options
8.5.3.1.2. Newton-Raphson Option

ANSYS' automatic solution control will use the FULL Newton-Raphson option with
adaptive descent off if there is a nonlinearity present. However, when node-to-
node, node-to-surface contact elements are used for contact analysis with
friction, then adaptive descent is automatically turned on (for example, PIPE20,
BEAM23, BEAM24, and PIPE60). The underlying contact elements require adaptive
descent for convergence. Command(s): NROPT GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged
Menu> Analysis Type> Analysis Options Use this option only in a nonlinear
analysis. This option specifies how often the tangent matrix is updated during
solution. If you choose to override the default, you can specify one of these
values: • • Program-chosen (NROPT,AUTO): The program chooses which of the options
to use, based on the kinds of nonlinearities present in your model. Adaptive
descent will be automatically activated, when appropriate. Full (NROPT,FULL): The
program uses the full Newton-Raphson procedure, in which the stiffness matrix is
updated at every equilibrium iteration. If adaptive descent is on (optional), the
program will use the tangent stiffness matrix only as long as the iterations
remain stable (that is, as long as the residual decreases, and no negative main
diagonal pivot occurs). If divergent trends are detected on an iteration, the
program discards the divergent iteration and restarts the solution, using a
weighted combination of the secant and tangent stiffness matrices. When the
iterations return to a convergent pattern, the program will resume using the
tangent stiffness matrix. Activating adaptive descent will usually enhance the
program's ability to obtain converged solutions for complicated nonlinear problems
but is supported only for elements indicated under "Special Features" in the Input
Summary table (Table 4.n.1 for an element, where n is the element number) in the
ANSYS Elements Reference. • Modified (NROPT,MODI): The program uses the modified
Newton-Raphson technique, in which the tangent stiffness matrix is updated at each
substep. The matrix is not changed during equilibrium iterations at a substep.
This option is not applicable to large deformation analyses. Adaptive descent is
not available. Initial Stiffness (NROPT,INIT): The program uses the initial
stiffness matrix in every equilibrium iteration. This option can be less likely to
diverge than the full option, but it often requires more iterations to achieve
convergence. It is not applicable to large deformation analyses. Adaptive descent
is not available.
•
8–54
Section 8.5: Performing a Nonlinear Static Analysis • Full with unsymmetric matrix
(NROPT,UNSYM): The program uses the full Newton-Raphson procedure, in which the
stiffness matrix is updated at every equilibrium iteration. In addition, it
generates and uses unsymmetric matrices that you can use for any of the following:
– – – If you are running a pressure-driven collapse analysis, an unsymmetric
pressure load stiffness might be helpful in obtaining convergence. You can include
pressure load stiffness using SOLCONTROL,INCP. If you are defining an unsymmetric
material model using TB,USER, you would need NROPT,UNSYM to fully use the property
you defined. If you are running a contact analysis, an unsymmetric contact
stiffness matrix would fully couple the sliding and the normal stiffnesses. See
Section 3.8.4: Determining Contact Stiffness and Allowable Penetration in the
ANSYS Contact Technology Guide for details.
You should first try NROPT,FULL; then try NROPT,UNSYM if you experience
convergence difficulties. Note that using an unsymmetric solver requires more
computer time to obtain a solution, than if you use a symmetric solver. • If a
multistatus element is in the model, however, it would be updated at the iteration
in which it changes status, irrespective of the Newton-Raphson option.
8.5.3.2. Advanced Load Step Options You Cannot Set on the Solution Controls Dialog
Box
The following sections describe some advanced load step options that you can set
for your analysis. As noted above in Section 8.5.3: Set Additional Solution
Options, you cannot use the Solution Controls dialog box to set the options
described below. Instead, you must set them using the standard set of ANSYS
solution commands and the standard corresponding menu paths.
8.5.3.2.1. Creep Criteria

If your structure exhibits creep behavior, you can specify a creep criterion for
automatic time step adjustment [CRPLIM,CRCR, Option]. (If automatic time stepping
[AUTOTS] is off, this creep criterion will have no effect.) The program will
compute the ratio of creep strain increment (∆εcr, the change in creep strain in
the last time step) to the elastic strain (εel), for all elements. If the maximum
ratio is greater than the criterion CRCR, the program will then decrease the next
time step size; if it is less, the program might increase the next time step size.
(The program will also base automatic time stepping on the number of equilibrium
iterations, impending element status change, and plastic strain increment. The
time step size will be adjusted to the minimum size calculated for any of these
items.) For explicit creep (Option = 0), if the ratio ∆εcr / εel is above the
stability limit of 0.25, and if the time increment cannot be decreased, a
divergent solution is possible and the analysis will be terminated with an error
message. This problem can be avoided by making the minimum time step size
sufficiently small [DELTIM and NSUBST]. For implicit creep (Option = 1), there is
no maximum creep limit by default. You can however, specify any creep ratio
control. Command(s): CRPLIM GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Load Step
Opts> Nonlinear> Creep Criterion Note — If you do not want to include the effects
of creep in your analysis, use the RATE command with Option = OFF, or set the time
steps to be longer than the previous time step, but not more than 1.0e-6 longer.
8.5.3.2.2. Time Step Open Control

This option is available for thermal analysis. (Remember that you cannot perform a
thermal analysis using the Solution Controls dialog box; you must use the standard
set of ANSYS solution commands or the standard
8–55
Chapter 8: Nonlinear Structural Analysis corresponding menu paths instead.) This
option's primary use is in unsteady state thermal analysis where the final
temperature stage reaches a steady state. In such cases, the time step can be
opened quickly. The default is that if the TEMP increment is smaller than 0.1 in
three (NUMSTEP = 3) contiguous substeps, the time step size can be "opened-up"
(value = 0.1 by default). The time step size can then be opened continuously for
greater solution efficiency. Command(s): OPNCONTROL GUI: Main Menu> Solution>
Unabridged Menu> Load Step Opts> Nonlinear> Open Control
8.5.3.2.3. Solution Monitoring

This option provides a facility to monitor a solution value at a specified node in
a specified DOF. The command also provides the user with a means to quickly review
the solution convergence efficiency, rather than attempting to gather this
information from a lengthy output file. For instance, if an excessive number of
attempts were made for a substep, the information contained in the file provides
hints to either reduce the initial time step size or increase the minimum number
of substeps allowed through the NSUBST command to avoid an excessive number of
bisections. Command(s): MONITOR GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Load
Step Opts> Nonlinear> Monitor
8.5.3.2.4. Birth and Death

Specify birth and death options as necessary. You can deactivate [EKILL] and
reactivate [EALIVE] selected elements to model the removal or addition of material
in your structure. As an alternative to the standard birth and death method, you
can change the material properties for selected elements [MPCHG] between load
steps. Command(s): EKILL, EALIVE GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Other>
Birth & Death> Kill Elements Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Other> Birth &
Death> Activate Elem The program “deactivates” an element by multiplying its
stiffness by a very small number (which is set by the ESTIF command), and by
removing its mass from the overall mass matrix. Element loads (pressure, heat
flux, thermal strains, and so on) for inactive elements are also set to zero. You
need to define all possible elements during preprocessing; you cannot create new
elements in SOLUTION. Those elements to be “born” in later stages of your analysis
should be deactivated before the first load step, and then reactivated at the
beginning of the appropriate load step. When elements are reactivated, they have a
zero strain state, and (if NLGEOM,ON) their geometric configuration (length, area,
and so on) is updated to match the current displaced positions of their nodes. See
the ANSYS Advanced Analysis Techniques Guide for more information on birth and
death. Another way to affect element behavior during solution is to change the
material property reference number for selected elements: Command(s): MPCHG GUI:
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Other> Change Mat Props> Change Mat Num Note
— Use MPCHG with caution. Changing material properties in a nonlinear analysis may
produce unintended results, particularly if you change nonlinear [TB] material
properties.
8.5.3.2.5. Output Control

In addition to OUTRES, which you can set on the Solution Controls dialog box,
there are several other output control options that you can set for an analysis:
Command(s): OUTPR, ERESX GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Load Step
Opts> Output Ctrls> Solu Printout 8–56
Section 8.5: Performing a Nonlinear Static Analysis Main Menu> Solution>
Unabridged Menu> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> Integration Pt Printed output
[OUTPR] includes any results data on the output file (Jobname.OUT). Extrapolation
of results [ERESX] copies an element's integration point stress and elastic strain
results to the nodes instead of extrapolating them, if nonlinear strains
(plasticity, creep, swelling) are present in the element. The integration point
nonlinear strains are always copied to the nodes. See Chapter 2, “Loading” in the
ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for more information on these options.

Apply loads on the model. See Chapter 2, “Structural Static Analysis” in this
guide and Chapter 2, “Loading” in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for load
information. Remember that inertia and point loads will maintain constant
direction, but surface loads will "follow" the structure in a large-deformation
analysis. You can apply complex boundary conditions by defining a one-dimensional
table (TABLE type array parameter). See Section 2.3.4.2.1: Applying Loads Using
TABLE Type Array Parameters in this guide for more information.
8.5.5. Solve the Analysis

You solve a nonlinear analysis using the same commands and procedure as you do in
solving a linear static analysis. See Section 2.3.5: Solve the Analysis in Chapter
2, “Structural Static Analysis”. If you need to define multiple load steps, you
must respecify time settings, load step options, and so on, and then save and
solve for each of the additional load steps. Other methods for multiple load steps
- the load step file method and the array parameter method - are described in the
ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.

Results from a nonlinear static analysis consist mainly of displacements,
stresses, strains, and reaction forces. You can review these results in POST1, the
general postprocessor, or in POST26, the time-history postprocessor. Remember that
in POST1, only one substep can be read in at a time, and that the results from
that substep should have been written to Jobname.RST. (The load step option
command OUTRES controls which substep results are stored on Jobname.RST.) A
typical POST1 postprocessing sequence is described below.

• • To review results in POST1, the database must contain the same model for which
the solution was calculated. The results file (Jobname.RST) must be available.
8.5.6.2. Reviewing Results in POST1

1. Verify from your output file (Jobname.OUT) whether or not the analysis
converged at all load steps. • • 2. If not, you probably will not want to
postprocess the results, other than to determine why convergence failed. If your
solution converged, then continue postprocessing.
Enter POST1. If your model is not currently in the database, issue RESUME.
Command(s): /POST1 GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc
8–57
Chapter 8: Nonlinear Structural Analysis 3. Read in results for the desired load
step and substep, which can be identified by load step and substep numbers or by
time. (Note, however, that arc-length results should not be identified by time.)
Command(s): SET GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> load step You can
also use the SUBSET or APPEND commands to read in or merge results data for
selected portions of the model only. The LIST argument on any of these commands
lists the available solutions on the results file. You can also limit the amount
of data written from the results file to the database through the INRES command.
Additionally, you can use the ETABLE command to store result items for selected
elements. See the individual command descriptions in the ANSYS Commands Reference
for more information. Caution: If you specify a TIME value for which no results
are available, the ANSYS program will perform a linear interpolation to calculate
the results at that value of TIME. Realize that this interpolation will usually
cause some loss of accuracy in a nonlinear analysis (see Figure 8.23: “Linear
Interpolation of Nonlinear Results Can Introduce Some Error”). Thus, for a
nonlinear analysis, you should usually postprocess at a TIME that corresponds
exactly to the desired substep.
Figure 8.23 Linear Interpolation of Nonlinear Results Can Introduce Some Error
4.
Display the results using any of the following options: Option: Display Deformed
Shape Command(s): PLDISP GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Deformed
Shape In a large deformation analysis, you might prefer to use a true scale
display [/DSCALE,,1]. Option: Contour Displays Command(s): PLNSOL or PLESOL GUI:
Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Nodal Solu or Element
Solu Use these options to display contours of stresses, strains, or any other
applicable item. If you have adjacent elements with different material behavior
(such as can occur with plastic or multilinear elastic material properties, with
different material types, or with adjacent deactivated and activated elements),
you
8–58
Section 8.5: Performing a Nonlinear Static Analysis should take care to avoid
nodal stress averaging errors in your results. Selecting logic (described in the
ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide) provides a means of avoiding such errors. The KUND
field on PLNSOL and PLESOL gives you the option of overlaying the undeformed shape
on the display. You can also contour element table data and line element data:
Command(s): PLETAB, PLLS GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Element Table> Plot
Element Table Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Line Elem
Res Use PLETAB to contour element table data and PLLS to contour line element
data. Option: Tabular Listings Command(s): PRNSOL (nodal results) PRESOL (element-
by-element results) PRRSOL (reaction data) PRETAB PRITER (substep summary data),
and so on. NSORT ESORT GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Nodal
Solution Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Element Solution Main Menu>
General Postproc> List Results> Reaction Solution Use the NSORT and ESORT commands
to sort the data before listing them. Other Capabilities Many other postprocessing
functions - mapping results onto a path, report quality listings, and so on are
available in POST1. See The General Postprocessor (POST1) in the ANSYS Basic
Analysis Guide for details. Load case combinations usually are not valid for
nonlinear analyses.
8.5.6.3. Reviewing Results in POST26

You can also review the load-history response of a nonlinear structure using
POST26, the time-history postprocessor. Use POST26 to compare one ANSYS variable
against another. For instance, you might graph the displacement at a node versus
the corresponding level of applied load, or you might list the plastic strain at a
node and the corresponding TIME value. A typical POST26 postprocessing sequence
might follow these steps: 1. 2. Verify from your output file (Jobname.OUT) whether
or not the analysis converged at all desired load steps. You should not base
design decisions on unconverged results. If your solution converged, enter POST26.
If your model is not currently in the database, issue RESUME. Command(s): /POST26
GUI: Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro Define the variables to be used in your
postprocessing session. The SOLU command will cause various iteration and
convergence parameters to be read into the database, where you can incorporate
them into your postprocessing. Command(s): NSOL, ESOL, RFORCE GUI: Main Menu>
TimeHist Postpro> Define Variables Graph or list the variables. Command(s): PLVAR
(graph variables) PRVAR EXTREM (list variables) GUI: Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro>
Graph Variables Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> List Variables Main Menu> TimeHist
Postpro> List Extremes
3.
4.
8–59
Other Capabilities
Many other postprocessing functions are available in POST26. See Chapter 6, “The
Time-History Postprocessor (POST26)” in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for
details. See the NLGEOM, SSTIF, NROPT, TIME, NSUBST, AUTOTS, KBC, CNVTOL, NEQIT,
NCNV, PRED, OUTRES, and SOLU command descriptions for more information.
8.5.7. Terminating a Running Job; Restarting

You can stop a nonlinear analysis by creating an "abort" file (Jobname.ABT). See
Chapter 3, “Solution” in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for details. The program
will also stop upon successful completion of the solution, or if a convergence
failure occurs. You can often restart an analysis if it successfully completed one
or more iterations before it terminated. Restart procedures are covered in Section
3.10: Restarting an Analysis in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.
8.6. Performing a Nonlinear Transient Analysis

Many of the tasks that you need to perform in a nonlinear transient analysis are
the same as (or similar to) those that you perform in nonlinear static analyses
(described in Section 8.5: Performing a Nonlinear Static Analysis) and linear full
transient dynamic analyses (described in Chapter 2, “Structural Static Analysis”).
However, this section describes some additional considerations for performing a
nonlinear transient analysis. Remember that the Solution Controls dialog box,
which is the method described in Section 8.5: Performing a Nonlinear Static
Analysis, cannot be used to set solution controls for a thermal analysis. Instead,
you must use the standard set of ANSYS solution commands and the standard
corresponding menu paths.

This step is the same as for a nonlinear static analysis. However, if your
analysis includes time-integration effects, be sure to include a value for mass
density [MP,DENS]. If you want to, you can also define material-dependent
structural damping [MP,DAMP].

1. Specify transient analysis type and define analysis options as you would for a
nonlinear static analysis: • • • • 2. New Analysis or Restart [ANTYPE] Analysis
Type: Transient [ANTYPE] Large Deformation Effects [NLGEOM] Large Displacement
Transient (if using the Solution Controls dialog box to set analysis type)
Apply loads and specify load step options in the same manner as you would for a
linear full transient dynamic analysis. A transient load history usually requires
multiple load steps, with the first load step typically used to establish initial
conditions (see the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide). The general, nonlinear, birth and
death, and output control options available for a nonlinear static analysis are
also available for a nonlinear transient analysis. In a nonlinear transient
analysis, time must be greater than zero. See Chapter 5, “Transient Dynamic
Analysis” for procedures for defining nonzero initial conditions.
8–60
Section 8.6: Performing a Nonlinear Transient Analysis For a nonlinear transient
analysis, you must specify whether you want stepped or ramped loads [KBC]. See the
ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for further discussion about ramped vs. stepped loads.
You can also specify dynamics options: alpha and beta damping, time integration
effects, and transient integration parameters. Command(s): ALPHAD, BETAD, TIMINT,
TINTP GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> Sol'n Control ( : Transient Tab)
Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Damping Main
Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Time Integration
An explanation of the dynamics options follows. • Damping Rayleigh damping
constants are defined using the constant mass [ALPHAD] and stiffness [BETAD]
matrix multipliers. In a nonlinear analysis the stiffness may change drastically -
do not use BETAD, except with care. See Section 5.10.3: Damping for details about
damping. • Time Integration Effects [TIMINT] Time integration effects are ON by
default in a transient analysis. For creep, viscoelasticity, viscoplasticity, or
swelling, you should turn the time integration effects off (that is, use a static
analysis). These time-dependent effects are usually not included in dynamic
analyses because the transient dynamic time step sizes are often too short for any
significant amount of long-term deformation to occur. Except in kinematic (rigid-
body motion) analyses, you will rarely need to adjust the transient integration
parameters [TINTP], which provide numerical damping to the Newmark and HHT
methods. (See your ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for more information about these
parameters.) ANSYS' automatic solution control sets the defaults to a new time
integration scheme for use by first order transient equations. This is typically
used for unsteady state thermal problems where θ = 1.0 (set by SOLCONTROL, ON);
this is the backward Euler scheme. It is unconditionally stable and more robust
for highly nonlinear thermal problems such as phase changes. The oscillation limit
tolerance defaults to 0.0, so that the response first order eigenvalues can be
used to more precisely determine a new time step value. Note — If you are using
the Solution Controls dialog box to set solution controls, you can access all of
these options [ALPHAD, BETAD, KBC, TIMINT, TINTP, TRNOPT] on the Transient tab. 3.
Write load data for each load step to a load step file. Command(s): LSWRITE GUI:
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Write LS File Save a backup copy of the
database to a named file. Command(s): SAVE GUI: Utility Menu> File> Save As Start
solution calculations. Other methods for multiple load steps are described in
Chapter 1, “Getting Started with ANSYS” in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.
Command(s): LSSOLVE GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Solve> From LS Files After you have
solved all load steps, leave SOLUTION. Command(s): FINISH
4.
5.
6.
8–61
Chapter 8: Nonlinear Structural Analysis GUI: Close the Solution menu.

As in a nonlinear static analysis, you can use POST1 to postprocess results at a
specific moment in time. Procedures are much the same as described previously for
nonlinear static analyses. Again, you should verify that your solution has
converged before you attempt to postprocess the results. Time-history
postprocessing using POST26 is essentially the same for nonlinear as for linear
transient analyses. See the postprocessing procedures outlined in Chapter 5,
“Transient Dynamic Analysis”. More details of postprocessing procedures can be
found in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide.
8.7. Sample Input for a Nonlinear Transient Analysis

A sample input listing for a nonlinear transient analysis is shown below:
! Build the Model: /PREP7 --! Similar to a linear full transient model, with --!
these possible additions: nonlinear material --! properties, nonlinear elements --
FINISH ! ! Apply Loads and Obtain the Solution: /SOLU ANTYPE,TRANS ! TRNOPT,FULL
by default --! Establish initial conditions as in linear full --! transient
analysis LSWRITE ! Initial-condition load step NLGEOM,ON ! Nonlinear geometric
effects (large deformations) SSTIF,ON ! Stress stiffening effects ! NROPT=AUTO by
default: Program will choose appropriate Newton-Raphson and ! Adaptive Descent
options, depending on ! nonlinearities encountered ! Loads: F,... D,... ! Load
Step Options: TIME,... ! TIME at end of load step DELTIM,... ! Time step controls
(starting, min, max) AUTOTS,ON ! Automatic time stepping, including bisection !
KBC=0 by default (ramped loading) ! Dynamic Options: ALPHAD,... ! Mass damping
TIMINT,ON ! TIMINT,ON by default, unless you turned it OFF for ! initial-condition
load step ! Nonlinear Options: CNVTOL,... ! Convergence criteria ! NEQIT=25 by
default NCNV,,,... ! Nonconvergence termination controls PRED,ON ! Predictor ON
OUTRES,ALL,ALL ! Results for every substep written to database LSWRITE ! First
"real" transient load step --! Additional load steps, as needed --LSSOLVE,1,3 !
Initiate multiple l.s. solution SAVE FINISH ! ! Review the Results: /POST26 !
Time-History Postprocessor SOLU,2,CNVG ! Check convergence SOLU,3,FOCV PRVAR,2,3
8–62
Section 8.9: Using Nonlinear (Changing-Status) Elements
NSOL,... PLVAR,... FINISH ! /POST1 SET,... PLDISP,... PLNSOL,... NSORT,...
PRNSOL,... FINISH ! ! ! ! Store results (displacements, stresses, etc.) as
variables Graph results vs. TIME to evaluate general quality of analysis,
determine critical time step, etc.
! General Postprocessor ! Read results from desired time step ! Postprocess as

desired
See the ANTYPE, TRNOPT, LSWRITE, NLGEOM, SSTIF, NROPT, TIME, DELTIM, AUTOTS, KBC,
ALPHAD, TIMINT, CNVTOL, NEQIT, NCNV, PRED, OUTRES, LSSOLVE, and SOLU command
8.8. Restarts
Restart procedures for a transient analysis are essentially the same as for a
static analysis; see Section 3.10: Restarting an Analysis in the ANSYS Basic
Analysis Guide.
8.9. Using Nonlinear (Changing-Status) Elements

Nonlinear elements display an abrupt change in stiffness when they experience a
change in status. For example, when a cable goes slack, its stiffness suddenly
drops to zero. When two separate bodies come into contact, their overall stiffness
changes drastically. These and other status-dependent stiffness changes can be
modeled by using nonlinear elements (described below), by applying birth and death
options to applicable elements (see the ANSYS Advanced Analysis Techniques Guide),
or by changing material properties [MPCHG]. Some of the nonlinear element features
described below are available only in the ANSYS Multiphysics, ANSYS Mechanical,
and ANSYS Structural products only. See the ANSYS Elements Reference for details.
• • • • • • • • • • COMBIN7 COMBIN14 COMBIN37 COMBIN39 COMBIN40 CONTAC12 and
CONTAC52 TARGE169, TARGE170, CONTA171, CONTA172, CONTA173, CONTA174, and CONTA175
LINK10 SHELL41 SOLID65
8.9.1. Element Birth and Death

Sometimes, an element's status changes between "existent" and "nonexistent." The
birth and death options [EKILL, EALIVE, ESTIF] (Main Menu> Solution> Load Step
Opts> Other) can be used to deactivate or reactivate selected elements in such
cases. The birth and death feature is discussed in detail in Chapter 12, “Element
Birth and Death” in the ANSYS Advanced Analysis Techniques Guide.
8–63
8.10. Tips and Guidelines for Nonlinear Analysis

This section describes tips and guidelines that can help you to perform a
nonlinear analysis.
8.10.1. Starting Out with Nonlinear Analysis

By taking your time and proceeding with reasonable caution, you can avoid many
difficulties commonly associated with nonlinear analyses. The following
suggestions should be useful.
8.10.1.1. Be Aware of How the Program and Your Structure Behave

If you have not used a particular nonlinear feature before, construct a very
simple model (that is, containing only a few elements), and make sure you
understand how to handle this feature before you use it in a large, complicated
model. • Gain preliminary insight into your structure's behavior by analyzing a
preliminary simplified model first. For nonlinear static models, a preliminary
linear static analysis can reveal which regions of your model will first
experience nonlinear response, and at what load levels these nonlinearities will
come into play. For nonlinear transient dynamic analyses, a preliminary model of
beams, masses, and springs can provide insight into the structure's dynamics at
minimal cost. Preliminary nonlinear static, linear transient dynamic, and/or modal
analyses can also help you to understand various aspects of your structure's
nonlinear dynamic response before you undertake the final nonlinear transient
dynamic analysis. Read and understand the program's output messages and warnings.
At a minimum, before you try to postprocess your results, make sure your problem
converged. For path-dependent problems, the printout's equilibrium iteration
record can be especially important in helping you to determine if your results are
valid or not.
8.10.1.2. Keep It Simple

• Keep your final model as simple as possible. If you can represent your 3-D
structure as a 2-D plane stress, plane strain, or axisymmetric model, do so. If
you can reduce your model size through the use of symmetry or antisymmetry
surfaces, do so. (However, if your model is loaded antisymmetrically, you can
generally not take advantage of antisymmetry to reduce a nonlinear model's size.
Antisymmetry can also be rendered inapplicable by large deflections.) If you can
omit a nonlinear detail without affecting results in critical regions of your
model, do so. Model transient dynamic loading in terms of static-equivalent loads
whenever possible. Consider substructuring the linear portions of your model to
reduce the computational effort required for intermediate load or time increments
and equilibrium iterations.
• •
8.10.1.3. Use an Adequate Mesh Density

• Recognize that regions undergoing plastic deformation require a reasonable
integration point density (mesh density is particularly important in plastic-hinge
regions). Higher-order elements use only the corner integration points for
nonlinear analyses, thus lower-order elements provide the same accuracy as
higherorder elements. However, the 18x elements are recommended for nonlinear
analyses. Provide an adequate mesh density on contact surfaces to allow contact
stresses to be distributed in a smooth fashion. Provide a mesh density adequate
for resolving stresses. Areas where stresses or strains are of interest require a
relatively fine mesh compared to that needed for displacement or nonlinearity
resolution.
• •
8–64
Section 8.10: Tips and Guidelines for Nonlinear Analysis • Use a mesh density
adequate to characterize the highest mode shape of interest. The number of
elements needed depends on the elements' assumed displacement shape functions, as
well as on the mode shape itself. Use a mesh density adequate to resolve any
transient dynamic wave propagation through your structure. If wave propagation is
important, then provide at least 20 elements to resolve one wavelength.
8.10.1.4. Apply the Load Gradually

• • For nonconservative, path-dependent systems, you need to apply the load in
small enough increments to ensure that your analysis will closely follow the
structure's load-response curve. You can sometimes improve the convergence
behavior of conservative systems by applying the load gradually, so as to minimize
the number of Newton-Raphson equilibrium iterations required.
8.10.2. Overcoming Convergence Problems

When performing a nonlinear analysis you may encounter convergence difficulties
due to a number of reasons. Some examples may be initially open contact surfaces
causing rigid body motion, large load increments causing nonconvergence, material
instabilities, or large deformations causing mesh distortion that result in
element shape errors. Solution control (SOLCONTROL) automatically adjusts solution
parameters and attempts to obtain a robust, accurate solution. In addition,
several tools are available in ANSYS that can help you identify potential problems
before, during, and after a solution. CHECK, MCHECK, and CNCHECK commands help you
verify if there are any obvious problems with the model before you start the
solution. The CHECK command does an overall verification of the model, including
missing elastic properties, unconstrained model, and element shape checks. The
MCHECK command can help you identify defects in the mesh such as holes or cracks,
especially when the mesh is imported from a third party software. The CNCHECK
command provides the initial contact status of contact pairs, identifying whether
the contacts are initially open or closed. If, for example, a part in your model
is constrained only through contact with other parts and if the contact surfaces
are open, the CNCHECK command can help you identify this potential error
condition. When you analyze models with large deformations, some portions of the
initial mesh can become highly distorted. Highly distorted elements can take on
unacceptable shapes, providing inaccurate results. This can cause your nonlinear
solution to stop. When this happens, use the ESCHECK command to perform shape
checking of deformed elements in the postprocessor (based on the current set of
results in database). This deformed-shape checker will help you to identify the
portions of your model that require different meshing, thereby allowing them to
retain acceptable shapes. Using ESCHECK at different time points will help you to
identify the load conditions that cause mesh deterioration. A convergence failure
can also indicate a physical instability in the structure, or it can merely be the
result of some numerical problem in the finite element model. The following
sections detail some of the techniques that you can use to attempt to improve the
convergence performance of your analysis.
8.10.2.1. Performing Nonlinear Diagnostics

The nonlinear diagnostics tool NLDIAG can help you find problems in your model
when an analysis will not converge.
8–65
Chapter 8: Nonlinear Structural Analysis Identify Regions of High Residual Forces
Issue the NLDIAG,NRRE command to write the Newton-Raphson residuals from
equilibrium iterations to a file (Jobname.nrxxx). You can then contour plot the
residual forces via the PLNSOL,NRRE command, which will help to identify regions
of high residual forces. Such a capability can be useful when you experience
convergence difficulties in the middle of a load step, where the model has a large
number of contact surfaces and other nonlinearities. You can restart the analysis
and issue an NLDIAG,NRRE command to write out the residuals. By tracking the way
the residuals change over several equilibrium iterations you can identify a
portion of your model where large residuals persist. You can then focus on the
nonlinearities in that area (for example, a contact pair's properties) instead of
having to deal with the entire model. Identify Problem Elements • • • • Too large
a distortion Elements contain nodes that have near zero pivots (nonlinear
analyses) Too large a plastic or creep strain increment Elements where mixed u-P
constraints are not satisfied (mixed U-P option of 18x solid elements only)
Typically, nonlinear analyses fail to converge for the following reasons:
ANSYS has default limits which, when exceeded, determine when convergence criteria
have been violated. Some limits are user-controlled; for example, the CUTCONTROL
command sets the maximum plastic/creep strain increments allowed in an iteration.
Other limits are fixed. The NLDIAG,EFLG command identifies elements that violate
the above criteria and records them in a file (Jobname.ndxxx). Note — Convergence
problems may occur when material algorithms fail (e.g. local element level
NewtonRaphson convergence failure, or extreme element distortion). The Ansys error
message identifies the corresponding element number and/or the material ID for
these cases. Be sure to read any error messages generated during solution. Process
the Tracked Results Issue the NLDPOST command to process the .ndxxx nonlinear
diagnostics files. The command creates components of elements that violate a
certain criterion for a particular equilibrium iteration (or iterations). Identify
contact pairs causing convergence difficulties Issue the NLDIAG,CONT command to
write various contact information for all defined contact pairs to a single
Jobname.cnd text file. The file is written during solution at a user-specified
frequency (each iteration, substep, or load step). Information stored in this file
will help identify when and how contact occurs, determine the regions where
contact is unstable, and identify the corresponding contact parameters. You can
then focus on the specific settings for those particular contact pairs that need
attention. Monitor the Diagnostics Results in Real Time The NLHIST command allows
you to monitor results of interest in real time during solution. Before starting
the solution, you can request nodal data such as displacements or reaction forces
at specific nodes. You can also request element nodal data such as stresses and
strains at specific elements to be graphed. Pair-based contact data are also
available. The result data are written to a file named Jobname.nlh. For example, a
reaction force-deflection curve could indicate when possible buckling behavior
occurs. Nodal results and contact results are monitored at every converged substep
while element nodal data are written as specified via the OUTRES setting.
8–66
Section 8.10: Tips and Guidelines for Nonlinear Analysis You can also track
results during batch runs. Either access the ANSYS Launcher and select File
Tracking from the Tools menu, or type nlhist81 at the command line. Use the
supplied file browser to navigate to your Jobname.nlh file, and click on it to
invoke the tracking utilty. You can use this utilty to read the file at any time,
even after the solution is complete (the data in the file must be formatted
correctly).
8.10.2.2. Tracking Convergence Graphically

As a nonlinear structural analysis proceeds, ANSYS computes convergence norms with
corresponding convergence criteria each equilibrium iteration. Available in both
batch and interactive sessions, the Graphical Solution Tracking (GST) feature
displays the computed convergence norms and criteria while the solution is in
process. By default, GST is ON for interactive sessions and OFF for batch runs. To
turn GST on or off, use either of the following: Command(s): /GST GUI: Main Menu>
Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> Grph Solu Track Figure 8.24: “Convergence
Norms Displayed By the Graphical Solution Tracking (GST) Feature” shows a typical
GST display:
Figure 8.24 Convergence Norms Displayed By the Graphical Solution Tracking (GST)
Feature
8.10.2.3. Using Automatic Time Stepping

• Be sure to place an upper limit on the time step size using DELTIM or NSUBST,
especially for complicated models. This ensures that all of the modes and
behaviors of interest will be accurately included. This can be important in the
following situations:
8–67
Chapter 8: Nonlinear Structural Analysis – – – Problems that have only localized
dynamic behavior (for example, turbine blade and hub assemblies) in which the low-
frequency energy content of the system could dominate the high-frequency areas.
Problems with short ramp times on some of their loads. If the time step size is
allowed to become too large, ramped portions of the load history may be
inaccurately characterized. Problems that include structures that are continuously
excited over a range of frequencies (for example, seismic problems).
Take care when modeling kinematic structures (systems with rigid-body motions).
These guidelines can usually help you obtain a good solution: – Incorporate
significant numerical damping (0.05 < γ < 0.1 on the TINTP command) into the
solution to filter out the high frequency noise, especially if a coarse time step
is used. Do not use α-damping (mass matrix multiplier, ALPHAD command) in a
dynamic kinematic analysis, as it will dampen the rigid body motion (zero
frequency mode) of the system. Avoid imposed displacement history specifications,
because imposed displacement input has (theoretically) infinite jumps in
acceleration, which causes stability problems for the Newmark time-integration
algorithm.
8.10.2.4. Using Line Search

Line search [LNSRCH] can be useful for enhancing convergence, but it can be
expensive (especially with plasticity). You might consider setting line search on
in the following cases: • • • When your structure is force-loaded (as opposed to
displacement-controlled). If you are analyzing a "flimsy" structure which exhibits
increasing stiffness (such as a fishing pole). If you notice (from the program
output messages) oscillatory convergence patterns.
8.10.2.5. Using the Arc-Length Method

You can use the arc-length method [ARCLEN and ARCTRM] to obtain numerically stable
solutions for many physically unstable structures. When using the arc-length
method, please keep in mind the following considerations: • • The arc-length
method is restricted to static analyses with proportional (ramped) loads only. The
program calculates the reference arc-length radius from the load (or displacement)
increment of the first iteration of the first substep, using the following
formula: (Total Load or Displacement) B NSBSTP
Reference Arc -Length Radius =
where NSBSTP is the number of substeps specified in the NSUBST command. When
choosing the number of substeps, consider that more substeps will result in a
longer solution time. Ideally, you want to choose the minimum number of substeps
required to produce an optimally efficient solution. You might have to take an
"educated guess" of the desired number of substeps, and adjust and re-analyze as
needed. • Do not use line search [LNSRCH], the predictor [PRED], adaptive descent
[NROPT,,,ON], automatic time stepping [AUTOTS, TIME, DELTIM], or time-integration
effects [TIMINT] when the arc-length method is active.
8–68
Section 8.10: Tips and Guidelines for Nonlinear Analysis • • • Do not attempt to
base convergence on displacement [CNVTOL,U]. Use the force criteria [CNVTOL,F]
instead. To help minimize solution time with the arc-length method, the maximum
number of equilibrium iterations in a single substep [NEQIT] should be less than
or equal to 15. If an arc-length solution fails to converge within the prescribed
maximum number of iterations [NEQIT], the program will automatically bisect and
continue the analysis. Bisection will continue either until a converged solution
is obtained, or until the minimum arc-length radius is used (the minimum radius is
defined by NSBSTP [NSUBST] and MINARC [ARCLEN]). In general, you cannot use this
method to obtain a solution at a specified load or displacement value because the
value changes (along the spherical arc) as equilibrium is achieved. Note in Figure
8.4: “Traditional Newton-Raphson Method vs. Arc-Length Method” how the specified
load point. The actual load at convergence is somewhat less. •
a F1
is only used as a starting
Similarly, it can be difficult to determine a value of limiting load or deflection

within some known tolerance when using the arc-length method in a nonlinear
buckling analysis. You generally have to adjust the reference arc-length radius
(using NSUBST) by trial-and-error to obtain a solution at the limit point. It
might be more convenient to use standard Newton-Raphson iterations with bisection
[AUTOTS] to determine values of nonlinear buckling loads. You should usually avoid
using the JCG solver [EQSLV] in conjunction with the arc-length method, because
the arc-length procedure might result in a negative definite stiffness matrix
(negative pivot), which can cause a solution failure with this solver. You can
freely switch from the Newton-Raphson iteration method to the arc-length method at
the start of any load step. However, to switch from arc-length to Newton-Raphson
iterations, you must terminate the analysis and restart, deactivating the arc-
length method in the first load step of the restart [ARCLEN,OFF]. An arc-length
solution terminates under these conditions: – When limits defined by the ARCTRM or
NCNV commands are reached – When the solution converges at the applied load – When
you use an abort file (Jobname.ABT) See the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for a
discussion of termination and restart procedures.
Use the load-deflection curve as a guide for evaluating and adjusting your
analysis to help you achieve the desired results. It is usually good practice to
graph your load-deflection curve (using POST26 commands) with every analysis.
Often, an unsuccessful arc-length analysis can be traced to an arc-length radius
that is either too large or too small. "Drifting back," in which the analysis
retraces its steps back along the load-deflection curve, is one typical difficulty
that is caused by using too large or too small an arc-length radius. Study the
loaddeflection curve to understand this problem. You can then use the NSUBST and
ARCLEN commands to adjust the arc-length radius size and range, as appropriate.
The total arc-length load factor (item ALLF on the SOLU command) can be either
positive or negative. Similarly, TIME, which in an arc-length analysis is related
to the total arc-length load factor, can also be either positive or negative.
Negative values of ALLF or TIME indicate that the arc-length feature is applying
load in the reverse direction, in order to maintain stability in the structure.
Negative ALLF or TIME values can be commonly encountered in various snap-through
analyses. When reading arc-length results into the database for POST1
postprocessing [SET], you should always reference the desired results data set by
its load step and substep number (LSTEP and SBSTEP) or by its
8–69
Chapter 8: Nonlinear Structural Analysis data set number (NSET). Do not reference
results by a TIME value, because TIME in an arc-length analysis is not always
monotonically increasing. (A single value of TIME might reference more than one
solution.) Additionally, the program cannot correctly interpret negative TIME
values (which might be encountered in a snap-through analysis). • If TIME becomes
negative, remember to define an appropriate variable range [/XRANGE or /YRANGE]
before creating any POST26 graphs.
8.10.2.6. Artificially Inhibit Divergence in Your Model's Response

If you do not want to use the arc-length method to analyze a force-loaded
structure that starts at, or passes through, a singular (zero stiffness)
configuration, you can sometimes use other techniques to artificially inhibit
divergence in your model's response: • In some cases, you can use imposed
displacements instead of applied forces. This approach can be used to start a
static analysis closer to the equilibrium position, or to control displacements
through periods of unstable response (for example, snap-through or postbuckling).
Another technique that can be effective in circumventing problems due to initial
instability is running a static problem as a "slow dynamic" analysis (that is,
using time-integration effects in an attempt to prevent the solution from
diverging in any one load step). You can also apply temporary artificial stiffness
to unstable DOFs, using control elements (such as COMBIN37), or using the birth
and death option on other elements. The idea here is to artificially restrain the
system during intermediate load steps in order to prevent unrealistically large
displacements from being calculated. As the system displaces into a stable
configuration, the artificial stiffness is removed.
8.10.2.7. Turn Off Extra Element Shapes

ANSYS provides "incompatible" modes" formulation (also referred to as "extra
shapes") for modeling bending applications. If your problem is predominantly bulk
deformation, then you may choose to turn extra shapes off to reduce CPU/storage
requirements and enhance convergence. However, doing so precludes the ability to
model any bending.
8.10.2.8. Using Birth and Death Wisely

Realize that any sudden change in your structure's stiffness matrix is likely to
cause convergence problems. When activating or deactivating elements, try to
spread the changes out over a number of substeps. (Use a small time step size if
necessary to accomplish this.) Also be aware of possible singularities (such as
sharp reentrant corners) that might be created as you activate or deactivate
elements. Such singularities can cause convergence problems.
8.10.2.9. Read Your Output

Remember that the ANSYS program performs a nonlinear analysis as a series of
linear approximations with corrections. The program printout gives you continuous
feedback on the progress of these approximations and corrections. (Printout either
appears directly on your screen, is captured on Jobname.OUT, or is written to some
other file [/OUTPUT].) You can examine some of this same information in POST1,
using the PRITER command, or in POST26, using the SOLU and PRVAR commands. You
should make sure that you understand the iteration history of your analysis before
you accept the results. In particular, do not dismiss any program error or warning
statements without fully understanding their meaning. A typical nonlinear output
listing is shown in Figure 8.25: “Typical Nonlinear Output Listing”.
8–70
Section 8.10: Tips and Guidelines for Nonlinear Analysis
Figure 8.25 Typical Nonlinear Output Listing

SOLVE command echo Checking Logic Load step summary table
***** ANSYS SOLVE COMMAND *****
*** NOTE *** CP= 13.891 TIME= 11:09:22 Nonlinear analysis, NROPT set to 1 (full
Newton-Raphson solution procedure) for all DOFs. LOAD STEP OPTIONS . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 . 200.00 . ON . 100 . 10000 . 10 . 15 . NO .YES
(EXIT) .USE DEFAULTS .NO PRINTOUT
LOAD STEP NUMBER. . . . . . . . . . . . . TIME AT END OF THE LOAD STEP. . . . . .

. AUTOMATIC TIME STEPPING . . . . . . . . . INITIAL NUMBER OF SUBSTEPS . . . . . .
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF SUBSTEPS . . . . . . MINIMUM NUMBER OF SUBSTEPS . . . . . .
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF EQUILIBRIUM ITERATIONS. STEP CHANGE BOUNDARY CONDITIONS . . . .
. TERMINATE ANALYSIS IF NOT CONVERGED . . . CONVERGENCE CONTROLS. . . . . . . . .
. . PRINT OUTPUT CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . DATABASE OUTPUT CONTROLS ITEM
FREQUENCY COMPONENT BASI -10
Load step 2 substep 1
FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.2006E+06 CRITERION= 1125. EQUIL ITER 1 COMPLETED. NEW
TRIANG MATRIX. MAX DOF INC= 0.1272E-01 LINE SEARCH PARAMETER = 1.000 SCALED MAX
DOF INC = 0.1272E-01 FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 4267. CRITERION= 480.2 EQUIL ITER 2
COMPLETED. NEW TRIANG MATRIX. MAX DOF INC= -0.9019E-03 LINE SEARCH PARAMETER =
1.000 SCALED MAX DOF INC = -0.9019E-03 FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 1751. CRITERION=
488.2 EQUIL ITER 3 COMPLETED. NEW TRIANG MATRIX. MAX DOF INC= 0.1746E-03 LINE
SEARCH PARAMETER = 1.000 SCALED MAX DOF INC = 0.1746E-03 FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE =
778.5 CRITERION= 497.7 EQUIL ITER 4 COMPLETED. NEW TRIANG MATRIX. MAX DOF INC=
0.6943E-04 LINE SEARCH PARAMETER = 1.000 SCALED MAX DOF INC = 0.6943E-04 FORCE
CONVERGENCE VALUE = 347.4 CRITERION= 507.7 <<< CONVERGED >>> SOLUTION CONVERGED
AFTER EQUILIBRIUM ITERATION 4 *** LOAD STEP 2 SUBSTEP 1 COMPLETED. CUM ITER = 7
*** TIME = 101.000 TIME INC = 1.00000 FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.6674E+05
CRITERION= 594.3 EQUIL ITER 1 COMPLETED. NEW TRIANG MATRIX. MAX DOF INC= 0.4318E-
02 LINE SEARCH PARAMETER = 1.000 SCALED MAX DOF INC = 0.4318E-02 FORCE CONVERGENCE
VALUE = 626.2 CRITERION= 502.9 EQUIL ITER 2 COMPLETED. NEW TRIANG MATRIX. MAX DOF
INC= 0.8570E-04 LINE SEARCH PARAMETER = 1.000 SCALED MAX DOF INC = 0.8570E-04
FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 77.87 CRITERION= 512.9 <<< CONVERGED >>> SOLUTION
CONVERGED AFTER EQUILIBRIUM ITERATION 2 *** LOAD STEP 2 SUBSTEP 2 COMPLETED. CUM
ITER = 9 *** TIME = 102.000 TIME INC = 1.00000 FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE =
0.1333E+05 CRITERION= 575.4 EQUIL ITER 1 COMPLETED. NEW TRIANG MATRIX. MAX DOF
INC= -0.5329E-02 LINE SEARCH PARAMETER = 1.000 SCALED MAX DOF INC = -0.5329E-02
FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 8237. CRITERION= 534.2 EQUIL ITER 2 COMPLETED. NEW
TRIANG MATRIX. MAX DOF INC= 0.3628E-02 LINE SEARCH PARAMETER = 1.000 SCALED MAX
DOF INC = 0.3628E-02 FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 3905. CRITERION= 532.9 EQUIL ITER 3
COMPLETED. NEW TRIANG MATRIX. MAX DOF INC= 0.1451E-02 LINE SEARCH PARAMETER =
1.000 SCALED MAX DOF INC = 0.1451E-02 FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 1135. CRITERION=
540.3 EQUIL ITER 4 COMPLETED. NEW TRIANG MATRIX. MAX DOF INC= 0.1034E-03 LINE
SEARCH PARAMETER = 0.9578 SCALED MAX DOF INC = 0.9905E-04 FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE
= 41.95 CRITERION= 551.4 <<< CONVERGED >>> SOLUTION CONVERGED AFTER EQUILIBRIUM
ITERATION 4
Load step 2 substep 2
Load step 2 substep 3 Equilbrium iteration summaries
8–71
Substep summary
*** LOAD STEP 2 *** TIME = 103.500 SUBSTEP 3 COMPLETED. TIME INC = 1.50000 CUM
ITER = 13
8.10.2.10. Graph the Load and Response History

This verification technique may be considered to be a graphical combination of two
other techniques: checking for reasonableness, and reviewing the iteration
history. POST26 graphs of load and response histories should agree with your
informed expectations about your structure's behavior. The results of interest
(displacements, reaction forces, stresses, and so on) should show relatively
smooth response histories. Any non-smoothness may indicate that too coarse of a
time step was used.
8.11. Sample Nonlinear Analysis (GUI Method)

In this sample analysis, you will run a nonlinear analysis of an elastic-plastic
circular plate under the action of a dead load and a cyclic point load. You will
define a kinematic hardening plasticity curve, as well as load step options, the
maximum and minimum number of substeps for a load step, and the various load steps
that describe externally applied loads. You will also learn how to interpret the
monitor file that ANSYS writes for a nonlinear analysis. ANSYS uses an incremental
solution procedure to obtain a solution to a nonlinear analysis. In this example,
the total external load within a load step is applied in increments over a certain
number of substeps. As described earlier in this chapter, ANSYS uses a Newton-
Raphson iterative procedure to solve each substep. You must specify the number of
substeps for each load step, since this number controls the size of the initial
load increment applied in the first substep of the each load step. ANSYS
automatically determines the size of the load increment for each subsequent
substep in a load step. You can control the size of the load increment for these
subsequent substeps by specifying the maximum and minimum number of substeps. If
you define the number of substeps, the maximum and minimum number of substeps all
to be the same, then ANSYS uses a constant load increment for all substeps within
the load step.

In this example, you will use an axisymmetric model for the plate, using four-node
PLANE42 elements with the axisymmetric option to mesh the model. You will perform
a geometrically nonlinear analysis. Specify the kinematic constraints as follows:
The nodes located at the center of the plate are constrained to have zero radial
displacement. The nodes located at the outer edge are constrained to have zero
radial and axial displacement. You will apply the dead load in load step 1 and the
cyclic point load in six subsequent load steps. See Section 8.11.3: Problem
Sketch. You will specify 10 substeps for the first load to ensure that the
increment of the dead load applied over the first substep is 1/10 of the total
load of 0.125 N/m2. You will also specify a maximum of 50 and a minimum of 5
substeps to ensure that if the plate exhibits a severe nonlinear behavior during
the solution, then the load increment can be cut back to 1/50 the total load. If
the plate exhibits mild nonlinear behavior, then the load increment can be
increased up to 1/5 the size of the total load. For the subsequent six load steps
that apply the cyclic point load, you will specify 4 substeps, with a maximum of
25 and a minimum of 2 substeps. For this example, you will monitor the history
over the entire solution of the vertical displacement of the node at the location
where the point cyclic load is applied and the reaction force at the node located
at the bottom of the clamped edge.
8–72
Section 8.11: Sample Nonlinear Analysis (GUI Method)

The circular plate has a radius of 1.0 m and a thickness of 0.1 m. The following
material properties are used for this problem: EX = 16911.23 Pa PRXY = 0.3 The
kinematic hardening plasticity curve for the material is:
Log Strain 0.001123514 0.001865643 0.002562402 0.004471788 0.006422389 True Stress
(Pa) 19.00 22.80 25.08 29.07 31.73
The plate has a dead load acting as a uniform pressure of 0.125N/m2. The history
of the cyclic point load is shown here:
Figure 8.26 Cyclic Point Load History

# #© §¨¦£¤¢ ¥¡
8.11.3.1. Set the Analysis Title and Jobname

1. Choose menu path Utility Menu> File> Change Title.
IFFH G 9¤##F 9FEDE¤¤8 ##@ 9¢7 53 ¢3#2 CB 4A 586 4

a YI XV G 7` "¨¤WH #FUD R ¦¦#¤R Q"P QTSS
$%# " ! 0 ) ( ' & C R %b 4B 6` # ### ¤### ### # 1
¤#### ### ##
8–73
Chapter 8: Nonlinear Structural Analysis 2. 3. 4. 5. Type the text "Cyclic loading
of a fixed circular plate." Click on OK. Choose menu path Utility Menu> File>
Change Jobname. The Change Jobname dialog box appears. Type the text “axplate” in
the entry box and click OK.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Element Type>
Add/Edit/Delete. Click on Add. The Library of Element Types dialog box appears. In
the list on the left, click once on "Structural Solid." In the list on the right,
click once on "Quad 4node 42." Click on OK. The Library of Element Types dialog
box closes. Click on Options. The PLANE42 element type options dialog box appears.
In the scroll box for element behavior, scroll to "Axisymmetric" and select it.
Click on OK. Click on Close in the Element Types dialog box.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Material
Models Available window, double-click on the icons next to the following options:
Structural, Linear, Elastic, Isotropic. A dialog box appears. Enter 16911.23 for
EX (Young's modulus). Enter .3 for PRXY (Poisson's ratio). Click on OK. Material
Model Number 1 appears in the Material Models Defined window on the left.
8.11.3.4. Specify the Kinematic Hardening material model (KINH)

1. In the Material Models Available window, double-click on the following options:
Nonlinear, Inelastic, Rate Independent, Kinematic Hardening Plasticity, von Mises
Plasticity, Multilinear (General). A dialog box appears. Enter the following
Strain/Stress value pair in the table: 0.00112, 19.0. Click on the Add Point
button, and enter the next Strain/Stress value pair: 0.00187, 22.8. Repeat the
previous step to enter the following Strain/Stress value pairs: 0.00256, 25.1;
0.00447, 29.1; 0.00642, 31.7. Click on OK. Choose menu path Material> Exit to
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
8.11.3.5. Label Graph Axes and Plot Data Tables

1. 2. 8–74 Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Style> Graphs> Modify Axes.
The Axes Modifications for Graph Plots dialog box appears. Enter Total Strain for
the X-axis label.
Section 8.11: Sample Nonlinear Analysis (GUI Method) 3. 4. 5. 6. Enter True Stress
for the Y-axis label and click OK. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor>
Material Props> Material Models. The Define Material Model Behavior dialog box
appears. In the Material Models Defined window, double-click in Material Model
Number 1, and Multilinear Kinematic (General). The dialog box appears that
includes the Strain/Stress data pairs that you entered. Click on the Graph button.
A graph of the data table values appears in the Graphics window. If necessary,
revise the stress/strain values and click on the Graph button again. Repeat
revisions and graphing as needed until you are satisfied with the graphed results.
Click on OK. Choose menu path Material> Exit to remove the Define Material Model
Behavior dialog box. Click on SAVE_DB on the ANSYS Toolbar.
7. 8.
8.11.3.6. Create Rectangle

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Parameters> Scalar Parameters.
The Scalar Parameters dialog box appears. Type "radius=1.0" in the Selection field
and click Accept. This value is the radius of the plate. Type "thick=0.1" in the
Selection field and click Accept. This value is the thickness of the plate. Click
Close. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Areas>
Rectangle> By Dimensions. The Create Rectangle by Dimensions dialog box appears.
Enter "0, radius" for X-coordinates. Enter "0, thick" for Y-coordinates and click
on OK. A rectangle appears in the ANSYS Graphics window. Choose menu path Utility
Menu> Plot> Lines.
8.11.3.7. Set Element Size

1. 2. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> MeshTool. The MeshTool
dialog box appears. Click Size Controls> Lines> Set. The Element Size on Picked
Lines picking menu appears. Click on the two vertical lines (2 and 4). Click OK on
the picking menu. The Element Sizes on Picked Lines dialog box appears. Enter 8
for number of element divisions and click on OK. Repeat these steps (1-3), but
choose horizontal lines 1 and 3, and specify 40 element divisions.
3. 4.
8.11.3.8. Mesh the Rectangle

1. 2. 3. 4. On the MeshTool, pick Quad and Map, then click MESH. The Mesh Areas
picking menu appears. Click on Pick All. Click on SAVE_DB on the ANSYS Toolbar.
Click on Close on the MeshTool.
8.11.3.9. Assign Analysis and Load Step Options

1. 2. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu> Analysis Type>
Analysis Options. The Static or Steady-State Analysis dialog box appears. Turn
large deformation effects ON and click OK.
8–75
Chapter 8: Nonlinear Structural Analysis 3. 4. Choose menu path Main Menu>
Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> DB/Results File. The Controls for Database
and Results File Writing dialog box appears. Verify that All items are selected,
and choose Every substep for the File write frequency. Click OK.
8.11.3.10. Monitor the Displacement

In this step, you monitor the displacement of the node located at the axes of
symmetry, as well as the reaction force at the fixed end of the plate. 1. 2. 3. 4.
5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Parameters> Scalar Parameters. The
Scalar Parameters dialog box appears. Type "ntop = node(0,thick,0.0)" in the
Selection field and click Accept. Type "nright = node(radius,0.0,0.0)" in the
Selection field and click Accept, then Close. Choose menu path Main Menu>
Solution> Load Step Opts> Nonlinear> Monitor. The Monitor picking menu appears.
Type "ntop" in the picker and press RETURN. Click OK in the picking menu. The
Monitor dialog box appears. In the scroll box for Quantity to be monitored, scroll
to "UY" and select it. Click OK. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step
Opts> Nonlinear> Monitor. The Monitor picking menu appears. Type "nright" in the
picker and press RETURN. Click OK in the picking menu. The Monitor dialog box
appears. In the scroll box for Variable to redefine, scroll to "Variable 2" and
select it. In the scroll box for Quantity to be monitored, scroll to "FY" and
select it. Click OK.
8.11.3.11. Apply Constraints

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Entities. The Select
Entities dialog box appears. Select Nodes and By Location in the first two
selection boxes. Verify that X coordinates are selected, and enter "radius" in the
Min, Max field. Click OK. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads>
Apply> Structural> Displacement> On Nodes. The Apply U,ROT on Nodes picking menu
appears. Click Pick All. The Apply U,ROT on Nodes dialog box appears. Click on
"All DOF" for DOFs to be constrained. Click OK. Choose menu path Utility Menu>
Select> Entities. The Select Entities dialog box appears. Verify that Nodes, By
Location, and X coordinates are selected. Enter "0" in the Min, Max field and
click OK. This will select the nodes at the X=0 position. Choose menu path Main
Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Displacement> On Nodes. The Apply
U,ROT on Nodes picking menu appears. Click Pick All. The Apply U,ROT on Nodes
dialog box appears. Click on "UX" for DOFs to be constrained. Click on All DOF to
deselect it.
7. 8. 9.
10. Enter "0.0" as the Displacement value. Click OK. 11. Choose menu path Utility
Menu> Select> Entities. The Select Entities dialog box appears. Verify that Nodes
and By Location are selected. 12. Click on Y coordinates and enter "thick" in the
Min, Max field. Click OK. 8–76
Section 8.11: Sample Nonlinear Analysis (GUI Method) 13. Choose menu path Main
Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Pressure> On Nodes. The Apply
PRES on Nodes picking menu appears. 14. Click on Pick All. The Apply PRES on nodes
dialog box appears. 15. Enter "0.125" in the Load PRES value field and click OK.
16. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Everything. 17. Click on SAVE_DB on the
ANSYS Toolbar.
8.11.3.12. Solve the First Load Step

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts>
Time/Frequenc> Time and Substps. The Time and Substep Options dialog appears.
Enter 10 as the number of substeps, enter 50 as the maximum number of substeps,
and enter 5 as the minimum number of substeps. Click OK. Choose menu path Main
Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS. Review the information in the /STAT window, and
click on Close. Click on OK on the Solve Current Load Step dialog box. Click on
Close on the Information dialog box when the solution is done. Choose Utility
Menu> Plot> Elements.
8.11.3.13. Solve the Next Six Load Steps

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Choose Utility Menu> Parameters> Scalar Parameters. The
Scalar Parameters dialog box appears. Enter "f = 0.010" in the Selection field and
click on Accept. Click on Close. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step
Opts> Time/Frequenc> Time and Substps. The Time and Substep Options dialog
appears. Enter "4" for the number of substeps, "25" for the maximum number of
substeps, and "2" for the minimum number of substeps. Click OK. Choose menu path
Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Force/Moment> On Nodes. The
Apply F/M on Nodes picking menu appears. Enter "ntop" in the picker and press
RETURN. Click OK in the Apply F/M on Nodes picking menu. The Apply F/M on Nodes
dialog box appears. Select "FY" in the Direction of force/mom selection box. Enter
"-f" in the Force/moment value field. Click OK. Choose menu path Main Menu>
Solution> Solve> Current LS. Review the information in the /STAT window, and click
on Close. Click on OK on the Solve Current Load Step dialog box.
10. Click on Close on the Information dialog box when the solution is done. 11.
Repeat Steps 5-10, entering "f" in the Force/moment value field at Step 7. 12.
Repeat Steps 5-11 two more times, for a total of three cycles (six substeps). 13.
Click on SAVE_DB on the ANSYS Toolbar.
8–77
8.11.3.14. Review the Monitor File

1. 2. 3. Choose menu path Utility Menu> List> Files> Other. The List File dialog
box appears. Select the axplate.mntr file and click on OK. Review the time step
size, vertical displacement, and reaction force evolution over the entire
solution. Click Close.
8.11.3.15. Use the General Postprocessor to Plot Results.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> Last
Set. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Deformed Shape.
The Plot Deformed Shape dialog box appears. Click on Def + undef edge for items to
be plotted. Click OK. The deformed mesh appears in the ANSYS Graphics window.
Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Element
Solu. The Contour Element Solution Data dialog box appears. In the selection box
on the left, choose Strain-plastic. In the selection box on the right, choose Eqv
plastic EPEQ. Click OK. The contour plot appears in the Graphics window. Choose
Utility Menu> Plot> Elements.
8.11.3.16. Define Variables for Time-History Postprocessing

1. 2. 3. 4. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Entities. The Select Entities
dialog box appears. Verify that Nodes and By Num/Pick are selected in the first
two boxes. Click OK. The Select nodes picking menu appears. Type "ntop" in the
picker and press RETURN. Click OK. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select>
Entities. The Select Entities dialog box appears. Choose Elements in the first
drop-down selection box. Choose Attached to in the second drop-down selection box.
Verify that Nodes is selected. Click OK. Choose Utility Menu> Select> Everything.
Choose Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Define Variables. The Defined Time-History
Variables dialog box appears. Click on Add. The Add Time-History Variable dialog
box appears. Click on Element results. Click OK. The Define Elemental Data picking
menu appears. Click on the top left element in the ANSYS Graphics window. Click OK
on the picking menu. The Define Nodal Data picking menu appears. Click on the top
left node of the top left element. Click OK on the picking menu. The Define
Element Results Variable dialog box appears.
5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
10. Verify that the reference number of the variable is 2. 11. Choose Stress in
the selection list on the left. Choose Y-direction SY in the selection list on the
right. Click OK. The Defined Time-History Variables dialog box reappears, with a
second variable listed (ESOL). The dialog box should show element number 281, node
number 50, item S, component Y, and name SY. 12. Click on Add. Repeat steps 7-10,
with variable reference number 3. 13. In the Define Element Results Variable
dialog box, choose Strain-elastic in the selection list on the left. Choose Y-
dir'n EPEL Y in the selection list on the right. Click OK.
8–78
Section 8.12: Sample Nonlinear Analysis (Command or Batch Method) 14. Click on
Add. Repeat steps 7-10, with variable reference number 4. 15. In the Define
Element Results Variable dialog box, choose Strain-plastic in the selection list
on the left. Choose Y-dir'n EPPL Y in the selection list on the right. Click OK.
16. Click on Close on the Defined Time-History Variables dialog box. 17. Choose
menu path Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Math Operations> Add. The Add Time-History
Variables dialog box appears. 18. Enter 5 for the reference number for result,
enter 3 as the 1st variable, and enter 4 as the 2nd variable. Click OK. This adds
the elastic and plastic strains that you stored as variables 3 and 4. Their sum is
the total strain, and it is stored as variable 5.
8.11.3.17. Plot Time-History Results

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Settings>
Graph. The Graph Settings dialog box appears. Click on Single variable for the X-
axis variable and enter 5 as the single variable number. Click OK. Choose menu
path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Style> Graphs> Modify Axes. The Axes Modifications
for Graph Plots dialog box appears. Enter Total Y-Strain as the X-axis label.
Enter Y-Stress as the Y-axis label. Click OK. Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist
Postpro> Graph Variables. The Graph Time-History Variables dialog box appears.
Enter 2 as the first variable to graph. Click OK.

1. 2. Choose QUIT from the ANSYS Toolbar. Click on the save option you want, and
click on OK.
8.12. Sample Nonlinear Analysis (Command or Batch Method)

You can perform the example nonlinear static analysis of a copper cylinder
impacting a rigid wall using the ANSYS commands shown below instead of GUI
choices. Items prefaced by an exclamation point (!) are comments.
/BATCH,LIST /title, Cyclic loading of a fixed circular plate /filnam,axplate
/prep7 radius=1.0 ! Radius of the plate (m) thick=0.1 ! Thickness of plate (m)
YM=16911.23 et,1,PLANE42,,,1 ! PLANE42 axisymmetric element mp,ex,1,YM
mp,nuxy,1,0.3 ! Define a Kinematic Hardening Plasticity curve using the KINH
material model tb,KINH,1,1,5 ! Define the true stress vs. total log strain curve
for this material model ! using 5 points. First point defines the elastic limit
tbpt,,0.001123514,19.00 tbpt,,0.001865643,22.80 tbpt,,0.002562402,25.08
8–79
tbpt,,0.004471788,29.07 tbpt,,0.006422389,31.73 ! Set the axles labels for the
stress-strain curve plot /axlab,X,Log Strain (N/m^2) /axlab,Y,True Stress (N/m^2)
tbpl,KINH,1 ! Plot and verify the material stress-strain curve
! Define a rectangle which is the axisymmetric cross section of the plate. ! The
rectangle has a length equal to the radius of the plate and a height equal ! to
the thickness of the plate rect,,radius,,thick ! Select the left and right
bounding lines of the created rectangle and set ! the line division to 8 (8
elements through the thickness of the plate) FLST,5,2,4,ORDE,2 FITEM,5,2 FITEM,5,4
CM,_Y,LINE LSEL, , , ,P51X !* CM,_Y1,LINE CMSEL,,_Y LESIZE,_Y1, , ,8,1, CMDEL,_Y
CMDEL,_Y1 !* ! Select the top and bottom bounding lines of the created rectangle
and set ! the line division to 40 (40 elements through the radius of the plate)
FLST,5,2,4,ORDE,2 FITEM,5,1 FITEM,5,3 CM,_Y,LINE LSEL, , , ,P51X !* CM,_Y1,LINE
CMSEL,,_Y LESIZE,_Y1, , ,40,1, CMDEL,_Y CMDEL,_Y1 !* CM,_Y,AREA ASEL, , , , 1
CM,_Y1,AREA CHKMSH,'AREA' CMSEL,S,_Y amesh,all CMDEL,_Y CMDEL,_Y1 CMDEL,_Y2 fini
/solve nlgeom,on! Turn on geometric nonlinearity ! Get the node numbers for the
nodes located at the top ! of the axis of symmetry and at bottom right of the
model ntop = node(0,thick,0) nright = node(radius,0,0) ! Activate the monitoring
of the displacement and reaction force histories ! during the analysis. This will
be written out to the monitor file ratch.mntr monitor,1,ntop,uy
8–80
Section 8.12: Sample Nonlinear Analysis (Command or Batch Method)
monitor,2,nright,fy outres,all,all ! Output all the results for all substeps to
the ! results file for later postprocessing
! Select the nodes located at right end and constrain their radial (x) and ! axial
(y) direction displacement to be zero. nsel,s,loc,x,radius d,all,all ! Select the
nodes located at left end and constrain their radial (x) direction ! displacement
to be zero. nsel,s,loc,x,0.0 d,all,ux,0.0 ! Define the load for Load Step 1. !
Select the nodes located at top surface of plate and apply a uniform pressure ! of
0.125 N/m^2 as dead load on the plate. nsel,s,loc,y,thick sf,all,pres,0.125 alls!
Select all nodes ! Define the number of substeps (10). Also define maximum number
of ! substeps (50), and the minimum number of substeps (5) for the automatic !
time stepping algorithm. nsub,10,50,5 solve f = 0.01
! Solve load step 1 ! Define the parameter, f, used to apply ! the cyclic point
load.
! Over six load steps apply a cyclic point load of magnitude f = 0.01 units !
applied at the center of the plate over three cycles ! Start Cycle 1 !
---------------nsel,s,node,,ntop f,all,fy,-f nsel,all nsubst,4,25,2 solve
nsel,s,node,,ntop f,all,fy,f nsel,all nsubst,4,25,2 solve ! Start Cycle 2 !
---------------nsel,s,node,,ntop f,all,fy,-f nsel,all nsubst,4,25,2 solve
nsel,s,node,,ntop f,all,fy,f nsel,all nsubst,4,25,2 solve
! Define load for load step 2 ! Set the number of substeps, max and min number !
of substeps ! Solve load step 2
8–81
! Start Cycle 3 ! ---------------nsel,s,node,,ntop f,all,fy,-f nsel,all
nsubst,4,25,2 solve nsel,s,node,,ntop f,all,fy,f nsel,all nsubst,4,25,2 solve save
fini /post1 set,last ! (final state) pldi,2 ples,nl,epeq fini /post26 eplo
nsel,s,node,,ntop esln elem=elnext(0) alls
of substeps ! Solve load step 6 ! Define load for load step 7 ! Set the number of
substeps, max and min number ! of substeps. ! Solve load step 7
! Read in the results from the last substep of ! the last step. ! ! ! ! Plot the
deformed mesh with the undeformed edge only Plot the total accumulated equivalent
plastic strains
! ! ! ! !
Plot the mesh Select the node where the point load is attached Select the element
attached to this node Get the number of this element Select back everything in the
model
! Define variable 2 to be Y component of stress at the node where the point ! load
is applied ESOL,2,elem,ntop,S,Y,
! Define variable 3 to be Y component of elastic strain at the node where the !

point load is applied ESOL,3,elem,ntop,EPEL,Y, ! Define variable 4 to be Y
component of plastic strain at the node where the ! point load is applied
ESOL,4,elem,ntop,EPPL,Y, ! Add the elastic and plastic strains in variables 3 and
4 and store the total ! strain in variable 5. ADD,5,3,4, , , , ,1,1,0, xvar,5 !
Set the axes for subsequent x-y plot to be variable 5
! Define the x and y axes labels for subsequent x-y plot /axlab,x,Total Y-Strain
/axlab,y,Y-Stress plvar,2 fini /eof /exit,nosav ! Plot the Y-stress stored in
variable 2

additional nonlinear analyses. 8–82
Section 8.13: Where to Find Other Examples The ANSYS Verification Manual consists
of test case analyses demonstrating the analysis capabilities of the ANSYS
program. While these test cases demonstrate solutions to realistic analysis
problems, the ANSYS Verification Manual does not present them as step-by-step
examples with lengthy data input instructions and printouts. However, most ANSYS
users who have at least limited finite element experience should be able to fill
in the missing details by reviewing each test case's finite element model and
input data with accompanying comments. The ANSYS Verification Manual includes a
variety of nonlinear analysis test cases: VM7 - Plastic Compression of a Pipe
Assembly VM11 - Residual Stress Problem VM24 - Plastic Hinge in a Rectangular Beam
VM38 - Plastic Loading of a Thick-Walled Cylinder Under Pressure VM56 -
Hyperelastic Thick Cylinder Under Internal Pressure VM78 - Transverse Shear
Stresses in a Cantilever Beam VM80 - Plastic Response to a Suddenly Applied
Constant Force VM104 - Liquid-Solid Phase Change VM124 - Discharge of Water from a
Reservoir VM126 - Heat Transferred to a Flowing Fluid VM132 - Stress Relaxation of
a Bolt Due to Creep VM133 - Motion of a Rod Due to Irradiation Induced Creep VM134
- Plastic Bending of a Clamped I-Beam VM146 - Bending of a Reinforced Concrete
Beam VM185 - Current Carrying Ferromagnetic Conductor VM198 - Large Strain In-
Plane Torsion Test VM199 - Viscoplastic Analysis of a Body Undergoing Shear
Deformation VM200 - Viscoelastic Sandwich Seal Analysis VM218 - Hyperelastic
Circular Plate VM220 - Eddy Current Loss in Thick Steel Plate
8–83
8–84
Chapter 9: Material Curve Fitting
You use material curve fitting to derive coefficients from experimental data that
you supply for your material. Curve fitting involves comparing your experimental
data to certain nonlinear material models built into ANSYS. With this feature, you
compare experimental data versus ANSYS-calculated data for different nonlinear
models. Based on these comparisons, you decide which material model to use during
solution. Curve fitting is based on the data table configurations outlined in the
TB command. The data manipulations and constructions are performed by the TBFT
command.
9.1. Applicable Material Behavior Types

ANSYS supports curve fitting for hyperelastic, creep and viscoelastic material
behavior. Temperature dependency is supported for all three behaviors. • Section
9.2: Hyperelastic Material Curve Fitting For hyperelastic material models, your
stress-strain curves can be converted to any of the available ANSYSsupported
hyperelastic models, including Mooney-Rivlin, Ogden, Neo-Hookean, Polynomial,
Arruda-Boyce, Gent, and Yeoh. Compressible hyperelastic Ogden hyper-foam and
Blatz-Ko models are also supported. • Section 9.3: Creep Material Curve Fitting
For creep material models, your creep strain rate or creep strain as a function of
time, stress or temperature can be converted to any of the thirteen ANSYS-
supported implicit creep models. • Section 9.4: Viscoelastic Material Curve
Fitting For viscoelastic material models, your shear modulus vs. time and/or bulk
modulus vs. time data is converted to ANSYS-supported Prony series format.
9.2. Hyperelastic Material Curve Fitting

Hyperelastic curve fitting is a tool for estimating your material constants by
inputting your experimental data and comparing it to the ANSYS-supported
hyperelastic material models. You perform curve fitting either interactively (GUI)
or via batch commands. You input your experimental data, choose a model from one
of nine supplied hyperelastic models, perform a regression analysis, graphically
view the curve fitting results, compare the fits to the experimental data, and
write the fitted coefficients to the database as ANSYS nonlinear data table
commands for the subsequent finite element analyses. ANSYS hyperelastic models can
define three types of behavior: purely incompressible, nearly incompressible, and
compressible. Hyperelastic curve fitting is based on the HYPER option of the TB
command.
9.2.1. Using Curve Fitting to Determine Your Hyperelastic Material Behavior

The steps for hyperelastic curve fitting are defined as follows:
1 Section 9.2.1.1: Prepare Experimental Data The experimental data must be a plain
text file delimited by a space or a comma.
2 Section 9.2.1.2: Input the Data into AN- The experimental data can be read into
ANSYS by browsing to the file SYS location (GUI) or by specifying the filename and
path (batch) on the command line.
3 Section 9.2.1.3: Select a Material Model The material options for the applicable
curve fitting regimen are Option defined in the TB command. ANSYS supports nine
hyperelastic models. Once you pick a model, you can still change to another model
if an ideal fit is not realized. 4 Section 9.2.1.4: Initialize the Coefficients
Depending on the model, hyperelastic curve fitting can be a linear or nonlinear
regression process. The hyperelastic material models, along with the associated
process for each are listed in Table 9.3: “Hyperelastic Curve Fitting Model
Types”. 5 Section 9.2.1.5: Specify Control Paramet- You will specify the type of
error norm to be used to generate the ers and Solve curve fit. 6 Section 9.2.1.6:
Plot Your Experimental You review and verify the results by comparing the
experimental data Data and Analyze and the regression errors. If the results you
obtain are not acceptable, repeat steps 3 to 5 to perform a new curve fitting
solution. 7 Section 9.2.1.7: Write Data to TB Com- Write your curve fitting
results to the database in the TB command mand table format.
9.2.1.1. Prepare Experimental Data

Curve fitting requires experimental test data. Your hyperelastic curve fitting
data needs to be a comma or space delimited file, referencing your stress vs.
strain values. Hyperelastic curve fitting supports three main behaviors: • • •
Case 1 - Totally Incompressible Models (see Table 9.1: “Experimental Details for
Case 1 and 2 Models and Blatz-Ko”) Case 2 - Nearly Incompressible Models (see
Table 9.1: “Experimental Details for Case 1 and 2 Models and Blatz-Ko”) Case 3 -
Compressible Models (see Table 9.2: “Experimental Details for Case 3 Models”)
The types of data required for each of these cases is defined in the tables below.
Table 9.1 Experimental Details for Case 1 and 2 Models and Blatz-Ko
Experimental Type Uniaxial Test Biaxial Test Shear Test Volumetric Test Column 1
Engineering Strain Engineering Strain Engineering Strain Volumetric Strain(J)
Column 2 Engineering Stress Engineering Stress Engineering Stress True Stress
Table 9.2 Experimental Details for Case 3 Models

Experiment Type Uniaxial Test Biaxial Test Shear Test Volumetric Test Column 1
Longitudinal Engineering Strain Biaxial Engineering Strain Shear Engineering
Strain Volumetric Strain(J) Column 2 Column 3 Lateral Direction Engineering Strain
Engineering Stress Thickness Direction Engineering Strain Thickness Direction
Engineering Strain True Stress Engineering Stress Engineering Stress
9–2
Section 9.2: Hyperelastic Material Curve Fitting Note — J is the ratio of current
volume to the original volume. All stresses output by ANSYS in POST1/POST26 are
true stresses and logarithmic strains.
9.2.1.2. Input the Data into ANSYS

Use the EADD option of the TBFT command to input your data files. First, designate
whether they are uniaxial, biaxial, shear, or volumetric, and then designate the
location in the Option2, Option3, and Option4 fields. All of the stress values
will be engineering stress, except for the volumetric option (true stress). The
file should be a simple, delimited set of stress and strain values similar to the
following:
0.9703 0.9412 0.9127 0.8847 60.00 118.2 175.2 231.1
For temperature dependent curve fitting, specify your temperature values at the
top of the experimental data using the
/temp,value
line. This header format specifies the attribute (temp) and its value (100). An
example of a typical data input using these attributes follows:
/temp,100 0.9703 60.00 0.9412 118.2 0.9127 175.2 0.8847 231.1
Adding this header introduces a temperature attribute of 100 degrees. You can add
additional data sets at other temperatures, in additional files. One file can have
data at only one temperature.
9.2.1.2.1. Batch
TBFT,EADD,ID,Option1,Option2,Option3,Option4
Option1 = UNIA, BIAX, SHEA, or VOLU Option2 = name of file containing experimental
data Option3 = file name extension Option4 = file directory
9.2.1.2.2. GUI
The Material Properties GUI provides an input field where you can type in the
filename of your data file, and also include the appropriate path. You can also
browse to a file in a specified location. Separate input is performed for each
Option1 value (UNIA, BIAX, SHEA, etc.).
9.2.1.3. Select a Material Model Option

Table 9.3: “Hyperelastic Curve Fitting Model Types” below lists the models that
are available for hyperelastic curve fitting. When volumetric data is supplied, a
compressible or nearly incompressible model is implied, and only the designated
options will be available. When no volumetric data is supplied, the model is
understood to be incompressible, and those model options will be available.
Supplying zero coefficients for the volumetric data field will also denote an
incompressible model.
9–3
Table 9.3 Hyperelastic Curve Fitting Model Types

Model Name Mooney-Rivlin Polynomial Yeoh Neo-Hookean Ogden Arruda-Boyce Gent
Blatz-Ko Abbreviation moon poly yeoh neoh ogde boyc gent blat Order/Options 2, 3,
5, 9 1 to N 1 to N 1 to N 1 to N No. of Coefficients [1] Linear/Nonlinear Fitting
2/3/5/9+1 see below [2] N+N 1+1 2*N+N 2+1 2+1 1 2*N+N Linear Linear Linear Linear
Nonlinear Nonlinear Nonlinear Nonlinear Nonlinear
Ogden Hyper-foam foam
1. 2.
The number of coefficients is usually the sum of the number of deviatoric

coefficients and the number of volumetric coefficients. The number of coefficients
for a polynomial will be dependent on the polynomial order N.
Number of Coefficients = ∑ (1 + i) + N
i =1 N
Blatz-Ko and Ogden hyper-foam are compressible models. For Ogden hyper-foam, the
experimental data you supply will require additional fields. More information on
the hyperelastic models ANSYS supplies for curve fitting can be found in Section
2.5.2: Hyperelastic Material Constants.
9.2.1.3.1. Batch
TBFT,FADD,ID,HYPER,Option2,Option3
Option2 = model name, as specified in Table 9.3: “Hyperelastic Curve Fitting Model
Types” (above) Option3 = order or number of coefficients, where applicable. Table
9.3: “Hyperelastic Curve Fitting Model
Types” (above) specifies the number and type of coefficient(s) necessary for each
hyperelastic model type.
9.2.1.3.2. GUI
A pull-down selection menu in the material GUI allows you to pick the applicable
material model option. The options displayed will be dependent on the format of
your experimental data file.
9.2.1.4. Initialize the Coefficients

Depending on the model you choose, hyperelastic curve fitting can be a linear or a
nonlinear regression process. In both cases, the initial coefficients you supply
will determine how accurate and efficient your curve fit will be. The initial
values of the coefficients generally come from experience, and also from studying
the function that defines the model you are attempting to compare/fit your data
to. For most hyperelastic models, 1 or -1 is a good starting point. However,
coefficient values can vary greatly depending on the model chosen. The Gent model,
for instance, provides good fit with initial coefficient values as high as 1000.
You can also fix (hold constant) your coefficients. You specify a value for a
coefficient and keep it unchanged, while allowing the other coefficients to be
operated on. You can then release the coefficient you fixed and operate on it
after the others are optimized. By default, all of the coefficients are free to
vary. 9–4
Section 9.2: Hyperelastic Material Curve Fitting For temperature dependent
experimental data, you turn temperature dependency on and specify a reference
temperature before you solve for the coefficients. You can set the reference
temperature only to values specified using the /temp,value header line in the
experimental data. You can also specify tref = all and initiate multiple solves to
evaluate coefficients at all available discrete temperature values. In this case,
for data at three temperatures (t1, t2, and t3), a single TBFT, SOLVE entry will
initiate three different solve operations at those three discrete temperatures.
With temperature dependency on and the reference temperature set to a particular
value, a TBFT, SOLVE command solves for coefficients only at that temperature. To
solve for coefficients at other temperatures, you set the reference temperature to
each desired discrete temperature value and solve again. You can initialize the
coefficients before or after turning temperature dependency on. If the
coefficients are initialized before turning temperature dependency on, the
specified coefficients will become the initial coefficients for all future solves
for that particular model. These coefficients are, however, overridden when
temperature dependency is turned on and another set of initial values are
specified at discrete temperature values. The curve fitting tool looks for the
initial coefficients at a particular temperature. If no coefficients are specified
at a discrete temperature, the initial coefficients set before temperature
dependency was turned on are used.
9.2.1.4.1. Batch
TBFT,SET,ID,HYPER,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
Option2 = model name (see Table 9.3: “Hyperelastic Curve Fitting Model Types”
(above) for the available
models)
Option3 = order, if applicable Option4 = index of coefficient Option5 = value of
the coefficient
To set Option4 for a reference temperature, or for temperature dependency:

TBFT,SET,ID,HYPER,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
Option2 = model name. See Table 9.3: “Hyperelastic Curve Fitting Model Types”
models.
Option3 = order, if applicable Option4 = tdep or tref Option5 = If Option4 = tdep,
Option5 = 1 turns on temperature dependency, and Option5 = 0 turns it off. If
Option4 = tref, Option5 will be either “all,” or the reference temperature.
TBFT,FIX,ID,HYPER,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
Option2 = model name See Table 9.3: “Hyperelastic Curve Fitting Model Types”
models.
Option3 = not applicable Option4 = index of coefficient Option5 = 1 for fixed and
0 to vary
9.2.1.4.2. GUI
The GUI automatically updates your coefficient tables depending on the model you
pick. You can modify individual coefficients to initialize them at values you
believe are more appropriate.
9–5
9.2.1.5. Specify Control Parameters and Solve

Depending on the model, your hyperelastic curve fitting will be either a linear or
nonlinear regression process (see Table 9.3: “Hyperelastic Curve Fitting Model
Types” (above) for details). Your error norms can be either normalized or
unnormalized. Normalized error norms (the default regression option) generally
give better results than the unnormalized error norms, since normalized error
gives equal weight to all of your data points. The solution control parameters of
a nonlinear regression include: 1. 2. 3. number of iterations residual tolerance
coefficient change tolerance
The solution stops when both the residual tolerance and the coefficient change
tolerance of your error norm are met, or if the number of iterations criteria is
met. When you use nonlinear regression, you must initialize your coefficients.
9.2.1.5.1. Batch
TBFT,SOLVE,ID,HYPER,Option2,Option3,Option4, ..., Option7
(above) for the models
available.
Option3 = order or number of your coefficients. See Table 9.3: “Hyperelastic Curve
Fitting Model Types”
(above) for possible values. Option4 = curve fitting procedure: 0 = unnormalized

least squares, 1 = normalized least squares Option5 = maximum number of iterations
Option6 = tolerance of residual changes Option7 = tolerance of coefficient changes
Other solution parameters are available. See the TBFT command for details.
9.2.1.5.2. GUI
The GUI lets you specify all of your control parameters (error norm, solution
control parameters, and the solver options) interactively. You select the
appropriate options from the provided menus, and solve to generate the
coefficients. You can change the parameters and repeat the solution as necessary
to ensure an accurate result. The unused options are disabled whenever necessary.
9.2.1.6. Plot Your Experimental Data and Analyze

After you initiate Solve, the coefficient tables will contain the fitted
coefficients and also the residual errors. You can then plot your data and
visually interpret the results. The first column is always your X- axis, with each
additional column plotted separately as a function of column one. You should try
to reserve column one for the variable that you would like to see vary in the
plot. For example, if your data contains time, temperature, stress, and creep
strain, and you wish to see the creep strain vary as a function of time at
different temperatures and stresses in the plot, you add your experimental data
using multiple TBFT,EADD commands (or the corresponding GUI operations) by
splitting the file into multiple experimental files as prescribed earlier, one for
each combination of temperature and stress.
9.2.1.6.1. Batch
TBFT,PLOT,ID,Option1,HYPER,Option3,Option4
9–6
Section 9.2: Hyperelastic Material Curve Fitting
Option1 = UNIA, BIAX, SHEA, or VOLU Option3 = model name. See Table 9.3:
“Hyperelastic Curve Fitting Model Types” (above) for the models
available.
Fitting Model Types” (above) for possible values.
You use the /WINDOW command to configure the graphs for each of the resultant
curves for the individual stress types.
9.2.1.6.2. GUI
Use the GRAPH button to plot the data. Your plots will show columns 2 and above as
separate curves, plotted as a function of column 1. The data in column 1 is always
the X-axis. By default, all the experiments are plotted in the GUI window. To view
specific data and its corresponding fitting result, you can click the right mouse
button (RMB) on the specific data set, and pick a desired option to view the
results. Other RMB plotting utilities can be found for different data fields in
the curve fitting GUI window. Use RMB functions to Zoom, Fit, Save Plot to File,
View/Hide Legend and View/Hide Grid. Two or more fitted functions can also be
compared in the same plot. For example, you can view Mooney2 Uniaxial and Mooney9
Uniaxial plots directly on top of each other, provided you have already solved for
both of these functions. RMB also allows you to set the number of points used to
generate the plot, and also change the minimum X value and the maximum X value in
a plot. You can also hide a particular curve within a graph, turn the legend
and/or axis displays on and off, and switch the scales between log scale and
regular scale. Use the middle-mouse button to eliminate a specific curve and
clarify or refine the remaining curve.
9.2.1.6.3. Review/Verify
The two factors you consider in determining results acceptability are visual fit
and the error norm/residual values. When you plot the curve, the error
norm/residual values are printed in the curve fitting GUI window. Error norm
values help you determine the quality of curve fitting and whether to accept the
results, but are not always the best indicator of a valid curve fit. Plotting the
curves and visually assessing the result is usually the best indication. If the
results are unacceptable, you may want to go back to step 3 and solve again,
either by picking a different model, increasing the order, or redefining your
initial values of the coefficients or other control parameters. You can continue
to use your original experimental data, repeating step 3 through step 7 until you
get an acceptable solution.

After you are satisfied with your curve fitting results, you can write the curve
fitting data to the ANSYS database using TBFT, FSET. Both the GUI and the command
line convert the coefficients to the appropriate form before writing to ANSYS TB
tables. ANSYS stores the data as part of the material property set for use in
subsequent analyses.
9.2.1.7.1. Batch
TBFT,FSET,ID,HYPER,Option2,Option3
available.
Fitting Model Types” (above) for possible values.
9–7
9.2.1.7.2. GUI
Once you complete the process and update your material data properties with the
representative curve data, you are returned to the material properties dialog. The
curve data can now be accessed for the full range of material behavior.
9.3. Creep Material Curve Fitting

ANSYS provides thirteen creep models, along with the tools to generate and fit
derived coefficients to your experimental data. Interactive (GUI) or command line
(batch) input is available. You input your experimental data, choose a model from
one of the supplied creep models, and then perform a regression analysis. You then
graphically view the curve fitting result, and compare it for fit with your
experimental data. If the curve is acceptable, you write the fitted coefficients
to the database as ANSYS nonlinear data table commands (ANSYS TB command format)
for the subsequent finite element analyses.
9.3.1. Using Curve Fitting to Determine Your Creep Material Behavior

The steps for creep curve fitting are defined as follows:
text file with headers to describe the data types and attributes. The test data
must be delimited by a space or a comma. 2 Section 9.3.1.2: Input the Data into
ANSYS The experimental data can be read into ANSYS by browsing to the file
location in the GUI or by specifying the location on the command line. 3 Section
9.3.1.3: Select a Material Model Option The material options for the applicable
curve fitting regimen are defined in the TB command. ANSYS supports thirteen
implicit creep models. Once you pick a model, you can still switch to another
model if an ideal fit is not realized. Creep curve fitting is a nonlinear
regression; the initial values of the coefficients to be determined can be very
important for a successful solution.
4 Section 9.3.1.4: Initialize the Coefficients
5 Section 9.3.1.5: Specify Control Parameters You choose the error norm to be used
for an acceptable curve fit. and Solve 6 Section 9.3.1.6: Plot the Experimental
Data You review and verify the results by comparing them with the exand Analyze
perimental data and the regression errors. If they are not acceptable, repeat
steps 3 to 5 to obtain a new curve fitting solution. 7 Section 9.3.1.7: Write Data
to TB Command Write curve fitting results in the TB command format to the ANSYS
database.

You need to provide accurate experimental test data in order to achieve valid
curve fitting results. For creep analyses, you use either the creep strain value
or creep strain rate, derived as a function of time, temperature, stress, and/or
creep strain. The type of data you need to provide will depend on the creep model
you choose. The experimental data is named “creep” to distinguish it from other
types of data, such as uniaxial, tension, biaxial, etc. The creep data must be a
plain text file that contains the headers and the test data in table form,
delimited by a space or a comma. The header is used to describe the data types
that characterize the test data columns or attributes of the data. There are five
different creep data types; see Table 9.4: “Creep Data Types and Abbreviations”.
9–8
Section 9.3: Creep Material Curve Fitting
Table 9.4 Creep Data Types and Abbreviations

Time Equivalent Creep Strain Equivalent Creep Strain Rate Equivalent Stress
Temperature time creq dcreq seqv temp
The header format to define each column's data-type is /n, abbr, where n is the
index of the data column in the file, and abbr is the abbreviation for the type of
data in the column, as described in Table 9.4: “Creep Data Types and
Abbreviations”. A typical data input is shown below:
/1,seqv ! indicates first column is stress /2,creq ! indicates second column is
creep strain /3,temp ! indicates third column is temperature /4,dcreq ! indicates
fourth column is creep strain rate 4000 0.00215869 100 0.000203055 4000 0.00406109
100 0.000181314 4000 0.00664691 100 0.000165303 4000 0.0102068 100 0.000152217
4000 0.0151416 100 0.000140946
When a particular column is unchanged over the loading history, you can define it
as an attribute. For instance, in the above example, the stress and temperature
are constant throughout the range. You define this data as an attribute. The
header format to define a data attribute is /attr, value, where attr is the data-
type abbreviation, and value is the value of the attribute. The constant stress
and temperature values above can be written into the file header, as follows:
/seqv,4000 ! indicate this creep has a constant stress of 4000 /temp,100 !
indicate this creep data is at a constant temperature of 100 /1,creq ! indicate
first column is creep strain /2,dcreq ! indicate second column is creep strain
rate 0.00215869 0.000203055 0.00406109 0.000181314 0.00664691 0.000165303
0.0102068 0.000152217 0.0151416 0.000140946 0.0220102 0.000130945
ANSYS provides thirteen model types for creep curve fitting. The model you choose
will determine the experimental data required for the curve fitting process. The
following table describes the creep data required to perform curve fitting for
each model type. Note that for strain hardening and modified strain hardening, you
need to input both creep strain and creep strain rate in the experimental data.
Table 9.5 Creep Model and Data/Type Attribute

Creep Model Strain Hardening Time Hardening Generalized Exponential Generalized
Graham Generalized Blackburn creq x dcreq x x x x x x x x x time seqv x x x x x
temp x x x x
9–9
Creep Model Modified Time Hardening Modified Strain Hardening Generalized Garofalo
Exponential Form Norton Prim+Sec Time Hardening Prim+Sec Rational Polynomial
Generalized Time Hardening x x x creq x x x x x x x x x dcreq time x seqv x x x x
x x x x x x x x x temp x

The experimental data must be read into ANSYS from a plain text file. You prepare
this file according to the previous section, including both header information and
formatted test data. The header portion is required for creep analyses. Each file
is viewed as a data set in ANSYS, and can be a complete set of experimental test
data or a part of a series of files of experimental test data. You can include
several data sets, such as tests performed at different stress levels and/or
temperatures, when you perform creep curve fitting. There are two ways to input
the experimental data.
9.3.1.2.1. Batch
The EADD argument of the TBFT command is used to identify and specify the location
of your data files. The command syntax is:
Option1 = creep Option2 = name of file containing experimental data Option3 = file
name extension Option4 = file directory
9.3.1.2.2. GUI
In interactive mode, you can input experimental data by typing the filename (with
the appropriate path if the file is not in the default directory) into the
appropriate area. You can also browse to a file in a particular location. Use the
Add Data Set button to add additional data sets for creep curve fitting. There is
no restriction on the number of data sets you can add.

The thirteen models available for creep curve fitting are defined in Table 9.6:
“Creep Models and Abbreviations”. Pick the one that best satisfies your
requirements, and use the creep model abbreviation from the table in subsequent
fitting operations. You'll find it helpful to view the formula before you solve.
It will help you determine the initial coefficients you might use and also help
you determine the format of your experimental data. Also see Table 9.6: “Creep
Models and Abbreviations” to determine a starting point for the initial creep
model coefficients.
9.3.1.3.1. Batch
TBFT,FADD,ID,CREEP,Option2,Option3
Option2 = creep model abbreviation. See Table 9.6: “Creep Models and
Abbreviations”.
9–10
Section 9.3: Creep Material Curve Fitting
Option3 = not used for creep curve fitting.
The following table describes the creep models available and their abbreviated
names for Option2 (above).
Table 9.6 Creep Models and Abbreviations

Model Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Name Strain Hardening Time Hardening
Generalized Exponential Generalized Graham Generalized Blackburn Modified Time
Hardening Modified Strain Hardening Generalized Garofalo Exponential Form Norton
Prim+Sec Time Hardening Prim+Sec Rational Polynomial Generalized Time Hardening
Fitting Name/Option2 shar thar gexp ggra gbla mtha msha ggar expo nort psth psrp
gtha
Note — The experimental data must be consistent with the creep model you choose.
See Table 9.5: “Creep Model and Data/Type Attribute” for the data types required
for each creep model.
9.3.1.3.2. GUI
You can pick the appropriate model option from a menu in the data entry area. All
of the options and constraints listed for batch input apply.

Creep curve fitting is a nonlinear regression process. A successful curve fit
depends greatly on the initial coefficient values; certain variances will prevent
your curve fit from converging. When a solution doesn't converge, you can adjust
the initial value of specific coefficients and rerun the problem (you do not need
to input the data again). In general, the more parameters a model has, the more
difficult it is to get the solution to converge. Models with many parameters will
sometimes converge more easily if you fix (hold constant) your coefficients. You
specify a value for a coefficient and keep it unchanged, while allowing the other
coefficients to be operated on. You can then release the fixed coefficients to
obtain a solution. By default, all of the coefficients are free to vary. Although
some creep models implicitly address temperature dependency, other models lack
this capability. For both types of models, you can account for temperature
dependency by generating coefficients at discrete temperature values. You solve
for separate coefficients at each of your desired discrete temperatures. If the
equation implicitly supports temperature dependency already, that portion is
eliminated by appropriately fixing the coefficient to a specific value. For
example, if you have e(-C*T), then C is set to 0 to eliminate this term. To do
this, you turn on temperature dependency by setting the tdep parameter to 1.
9–11
Chapter 9: Material Curve Fitting For temperature dependent experimental data, you
turn temperature dependency on and specify a reference temperature before you
solve for the coefficients. You can set the reference temperature only to values
specified using the /temp,value header line in the experimental data. You can also
specify tref = all and initiate multiple solves to evaluate coefficients at all
available discrete temperature values. In this case, for data at three
temperatures (t1, t2, and t3), a single TBFT, SOLVE entry will initiate three
different solve operations at those three discrete temperatures. With temperature
dependency on and the reference temperature set to a particular value, a TBFT,
SOLVE command solves for coefficients only at that temperature. To solve for
coefficients at other temperatures, you set the reference temperature to each of
the desired discrete temperature values and solve again. You can initialize the
coefficients before or after turning temperature dependency on. If the
coefficients are initialized before turning temperature dependency on, the
specified coefficients will become the initial coefficients for all future solves
for that particular model. These coefficients are, however, overridden when
temperature dependency is turned on and another set of initial values is specified
at discrete temperatures. The curve fitting tool looks for the initial
coefficients at a particular temperature. If no coefficients are specified at
discrete temperatures, the initial coefficients set before temperature dependency
was turned on are used.
9.3.1.4.1. Batch
You define your coefficient values and temperature dependency using the SET option
of the TBFT command, as follows:
TBFT,SET,ID,CREEP,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
Option2 = creep model name Option3 = order, if applicable Option4 = index of

coefficient Option5 = value of coefficient
Then you can modify the coefficients with the FIX option of the TBFT command.
TBFT,FIX,ID,CREEP,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
Option2 = creep model name Option3 = order, if applicable Option4 = index of

coefficient Option5 = 0 variable, 1 fixed
TBFT,SET,ID,CREEP,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
Option2 = creep model name Option3 = order, if applicable Option4 = tdep or tref
Option5 = For Option4 = tdep, 1 to turn on, 0 to turn off. For Option4 = tdep, a
specific temp value, or “all.”
9.3.1.4.2. GUI
The models listed in Table 9.6: “Creep Models and Abbreviations” are available
directly from the GUI. When you pick a model from the choices, ANSYS automatically
configures the coefficients for the model. You can then make modifications,
including initializing and/or fixing certain coefficients.

Your error norm, your maximum number iterations allowed, and your error tolerance
will affect the accuracy of your results. There are two available error norms
available for the regression. The default error norm calculation 9–12
Section 9.3: Creep Material Curve Fitting option is normalized curve fitting. It
usually yields better results than unnormalized curve fitting, since normalized
fitting gives equal weight to all data points when minimizing the error norms.
Other available solve criteria are number of iterations, residual tolerance, and
coefficient change tolerance. The solution stops when both residual tolerance and
coefficient change tolerance is met or if the number of iterations criteria is
met. The coefficients are updated after every iteration during the solve process.
9.3.1.5.1. Batch
The batch command is:
TBFT,SOLVE,ID,CREEP,Option2,Option3,Option4, ..., Option7
Option2 = creep function name (See Table 9.6: “Creep Models and Abbreviations”)
Option3 = not applicable for creep models Option4 = error norm: 0 = unnormalized,
1 = normalized (default) Option5 = maximum number of iterations Option6 =
tolerance of residual changes Option7 = tolerance of coefficient changes
Other solving parameters are available. See the TBFT command for details.
9.3.1.5.2. GUI
After you fill in the last set of coefficient values, the analysis moves
automatically to the solution phase. Each of the options specified in the command
line description is presented as a pull down menu or fill in box, and each option
must be specified before Solve will begin. The coefficients are updated in the GUI
after the solution is complete.
9.3.1.6. Plot the Experimental Data and Analyze

After you initiate Solve, the coefficient tables will contain the fitted
coefficients and also the residual errors. You can then plot your data and
visually interpret the results. Column one is your X- axis, with each additional
column plotted separately as a function of column one. You should reserve column
one for the variable that you would like to see vary in the plot. For example, if
your data contains time, temperature, stress and creep strain, you may wish to see
the creep strain vary as a function of time, at different temperatures and
stresses in the plot. Add your experimental data using multiple TBFT,EADD commands
(or the corresponding GUI method). Split the file into multiple experimental
fields as prescribed earlier, one for each combination of temperature and stress.
Right mouse button (RMB) functions allow you to Zoom, Fit, Save Plot to File,
View/Hide Legend and View/Hide Grid. Two or more fitted functions can also be
compared in the same plot. For example, you can view Mooney2 Uniaxial and Mooney9
Uniaxial plots right on top of each other, provided both of these function are
already solved for. RMB also allows you to see the number of points used to
generate the plot, and also change the Minimum X Value and the Maximum X Value in
a plot. You can use the middle-mouse button (context sensitive) to hide a
particular curve within a graph.
9.3.1.6.1. Batch
TBFT,PLOT,ID,Option1,Option2,Option3,Option4
Option1 = CREEP Option3 = creep model name Option4 = not used

9–13
9.3.1.6.2. GUI
You can simultaneously display many data sets for each function plotted. Each
window of your display can be used to display each one of the data sets you are
plotting against column one.
9.3.1.6.3. Analyze Your Curves for Proper Fit

You use the GUI to graphically review the curve fitting result and ensure a good
fit throughout the range of data. Use the plotted curve fitting results both to
determine the degree of fit at various locations and to verify the error
norm/residual value. You can then determine the quality of a curve fitting and
decide whether to accept the results. If the results are unacceptable, you may
want to go back to step 3, and then solve again with a new model, redefining
certain initial values of the coefficients, and also modifying some of the other
control parameters. You can continue to use your experimental data, repeating step
3 through step 6 until you obtain a satisfactory solution.

After you are satisfied with your curve fitting results, you can write the curve
fitting data to the ANSYS database using TBFT, FSET. The GUI or the command line
converts the coefficients to the appropriate form before writing to ANSYS TB
tables. ANSYS stores the data as part of the material property set for use in
subsequent analyses.
9.3.1.7.1. Batch
TBFT,FSET,ID,CREEP,Option2,Option3
Option2 = creep model abbreviation Option3 = not applicable
9.3.1.7.2. GUI
When you complete the process, click the Write to Database button to write the
fitted coefficients of your creep model as a creep data table in ANSYS material
database. You are then returned to the material properties dialog. The curve data
can now be accessed for the full range of material behavior.
9.3.2. Tips For Curve Fitting Creep Models

The following tips will help to ensure successful curve fitting. They are only
suggestions, and do not represent a singular method or strategy. Also, following
them does not guarantee a solution. Refer to Section 2.5.11: Creep Equations for
additional details on each implicit creep model.
Name 1 Strain Hardening Notes Strain hardening has 4 coefficients, with C4
dedicated to temperature dependency. If you do not have temperature dependent
data, set C4 to zero. If you have difficulty solving temperature dependent data,
use experimental data for only one temperature and fix C4 to zero. Solve, and then
add data for your other temperatures. Then release C4 and solve for all
coefficients. You can also solve for just C4 by fixing the C1, C2 and C3 values.
Time hardening has 4 coefficients, with C4 dedicated to temperature dependency. If
you do not have temperature dependent data, set C4 to zero. If you have difficulty
solving temperature dependent data, use experimental data for only one temperature
and fix C4 to zero. Solve, and then add data for your other temperatures. Then
release C4 and solve for all coefficients. You can also solve for just C4 by
fixing the C1, C2 and C3 values.
2 Time Hardening
9–14
Section 9.4: Viscoelastic Material Curve Fitting
3 Generalized Exponential Generalized exponential has 5 coefficients, with C4
dedicated to temperature dependency. If you do not have temperature dependent
data, set C4 to zero. Use a low value for C5 (e.g., 1e-3) to avoid floating-point
overflows in the exponential term. If you have difficulty solving for temperature
dependent data, use experimental data for only one temperature, fix C4 to zero,
then solve. Then add data for your other temperatures, release C4 and solve for
all coefficients. You can also solve for just C4 by fixing C1, C2 and C3.
Generalized Graham has 8 coefficients. You use C8 for temperature dependency. If
you do not have temperature dependent data, set C8 to zero. If you have difficulty
solving temperature dependent data, use experimental data for only one
temperature, fix C8 to zero, and solve. Then add data for other temperatures,
release C8 and solve for the remaining coefficients individually. Generalized
Blackburn has 7 coefficients. It is advisable to look at the exponential terms and
try to keep them from floating-point overflows. To keep eC2σ within floating-point
range, make sure the initial value of C2 is such that C2σ is close to 1. Similarly
try to keep σ/C4 and C7σ close to 1. Modified time hardening has 4 coefficients.
C4 is for temperature dependency. If you do not have temperature dependent data,
fix C4 to zero. Modified Strain Hardening has 3 coefficients. This model can be
complex for curve fitting. To keep the C1σ [(C3 + 1)ε] term from going negative,
C1 2 is replaced with C1 but converted to the proper form before beings written to
the ANSYS database. 8 Generalized Garofalo Generalized Garofalo has 4
coefficients, with C4 dedicated to temperature dependency. If you do not have
temperature dependent data, set C4 to zero. To keep the Sinh term within floating-
point range, keep c2σ close to one when you initialize the coefficients.
Exponential form has 3 coefficients, with C3 dedicated to temperature dependency.
If you do not have temperature dependent data, set C3 to zero. To keep eσC2 within
floating-point range, keep σ/C2 close to one. Norton model has 3 coefficients,
with C3 dedicated to temperature dependency. If you do not have temperature
dependent data, set C3 to zero. Time hardening has 7 coefficients. This is a
complex model. Here it is advisable to solve for temperature independent data
first and then introduce temperature related data.
C2 C3
4 Generalized Graham
5 Generalized Blackburn
6 Modified Time Hardening 7 Modified Strain Hardening
9 Exponential Form
10 Norton 11 Prim+Sec Time Hardening
12 Prim+Sec Rational Polynomial Rational polynomial is a very complex model for

curve fitting, with 10 coefficients. If you find it hard to fit this data, it is
advisable that you split the experimental data into primary creep data and
secondary creep data. Primary creep data is the initial part of the curve that
covers the nonlinearity in the strain rate. Fit only the secondary data by fixing
C1 to 1 and then set all other coefficients except C2, C3 and C4 to zero. Use a
low value of C3 to keep 10C3σ within floatingpoint range. Coefficients C5 to C10
in curve fitting refers to coefficients C7 to C12 in the implicit creep equation.
Then add the primary creep data, release all coefficients, and solve. 13
Generalized Time Hardening Generalized time hardening has 6 coefficients. Set C6
to zero if you have temperature independent data. When initializing coefficients
set C5σ close to 1 to avoid floating-point overflows.
9.4. Viscoelastic Material Curve Fitting

Viscoelastic material curve fitting determines your material constants by relating
your experimental data to the Prony series expansion for both the shear and bulk
modulus of the ANSYS hypoviscoelastic material option.
9–15
Chapter 9: Material Curve Fitting Curve fitting is performed either interactively
or via batch commands. You input the experimental data, define the order of Prony
series expansion, perform nonlinear regression, view the curve fitting results
graphically, compare the experimental data, and write the fitted coefficients to
the database as ANSYS nonlinear data table commands for the subsequent finite
elements analyses. Current tools allow you to fit shear modulus and/or bulk
modulus and/or shift functions, along with discrete temperature dependencies for
multiple data sets.
9.4.1. Using Curve Fitting to Determine the Coefficients of Viscoelastic Material

Model
The steps for Viscoelastic Curve Fitting are defined as follows:
text file delimited by a space or a comma.
2 Section 9.4.1.2: Input the Data into AN- The experimental data can be read into
ANSYS from the GUI or via SYS batch commands, as a plain text file. 3 Section
9.4.1.3: Select a Material Model This includes Prony series expansion of shear
and/or bulk moduli as Option well as shift function. The supported shift functions
include WLF and TN. 4 Section 9.4.1.4: Initialize the Coefficients Viscoelastic
curve fitting is a nonlinear regression; the initial value of your coefficients is
very important for a successful solution. 5 Section 9.4.1.5: Specify Control
Paramet- Specify the error norm to be used, the solution control parameters, ers
and Solve and perform the nonlinear regression. 6 Section 9.4.1.6: Plot the
Experimental Data and Analyze Graphically view the curve fitting results. Review
and verify the results by comparing them with the experimental data and the
regression errors. If any factor is not acceptable, repeat steps 3 to 7 to obtain
a new curve fitting solution.
7 Section 9.4.1.7: Write Data to TB Com- Write your curve fitting results in TB
command format to the ANSYS mand database.

Curve fitting requires experimental test data. For curve fitting viscoelastic
materials, the experimental data must be shear modulus and/or bulk modulus as a
function of time and temperature. The experimental data is named sdec or bdec to
distinguish it from other data types, such as hyperelastic or creep. This also
makes documenting your analyses more convenient. Your viscoelastic test data must
be a plain text file with headers to define the test data. The data file should be
in table form, delimited by a space or a comma. The header defines the test data
type and the temperature for your test data. For viscoelastic curve fitting with
multiple temperatures, you can evaluate coefficients at each discrete temperature
point and write it as a temperature-dependent Prony data table, or you can use the
WLF or TN shift functions to account for the temperature dependency. A separate
data file must be provided for each discrete temperature. The viscoelastic test
data can be any of 4 data types, see Table 9.7: “Viscoelastic Data Types and
Abbreviations”.
Table 9.7 Viscoelastic Data Types and Abbreviations

Time Shear modulus Bulk modulus Temperature time smod bmod temp
9–16
Section 9.4: Viscoelastic Material Curve Fitting The headers are used to describe
the data types that characterize the test data columns or attributes of the data.
The following listing contains the appropriate headers, followed by the delimited
data:
/temp,100 ! define temperature attribute 0.01 2992.53 1 2978.514207 2 2965.45541 4
2942.293214 6 2922.530649 8 2905.612202 10 2891.073456 20 2842.506984 40
2798.142793 60 2772.383729 80 2750.631843 100 2730.398114 200 2643.125432 400
2517.475394 600 2431.262053 800 2366.580897 1000 2313.955396 2000 2117.922594 4000
1833.734397 6000 1627.199197 8000 1470.6806 10000 1347.264527 20000 964.0141125
40000 586.1405449 60000 392.186777 80000 277.2706253 100000 202.0025278 200000
46.87056342 400000 2.669209118 600000 0.156653269 800000 0.0137224 1000000
0.005591539

You use the EADD option of the TBFT command to input your data files. The
experimental data must be read into ANSYS from a plain text file. The experimental
data must be prepared as discussed in the previous section, and include both the
header information and the formatted test data. Each file is viewed as a data set
in ANSYS, and can be the complete set of experimental test data or a part of an
experimental test data. You can include several data sets, including tests
performed at different temperatures. Although different data sets can have the
same/or different temperature, each file can have only one temperature. Multiple
temperature data sets must be input with multiple files. Two types of data may be
required for viscoelastic curve fitting, either shear modulus vs. time and/or bulk
modulus vs. time. The data can also be a function of temperature, which can then
be accounted for by either WLF or TN shift function. You can use the GUI or batch
command to input your experimental data.
9.4.1.2.1. Batch
ID = index corresponding to the ANSYS material number Option1 = experimental data

type, either sdec or bdec Option2 = name of file containing experimental data
Option3 = file name extension Option4 = file directory
9–17
Chapter 9: Material Curve Fitting Note — “sdec” refers to the shear modulus as a
function of time and “bdec” refers to the bulk modulus as a function of time.
9.4.1.2.2. GUI
Click on the Add Dataset button and type the filename into the area provided. You
can also browse to a file in a specified location. Separate input is performed for
each data type (Option1 = sdec, or bdec)

The TBFT command provides the curve fitting tools for viscoelastic material
modeling. You represent your viscoelastic material behavior by a set of Prony-
series expansions of shear and/or bulk moduli to characterize the shear and the
bulk deformation of the material. You can also use the shift functions to
characterize the material's temperature dependency. First you define a case
casename to associate the set of coefficients for the Prony expansions with the
shift functions that characterize the material behavior. You can use the casename
to define several different options that characterize the same test data, and then
to compare the curve fitting results. To define the material model, you must first
define a casename, and then specify the order of shear and bulk moduli and the
type of the shift function(s), if required. You need to create an additional case
to define different shear order, bulk order or shift options. Once you create a
case, the number of shear terms, bulk terms, or shift options cannot be changed.
9.4.1.3.1. Batch
You define a viscoelastic material with the Prony series expansion by creating a
case and setting the order of shear modulus, bulk modulus, and shift options. You
create the case with the TBFT, FCASE command. The first line will include FCASE,
ID, NEW. Then you specify the number of shear terms, bulk terms, and the shift
function. The case is actually created only after the option is issued. The
following syntax examples and argument descriptions illustrate the relationship of
these activities.
TBFT,FCASE,ID,NEW,Option2,Option3
Option2 = PVHE (refers to Prony Viscohypoelastic) Option3 = user specified

casename
TBFT,FADD,ID,CATEGORY,Option2,Option3
CATEGORY = VISCO Option2 = pshear or pbulk or shift Option3 = dependent on Option2

as follows:
• •
Option2 = pshear or bulk, Option3 = NONE, or 1 to N Option2 = shift, Option3 =

NONE or TN or WLF
TBFT,FCASE,ID,FINI
9.4.1.3.2. GUI
You can use the GUI to interactively navigate the tree structure of the curve
fitting window. Each of the shear, bulk and shift options can be selected, and you
can fill in the appropriate casename in a text box field. As you choose the
options, the coefficient table is automatically created.
9–18

The initial values you choose for your coefficients will determine the success of
your viscoelastic curve fitting operations. A complete model has (2*NG+1)+(2* Nk
+1)+ NS number of the coefficients. NG is the order of the Prony series expansion
of the shear modulus. Nk is the order of the Prony series expansion of the bulk
modulus. NS is the number of coefficients of the shift function (NS = 2 for the TN
option and NS =3 for the WLF option). The coefficients are ordered as shear terms
first, then the bulk terms, and then the shift function. The coefficients are
ordered as α0G, α1G, τ1G, α2G, τ2G, … αnG, and τnG for shear modulus, and α0K,
α1K, τ1K, α2K, τ2K, … αnK, and τnK for bulk modulus. A shift function must be used
together with your shear and/or bulk modulus for temperature dependent
experimental data. The default coefficient is set to “one,” but you should
redefine the initial values before solving. When initializing your coefficients,
you should set αnKs to 1 and τnKs to time values that are equally distributed in
the log scale, spanning the data range from minimum to maximum time. For example,
in the shear decay versus time data file, if the time values vary from 1 to 10000,
and if you use 3rd order Prony, logical guesses for τ1G , τ2G and τ3G that span
this range could be τ1G = 1, τ2G = 100, and τ3G = 10,000 (also (1), (10) and
(10,000) or (1), (1,000) and (10,000), respectively). You should also note that
αnG used in curve fitting is the square root of the αnG used in ANSYS TB tables.
This was done to keep all αnG used in the TB tables positive. A good guess for the
WLF or TN parameter is the reference temperature you used during your partial
solve for shear and bulk. The index of the reference/base temperatures is the sum
of NumShear + NumBulk + 1. You can also fix (hold constant) your coefficients. You
specify a value for a coefficient and keep it unchanged, while allowing the other
coefficients to be operated on. You can then release the fixed coefficient later
if desired. By default, all of the coefficients are free to vary. You estimate
coefficients for temperature dependent data either by using the shift function, as
described in the next section, or by turning the temperature dependency flag on
and setting a reference temperature before you solve for the coefficients. You can
set the reference temperature only to values specified using the /temp,value
header line in the experimental data. You can also specify tref = all and initiate
multiple solves to evaluate coefficients at all available discrete temperature
values. In this case, for data at three temperatures (t1, t2, and t3), a single
TBFT, SOLVE entry will initiate three separate solve operations at those three
discrete temperature values, and generate data at three corresponding discrete
temperatures. With temperature dependency on and the reference temperature set to
a particular value, a TBFT, SOLVE command solves for coefficients only at that
discrete temperature. To solve for coefficients at other temperatures, you set the
reference temperature to each of the desired discrete temperature values and solve
again. You can initialize the coefficients before or after turning temperature
dependency on. If the coefficients are initialized before turning temperature
dependency on, the specified coefficients will become the initial coefficients for
all future solves for that particular model. These coefficients are, however,
overridden when temperature dependency is turned on and another set of values is
specified at a discrete temperature value. The curve fitting tool looks for the
initial coefficients at a particular temperature. If no coefficients are specified
at discrete temperature values, the initial coefficients set before temperature
dependency was turned on are used.
9.4.1.4.1. Batch
TBFT,SET,ID,CASE,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
Option2 = casename Option3 = not applicable Option4 = index of coefficient

9–19
Option5 = value of coefficient
For example:
TBFT,SET,1, myvisco1,,1,1.2 TBFT,SET,1, myvisco1,,2,1.5 ! Initialize the first
coefficient to 1.2 ! Initialize the second coefficient to 1.5
Use the TBFT,FIX command to fix a coefficient to a value set by the TBFT, SET
command or to release a previously fixed coefficient. By default, coefficients are
not fixed.
TBFT,FIX,ID,CASE,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
Option2 = casename Option3 = not applicable Option4 = index of coefficient Option5

= 1 to fix, 0 to vary
For example:
TBFT,FIX,1, myvisco1,,1,1. TBFT,FIX,1, myvisco1,,2,1 ! Fix the first coefficient
to a value set via TBFT,SET ! Fix the second coefficient to a value set via
TBFT,SET
Temperature dependency uses Option4, and references data files you entered with
the appropriate “temp” header.
TBFT,SET,ID,VISCO,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
Option2 = model name. See Table 9.7: “Viscoelastic Data Types and Abbreviations”
available.
Option3 = not applicable Option4 = tdep or tref Option5 = If Option 4 = tdep, then
1 turns temperature dependency on and 0 turns it off. IfOption 4 =
tref, this value will be a specific temperature, or “all.”
9.4.1.4.2. GUI
The coefficients table is automatically updated in the viscoelastic curve fitting
GUI window when the order of shear modulus and/or bulk modulus and/or shift
function are defined. Specify values for your coefficients in the coefficients
table in the curve fitting GUI window, and check the appropriate boxes to fix them
or allow them to vary.

Viscoelastic curve fitting is a nonlinear regression process. You can use either
normalized or unnormalized error norm for the regression. The normalized error
norm is the default regression option for calculating the error. This error norm
generally gives better results than the unnormalized error norm, since the
normalized error gives equal weight to all data points. The solution control
parameters for nonlinear regression include number of iterations, residual
tolerance, and coefficient change tolerance. The solution stops when both residual
tolerance of error norm and coefficient change tolerance is met or if the number
of iterations criteria is met. The coefficients are updated when the solution is
completed. In general it is very difficult to directly solve a complete case
including coefficients of the shear modulus, the bulk modulus and the shift
function. Three solver options including shear modulus only, bulk modulus, and
shift function (or all) are provided to allow you to solve only Prony coefficients
of the shear modulus, Prony coefficients of the bulk modulus, and coefficients of
the shift function. In many cases, however, the coefficients of shift function
can't be solved until the shear or bulk modulus are solved. It is normal for a
solution to not converge at first, but to stop when the maximum iterations
criteria is reached. At that point, you should ex9–20
Section 9.4: Viscoelastic Material Curve Fitting amine the curve fitting results
and the solution history before proceeding any further. You can then adjust
parameters and resolve the problem whenever it is necessary.
9.4.1.5.1. Temperature Dependent Solves Using the Shift Function

For viscoelastic curve fitting using the shift function, follow these three steps
to perform the regression: 1. Solve the shear coefficients (if there are any): Set
the partial solve option using TBFT, SET,,,,,COMP, PSHEAR. Set the reference
temperature at which your partial solution will be performed using TBFT,
SET,,,,,TREF, TX. Only data at temperature TX will be used to estimate shear
coefficients Solve 2. Solve the bulk coefficients (if there are any): Set the
partial solve option using TBFT, SET,,,,,COMP, PBULK. Set the reference
temperature at which your partial solution will be performed using TBFT,
SET,,,,,TREF, TX. The reference temperature should be the same for both shear and
bulk. Only data at temperature TX will be used to estimate shear coefficients
TBFT,SOLVE 3. Solve the shift function (or all) coefficients: Set the partial
solve option using TBFT, SET,,,,,COMP, PVHE. TREF is not used when you solve for
all parameters. All temperature data is used to estimate the coefficients.
TBFT,SOLVE Note — For GUI operations, when only the shear and bulk buttons are
checked, only your shear coefficients are solved. To solve for both shear and
bulk, you must check all three buttons.
9.4.1.5.2. Temperature Dependent Solves Without the Shift Function

If you do not use the shift function, discrete data must be supplied to account
for temperature dependency. Follow these steps to perform the regression: 1. 2.
Turn the temperature dependency flag on using the command TBFT, SET,,,,,TDEP,1.
Solve the shear coefficients (if there are any): Set the partial solve option
using TBFT, SET,,,,,COMP, PSHEAR. Set the reference temperature at which your
partial solution will be performed using TBFT, SET,,,,,TREF, TX. Only data at
temperature TX will be used to estimate shear coefficients Initialize the
coefficients. TBFT,SOLVE Repeat the above steps for all temperatures.
9–21
Chapter 9: Material Curve Fitting 3. Solve the bulk coefficients (if there are
any): Set the partial solve option using TBFT, SET,,,,,COMP, PBULK. Set the
reference temperature at which your partial solution will be performed using TBFT,
SET,,,,,TREF, TX. Only data at temperature TX will be used to estimate the shear
coefficients. Initialize the coefficients. TBFT,SOLVE Repeat the above steps for
all temperatures. Alternatively, you can solve for both shear and bulk data at the
same time. 1. 2. Turn the temperature dependency flag on using the command TBFT,
SET,,,,,TDEP,1. Solve for ALL coefficients. Set the partial solve option using
TBFT, SET,,,,,COMP, PVHE. Set the reference temperature at which your partial
solution will be performed using TBFT, SET,,,,,TREF, TX. Only data at temperature
TX will be used to estimate shear and bulk coefficients Initialize the
coefficients. TBFT,SOLVE Repeat the above steps for all of the desired
temperatures.
9.4.1.5.3. Batch
Solution option command is:
TBFT,SET,ID,CASE,Option2,Option3,Option4,Option5
Option2 = casename Option3 = not applicable Option4 = comp Option5 = pshea (for
Shear only) or pbulk (for bulk only)
The SOLVE option allows you to specify procedure types, tolerances, and number of
iterations.
TBFT,SOLVE,ID,CASE,Option2,Option3,Option4, ..., Option7
Option2 = visco function name (See Table 9.7: “Viscoelastic Data Types and
Abbreviations”.) Option3 = not applicable Option4 = curve fitting procedure: 0 =
unnormalized least squares, 1 = normalized least squares (default) Option5 =
maximum number of iterations Option6 = tolerance of residual changes Option7 =
tolerance of coefficient changes
Other solving parameters are available. See the TBFT command for details.
9–22
9.4.1.5.4. GUI
The GUI provides access for you to choose your error norm, solution control
parameters, and solver options. Once you complete these specifications and SOLVE,
you can go back and modify your parameters as necessary to obtain a good curve
fit.
9.4.1.6. Plot the Experimental Data and Analyze

The best way to verify a good fit between your experimental data and the provided
curves is to plot your curves and visually inspect them.
9.4.1.6.1. Batch
You enter the plotting parameters from the command line as follows:
TBFT,PLOT,ID,ExpIndex,CASE,Option3
Option3 = casename
9.4.1.6.2. GUI
The Graph button provides direct means to plot the data.
9.4.1.6.3. Analyze Your Curves for Proper Fit

All of your data is plotted as a function of column 1 for the X-axis. Columns 2
and above are each plotted in a separate graph, in a separate window, with the
corresponding fitted data as a function of column 1. By default, all the shear
data sets and/or the bulk data sets as well as the corresponding fitting results
are plotted in two separated graphs in a GUI window. To view a specific data and
its corresponding fitting result, you click the right mouse button (RMB) on the
specific data set, and pick a desired option. You can also use the right mouse
button to turn the legend and/or axis on and off. The scales can be also switched
between log scale and regular scale. With the middle button, you can eliminate
certain curves from each window's display in order to see the remaining data more
clearly. Right mouse button (RMB) functions allow you to Zoom, Fit, Save Plot to
File, View/Hide Legend, and View/Hide Grid. Two or more fitted functions can also
be compared in the same plot. RMB also allows you to see the number of points used
to generate the plot, and also change the minimum X value and the maximum X value
in a plot. You can use the middle-mouse button (context sensitive) to hide a
particular curve within a graph. Reviewing your curve fitting result graphically
is the only way to ensure a good fit. After plotting the curve fitting results,
you can then review multiple plots and also verify the error norm/residual value
that is printed in the curve fitting GUI window. This information helps you
determine the quality of a curve fit and decide whether to accept the results. If
not, you may want to go back to step 3, solve again by changing the order of the
Prony series, redefining certain initial values of the coefficients, and possibly
other control parameters. You can continue to use your original data, repeating
step 3 through step 6 until you are satisfied with the solution.

After a successful curve fitting, the last step is to write the curve fitting data
as ANSYS Prony data table (the TB,Prony command) to the ANSYS database. The GUI or
the command line converts the coefficients to the appropriate form before writing
TB commands.
9.4.1.7.1. Batch
TBFT,FSET,ID,Option2,Option3
9–23
Option2 = case Option3 = casename
9.4.1.7.2. GUI
Click the Write to Database button and the fitted coefficients are automatically
written to the ANSYS material database according Prony data table. Please note
that the coefficients you see in the curve fitting module are different from those
in the TB tables. The τ values remain the same, but the α values are different.
The α values shown in ANSYS are the square of the α values derived during curve
fitting. They are also normalized to make α at time 0 = 1.
9–24
Chapter 10: Gasket Joints Simulation
10.1. Overview of Gasket Joints
Gasket joints are essential components in most structural assemblies. Gaskets as
sealing components between structural components are usually very thin and made of
many materials, such as steel, rubber and composites. From a mechanics point of
view, gaskets act to transfer force between components. The primary deformation of
a gasket is usually confined to one direction, namely, through thickness. The
stiffness contributions from membrane (in plane) and transverse shear are much
smaller in general compared to the through thickness. The stiffness contribution
therefore is assumed to be negligible, although the TB command provides options to
account for transverse shear. A typical example of a gasket joint is in engine
assemblies. A thorough understanding of the gasket joint is critical in engine
design and operation. This includes an understanding of the behavior of gasket
joint components themselves in an engine operation, and the interaction of the
gasket joint with other components. Elements within the ANSYS family of interface
element are used to model gaskets. By default, these elements are designed to
account for gasket through-thickness behavior. However, you can account for
transverse shear behavior by using an element Keyopt setting and transverse shear
option of the gasket material data table. See the TB command documentation and the
specific element documentation for more information.
10.2. Performing a Gasket Joint Analysis

A gasket joint analysis involves the same overall steps that are involved in any
ANSYS nonlinear analysis procedure. Most of these steps however warrant special
considerations for a gasket joint analysis. Presented below are the overall steps
with the special considerations noted, along with links to applicable sections
where more detailed information is included on that topic. 1. Build or import the
model. There are no special considerations for building or importing the model for
a gasket joint analysis. You perform this step as you would in any typical ANSYS
analysis. See Section 1.2: Building a Model in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide. For
further details on building the model, see the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide.
Define element type. To properly simulate gasket joints, you must define
structural element types and corresponding interface element types. See Section
10.4: ANSYS Family of Interface Elements in this chapter for more details on this
topic, and in particular, see Section 10.4.1: Element Selection for a table of
corresponding structural and interface elements. Define material. Use TB,GASKET to
define the gasket joint material. You can use TB,GASKET to define four types of
data input: general parameters, transverse shear stiffness, compression (loading),
and tension (unloading). You specify the type using TBOPT. You then input the sets
of data using the TBDATA and TBPT commands, as applicable. You can also plot most
of the gasket data types using the TBPLOT command. See Section 10.5: Material
Definition in this chapter for more details on this topic. Mesh the model. Use the
AMESH or VMESH commands to mesh the structural element types, and use the IMESH
command to mesh the gasket layer. Special restrictions apply to the IMESH command
in terms of matching the source and target. Also, the order in which you execute
these commands is critical. You can also mesh interface layers using the VDRAG
command, and can generate interface elements directly using the EGEN command. Each
of these commands involve special considerations for interface elements. See
Section 10.6: Meshing Interface Elements in this chapter for more details on this
topic. Solve. There are special solving considerations when you perform a gasket
joint analysis. These are primarily concerned with the gasket element stiffness
loss, and the gasket element's use with contact
2.
3.
4.
5.
Chapter 10: Gasket Joints Simulation elements. See Section 10.7: Solution
Procedure and Result Output in this chapter for more details on this topic. 6.
Review Results. You can print or plot any of four gasket output items: stresses
(also pressure), total closure, total inelastic closure, and thermal closure,
using the PRESOL, PRNSOL, PLESOL, PLNSOL, or ESOL commands. You can also use these
items with the *GET command in POST1. See Section 10.8: Reviewing the Results in
this chapter for more details on this topic.
10.3. Finite Element Formulation

The primary deformation behavior of gasket joints is through-thickness
deformation. It is therefore difficult to use solid continuum elements to
effectively model gasket joints. The interface elements, which are based on the
relative deformation of the top and bottom surfaces, offer a direct means to
quantify through-thickness deformation of the gasket joints. Thus the pressure
versus closure behavior can be directly applied to characterize the gasket
material. The element formulation is based on a corotational procedure. Refer to
Gasket Material in the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for further details.
10.3.1. Element Topologies

An interface element is composed of bottom and top surfaces. ANSYS provides
several types of interface elements for the analysis of the gasket joints. Figure
10.1: “Element Topology of a 3-D 8-Node Interface Element” shows the geometry of a
3-D 8-node interface element available in ANSYS. An element midplane is created by
averaging the coordinates of node pairs from the bottom and top surfaces of the
elements. The numerical integration of interface elements is performed in the
element midplane. The Gauss integration scheme is used for the numerical
integration.
Figure 10.1 Element Topology of a 3-D 8-Node Interface Element
10.3.2. Thickness Direction

The thickness direction is defined as the normal direction of the mid plane of the
element at the integration point, and computed inside of ANSYS. The positive
direction is defined by the right-hand rule going around the nodes in the
midplane. The through thickness deformation is quantified by the relative
deformation of bottom and top surfaces along the thickness direction. The
thickness direction is then noted as the X-direction according to the ANSYS
notation convention. No ESYS coordinate system is allowed for the elements.
10–2
# ### # § © & %$# " #! # ## # ¢ ¨ £ ¡ ¤

Section 10.4: ANSYS Family of Interface Elements
10.4. ANSYS Family of Interface Elements

ANSYS offers 4 types of elements to simulate gaskets. They are referred to as
interface elements and are summarized as follows: • • • • INTER192 - 2-D, 4-node,
linear element. INTER193 - 2-D, 6-node, quadratic element. INTER194 - 3-D, 16-
node, quadratic element. INTER195 - 3-D, 8-node, linear element
The 2-D elements, INTER192 and INTER193, use a KEYOPT to define various stress
state options.
10.4.1. Element Selection

The simulation of an entire gasket joint assembly, consisting of the gasket and
the structural elements on either side of the gasket, involves choosing interface
elements and structural elements that have the same characteristics. Use the
following table as a guideline for choosing interface and structural elements that
have the same characteristics:
For elements with these ... use this interface characteristics: element: 2-D,
linear 2-D, quadratic 3-D, quadratic 3-D, linear INTER192 INTER193 INTER194
INTER195 ... with one of these structural elements: PLANE42, HYPER56, VISCO106,
PLANE182 PLANE2, PLANE82, HYPER84, VISCO88, PLANE183 VISCO89, SOLID92, SOLID95,
SOLID96, SOLID186, SOLID187 SOLID45, SOLID46, HYPER58, SOLID62, SOLID64, SOLID65,
HYPER86, SOLID185, SOLSH190
Proper element type is chosen based on the stress states of interest and
structural element types used. Element selection is done by the element type
command, ET, for example,
ET,1,195
defines element type 1 as element INTER195.
10.4.2. Applications
In general, linear and quadratic elements are chosen for the following reasons: •
• • • Fewer nodes produce a smaller model that runs faster with less computer
resources. Quadratic elements are necessary if stress gradients are present in
surrounding bodies. If elements are to follow a curved boundary closely, quadratic
elements are ideal because their edges are arcs. With a free mesh (tetrahedral
elements) the mid-node (quadratic) is required for an accurate solution.
When a surrounding structure can be considered as a 2-D structure, for example,

plane stress / strain / axisymmetric, 2-D elements are the ideal choice. A good
example of the use of 2-D element INTER192 or INTER193 is the gasket between the
"flanged" ends of pipe line. In this case the gasket properties do not vary
significantly with geometric location.
10–3
Chapter 10: Gasket Joints Simulation For a 3-D structure such as an internal
combustion engine, 3-D element INTER194 or INTER195 is a good choice for
simulating the gasket between the cylinder head and block. In this case there is
no "nice" geometry because the gasket must fill in between two complicated
surfaces, in between cylinders, and around other holes and passages. Also the
gasket properties can vary in different zones. For example in a cylinder head,
there is usually a much stiffer zone immediately around the cylinder to contain
combustion pressure (called the "fire ring"). The remainder of the gasket is much
softer.
10.5. Material Definition

10.5.1. Material Characteristics
The TB command option GASKET allows gasket joints to be simulated with the ANSYS
interface elements, in which there is only one element through the thickness, and
the through thickness deformation is decoupled from the in plane deformation. The
gasket material is usually under compression. The material under compression is
highly nonlinear. The gasket material also exhibits quite complicated unloading
behavior when compression is released. The GASKET option allows you to directly
input data for the experimentally measured complex pressure closure curve for the
material model (compression curve), and also for several unloading pressure
closure curves. When no unloading curves are defined, the material behavior
follows the compression curve while it is unloaded. As it is a joint component,
there often exists an initial gap or void. On the other hand, from a modeling
point of view, it is a lot easier to fill the spaces or volumes between the
adjacent components with the interface meshes, and then set an initial gap for the
gasket material to account for it. As long as the closure is less than the initial
gap, no pressure is acted on the gaskets. Also, when it is under tension loading,
there will be an open gap. Therefore, gasket joints generally do not have tension
pressure. A stress cap is used to restrict tension pressure in the gasket joint
elements. The GASKET material option must be used with interface elements
INTER192, INTER193, INTER194, and INTER195. Figure 10.2: “Pressure vs. Closure
Behavior of a Gasket Material” shows the experimental pressure vs. closure
(relative displacement of top and bottom gasket surfaces) data for a graphite
composite gasket material. The sample was unloaded and reloaded 5 times along the
loading path and then unloaded at the end of the test to determine the materials
unloading stiffness.
10–4
Section 10.5: Material Definition
Figure 10.2 Pressure vs. Closure Behavior of a Gasket Material
10.5.2. Input Format

You input gasket material data using TB,GASKET. The material data consists of 2
main parts: general parameters and pressure closure behaviors. The general
parameters define initial gasket gap, stable stiffness for numerical
stabilization, and stress cap for a gasket in tension. The pressure closure
behavior includes gasket compression (loading) and tension data (unloading). The
TB command specification for defining a gasket material is:
TB,GASKET,MAT,NTEMP,NPTS,TBOPT where TBOPT = one of the following types of gasket
material data: • • • • • PARA: gasket material general parameters. COMP: gasket
compression data. LUNL: gasket linear unloading data. NUNL: gasket nonlinear
unloading data. TSS: gasket transverse shear stiffness data.
You input the general parameters using the TBDATA command, then input the
compression and unloading data using the TBPT command. Presented in the following
sections are examples of inputs for the various types of gasket data.
10–5
10.5.2.1. Define General Parameters

(TBOPT = PARA) The gasket material general parameters include the initial gap,
stable stiffness and the maximum tension stress cap. These parameters are defined
as C1, C2, and C3 in the following example:
TB,GASKET,MAT,NTEMP,NPTS,PARA TBDATA,1,C1,C2,C3
Refer to Gasket Materials in the ANSYS Elements Reference for further details on
these parameters.
10.5.2.2. Define Compression Load Closure Curve

(TBOPT = COMP) The compression pressure closure curve gasket material definition
option is defined as follows:
TB,GASKET,MAT,NTEMP,NPTS,COMP TBPT,,x1,y1 TBPT,,x2,y2 TBPT,,xi,yi
where: xi, yi are pairs of closure and pressure values. The following input
listing is an example defining a compressive pressure vs. closure behavior of a
gasket joint material with 10 data points.
TB,GASKET,1, ,10,COMP TBPT,, 0.20000E-04, 0.54000E+08 TBPT,, 0.40000E-04,
0.15150E+09 TBPT,, 0.60000E-04, 0.24900E+09 TBPT,, 0.78000E-04, 0.30000E+09 TBPT,,
0.12000E-03, 0.37200E+09 TBPT,, 0.19000E-03, 0.47400E+09 TBPT,, 0.28600E-03,
0.50500E-03, 0.89550E+09 ! define compression data
10.5.2.3. Define Linear Unloading Data

(TBOPT = LUNL) The linear unloading gasket material definition option is a simple
way to define the gasket unloading behavior. Several unloading slopes can be
defined to accommodate the comprehensive unloading behavior as follows:
TB,GASKET,MAT,NTEMP,NPTS,LUNL TBPT,,x1,y1 TBPT,,x2,y2 TBPT,,xi,yi
where: NPTS is the number of unloading points; xi is the closure where unloading
started, and yi is unloading slope. The following input listing is an example
showing the linear unloading behavior of a gasket joint material with 3 unloading
points
TB,GASKET,1, ,3,LUNL ! define linear unloading data TBPT,, 0.78000E-04,
0.25100E+12
10–6
TBPT,, 0.28600E-03, 0.25500E+12 TBPT,, 0.50500E-03, 0.10600E+13
A sample plot representing linear unloading curves is shown in Figure 10.3:

“Gasket Material Input: Linear Unloading Curves”.
Figure 10.3 Gasket Material Input: Linear Unloading Curves
10.5.2.4. Define Nonlinear Unloading Data

(TBOPT = NUNL) The nonlinear unloading gasket material definition option provides
a more comprehensive way of defining gasket material unloading behavior. The input
listing format is:
TB,GASKET,MAT,NTEMP,NPTS,NUNL TBPT,,x1,y1 TBPT,,x2,y2 TBPT,,xi,yi
where: xi, yi are pairs of closure and pressure values. Several unloading curves
can be defined. An example showing the nonlinear unloading behavior of a gasket
joint material with 3 unloading points is as follows:
TB,GASKET,1, ,5,NUNL ! define first nonlinear unloading data TBPT,, 0.78000E-04,
0.54100E-04, 0.15000E+07 TBPT,, 0.00000E+00, 0.00000E+00 TB,GASKET,1, ,5,NUNL !
define second nonlinear unloading data
10–7
TBPT,, TBPT,, TBPT,, TBPT,, TBPT,, 0.28600E-03, 0.26400E-03, 0.26100E-03,
0.25600E-03, 0.00000E+00, 0.58500E+09 0.22350E+08 0.90000E+07 0.15000E+07
0.00000E+00 ! define third nonlinear unloading data
TB,GASKET,1, ,5,NUNL TBPT,, 0.50500E-03, 0.89550E+09 TBPT,, 0.47800E-03,

0.00000E+00, 0.00000E+00
A sample plot representing nonlinear unloading curves is shown in Figure 10.4:

“Gasket Material Input: Nonlinear Unloading Curves”.
Figure 10.4 Gasket Material Input: Nonlinear Unloading Curves
10.5.3. Temperature Dependencies

Inputting temperature dependent gasket material properties follows the standard
ANSYS procedure for inputting temperature dependent data for other materials. The
following format shows this procedure.
TB,GASKET,MAT,NTEMP,NPTS,LUNL TBTEMP,T1 TBPT,,x1,y1 TBPT,,x2,y2 TBTEMP,T2
TBPT,,x1,y1 TBPT,,x2,y2
ANSYS will automatically interpolate the temperature data to the material points
using linear interpolation. When the temperature is out of the specified range,
the closest temperature point is used.
10–8
Section 10.5: Material Definition The following is an example input listing
defining a compressive pressure vs. closure behavior of a gasket joint material
with 5 temperature points and up to 10 data points for each temperature point, and
3 nonlinear unloading curves with each curve having 5 temperatures and 5 data
points.
TB,GASKET,1, 5,10,COMP ! define compression data with 5 temperatures TBTEMP,
100.000 TBPT,, 0.20000E-04, 0.54000E+08 TBPT,, 0.40000E-04, 0.15150E+09 TBPT,,
0.60000E-04, 0.24900E+09 TBPT,, 0.78000E-04, 0.30000E+09 TBPT,, 0.12000E-03,
0.35800E-03, 0.67350E+09 TBPT,, 0.43200E-03, 0.78000E+09 TBPT,, 0.50500E-03,
0.89550E+09 TBTEMP, 200.000 TBPT,, 0.20000E-04, TBPT,, 0.40000E-04, TBPT,,
0.60000E-04, TBPT,, 0.78000E-04, TBPT,, 0.12000E-03, TBPT,, 0.19000E-03, TBPT,,
0.28600E-03, TBPT,, 0.35800E-03, TBPT,, 0.43200E-03, TBPT,, 0.50500E-03, TBTEMP,
300.000 TBPT,, 0.20000E-04, TBPT,, 0.40000E-04, TBPT,, 0.60000E-04, TBPT,,
0.35800E-03, TBPT,, 0.43200E-03, TBPT,, 0.50500E-03, TBTEMP, 400.000 TBPT,,
0.43200E-03, TBPT,, 0.50500E-03, TBTEMP, 500.000 TBPT,, 0.20000E-04, TBPT,,
0.50500E-03,
0.18000E+08 0.50500E+08 0.83000E+08 0.10000E+09 0.12400E+09 0.15800E+09

0.19500E+09 0.22450E+09 0.26000E+09 0.29850E+09
0.90000E+07 0.25250E+08 0.41500E+08 0.50000E+08 0.62000E+08 0.79000E+08

0.97500E+08 0.11225E+09 0.13000E+09 0.14925E+09
0.36000E+07 0.10100E+08 0.16600E+08 0.20000E+08 0.24800E+08 0.31600E+08

0.39000E+08 0.44900E+08 0.52000E+08 0.59700E+08
0.18000E+07 0.50500E+07 0.83000E+07 0.10000E+08 0.12400E+08 0.15800E+08

0.19500E+08 0.22450E+08 0.26000E+08 0.29850E+08
TB,GASKET,1, 5,5,NUNL ! define first nonlinear unloading data with 5 temperatures

TBTEMP, 100.000 TBPT,, 0.78000E-04, 0.30000E+09 TBPT,, 0.66900E-04, 0.24750E+08
TBPT,, 0.63100E-04, 0.82500E+07 TBPT,, 0.54100E-04, 0.15000E+07
10–9
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00, 0.00000E+00 TBTEMP, 200.000 TBPT,, 0.78000E-04, TBPT,,
0.66900E-04, TBPT,, 0.63100E-04, TBPT,, 0.54100E-04, TBPT,, 0.00000E+00, TBTEMP,
0.54100E-04, TBPT,, 0.00000E+00, TBTEMP, 400.000 TBPT,, 0.78000E-04, TBPT,,
0.54100E-04, TBPT,, 0.00000E+00,
0.10000E+09 0.82500E+07 0.27500E+07 0.50000E+06 0.00000E+00
0.50000E+08 0.41250E+07 0.13750E+07 0.25000E+06 0.00000E+00
0.20000E+08 0.16500E+07 0.55000E+06 0.10000E+06 0.00000E+00
0.10000E+08 0.82500E+06 0.27500E+06 0.50000E+05 0.00000E+00
TB,GASKET,1, 5,5,NUNL ! define second nonlinear unloading data with 5 temperatures

TBPT,, 0.26100E-03, 0.90000E+07 TBPT,, 0.25600E-03, 0.15000E+07 TBPT,,
0.00000E+00, 0.00000E+00 TBTEMP, 200.000 TBPT,, 0.28600E-03, TBPT,, 0.26400E-03,
TBPT,, 0.26100E-03, TBPT,, 0.25600E-03, TBPT,, 0.00000E+00, TBTEMP, 300.000 TBPT,,
0.00000E+00, TBTEMP, 400.000 TBPT,, 0.28600E-03, TBPT,, 0.26400E-03, TBPT,,
0.26100E-03, TBPT,, 0.25600E-03, TBPT,, 0.00000E+00, TBTEMP, 500.000 TBPT,,
0.00000E+00,
0.19500E+09 0.74500E+07 0.30000E+07 0.50000E+06 0.00000E+00
0.97500E+08 0.37250E+07 0.15000E+07 0.25000E+06 0.00000E+00
0.39000E+08 0.14900E+07 0.60000E+06 0.10000E+06 0.00000E+00
0.19500E+08 0.74500E+06 0.30000E+06 0.50000E+05 0.00000E+00
TB,GASKET,1, 5,5,NUNL ! define third nonlinear unloading data with 5 temperatures

TBPT,, 0.47500E-03, 0.13500E+08 TBPT,, 0.46800E-03, 0.15000E+07
10–10
TBPT,, 0.00000E+00, 0.00000E+00 TBTEMP, 200.000 TBPT,, 0.50500E-03, TBPT,,
0.46800E-03, TBPT,, 0.00000E+00, TBTEMP, 400.000 TBPT,, 0.50500E-03, TBPT,,
0.46800E-03, TBPT,, 0.00000E+00,
0.29850E+09 0.11300E+08 0.45000E+07 0.50000E+06 0.00000E+00
0.14925E+09 0.56500E+07 0.22500E+07 0.25000E+06 0.00000E+00
0.59700E+08 0.22600E+07 0.90000E+06 0.10000E+06 0.00000E+00
0.29850E+08 0.11300E+07 0.45000E+06 0.50000E+05 0.00000E+00
Sample plots of compression and unloading curves for gasket data to two
temperatures is shown in Figure 10.5: “Gasket Compression and Unloading Curves at
Two Temperatures”.
Figure 10.5 Gasket Compression and Unloading Curves at Two Temperatures
10.5.4. Plotting Gasket Data

You can plot gasket compression, linear unloading and nonlinear unloading data
using the TBPLOT command. The use of this command to plot gasket data is as
follows:
# %# '52$#"#!¦ '#######!¦4¥ ## # # ¨
#'5#2#6' ©1#02¦ )2 ( % $" 3 #
¡¢ # # $ " # # # ## # ¨ '%&###!¦ ######©¦§¥

10–11
# # " 3 10 ) '%&#$### #!2#¦ # (
£ ¤
Chapter 10: Gasket Joints Simulation TBPLOT,GASKET,MAT,TBOPT,TEMP,SEGN where TBOPT
specifies the gasket material option to be plotted, TEMP specifies plotting either
all of the temperature dependent data curves, or a curve at a specified
temperature, and SEGN specifies whether or not to add the segment numbers to the
curves.
10.6. Meshing Interface Elements

Three options are available for meshing interface elements: • • • For meshing
gasket layers as an area or volume, use the IMESH command. For meshing gasket
layers by dragging an area mesh along a path, use the VDRAG command. For
generating interface elements directly from a pattern, use the EGEN command.
There are special requirements for meshing interface elements. See Section 7.5.6:
Generating an Interface Mesh for Gasket Simulations in the ANSYS Modeling and
Meshing Guide for further details on this type of meshing. The following example
input listing shows the use of the IMESH command.
/batch,list /title, Test to demonstrate the use of IMESH command /com,
************************************************************ /com, * * /com, *
This is a simple test to demonstrate the use of IMESH * /com, * command to
generate gasket elements. The model consists * /com, * of two blocks with gasket
elements (INTER194) defined * /com, * between them. * /com, * * /com,
************************************************************ /prep7 !
*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ !* Define Element Types !
*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ et,1,187 ! Solid tetrahedral element
et,2,194 ! Interface layer element !*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ !*
Define Parameters !*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ EH=1.0 IH=0.1 DX=0
DY=0 DZ=IH Z1=EH Z2=Z1+IH Z3=Z2+EH !*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ !*
Generate Keypoints !*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ k,1,0,0 k,2,1,0
k,3,1,1 k,4,0,1 k,5,0,0,z1 k,6,1,0,z1 k,7,1,1,z1 k,8,0,1,z1 k,9,0,0,z2 k,10,1,0,z2
k,11,1,1,z2 k,12,0,1,z2
10–12
Section 10.6: Meshing Interface Elements
k,13,0,0,z3 k,14,1,0,z3 k,15,1,1,z3 k,16,0,1,z3 !
*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ !* Generate First Volume !
*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ v,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 !
*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ !* Generate Second Volume !
*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ v,9,10,11,12,13,14,15,16 !
*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ !* Generate Middle Volume !
*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ v,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12 !
*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ !* Define Element Size !
*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ esize,,4 ! !
*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ !* Mesh First Volume with Element Type
1 !*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ type,1 mat,1 vmesh,1 !
*++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ !* Generate Interface Layer with
IMESH command !* using Element Type 2 (INTER194) !
*++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ type,2 mat,2
imesh,area,6,7,0,DX,DY,DZ,TOL !*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ !* Mesh
Second Volume with Element Type 1 !*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ type,1
mat,1 vmesh,2 !*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ !* Plot Elements !
*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ /view,1 ,1,1,1 eplot finish
Figure 10.6: “Gasket Finite Element Model Geometry” shows the geometry of the
finite element model, a thin interface layer between two block volumes. Figure
10.7: “Whole Model Mesh with Brick Element” shows the mesh with solid brick
element, SOLID185, in top and bottom of block volumes, and Figure 10.8: “Interface
Layer Mesh” shows the mesh of interface element, INTER195, in the interface layer
between the two blocks. Figure 10.9: “Whole Model Tetrahedral Mesh” shows the mesh
with solid tetrahedral element, SOLID187, in top and bottom of block volumes, and
Figure 10.10: “Interface Layer Mesh with Degenerated Wedge Elements” shows the
mesh of interface element (degenerated wedge), INTER194, in the interface layer
between the two blocks.
10–13
Figure 10.6 Gasket Finite Element Model Geometry
Figure 10.7 Whole Model Mesh with Brick Element
10–14
Section 10.6: Meshing Interface Elements
Figure 10.8 Interface Layer Mesh
Figure 10.9 Whole Model Tetrahedral Mesh
10–15
Figure 10.10 Interface Layer Mesh with Degenerated Wedge Elements
10.7. Solution Procedure and Result Output

Gasket material behavior is highly nonlinear. The full Newton-Raphson solution
procedure (the standard ANSYS nonlinear method), is the default method for
performing this type of analysis. Other solution procedures for gasket solutions
are not recommended. Like most nonlinear problems, convergence behavior of a
gasket joint analysis depends strongly on the particular problem to be solved.
ANSYS has provided a comprehensive solution hierarchy, therefore it is always
recommended that you use the ANSYS default solution options, unless you are sure
about the benefits of the changes. Some special considerations for solving a
gasket problem are as follows: • • By default a zero stress cap has been enforced
on the gasket. When the element goes into tension, it will lose its stiffness and
may cause numerical instability. It is always a good practice to place the lower
and upper limit on the time step size using the DELTIM or NSUBST commands, and to
start with a small time step, then subsequently ramp it up . This ensures that all
of the modes and behaviors of interest will be accurately included and that the
problem is solved effectively. Gasket elements must be configured to support
transverse shear. Even if you do so, errors can result, especially for contact and
other nonlinear applications. You should not use gasket elements with contact
elements unless you configure the elements accordingly, and ascertain the mesh
compatibility of the gasket layer and its mating components.
Like any other type of nonlinear analysis, the ANSYS program performs a series of
linear approximations with corrections. A convergence failure can indicate a
physical instability in the structure, or it can merely be the result of some
numerical problem in the finite element model. The program printout gives you
continuous feedback on the progress of these approximations and corrections. (The
printout either appears directly on your screen, is captured on Jobname.OUT, or is
written to some other file [/OUTPUT].) You can examine some of this same
information in POST1, using the PRITER command, or in POST26, using the SOLU and
PRVAR commands. You should make sure that you understand the iteration history of
your analysis before you accept the results. In 10–16
Section 10.7: Solution Procedure and Result Output particular, do not dismiss any
program error or warning statements without fully understanding their meaning. A
typical output listing with gasket nonlinearity only is shown in Section 10.7.1:
Typical Gasket Solution Output Listing. When other types of nonlinearity such as
contact or materials are included, additional information will be printed out.
10.7.1. Typical Gasket Solution Output Listing

SOLUTION PROBLEM DIMENSIONALITY. . . DEGREES OF FREEDOM. . . . . ANALYSIS TYPE . .
. . . . . PLASTIC MATERIAL PROPERTIES NEWTON-RAPHSON OPTION . . . ..... . UX UY
..... INCLUDED. ..... OPTIONS ... UZ ... ... ... . .3-D . .STATIC (STEADY-STATE) .
.YES . .PROGRAM CHOSEN
*** NOTE *** CP= 0.000 TIME= 00:00:00 Present time 0 is less than or equal to the
previous time. Time will default to 1. *** NOTE *** CP= 0.000 TIME= 00:00:00
Nonlinear analysis, NROPT set to the FULL Newton-Raphson solution procedure for
ALL DOFs. *** NOTE *** CP= 0.000 TIME= 00:00:00
The conditions for direct assembly have been met. files will be produced. LOAD
STEP
No .emat or .erot
OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOAD STEP NUMBER. . . . . . . . . . . . . TIME AT END OF THE LOAD STEP. . . . . .

. AUTOMATIC TIME STEPPING . . . . . . . . . INITIAL NUMBER OF SUBSTEPS . . . . . .
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF SUBSTEPS . . . . . . MINIMUM NUMBER OF SUBSTEPS . . . . . .
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF EQUILIBRIUM ITERATIONS. STEP CHANGE BOUNDARY CONDITIONS . . . .
. TERMINATE ANALYSIS IF NOT CONVERGED . . . CONVERGENCE CONTROLS. . . . . . . . .
. . COPY INTEGRATION POINT VALUES TO NODE . .
. 1 . 1.0000 . ON . 200 . 20000 . 20 . 15 . NO .YES (EXIT) .USE DEFAULTS .YES, FOR

ELEMENTS WITH ACTIVE MAT. NONLINEARITIES PRINT OUTPUT CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . .
. . .NO PRINTOUT DATABASE OUTPUT CONTROLS ITEM FREQUENCY COMPONENT ALL ALL SVAR
ALL
Range of element maximum matrix coefficients in global coordinates Maximum=

4.326388889E+11 at element 0. Minimum= 388758681 at element 0. *** ELEMENT MATRIX
FORMULATION TIMES TYPE NUMBER ENAME TOTAL CP AVE CP 1 2 SOLID185 0.000 0.000000 2
1 INTER195 0.000 0.000000 Time at end of element matrix formulation CP= 0. ALL
CURRENT ANSYS DATA WRITTEN TO FILE NAME= FOR POSSIBLE RESUME FROM THIS POINT FORCE
CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.4200E+07 CRITERION= 0.2143E+05 SPARSE MATRIX DIRECT SOLVER.
Number of equations = 24, Memory available (MB) = 0.0 DISP CONVERGENCE VALUE EQUIL
ITER 1 COMPLETED.
Maximum wavefront = , Memory required (MB)
0 =
0.0
= 0.1130E-04 CRITERION= 0.2000E-06 NEW TRIANG MATRIX. MAX DOF INC= -0.4000E-05
10–17
FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.1367E-08 CRITERION= 51.35 <<< CONVERGED DISP

CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.3257E-20 CRITERION= 0.2000E-06 <<< CONVERGED EQUIL ITER 2
COMPLETED. NEW TRIANG MATRIX. MAX DOF INC = -0.2234E-20 >>> SOLUTION CONVERGED
AFTER EQUILIBRIUM ITERATION 2 *** ELEMENT RESULT CALCULATION TIMES TYPE 1 2 NUMBER
2 1 ENAME SOLID185 INTER195 TOTAL CP 0.000 0.000 AVE CP 0.000000 0.000000
*** NODAL LOAD CALCULATION TIMES TYPE NUMBER ENAME TOTAL CP 1 2 2 1 SOLID185
INTER195 0.000 0.000
AVE CP 0.000000 0.000000 2
*** LOAD STEP 1 SUBSTEP 1 COMPLETED. CUM ITER = *** TIME = 0.500000E-02 TIME INC =
0.500000E-02 *** AUTO STEP TIME: NEXT TIME INC = 0.50000E-02 UNCHANGED
FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.7716E-09 CRITERION= 100.6 DISP CONVERGENCE VALUE =

0.1951E-20 CRITERION= 0.2000E-06 <<< CONVERGED EQUIL ITER 1 COMPLETED. NEW TRIANG
MATRIX. MAX DOF INC= 0.1642E-20 FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.4624E-09 CRITERION=
102.7 <<< CONVERGED >>> SOLUTION CONVERGED AFTER EQUILIBRIUM ITERATION 1 *** LOAD
STEP 1 SUBSTEP 2 COMPLETED. CUM ITER = 3 *** TIME = 0.100000E-01 TIME INC =
0.500000E-02 *** AUTO TIME STEP: NEXT TIME INC = 0.75000E-02 INCREASED (FACTOR =
1.5000) FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.1964E-08 CRITERION= 176.1 DISP CONVERGENCE
VALUE = 0.3748E-20 CRITERION= 0.3000E-06 <<< CONVERGED EQUIL ITER 1 COMPLETED. NEW
TRIANG MATRIX. MAX DOF INC= -0.2744E-20 FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.8307E-09
CRITERION= 179.7 <<< CONVERGED >>> SOLUTION CONVERGED AFTER EQUILIBRIUM ITERATION
1 *** LOAD STEP 1 SUBSTEP 3 COMPLETED. CUM ITER = 4 *** TIME = 0.175000E-01 TIME
INC = 0.750000E-02 *** AUTO TIME STEP: NEXT TIME INC = 0.11250E-01 INCREASED
(FACTOR = 1.5000) FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.3713E-08 CRITERION= 289.4 DISP
CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.7198E-20 CRITERION= 0.4500E-06 <<< CONVERGED EQUIL ITER 1
COMPLETED. NEW TRIANG MATRIX. MAX DOF INC= -0.4503E-20 FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE =
0.1468E-08 CRITERION= 295.3 <<< CONVERGED >>> SOLUTION CONVERGED AFTER EQUILIBRIUM
ITERATION 1 *** LOAD STEP 1 SUBSTEP 4 COMPLETED. CUM ITER = 5 *** TIME =
0.287500E-01 TIME INC = 0.112500E-01 *** AUTO TIME STEP: NEXT TIME INC = 0.16875E-
01 INCREASED (FACTOR = 1.5000) FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.1833E-07 CRITERION=
459.2 DISP CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.3753E-19 CRITERION= 0.6750E-06 <<< CONVERGED
EQUIL ITER 1 COMPLETED. NEW TRIANG MATRIX. MAX DOF INC= 0.1800E-19 FORCE
CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.3550E-08 CRITERION= 468.6 <<< CONVERGED >>> SOLUTION
CONVERGED AFTER EQUILIBRIUM ITERATION 1 *** LOAD STEP 1 SUBSTEP 5 COMPLETED. CUM
ITER = 6 *** TIME = 0.456250E-01 TIME INC = 0.168750E-01 *** AUTO TIME STEP: NEXT
TIME INC = 0.25313E-01 INCREASED (FACTOR = 1.5000) FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE =
0.2322E-07 CRITERION= 714.0 DISP CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.4656E-19 CRITERION=
0.1013E-05 <<< CONVERGED EQUIL ITER 1 COMPLETED. NEW TRIANG MATRIX. MAX DOF INC=
-0.2664E-19 FORCE CONVERGENCE VALUE = 0.6406E-08 CRITERION= 728.5 <<< CONVERGED
>>> SOLUTION CONVERGED AFTER EQUILIBRIUM ITERATION 1 *** LOAD STEP 1 SUBSTEP 6
COMPLETED. CUM ITER = 7 *** TIME = 0.709375E-01 TIME INC = 0.253125E-01 *** AUTO
TIME STEP: NEXT TIME INC = 0.37969E-01 INCREASED (FACTOR = 1.5000)
10–18
Section 10.8: Reviewing the Results
10.8. Reviewing the Results

Results from a gasket joint analysis consist mainly of displacements, stresses,
strains and reaction forces of the structural components and the gasket joint
layer information (gasket pressure, closure, etc.). You can review these results
in POST1, the general postprocessor, or in POST26, the time-history postprocessor.
See the Output Data sections of the element descriptions for any of the interface
elements (for example INTER192) for a description of the available output
components. Note that in POST1, only one substep can be read in at a time, and
that the results from that substep should have been written to Jobname.RST. (The
load step option command OUTRES controls which substep results are stored on
Jobname.RST.) A typical POST1 postprocessing sequence is described below.

• • To review results in POST1, the database must contain the same model for which
the solution was calculated. The results file (Jobname.RST) must be available.
10.8.2. Reviewing Results in POST1

1. Verify from your output file (Jobname.OUT) whether or not the analysis
converged at all load steps. • • 2. If not, you probably won't want to postprocess
the results, other than to determine why convergence failed. If your solution
converged, then continue postprocessing.
Enter POST1. If your model is not currently in the database, issue RESUME.
Command(s): /POST1 GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc Read in results for the
desired load step and substep, which can be identified by load step and substep
numbers or by time. Command(s): SET GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Read
Results> load step Display the results using any of the following options. Note
that gasket results, such as pressure and closure, are always displayed and listed
in the local coordinate system. Option: Display Deformed Shape Command(s): PLDISP
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Deformed Shape Option: Contour
Displays Command(s): PLNSOL or PLESOL GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot
Results> Contour Plot> Nodal Solu or Element Solu Use these options to display
contours of stresses, strains, or any other applicable item. When displaying the
gasket pressure distribution, if other structural mating components are not
included, ANSYS will plot the geometry of those components in gray. To have a
better visualization of a gasket pressure plot, it is better for you to select
gasket elements only.
3.
4.
Option: Tabular Listings

10–19
Chapter 10: Gasket Joints Simulation Command(s): PRNSOL (nodal results) PRESOL
(element-by-element results) PRRSOL (reaction data) PRITER (substep summary data),
etc. GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> List Results> Nodal Solution Main Menu>
General Postproc> List Results> Element Solution Main Menu> General Postproc> List
Results> Reaction Solution Option: Animation You can also animate gasket results
over time: Command(s): ANTIME GUI: Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Animate> Over Time
Other Capabilities Many other postprocessing functions are available in POST1. See
The General Postprocessor (POST1) in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for details.
Load case combinations usually are not valid for nonlinear analyses.
10.8.3. Reviewing Results in POST26

You can also review the load-history response of a nonlinear structure using
POST26, the time-history postprocessor. Use POST26 to compare one ANSYS variable
against another. For instance, you might graph the gasket closure vs. gasket
pressure, which should correspond to the material behavior defined by TB,GASKET.
You might also graph the displacement at a node versus the corresponding level of
applied load, or you might list the gasket pressure at a node and the
corresponding TIME value. A typical POST26 postprocessing sequence for a gasket
analysis is the same as the sequence for a typical nonlinear analysis. See steps 1
through 4 in Section 8.5.6.3: Reviewing Results in POST26 included in Chapter 8,
“Nonlinear Structural Analysis”.
10.9. Sample Gasket Element Verification Analysis (Command or Batch Method)

This is a simple finite element model created to demonstrate the gasket material
simulation. Two block elements with element type SOLID185 were generated as
supporters and a gasket element INTER195 was created. The whole system is fixed
along one side of each axes to prevent rigid body motion. A prescribed
displacement is placed on top of the supporter element. The gasket material is
assumed to have a nonlinear compression behavior with 5 different linear unloading
slopes. A pressure stress cap of 1.0e-5 is imposed so that no tension stress is
generated. Two load steps were used. The ANSYS commands are shown below.
/batch,list /title, Test to Verify Gasket Material and Element /com,
************************************************************** /com, * * /com, *
This is a simple test case to verify gasket material and * /com, * element. *
/com, * * /com, * The test case is set up with two solid SOLID185 elements * /com,
* with gasket element (INTER195) defined between them. * /com, * Displacement is
applied to one SOLID185 element while the * /com, * other SOLID185 element is
fixed. * /com, * The problem is solved in two load steps. In the first * /com, *
load step negative z-displacement is applied to one * /com, * SOLID195 element
causing compression of gasket elements. * /com, * Then, in the second load step, a
reverse displacement is * /com, * applied causing the unloading (tension) of
gasket element. * /com, * A Stress Cap of 1.0E-05 is enforced so that there is no
* /com, * tension pressure in gasket material. * /com, * *
10–20
Section 10.9: Sample Gasket Element Verification Analysis (Command or Batch
Method)
/com, ************************************************************** /prep7 !
*+++++++++++++++++++++ !* Define Element Types !*+++++++++++++++++++++ et,1,185
et,2,195 !*++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ !* Define Linear Elastic
Material Type 1 !*++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ mp,ex,1,2.1E12
mp,nuxy,1,0.0 !*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ !* Define
Initial Gap, Stable Stiffness, Stress Cap !
*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ delta0 = 0.00e-3 stiff0 = 0.0e7
scap = 1.0e-5 tb,gasket,2,,,para tbdata, 1,delta0,stiff0,scap !
*++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ !* Define Gasket Compression Curve !
*++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ tb,gask,2,1,13,comp tbpt,,0.460800E-03,
0.161226E+07 tbpt,,0.511600E-03, 0.520884E+07 tbpt,,0.562400E-03, 0.113134E+08
tbpt,,0.613200E-03, 0.200499E+08 tbpt,,0.664000E-03, 0.259960E+08 tbpt,,0.714800E-
03, 0.290345E+08 tbpt,,0.765600E-03, 0.357453E+08 tbpt,,0.816400E-03, 0.440064E+08
tbpt,,0.867200E-03, 0.563189E+08 tbpt,,0.918000E-03, 0.748254E+08 tbpt,,0.968800E-
03, 0.967287E+08 tbpt,,0.101960E-02, 0.129001E+09 tbpt,,0.109326E-02, 0.157147E+09
!*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ !* Define Gasket Linear Unloading Curve !
*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ tb,gask,2,1,5,lunl tbpt,,0.460800E-03,
2.430000E+11 tbpt,,0.714800E-03, 3.565000E+11 tbpt,,0.816400E-03, 5.92300E+11
tbpt,,0.968800E-03, 1.088000e+12 tbpt,,0.109326E-02, 1.490000E+12 !
*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++ !* List Gasket Material Model !
*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++ tblist,gask,all !*++++++++++++++++++ !* Define
Parameters !*++++++++++++++++++ n1 = 20 n2 = n1*100 n3 = n1 dis1 = -0.0008 dis2 =
-0.000001 pres = 1.0e7 pres2 = 10 pres3 = 1.4E8 dp = -2.0e7 elb = 1.0 elg = 0.1
10–21
!*+++++++++++++++ !* Generate Nodes !*+++++++++++++++ n,1, n,2,1.0 n,3,1.0,1.0
n,4,0.0,1.0 ngen,2,4,1,4,,0.0,0.0,elb ngen,2,8,1,4,,0.0,0.0,elb+elg
ngen,2,12,1,4,,0.0,0.0,2*elb+elg !*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ !*
Generate Front and Back SOLID185 Element !
*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ et,1,185,,1 mat,1 e,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
e,9,10,11,12,13,14,15,16 !*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ !* Generate Middle
INTER195 Element !*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ et,2,195,, type,2 mat,2
e,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12 !*++++++++++++++++++++++++++ !* Define Boundary Condition !
*++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nsel,s,loc,z d,all,uz nsel,all nsel,s,loc,x d,all,ux
nsel,all nsel,s,loc,y d,all,uy nsel,all finish /solu !*+++++++++++++++++++ !*
Apply Displacement !*+++++++++++++++++++ nsel,s,loc,z,elb*2+elg d,all,uz,dis1
nsel,all !*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ !* Solve First Load Step,
Compress the Elements !*+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
nsubst,n1,n2,n3 outres,all,all outres,svar,all solve !
*++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ !* Solve Second Load Step, Open the
Elements !*++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nsubst,n1,n2,n3
outres,all,all outres,svar,all nsel,s,loc,z,elb*2+elg d,all,uz,dis2 nall solve
finish !*++++++++++++++++++++++++ !* Postprocess the Results !
*++++++++++++++++++++++++
10–22
Section 10.9: Sample Gasket Element Verification Analysis (Command or Batch
Method)
/post1 set,last pres,s pres,epto pres,epel prns,epel finish !
*++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ !* Post26, Print and Plot Gasket
Element Results !*++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ /post26 esol,2,3,
,s,x,press esol,3,3, ,epel,x,delta add,4,2, , ,press,,,-1, ! change sign for
plotting add,5,3,,,delta,,,-1, ! change sign for plotting prvar,2,3,4,5 xvar,5
plvar,4 finish /exit,nosave
Presented below is the POST26 output resulting from this analysis.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------***** ANSYS
POST26 VARIABLE LISTING ***** TIME 0.50000E-01 0.10000 0.15000 0.20000 0.25000
0.30000 0.35000 0.40000 0.45000 0.50000 0.55000 0.60000 0.65000 0.70000 0.75000
0.80000 0.85000 0.90000 0.95000 1.0000 1.0500 1.1000 1.1500 1.2000 1.2500 1.3000
1.3500 1.4000 1.4500 1.5000 1.5500 1.6000 1.6500 1.7000 1.7500 1.8000 1.8500
1.9000 1.9500 2.0000 3S X press -139488. -278977. -418465. -557953. -697442.
-836930. -976418. -0.111591E+07 -0.125539E+07 -0.139488E+07 -0.153437E+07
-0.278389E+07 -0.557968E+07 -0.989280E+07 -0.152775E+08 -0.208613E+08 -0.250737E
+08 -0.277640E+08 -0.310936E+08 -0.357955E+08 -0.227277E+08 -0.965988E+07
-0.100000E-04 -0.100000E-04 -0.100000E-04 -0.100000E-04 -0.100000E-04 -0.100000E-
04 -0.100000E-04 -0.100000E-04 -0.100000E-04 -0.100000E-04 -0.100000E-04
-0.100000E-04 -0.100000E-04 -0.100000E-04 -0.100000E-04 -0.100000E-04 -0.100000E-
04 -0.100000E-04 3 EPELX delta -0.398672E-04 -0.797343E-04 -0.119601E-03
-0.159469E-03 -0.199336E-03 -0.239203E-03 -0.279070E-03 -0.318937E-03 -0.358804E-
03 -0.398672E-03 -0.438539E-03 -0.477349E-03 -0.514686E-03 -0.550578E-03
-0.585450E-03 -0.620132E-03 -0.656120E-03 -0.693558E-03 -0.730387E-03 -0.765909E-
03 -0.738405E-03 -0.710900E-03 -0.680150E-03 -0.640200E-03 -0.600250E-03
-0.560300E-03 -0.520350E-03 -0.480400E-03 -0.440450E-03 -0.400500E-03 -0.360550E-
03 -0.320600E-03 -0.280650E-03 -0.240700E-03 -0.200750E-03 -0.160800E-03
-0.120850E-03 -0.809000E-04 -0.409500E-04 -0.100000E-05 4 ADD press 139488.
278977. 418465. 557953. 697442. 836930. 976418. 0.111591E+07 0.125539E+07
0.139488E+07 0.153437E+07 0.278389E+07 0.557968E+07 0.989280E+07 0.152775E+08
0.208613E+08 0.250737E+08 0.277640E+08 0.310936E+08 0.357955E+08 0.227277E+08
0.965988E+07 0.100000E-04 0.100000E-04 0.100000E-04 0.100000E-04 0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04 0.100000E-04 0.100000E-04 0.100000E-04 0.100000E-04 0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04 0.100000E-04 0.100000E-04 0.100000E-04 0.100000E-04 0.100000E-04
0.100000E-04 5 ADD delta 0.398672E-04 0.797343E-04 0.119601E-03 0.159469E-03
0.199336E-03 0.239203E-03 0.279070E-03 0.318937E-03 0.358804E-03 0.398672E-03
0.438539E-03 0.477349E-03 0.514686E-03 0.550578E-03 0.585450E-03 0.620132E-03
0.656120E-03 0.693558E-03 0.730387E-03 0.765909E-03 0.738405E-03 0.710900E-03
0.680150E-03 0.640200E-03 0.600250E-03 0.560300E-03 0.520350E-03 0.480400E-03
0.440450E-03 0.400500E-03 0.360550E-03 0.320600E-03 0.280650E-03 0.240700E-03
0.200750E-03 0.160800E-03 0.120850E-03 0.809000E-04 0.409500E-04 0.100000E-05
10–23
10–24
Chapter 11: Fracture Mechanics
11.1. Definition of Fracture Mechanics
Cracks and flaws occur in many structures and components, sometimes leading to
disastrous results. The engineering field of fracture mechanics was established to
develop a basic understanding of such crack propagation problems. Fracture
mechanics deals with the study of how a crack or flaw in a structure propagates
under applied loads. It involves correlating analytical predictions of crack
propagation and failure with experimental results. The analytical predictions are
made by calculating fracture parameters such as stress intensity factors in the
crack region, which you can use to estimate crack growth rate. Typically, the
crack length increases with each application of some cyclic load, such as cabin
pressurization-depressurization in an airplane. Further, environmental conditions
such as temperature or extensive exposure to irradiation can affect the fracture
propensity of a given material. Some typical fracture parameters of interest are:
• • • Stress intensity factors (KI, KII, KIII) associated with the three basic
modes of fracture (see Figure 19.13: “The Three Basic Modes of Fracture” in the
ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference). J-integral, which may be defined as a path-
independent line integral that measures the strength of the singular stresses and
strains near a crack tip Energy release rate (G), which represents the amount of
work associated with a crack opening or closure
11.2. Solving Fracture Mechanics Problems

Solving a fracture mechanics problem involves performing a linear elastic or
elastic-plastic static analysis and then using specialized postprocessing commands
or macros to calculate desired fracture parameters. In this section, we will
concentrate on two main aspects of this procedure: • • Modeling the Crack Region
Calculating Fracture Parameters
See Chapter 2, “Structural Static Analysis” for details about the general static
analysis procedure. Also see Chapter 8, “Nonlinear Structural Analysis” for a
discussion of structural nonlinearities.
11.2.1. Modeling the Crack Region

The most important region in a fracture model is the region around the edge of the
crack. We will refer to the edge of the crack as a crack tip in a 2-D model and
crack front in a 3-D model. This is illustrated in Figure 11.1: “Crack Tip and
Crack Front”.
Chapter 11: Fracture Mechanics
Figure 11.1 Crack Tip and Crack Front
In linear elastic problems, it has been shown that the displacements near the
crack tip (or crack front) vary as r , where r is the distance from the crack tip.
The stresses and strains are singular at the crack tip, varying as
r 1/ . To pick up the singularity in the strain, the crack faces should be

coincident, and the elements around the crack tip (or crack front) should be
quadratic, with the midside nodes placed at the quarter points. Such elements are
called singular elements. Figure 11.2: “Examples of Singular Elements” shows
examples of singular elements for 2-D and 3-D models.
11–2
Section 11.2: Solving Fracture Mechanics Problems
Figure 11.2 Examples of Singular Elements
(a) 2-D models and (b) 3-D models
11.2.1.1. 2-D Fracture Models

The recommended element type for a 2-D fracture model is PLANE2, the 6-node
triangular solid. The first row of elements around the crack tip should be
singular, as illustrated in Figure 11.2: “Examples of Singular Elements” (a). The
PREP7 KSCON command (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Size Cntrls> Concentrat
KPs> Create), which assigns element division sizes around a keypoint, is
particularly useful in a fracture model. It automatically generates singular
elements around the specified keypoint. Other fields on the command allow you to
control
11–3
Chapter 11: Fracture Mechanics the radius of the first row of elements, number of
elements in the circumferential direction, etc. Figure 11.3: “A Fracture Specimen
and 2-D FE Model” shows a fracture model generated with the help of KSCON.
Figure 11.3 A Fracture Specimen and 2-D FE Model
Other modeling guidelines for 2-D models are as follows: • Take advantage of
symmetry where possible. In many cases, you need to model only one half of the
crack region, with symmetry or antisymmetry boundary conditions, as shown below.
Figure 11.4 Taking Advantage of Symmetry
For reasonable results, the first row of elements around the crack tip should have
a radius of approximately a/8 or smaller, where a is the crack length. In the
circumferential direction, roughly one element every 30° or 40° is recommended.
The crack tip elements should not be distorted, and should take the shape of
isosceles triangles.
11.2.1.2. 3-D Fracture Models

The recommended element type for 3-D models is SOLID95, the 20-node brick element.
As shown in Figure 11.2: “Examples of Singular Elements” (b), the first row of
elements around the crack front should be singular elements. Notice that the
element is wedge-shaped, with the KLPO face collapsed into the line KO.
11–4
Section 11.2: Solving Fracture Mechanics Problems Generating a 3-D fracture model
is considerably more involved than a 2-D model. The KSCON command is not
available, and you need to make sure that the crack front is along edge KO of the
elements. Other meshing guidelines for 3-D models are as follows: • • • Element
size recommendations are the same as for 2-D models. In addition, aspect ratios
should not exceed approximately 4 to 1 in all directions. For curved crack fronts,
the element size along the crack front will depend on the amount of local
curvature. As a rough guide, you should have at least one element every 15° to 30°
along a circular crack front. All element edges should be straight, including the
edge on the crack front.
11.2.2. Calculating Fracture Parameters

Once the static analysis is completed, you can use POST1, the general
postprocessor, to calculate fracture parameters. As mentioned earlier, typical
fracture parameters of interest are stress intensity factors, the J-integral, and
the energy release rate.
11.2.2.1. Stress Intensity Factors

The POST1 KCALC command (Main Menu> General Postproc> Nodal Calcs> Stress Int
Factr) calculates the mixed-mode stress intensity factors KI, KII, and KIII. This
command is limited to linear elastic problems with a homogeneous, isotropic
material near the crack region. To use KCALC properly, follow these steps in
POST1: 1. Define a local crack-tip or crack-front coordinate system, with X
parallel to the crack face (perpendicular to the crack front in 3-D models) and Y
perpendicular to the crack face, as shown in the following figure. Note — This
coordinate system must be the active model coordinate system [CSYS] and results
coordinate system [RSYS] when KCALC is issued. Command(s): LOCAL (or CLOCAL, CS,
CSKP, etc.) GUI: Utility Menu> WorkPlane> Local Coordinate Systems> Create Local
CS> At Specified Loc
Figure 11.5 Crack Coordinate Systems
(a) 2-D Models and (b) 3-D Models 2. Define a path along the crack face. The first
node on the path should be the crack-tip node. For a halfcrack model, two
additional nodes are required, both along the crack face. For a full-crack model,
where
11–5
Chapter 11: Fracture Mechanics both crack faces are included, four additional
nodes are required: two along one crack face and two along the other. The
following figure illustrates the two cases for a 2-D model. Command(s): PATH,
PPATH GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Path Operations> Define Path
Figure 11.6 Typical Path Definitions
(a) a half-crack model and (b) a full-crack model 3. Calculate KI, KII, and KIII.
The KPLAN field on the KCALC command specifies whether the model is planestrain or
plane stress. Except for the analysis of thin plates, the asymptotic or near-
crack-tip behavior of stress is usually thought to be that of plane strain. The
KCSYM field specifies whether the model is a halfcrack model with symmetry
boundary conditions, a half-crack model with antisymmetry boundary conditions, or
a full-crack model. Command(s): KCALC GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Nodal
Calcs> Stress Int Factr
11.2.2.2. J-Integral
In its simplest form, the J-integral can be defined as a path-independent line
integral that measures the strength of the singular stresses and strains near a
crack tip. The following equation shows an expression for J in its 2-D form is
shown below. It assumes that the crack lies in the global Cartesian X-Y plane,
with X parallel to the crack (see Figure 11.7: “J-Integral Contour Path
Surrounding a Crack-Tip”). ∂uy   ∂u J = ∫r Wdy − ∫r  t x x + t y  ds  ∂x ∂x  
 where: γ = any path surrounding the crack tip W = strain energy density (that is,
strain energy per unit volume) tx = traction vector along x axis = σxnx + σxy ny
ty = traction vector along y axis = σyny + σxy nx σ = component stress n = unit
outer normal vector to path γ u = displacement vector s = distance along the path
γ
11–6
Section 11.2: Solving Fracture Mechanics Problems
Figure 11.7 J-Integral Contour Path Surrounding a Crack-Tip
Follow these steps to calculate J for a 2-D model: 1. Read in the desired set of
results. Command(s): SET GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> First Set
Store the volume and strain energy per element. Command(s): ETABLE GUI: Main Menu>
General Postproc> Element Table> Define Table Calculate the strain energy density
per element. Command(s): SEXP GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Element Table>
Exponentiate Define a path for the line integral. Figure 11.8: “Examples of Paths
for J-integral Calculation” shows examples of such paths. Command(s): PATH, PPATH
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Path Operations> Define Path
2.
3.
4.
Figure 11.8 Examples of Paths for J-integral Calculation
5.
Map the strain energy density, which was stored in the element table in step 1,
onto the path.
11–7
Chapter 11: Fracture Mechanics Command(s): PDEF GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc>
Path Operations> Map Onto Path 6. Integrate it with respect to global Y.
Command(s): PCALC GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Path Operations> Integrate
Assign the final value of the integral to a parameter. This gives us the first
term of equation 10.1. Command(s): *GET,Name,PATH,,LAST GUI: Utility Menu>
Parameters> Get Scalar Data Map the component stresses SX, SY, and SXY onto the
path. Command(s): PDEF GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Path Operations> Map Onto
Path Define the path unit normal vector. Command(s): PVECT GUI: Main Menu> General
Postproc> Path Operations> Unit Vector
7.
8.
9.
10. Calculate TX and TY using the expressions shown with equation 10.1.
Command(s): PCALC GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Path Operations> operation 11.
Shift the path a small distance in the positive and negative X directions to
calculate the derivatives of the displacement vector (δux/δx and δuy/δy). The
following steps are involved (see Figure 19.13: “The Three Basic Modes of
Fracture” in the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference): • Calculate the distance by which
the path is to be shifted, say DX. A rule of thumb is to use one percent of the
total length of the path. You can obtain the total path length as a parameter
using *GET,Name,PATH,,LAST,S. Shift the path a distance of DX/2 in the negative X
direction [PCALC,ADD,XG,XG,,,,-DX/2] and map the displacements UX and UY onto the
path [PDEF], giving them labels UX1 and UY1, for example. Shift the path a
distance of DX in the positive X direction (that is, +DX/2 from its original
position) and map UX and UY onto the path, giving them labels UX2 and UY2, for
example. Shift the path back to its original location (a distance of -DX/2) and
calculate the quantities (UX2UX1)/DX and (UY2-UY1)/DX using PCALC. These
quantities represent δux/δx and δuy/δy, respectively.
• • •
See the ANSYS Coupled-Field Analysis Guide for a discussion of the *GET, PCALC and
PDEF commands. 12. Using the quantities calculated in steps 10 and 11, calculate
the integrand in the second term of J [PCALC] and integrate it with respect to the
path distance S [PCALC]. This gives the second term of equation 10.1. 13.
Calculate J according to equation 10.1, using the quantities calculated in steps
5-7 and 12. You can simplify the J-integral calculations by writing a macro that
performs the above operations. (Macros are described in the ANSYS APDL
Programmer's Guide.)
11.2.2.3. Energy Release Rate

Energy release rate is a concept used to determine the amount of work (change of
energy) associated with a crack opening or closure. One method to calculate the
energy release rate is the virtual crack extension method, outlined below. In the
virtual crack extension method, you perform two analyses, one with crack length a
and the other with crack length a +∆a. If the potential energy U (strain energy)
for both cases is stored, the energy release rate can be calculated from 11–8
Section 11.2: Solving Fracture Mechanics Problems U − Ua G = − a +∆a B∆a where B
is the thickness of the fracture model. Extend the crack length by ∆a for the
second analysis by selecting all nodes in the vicinity of the crack and scaling
them in the X direction [NSCALE] (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Operate>
Scale) by the factor ∆a. Note — If you used solid modeling, you will first need to
detach the solid model from the finite element model [MODMSH,DETACH] (Main Menu>
Preprocessor> Checking Ctrls) before scaling the nodes. The "vicinity of the
crack" is usually taken to mean all nodes within a radius of a/2 from the crack
tip. Also, the factor ∆a for node scaling is usually in the range of 1/2 to 2
percent of the crack length.
11–9
11–10
Chapter 12: Composites
12.1. Definition of Composites
Composite materials have been used in structures for a long time. In recent times
composite parts have been used extensively in aircraft structures, automobiles,
sporting goods, and many consumer products. Composite materials are those
containing more than one bonded material, each with different structural
properties. The main advantage of composite materials is the potential for a high
ratio of stiffness to weight. Composites used for typical engineering applications
are advanced fiber or laminated composites, such as fiberglass, glass epoxy,
graphite epoxy, and boron epoxy. ANSYS allows you to model composite materials
with specialized elements called layered elements. Once you build your model using
these elements, you can do any structural analysis (including nonlinearities such
as large deflection and stress stiffening).
12.2. Modeling Composites

Composites are somewhat more difficult to model than an isotropic material such as
iron or steel. You need to take special care in defining the properties and
orientations of the various layers since each layer may have different orthotropic
material properties. In this section, we will concentrate on the following aspects
of building a composite model: • • • • Choosing the proper element type Defining
the layered configuration Specifying failure criteria Following modeling and
postprocessing guidelines
12.2.1. Choosing the Proper Element Type

The following element types are available to model layered composite materials:
SHELL99, SHELL91, SHELL181, SOLID46, and SOLID191. Which element you choose
depends on the application, the type of results that need to be calculated, and so
on. Check the individual element descriptions to determine if a specific element
can be used in your ANSYS product. All layered elements allow failure criterion
calculations. SHELL99 - Linear Layered Structural Shell Element SHELL99 is an 8-
node, 3-D shell element with six degrees of freedom at each node. It is designed
to model thin to moderately thick plate and shell structures with a side-to-
thickness ratio of roughly 10 or greater. For structures with smaller ratios, you
may consider using SOLID46. The SHELL99 element allows a total of 250 uniform-
thickness layers. Alternately, the element allows 125 layers with thicknesses that
may vary bilinearly over the area of the layer. If more than 250 layers are
required, you can input your own material matrix. It also has an option to offset
the nodes to the top or bottom surface. SHELL91 - Nonlinear Layered Structural
Shell Element SHELL91 is similar to SHELL99 except that it allows only up to 100
layers and does not allow you to input a material property matrix. However,
SHELL91 supports plasticity, large-strain behavior and a special sandwich option,
whereas SHELL99 does not. SHELL91 is also more robust for large deflection
behavior. SHELL181 - Finite Strain Shell
Chapter 12: Composites SHELL181 is a 4-node 3-D shell element with 6 degrees of
freedom at each node. The element has full nonlinear capabilities including large
strain and allows 255 layers. The layer information is input using the section
commands rather than real constants. Failure criteria is available using the FC
commands. SOLID46 - 3-D Layered Structural Solid Element SOLID46 is a layered
version of the 8-node, 3-D solid element, SOLID45, with three degrees of freedom
per node (UX, UY, UZ). It is designed to model thick layered shells or layered
solids and allows up to 250 uniform-thickness layers per element. Alternately, the
element allows 125 layers with thicknesses that may vary bilinearly over the area
of the layer. An advantage with this element type is that you can stack several
elements to model more than 250 layers to allow through-the-thickness deformation
slope discontinuities. The user-input constitutive matrix option is also
available. SOLID46 adjusts the material properties in the transverse direction
permitting constant stresses in the transverse direction. In comparison to the 8-
node shells, SOLID46 is a lower order element and finer meshes may be required for
shell applications to provide the same accuracy as SHELL91 or SHELL99 . SOLID191 -
Layered Structural Solid Element SOLID191 is a layered version of the 20-node 3-D
solid element SOLID95, with three degrees of freedom per node (UX, UY, UZ). It is
designed to model thick layered shells or layered solids and allows up to 100
layers per element. As with SOLID46, SOLID191 can be stacked to model through-the-
thickness discontinuities. SOLID191 has an option to adjust the material
properties in the transverse direction permitting constant stresses in the
transverse direction. In spite of its name, the element does not support nonlinear
materials or large deflections. In addition to the layered elements mentioned
above, other composite element capabilities exist in ANSYS, but will not be
considered further in the chapter: • SOLID95, the 20-node structural solid
element, with KEYOPT(1) = 1 functions similarly to a single layered SOLID191
including the use of an orientation angle and failure criterion. It allows
nonlinear materials and large deflections. SHELL63, the 4-node shell element, can
be used for rough, approximate studies of sandwich shell models. A typical
application would be a polymer between two metal plates, where the bending
stiffness of the polymer would be small relative to the bending stiffness of the
metal plates. The bending stiffness can be adjusted by the real constant RMI to
represent the bending stiffness due to the metal plates, and distances from the
middle surface to extreme fibers (real constants CTOP, CBOT) can be used to obtain
output stress estimates on the outer surfaces of the sandwich shell. It is not
used as frequently as SHELL91, SHELL99, or SHELL181, and will not be considered
for anything other than sandwich structures in this section. SOLID65, the 3–D
Reinforced Concrete Solid Element, models an isotropic medium with optional
reinforcing in 3 different user-defined orientations. BEAM188 and BEAM189, the 3–D
finite strain beam elements, can have their sections built up with multiple
materials.
• •
12.2.2. Defining the Layered Configuration

The most important characteristic of a composite material is its layered
configuration. Each layer may be made of a different orthotropic material and may
have its principal directions oriented differently. For laminated composites, the
fiber directions determine layer orientation. Two methods are available to define
the layered configuration: • By specifying individual layer properties
12–2
Section 12.2: Modeling Composites • By defining constitutive matrices that relate
generalized forces and moments to generalized strains and curvatures (available
only for SOLID46 and SHELL99 )
12.2.2.1. Specifying Individual Layer Properties

With this method, the layer configuration is defined layer-by-layer from bottom to
top. The bottom layer is designated as layer 1, and additional layers are stacked
from bottom to top in the positive Z (normal) direction of the element coordinate
system. You need to define only half of the layers if stacking symmetry exists. At
times, a physical layer will extend over only part of the model. In order to model
continuous layers, these dropped layers may be modeled with zero thickness. Figure
12.1: “Layered Model Showing Dropped Layer” shows a model with four layers, the
second of which is dropped over part of the model.
Figure 12.1 Layered Model Showing Dropped Layer
For each layer, the following properties are specified in the element real
constant table [R, RMORE, RMODIF] (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Real Constants)
(accessed with REAL attributes). • • • Material properties (via a material
reference number MAT) Layer orientation angle commands (THETA) Layer thickness
(TK)
Layered sections may also be defined through the Section Tool (Prep>Sections>Shell
— Add/edit). For each layer, the following are specified in the section definition
through the section commands; or through the Section Tool (SECTYPE, SECDATA)
(accessed with the SECNUM attributes). • • • • Material properties (via a material
reference number MAT) Layer orientation angle commands (THETA) Layer thickness
(TK) Number of integration points per layer (NUMPT)
Material Properties - As with any other element, the MP command (Main Menu>
Preprocessor> Material Props> Material Models> Structural> Linear> Elastic>
Isotropic or Orthotropic) is used to define the linear material properties, and
the TB command is used to define the nonlinear material data tables (plasticity is
only available for elements SOLID191 and SHELL91). The only difference is that the
material attribute number for each layer of an element is specified in the
element's real constant table. For the layered elements, the MAT command (Main
Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh Attributes> Default Attribs) attribute is only
used for the DAMP and REFT arguments of the MP command. The linear material
properties for each layer may be either isotropic or orthotropic (see Linear
Material Properties in the ANSYS Elements Reference). Typical fiber-reinforced
composites contain orthotropic materials and these properties are most often
supplied in the major Poisson's ratio form (see the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference).
Material property directions are parallel to the layer coordinate system, which is
defined by the element coordinate system and the layer orientation angle
(described below). Layer Orientation Angle- This defines the orientation of the
layer coordinate system with respect to the element coordinate system. It is the
angle (in degrees) between X-axes of the two systems. By default, the layer
coordinate system is parallel to the element coordinate system. All elements have
a default coordinate system which you
12–3
Chapter 12: Composites can change using the ESYS element attribute [ESYS] (Main
Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh Attributes> Default Attribs). You may also write
your own subroutines to define the element and layer coordinate systems (USERAN
and USANLY); see the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features for details. Layer
Thickness- If the layer thickness is constant, you only need to specify TK(I), the
thickness at node I. Otherwise, the thicknesses at the four corner nodes must be
input. Dropped layers may be represented with zero thickness. Number of
integration points per layer- This allows you to determine in how much detail the
program should compute the results. For very thin layers, when used with many
other layers, one point would be appropriate. But for laminates with few layers,
more would be needed. The default is 3 points. This feature applies only to
sections defined through the section commands. Note — Currently, the GUI only
allows layer real constant input of up to 100 layers. If more layers are needed
for SHELL99 or SOLID46, the R and RMORE commands must be used.
12.2.2.2. Defining the Constitutive Matrices

This is an alternative to specifying the individual layer properties and is
available as an option [KEYOPT(2)] for SOLID46 and SHELL99. The matrices, which
represent the force-moment and strain-curvature relationships for the element,
must be calculated outside the ANSYS program as outlined in the ANSYS, Inc. Theory
Reference. They can be included as part of the solution printout with KEYOPT(10).
The main advantages of the matrix approach are: • • • It allows you to incorporate
an aggregate composite material behavior. A thermal load vector may be supplied.
The matrices may represent an unlimited number of layers.
The terms of the matrices are defined as real constants. Mass effects are
incorporated by specifying an average density (real constants AVDENS) for the
element. If the matrix approach is used, detailed results in each layer cannot be
obtained since individual layer information is not input.
12.2.2.3. Sandwich and Multiple-Layered Structures

Sandwich structures have two thin faceplates and a thick, but relatively weak,
core. Figure 12.2: “Sandwich Construction” illustrates sandwich construction.
Figure 12.2 Sandwich Construction
You can model sandwich structures with SHELL63, SHELL91, or SHELL181. SHELL63 has
one layer but permits sandwich modeling through the use of real constants. You can
modify the effective bending moment of inertia and the distance from the middle
surface to the extreme fibers to account for the weak core. KEYOPT(9) = 1 of
SHELL91 specifies the sandwich option. The core is assumed to carry all of the
transverse shear; the faceplates carry none. Conversely, the faceplates are
assumed to carry all (or almost all) of the bending load. Only SHELL91 has this
sandwich option.
12–4
Section 12.2: Modeling Composites SHELL181 models the transverse shear deflection
using as energy equivalence method that makes the need for a sandwich option
unnecessary
12.2.2.4. Node Offset

For SHELL181 using sections defined through the section commands, nodes can be
offset during the definition of the section, using the SECOFFSET command. For
SHELL91, and SHELL99 the node offset option (KEYOPT(11)) locates the element nodes
at the bottom, middle or top surface of the shell. The figures below illustrate
how you can conveniently model ply drop off in shell elements that are adjacent to
each other. In Figure 12.3: “Layered Shell With Nodes at Midplane”, the nodes are
located at the middle surfaces (KEYOPT(11) = 0) and these surfaces are aligned. In
Figure 12.4: “Layered Shell With Nodes at Bottom Surface”, the nodes are located
at the bottom surfaces (KEYOPT(11) = 1) and these surfaces are aligned.
Figure 12.3 Layered Shell With Nodes at Midplane
Figure 12.4 Layered Shell With Nodes at Bottom Surface
12.2.3. Specifying Failure Criteria

Failure criteria are used to learn if a layer has failed due to the applied loads.
You can choose from three predefined failure criteria or specify up to six failure
criteria of your own (user-written criteria). The three predefined criteria are: •
• • Maximum Strain Failure Criterion, which allows nine failure strains. Maximum
Stress Failure Criterion, which allows nine failure stresses. Tsai-Wu Failure
Criterion, which allows nine failure stresses and three additional coupling
coefficients. You have a choice of two methods of calculating this criterion. The
methods are defined in the ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference.
The failure strains, stresses, and coupling coefficients may be temperature-

dependent. See the ANSYS Elements Reference for details about the data required
for each criterion. To specify a failure criterion, use either the family of TB
commands or the family of FC commands. The TB commands areTB, TBTEMP, and TBDATA.
(Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Failure Criteria). A typical sequence of
commands to specify a failure criterion using these commands is shown below.
12–5
Chapter 12: Composites
TB,FAIL,1,2 ! Data table for failure criterion, material 1, ! no. of temperatures
= 2 TBTEMP,,CRIT ! Failure criterion key TBDATA,2,1 ! Maximum Stress Failure
Criterion (Const. 2 = 1) TBTEMP,100 ! Temperature for subsequent failure
properties TBDATA,10,1500,,400,,10000 ! X, Y, and Z failure tensile stresses (Z
value ! set to a large number) TBDATA,16,200,10000,10000 ! XY, YZ, and XZ failure
shear stresses TBLIST TBTEMP,200 ! Second temperature TBDATA,...
The FC commands are FC, FCDELE, and FCLIST commands (Main Menu> Preprocessor>
Material Props> Material Models> Structural> Nonlinear> Inelastic> Non-Metal
Plasticity> Failure Criteria) and (Main Menu> General Postproc> Failure Criteria).
A typical sequence of commands to specify a failure criterion using these commands
is shown below.
FC,1,TEMP,, 100, FC,1,S,XTEN, 1500, FC,1,S,YTEN, 400, FC,1,S,ZTEN,10000, FC,1,S,XY
, 200, FC,1,S,YZ ,10000, FC,1,S,XZ ,10000, FCLIST, ,100 FCLIST, ,150 FCLIST, ,200
PRNSOL,S,FAIL 200 1200 500 8000 200 8000 8000 ! Temperatures ! Maximum stress
components
! ! ! !
List status List status List status Use Failure
of Failure Criteria at 100.0 degrees of Failure Criteria at 150.0 degrees of

Failure Criteria at 200.0 degrees Criteria
Note — The TB commands (TB, TBTEMP, and TBDATA) can be used only for SHELL91,
SHELL99, SOLID46, or SOLID191, but the FC and FCLIST commands can be used for any
2-D or 3-D structural solid element or any 3-D structural shell element. See the
ANSYS Commands Reference for a discussion of the TB, TBTEMP, TBDATA, TBLIST, FC,
FCDELE, and FCLIST commands. Some notes about specifying failure criteria: • • The
criteria are orthotropic, so you must input the failure stress or failure strain
values for all directions. (The exception is that compressive values default to
tensile values.) If you don't want the failure stress or strain to be checked in a
particular direction, specify a large number in that direction (as shown in the
previous example).
User-written failure criteria may be specified via user subroutines USRFC1 through
USRFC6. These subroutines should be linked with the ANSYS program beforehand; see
the ANSYS Advanced Analysis Techniques Guide for a brief description of user-
programmable features.
12.2.4. Additional Modeling and Postprocessing Guidelines

Some additional guidelines for modeling and postprocessing of composite elements
are presented below. 1. Composites exhibit several types of coupling effects, such
as coupling between bending and twisting, coupling between extension and bending,
etc. This is due to stacking of layers of differing material properties. As a
result, if the layer stacking sequence is not symmetric, you may not be able to
use model symmetry even if the geometry and loading are symmetric, because the
displacements and stresses may not be symmetric. Interlaminar shear stresses are
usually important at the free edges of a model. For relatively accurate
interlaminar shear stresses at these locations, the element size at the boundaries
of the model should be approximately equal to the total laminate thickness. For
shells, increasing the number of layers per actual
2.
12–6
Section 12.2: Modeling Composites material layer does not necessarily improve the
accuracy of interlaminar shear stresses. With elements SOLID46, SOLID95, and
SOLID191, however, stacking elements in the thickness direction should result in
more accurate interlaminar stresses through the thickness. Interlaminar transverse
shear stresses in shell elements are based on the assumption that no shear is
carried at the top and bottom surfaces of the element. These interlaminar shear
stresses are only computed in the interior and are not valid along the shell
element boundaries. Use of shell-to-solid submodeling is recommended to accurately
compute all of the free edge interlaminar stresses. 3. Because a large amount of
input data is required for composites, you should verify the data before
proceeding with the solution. Several commands are available for this purpose: • •
ELIST (Utility Menu> List> Elements) lists the nodes and attributes of all
selected elements. EPLOT (Utility Menu> Plot> Elements) displays all selected
elements. Using the /ESHAPE,1 command (Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Style> Size and
Shape) before EPLOT causes shell elements to be displayed as solids with the layer
thicknesses obtained from real constants or section definition (see Figure 12.5:
“Example of an Element Display”. This example uses element SHELL99 with /ESHAPE
turned on). It also causes SOLID46 elements to be displayed with layers.
/PSYMB,LAYR,n (Utility Menu> PlotCrls> Symbols) followed by EPLOT displays layer
number n for all selected layered elements. This can be used to display and verify
each individual layer across the entire model. /PSYMB,ESYS,1 followed by EPLOT
displays the element coordinate system triad for those elements whose default
coordinate system has been changed.
Figure 12.5 Example of an Element Display
LAYLIST (Utility Menu> List> Elements> Layered Elements) lists the layer stacking
sequence from real constants and any two material properties for SHELL99, SHELL91,
SOLID46, and SOLID191 elements. You can specify a range of layer numbers for the
listing.
LIST LAYERS 1 TO 4 IN REAL SET TOTAL LAYERS = 4 LSYM = 1 LP1 = NO. ANGLE THICKNESS
MAT --- ----- ---------- --1 45.0 0.250 1 2 -45.0 0.250 2 3 -45.0 0.250 2 4 45.0
0.250 1 -----------------------SUM OF THK 1.00 1 FOR ELEMENT TYPE 1 0 LP2 = 0 EFS
= .000E+00
LAYPLOT (Utility Menu> Plot> Layered Elements) displays the layer stacking
sequence from real constants in the form of a sheared deck of cards (see Figure
12.6: “Sample LAYPLOT Display for [45/ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide . ANSYS
Release 9.0 . 002114 . © SAS IP, Inc.
12–7
Chapter 12: Composites 45/ - 45/45] Sequence”). The layers are crosshatched and
color coded for clarity. The hatch lines indicate the layer angle (real constant
THETA) and the color indicates layer material number (MAT). You can specify a
range of layer numbers for the display. • SECPLOT (Main Menu> Preprocessor>
Sections> Shell> Plot Section) displays the section stacking sequence from
sections in the form of a sheared deck of cards (see Figure 12.6: “Sample LAYPLOT
Display for [45/-45/ - 45/45] Sequence”). The sections are crosshatched and color
coded for clarity. The hatch lines indicate the layer angle (THETA) and the color
indicates layer material number (MAT) defined by the SECDATA command. You can
specify a range of layer numbers for the display.
4.
By default, only data for the bottom of the first (bottom) layer, top of the last
(top) layer, and the layer with the maximum failure criterion value are written to
the results file. If you are interested in data for all layers, set KEYOPT(8) = 1.
Be aware, though, that this may result in a large results file.
Figure 12.6 Sample LAYPLOT Display for [45/-45/ - 45/45] Sequence
5.
Use the ESEL,S,LAYER command to select elements that have a certain layer number.
If an element has a zero thickness for the requested layer, the element is not
selected. Note — For energy output, the results are applicable only to the entire
element; you cannot get output results for individual layers.
6.
Use the LAYER command (Main Menu> General Postproc> Options for Outp) in POST1 (or
LAYERP26 (Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Define Variables) in POST26) to specify the
layer number for which results are to be processed. The SHELL command (Main Menu>
General Postproc> Options for Outp or Main Menu> TimeHist Prostpro> Define
Variables) specifies a TOP, MID, or BOT location within the layer. The default in
POST1 is to store results for the bottom of the bottom layer, and the top of the
top layer, and the layer with the maximum failure criterion value. In POST26, the
default is layer 1. If KEYOPT(8) = 1 (that is, data stored for all layers), the
LAYER and LAYERP26 commands store the TOP and BOT results for the specified layer
number. MID values are then calculated by average TOP and BOT values. If KEYOPT
(8) = 2 is set for SHELL181 during SOLUTION, then LAYER and LAYERP26 commands
store the TOP,
12–8
Section 12.2: Modeling Composites BOTTOM, and MID results for the specified layer
number. In this case, MID values are directly retrieved from the results file. For
transverse shear stresses with KEYOPT(8) = 0, therefore, POST1 can only show a
linear variation, whereas the element solution printout or KEYOPT(8) = 2 can show
a parabolic variation. 7. By default, POST1 displays all results in the global
Cartesian coordinate system. Use the RSYS command (Main Menu> General Postproc>
Options for Outp) to transform the results to a different coordinate system. In
particular, RSYS,SOLU allows you to display results in the layer coordinate system
if LAYER is issued with a nonzero layer number.
12–9
12–10
Chapter 13: Fatigue
13.1. Definition of Fatigue
Fatigue is the phenomenon in which a repetitively loaded structure fractures at a
load level less than its ultimate static strength. For instance, a steel bar might
successfully resist a single static application of a 300 kN tensile load, but
might fail after 1,000,000 repetitions of a 200 kN load. The main factors that
contribute to fatigue failures include: • • • • Number of load cycles experienced
Range of stress experienced in each load cycle Mean stress experienced in each
load cycle Presence of local stress concentrations
A formal fatigue evaluation accounts for each of these factors as it calculates

how "used up" a certain component will become during its anticipated life cycle.
13.1.1. What the ANSYS Program Does

The ANSYS fatigue calculations rely on the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,
Section III (and Section VIII, Division 2) for guidelines on range counting,
simplified elastic-plastic adaptations, and cumulative fatigue summation by
Miner's rule. For fatigue evaluations based on criteria other than those of the
ASME Code, you can either write your own macro, or else interface your ANSYS
results with an appropriate third-party program (see the ANSYS APDL Programmer's
Guide for more information on these two features). The ANSYS program features the
following fatigue-calculation capabilities: • You can postprocess existing stress
results to determine the fatigue usage factors for any solid-element or shell-
element model. (You can also manually input stresses for fatigue evaluation of
line-element models.) You can store stresses at a preselected number of locations
for a preselected number of events and loadings within the event. You can define
stress concentration factors for each location and scale factors for each event.
• •
13.1.2. Basic Terminology

A location is a node in your model for which fatigue stresses are to be stored.
You would typically choose locations that represent points on the structure that
would be susceptible to fatigue damage. An event is a set of stress conditions
that occur at different times during a unique stress cycle. See Section 13.2.3.4:
Guidelines for Obtaining Accurate Usage Factors later in this chapter for more
information. A loading is one of the stress conditions that is part of an event.
The alternating stress intensity is a measure of the difference in stress state
between any two loadings. The program does not adjust the alternating stress
intensity for mean-stress effects.
Chapter 13: Fatigue
13.2. Doing a Fatigue Evaluation

You do a fatigue evaluation in POST1, the general postprocessor, after you have
completed a stress solution. The procedure normally consists of five main steps:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Enter POST1 and resume your database. Establish the size (the
number of locations, events, and loadings), define the fatigue material
properties, identify stress locations, and define stress concentration factors.
Store stresses at locations of interest for various events and loadings; assign
event repetitions and scale factors. Activate the fatigue calculations. Review the
results.
13.2.1. Enter POST1 and Resume Your Database

In order to perform a fatigue evaluation, you need to follow these steps: 1. Enter
POST1. Command(s): /POST1 GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc Read your database file
(Jobname.DB) into active memory. (If your intended fatigue evaluation is a
continuation of an ongoing ANSYS session, then Jobname.DB will already be in
memory.) A results file (Jobname.RST) with nodal stress results should also be
available; you will read results data into memory later. Command(s): RESUME GUI:
Utility Menu> File> Resume from
2.
13.2.2. Establish the Size, Fatigue Material Properties, and Locations

Define the following data: • • • 1. Maximum number of locations, events, and
loadings Fatigue material properties Stress locations and stress concentration
factors (SCFs) Define the maximum number of stress locations, events, and
loadings. By default, your fatigue evaluation can consider up to five nodal
locations, ten events, and three loadings within an event. You can use the
following option to establish larger dimensions (that is, allow more locations,
events, or loadings), if necessary. Command(s): FTSIZE GUI: Main Menu> General
Postproc> Fatigue> Size Settings 2. Define material fatigue properties. In order
to calculate usage factors, and to include the effect of simplified elastic-
plastic computations, you must define material fatigue properties. The material
properties of interest in a fatigue evaluation are: • The S-N curve, a curve of
alternating stress intensity ((Smax - Smin)/2) versus allowable number of cycles.
The ASME S-N curves already account for maximum mean stress effects. You should
adjust your S-N
13–2
Section 13.2: Doing a Fatigue Evaluation curve to account for mean-stress effects,
if necessary. If you do not input an S-N curve, alternating stress intensities
will be listed in decreasing order for all possible combinations of stress
conditions, but no usage factors will be calculated. Command(s): FP GUI: Main
Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Property Table> S-N Table • The Sm-T curve, a
curve of design stress-intensity value versus temperature. This curve is needed if
you want the program to detect whether or not the nominal stress range has gone
plastic. Command(s): FP GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Property Table>
Sm_T Table Elastic-plastic material parameters M and N (strain hardening
exponents). These parameters are required only if you desire simplified elastic-
plastic code calculations. These parameters' values can be obtained from the ASME
Code. Command(s): FP GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Property Table>
Elas-plas Par The following example illustrates the use of the FP command to input
material fatigue properties:
! Define the S-N table: FP,1,10,30,100,300,1000,10000 FP,7,100000,1000000
FP,21,650,390,240,161,109,59 FP,27,37,26 ! Define the Sm-T table:
FP,41,100,200,300,400,500,600 FP,47,650,700,750,800 FP,51,20,20,20,18.7,17.4,16.4
FP,57,16.1,15.9.15.5,15.1 ! Allowable Cycles, N ! " ! Alternating Stress!
Intensity Range, S, ksi
! Temperature,°F ! " ! "Design Stress-Intensity ! Value", Sm (=2/3*Sy or ! 1/3

*Su), ksi ! Define the elastic-plastic material parameters: FP,61,1.7,.3 ! M and N
3.
Define stress locations and stress concentration factors. The following option
allows you to explicitly define a nodal location of interest to your fatigue
evaluation, define stress concentration factors (SCFs) for that location, and
assign a short (20 character) title to that location. Command(s): FL GUI: Main
Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Stress Locations
Note — Not all fatigue analyses will require the FL command. Locations are
automatically defined for nodes when FS, FSNODE, or FSSECT are issued (see below).
If your model contains sufficient grid detail, your stresses could be accurate
enough that you would not need to apply calculated SCFs. (Supplemental SCFs for
surface, size, or corrosion effects might still be required, however.) Where only
one location is being examined, you could omit a title. If explicit definition of
locations, SCFs, or titles are not required, you could forgo the FL command
entirely. Here is an example of some FL commands for a cylinder with a global Y
axis, having two wall thicknesses of interest, where SCFs are to be applied (to
the axial linearized stresses) at the outside wall.
FL,1,281,,,,Line 1 at inside FL,2,285,,1.85,,Line 1 at outside FL,3,311,,,,Line 2
at inside FL,4,315,,2.11,,Line 2 at outside
13–3
Chapter 13: Fatigue
Figure 13.1 Cylinder Wall with Stress Concentration Factors (SCFs)
13.2.3. Store Stresses and Assign Event Repetitions and Scale Factors
13.2.3.1. Storing Stresses
In order to perform a fatigue evaluation, the program must know the stresses at
different events and loadings for each location, as well as the number of
repetitions of each event. You can store stresses for each combination of
location, event, and loading, using the following options: • • • Manually stored
stresses Nodal stresses from Jobname.RST Stresses at a cross-section Caution: The
program never assumes that a "zero" stress condition exists. If zero stress is one
of the conditions to be considered, it must be explicitly input for each event in
which it may occur. The following command sequences schematically illustrate how
to store stresses. In some situations, you might prefer to use LCASE instead of
SET.
Manually stored stresses: Nodal stresses retrieved from Jobname.RST: Stresses at a
cross-section: FS SET, FSNODE PATH, PPATH, SET, FSSECT
(Cross-section calculations also require data from Jobname.RST.)
You can use more than one method of storing stresses in an event. Each of these
methods is explained in detail below.
13.2.3.1.1. Manually Stored Stresses

You can use this option to store stresses and the temperature "manually" (without
direct access to the results file Jobname.RST). In such cases, you are not using
the fatigue module in POST1 as a postprocessor, but simply as a fatigue
calculator. Line elements, such as beams, must be handled in this way since the
fatigue module is not able to access data from a results file other than for solid
elements or shell elements. Command(s): FS GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc>
Fatigue> Store Stresses> Specified Val Command input for this option is
demonstrated by the following example:
FS,201,1,2,1,-2.0,21.6,15.2,4.5,0.0,0.0 FS,201,1,2,7,450.3
13–4
Section 13.2: Doing a Fatigue Evaluation In this example, only the total stresses
(items 1-6) and the temperature (item 7) are input. If the linearized stresses
were also to be input, they would follow the temperatures as items 8 through 13.
Note — In the special case of a beam element having only axial stress, you would
input only one stress component (SX), leaving the rest of the stress fields blank.
13.2.3.1.2. Nodal Stresses from Jobname.RST

When you use this option, you cause a nodal stress vector containing six stress
components to be stored directly from the results database. Stress components
stored with this option can be modified with a subsequent FS command. Note — You
must issue a SET command, and possibly a SHELL command, before executing FSNODE.
SET will read results for a particular load substep from the results file
(Jobname.RST) into the database. SHELL allows you to select results from the top,
middle, or bottom surfaces for shell elements (default is the top surface).
Command(s): FSNODE GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Store Stresses> From
rst File Input by means of FSNODE is demonstrated by the following example for an
event at one nodal location:
SET,1 FSNODE,123,1,1 SET,2 FSNODE,123,1,2 SET,3 FSNODE,123,1,3 ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Define data set for load step 1 Stress vector at node 123 assigned to event 1,
loading 1. Define data set for load step 2 ...event 1, loading 2 ...load step 3
...event 1, loading 3
Figure 13.2 Three Loadings in One Event
13.2.3.1.3. Stresses at a Cross-Section

This option calculates and stores total linearized stresses at the ends of a
section path (as defined by a preceding PATH and PPATH command). Because you will
normally want the linearization to take place over a thickness representing the
shortest distance between the two surfaces, use only the two surface nodes to
describe the path in the PPATH command. This option retrieves stress information
from the results database; therefore
13–5
Chapter 13: Fatigue FSSECT must also be preceded by a SET command. Stress
components stored with an FSSECT command can be modified with a subsequent FS
command. Command(s): FSSECT GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Store
Stresses> At Cross Sect Input by means of FSSECT is demonstrated in the following
example. If node locations are not assigned with an FL command, the FSSECT
commands in this example will automatically assign location numbers to the two
path nodes, 391 and 395. (See Figure 13.3: “Surface Nodes are Identified by PPATH
Prior to Executing FSSECT”.)
PATH,Name,2 PPATH,1,391 PPATH,2,395 SET,1 FSSECT,,1,1 ! Define the path using the
two surface nodes
! Store stresses at nodes 391 and 395
Figure 13.3 Surface Nodes are Identified by PPATH Prior to Executing FSSECT
13.2.3.2. Listing, Plotting, or Deleting Stored Stresses

Use the following options to list, plot, or delete stored stresses. • List the
stored stresses per location, per event, per loading, or per stress condition:
Command(s): FSLIST GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Store Stresses> List
Stresses Display a stress item as a function of loading number for a particular
location and event: Command(s): FSPLOT GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue>
Store Stresses> Plot Stresses Delete a stress condition stored for a particular
location, event, and loading: Command(s): FSDELE GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc>
Fatigue> Store Stresses> Dele Stresses Delete all stresses at a particular
location: Command(s): FL GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Stress
Locations Delete all stresses for all loadings in a particular event: Command(s):
FE GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Erase Event Data
13.2.3.3. Assigning Event Repetitions and Scale Factors

This option assigns the number of occurrences to the event numbers (for all
loadings at all locations of the event). It can also be used to apply scale
factors to all of the stresses that make up its loadings. Command(s): FE GUI: Main
Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Assign Events
13–6
Section 13.2: Doing a Fatigue Evaluation An example of this command usage is given
below:
FE,1,-1 FE,2,100,1.2 *REPEAT,3,1 FE,5,500 ! Erase all parameters and fatigue
stresses formerly ! used for event 1. ! Assign 100 occurrences to events 2, 3 and
4, ! and scale by 1.2. ! Assign 500 occurrences to event 5.
13.2.3.4. Guidelines for Obtaining Accurate Usage Factors

Structures are usually subjected to a variety of maximum and minimum stresses,
which occur in unknown (or even random) order. Therefore, you must take care to
achieve an accurate count of the number of repetitions of all possible stress
ranges, in order to obtain a valid fatigue usage factor. The ANSYS program
automatically calculates all possible stress ranges and keeps track of their
number of occurrences, using a technique commonly known as the "rain flow" range-
counting method. At a selected nodal location, a search is made throughout all of
the events for the pair of loadings (stress vectors) that produces the most severe
stress-intensity range. The number of repetitions possible for this range is
recorded, and the remaining number of repetitions for the events containing these
loadings is decreased accordingly. At least one of the source events will be "used
up" at this point; remaining occurrences of stress conditions belonging to that
event will subsequently be ignored. This process continues until all ranges and
numbers of occurrences have been considered. Caution: It can be surprisingly easy
to misuse the range-counting feature of the fatigue module. You must take pains to
assemble events carefully if you want your fatigue evaluation to yield accurate
usage factors. Consider the following guidelines when assembling events: • •
Understand the internal logic of the ANSYS range-counting algorithm. See the
ANSYS, Inc. Theory Reference for more details on how the ANSYS program performs
range counting. Because it can be difficult to predict the exact load step at
which a maximum (or minimum) 3-D stress state occurs, good practice often requires
that you include several clustered loadings in each event, in order to
successfully capture the extreme stress state. (See Figure 13.2: “Three Loadings
in One Event”.) You will obtain consistently conservative results if you include
only one extreme stress condition (either a local maximum or a local minimum) in
any given event. If you group more than one extreme condition in a single event,
you will sometimes generate unconservative results, as illustrated by the
following example:
Consider a load history made up of two slightly different cycles: Load Cycle 1:
500 repetitions of Sx = +50.0 to -50.1 ksi Load Cycle 2: 1000 repetitions of Sx =
+50.1 to -50.0 ksi These load cycles will obviously sum to 1500 repetitions having
an alternating stress intensity of about 50 ksi. However, carelessly grouping
these loadings into only two events will result in an inaccurate range count.
Let's see how this would happen:
Event 1, Event 2, loading 1: Sx = 50.0 loading 2: Sx = -50.1 loading 1: Sx = 50.1
loading 2: Sx = -50.0 500 repetitions 1000 repetitions
The possible alternating stress intensities are:

a. From E1,L1 to E1,L2: 50.05 ksi
13–7
Chapter 13: Fatigue
b. c. d. e. f. From E1,L1 to E2,L1: From E1,L1 to E2,L2: From E1,L2 to E2,L1: From
E1,L2 to E2,L2: From E2,L1 to E2,L2: 0.05 ksi 50.00 ksi 50.10 ksi 0.05 ksi 50.05
ksi
Sorting these combinations by decreasing alternating stress intensity gives:

d. a. f. c. b. e. From E1,L2 to E2,L1: From E1,L1 to E1,L2: From E2,L1 to E2,L2:
From E1,L1 to E2,L2: From E1,L1 to E2,L1: From E1,L2 to E2,L2: 50.10 ksi 50.05 ksi
50.05 ksi 50.00 ksi 0.05 ksi 0.05 ksi
The range counting then proceeds as follows:

d. a. f. c. b. e 500 cycles of E1,L2 to E2,L1 0 cycles of E1,L1 to E1,L2 500
cycles of E2,L1 to E2,L2 0 cycles of E1,L1 to E2,L2 0 cycles of E1,L1 to E2,L1 0
cycles of E1,L2 to E2,L2 - this uses up 500 cycles of E1 and E2 - E1 is all used
up - this uses up 500 more cycles of E2 - both events are all used up - both
events are all used up - both events are all used up
Thus, only 1000 repetitions of about 50 ksi range would be counted, instead of the
known 1500 cycles. This error results solely from improper assembly of events. If
the loadings had each been described as separate events (such that E1,L1 ≥ E1;
E1,L2 ≥ E2; E2,L1 ≥ E3; and E2,L2 ≥ E4), then the following range counts would be
obtained:
d. a. f. c. b. e. 500 cycles of E2 to E3 0 cycles of E1 to E2 500 cycles of E3 to
E4 500 cycles of E1 to E4 0 cycles of E1 to E3 0 cycles of E2 to E4 - this uses up
500 cycles of E2 and E3 - E2 is all used up - uses up 500 more cycles of E3, and
500 of E4 - uses up 500 more cycles of E4 - E3 is all used up - E2 and E4 are both
all used up
Cumulative fatigue damage in this case would properly be calculated for 1500
repetitions of about 50 ksi range. • Conversely, using separate events for each
maximum and each minimum stress condition could sometimes become too conservative.
In such cases, carefully choose those loadings that should be counted together,
and group them into the same events. The following example illustrates how some
events can appropriately contain multiple extreme stress conditions:
Consider a load history made up of these two load cycles: • • Load Cycle 1: 500
repetitions of Sx = +100.1 to +100.0 ksi Load Cycle 2: 1000 repetitions of Sx =
+50.1 to +50.0 ksi
13–8
Section 13.2: Doing a Fatigue Evaluation It is readily apparent that the worst
possible combination of these cycles would yield 500 repetitions having
alternating stress intensity of about 25 ksi range. Proceeding as in the above
example, grouping these loadings into two events would produce an accurate count
of 500 repetitions of about 25 ksi range. Treating each loading as a separate
event would yield an over-conservative count of 1000 repetitions of about 25 ksi
range.
13.2.4. Activate the Fatigue Calculations

Now that you have locations, stresses, events, and material parameters all
specified, you can execute the fatigue calculations at a specified location. The
location is specified by either the location number or the node itself.
Command(s): FTCALC GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Calculate Fatig

Fatigue calculation results are printed in the output. If you have routed your
output [/OUTPUT] to a file (for example Jobname.OUT), then you can review the
results by listing that file. Command(s): *LIST GUI: Utility Menu> List> Files>
Other> Jobname.OUT If you have input an S-N curve, output is in the form of a
table of alternating stress intensities (listed in decreasing order) with
corresponding pairs of event/loadings, as well as cycles used, cycles allowed,
temperature, and partial usage factor. Following that, the cumulative usage factor
is shown for that particular location. This information is repeated for all
locations. As has been just mentioned, FTCALC output shows the contributing pairs
of events and loadings for any given alternating stress-intensity range. This
information can help you isolate the transients (events/loadings) causing the most
fatigue damage. A convenient way to modify your events would be to write all
stored fatigue data on Jobname.FATG. (This option could be executed either before
or after FTCALC.) Data are written to Jobname.FATG in terms of equivalent fatigue
module commands. You can modify your events by editing Jobname.FATG; then use the
/INPUT command to reread the modified fatigue commands. Command(s): FTWRITE GUI:
Main Menu> General Postproc> Fatigue> Write Fatig Data
13.2.6. Other Approaches to Range Counting

Earlier, we discussed the "rain flow" range-counting method. This technique is
useful whenever the exact timehistory of various loadings is not known. However,
if in your fatigue analysis the time-history is known, you can avoid the undue
conservatism of this procedure simply by running a separate fatigue analysis
[FTCALC] for each sequential event and then adding the usage factors manually.
13.2.7. Sample Input

A sample input listing for a fatigue evaluation is shown below:
! Enter POST1 and Resume the Database: /POST1 RESUME,... ! Number of Locations,
Events, and Loadings FTSIZE,... ! Material Fatigue Properties: FP,1,.... ! N
values
13–9
Chapter 13: Fatigue
FP,21,... ! S values FP,41,... ! T values FP,51,... ! Sm values FP,61,... !
Elastic-plastic material parameters ! Locations, Stress Concentration Factors, and
Location Titles FL,... ! Store Stresses (3 Different Methods) ! Store Stresses
Manually: FS,... ! Retrieve Stresses from the Results File: SET,... FSNODE,... !
Store Stresses at a Cross-Section: PPATH,... SET,... FSSECT,... ! Event
Repetitions and Scale Factors FE,... ! Activate the Fatigue Calculations
FTCALC,... ! Review the Results (List the output file) FINISH
See the ANSYS Commands Reference for a discussion of the FTSIZE, FP, FL, FS,
FSNODE, PPATH, FSSECT, FE, and FTCALC commands.
13–10
Chapter 14: p-Method Structural Static Analysis
14.1. Definition of p-Method Analysis
The p-method obtains results such as displacements, stresses, or strains to a
user-specified degree of accuracy. To calculate these results, the p-method
manipulates the polynomial level (p-level) of the finite element shape functions
which are used to approximate the real solution. This feature works by taking a
finite element mesh, solving it at a given p-level, increasing the p-level
selectively, and then solving the mesh again. After each iteration the results are
compared for convergence against a set of convergence criteria. You can specify
the convergence criteria to include displacement, rotation, stress or strain at a
point (or points) in the model, and global strain energy. The higher the p-level,
the better the finite element approximation to the real solution. In order to
capitalize on the p-method functionality, you don't have to work only within the
confines of p-generated meshes. The p-method is most efficient when meshes are
generated considering that p-elements will be used, but this is not a requirement.
Of course, you might want to create and mesh your model using p-elements, but you
can also perform a p-method solution using meshes that have been generated with h-
elements (generated by ANSYS or your CAD package), if the elements are at least
mid-noded. This provides you with the flexibility of taking advantage of the p-
method solution option independently of how the mesh was created. The p-method can
improve the results for any mesh automatically.
14.2. Benefits of Using the p-Method

The p-method solution option offers many benefits for linear structural static
analyses that are not available with the more traditional h-method, discussed in
the preceding chapters. The most convenient benefit is the ability to obtain good
results to a desired level of accuracy without rigorous user-defined meshing
controls. If you are new to finite element analysis or do not have a solid
background in mesh design, you might prefer this method since it relieves you of
the task of manually designing an accurate mesh. In addition, the p-method
adaptive refinement procedure offers error estimates that are more precise than
those of the h-method, and can be calculated locally as well as globally (for
example, stress at a point rather than strain energy). For example, if you need to
obtain highly accurate solutions at a point, such as for fracture or fatigue
assessments, the p-method offers an excellent means of obtaining these results to
the required accuracy.
14.3. Using the p-Method

The procedure for a p-method static analysis consists of four main steps: 1. 2. 3.
4. Select the p-method procedure. Build the model. Apply loads and obtain the
solution. Review the results.
Each step is discussed in detail in the following sections.
14.3.1. Select the p-Method Procedure

You can activate the p-method solution procedure in two ways: through the GUI or
by defining a p-element [ET].
Chapter 14: p-Method Structural Static Analysis • Activating p-method through the
GUI: Command(s): /PMETH GUI: Main Menu> Preferences> p-method Defining a p-
element: The p-method solution procedure can also be activated by defining a p-
element. If you are working outside of the GUI, the definition of a p-element lets
the program know that a p-method solution is to be done; no other commands are
necessary to initiate p-method. From within the GUI, you can also issue the ET
command in the "Input Window" to activate the p-method procedure. (Remember, the
ET command must be entered in the "Input Window," since, by default, only h-
elements are displayed in the GUI unless p-method is active.) Command(s): ET GUI:
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Element Type> Add/Edit/Delete

In order to build a model with p-elements, you must follow the procedure listed
below. 1. 2. 3. 4. Define the element types. Specify material properties and/or
real constants. Define the model geometry. Mesh the model into solid or shell
elements.
The above steps are common to most analyses. The ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide
explains those steps in detail. In this section we will explain the techniques
that are unique to a p-analysis.

You can use the following five p-elements to build your model: • • • • • 2-D
Quadrilateral (PLANE145) 2-D Triangle (PLANE146) 3-D Brick (SOLID147) 3-D
Tetrahedron (SOLID148) 3-D Shell (SHELL150) Note — H-elements and p-elements
cannot be active at the same time in your model.
14.3.2.1.1. Specifying a p-Level Range

Various options are available for use with p-elements. One important option is the
ability to specify, either locally or globally, a range in which the p-level may
vary. The range within which the p-level may vary can be controlled locally
through the p-element KEYOPT settings (KEYOPT(1) and KEYOPT(2)), or globally
across the entire model with PPRANGE. By default, the p-level range is 2 to 8.
When both KEYOPT values and PPRANGE have been used to specify p-level ranges, the
local p-level range [ET] will take precedence over the global p-level range
[PPRANGE].
14–2
Section 14.3: Using the p-Method For example, if you set a global p-level range
between 3 and 8 with PPRANGE, then define a local p-level range of 4 to 6 for
PLANE145 elements (ET,1,145,4,6), the p-level for the PLANE145 elements may only
vary between 4 and 6, while the rest of the model may vary between 3 and 8. At the
(default) starting p-level of 2, convergence checking is performed to determine
those elements which are converged and may have their p-level fixed at 2. That is,
these elements will remain at a p-level of 2, and will be eliminated from any
further convergence checking. Additional checking is performed at each iteration
to fix the p-levels of the elements which are converged. Note — Convergence
checking for SHELL150 begins at a p-level of 3 instead of a p-level of 2. Use
local p-range control to eliminate regions of little importance from high p-
escalation. Use global p-range control for overall control of the p-level. These
range controls are not necessary, but p-escalations to high plevels increase CPU
time. Therefore, it is advantageous to have such controls available. • Defining a
local p-level range: Command(s): ET GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Element Type>
Add/Edit/Delete Defining a global p-level range: Command(s): PPRANGE GUI: Main
Menu> Preprocessor> Loads> Load Step Opts> p-Method> Set p-range
See the ANSYS Elements Reference for complete descriptions of each of the above
element types.
14.3.2.2. Specify Material Properties and/or Real Constants

14.3.2.2.1. Material Properties
Material properties for p-elements may be either constant or temperature-
dependent, and isotropic or orthotropic. As with other structural analyses, if you
plan to apply inertia loads (such as gravity or rotational velocity), you must
also specify the density (DENS) that is required for mass calculations. Young's
modulus (EX) must be defined, and if thermal loads (temperatures) are to be
applied, a coefficient of thermal expansion (ALPX) must be specified. Command(s):
MP GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Material Models> Structural>
Density Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Material Models> Structural>
Linear> Elastic> Isotropic Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Material
Models> Structural> Thermal Expansion Coef> Isotropic Caution: Element coordinate
systems [ESYS] used for orthotropic material directions are not supported by p-
elements. All element coordinate systems are parallel to the global Cartesian
coordinate system.
14.3.2.2.2. Real Constants

You may define optional thicknesses for 2-D elements and thicknesses for SHELL150
as real constants. Thicknesses must be defined for SHELL150. Command(s): R GUI:
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Real Constants
14–3
Chapter 14: p-Method Structural Static Analysis
14.3.2.3. Define the Model Geometry

You can create your model using any of the various techniques outlined in the
ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide, or you can import it from a CAD system using
ANSYS Connection product. If you are generating your model from within ANSYS, you
can use either solid modeling or direct generation techniques. Note — Using direct
generation is not recommended when you plan to create a p-mesh since all p-
elements require that midside nodes be included in their geometric definition. In
cases where surface curvature is important, it would not only be tedious, but
possibly imprecise to manually define each midside node. In addition, the EMID
command does not place nodes on a curved line. It is much more convenient to let
the program generate the midside nodes using solid modeling. You may not drop any
midside nodes from p-elements. If you use direct generation or import your mesh
from an outside source, keep the following guidelines in mind: • • A curved
element edge should not cover more than a 30° arc. The angles between adjacent
edges should be between 10° and 170°. Element shape checking will warn that
adjacent edges should be between 30° and 150°, but it is usually acceptable to
have angles in the range of 10° to 170° for p-elements. A good rule of thumb is to
keep the aspect ratio (ratio of element length to width) less than 20:1.
14.3.2.4. Mesh the Model into Solid or Shell Elements

14.3.2.4.1. Using Program Defaults
After you have generated your solid model, you are ready to mesh it with p-
elements. The general procedure for meshing your solid model is outlined in
Chapter 7, “Generating the Mesh” in the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide. Compared
to h-elements, the program will generate a coarser mesh under default settings for
p-elements. Normally, you will not need to specify any meshing size controls
because the program defaults will give you an adequate mesh. In addition, each
element's p-level will be manipulated during solution to obtain accurate and
efficient results. For engineering design studies, the accuracy obtained with a
relatively coarse, ungraded mesh is usually sufficient. (A graded mesh is one
where there are more elements near an area of interest. These elements are smaller
relative to the other areas of the model, and a transition region occurs from the
large to the smaller elements.) Note — Adaptive meshing is not valid with a p-
method analysis.
14.3.2.4.2. Specifying Mesh Controls

By default, the DESIZE command controls automatic element sizing. For free
meshing, you have the option of using the SmartSize feature [SMRTSIZE] to control
element sizing. SmartSizing generally produces a better quality mesh and is
recommended for meshing a p-element model. (SmartSizing is not available for
mapped meshing.) Command(s): SMRTSIZE GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Size
Cntrls> SmartSize> Basic or Command(s): DESIZE GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor>
Meshing> Size Cntrls> Manual Size> Global> Other
14–4
Section 14.3: Using the p-Method Note — Since p-method prefers a coarser mesh, the
default element size values for a p-method analysis are different than those used
for h-elements. See the SMRTSIZE and DESIZE commands for details. For fracture or
fatigue assessments, you may still need to specify meshing controls because the
mesh must be fine enough to obtain the desired accuracy near the areas of
interest. In certain cases, such as when there are severe geometric transition
regions, you may also need to specify mesh controls to avoid a meshing failure.
You may also want to specify meshing controls for curved geometries, where
successful meshes are more difficult to achieve with the default size settings.
Under default conditions, badly shaped elements may be produced because of the
difficulty of filling a curved domain with as few elements as possible. User-
defined meshing controls can make the task less difficult.
14.3.2.4.3. Guidelines for Creating a Good Mesh

• Subdivide complex geometries, or build them as separate geometries. As a general
rule, if you were to stand inside a volume, you should be able to see all of its
vertices. If this is not possible, you might wish to consider subdividing the
volume into more manageable pieces. The number of divisions on lines "parallel"
and near to each other should be fairly equivalent. The SmartSizing method of
meshing [SMRTSIZE] handles this situation well. However, if the DESIZE method of
element sizing is used, you should set local mesh controls to achieve a good mesh
in these areas. For beam-like or shell-like models, use one element through the
thickness in the meshed model. SmartSizing will do this automatically. However, if
you are using DESIZE for meshing, set the default element size [MINH] to 1
[DESIZE,,1].
Figure 14.1 Fan Model Showing p-Element vs. h-Element Meshes
14.3.3. Additional Information for Building Your Model

14.3.3.1. Viewing your element model
A subgrid approach is used for plotting the model in which the amount of displayed
element curvature can be controlled. You may display varying degrees of curvature
in your model by specifying the number of facets to be used for element display.
Facets are piecewise linear approximations of the actual curve represented by the
element face or edge. A greater number of facets will result in a smoother
representation of the element surface
14–5
Chapter 14: p-Method Structural Static Analysis for p-element plots. PowerGraphics
is the default graphics display method used for p-method plots. This method will
display the plot at a much faster speed than the Full Model method. See Chapter
10, “PowerGraphics” in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for more information on
PowerGraphics. For more information on /EFACET, see the discussion on the p-
Element Subgrid later in this section. Command(s): /EFACET GUI: Utility Menu>
PlotCtrls> Style> Size and Shape
14.3.3.2. Coupling
You may couple degrees of freedom (DOFs) between nodes on p-elements to control
nodal solution behavior. All coupled nodes are forced to assume the same
displacement values in the specified nodal coordinate direction. The amount of
this displacement is unknown until the analysis has been completed. Command(s): CP
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Coupling/Ceqn> Couple DOFs The first degree of
freedom defined on the coupled set is the "prime" degree of freedom. All other
degrees of freedom in the coupled set are eliminated from the solution matrices as
a result of their relationship to the prime degree of freedom. Note — For p-
elements, only the corner nodes may be defined as prime degrees of freedom if
midside nodes are also part of the same coupled set. For a p-method analysis, only
the nodal combinations described below are permitted when coupling, and any
deviation from these combinations will most likely result in singularities.
14.3.3.2.1. Coupling of Corner Nodes

1. Two nodes are coupled within the same element.
Figure 14.2 Coupled Nodes on One Element
2.
Two nodes are coupled between adjacent element edges/faces.
Figure 14.3 Nodes Coupled Between Adjacent Elements
14–6
Section 14.3: Using the p-Method
14.3.3.2.2. Midside Node Coupling

1. Both corner nodes on the element's edge or face are part of the same coupled
set. Only the corner nodes may be defined as prime degrees of freedom.
Figure 14.4 Both Corner Nodes are Coupled
2.
All nodes in the coupled set are midside nodes. In this case, a midside node must
be defined as the prime degree of freedom, but this is only valid as long as there
are no corner nodes defined as part of the same coupled set.
Figure 14.5 All Coupled Nodes are Midside Nodes
Note — If you have coupled faces or edges on a p-element (that is, all edges of
the element's face or all nodes of the element's edge are coupled), the p-level of
that edge or face will be held to 2. In addition, constraint equations (used to
represent relatively rigid parts) are not available in a p-method analysis.

In this section you will take the following steps to obtain a solution for your
model: 1. Enter SOLUTION. Command(s): /SOLU GUI: Main Menu> Solution Define the
analysis options. Choose any of three options to solve the simultaneous equations
generated by a p-method analysis. These solvers are discussed at length in Chapter
3, “Solution” in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide. • • • Frontal equation solver
Jacobian Conjugate Gradient equation solver (JCG) Preconditioned Conjugate
Gradient equation solver (PCG) (recommended) Command(s): EQSLV
2.
14–7
Chapter 14: p-Method Structural Static Analysis GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Analysis
Type> Sol'n Control ( : Sol'n Options Tab) Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged Menu>
Analysis Type> Analysis Options We generally recommend that you use the PCG solver
for a p-element analysis. For most 3-D solid models and for very large 2-D models
(usually greater than 40,000 DOF), the PCG solver is usually faster than the JCG
and frontal solvers: • • • The PCG solver is about 5 to 10 times faster than the
frontal solver for p-elements. The PCG solver is significantly faster than JCG for
p-elements. Computer-time savings will be greater with the PCG solver when p-
levels of 4 and higher are active.
In certain cases, such as when your model contains elements with high aspect
ratios or material type discontinuities, a greater number of iterations may be
required to achieve convergence for the PCG solver. You may increase the maximum
number of iterations by using the MULT option on the EQSLV command. This option is
only valid when solving with the PCG solver. See the EQSLV command description in
the ANSYS Commands Reference for more information on this capability. The PCG
solver is not available for p-element shells. For more information on the general
use of the PCG solver, refer to Chapter 3, “Solution” in the ANSYS Basic Analysis
Guide. 3. Apply the loads to the solid model (keypoints, lines, areas, etc.) or to
the finite element model (nodes and elements), except for inertia loads (gravity,
rotational velocity, etc.), which are independent of the model. For a general
discussion of solid model loads versus finite element loads, see Chapter 2,
“Loading” in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide. Internal Degrees of Freedom and Nodal
Coordinate Systems In order to correctly apply boundary conditions, you need to
understand nodal coordinate systems, and how degrees of freedom (DOFs) which are
not attached to a node are handled. DOFs are the allowed motions or deformations
of the elements. Those DOFs which are not attached to a node are referred to as
internal degrees of freedom. • Internal DOFs allow the elements to form a better
approximation to the real solution. As the p-level is increased for each loop,
more DOFs are added to the elements. Some of these DOFs act on the element
boundary (edges and interior faces) resulting in deformations that vary from a
polynomial order of 2 to 8. In many cases, the higher the p-level, the more
complex the deformation, and the better the approximation to the real solution.
Nodal coordinate systems orient the degree of freedom directions at each node.
Each node has its own nodal coordinate system, which, by default, is parallel to
the global Cartesian system (regardless of the coordinate system in which the node
was defined). Nodes may be rotated into a nodal coordinate system [NROTAT] (Main
Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Move/Modify> Rotate Node CS> To Active CS). The
constraints and forces are then applied to the nodes in the nodal coordinate
systems. See the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide for more details about nodal
coordinate systems.
The program aligns the internal DOFs with the nodal coordinate systems as defined
by the nodes on the element face or edge. Displacement constraints applied to
nodes with rotated nodal coordinate systems are applied to the internal DOFs on an
element edge or face only if ALL the nodes defining that edge or face are also
rotated into that same coordinate system (see Figure 14.6: “Constraints on Rotated
Nodes”). Therefore any symmetry/antisymmetry displacement boundary conditions
applied to the nodes on adjoining surfaces 14–8
Section 14.3: Using the p-Method should reference the same coordinate system. If
you apply the symmetry/antisymmetry displacement boundary conditions to areas or
lines, you should verify that the constraints all "point" in the same direction on
each surface. If they do not, apply the boundary conditions to the individual
nodes. Caution: If all of the DOFs of the nodes on an edge (or face) are not fully
constrained (are only partially constrained, e.g. only UX is constrained) and the
nodal rotations of these nodes are not the same, the stress results at these nodes
may be inaccurate if the p-level of the attached elements exceeds 3. Nodal
coordinate systems which are not necessarily parallel to the global Cartesian
system are formed when you invoke symmetry or antisymmetry displacement
constraints on model surfaces.
Figure 14.6 Constraints on Rotated Nodes
Loads Applicable to a p-Method Analysis Table 2.5: “Loads Applicable in a Static

Analysis” of this manual describes the loads applicable to a static analysis. The
following is a brief discussion of each type of loading. Displacements (UX, UY,
UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ) are DOF constraints usually specified at model boundaries to
define rigid support points. They are also used to indicate symmetry boundary
conditions and points of known motion. The directions implied by the labels are in
the nodal coordinate system. Displacement boundary conditions that are applied to
all nodes on an element edge or face will also constrain the higher-order
deformations along that edge or face. Conversely, if all of the nodes are not
constrained in that direction, then those lower-order deformations will be
constrained but not the higher-order ones. Never apply a displacement only at a
midside node on an edge. (You may, however, apply a single constraint at a corner
node.) Imposed motions may only vary linearly over an element edge or face. The
program will ignore an imposed quadratic variation. Forces (FX, FY, FZ) are
concentrated loads usually specified on the model exterior. The directions implied
by the labels are in the nodal coordinate system. Moments (MX, MY, MZ) are
concentrated loads usually specified on the model exterior. The directions implied
by the labels are in the nodal coordinate system.
14–9
Chapter 14: p-Method Structural Static Analysis Caution: Observe the following
cautions: • You should avoid applying single-point loads or constraints, since
they cause stress singularities. If these loads or constraints are applied,
exclude the elements attached to these nodes from the convergence computations.
See the "Accounting for Stress Singularities" section later in this chapter. Do
not apply forces and moments to the midside nodes. You may only apply these loads
at the corner nodes. In addition, out-of-plane (element ROTZ) moments may not be
applied to SHELL150.
Pressures (PRES) are surface loads, also usually applied on the model exterior.
Positive values of pressure act towards the element face (resulting in a
compressive effect). Temperatures (TEMP) are applied to study the effects of
thermal expansion or contraction (that is, thermal stresses). The coefficient of
thermal expansion must be defined if thermal strains are to be calculated. You can
read in temperatures from a thermal analysis, or you can specify temperatures
directly on the nodes or the solid model keypoints. To obtain temperatures from a
thermal analysis: • • Mesh the p-element model. Convert the p-element types to the
following thermal element types: PLANE145 to PLANE77, PLANE146 to PLANE35,
SOLID147 to SOLID90, and SOLID148 to SOLID87. There is no thermal equivalent for
SHELL150. Run the thermal analysis. Change the element types back to the p-element
types in order to perform the p-method structural analysis. For the remainder of
the analysis, continue with the same procedure as defined for h-elements (see the
ANSYS Thermal Analysis Guide).
• • •
Gravity, spinning, etc. are inertia loads that affect the entire structure.
Density must be defined if inertia effects are to be included. 4. Specify load
step options. The following solution options are available to aid in solving a p-
Method analysis: • • • Convergence criteria specifications Specifications for
controlling p-levels Accounting for stress singularities
As mentioned earlier in this section, a p-method analysis works with a series of

iterations, or loops, checking for convergence each time. The PPRANGE command is
used to specify the overall range where the p-level may vary (somewhere between 2
and 8). For analyses beginning at p=2, each element will have its solution checked
for convergence against established criteria [PCONV]. If the solution is within
the requested tolerance [PMOPTS], that element will have its p-level held to 2.
Those elements that did not converge within the specified criteria (that is, not
fixed at p=2 for the first iteration), will have their p-level increased, and
another solution (iteration) will then be performed. At each iteration the
convergence criteria (strain energy, displacement, stress, etc.) is checked, and
if converged, the solution stops. Also, those elements whose individual solutions
are considered to be converged will have their p-level held at the current p-
level. This process is continued until all specified convergence criteria are met,
or the maximum p-range has been reached. 14–10
Section 14.3: Using the p-Method Convergence Criteria Specifications Convergence
criteria may be global (for strain energy) or local. If you are specifically
interested in the results at certain points in the model, then you should use
local convergence criteria. Use this option to specify which areas of your model
you would like to monitor for analysis convergence, as well as the type of
criteria you would like to use to control convergence. Typically, you should
select a few points of interest (nodes), at which to specify the convergence
criteria (deflection, stress, strain, etc.). In most cases, the default
convergence tolerance (5%) is sufficient for generally good results. You may want
to lower this tolerance if you require a more accurate solution, such as for a
fatigue evaluation. For a design study or optimization analysis, a higher
tolerance will cut down on run times. Command(s): PCONV GUI: Main Menu>
Preprocessor> Loads> Load Step Opts> p-Method> Convergence Crit For SHELL150, you
also have the option to choose a layer (TOP, MID, or BOT) for stress or strain
convergence criteria. If you are working with intersecting shells, it is
recommended that you choose MID as the layer for convergence checking. Caution: Do
not specify stress or strain criteria at nodes where there are singularities or at
nodes along material interfaces. These locations will not converge due to the
singularity. When choosing locations for specifying convergence criteria, you
should concentrate your monitoring in the areas of high stress or at the point of
maximum displacement rather than where stresses, strains, or displacements are
relatively insignificant. Specifications for Controlling p-levels You may specify
the starting (defaults to 2) and maximum (defaults to 8) p-levels that you wish to
allow for your analysis [PPRANGE]. You may wish to start at a higher p-level if
you have already completed an analysis and you want to perform a re-analysis (for
a design change, for instance) and you know the final p-level where convergence
will occur for most elements. You may also want to restrict the maximum plevel to
less than 8 if conserving disk space or run time. Adjust the starting and maximum
p-level in portions of your model using element KEYOPT selections. Accounting for
Stress Singularities If the model contains any re-entrant (internal or concave)
corners that are not modeled with a fillet radius, or contains point loads or any
other areas of stress singularities, you should consider excluding these areas
from the convergence computations. All elements that have a node at the
singularity should be excluded. One exception applies to fracture mechanics. In
that situation, you should not exclude elements at or near the crack tip.
Command(s): PEXCLUDE GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> p-Method> Strain
Energy> Exclude Elems You can reassign, or re-include, elements for convergence
checking. You may determine which elements have been included or excluded by
listing [PINCLUDE,STAT; PEXCLUDE,STAT; or *GET] or plotting elements [EPLOT].
Excluded elements will appear `whited-out' in the plot. You may also select
included or excluded elements by issuing the ESEL command directly [ESEL,,PEXC or
ESEL,,PINC] (no GUI equivalent). This facilitates using these elements as a
component [CM]. Command(s): PINCLUDE GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> p-
Method> Strain Energy> Include Elems 5. Save a backup copy of the database.
Command(s): SAVE
14–11
Chapter 14: p-Method Structural Static Analysis GUI: Utility Menu> File> Save As
6. Start the p-level iterations and solution process. The output will provide a
summary of each loop, indicating the current p-level, the convergence statistics,
and the status of how many elements have converged. Command(s): SOLVE GUI: Main
Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS
14.3.5. Helpful Hints for Common Problems

If the analysis is not successful, try the following steps to identify and correct
the cause for failure: Problem: "Negative Pivot" error encountered. Possible
Cause: Insufficient constraints to prevent rigid-body motion (the component can
slide or rotate in one direction because there are no constraints to prevent it
from doing so). Solution: Add enough displacement constraints to prevent any
rigid-body motion. Problem: Solution does not converge to within the requested
tolerance. Possible Causes: There are several possible causes. You may use the
general postprocessor [/POST1] to look at this solution in order to determine the
difficulty.
Possible Causes The convergence criteria is too tight for the maximum allowable
plevel and the mesh. Solution Relax the convergence criteria.
The convergence criterion was specified at a singularity (infinite stress Do not

monitor a singularity point. or strain value, such as under a point load) or the
elements near the singularity were not excluded. The mesh is too coarse,
especially in the area where the stress is high. Refine the mesh. The maximum p-
level was restricted lower than that required for convergence. Allow the maximum
p-level to go higher.
The convergence criterion is at a location where the angle made by Refine the mesh
in that region. adjacent element edges is greater than 55° on a curved boundary.
Caution: You may not restart a p-method analysis.

The fundamental procedures for general postprocessing of results [/POST1] in the
ANSYS program are discussed in Chapter 4, “An Overview of Postprocessing” in the
ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide. Although most of these capabilities are directly
applicable to p-method analyses, some techniques for reviewing results are unique
to pmethod, such as • • • • The p-Element Subgrid Querying Subgrid Results
Printing and Plotting Node and Element Results Specialized p-Method Displays and
Listings
The results from a p-method analysis are written to the results file, Jobname.RST.
They consist of the following data:
14–12
Section 14.3: Using the p-Method Primary data Nodal displacements (UX, UY, ROTX,
etc.) Derived data Nodal and element stresses, nodal and element strains, element
forces Note — You must read the results data from the results file (Jobname.RST)
into the database [SET] before displacements may be reviewed during
postprocessing. Thermal strains are not available on the results file. The tools
used for time-history postprocessing [/POST26] are also applicable to p-method
analyses, but have limited functionality, since p-element technology is restricted
to linear static analyses. In this section we will explain those procedures that
deviate from standard postprocessing, such as some plotting and printing
operations, etc. Before reading this section, it would be a good idea to review
the chapters on postprocessing in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide for more details
on postprocessing, in general.
14.3.6.1. The p-Element Subgrid

As mentioned previously, p-method finite element models generally contain fewer
elements than do models meshed with h-elements. Since fewer elements correspond to
a coarser mesh, a subgrid approach has been devised for viewing results in POST1.
In this approach, each element is divided into smaller, "h-like" elements. Both
the display of geometric curvature and the display and printout of field
quantities (displacements, stresses, etc.) are affected by this approach. In most
cases, a greater number of facets will result in a smoother representation of the
element surface and results contours for p-element plots. The key command involved
in the subgrid approach is /EFACET,NUM where NUM represents the number of facets
per element edge (GUI path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Style> Size and Shape). The
example below illustrates how /EFACET subdivides a quadrilateral element. If NUM =
2, the element has 2 facets per edge and is divided into 4 subgrid facets by
adding a pseudo node at the "center". If NUM = 4, the element has 4 facets per
edge which means two pseudo nodes per edge and 9 interior pseudo nodes are added
for each p-element, dividing the quadrilateral into 16 subgrid facets.
Figure 14.7 p-Element Subgrids for Quadrilateral Elements
As a general rule, for a model with a very coarse mesh or any model in which the
p-levels are high (p>3) you should consider using NUM = 4 to view your field
quantities. Since results are available at each subgrid location, more information
will be available at NUM = 4.
14.3.7. Querying Subgrid Results

You have the ability to directly and interactively query subgrid results. You can
obtain all subgrid point results (or element results). Command(s): No command
equivalent. GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Query Results
14–13
Chapter 14: p-Method Structural Static Analysis You may query stresses, strains,
and displacements at all subgrid locations that have previously been activated by
the /EFACET command.
14.3.8. Printing and Plotting Node and Element Results

For elements PLANE145, PLANE146, SOLID147, and SOLID148, displacements, stresses,
and strains can be listed [PRNSOL] at all node locations (both corner and midside
nodes). For SHELL150, results can be listed (as controlled by the SHELL command)
and plotted at the top/bottom and middle layer locations. Likewise, these nodal
values can be contoured for display purposes [PLNSOL], with the contour
resolutions being controlled by the/EFACET command. Note — Results values for
SHELL150 are displayed for the top and bottom layer simultaneously. When viewing
nodal field values across p-element boundaries ([PRNSOL, PLNSOL], or when using
the Query function), results may be displayed in various ways. The results data
may be averaged along element boundaries with the AVRES command. You can average
results at all boundaries (the default), or at all boundaries except where real
constant, and/or material type discontinuities exist. If a geometric discontinuity
exists, results will not be averaged at those locations. Note — AVRES has no
effect on the nodal degree of freedom solution values (UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY,
ROTZ, etc.). For all of the p-elements, displacement plots are available with both
undisplaced structure and undisplaced edge options [PLDISP]. When using
PowerGraphics [/GRAPHICS,POWER], displaced shape plots reflect each calculated
element subgrid [/EFACET] displacement. For PLANE145, PLANE146, SOLID147, and
SOLID148, stresses and strains can be listed [PRESOL] at all node locations for
each element. Results for SHELL150 are listed for the top, middle, and bottom
layers with results for the bottom layer listed first. Printout is similar to that
for h-elements, with nodal results being unaveraged and sorted by element number.
Unlike higher order h-element printout, results are for all nodal locations
(corner and midside nodes). Results may be printed or plotted for the entire model
[/GRAPHICS,FULL] or for the model surface only [/GRAPHICS,POWER]. Note — Issuing
the /PMETH,ON command or defining a p-element [ET] will activate PowerGraphics
unless a prior /GRAPHICS,FULL command has been issued. Similarly, /PMETH,OFF will
deactivate PowerGraphics unless /GRAPHICS,POWER has been issued previously.
14.3.8.1. Specialized p-Method Displays and Listings

There are three commands specifically designed for listing or plotting p-element
results data [PRCONV, PLCONV, PPLOT]. You may print [PRCONV] or plot [PLCONV] the
previously-specified convergence values [PCONV] versus characteristic p-levels.
The characteristic p-level refers to the p-level range from the minimum specified
[PPRANGE] to the maximum p-level reached during SOLUTION. Final p-levels that were
assigned to individual elements can be viewed by means of the PPLOT command. A
convenient way to visualize local convergence criteria at specified locations in
the model is to display a symbol at the location of interest, [/PSYMB,PCON], then
issue an element or node plot.
14.4. Sample p-Method Analysis (GUI Method)

Follow the steps below to perform a p-method analysis using the GUI.
14–14
Section 14.4: Sample p-Method Analysis (GUI Method)

In this sample problem, you will perform a p-method analysis on a steel plate with
a hole.

For this problem, you will use symmetry boundary conditions to constrain the left
side and bottom of the model. This problem uses element type PLANE145. The
material is 1/4" thick steel. Loading for this problem is: P = (100) (10) (.25) =
250 lbs (total force applied on the right side).
14.4.3. Problem Diagram

Figure 14.8 Steel Plate With a Hole

After you enter the ANSYS program, follow these steps to set the title. 1. 2.
Choose menu path Utility Menu> File> Change Title. Type the text "p-Method Plate
with Hole" and click on OK.
14.4.3.2. Select p-Method

1. 2. 3. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preferences. The Preferences for GUI
Filtering dialog box appears. Click the Structural method on. Click the p-Method
Struct. option on. Click on OK.
14.4.3.3. Define the Element Type and Options

1. 2. 3. 4. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Element Type>
Add/Edit/Delete. Click on Add. The Library of Element Types dialog box appears.
Click on OK to accept the default of "2D Quad 145." Click on Options. The PLANE145
element type options dialog box appears.
14–15
Chapter 14: p-Method Structural Static Analysis 5. 6. 7. In the scroll box for
Analysis type, scroll down to "Plane Stress+TK" to select it. Click on OK. Click
on Close in the Element Types dialog box.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Real Constants>
Add/Edit/Delete. Click on Add. The Element Type for Real Constants dialog box
appears. Click on OK. The Real Constants for PLANE145 dialog box appears. Enter
.25 for thickness and click on OK. Click on Close to close the Real Constants
dialog box.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Material
Models Available window, double-click on the icons next to the following options:
Structural, Linear, Elastic, Isotropic. A dialog box appears. Enter 30e6 for EX
(Young's modulus). Enter 0.29 for PRXY and click on OK. Material Model Number 1
appears in the Material Models Defined window on the left. Choose menu path
Material> Exit to remove the Define Material Model Behavior dialog box.
14.4.3.6. Create Plate with Hole

Create> Areas> Rectangle> By Dimensions. The Create Rectangle by Dimensions dialog
box appears. Enter 0,20 for the X-coordinates and 0,10 for the Y-coordinates. Use
the TAB key to move between fields. Click on OK. The rectangle appears in the
ANSYS Graphics window. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create>
Areas> Circle> By Dimensions. The Circular Area by Dimensions dialog box appears.
Enter 5 for outer radius. Click on OK. The circle appears on the ANSYS Graphics
window, on the lower left corner of the rectangle. Choose menu path Main Menu>
Preprocessor> Modeling> Operate> Booleans> Subtract> Areas. The Subtract Areas
picking menu appears. Click once on the rectangle to select it. Click on OK in the
picking menu. Another Subtract Areas picking menu appears.
10. Click once on the circle to select it. 11. Click on OK in the picking menu. A
semicircle is removed from the lower left-hand corner of the plate.
14.4.3.7. Mesh the Areas

1. 2. 14–16 Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> MeshTool. The
MeshTool appears. Click the SmartSize check box on. Set the SmartSize slider to 5.
Section 14.4: Sample p-Method Analysis (GUI Method) 3. 4. 5. 6. In the Mesh
section of the MeshTool, choose Areas and Free. Then click the MESH button. The
Mesh Areas picking menu appears. Click on Pick All. A mesh for the plate is
created. Click Close to close the MeshTool. Click on SAVE_DB on the ANSYS Toolbar.
14.4.3.8. Define Symmetry Boundary Conditions

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Entities. In the
top two menus, pick "Nodes" and "By Location." Enter 0 for Min, Max and click on
OK. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural>
Displacement> Symmetry B.C.> On Nodes. The Apply SYMM on Nodes dialog box appears.
Click on OK to accept the default of symmetric surface normal to X-axis. The
displacement symbols appear down the left edge of the drawing. Choose menu path
Utility Menu> Select> Entities. Click the "Y coordinates" option on. Click OK.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural>
Displacement> Symmetry B.C.> On Nodes. The Apply SYMM on Nodes dialog box appears.
In the drop down menu for Symm surface is normal to, select "Y-axis."
10. Click OK. The displacement symbols appear along the bottom of the drawing.
14.4.3.9. Define Pressure Load along Right Edge.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Entities. The Select
Entities dialog box appears. Click the "X coordinates" option on. Enter 20 for
Min, Max and click on OK. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads>
Apply> Structural> Pressure> On Nodes. The Apply PRES on Nodes picking menu
appears. Click on Pick All. The Apply PRES on Nodes dialog box appears. Enter 100
for pressure value and click on OK. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select>
Everything.
14.4.3.10. Define Convergence Criteria

1. 2. 3. 4. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Parameters> Scalar Parameters. The
Scalar Parameters dialog box appears. In the Selection field, enter NCVG =
NODE(0,5,0) and click on Accept. Click on Close. In the ANSYS Input window, enter
PCONV,1,S,X,NCVG and press ENTER.
14.4.3.11. Solve the Problem

1. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS.
14–17
Chapter 14: p-Method Structural Static Analysis 2. 3. 4. Carefully review the
information in the status window, and then close it. Click on OK in the Solve
Solution is done window appears.
14.4.3.12. Review the Results and Exit ANSYS

In this step, you will review results as deformed shape and SX contour plot. 1. 2.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results>
First Set. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Deformed
Shape. The Plot Deformed Shape dialog box appears. Click the "Def + undeformed"
option on. Click on OK. The deformed and undeformed shapes appear in the ANSYS
Graphics window. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results>
Contour Plot> Nodal Solu. The Contour Nodal Solution Data dialog box appears. In
the scroll box on the left, click once on "Stress" to select it. In the scroll box
on the right, click once on "X-direction SX" to select it. Click on OK. Review the
graphic using the legend in the graphics window. Expected results are: Max
displacement = .97x10-4 in, and Max stress in X direction = 437 psi. Click on QUIT
on the ANSYS Toolbar. Choose a save option and click on OK.
14.5. Sample p-Method Analysis (Command or Batch Method)

You can perform the example p-method analysis of a plate with a hole using the
ANSYS commands shown below instead of GUI choices. All items prefaced by an
/TITLE, p-method plate with hole problem /PREP7 ET,1,PLANE145,,,3 R,1,.25
MP,EX,1,30e6 MP,PRXY,1,0.29 RECTNG,0,20,0,10 PCIRC,5,,0,360 ASBA,1,2 SMRTSIZ,5
AMESH,3 SAVE FINISH /SOLU NSEL,S,LOC,X,0 DSYM,SYMM,X NSEL,S,LOC,Y,0 DSYM,SYMM,Y
NSEL,S,LOC,X,20 SF,ALL,PRES,-100 ALLSEL NCVG=NODE(0,5,0) PCONV,1,S,X,NCVG SOLVE
/POST1 SET,1 PLNSOL,S,X PLDISP,1 FINISH
14–18
Chapter 15: Beam Analysis and Cross Sections
15.1. An Overview of Beams
Beam elements are used to create a mathematical one-dimensional idealization of a
3-D structure. They offer computationally efficient solutions when compared to
solid and shell elements. The discussion in this chapter applies only to BEAM44,
which is a 3-D tapered unsymmetric beam; and BEAM188 and BEAM189, which are 3-D
finite strain beams. These beams provide more robust nonlinear analysis
capabilities, and significant improvements in cross section data definition,
analysis, and visualization, as compared to other ANSYS beams. See the
descriptions of the BEAM44, BEAM188, and BEAM189 elements in the ANSYS Elements
Reference for more information. Note — If you are using the cross section
capabilities described in this chapter with BEAM44 elements, be aware that you
cannot use these capabilities to define tapered sections. In addition, the
postprocessing visualization capabilities described in this chapter are not
applicable to BEAM44 elements. Note — Custom cross sections may not be used with
the CDWRITE command.
15.2. What Are Cross Sections?

A cross section defines the geometry of the beam in a plane perpendicular to the
beam axial direction. ANSYS supplies a library of eleven commonly-used beam cross
section shapes, and permits user-defined cross section shapes. When a cross
section is defined, ANSYS builds a numeric model using a nine node cell for
determining the properties (Iyy, Izz, etc.) of the section and for the solution to
the Poisson's equation for torsional behavior. Figure 15.1: “Plot of a Z Cross
Section” shows the centroid and shear center of the cross section and the
calculated section properties:
Figure 15.1 Plot of a Z Cross Section
Cross sections and user section meshes may be saved and stored in cross section
library files. You may assign beam cross sections as attributes of a line using
the LATT command. These section definitions will be incorporated into the
generated beam elements when the line is meshed with BEAM44, BEAM188, or BEAM189.
15.3. How to Create Cross Sections

The general procedure for creating cross sections consists of the following steps:
1. 2. Define the section and associate a section ID number with the section
subtype. Define the geometry data for the section.
ANSYS supplies the following commands for creating, viewing, and listing cross
sections, and for managing cross section libraries:
Table 15.1 ANSYS Cross Section Commands

Command PRSSOL SECTYPE SECDATA SECOFFSET Purpose Prints beam section results (not
supported for BEAM44) Associates section Subtype with SECID Defines section
geometry data Defines section offset for beam cross sections
SECCONTROLS Overrides program calculated properties.
15–2
Section 15.3: How to Create Cross Sections
Command SECNUM SECPLOT SECWRITE /SECLIB SECREAD SLIST SDELETE Purpose Identifies
the SECID to be assigned to an element Plots geometry of a beam section to scale
Creates an ASCII file containing user mesh or a custom cross section Sets default
section library path for SECREAD Reads a user defined section library, mesh, or
custom cross section Summarizes section properties Deletes a cross section
For complete documentation of the cross section commands, see the ANSYS Commands
Reference.
15.3.1. Defining a Section and Associating a Section ID Number

Use the SECTYPE command to define a section and associate it with a section ID
number. For example, the following command assigns a section identification number
(2) to a predefined cross section shape (circular solid): Command(s): SECTYPE, 2,
BEAM, CSOLID GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Common Sectns To define
your own cross sections, use the subtype MESH. To define a cross section with
integrated properties such as Iyy and Izz, use the subtype ASEC.
15.3.2. Defining Cross Section Geometry and Setting the Section Attribute Pointer
Use the SECDATA command to define the geometry of a cross section. Continuing with
the example SECTYPE command shown above, note that the CSOLID subtype has two
dimensions: the radius and the number of cells along its circumference. Thus, the
SECDATA command shown below specifies 5 as the radius of the circular solid beam,
and 8 as the number of cells along its circumference. The SECNUM command sets the
element section attribute pointer to 2. Command(s): SECDATA, 5, 8 and SECNUM, 2
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Common Sectns Main Menu>
Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh> Attributes> Default Attribs
15.3.2.1. Determining the Number of Cells to Define

In general, you do not need to set the number of cells when building a cross
section. ANSYS will calculate values for the cross section such as the area of the
section and the moments of inertia about the coordinate axes using default
integration rules and will produce results that are numerically exact. Since the
torsion constant is derived from the mesh, the accuracy of the torsion constant is
directly proportional to the mesh size of the cross section. The default mesh used
by ANSYS yields acceptable engineering accuracy. There are two ways to specify the
mesh size for common sections: • • invoking SECTYPE,,,,,REFINEKEY to set the level
of mesh refinement for thin-walled sections (CTUBE, CHAN, I, Z, L, T, HATS, and
HREC) specifying the number of divisions using SECDATA for solid sections (RECT,
QUAD, and CSOLID)
15–3
Chapter 15: Beam Analysis and Cross Sections The thin wall sections have a minimum
of two integration points through thickness, so results produced using thin wall
sections should be acceptable for materially nonlinear analysis. However, when
doing a plasticity analysis, the cell defaults may need to be changed for the
solid sections. Here are examples of ANSYS-generated solid section cell meshes and
the type of analysis you may wish to use them with.
Figure 15.2 Types of Solid Section Cell Mesh
15.3.3. Meshing a Line Model with BEAM44, BEAM188, or BEAM189 Elements

Before you mesh a line with BEAM44, BEAM188, or BEAM189 elements, some of its
attributes must be defined. These attributes include: • • • The material set
attribute pointer to be associated with the generated beam elements. The beam
element type to be used in meshing the line. The orientation of the cross section
with respect to the beam element axis. For detailed information about orientation
nodes and beams, see Section 7.5.2: Generating a Beam Mesh With Orientation Nodes
in the ANSYS Modeling and Meshing Guide. The cross section ID to be assigned to
the generated beam elements.
Issue the LATT command to associate these attributes with the selected, unmeshed
line: Command(s): LATT, MAT, , TYPE, , KB, KE, SECNUM GUI: Main Menu>
Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh Attributes> Picked Lines See the LATT command
description for the meaning of MAT and TYPE. The following arguments are described
here in terms of their applicability to beams.
KB
Corresponds to any keypoint number in the model. All beam elements generated will
have their beam section oriented such that the beam z-axis will lie in the plane
defined by two line end keypoints and this keypoint number.
15–4
Section 15.4: Creating Cross Sections
KE
Corresponds to any keypoint number in the model (optional). This keypoint

determines the beam orientation at the end of the line as described above. If KE
is given, KB determines the beam orientation at the beginning of the line. This is
useful for creating twisted beams.
SECNUM
Corresponds to the beam section defined by the SECTYPE command with the section ID
number as given by the SECNUM.
15.4. Creating Cross Sections

There are two main types of beam cross sections: • • common sections custom
sections
Common sections are described by a standard geometry and a single material. Custom
sections are defined by an arbitrary geometry and may consist of several isotropic
materials. In addition, you can use defined sections to create tapered beams (for
BEAM188 and BEAM189 only). See Section 15.4.5: Defining a Tapered Beam for more
information.
15.4.1. Using the Beam Tool to Create Common Cross Sections

The SECTYPE, SECDATA, and SECOFFSET commands (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections>
Beam> Common Sectns) are all associated with the BeamTool in the GUI. The
appearance of the BeamTool varies depending on the cross section subtype you
select:
15–5
Figure 15.3 BeamTool with Subtypes Drop Down List Displayed
The top part of the BeamTool relates a section ID number to a subtype (and,
optionally, a section name) [SECTYPE]. The middle of the BeamTool defines the
section offset information, if needed [SECOFFSET]. The bottom contains the fields
for section geometry information [SECDATA]. The dimensions defined by the SECDATA
command are determined by the subtype selected. For documentation about a
particular variant of the BeamTool, select the subtype that you want information
about, and then click on the Help button on the BeamTool. The subtype dimensions
are also documented in the SECDATA command description.
15.4.2. Creating Custom Cross Sections with a User-defined Mesh

If you need to define a cross section that is not common, you must create a user
mesh file. To create a user mesh file, create a 2-D solid model and save it using
the SECWRITE command (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Custom Sectns>
Write From Areas). This procedure is outlined in greater detail below: 1. 2.
Create all areas (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Areas). Overlap the
areas (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Operate> Booleans> Overlap> Areas) or
glue them (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Operate> Booleans> Glue> Areas)
where appropriate. Save the model.
3.
15–6
Section 15.4: Creating Cross Sections 4. 5. 6. Set the number of line divisions
for all lines (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Size Cntrls> ManualSize> Lines>
Picked Lines or use the MeshTool). Select Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam>
Custom Sectns> Write From Areas. A picker appears. Pick the area(s) of the cells.
ANSYS creates cells on the areas. ANSYS may display bad shape messages during the
mesh - these messages can be ignored. However, you may see an "Unable to mesh area
...." message. If you do, clear the elements from all areas (Main Menu>
Preprocessor> Meshing> Clear> Areas) and repeat steps 4 and 5. Write the .SECT
file out to a unique name in the Write Section Library File dialog box and click
on OK. Read in the user mesh file (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Custom
Sectns> Read Sect Mesh) to calculate the section properties. Material properties
must be defined to calculate the cross section shear correction factors, material-
weighted centroids and the shear centers.
7. 8.
Note — Even if you have already set LESIZE, you will see the following message:
Line element sizes may need to be specified for desired cross-section mesh. Please
refer to the LESIZE command. If you have already set the line element size, click
on the Close button to continue. If you have not already set it, issue LESIZE with
the appropriate information. When creating cells on the area using the GUI, you do
not need to define a plane element type. On the other hand, a plane element type
must be defined if the user issues the SECWRITE command explicitly. MESH200 with
KEYOPT(1) = 7 and PLANE82 are the only valid plane element types.
15.4.3. Creating Custom Cross Sections with Mesh Refinement and Multiple Materials
When doing a plasticity analysis, you may need to refine the cross section mesh. A
cross section consisting of more than one material may be defined to represent
layers, reinforcements or sensors. When defining a multiplematerial cross section,
you will need to specify the material that each cross section cell is made of. You
may take a previously-created cross section and modify it. To create a custom
cross section with a refined mesh and/or multiple materials, perform the following
tasks: 1. Either read a common section (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam>
Custom Sectns> Edit/Built-up> Edit Common) from the ANSYS database or read a
custom section from a .SECT file. (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Custom
Sectns> Edit/Built-up> Edit Custom) ANSYS displays a MESH200 plot in the Graphics
Window. Refine the section mesh. (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Custom
Sectns> Edit/Builtup> Refine Mesh) Modify the cell materials. (Main Menu>
Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Custom Sectns> Edit/Builtup> Modify Material) If you
want to create a multiple-material section, define the materials. This is
necessary to calculate the shear correction factors and material-weighted
centroids. Save the section to a .SECT file using SECWRITE (Main Menu>
Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Custom Sectns> Edit/Built-up> Save). To calculate
the section properties and use a custom section in the analysis, read in the user
mesh file (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Custom Sectns> Read Sect
Mesh).
2. 3. 4.
5. 6.
15–7
Chapter 15: Beam Analysis and Cross Sections Note — If you redefine a material
after creating the section, you must reissue the SECTYPE and SECREAD commands to
recompute the cross section. When a cross section has multiple materials, and
/ESHAPE is used to produce contour plots of stresses (and other quantities), the
element averages the stresses across material boundaries. To limit this behavior,
use small cross section cells around the material boundaries. When a cross section
has multiple materials, the multiple materials will not be displayed in an element
plot with /ESHAPE,1. The multiple materials can be verified by viewing the cross
section in the Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Custom Sectns> Edit/Built-
up> Edit Custom submenu. When using the SECWRITE command explicitly, a section
with multiple materials can be created by assigning material attributes to the
areas. During meshing, the elements inherit the material attribute from the area
and this attribute is written to the .SECT file.
15.4.4. Defining Composite Cross Sections

A composite cross section is a cross section consisting of at least two materials
and meshed with a user-defined mesh. When creating a composite section, define the
materials before running the SECREAD command. This is necessary to calculate the
shear correction factors, material-weighted centroids and the shear centers. Note
— If you redefine a material after creating the section, you must reissue the
SECREAD command to recompute the cross section. You can save composite cross
sections as custom cross sections. For information on custom cross sections, see
Section 15.4.1: Using the Beam Tool to Create Common Cross Sections
15.4.5. Defining a Tapered Beam

For BEAM188 and BEAM189, you can define tapered beams using the TAPER option on
the SECTYPE command (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam> Taper Sections). The
tapered section varies linearly between two specified locations, (x1, y1, z1) and
(x2, y2, z2). Thus, two SECDATA commands are required to define the taper as shown
below. At each of these end points, a valid beam section ID must be input
(station-1 and station2 in the example below). SECTYPE,SECID,TAPER
SECDATA,station-1,x1,y1,z1 SECDATA,station-2,x2,y2,z2 The following is a typical
command input stream used to create a tapered cross section:
sectype,1,beam,rect secdata,.0001,0.5 sectype,2,beam,rect secdata,3,0.5
sectype,3,taper secdata,1,0.0,0.0 secdata,2,0.0,20.0 ! define cross section at
first end point ! define cross section at far end ! new Section ID for tapered
beam analysis ! section 1 at location (0,0,0) ! section 2 at location (0,20,0)
Continuing with this example, you can then use 3 as the taper section ID when
assigning mesh attributes with the SECNUM or LATT command. The resulting beam
cross section is (0.0001*0.5) at end 1, and linearly tapers to (3*0.5) at end 2.
The following assumptions apply to tapered beams defined with this method: • • 15–
8 The end sections must be defined prior to defining the taper. Sections defined
at the end points must be topologically identical.
Section 15.5: Using Nonlinear General Beam Sections • • A section cannot taper to
a point (or zero area) at either end. The arbitrary beam section type (ASEC on the
SECTYPE command) is not supported for tapered beams.
The program performs a number of checks (although not completely comprehensive) to

ensure topological equality. The following items are compared: • • • number of
section nodes number of section elements section type
If both end stations refer to custom cross sections with multiple materials, you
must ensure that material IDs for the cells are the same for both ends. At a Gauss
point of integration, the BEAM188 and BEAM189 elements will find the closest point
on the line defined by station-1 and station-2. Using this information, a linear
interpolation is performed for the cross section mesh. Therefore, it is very
important that the Gauss point be located within the end points. ANSYS will
produce error messages when this is not the case. The tapered section treatment is
significantly more expensive than a constant cross section (since recomputation is
necessary). If this is a concern, use KEYOPT(12) of the beam element to specify
the tapered section treatment. • • KEYOPT(12) = 0 - Linear tapered section
analysis (more accurate, but expensive) KEYOPT(12) = 1 - Average cross section
analysis (an approximation of the order of the mesh size, but faster)
15.5. Using Nonlinear General Beam Sections

The nonlinear general beam section (SECTYPE,,GENB) is an abstract cross section
type that allows you to define axial, flexural, torsional, and transverse shear
behavior as a function of axial strain, bending curvature, twist, and transverse
shear strains. The generalized section form of input does not require cross
section geometry data or material data independently. For purposes of evaluating
mass matrices, ANSYS assumes a unit area of cross section. This form of data is
useful for including an experimentally measured nonlinear response of a beam-like
structural component, or for including complex behavior such as cross section
distortion (not possible when using normal beam sections). Nonlinear general beam
sections also allow a nonlinear relationship of transverse shear forces to the
corresponding transverse shear strains. Often, the input of generalized beam
sections may be a result of a prior detailed slice analysis (for example, a
segment of pipe analyzed using generalized plane strain elements). The behavior of
beam elements is governed by the generalized-stress/generalized-strain
relationship of the form:   A (ε,T )  ε  E N   E   0 I1 ( κ1,T )     κ1 
M1   E    I2 ( κ2 ,T ) M2     κ2   =  χ  τ  JG (χ,T )    S1    
γ1  G   0 A1 ( γ1,T )  γ     S2    2 G A2 ( γ 2 ,T )   
15–9
Chapter 15: Beam Analysis and Cross Sections where:
N = Axial force M1 = Bending moment in plane XZ M2 = Bending moment in plane XY
τ = Torque S1 = Transverse shear force in plane XZ S2 = Transverse shear force in

plane XY ε = Axial strain κ1 = Curvature in plane XZ κ2 = Curvature in plane XY χ
= Twist of the cross section γ1 = Transverse shear strain in plane XZ γ2 =
Transverse shear strain in plane XY AE(ε,T) = Axial stiffness as a function of
axial strain and temperature
I1 (κ1,T) = Flexural rigidity as a function of curvature and temperature in plane
XZ I2 (κ2,T) = Flexural rigidity as a function of curvature and temperature in
plane XY JG(χ,T) = Torsional rigidity, as a function of torsion and temperature A1
(γ1,T) = Transverse shear stiffness as a function of shear strain and temperature
in plane XZ A2 (γ2,T) = Transverse shear stiffness as a function of shear strain
and temperature in plane XY T is the current temperature
G G E E
Thermal expansion coefficients and mass density for the section as a function of
temperature complete the definition of a generalized cross section.
15.5.1. Defining a Nonlinear General Beam Section

Each of the following commands specifies a particular component quantity necessary
for defining a nonlinear general beam section:
Table 15.2 ANSYS Commands for Specifying Nonlinear General Beam Section Data
Command BSAX [1] BSM1 [1] BSM2 [1] BSTQ [1] BSS1 [1] BSS2 [1] BSMD [2] Quantity
Defined and Data Specified Axial force and strain N, ε, T Bending moment and
curvature in plane XZ M1, κ1, T Bending moment and curvature in plane XY M2, κ2, T
Cross section torque and twist τ, χ, T Transverse shear force and strain in plane
XZ S1, γ1, T Transverse shear force and strain in plane XY S2, γ2, T Mass density
of the beam section (assuming a unit thickness)
DENS, T
15–10
Section 15.5: Using Nonlinear General Beam Sections
BSTE [2] Thermal expansion coefficient
ALPHA, T
1. 2.
Repeatable for six independent temperatures, and up to 20 strain values.

Repeatable for six different temperatures.
Temperature dependencies (T) You can define each of the generalized section data
components as temperature-dependent. It is possible to specify up to six
temperatures (T) by reissuing any command as necessary. If you issue a command for
a temperature specified earlier, the most recent data supersedes the previous
value.
15.5.1.1. Strain Dependencies

Each component of a nonlinear beam section definition (axial, bending, torque, and
transverse shear) can be a nonlinear function of the corresponding strain. The
terms generalized stress and generalized strain describe the data defined via the
BSAX, BSM1, BSM2, BSTQ, BSS1, and BSS2 commands. The generalized stress to
generalized strain relationship can be nonlinear. The nonlinear response can be
either purely elastic--that is, no permanent deformation, and fully recoverable
deformation even though the behavior is nonlinear--or elasto-plastic. The option
of a purely elastic or elasto-plastic response (SECTYPE) applies to all components
of a beam section definition. The following input illustrates a typical
(temperature-independent) nonlinear axial behavior:
sectype,1,genb,plastic bsax ,0.0008,200 bsax ,0.001 ,240 bsax ,0.0014,300 ! ! ! !
Elasto-plastic response Axial strain 0.0008, Force of 200 Axial strain 0.001 ,
Force of 240 Axial Strain 0.0014, Force of 300
ANSYS conventions for defining a uniaxial elasto-plastic response apply. The range
of strain values must cover the anticipated maximum deformation of the structure.
For all nonlinear beam section specifications, the stiffness disappears if the
structural response is beyond the maximum strain value of the section data. You
can define a maximum of 20 generalized stress-strain points at each temperature
value. For a plastic nonlinear beam section subtype (SECTYPE,,GENB,PLASTIC), you
must define all section components with two or more stress-strain points. However,
you can define a linear behavior for any section component by specifying a larger
maximum strain value. Following is an example where axial behavior is nonlinear,
but bending response is linear:
sectype,1,genb,plastic bsax,0.0008,200 bsax,0.001 ,240 bsax,0.0014,300 ! bending
bsm1,0.1,10000 bsm1,1,100000 ! Elasto-plastic response
For an elastic nonlinear beam section subtype (SECTYPE,,GENB,ELASTIC), a single

stress-strain point is adequate for defining linear behavior.
15.5.2. Considerations for Employing Nonlinear General Beam Sections

You can define nonlinear general beam sections only when using element BEAM188 or
BEAM189. When using nonlinear beam section data, the following conditions apply:
15–11
Chapter 15: Beam Analysis and Cross Sections • The section data defined by each
command listed in Table 15.2: “ANSYS Commands for Specifying Nonlinear General
Beam Section Data” is associated with the section most recently defined via the
SECTYPE command. Beam stresses are not available for output; however, the stress
resultants are available as ETABLE quantities. Initial stress specification
(ISTRESS, ISFILE, ISWRITE) is not feasible. Section offsetting (SECOFFSET) is not
available. Only the temperature of the beam axis is relevant.
• • • •
15.6. Managing Cross Section and User Mesh Libraries

Cross section data for common sections such as CHAN and RECT can be stored in
cross section libraries. To create standard cross sections for later use, create
one or more cross sections, edit the Jobname.LOG file, and copy the appropriate
SECTYPE, SECDATA, and SECOFFSET commands into a separate file with a SECT
extension. These predefined cross sections can later be read into a model using
the /SECLIB command (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Section Library> Import
Library).
15.7. Sample Lateral Torsional Buckling Analysis (GUI Method)

You can use BEAM188 and BEAM189 elements to model not only straightforward beam
bending and shear response but also to model beam response that involves lateral-
torsional buckling. To create this type of model, you will need to create an
adequately fine mesh of beam elements. You typically need to model a single beam
member using a series of short beam elements, as shown in Figure 15.4: “Lateral-
Torsional Buckling of a Cantilever I-Beam”.
15–12
Section 15.7: Sample Lateral Torsional Buckling Analysis (GUI Method)
Figure 15.4 Lateral-Torsional Buckling of a Cantilever I-Beam
Lateral-Torsional Buckling of a Cantilever I-Beam, Modeled With 60 BEAM188

Elements (Displayed Using /ESHAPE) Chapter 7, “Buckling Analysis” in the ANSYS
Structural Analysis Guide documents buckling analysis in detail. This sample
problem shows what happens when a cantilever beam is subjected to a concentrated
end load, which causes lateral-torsional buckling.

A straight, slender cantilever beam has one fixed end and one free end. A load is
applied to the free end. The model is analyzed using eigenvalue buckling
calculations, followed by a nonlinear load versus deflection study. The objective
is to determine the critical value of the end load (indicated by P in Figure 15.5:
“Diagram of a Beam With Deformation Indicated”) at which the beam undergoes a
bifurcation indicated by a large displacement in the lateral direction.

The following material properties are used for this problem: Young's modulus = 1.0
X 104 psi Poisson's ratio = 0.0
15–13
Chapter 15: Beam Analysis and Cross Sections The following geometric properties
are used for this problem: L = 100 in H = 5 in B = .2 in Loading for this problem
is: P = 1 lb.

Figure 15.5 Diagram of a Beam With Deformation Indicated
15.7.4. Eigenvalue Buckling and Nonlinear Collapse

Eigenvalue buckling calculation is a linearized calculation, and is generally
valid only for elastic structures. The yielding of materials occurs usually at
loads lesser than that predicted by eigenvalue buckling analysis. This type of
analysis tends to need less computation time than a full nonlinear buckling
analysis. You can also perform a nonlinear load versus deflection study, which
employs an arc length solution strategy to identify critical loads. While the
approach is more general, a collapse analysis may be computationally intensive.
The nonlinear collapse analysis must be performed on a structure with
imperfections built in to the model, since a perfect model will not show signs of
buckling. You can add imperfections by using eigenvectors that result from an
eigenvalue buckling analysis. The eigenvector determined is the closest estimate
of the actual mode of buckling. The imperfections added should be small when
compared to a typical thickness of the beam being analyzed. The imperfections
remove the sharp discontinuity in the load-deflection response. It is customary to
use one to ten percent of the beam/shell thickness as the maximum imperfection
introduced. The UPGEOM command adds displacements from a previous analysis and
updates the geometry to the deformed configuration.
15–14
Section 15.7: Sample Lateral Torsional Buckling Analysis (GUI Method)
15.7.5. Set the Analysis Title and Define Model Geometry

1. 2. 3. Choose menu path Utility Menu> File> Change Title. Enter the text
"Lateral Torsional Buckling Analysis" and click on OK. Start the model creation
preprocessor and define the keypoints for the beam. Choose menu path Main Menu>
Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Keypoints> In Active CS, and enter these keypoint
numbers and the coordinates in the dialog box as indicated:
Keypoint Number 1 2 3 X Location 0 100.0 50 Y Location 0 0 5 Z Location 0 0 0
Click This Button to Accept Values Apply Apply OK
4.
Create a straight line through keypoints 1 and 2. Choose menu path Main Menu>
Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Lines> Lines> Straight Line. The Create Straight
Line picker appears. Select keypoints 1 and 2 in the Graphics window and click on
OK in the Create Straight Line picker. Save the model. Choose menu path Utility
Menu> File> Save As. Enter buckle.db in the Save Database to box and click on OK.
5.
15.7.6. Define Element Type and Cross Section Information

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preferences and select the
"Structural" check box. Click on OK to continue. Choose menu path Main Menu>
Preprocessor> Element Type> Add/Edit/Delete. The Element Types dialog box appears.
Click on Add ... The Library of Element Types dialog box appears. In the scroll
box on the left, click on "Structural Beam" to select it. In the scroll box on the
right, click on "3D finite strain, 3 node 189" to select BEAM189. Click on OK, and
then click on Close in the Element Types dialog box. Define a rectangular cross
section for the beam. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Beam>
Common Sectns. The BeamTool is displayed. ANSYS sets the section ID to 1, and the
subtype to RECT (signified by a rectangle on the subtype button) by default. Since
you will be creating a rectangular cross section, there is no need to change the
subtype. In the lower half of the BeamTool, you will see a diagram of the cross
section shape with dimension variables labeled. Enter the width of the cross
section, 0.2, in the box labeled B. Enter the height of the cross section, 5.0, in
the box labeled H. Click on Apply to set the cross section dimensions. Use the
BeamTool to display information about the cross section. Click on the Preview
button on the BeamTool. A diagram and data summary of the cross section appear in
the Graphics window. You can also preview the mesh of the cross section by
selecting the Meshview button. Click on the Close button in the BeamTool to
continue.
8.
9.
15.7.7. Define the Material Properties and Orientation Node

1. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Material Models. The
Define Material Model Behavior dialog box appears.
15–15
Chapter 15: Beam Analysis and Cross Sections 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. In the Material
Models Available window on the right, double-click on the following: Structural,
Linear, Elastic, Isotropic. A dialog box appears. Enter 1E4 for EX (Young's
modulus). Enter 0.0 for PRXY (Poisson's ratio), and click on OK. Material Model
Number 1 appears in the Material Models Defined window on the left. Choose menu
path Material> Exit to close the Define Material Model Behavior dialog box. Replot
the line by choosing menu path Utility Menu> Plot> Lines. Select the line and
define the orientation node of the line as an attribute. Choose menu path Main
Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh Attributes> Picked Lines. The Line Attributes
picker appears. Select the line in the Graphics window and click on Apply in the
Line Attributes picker. The Line Attributes dialog box appears. ANSYS includes the
material attribute pointer to the material set 1, the element type attribute
pointer to the local element type 1, and the section attribute pointer to the
section ID 1 by default. Click on the radio button beside the Pick Orientation
Keypoint(s) label to change it to Yes and click on OK. The Line Attributes picker
reappears. Type 3 in the picker, press the Enter key, and click on OK.
8.
9.
10. Save the model. Choose menu path Utility Menu> File> Save As. If the buckle.db
file is not already selected, select it. Select OK, and when ANSYS prompts you if
you want to overwrite the existing file, click on OK.
15.7.8. Mesh the Line and Verify Beam Orientation

1. Define the mesh size and number of divisions. Choose menu path Main Menu>
Preprocessor> Meshing> Size Cntrls> ManualSize> Lines> All Lines. Enter 10 in the
No. of Element Divisions box and click on OK. Mesh the line. Choose menu path Main
Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> MeshTool. Click on MESH on the MeshTool and the Mesh
Lines picker appears. Pick the line in the Graphics window, and then click on OK
in the Mesh Lines picker. Click on Close in the MeshTool to close it. Rotate the
meshed line. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Pan, Zoom, Rotate. The Pan,
Zoom, Rotate tool appears. Select ISO and click on Close. The beam is rotated in
the Graphics window. Verify the beam orientation. Choose menu path Utility Menu>
PlotCtrls> Style> Size and Shape. Select the radio button next to the /ESHAPE
label to turn /ESHAPE on and click on OK.
2.
3. 4.
15.7.9. Define the Boundary Conditions

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 15–16 Define a boundary condition to the fixed end. Choose menu
path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Displacement> On
Keypoints. The Apply U,ROT on KPs picker appears. Define keypoint 1 as the fixed
end. In the picker, type 1, press the Enter key, then click on OK. The Apply U,ROT
on KPs dialog box appears. Click on "All DOF" to select it, and click on OK. The
boundary condition information appears in the ANSYS Graphics window at keypoint 1.
Apply a force to the free end. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads>
Apply> Structural> Force/Moment> On Keypoints. The Apply F/M on KPs picker
appears. Identify keypoint 2 as the free end. Type 2 in the picker, press the
Enter key, and then click on OK. The Apply F/M on KPs dialog box appears. In the
drop down list for Direction of force/mom, select FY.
Section 15.7: Sample Lateral Torsional Buckling Analysis (GUI Method) 7. 8. Enter
1 for the Force/moment value in the Apply F/M on KPs dialog box, and click on OK.
The force symbol appears in the ANSYS Graphics window at keypoint 2. Save the
model. Choose menu path Utility Menu> File> Save As. If the buckle.db file is not
already selected, select it. Click on OK and when ANSYS prompts you if you want to
overwrite the existing file, click on OK again.
15.7.10. Solve the Eigenvalue Buckling Analysis

1. 2. 3. Set analysis options. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Unabridged
Menu> Analysis Type> Analysis Options. The Static or Steady-State Analysis dialog
box appears. Use the sparse solver for the solution. In the Static or Steady-State
Analysis dialog box, make sure that Sparse solver is selected in the drop down box
beside the Equation solver label. Include prestress effect, which will be stored
for later use in the eigenvalue buckling calculation. In the drop down list
labeled Stress stiffness or prestress, select "Prestress ON." Click on OK to close
the Static or Steady-State Analysis dialog box. Choose menu path Main Menu>
Solution> Solve> Current LS. Review the summary information in the /STAT command
window, then select Close from its menu bar. Click on OK in the Solve Current Load
Step window to begin the solution. When the Solution is Done! window appears,
click on Close to close it. Choose menu path Main Menu> Finish. Choose menu path
Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis. Select the "Eigen Buckling"
option, then click on OK. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type>
Analysis Options. The Eigenvalue Buckling Options dialog box appears. Select the
Block Lanczos option. Enter 4 in the No. of modes to extract box, then click on
OK.
4.
5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
10. Set the element calculation key for the MXPAND command. Choose menu path Main
Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> ExpansionPass> Single Expand> Expand Modes. 11. In
the Expand Modes dialog box, enter 4 in the No. of modes to expand box, change the
No to Yes beside the Calculate elem results label, and click on OK. 12. Choose
menu path Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS. Review the summary information
in the /STAT command window, then select Close from its menu bar. Click on OK in
the Solve Current Load Step window to begin the solution. 13. When the Solution is
Done! window appears, click on Close to close it. 14. Choose menu path Utility
Menu> PlotCtrls> Style> Size and Shape. Be sure the radio button beside the label
Display of element shapes ... (/ESHAPE) is set to On and click on OK. 15. Display
the results summary. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Results
Summary. After you have reviewed the results, click on Close to close the window.
16. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Read Results> First Set. 17.
Plot the first mode shape of the beam. Choose menu path Main Menu> General
Postproc> Plot Results> Deformed Shape. The Plot Deformed Shape dialog box
appears. Select Def + undef edge and click on OK. 18. Choose menu path Main Menu>
Finish.
15–17
15.7.11. Solve the Nonlinear Buckling Analysis

1. Introduce model imperfections calculated by the previous analysis. Choose menu
path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Update Geom. In the Update nodes using
results file displacements dialog box, enter 0.002 in the Scaling factor box, 1 in
the Load step box, 1 in the Substep box, and file.rst in the Selection box. Click
on OK. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis. Select
the "Static" option, then click on OK. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load
Step Opts> Output Ctrls> DB/Results File and be sure the drop down lists display
All Items and All entities respectively. Choose the Every substep for the File
write frequency radio button and click on OK. Choose menu path Main Menu>
Solution> Analysis Type> Analysis Options. Select the radio button beside Large
deform effects, then click on OK. Set the arc-length method, and set parameters
for the termination of the solution. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load
Step Opts> Nonlinear> Arc-Length Opts. Select the Arc-length method on/off radio
button and set it to On. Choose the pull down menu next to the Lab label and
select Displacement lim. Enter 1.0 in the Max desired U box. Enter 2 in the Node
number for VAL box. Choose the pull down menu next to the Degree of freedom label
and select UZ. Click on OK. Define the number of substeps to be run during this
load step. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc>
Time and Substps. Enter 10000 in the Number of substeps box and click on OK. Solve
the current model. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS. Review
the summary information in the /STAT command window, then select Close from its
menu bar. Click on OK in the Solve Current Load Step window to begin the solution.
A Nonlinear Solution window with a Stop button appears. A convergence graph is
built, and can take several minutes to complete. You may receive a warning
message. You should review the information in the message but you do not need to
close it. Continue waiting for the solution to complete. When the Solution is
Done! window appears, click on Close to close it.
2. 3. 4.
5. 6.
7.
8.
9.
10. Choose menu path Main Menu> Finish.
15.7.12. Plot and Review the Results

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Replot the beam. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Plot> Elements.
Define the load point deflection to be read from the results file. Choose menu
path Main Menu> TimeHist PostPro> Define Variables. When the Defined Time-History
Variables dialog box appears, select Add. When the Add Time-History Variable
dialog box appears, be sure the Nodal DOF result option is selected. Click on OK.
The Define Nodal Data picker appears. In the Graphics window, pick node 2 (the end
node on the right side of the beam) and click on OK. The Define Nodal Data dialog
box appears. Be sure the Ref number of variable and Node number are both set to 2.
Enter TIPLATDI in the User-specified label box. Select Translation UZ from the
menu and click on OK. Define the total reaction force to be read from the results
file. Choose Add from the Defined Time-History Variables dialog box. When the Add
Time-History Variable dialog box appears, choose the Reaction forces radio button
and then click on OK.
6. 7.
15–18
Section 15.8: Sample Problem with Cantilever Beams, Command Method 8. 9. The
Define Reaction Force picker appears. Pick the end node on the left side of the
beam and click on OK. The Define Reaction Force Variable dialog box appears. Be
sure the Ref number of variable is set to 3 and Node number is set to 1. Select
Struct Force FY from the menu and click on OK. Click on Close to close the Defined
Time-History Variables dialog box.
10. Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro> Math Operations> Multiply. In
the Multiply TimeHistory Variables dialog box, enter 4 in the Reference number for
result box, -1.0 in the 1st Factor box, and 3 in the 1st Variable box. Click on
OK. 11. Display the X variable. Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist Postpro>
Settings> Graph. Choose the single variable button, enter 2 in the Single variable
no. box, and click on OK. 12. Plot the load versus deflection curve to confirm the
critical load calculated by the eigenvalue method. Choose menu path Main Menu>
TimeHist PostPro> Graph Variables. Enter 4 in the 1st variable to graph box. Click
on OK. 13. List the variables versus time. Choose menu path Main Menu> TimeHist
PostPro> List Variables. Enter 2 in the 1st variable to list box and 4 in the 2nd
variable box and click on OK. 14. Check the values in the PRVAR Command window to
see how they compare against the values generated by the eigenvalue buckling
analysis. Expected results are: Critical buckling load, Pcr = 0.01892. Close the
PRVAR Command window. 15. Choose menu path Main Menu> Finish. 16. In the ANSYS
Toolbar, click on Quit. 17. Choose a save option and click on OK.
15.8. Sample Problem with Cantilever Beams, Command Method

Here is the input file for the problem described in the previous section:
/GRAPHICS,POWER /GST,ON /SHOW,BUCKLE,GRPH /PREP7 K,1,0,0,0 K,2,100.0,0,0
K,3,50,5,0 LSTR,1,2 ET,1,BEAM189 SECTYPE,1, BEAM, RECT SECDATA, 0.2, 5.0 SLIST, 1,
1 MP,EX,1,1E4 MP,NUXY,1,0.0 LSEL,S, , , 1, 1, 1 LATT,1, ,1,0, 3, ,1 LESIZE, all, ,
,10 SECNUM,1 LMESH,all /VIEW,,1,1,1 /ESHAPE,1 EPLOT DK,1, , , ,0,ALL FK,2,FY,1.0
FINISH /SOLU PSTRES,ON EQSLV,SPARSE ! EQSLV,SPARSE is the default for static and
full transient SOLVE FINISH /SOLU
15–19
ANTYPE,BUCKLE BUCOPT,LANB,4 MXPAND,4,,,YES SOLVE FINISH /POST1 /ESHAPE,1 /VIEW, 1
,1,1,1 /ANG, 1 SET,LIST SET,1,1 PLDISP,2 FINISH /PREP7 UPGEOM,0.002,1,1,file,rst
/SOLU ANTYPE,STATIC OUTRES,ALL,ALL NLGEOM,ON ARCLEN,ON,25,0.0001 ARCTRM,U,1.0,2,UZ
NSUBST,10000 SOLVE FINISH /POST26 NSOL,2,2,U,Z,TIPLATDI RFORCE,3,1,F,Y PROD,4,3, ,
, , , ,-1.0,1,1 XVAR,2 PLVAR,4 PRVAR,2,4 FINISH

additional beam analyses. The ANSYS Verification Manual consists of test case
Verification Manual does not present them as step-by-step examples with lengthy
data input instructions and printouts. However, most ANSYS users who have at least
limited finite element experience should be able to fill in the missing details by
reviewing each test case's finite element model and input data with accompanying
comments. The ANSYS Verification Manual contains one beam test case: VM222 -
Warped Cantilever Beam
15–20
Chapter 16: Shell Analysis and Cross Sections
16.1. An Overview of Shells
Shell elements are used to create a mathematical 2-D idealization of a 3-D
structure. They offer computationally efficient solutions for modelling shell
structures when compared to solid elements. The discussion in this chapter applies
to SHELL181, which is a 3-D finite strain shell element. This shell element
provides more robust nonlinear analysis capabilities, and significant improvements
in cross section data definition, analysis, and visualization, as compared to
other ANSYS shells. The method for defining shell sections described here can also
be used to define the cross-sectional properties of the layered thermal shell
elements, SHELL131 and SHELL132. Discussions in this chapter relating to
integration points (NUMPT on the SECDATA command) and section properties
(SECCONTROLS command) do not apply to SHELL131 and SHELL132.
16.2. What Are Cross Sections?

A cross section defines the geometry of the shell in a plane parallel to the shell
x-y plane. Through the section family of commands, you can describe the z
direction of the element by defining consecutive layers. Each layer may vary in
thickness, material type, orientation (from element x-axis), and number of
integration points. Alternatively, you can define homogenous shell section
behavior directly via preintegrated shell sections, a method commonly used in
analyses involving laminated composite structures. With preintegrated shell
sections, you can directly specify the membrane, bending, and coupling properties.
The preintegrated method also allows analysis of complex geometry (with repeated
patterns such as corrugated sheets) using equivalent shell section properties. For
more information, see Section 16.4: Using Preintegrated General Shell Sections.
16.3. How to Create Cross Sections

The general procedure for creating cross sections consists of the following steps:
1. 2. Define the section and associate a section ID number with the section.
Define the geometry data for the section.
ANSYS supplies the following commands for creating, viewing, and listing cross
sections, and for managing cross section libraries:
Table 16.1 ANSYS Cross Section Commands

Command SECTYPE SECDATA Purpose Associates section with SECID (section number)
Defines section geometry data
SECCONTROLS Overrides program calculated properties. SECFUNCTION Specifies shell

section thickness as a tabular function. SECNUM SECOFFSET SECPLOT Identifies the
SECID (section number) to be assigned to an element Defines section offset for
shell cross sections Plots geometry of a shell section to scale
Command SLIST SDELETE Purpose Summarizes section properties Deletes a cross
section
For complete documentation of the cross section commands, see the ANSYS Commands
Reference. Figure 16.1: “Plot of a Shell Section” shows the layer stacking of a
shell section. The layer order, along with material and orientation of each layer,
is represented here:
Figure 16.1 Plot of a Shell Section
16.3.1. Defining a Section and Associating a Section ID Number

Use the SECTYPE command to define a section and associate it with a section ID
number. For example, the following command assigns a section identification number
(2) to a shell section: Command(s): SECTYPE, 2, SHELL GUI: Main Menu>
Preprocessor> Sections> Shell> Add/Edit
16.3.2. Defining Layer Data

Use the SECDATA command to define the layers of a shell section. Each consecutive
SECDATA command defines the next layer's thickness, material, orientation, and
number of integration points. (The number of integration points input on SECDATA
is not used by thermal shell elements.) The layer orientation angle is the angle
between the layer coordinate system and the x-axis of the element coordinate
system. You may designate the number of integration points (1, 3, 5, 7, or 9)
located thru the thickness of each layer. When only 1, the point is always located
midway between the top and bottom surfaces. If 3 or more points, 2 points are
located on the top and bottom surfaces respectively and the remaining points are
distributed equal distance between the 2 points. An exception occurs when
designating 5 points, where the quarter point locations 16–2
Section 16.3: How to Create Cross Sections are moved 5 percent toward their
nearest layer surface to agree with the locations selected with real constant
input. The default for each layer is 3. If a shell section has only one layer, and
the number of section integration points is equal to one, then the shell does not
have any bending stiffness. This may result in solver difficulties, and may affect
convergence adversely. Command(s): SECDATA, 0.5, 1, 45, 3 SECDATA, 0.5, 2, -45, 3
SECDATA, 0.5, 1, 45, 3 GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Shell> Add/Edit
16.3.3. Overriding Program Calculated Section Properties

Use the SECCONTROLS command to override the program calculated section properties.
By default, the program calculates shear correction factors and mass for each
element based on the input section geometry and material properties. Any values
input on the SECCONTROLS command will replace the defaults. (SECCONTROLS does not
apply to thermal shell elements.) Command(s): SECCONTROLS, 0.8, 0.0, 0.8, 1.0 GUI:
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Shell> Add/Edit
16.3.4. Specifying a Shell Thickness Variation (Tapered Shells)

Use the SECFUNCTION command to associate a tabular thickness variation with the
section. A table that describes thickness with respect to the global Cartesian
coordinate system may be associated with a shell section. This thickness is
interpreted as the total thickness of a shell. The total thickness of a layered
shell, and all layer thickness values, will be scaled according to the tabular
function. Command(s): SECFUNCTION, %table_name% GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor>
Sections> Shell> Add/Edit
16.3.5. Setting the Section Attribute Pointer

Use the SECNUM command to associate an element with a particular section. Any
element created after the SECNUM command will have this section identification
number (2) as its section attribute. Command(s): SECNUM, 2 GUI: Main Menu>
Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh Attributes> Define> Default Attribs
16.3.6. Associating an Area with a Section

Use the AATT command to associate an area with a shell section type. When the area
is meshed, the new elements are associated with the section specified on the AATT
command. The section specified by the SECNUM command is ignored. Command(s): AATT,
, , , , 2 GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh Attributes> All Areas Main
Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh Attributes> Picked Areas
16.3.7. Using the Shell Tool to Create Sections

The SECTYPE, SECDATA, SECOFFSET, SECFUNCTION, and SECCONTROLS commands (Main Menu>
Preprocessor> Sections> Shell> Add/Edit) are all associated with the ShellTool in
the GUI.
16–3
Figure 16.2 Shell Tool With Layup Page Displayed
The top part of the Layup page of the ShellTool relates a section ID number to a
Shell section type (and, optionally, a section name) [SECTYPE]. The middle part of
the page of the ShellTool defines each layer in the positive Z direction of the
element [SECDATA]. Note that the order of the rows in the spreadsheet ascends up
the page, resembling that stacking of the layers. (Integration point data for each
layer is ignored by thermal shell elements.) The bottom contains the fields for
section offset information, if needed [SECOFFSET]. You can define tapered shells
by specifying a section function relating thickness to global coordinates
[SECFUNCTION].
Figure 16.3 Shell Tool With Section Controls Page Displayed
The transverse shear stiffness, hourglass coefficients and drill stiffness of the
sections are calculated from the section geometry and material properties. The
default added mass per unit area of the section is always zero. On the Section
Controls page, you can override the program calculated quantities [SECCONTROLS].
(The Section Controls page does not apply to thermal shell elements.)
16–4
Section 16.4: Using Preintegrated General Shell Sections
Figure 16.4 Shell Tool With Summary Page Displayed
On the Summary page, you can review the section properties.
16.3.8. Managing Cross Section Libraries

Cross section data for shell sections can be stored in cross section libraries. To
create standard cross sections for later use, create one or more cross sections,
edit the Jobname.LOG file, and copy the appropriate SECCONTROLS, SECDATA,
SECFUNCTION, SECOFFSET, and SECTYPE commands into a separate file with a SECT
extension.
16.4. Using Preintegrated General Shell Sections

You can use preintegrated general shell sections (SECTYPE,,GENS) when using the
SHELL181 element, provided that linear elastic material behavior is acceptable.
Compared to standard shell usage with independent material and section
definitions, preintegration requires fewer system resources because numerical
integration through the thickness of the shell is not required. The behavior of
shell elements is governed by the generalized-stress/generalized-strain
relationship of the form: N   A  = T  M B [S] = [E]{ γ } { where: {N} =
{N11, N22, N12} are membrane stress resultants per unit length {M} ={M11, M22,
M12} are bending stress resultants per unit length {ε} = {ε11 , ε22, ε12} are
membrane strains {κ} = {κ11,κ22,κ12} are curvatures {S} = {S1, S2} are transverse
shear forces per unit length {γ}={γ1,γ2 } are transverse shear strains [A], [B],
[D], and [E] are the section-stiffness matrices for membrane, coupling, bending,
and shear behavior, respectively {MT} are stress resultants caused by a unit rise
in temperature on a fully constrained model {BT} are bending-related stress
resultants caused by a unit rise in temperature on a fully constrained model
 T B ε  I M     − (T - T )   D  κ    BT  
16–5
T is the stress-free initial temperature T is the current temperature
I
(Subscripts 1 and 2 denote shell surface coordinates as employed by the shell

element.) The preintegrated form of input allows you to import homogenous section-
stiffness constants evaluated in other analyses or by third-party, special-purpose
software tools. For example, defining preintegrated section stiffnesses [A], [B],
and [D] is common in analyses of layered composites, corrugated shells, or other
complex section construction.
16.4.1. Defining a Preintegrated Shell Section

Each of the following commands specifies a particular component quantity necessary
for defining a preintegrated shell section:
Table 16.2 ANSYS Commands for Specifying Preintegrated Shell Section Data
Command SSPA SSPB [1] SSPD [1] SSPE [1] SSMT SSBT [1] SSPM Quantity Defined and
Data Specified Membrane stiffness -- Symmetric part of submatrix [A] A11, A21,
A31,A22,A32,A33, T Coupling stiffness -- Symmetric part of submatrix [B] B11, B21,
B31,B22,B32,B33, T Bending stiffness -- Symmetric part of submatrix [D] D11, D21,
D31,D22,D32,D33, T Transverse shear stiffness -- Symmetric part of submatrix [E]
E11, E21, E22, T Membrane thermal effects -- {MT} T T T M 11, M 22, M 12, T
Bending thermal effects -- {BT} T T T B 11, B 22, B 12, T Mass density of the
shell section (assuming a unit thickness)
DENS, T
1.
If you are using the SHELL181 element's Membrane option (KEYOPT(1) = 1), it is not
necessary to issue the SSPB, SSPD, SSPE, and SSBT commands. In this case, the only
relevant quantities are membrane stiffness (SSPA), membrane thermal effects
(SSMT), and density (SSPM).
Temperature dependencies (T) You can define each of the preintegrated shell
section data as temperaturedependent. It is possible to specify up to six
temperatures (T) by reissuing any command as necessary. If you issue a command for
a temperature specified earlier, the most recent data supersedes the previous
value.
16.4.2. Considerations for Employing Preintegrated Shell Sections

You can define preintegrated shell sections only when using the SHELL181 element.
When using preintegrated shell section data, the following conditions apply: • The
section data defined by each command listed in Table 16.2: “ANSYS Commands for
Specifying Preintegrated Shell Section Data” is associated with the section most
recently defined via the SECTYPE command. You cannot use the shell element with
heat-transfer shells.
16–6
Section 16.4: Using Preintegrated General Shell Sections • • • • • Shell stresses
are not available for output; however, the stress resultants are available as
ETABLE quantities. Initial stress specification (ISTRESS, ISFILE, ISWRITE) is not
feasible. The thickness of the shell is assumed to remain constant even in a
large-strain analysis. Section offsetting (SECOFFSET) is not available. The
preintegrated stiffness components must yield a positive definite section
stiffness at analysis time.
If using preintegrated shell sections in a contact analysis, ANSYS recommends the

pure Lagrange multiplier method. For standard layered-shell sections, you can
obtain submatrices [A], [B], [D], and [E] via the SLIST command's FULL option.
16–7
16–8
Index
Symbols
2-D fracture models, 11–3 3-D fracture models, 11–4
creep, 8–31 hyperelasticity, 8–21 large strain, 8–6 plasticity, 8–9
B
Bauschinger effect, 8–10 beam tool, 15–5 beams cross sections, 15–1 nonlinear
general sections, 15–9 Besseling model, 8–10 beta (stiffness) damping, 4–10, 5–36,
6–3, 6–18 bilinear isotropic hardening, 8–10 bilinear kinematic hardening, 8–10
birth and death, 8–70, 8–70 element, 8–63 bisection, 8–5 Block Lanczos extraction
method, 4–25 Block Lanczos method, 3–3, 3–17 bonlinear structural analysis
restarts, 8–60 buckling analysis, 7–1, 7–1 eigenvalue, 7–3 procedure, 7–3 expand
the solution, 7–6 expansion pass, 7–6 methods of solution, 7–1 nonlinear, 7–2
procedure, 7–2 obtain the eigenvalue buckling solution, 7–5 obtain the static
solution, 7–4
A
adaptive descent, 8–53 adequate mesh density, 8–64 alpha (mass) damping, 4–10, 5–
36, 6–18 alternating stress intensity, 13–1 amplitude of harmonic loads, 4–5
analysis modal analysis options, 3–4 reduced transient dynamic, 5–19 analysis
options harmonic response analysis, 4–25 mode superposition method, 4–25 modal
analysis, 3–2, 4–4, 4–20 nonlinear static structural analysis, 8–50 single-point
spectrum analysis, 6–3 transient dynamic analysis, 5–14, 5–20 mode superposition
method, 5–14 reduced method, 5–20 analysis type buckling, 7–1 full transient, 5–7
harmonic response, 4–1 modal, 3–1 nonlinear structural, 8–1 p-method, 14–1
spectrum, 6–1 static structural, 2–1, 2–2 structural, 1–1 definition of, 1–1
transient dynamic, 5–1 animation gasket results, 10–19 anisotropic, 8–10 applying
loads, 3–2, 4–4, 4–20, 8–57, 8–60 harmonic response analysis, 4–5 increments for
buckling analysis, 7–2 modal analysis, 3–5 nonlinear analysis, 8–57 p-method, 14–7
structural static analysis, 2–8, 2–8 transient dynamic analysis, 5–9 using TABLE
array parameters, 2–8 arc-length method, 2–5, 7–2, 7–3, 8–2, 8–68 automatic time
stepping, 5–35, 7–2, 8–67
C
calculating covariance in POST26, 6–23 fracture parameters, 11–5 cast iron
plasticity, 8–10 causes of nonlinear behavior, 8–1 changing status, 8–2 geometric
nonlinearities, 8–2 material nonlinearities, 8–2 cells defining for a section, 15–
3 Chaboche model, 8–10 changing status, 8–2 combinations material model, 8–35
composite cross section, 15–8 composites, 12–1 element types for, 12–1
Index guidelines, 12–6 how to model, 12–1 layer properties, 12–3 concrete, 8–10,
8–29, 8–63 constant damping ratio, 4–10, 5–36, 6–3, 6–18 constitutive matrices,
12–4 constraint equations, 14–7 with QR Damped method, 3–19 contact, 8–2 node-to-
node, 8–63 contour displays, 2–11, 3–11, 6–8, 7–7, 8–57, 10–19 control elements,
8–70 controlling cutbacks, 2–4 controlling p-levels, 14–7 controlling restarts, 2–
4 convergence checking, 8–51 enhancements, 8–65 failure, 8–65 convergence
criteria, 8–51 default value, 8–51 disjointed structures, 8–51 displacement
checking, 8–51 force checking, 8–51 p-method, 14–7 vector norms, 8–51 convergence
tolerances, 2–4 coupling, 12–6, 14–6 covariance calculating, 6–23 crack faces, 11–
1 crack front, 11–1 crack region modeling, 11–1 crack tip, 11–1 creating sections,
15–2, 15–5, 16–1 beam tool, 15–5 creep, 8–8, 8–29 automatic time stepping, 8–31
explicit, 8–29, 8–55 explicit creep procedure, 8–31 implicit, 8–29, 8–55 implicit
creep procedure, 8–30 material curve fitting, 9–8 ratio, 8–55 creep criteria, 2–7,
8–55 creep strain rate, 8–29 cross sections (see sections) (see Sections)
composite, 15–8 custom convergence criteria, 8–51 cutback criteria, 2–4 CUTCONTROL
command changes through SOLCONTROL, 8–53 cyclic hardening/softening, 8–10
D
damped method modal analysis, 3–3, 3–18 damping, 5–9, 5–36, 8–60 harmonic response
analysis, 4–10 spectrum analysis, 6–18 PSD, 6–18 table of options, 5–36 transient
dynamic analysis, 5–7, 5–9, 5–14, 5–22 database output, 2–2, 3–8, 4–10, 4–21, 5–7,
5–14, 5–24, 7–6, 8–50 DDAM (see dynamic design analysis method) deep drawing, 8–33
deformed shape display, 2–11, 6–8, 7–7, 8–57 displaying, 10–19 deleting sections,
15–2, 16–1 deterministic analysis, 6–2 disjointed structures, 8–51 display
deformed shape, 3–11, 4–12 displaying deformed shapes, 8–57 DOFs master, 3–5
Drucker-Prager, 8–10 dynamic analyses harmonic response, 4–1 spectrum, 6–1
transient, 5–1 dynamic design analysis method (DDAM), 6–2, 6–25
E
eigenvalue analysis, 3–1 eigenvalue buckling, 7–1 eigenvalue buckling solution
buckling analysis, 7–5 eigenvalue calculation shift point, 7–5 eigenvalue
extraction methods, 7–5 eigenvalues, 3–1 number to be extracted, 7–5 eigenvectors,
3–1 elastomers, 8–17 element birth and death, 8–63 element damping, 5–36 element
loads, 4–25 element types
Index–2
Index structural, 1–2 elements associating sec IDs with, 15–2, 16–1 energy release
rate, 11–1, 11–8 engineering strain, 8–7 engineering stress, 8–7 epoxy, 12–1
equation solvers, 2–4, 4–4, 8–50, 14–7 equilibrium iterations, 8–2, 8–53 number
of, 2–4, 8–53 error estimation, 2–11 example problems beam analysis, 15–20
buckling analysis, 7–12 harmonic response analysis, 4–19 modal analysis, 3–14
nonlinear analysis, 8–82 reduced transient dynamic analysis, 5–40 single-point
response spectrum analysis, 6–17 static analysis, 2–26 excitation direction, 6–3
expand single solution, 5–24 expand the modes single-point response spectrum
analysis, 6–6 expand the solution buckling analysis, 7–6 reduced harmonic response
analysis, 4–21 expanded modes number to use, 6–3 expanded solution review results,
5–25 expanding modes, 3–8 expansion frequency range, 3–8 expansion pass, 4–21
activating, 3–8, 4–21, 5–24 buckling analysis, 7–6 harmonic response analysis, 4–
21, 4–27 mode superposition method, 4–27 reduced method, 4–21 transient dynamic
analysis, 5–18, 5–24 mode superposition method, 5–18 reduced method, 5–24
expansion pass options harmonic response analysis (reduced), 4–21 modal analysis,
3–8 transient dynamic analysis (reduced), 5–24 explicit creep, 8–29 explicit creep
procedure, 8–31 extra element shapes, 8–70 extracting modes, 3–1 extrapolation of
results, 2–7, 4–10, 4–21, 5–24, 8–56
F
failure criteria, 12–5 maximum strain, 12–5 maximum stress, 12–5 Tsai-Wu, 12–5
failures convergence, 8–65 fatigue alternating stress intensity, 13–1 design
stress-intensity value (Sm), 13–2 evaluation procedure, 13–2 event, 13–1 event
repetitions, 13–6 fatigue data file (Jobname.FATG), 13–9 guidelines for assembling
events, 13–7 loading, 13–1 location, 13–1 manually stored stresses, 13–4 material
properties, 13–2 overview, 13–1 S-N curve, 13–2 sample input, 13–9 scale factors,
13–6 Sm-T curve, 13–2 strain hardening exponents, 13–2 stress concentration
factors, 13–2 stress locations, 13–2 stresses at a cross-section, 13–5 stresses
from results file, 13–5 with p-elements, 14–4 fatigue assessments, 14–4 fatigue
calculations activating, 13–9 fiberglass, 12–1 files Jobname.FATG, 13–9 .SECT, 15–
6 forced vibrations, 4–1 forcing frequency range, 4–10 fracture assessments, 14–4
fracture mechanics, 11–1, 11–1 solving problems, 11–1 fracture models 2-D, 11–3 3-
D, 11–4 fracture parameters calculating, 11–5 free meshing, 14–4 free-body
analysis (see inertia relief) frequency range for expansion, 3–8, 4–21 frequency
vector, 6–23 frequency-dependent damping ratio, 6–18 Index–3
Index full harmonic response analysis procedure, 4–3 full transient dynamic
analysis procedure, 5–3 hyperelasticity, 8–8, 8–17 Arruda-Boyce model, 8–19
automatic time stepping, 8–21 Blatz-Ko foam model, 8–20 Gent model, 8–20 large
strain, 8–17 material curve fitting, 9–1 Mooney-Rivlin model, 8–18, 8–21 neo-
Hookean model, 8–19 Ogden compressible foam model, 8–20 Ogden model, 8–18
polynomial form model, 8–19 stability checks, 8–21 u-P formulation, 8–21 user-
defined option, 8–21 Yeoh model, 8–20
G
gap conditions, 5–14, 5–20 and QR Damped method, 5–14 gasket joints simulation,
10–1 applications, 10–3 element topologies, 10–2 elements, 10–3 formulation, 10–2
materials, 10–4 meshing, 10–12 output listing, 10–17 overview, 10–1 plotting data,
10–11 procedure, 10–1 results, 10–19 sample problem, 10–20 solution, 10–16
thickness, 10–2 gasket results animation, 10–19 POST1, 10–19 POST26, 10–20
reviewing, 10–19 tabular listing, 10–19 geometric nonlinearities, 8–2, 8–6
geometry data for sections, 15–2, 16–1 geometry data of a section, 15–3, 16–2
glass, 8–33 guyan reduction, 3–20
I
implicit creep, 8–29 implicit creep procedure, 8–30 inertia relief, 2–9
calculating, 2–9 output, 2–9 partial, 2–9 initial accelerations, 5–4 initial
conditions transient dynamic analysis, 5–4, 5–14, 5–21 full method, 5–4 mode
superposition method, 5–14 reduced method, 5–21 initial displacement, 5–4 initial
velocity, 5–4 integration point, 8–56 integration time step, 5–1, 5–7, 5–14, 5–22
guidelines for, 5–33 interface material model, 1–2
H
harmonic forcing frequency, 4–5 harmonic response, 4–1 harmonic response analysis,
4–1 full method, 4–3, 4–3 procedure, 4–3 methods of solution, 4–2 mode
superposition method, 4–24, 4–27 procedure, 4–24 sample input, 4–27 prestressed,
4–28 reduced method, 4–19, 4–23 sample input, 4–23 uses for, 4–1 harmonic
solutions number of, 4–9 Hill anisotropy, 8–10 Index–4
J
J-integral, 11–1, 11–6
K
kinematic analysis, 8–60, 8–67 KSPIN [OMEGA], 8–8
L
large deflection and load direction, 8–6 large deformation effects, 2–2, 5–7, 7–2,
8–6, 8–8, 8–60 large strain analyses, 8–6, 8–10 automatic time stepping, 8–6
Index hyperelasticity, 8–17 logarithmic strain, 8–7 true stress, 8–7
viscoplasticity, 8–33 layer orientation angle, 12–3 layer thickness, 12–3 layered
elements, 12–1 libraries sections, 15–12, 16–5 library paths for cross sections,
15–2 line element results, 2–11, 3–11 line search option, 2–4, 8–53, 8–68 list
master DOF, 3–11 listing section properties, 15–2, 16–1 section results, 15–2 load
step options, 3–8, 4–21, 5–24 buckling analysis, 7–6 eigenvalue buckling, 7–5
harmonic response analysis, 4–9, 4–20, 4–25 full method, 4–9 mode superposition
method, 4–25 reduced method, 4–20 modal analysis, 3–6 mode superposition transient
dynamic analysis, 5–14 Newton-Raphson, 8–54 p-method, 14–7 reduced transient
dynamic analysis, 5–21 spectrum analysis, 6–3, 6–18 PSD, 6–18 single-point, 6–3
time, 5–14 transient dynamic analysis, 5–10, 5–10, 5–14, 5–21 full method, 5–10
mode superposition method, 5–14 reduced method, 5–21 load steps, 8–2 applying for
transient loading, 5–10 load types, 2–7, 3–5 harmonic response analysis, 4–5 p-
method, 14–7 load vector, 4–25, 5–14, 5–14 load-versus-time curve, 5–4 loads
applying, 2–8, 3–2, 3–5, 4–8, 4–20, 5–14, 7–2, 8–57, 8–60, 14–7 p-method, 14–7
applying for transient loading, 5–9 direction in a large-deflection analysis, 8–6
harmonic response analysis, 4–5, 4–20, 4–25 mode superposition method, 4–25
reduced method, 4–20 modal analysis, 3–5 nonlinear analysis, 8–57 structural
static analysis, 2–8, 2–8 transient dynamic analysis, 5–9, 5–9, 5–14, 5–21 full
method, 5–9 mode superposition method, 5–14 reduced method, 5–21 Loads applying,
4–4 logarithmic strain, 8–7, 8–7
M
macros, 2–10 mass damping, 5–36 mass matrix formulation, 2–6, 3–4, 4–4, 5–9 master
degrees of freedom selection of, 3–20 master DOF (MDOF), 3–20, 5–20 master DOFs
definition of, 3–5 material curve fitting, 9–1 creep, 9–8 viscoelastic, 9–15
material model combinations, 8–35 material model interface, 1–2 material models
shape memory alloy, 8–31 material nonlinearities, 8–2, 8–8 material properties,
14–3 fatigue, 13–2 material curve fitting, 9–1 nonlinear, 8–8 material-dependent
damping, 5–36 matrix reduction, 3–19 theory of, 3–20 maximum strain failure
criterion, 12–5 maximum stress failure criterion, 12–5 MDOF, 3–5 memory saving
when generating stiffness matrix, 8–50 meshing a line for a section, 15–4 p-
element, 14–4 metal forming, 8–33 midside nodes p-element, 14–4 MINREF [CNVTOL],
8–51 modal analysis, 3–1 applying loads, 3–5 mode-extraction methods, 3–3, 3–16
Index–5
Index options for, 3–4 prestressed, 3–15 prestressed, large deflection, 3–15
procedure, 3–1 modal damping, 5–36, 6–3 modal solution obtaining, 5–13 single-
point response spectrum analysis, 6–3 mode combination methods, 6–6 mode
extraction methods QR Damped, 6–3 mode numbers, 2–7 mode superposition harmonic
response analysis, 4–24 mode-extraction methods, 4–25 transient dynamic analysis,
5–13 mode superposition method, 4–3, 5–2 mode superposition transient dynamic
analysis obtain the modal solution, 5–13 obtain the mode superposition transient
solution, 5–14 mode-extraction methods, 3–3, 3–16 Block Lanczos, 3–3, 3–17, 4–25
damped, 3–3, 3–18 power dynamics, 3–3, 3–18 QR Damped, 3–3, 3–19, 4–25, 4–25, 5–
13, 5–14 reduced, 3–3, 3–18 subspace, 3–3, 3–18 unsymmetric, 3–3, 3–18 mode-
frequency analysis, 3–1 model geometry defining, 14–4 modeling the crack region,
11–1 modes expanding, 3–8 number of, 3–8 number to expand, 3–4 number to extract,
3–4 Mohr-Coulomb, 8–10 MONITOR command changes from SOLCONTROL, 8–56 Mooney-Rivlin
constants, 8–21 MPRS analysis, 6–25 multi-point response spectrum, 6–1 multilinear
elastic, 8–8 multilinear elasticity, 8–16 multilinear isotropic hardening, 8–10
multilinear kinematic hardening, 8–10 Newton-Raphson option, 2–6 Newton-Raphson
options, 8–54 nodal coordinate systems p-method, 14–7 nodal forces and moments, 2–
11 nodal solution listing format, 4–21 nonlinear analysis tips and guidelines, 8–
64 nonlinear behavior causes, 8–1 nonlinear diagnostics, 8–65 nonlinear general
beam sections, 15–9 nonlinear isotropic hardening, 8–10 nonlinear kinematic
hardening, 8–10 nonlinear material properties material curve fitting, 9–1
nonlinear structural analysis automatic time stepping, 8–67 buckling, 7–2
conservative vs. nonconservative, 8–5 creep, 8–29 geometric nonlinearities, 8–6
hyperelasticity, 8–17 interpolation of results, 8–57 levels of operation, 8–2 load
directions, 8–6 material nonlinearities, 8–8 nonlinear elements, 8–63 overview, 8–
1 plasticity, 8–9 sample transient input, 8–62 swelling, 8–34 termination, 8–60
verifying results, 8–70 viscoelasticity, 8–33 viscoplasticity, 8–33 nonlinear
transient analysis procedure, 8–60 number of eigenvalues to be extracted, 7–5
number of harmonic solutions, 4–9 number of integration points per layer, 12–3
number of solutions to expand, 4–21
O
obtain the modal solution, 4–25 offsets for sections, 15–2, 16–1 OPNCONTROL
command changes through SOLCONTROL, 8–55 output, 8–70 database and results file,
2–2, 3–8, 4–10, 4–21, 5–7, 5–14, 5–24, 7–6, 8–50
N
natural frequencies, 3–10 Newton-Raphson, 8–2 Index–6
Index printed, 2–7, 3–8, 4–10, 4–21, 5–14, 5–14, 5–23, 5–24, 7–6, 8–56 output
control, 4–10, 5–14, 5–23, 7–6 output controls, 3–7, 3–8, 5–24, 7–5 sections, 15–
2, 16–1 POST1, 2–11, 4–11, 4–23, 4–27, 5–11, 5–25, 6–8, 6–22, 7–7, 8–57, 11–5, 13–
2 using, 4–12, 5–12 POST26, 2–11, 4–11, 4–21, 4–23, 4–27, 5–11, 5–23, 5–25, 6–23,
8–57 using, 4–11, 5–11 postprocessing fatigue, 13–1 for different analysis (see
reviewing results) power dynamics method, 3–3, 3–18 power spectral density (PSD),
6–2 predictor, 8–53 predictor-corrector option, 2–4, 8–53 preintegrated general
shell sections, 16–5 PRESOL command with p-elements, 14–14 pressure loads in a
large-deflection analysis, 8–6 prestress effects calculation, 2–6, 3–4, 7–4
prestressed analysis harmonic response, 4–28 mode superposition harmonic response,
4–29 transient, 5–32 prestressed full transient dynamic analysis procedure, 5–32
prestressed harmonic response analysis procedure, 4–28 prestressed modal analysis,
3–15 prestressed modal analysis of a large deflection, 3–15 prestressed mode
superposition harmonic response analysis procedure, 4–29 prestressed mode
superposition transient dynamic analysis procedure, 5–33 prestressed reduced
transient dynamic analysis procedure, 5–33 printed output, 2–7, 4–10, 4–21, 5–14,
5–14, 5–23, 5–24, 7–6, 8–56 printing and plotting node and element results p-
method, 14–14 PRNSOL command with p-elements, 14–14 probabilistic analysis, 6–2
program-selected masters, 3–22 proportional limit, 8–9 PSD analysis, 6–18 PSD
type, 6–18 PSD-versus-frequency table, 6–18
P
p-elements meshing, 14–4 real constants, 14–3 p-level error-estimation range, 14–2
error-estimation techniques, 14–2 p-method, 14–1 benefits of, 14–1 guidelines for
meshing, 14–5 internal DOFs, 14–7 load step options, 14–7 loads, 14–7 meshing the
model, 14–4 p-element subgrid, 14–12 printing and plotting results, 14–14 querying
subgrid results, 14–12, 14–13 reviewing results, 14–12 solving common problems,
14–12 specialized displays and listings, 14–14 status of elements, 14–7 use of
solvers, 14–7 using, 14–1 viewing the element model, 14–5 participation factor
calculations, 3–7, 6–18 Peirce model, 8–33 Perzyna model, 8–33 phase angle for
expansion, 4–21 phase angle of harmonic loads, 4–5 plastic, 8–8 plasticity, 8–9,
8–68 anisotropic, 8–10 automatic time stepping, 8–9 bilinear isotropic hardening,
8–10 bilinear kinematic hardening, 8–10 cast iron, 8–10 Drucker-Prager, 8–10 Hill
anisotropic, 8–10 multilinear isotropic hardening, 8–10 multilinear kinematic
hardening, 8–10 nonlinear isotropic hardening, 8–10 nonlinear kinematic hardening,
8–10 rate-dependent, 8–33 plastics, 8–33 PLNSOL command with p-elements, 14–14
plotting
Index–7
Index
Q
QR Damped extraction method harmonic analysis, 4–25 QR Damped method gap
conditions, 5–14 harmonic analysis, 4–25 modal analysis, 3–3, 3–19 spectrum
analysis, 6–3 transient analysis, 5–13, 5–14
R
ramped loads, 4–9, 5–7, 5–14, 5–23, 8–60 random vibrations, 6–18 and power
spectral density, 6–2 range counting, 13–9 ratcheting effect, 8–10 rate-dependent
plasticity , 8–33 ratio creep, 8–55 Rayleigh damping constants, 5–36 reaction
forces and moments, 2–11 reading user-defined mesh, 15–2 real constants for
layered elements, 12–3 reduced (Householder) method, 3–3 reduced analysis (see
matrix reduction) reduced harmonic response analysis expand the solution, 4–21
reduced method, 3–18, 4–2, 5–3 reduced transient dynamic analysis expansion pass,
5–24 load step options, 5–21 obtain the reduced solution, 5–19 review results of
expanded solution, 5–25 reference temperature, 2–7 relative stress distributions
buckling analysis, 7–7 response PSD calculating, 6–23 response spectrum multi-
point, 6–1 single-point, 6–1 type, 6–3 restart control, 2–4 restarts, 8–63 results
data from a PSD analysis, 6–22 extrapolation of, 2–7, 4–10, 4–21, 5–24, 8–56
results file output, 2–2, 3–8, 4–10, 4–21, 5–7, 5–14, 5–24, 7–6, 8–50 reviewing
results Index–8
eigenvalue buckling, 7–7 fatigue, 13–9 harmonic response analysis, 4–11, 4–21, 4–
27 full method, 4–11 mode superposition method, 4–27 reduced method, 4–21 modal
analysis, 3–10 nonlinear static structural, 8–57 nonlinear transient structural,
8–62 reduced harmonic analysis, 4–23 spectrum analysis, 6–8, 6–22 PSD, 6–22
single-point, 6–8 static structural analysis, 2–10 transient dynamic analysis, 5–
11, 5–18, 5–23 full method, 5–11 mode superposition method, 5–18 reduced method,
5–23 Rice's model, 8–10 rock, 8–10 rolling, 8–33 rubber, 8–17
S
sample buckling analysis command method, 7–12 GUI method, 7–8 sample harmonic
response analysis command method, 4–18 GUI method, 4–13 sample input fatigue, 13–9
full transient dynamic analysis, 5–12 harmonic response analysis, 4–23, 4–27 mode
superposition method, 4–27 reduced method, 4–23 mode superposition transient
analysis, 5–18 nonlinear structural, 8–62 transient, 8–62 spectrum analysis, 6–24
PSD, 6–24 transient dynamic analysis, 5–18 mode superposition method, 5–18 sample
modal analysis command method, 3–13 GUI method, 3–12 sample nonlinear analysis
command method, 8–79 GUI method, 8–72 sample p-method analysis command method, 14–
18 GUI method, 14–14
Index sample spectrum analysis command method, 6–16 GUI method, 6–10 sample static
analysis command method, 2–24 GUI method, 2–13 sample transient dynamic analysis
command method, 5–31 GUI method, 5–26 sandwich structures, 12–4 scaling the load
vector, 4–25 .SECT file, 15–6 sections, 15–1, 16–1 associating subtypes with IDs,
15–2, 16–1 creating, 15–2, 15–5, 16–1 beam tool, 15–5 defining dimensions, 15–2,
16–1 geometry data of, 15–3, 16–2 libraries of, 15–12, 16–5 meshing a line for,
15–4 solid, 15–3 thin wall, 15–3 shakedown effect, 8–10 shape memory alloy, 8–31
SHELL command with p-elements, 14–14 shells, 16–1 preintegrated general sections,
16–5 shift point for eigenvalue calculation, 7–5 significant modes expanding, 6–6
single solution to expand, 5–24 single-point response spectrum, 6–1 acceleration
response, 6–6 CQC mode combination method, 6–6 displacement response, 6–6 DSUM
mode combination method, 6–6 expanding significant modes, 6–6 GRP mode combination
method, 6–6 mode combination methods, 6–6 NRLSUM mode combination method, 6–6
procedure, 6–2 SRSS mode combination method, 6–6 velocity response, 6–6 single-
point spectrum analysis load step option for, 6–3 singular elements, 11–1 slave
DOF, 3–20 small deflection, 8–6 small strain analyses, 8–6 S-N curve, 13–2 soil,
8–10 solid sections, 15–3 solution obtain the mode superposition transient
solution, 5–14 solution controls, 8–48 solution controls dialog box full transient
analysis, 5–6, 5–6, 5–6 defining analysis type and options, 5–6 static analysis,
2–2 solution listing format, 4–4 solution method harmonic response, 4–4 solution
methods, 4–2, 5–2 full, 4–2, 5–2 transient dynamic analysis, 4–2 mode
superposition, 4–3, 5–2 reduced, 4–2, 5–3 solution termination, 2–5 solutions to
be expanded, 5–24 solver, memory saving option, 8–50 solvers equation, 2–4, 8–50,
14–7 sparse direct solver, 4–4 specifying a p-level range, 14–2 specifying mesh
controls, 14–4 spectral-value-versus-frequency curve, 6–3 spectrum, 6–1 spectrum
analysis, 5–36, 6–1, 6–1 DDAM, 6–25 multi-point, 6–25 PSD, 6–18, 6–24 procedure,
6–18 sample input, 6–24 random vibration (PSD), 6–18 obtain the spectrum solution,
6–18 single-point, 6–2 procedure, 6–2 single-point response, 6–3, 6–3, 6–6 expand
the modes, 6–6 obtain the modal solution, 6–3 obtain the spectrum solution, 6–3
spectrum data, 6–18 spectrum solution random vibration (PSD) analysis, 6–18
single-point response spectrum analysis, 6–3 spectrum type single-point response,
6–3 spin softening, 8–8 stability analysis, 7–1 static solution buckling analysis,
7–4 static structural analysis, 2–1
Index–9
Index loading, 2–8 procedure, 2–1 stepped loads, 4–9, 5–7, 5–14, 5–23, 8–60
stiffness matrix memory saving option, 8–50 strain creep, 8–29 strain energy, 11–6
strain rate creep, 8–29 strain rate effect, 2–4 stress calculations, 3–8, 4–21
stress concentration factors, 13–2 stress intensity factors, 11–1, 11–5 stress
pass (see expansion pass) stress relaxation, 8–29 stress singularities accounting
for in p-method, 14–7 PEXCLUDE command, 14–7 PINCLUDE command, 14–7 stress
stiffening, 8–7 stress stiffening effects, 2–5, 5–32, 8–54 structural analyses
buckling, 7–1 fatigue, 13–1 harmonic response, 4–1 modal, 3–1 nonlinear, 8–1
spectrum, 6–1 static, 2–1 transient dynamic, 5–1 structural analysis, 1–1 element
types, 1–2 nonlinear, 8–1 structural energy error estimation, 2–11 STURM number,
3–7 subgrid results, 14–13 subspace method, 3–3, 3–18 substeps, 8–2, 8–5, 8–50
swelling, 8–8, 8–34 swelling subroutine, 8–34 time step optimization thermal, 8–55
time steps, 8–2, 8–5, 8–6, 8–50 automatic, 2–2, 5–7, 5–35, 7–2, 8–51 number of, 2–
2, 5–7, 8–67, 8–68 size of, 2–2, 5–7, 8–67 TOLER [CNVTOL], 8–51 transient dynamic
analysis, 5–1 full method, 5–3 procedure, 5–3 load step options for, 5–10 methods
of solution, 5–2 mode superposition method, 5–13 procedure, 5–13 preparing for, 5–
1 prestressed, 5–32 reduced method, 5–19, 5–19 procedure, 5–19 reduced solution,
5–19 transient integration parameters, 5–7, 5–14, 5–22, 8–60 true strain, 8–7 true
stress, 8–7, 8–7 Tsai-Wu failure criterion, 12–5
U
unsymmetric method, 3–3, 3–18 user defined material, 8–16 user mesh files, 15–12
USERSW, 8–34
V
vector displays, 2–11, 6–8 vector norms, 8–51 vector plots, 4–12 vibration
analysis, 3–1 virtual crack extension method, 11–8 viscoelastic material curve
fitting, 9–15 viscoelasticity, 8–8, 8–33 element types, 8–33 viscoplasticity, 8–8,
8–33, 8–33 element types, 8–33 large strain, 8–33 Voce hardening law, 8–10
T
TABLE array parameters, 2–8 tabular listings, 2–11, 3–12, 4–12, 6–8, 8–57 tapered
beams, 15–8 termination solution, 2–5 thin wall sections, 15–3 time, 5–23, 5–32
arc-length, 8–68 time integration effects, 5–7, 5–32, 8–60, 8–60 Index–10
W
wave propagation effects, 5–33 writing user mesh, 15–2
Y
yield point, 8–9

Ansys Structural Analysis Guide

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Ansys Structural Analysis Guide

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

ANSYS Structural Analysis Guide

ANSYS Release 9.0

002114 November 2004

ANSYS, Inc. is a UL registered ISO 9001: 2000 Company.

ANSYS, Inc. Southpointe 275 Technology Drive Canonsburg, PA 15317

1.2. Types of Structural Analysis

1.3. Elements Used in Structural Analyses

Table 1.1 Structural Element Types

1.4. Material Model Interface

1.5. Types of Solution Methods

2.2. Linear vs. Nonlinear Static Analyses

2.3. Performing a Static Analysis

2.3.1. Build the Model

2.3.1.1. Points to Remember

2.3.2. Set Solution Controls

2.3.2.1. Access the Solution Controls Dialog Box

2.3.2.2. Using the Basic Tab

Table 2.1 Basic Tab Options

Section 2.7.4: Output Controls in the ANSYS Basic Analysis Guide

Special considerations for setting these options in a static analysis include: •

2.3.2.3. The Transient Tab

2.3.2.4. Using the Sol'n Options Tab

Table 2.2 Sol'n Options Tab Options

Specify parameters for multiframe restart [RESCONTROL]

Special considerations for setting these options in a static analysis include: •

2.3.2.5. Using the Nonlinear Tab

Table 2.3 Nonlinear Tab Options

2.3.2.6. Using the Advanced NL Tab

Table 2.4 Advanced NL Tab Options

2.3.3. Set Additional Solution Options

2.3.3.1. Stress Stiffening Effects

Including stress stiffness terms, in general, accelerates nonlinear convergence

2.3.3.2. Newton-Raphson Option

2.3.3.3. Prestress Effects Calculation

2.3.3.4. Mass Matrix Formulation

2.3.3.5. Reference Temperature

2.3.3.6. Mode Number

2.3.3.7. Creep Criteria

2.3.3.8. Printed Output

2.3.3.9. Extrapolation of Results

2.3.4. Apply the Loads

2.3.4.1. Load Types

2.3.4.1.1. Displacements (UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ)

2.3.4.1.3. Pressures (PRES)

2.3.4.1.4. Temperatures (TEMP)

2.3.4.1.5. Fluences (FLUE)

2.3.4.1.6. Gravity, Spinning, Etc.

2.3.4.2. Apply Loads to the Model

Table 2.5 Loads Applicable in a Static Analysis

2.3.4.2.1. Applying Loads Using TABLE Type Array Parameters

2.3.4.3. Calculating Inertia Relief

2.3.4.3.1. Inertia Relief Output

2.3.4.3.2. Partial Inertia Relief Calculations

! Generate model, define density

! Specify only minimum no. of constraints ! Other loads ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Activates

2.3.4.3.3. Using a Macro to Perform Inertia Relief Calculations

2.3.5. Solve the Analysis

2.3.6. Review the Results

2.3.6.2. Points to Remember

2.3.6.3. Reviewing Results Data

2.3.6.4. Typical Postprocessing Operations

2.4. A Sample Static Analysis (GUI Method)

2.4.1. Problem Description